PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset

Management 9.1 PeopleBook

November 2009
PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Management 9.1 PeopleBook
SKU fscm91pbr0

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.

Trademark Notice
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their
respective owners.

License Restrictions Warranty/Consequential Damages Disclaimer

This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and
disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws. Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or
allowed by law, you may not use, copy, reproduce, translate, broadcast, modify, license, transmit, distribute, exhibit,
perform, publish or display any part, in any form, or by any means. Reverse engineering, disassembly, or decompilation
of this software, unless required by law for interoperability, is prohibited.

Warranty Disclaimer
The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error-free. If you find
any errors, please report them to us in writing.

Restricted Rights Notice

If this software or related documentation is delivered to the U.S. Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U.S.
Government, the following notice is applicable:
U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS
Programs, software, databases, and related documentation and technical data delivered to U.S. Government
customers are "commercial computer software" or "commercial technical data" pursuant to the applicable
Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency-specific supplemental regulations. As such, the use, duplication,
disclosure, modification, and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the
applicable Government contract, and, to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract, the
additional rights set forth in FAR 52.227-19, Commercial Computer Software License (December 2007).
Oracle USA, Inc., 500 Oracle Parkway, Redwood City, CA 94065.

Hazardous Applications Notice

This software is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications. It is not developed or
intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications, including applications which may create a risk of personal
injury. If you use this software in dangerous applications, then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail-safe,
backup, redundancy and other measures to ensure the safe use of this software. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates
disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software in dangerous applications.

Third Party Content, Products, and Services Disclaimer

This software and documentation may provide access to or information on content, products and services from third
parties. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind
with respect to third party content, products and services. Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for
any loss, costs, or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third party content, products or services.
 Contents

Preface

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Management Preface .................................................................................. xix

PeopleSoft Products ...................................................................................................................................... xix

PeopleSoft Application Fundamentals .......................................................................................................... xx
Pages With Deferred Processing .................................................................................................................... xx
PeopleBooks and the Online PeopleSoft Library .......................................................................................... xx
Common Elements Used in This PeopleBook ............................................................................................. xxi

Chapter 1

Getting Started With PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Management ............................................................. 1

PeopleSoft Asset Management Overview ....................................................................................................... 1

PeopleSoft Asset Management Business Processes ........................................................................................ 2
PeopleSoft Asset Management Integration Touchpoints ................................................................................ 3
Enabling ChartField Security for PeopleSoft Asset Management ................................................................... 5
Implementing PeopleSoft Asset Management ................................................................................................ 5

Chapter 2

Navigating in PeopleSoft Asset Management ............................................................................................ 15

Using Custom Navigation Center Pages in PeopleSoft Asset Management ................................................ 15

Pages Used to Navigate in PeopleSoft Asset Management ................................................................... 15

Chapter 3

Implementing Asset Management .............................................................................................................. 27

Understanding Asset Management ................................................................................................................ 27

Understanding the Asset Management Implementation Process ................................................................... 28

Chapter 4

Converting to PeopleSoft Asset Management ........................................................................................... 31

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. iii
Contents

Understanding Conversion to PeopleSoft Asset Management ..................................................................... 31

Prerequisites .................................................................................................................................................. 32
Converting with a Customized SQR ............................................................................................................. 33
Running the Transaction Loader Edit Program ............................................................................................ 34
Pages Used to Run the Transaction Loader Edit Program ...................................................................... 35
Using the Transaction Loader Edit Page ................................................................................................. 35
Viewing the Results of the Transaction Edit Program ........................................................................... 36
Previewing and Approving Results ............................................................................................................... 36
Populating Asset Management Tables with Asset Data ............................................................................... 37
Using Transaction Loader Conversion Dates Options ........................................................................... 37
Depreciating Converted Assets ..................................................................................................................... 38
Closing the Conversion Process ..................................................................................................................... 38
Page Used to Close the Conversion Process ........................................................................................... 39
Verifying the Conversion ....................................................................................................................... 39
Restoring Disk Space ............................................................................................................................. 39
Updating Security ................................................................................................................................... 40
Loading Retired Assets ................................................................................................................................. 40
Considerations for Retiring Assets .......................................................................................................... 40
Populating Loader Tables ........................................................................................................................ 41
Reviewing Retired Asset Data ............................................................................................................... 41
Converting Lease Information ...................................................................................................................... 43
Pages Used to Convert Lease Information .............................................................................................. 44

Chapter 5

Adding and Maintaining Assets .................................................................................................................. 45

Understanding Adding and Maintaining Assets ........................................................................................... 45

Adding and Maintaining Asset Information ................................................................................................. 48
Pages Used to Add or Change Asset Information .................................................................................. 49
Adding Asset Basic Information ............................................................................................................. 52
Entering Asset Details ............................................................................................................................ 62
Entering Asset Acquisition Details ......................................................................................................... 68
Viewing Asset Tax Information ............................................................................................................. 72
Entering Document Sequencing Information ......................................................................................... 72
Entering Location, Comments, and Attributes Information ................................................................... 73
Entering Custodial, License, and Manufacturer Information ................................................................. 75
Entering Property Assets ........................................................................................................................ 77
Entering Property Taxes ......................................................................................................................... 80
Entering Asset Supplemental Data ......................................................................................................... 81
Maintaining Asset Meters ............................................................................................................................. 82
Understanding Asset Meters ................................................................................................................... 82
Pages Used to Maintain Asset Meters ..................................................................................................... 82
Associating Meters with Assets ............................................................................................................. 83

iv Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
 Contents

Entering Meter Readings ........................................................................................................................ 85

Reviewing Meter Reading History ......................................................................................................... 87
Maintaining Warranties ................................................................................................................................. 88
Understanding Asset Warranties ............................................................................................................. 88
Pages Used to Maintain Asset Warranties .............................................................................................. 88
Maintaining Asset Book Information ........................................................................................................... 89
Pages Used to Maintain Asset Book Information .................................................................................. 89
Identifying Asset Books and Other Depreciation Information ............................................................... 90
Adding Global Attributes ....................................................................................................................... 96
Adding Tax Information for the Book .................................................................................................... 97
Adding Assets with the Asset ExpressAdd Component ............................................................................. 100
Pages Used to Add Assets with the Asset ExpressAdd Component .................................................... 101
Capitalizing Assets ............................................................................................................................... 101
Copying an Asset ........................................................................................................................................ 106
Page Used to Copy an Asset ................................................................................................................ 106
Copying an Asset ................................................................................................................................. 106
Viewing and Managing the Component Asset Hierarchy .......................................................................... 108
Understanding Component Asset Hierarchies ...................................................................................... 108
Pages Used to View and Manage the Asset Component Hierarchy ...................................................... 108
Viewing the Asset Component Hierarchy ............................................................................................ 109
Managing the Asset Component Hierarchy .......................................................................................... 110
Creating Parent-Child Asset Relationships ................................................................................................. 114
Understanding Parent-Child Asset Relationships ................................................................................. 115
Pages Used to Create Parent-Child Asset Relationships ...................................................................... 115
Creating an Asset Parent ...................................................................................................................... 116
Viewing Child Assets ........................................................................................................................... 116
Adding Parent and Child Component Assets ....................................................................................... 117
Using the Child Inherits Life of Parent Feature ................................................................................... 117
Updating Parent-Child Basic Information ............................................................................................ 118
Selecting Child Assets .......................................................................................................................... 118
Viewing Parent and Child Assets ......................................................................................................... 120
Calculating Asset Replacement Costs ........................................................................................................ 120
Understanding Asset Replacement Cost ............................................................................................... 120
Page Used to Calculate Replacement Cost ........................................................................................... 120
Defining Asset Operational Information ..................................................................................................... 120
Pages Used to Add and Maintain Asset Operational Information ........................................................ 121
Adding Operational Nonfinancial Assets ............................................................................................. 122
Searching for Asset Information ................................................................................................................. 124
Page Used to Search for Asset Information ......................................................................................... 124
Searching for an Asset .......................................................................................................................... 124
Printing Asset Information .......................................................................................................................... 127
Page Used to Print Asset Information ................................................................................................... 127
Adding Assets with the Excel to Component Interface Utility ................................................................... 128
Understanding How to Import Asset Information with the Excel to Component Interface Utility ..... 128
Pages Used to Add Assets with the Excel to Component Interface Utility .......................................... 129

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. v
Contents

Entering Data to Import Assets ............................................................................................................. 129

Previewing the Data to Be Imported Through a Spreadsheet ............................................................... 131

Chapter 6

Working with Asset Budgeting ................................................................................................................. 133

Understanding Asset Budgeting ................................................................................................................. 133

Understanding Capital Acquisition Planning .............................................................................................. 133
Defining New Capital Acquisition Plans .................................................................................................... 134
Pages Used to Define New Capital Acquisition Plans .......................................................................... 134
Assigning Capital Acquisition Plan Name and ChartFields ................................................................ 135
Adjusting Capital Acquisition Plans ........................................................................................................... 137
Linking Assets to Existing Capital Acquisition Plans ................................................................................ 137
Viewing Capital Acquisition Plans ............................................................................................................. 137
Pages Used to View Capital Acquisition Plans ..................................................................................... 138
Running Capital Acquisition Plan Reports ................................................................................................. 139
Page Used to Run Capital Acquisition Plan Reports ............................................................................ 139

Chapter 7

Working With Leased Assets ................................................................................................................... 141

Understanding Leased Assets ..................................................................................................................... 141

Capital and Operating Leases ............................................................................................................... 141
Step Leases ........................................................................................................................................... 142
Lease Payment Integration with PeopleSoft Payables ......................................................................... 143
Defining Payment Schedules ....................................................................................................................... 143
Page Used to Define Payment Schedules .............................................................................................. 144
Defining Lease Payment Schedules ..................................................................................................... 144
Adding Capital and Operating Leases ........................................................................................................ 146
Pages Used to Add Capital and Operating Leases ................................................................................ 146
Creating a Lease ................................................................................................................................... 147
(Optional) Entering Information About Cost, ChartFields, and Depreciation ..................................... 156
Viewing or Updating a Step-Lease Payment Schedule (Optional) ...................................................... 157
Viewing or Updating a Lease Payment Schedule ................................................................................ 158
Creating Lease Expense Schedules ............................................................................................................. 159
Page Used to Run the Lease Expense Schedule Process ....................................................................... 160
Running the Lease Expense Schedule Process .................................................................................... 161
Integrating Lease Payments with PeopleSoft Payables .............................................................................. 161
Page Used to Integrate Asset Management Lease Payments with PeopleSoft Payables ...................... 162
Enabling the Lease Payment Integration .............................................................................................. 162
Setting Up Clearing Accounts .............................................................................................................. 163
Setting Up Lease Payment Integration Information by Asset .............................................................. 164

vi Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
 Contents

Reviewing and Approving Lease Payment Information ...................................................................... 165

Uploading Lease Payments to Payables ............................................................................................... 167
Running the AP/AM Reconciliation Report ........................................................................................ 169
Transferring Operating Leases ..................................................................................................................... 169
Page Used to Transfer Operating Leases .............................................................................................. 170
Transferring an Operating Lease .......................................................................................................... 170
Retiring or Reinstating Leases .................................................................................................................... 170
Generating Lease Reports ........................................................................................................................... 171
Pages Used to Generate Lease Reports ................................................................................................. 171

Chapter 8

Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets ..................................................................................... 173

Understanding Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets .................................................................. 173

Adjusting Cost and Transferring Assets ..................................................................................................... 174
Understanding Cost Adjustments and Asset Transfers ......................................................................... 174
Pages Used to Adjust Cost and Transfer Assets ................................................................................... 175
Defining Asset Transactions ................................................................................................................. 176
Entering Cost Information for Transactions .......................................................................................... 179
Specifying Transfer To/From Books Information ............................................................................... 186
Marking Assets Up or Down ................................................................................................................ 189
Selecting a Child Asset for Adjustment or Transfer ............................................................................ 189
Entering Child Asset Details ................................................................................................................ 190
Adding Advanced Transaction Details ................................................................................................ 191
Transferring Parent-Child Assets to Other Business Units (Interunit Transfers) In Mass .......................... 192
Page Used to Transfer Parent-Child Assets to Other Business Units In Mass ..................................... 192
Transferring Parent-Child Assets from One Business Unit to Another ................................................ 192
Revaluing Assets Using the Revaluation Worksheet .................................................................................. 194
Page Used to Revalue Assets Using the Revaluation Worksheet ......................................................... 194
Revaluing Assets Using the Revaluation Worksheet ............................................................................ 194
Revaluing Assets In Mass ........................................................................................................................... 203
Page Used to Revalue Assets In Mass .................................................................................................. 204
Revaluing Assets Using Mass Revaluation ........................................................................................... 204
Capturing and Maintaining Asset Fair Value (FV) ...................................................................................... 205
Page Used to Capture and Maintain Asset FV ...................................................................................... 206
Capturing and Maintaining Asset FV .................................................................................................... 206
Updating Noncapitalized Costs .................................................................................................................... 208
Page Used to Update Noncapitalized Costs .......................................................................................... 208
Viewing Cost History and Summarizing Cost Rows .................................................................................. 208
Understanding Cost History .................................................................................................................. 208
Understanding Cost Summarization ...................................................................................................... 208
Pages Used to View Cost History and Summarize Cost Rows ............................................................. 209
Generating Cost Summarizations ......................................................................................................... 210

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. vii
Contents

Updating the General Ledger with Adjustments and Transfers .................................................................. 211
Modifying or Deleting Pending Asset Transactions ................................................................................... 211
Pages Used to Modify or Delete Pending Asset Transactions .............................................................. 212
Modifying or Deleting Pending Transactions ...................................................................................... 212
Viewing Asset Transaction Details ...................................................................................................... 212
Updating Transaction Information ....................................................................................................... 213
Adjusting for Asset Impairment .................................................................................................................. 213
Understanding Impairment Testing ....................................................................................................... 214
Pages Used to Make Impairment Adjustments ..................................................................................... 215
Working With the Impairment Worksheet ........................................................................................... 216
Running the CGU Impairment Batch Process ...................................................................................... 222
View and Report Impairment Losses and Reversals ............................................................................ 226

Chapter 9

Managing Asset Maintenance, Repair, Warranties, and Insurance ..................................................... 229

Understanding Asset Maintenance, Repair, Warranties, and Insurance ...................................................... 229

Checking Out Assets ................................................................................................................................... 231
Page Used to Check Out Assets ............................................................................................................ 231
Checking Assets Out for Maintenance Events ...................................................................................... 231
Entering Asset Inspection Information ....................................................................................................... 233
Page Used to Enter Asset Inspection Information ................................................................................ 233
Entering Asset Maintenance Service and Repairs ...................................................................................... 233
Pages Used to Enter Asset Service and Repair ..................................................................................... 233
Describing Maintenance Events ........................................................................................................... 234
Entering Statistical Information for Repairs ......................................................................................... 236
Entering Payment Information ............................................................................................................. 238
Tracking Asset Maintenance Contracts ...................................................................................................... 238
Understanding Asset Maintenance Contracts ....................................................................................... 239
Pages Used to Track Asset Maintenance Contracts .............................................................................. 239
Adding or Modifying Maintenance Contracts ...................................................................................... 239
Adding Maintenance Contract Terms .................................................................................................. 240
Entering Warranty Information ................................................................................................................... 240
Prerequisites .......................................................................................................................................... 240
Pages Used to Enter Warranty Information .......................................................................................... 240
Entering Warranty Information ............................................................................................................ 241
Applying Warranties from Template .................................................................................................... 242
Entering Asset Insurance Information ........................................................................................................ 242
Prerequisites .......................................................................................................................................... 243
Page Used to Set Up Asset Insurance Information ............................................................................... 243
Setting Up Asset Insurance .................................................................................................................. 243
Generating the Asset Warranties Report ..................................................................................................... 246
Page Used to Generate the Asset Warranty Report ............................................................................... 246

viii Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
 Contents

Reviewing Asset Maintenance History ....................................................................................................... 246

Page Used to View Asset Maintenance History Summaries ................................................................. 247

Chapter 10

Using Group Asset Processing .................................................................................................................. 249

Understanding Group Asset Processing ...................................................................................................... 249

Asset Transactions ................................................................................................................................. 250
Depreciated Group Assets .................................................................................................................... 250
Retired Group Members ....................................................................................................................... 250
Strategy for Asset Grouping ................................................................................................................. 251
Prerequisites ................................................................................................................................................ 252
Adding Group Member Assets ................................................................................................................... 252
Adding Group Member Assets with Background Processing .............................................................. 253
Adding Group Member Assets Online ................................................................................................. 254
Adding Group Asset IDs with Background Processing ............................................................................... 254
Performing Transactions on Group Member Assets ................................................................................... 256
Transferring Group Members Among Group Assets ........................................................................... 257
Consolidating Group Member Assets ......................................................................................................... 257
Understanding Consolidation of Group Member Assets ..................................................................... 257
Pages Used to Consolidate Group Member Assets ............................................................................... 258
Running the Group Asset Consolidation Process ................................................................................ 258
Calculating Depreciation for Group Assets ................................................................................................ 263
Page Used to Calculate Depreciation for Group Assets ........................................................................ 263
Running the Group Asset Depreciation Process .................................................................................. 264
Running the Group Member Estimated Net Book Value Report ............................................................... 264
Understanding the Estimated Net Book Value Calculation ................................................................. 264
Page Used to Run the Group Member Estimated Net Book Value Report ........................................... 265
Running the Group Member Estimated Net Book Value Report ......................................................... 265
Changing Rates Retroactively ..................................................................................................................... 266
Pages Used to Change Rates Retroactively .......................................................................................... 266
Processing Retroactive Rate Changes .................................................................................................. 266
Reviewing Asset Book History ................................................................................................................... 267
Pages Used to Review Asset Book History ......................................................................................... 267

Chapter 11

Using Composite Asset Processing ........................................................................................................... 269

Understanding Composite Asset Processing ............................................................................................... 269

Adding a Composite Asset .......................................................................................................................... 270
Adding Composite Member Assets ............................................................................................................ 271
Capitalizing Composite Members into Composite Assets .......................................................................... 271

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. ix
Contents

Retiring Composite Members from Composite Assets .............................................................................. 272

Loading Composite Asset Transactions ...................................................................................................... 272
Understanding the Effect of Capitalization into Composite ................................................................ 273
Understanding the Effect of Retirement from Composite ................................................................... 273
Performing Transactions on Composite Assets .......................................................................................... 273
Adjustments to Cost/Quantity .............................................................................................................. 274
Recategorizations and Transfers .......................................................................................................... 274

Chapter 12

Performing Asset Physical Inventory ....................................................................................................... 275

Understanding Physical Inventories ............................................................................................................ 275

Prerequisites .......................................................................................................................................... 275
Physical Inventory Processing Steps .................................................................................................... 275
Physical Inventory Terminology .......................................................................................................... 276
Hardware and Software for Physical Inventory Processing .................................................................. 277
Setting Up a Physical Inventory .................................................................................................................. 279
Page Used to Set Up a Physical Inventory ............................................................................................ 279
Setting Up a Physical Inventory ............................................................................................................ 280
Defining the Extract Scope, the Scan Scope, and the Physical Inventory Controls ................................... 280
Understanding Extract Scopes and Scan Scopes ................................................................................... 281
Pages Used to Define Extract Scopes, Scan Scopes, and Physical Inventory Controls ........................ 281
Defining the Extract Scope and the Scan Scope .................................................................................. 282
Defining Physical Inventory Control Parameters ................................................................................. 283
Defining the Physical Inventory Control Transaction Defaults ............................................................ 285
Setting Up Physical Inventory Schedule Information .......................................................................... 287
Processing a Physical Inventory ................................................................................................................. 288
Pages Used to Process Physical Inventory ............................................................................................ 289
Extracting Asset Data (Step 1) .............................................................................................................. 290
Viewing the Results of the Extract ....................................................................................................... 291
Creating an Extract File (Step 2) .......................................................................................................... 292
Loading Asset Inventory Data (Step 3) ................................................................................................ 293
Finding Duplicate Tags ........................................................................................................................ 293
Finding Duplicate Serial Numbers ....................................................................................................... 294
Generating Physical Inventory Results (Step 4) .................................................................................. 295
Reviewing Physical Inventory Results .................................................................................................. 296
Generating Physical Inventory Transactions (Step 5) .......................................................................... 298
Deleting Physical Inventory Transactions (Step 6) .............................................................................. 298
Deleting Physical Inventory Results (Step 7) ...................................................................................... 298
Deleting Physical Inventory Scanned Data (Step 8) ............................................................................ 298
Deleting an Extract File (Step 9) .......................................................................................................... 298
Viewing Physical Inventory History ........................................................................................................... 299
Pages Used to View Physical Inventory History .................................................................................. 299

x Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
 Contents

Chapter 13

Working with Joint Venture Asset Processing ........................................................................................ 301

Understanding Joint Venture Processing .................................................................................................... 301

Prerequisites for Joint Venture Processing ................................................................................................. 303
Adding and Maintaining Joint Venture Assets ........................................................................................... 304
Changing Ownership Allocations for Existing Joint Ventures ................................................................... 304
Defining a Mass Change for Joint Venture Processing ........................................................................ 305
Loading Joint Venture Transactions .................................................................................................... 307

Chapter 14

Processing Asset Depreciation .................................................................................................................. 309

Prerequisites ................................................................................................................................................. 309

Understanding Depreciation Processing ..................................................................................................... 310
Steps for Processing Depreciation ......................................................................................................... 311
Understanding Depreciation of Group Assets ............................................................................................. 313
Processing Depreciation .............................................................................................................................. 313
Understanding Depreciation Processing ............................................................................................... 314
Pages Used to Process Depreciation ..................................................................................................... 314
Running the Depreciation Calculation Process (AM_DEPR_CALC) ................................................. 314
Reviewing Open Transactions ............................................................................................................. 315
Changing Depreciation Attributes ........................................................................................................ 317
Reviewing the Depreciation Processing Error Log .............................................................................. 318
Expanding Depreciation by Period ............................................................................................................. 318
Page Used to Expand Depreciation by Period ...................................................................................... 319
Expanding the Depreciation Period ...................................................................................................... 319
Creating Pending Depreciation Transactions ............................................................................................... 319
Page Used to Create Pending Depreciation Transactions ..................................................................... 319
Creating Open Depreciation Transactions ........................................................................................... 319
Viewing Depreciation-Related Information ................................................................................................ 320
Pages Used to View Depreciation-Related Information ....................................................................... 320
Viewing Basic Asset Depreciation Information ................................................................................... 321
Viewing Net Book Value and Depreciation ......................................................................................... 322
Viewing Period Depreciation ............................................................................................................... 323
Viewing Child Asset Depreciation ....................................................................................................... 325
Adjusting Accumulated Depreciation .......................................................................................................... 326
Page Used to Adjust Accumulated Depreciation .................................................................................. 326
Running Depreciation Reports .................................................................................................................... 326
Understanding Depreciation Reports .................................................................................................... 326
Pages Used to Run Depreciation Reports ............................................................................................. 327

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. xi
Contents

Loading the Depreciation Reporting Table .......................................................................................... 327

Chapter 15

Using User-Defined Asset Depreciation ................................................................................................... 329

Understanding User-Defined Depreciation .................................................................................................. 329

Creating or Selecting Variables .................................................................................................................. 330
Page Used to Create or Select Variables ............................................................................................... 332
Creating or Selecting Variables ............................................................................................................ 332
Creating a User-Defined Depreciation Method .......................................................................................... 333
Pages Used to Create a User-Defined Depreciation Method ................................................................ 334
Entering the User-Defined Depreciation Method ................................................................................. 335
Generating a User-Defined Depreciation SQC Program ............................................................................ 337
Page Used to Generate a User-Defined Depreciation SQC Program .................................................... 337
Using the User Defined Method Generate Page .................................................................................. 338
Copying a User-Defined Depreciation Method .......................................................................................... 338
Page Used to Copy a User-Defined Depreciation Method .................................................................... 339
Copying a User-Defined Method ......................................................................................................... 339
Selecting a User-Defined Depreciation Method for an Asset ..................................................................... 340

Chapter 16

Reviewing Asset Depreciation Calculation Results ................................................................................. 341

Understanding What If Depreciation .......................................................................................................... 341

Performing What If Depreciation ................................................................................................................ 341
Pages Used to Perform What If Depreciation ....................................................................................... 342
Performing What If Depreciation .......................................................................................................... 342
Viewing What If Depreciation Results ................................................................................................ 343
Loading the Net Book Value Depreciation Results Into a Spreadsheet Program ....................................... 344
Page Used to Load the Net Book Value Depreciation Results into a Spreadsheet Program ................ 345
Loading Depreciation Results Into a Spreadsheet Program .................................................................. 345

Chapter 17

Allocating Asset Depreciation Expenses ................................................................................................. 347

Understanding the Depreciation Allocation Business Process ................................................................... 347

Processing Allocations With Fund Accounting .................................................................................... 347
Prerequisites ................................................................................................................................................. 348
Setting Up the Depreciation Allocation Business Process .......................................................................... 348
Pages Used to Set Up the Depreciation Allocation Business Process .................................................. 349
Entering the Allocation Basis Definition .............................................................................................. 349

xii Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
 Contents

Defining the Source and Destinations ................................................................................................... 350

Defining Allocations for Assets ............................................................................................................ 351
Performing the Depreciation Allocation Business Process .......................................................................... 353
Page Used to Run the Depreciation Allocation Business Process ........................................................ 353
Running the Depreciation Allocation Process ..................................................................................... 353

Chapter 18

Creating PeopleSoft Asset Management Accounting Entries ................................................................ 355

Prerequisites ................................................................................................................................................. 355

Understanding Asset Information Flow ...................................................................................................... 355
Understanding Accounting Entry Setup ..................................................................................................... 357
Business Unit and Book Accounting Entry Options ............................................................................. 357
Accounting Entry Templates ................................................................................................................ 358
Depreciation Close Status .................................................................................................................... 367
Creating Accounting Entries ....................................................................................................................... 367
Understanding the Depreciation Close Process ................................................................................... 367
Common Elements Used in This Section ............................................................................................. 369
Pages Used to Create Accounting Entries ............................................................................................. 370
Requesting Accounting Entry Creation ................................................................................................ 371
Running the Depreciation Close Process ............................................................................................. 371
Closing Accounting Periods ................................................................................................................. 373
Running the Clearing Reconciliation Process ...................................................................................... 373

Chapter 19

Retiring Assets ............................................................................................................................................ 375

Understanding Asset Retirement ................................................................................................................ 375

Retirement Types ................................................................................................................................. 375
Retiring Financial Assets ............................................................................................................................ 376
Pages Used to Retire Financial Assets .................................................................................................. 377
Retiring an Asset ................................................................................................................................... 379
Defining Other Retirement Options ..................................................................................................... 392
Selecting Retirement Transactions by ChartField ................................................................................. 393
Selecting Child Assets .......................................................................................................................... 394
Reviewing a Capital Gain Summary for Retirements .......................................................................... 398
Integrating Retired Asset Information with PeopleSoft Billing ........................................................... 398
Specifying How VAT Is Calculated for Asset Retirement .................................................................. 401
Auto-Retiring Fully Depreciated Assets .............................................................................................. 411
Initiating Asset Retirement Using the Disposal Worksheet ................................................................. 412
Putting Assets up for Auction .............................................................................................................. 416
Retiring Non-Financial Assets .................................................................................................................... 417

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. xiii
Contents

Page Used to Retire Non-Financial Assets ........................................................................................... 417

Retiring a Non-Financial Asset ............................................................................................................. 417
Reinstating Assets ....................................................................................................................................... 418
Understanding Reinstatement of Assets ................................................................................................ 418
Pages Used to Reinstate Assets ............................................................................................................. 419
Reinstating an Asset .............................................................................................................................. 419
Running the Tax Retirement Capital Gains Report (AMTX3210) ............................................................. 419
Prerequisites .......................................................................................................................................... 420
Pages Used to Run the Tax Retirement Capital Gains Report .............................................................. 420

Chapter 20

Processing Asset Mass Changes ................................................................................................................ 421

Understanding Mass Changes in Asset Management ................................................................................. 421

Defining Mass Changes .............................................................................................................................. 422
Pages Used to Define Mass Changes .................................................................................................... 423
Adding or Updating Mass Change Definitions ..................................................................................... 423
Specifying Mass Change Criteria and Defaults ................................................................................... 424
Specifying Mass Change Fields Specific to Asset Management ......................................................... 426
Generating Mass Change SQL Text ..................................................................................................... 427
Running Mass Changes ............................................................................................................................... 429
Page Used to Run Mass Changes .......................................................................................................... 429
Running Mass Changes ......................................................................................................................... 429
Verifying Data in the Loader Tables ........................................................................................................... 432
Pages Used to Verify Data in the Loader Tables .................................................................................. 432
Viewing Data in the Financial Loader Tables ...................................................................................... 433
Previewing Physical Load Data ........................................................................................................... 434
Approving Changes ..................................................................................................................................... 434
Pages Used to Approve Changes .......................................................................................................... 435
Approving Financial Loader Data ........................................................................................................ 435
Approving Physical Loader Data ......................................................................................................... 438
Populating Asset Management Tables with Mass Change Data ................................................................. 438
Page Used to Populate Asset Management Tables with Mass Change Data ........................................ 439
Populating Asset Management Tables Using the Transaction Loader Process ................................... 439
Depreciating Changed Assets ..................................................................................................................... 440
Reviewing Asset Management Mass Change Templates and Types .......................................................... 441
Understanding Mass Change Templates and Types ............................................................................. 441

Chapter 21

Using Asset Management Reporting Options ......................................................................................... 451

Understanding Asset Management Reporting Options ............................................................................... 451

xiv Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
 Contents

Prerequisites ................................................................................................................................................. 452

Using Flexible Reporting and Formats ........................................................................................................ 453
Pages Used to Run Reports With Format Templates ............................................................................ 453
Running Flexible Reporting and Formats ............................................................................................ 454
Using Online Reporting .............................................................................................................................. 457
Page Used to Generate Online Reports ................................................................................................. 458
Generating Online Reports ................................................................................................................... 458
Charting Financial Data .............................................................................................................................. 461
Page Used to Chart Financial Data ....................................................................................................... 461
Using Asset Management Financial Charts ......................................................................................... 461

Chapter 22

Using Asset Management Self Service Web Components ..................................................................... 465

Understanding Self Service Components in Asset Management ................................................................ 465

Security ................................................................................................................................................. 466
Asset Management Roles ..................................................................................................................... 466
Prerequisites to Using Self Service Web Components ............................................................................... 467
Using Self Service Application Pages ........................................................................................................ 467
Pages Used to Use Self Service Application Pages .............................................................................. 467
Using the Asset Self-Service Component ............................................................................................. 468

Chapter 23

Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management ................................................................ 469

Understanding PeopleSoft Asset Management in Global Settings .............................................................. 469

Prerequisites ................................................................................................................................................. 471
(AUS) Using PeopleSoft Asset Management Options to Meet Australian Requirements ......................... 475
Pages Used to Meet Australian Requirements ...................................................................................... 476
Defining Asset R&D Categorization .................................................................................................... 477
Using the Australian Tax Credit Allowance ........................................................................................ 478
Tracking Changes in CCP .................................................................................................................... 480
Reporting Changes in CCP .................................................................................................................. 481
Calculating CGT .................................................................................................................................. 482
Calculation of CGT .............................................................................................................................. 482
Generating Asset Revaluation (Net Method) ....................................................................................... 483
(CAN) Using Asset Management Options to Meet Canadian Requirements ............................................. 484
Pages Used to Meet Canadian Requirements ........................................................................................ 485
Calculating CCA Reporting ................................................................................................................. 485
Running the CCA Year-End Update Process ....................................................................................... 486
(FRA) Using PeopleSoft Asset Management Options to Meet French Requirements ............................... 486
Pages Used to Meet French Requirements ............................................................................................ 487

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. xv
Contents

Reporting Business Tax ....................................................................................................................... 487

Depreciating Assets by Using the Derogatory Method ........................................................................ 487
Revaluing Assets .................................................................................................................................. 489
Generating French Statutory Reports ................................................................................................... 489
(DEU) Using PeopleSoft Asset Management Options to Meet German Requirements ............................. 489
Pages Used to Meet German Requirements .......................................................................................... 490
Staffel Depreciation Method ................................................................................................................ 491
Using a Half-Year Prorate Convention ................................................................................................ 493
Using Geometric Digressive Depreciation ........................................................................................... 493
Processing Low-Value Assets .............................................................................................................. 494
Special Depreciation Terms and Methods ........................................................................................... 495
(IND) Using PeopleSoft Asset Management Options to Meet Indian Requirements ................................. 496
Understanding Asset Depreciation Processing for India ...................................................................... 496
Pages Used to Meet Indian Requirements ............................................................................................. 497
Processing India Tax Depreciation ...................................................................................................... 497
(ITA) Using PeopleSoft Asset Management Options to Meet Italian Requirements ................................. 501
Page Used to Meet Italian Requirements .............................................................................................. 502
Generating the Fixed-Asset Register for Italy ...................................................................................... 502
(JPN) Using PeopleSoft Asset Management Options to Meet Japanese Requirements ............................. 503
Prerequisites .......................................................................................................................................... 503
Pages Used to Meet Japanese Requirements ......................................................................................... 504
Using Japanese Depreciation Methods ................................................................................................ 506
Using the Extended Depreciation Worksheet ....................................................................................... 510
Using Special Depreciation and Increased Depreciation ..................................................................... 511
Using Advanced Depreciation ............................................................................................................. 512
Using Composite Depreciation ............................................................................................................ 513
Identifying Collateral Assets ................................................................................................................ 514
Using Currency Rounding Options ...................................................................................................... 515
Processing Local Tax Reports .............................................................................................................. 515
Entering Consumption Tax .................................................................................................................. 520

Chapter 24

Archiving Asset Information .................................................................................................................... 521

Understanding Archiving ............................................................................................................................ 521

Archiving Inactive Assets ........................................................................................................................... 522
Page Used to Archive Data ................................................................................................................... 522
Running the Asset Archive Process ..................................................................................................... 522
Viewing Archived Data .............................................................................................................................. 523
Pages Used to View Archived Data ...................................................................................................... 524
Restoring Archived Data ............................................................................................................................. 525
Page Used to Restore Archived Data .................................................................................................... 525
Running the Asset Restore Process ...................................................................................................... 525

xvi Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
 Contents

Archiving From Transaction Table Details .......................................................................................... 526

Appendix A

Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary ................................................................................. 531

Understanding the Loader Tables ............................................................................................................... 531

Loader Table INTFC_FIN .......................................................................................................................... 531
Loader Table INTFC_PHY_A .................................................................................................................... 564
Loader Table INTFC_PHY_B .................................................................................................................... 593
Transaction Loader Inserts .......................................................................................................................... 602
From INTFC_FIN ................................................................................................................................ 602
From INTFC_PHY_A .......................................................................................................................... 604
From INTFC_PHY_B .......................................................................................................................... 605
Interface Types (Load Types) ..................................................................................................................... 606

Appendix B

Understanding Depreciation Calculations .............................................................................................. 613

Understanding How PeopleSoft Asset Management Calculates Depreciation ............................................ 613

Salvage Value ....................................................................................................................................... 613
Tax Credits ........................................................................................................................................... 614
Listed Property Assets .......................................................................................................................... 615
The Depreciation Calculation Process ................................................................................................. 615
Calculating the Begin Depreciation Date .................................................................................................... 616
Overriding the Begin Depreciation Field .............................................................................................. 617
Calculating Remaining Value ..................................................................................................................... 617
Remaining Value Calculation for Add Transactions ............................................................................ 617
Life to Date Calculation for Add Transactions .................................................................................... 618
Calculating Yearly Depreciation ................................................................................................................. 619
Remaining Value Calculation for Add Transactions ........................................................................... 619
Life to Date Calculation for Add Transactions .................................................................................... 620
Calculating Period Allocation ..................................................................................................................... 621
Remaining Value Calculation for Add Transactions: Depreciate When In Service Off ....................... 622
Remaining Value Calculation for Add Transactions: Depreciate When In Service On ....................... 623
Life to Date Calculations for Add Transactions: Depreciate When in Service Off ............................. 624
Life to Date Calculation for Add Transactions: Calculate When in Service On .................................. 625
Calculating Prior Period Depreciation ........................................................................................................ 626
Case 1: Add Transactions ...................................................................................................................... 626
Case 2: Add Transactions ...................................................................................................................... 628
Case 3: Add Transactions ...................................................................................................................... 629
Case 4: Add Transactions ...................................................................................................................... 630
Case 5: Add Transactions ...................................................................................................................... 632

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. xvii
Contents

Formula-Based Depreciation Methods ....................................................................................................... 633

Straight Line ......................................................................................................................................... 634
(IND) Straight Line Percent ................................................................................................................. 635
Declining Balance with a Switch to Straight Line ............................................................................... 640
Declining Balance with Depreciation Limit ......................................................................................... 641
Declining Balance ................................................................................................................................ 642
Flat Rate ............................................................................................................................................... 643
Sum of the Years' Digits ....................................................................................................................... 645
Calculating Depreciation When Salvage Value Exceeds Net Book Value (NBV) .................................... 647
Stop Depreciation When Salvage Value Exceeds NBV ....................................................................... 647
Allow Negative Depreciation ................................................................................................................ 649

Appendix C

PeopleSoft Asset Management Reports ................................................................................................... 653

PeopleSoft Asset Management Reports: A to Z ......................................................................................... 653

Asset Set Up Lists ................................................................................................................................ 654
Transaction Reports .............................................................................................................................. 654
Capital Acquisition Planning Reports .................................................................................................. 656
Depreciation Reports ............................................................................................................................ 656
Impairment Reports .............................................................................................................................. 658
Account Activity Reports ..................................................................................................................... 658
Accounting Entry Reports .................................................................................................................... 659
Physical Inventory Reports .................................................................................................................. 660
Lease Reports ....................................................................................................................................... 661
Retirement Reports ............................................................................................................................... 662
U.S. Tax Reports .................................................................................................................................. 663
Global Reports ...................................................................................................................................... 665

Index ............................................................................................................................................................ 671

xviii Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
 PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Management
Preface
This preface discusses:

• PeopleSoft application fundamentals.

• Pages with deferred processing.

• Common elements in this PeopleBook.

Note. This PeopleBook documents only page elements that require additional explanation. If a page element
is not documented with the process or task in which it is used, then it either requires no additional explanation
or is documented with the common elements for the section, chapter, or PeopleBook.

PeopleSoft Products
This PeopleBook makes reference to these products:

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Billing.

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Contracts.

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Customer Relationship Management Help Desk.

• PeopleSoft Enterprise General Ledger.

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Human Capital Management.

• PeopleSoft Enterprise IT Asset Management.

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Maintenance Management.

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Order Management.

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Payables.

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Project Costing.

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Purchasing.

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Real Estate Management.

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Resource Management.

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Strategic Sourcing.

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Supply Chain Management.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. xix
Preface

PeopleSoft Application Fundamentals

The PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Management PeopleBook provides you with business process information
for your Asset Management system. The PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals
PeopleBook provides you with implementation and background information for your Asset Management
system. However, additional, essential information describing the setup and design of your system resides in
companion documentation. The companion documentation consists of important topics that apply to many or
all PeopleSoft applications across the Financials, Enterprise Service Automation, and Supply Chain
Management product lines. You should be familiar with the contents of these PeopleBooks.

The following companion PeopleBooks apply specifically to Asset Management.

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals PeopleBook

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals PeopleBook

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Setting Up Global Options and Reports

Pages With Deferred Processing

Several pages in Asset Management operate in deferred processing mode. Most fields on these pages are not
updated or validated until you save the page or refresh it by clicking a button, link, or tab. This delayed
processing has various implications for the field values on the page—for example, if a field contains a default
value, any value you enter before the system updates the page overrides the default. Another implication is
that the system updates quantity balances or totals only when you save or otherwise refresh the page.

See the guidelines for designing pages in the Enterprise PeopleTools PeopleBook, "PeopleSoft Application
Designer Developer's Guide."

PeopleBooks and the Online PeopleSoft Library

A companion PeopleBook called PeopleBooks and the Online PeopleSoft Library contains general
information, including:

• Understanding the PeopleSoft online library and related documentation.

• How to send PeopleSoft documentation comments and suggestions to Oracle.

• How to access hosted PeopleBooks, downloadable HTML PeopleBooks, and downloadable PDF
PeopleBooks as well as documentation updates.

• Understanding PeopleBook structure.

• Typographical conventions and visual cues used in PeopleBooks.

• ISO country codes and currency codes.

• PeopleBooks that are common across multiple applications.

xx Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
 Preface

• Common elements used in PeopleBooks.

• Navigating the PeopleBooks interface and searching the PeopleSoft online library.

• Displaying and printing screen shots and graphics in PeopleBooks.

• How to manage the PeopleSoft online library including full-text searching and configuring a reverse
proxy server.

• Understanding documentation integration and how to integrate customized documentation into the library.

• Glossary of useful PeopleSoft terms that are used in PeopleBooks.

You can find this companion PeopleBook in your PeopleSoft online library.

Common Elements Used in This PeopleBook

Account ChartField that identifies the nature of a transaction for corporate accounts.

Accounting Date Date for accounting entries for an activity.

Affiliate ChartField used to map transactions between business units when using a single
interunit account.

Alt Acct (alternate ChartField that identifies the nature of a transaction for statutory accounts. This
account) field appears only if you enable the Alternate Account option for your
organization and for the general ledger business unit.

As of Date The last date for which a report or process includes data.

Business Unit An identification code that represents a high-level organization of business

information. You can use a business unit to define regional or departmental units
within a larger organization.

Category ChartField value that represents the category for a project transaction in Project
Costing. A category further defines a source type. For example, if you have a
source type of labor, you might have categories for architect labor, carpenter
labor, and plumber labor. This field is available only if you have Project Costing.

Chartfield 1 to ChartFields that you configure to meet your organization's requirements.

Chartfield 3
Class ChartField that identifies a particular appropriation when you combine it with a
Fund, Department, Program Code, and Budget Reference.
Group of customers in a trade, such as grocers or mass merchandisers.

Currency Code that identifies the type of currency for an amount, such as USD or EUR.

Dept (department) ChartField that indicates who is responsible for or affected by the transaction.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. xxi
Preface

Description Freeflow text up to 30 characters.

Document Sequence or Click to open a page where you can enter document sequencing information.
Document Sequencing This option is available only if you enable the document sequencing feature for
the PeopleSoft General Ledger business unit.

Effective Date Date on which a table row becomes effective; the date that an action begins. For
example, if you want to close out a ledger on June 30, the effective date for the
ledger closing would be July 1. This date also determines when you can view and
change the information. Pages or panels and batch processes that use the
information use the current row.

EmplID (employee ID) Unique identification code for an individual associated with your organization.

Exchange Rate Rate that is used for currency conversion.

Fund ChartField that represents structural units for education and government
accounting. Can also represent a divisional breakdown in your organization.

Journal Created when you edit journal lines (accounting entries) online in PeopleSoft
General Ledger or you run the Journal Generator process for subsystem,
imported, or batch accounting entries.

Language or Language The language in which you want the field labels and report headings of your
Code reports to print. The field values appear as you enter them.
Language also refers to the language spoken by an employee, applicant, or non-
employee.

Oper Unit (operating ChartField that is used to identify a location, such as a distribution warehouse or
unit) sales center.

Process Frequency Designates the appropriate frequency in the Process Frequency group box:
Once executes the request the next time the batch process runs. After the batch
process runs, the process frequency is automatically set to Don't Run.
Always executes the request every time the batch process runs.
Don't Run ignores the request when the batch process runs.

Process Monitor This link takes you to the Process List page, where you can view the status of
submitted process requests.

Product ChartField that captures additional information that is useful for profitability and
cash flow analysis by product sold or manufactured.

Program ChartField that identifies groups of related activities, cost centers, revenue
centers, responsibility centers, and academic programs. Tracks revenue and
expenditures for programs.

Project ChartField that captures information for project or grants accounting.

xxii Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
 Preface

Report ID The report identifier.

Report Manager This link takes you to the Report List page, where you can view report content,
check the status of a report, and see content detail messages (which show you a
description of the report and the distribution list).

Request ID A request identification that represents a set of selection criteria for a report or
process.

Run This button takes you to the Process Scheduler request page, where you can
specify the location where a process or job runs and the process output format.

Run Control ID A request identification that represents a set of selection criteria for a report or
process.

SetID An identification code that represents a set of control table information or

TableSets. A TableSet is a group of tables (records) necessary to define your
company's structure and processing options.

Short Description Freeflow text up to 15 characters.

Source Type ChartField value that represents the source type for a project transaction in
Project Costing. A source type identifies the purpose of the transaction, for
example labor. This field is available only if you have Project Costing.

Statistics Code ChartField that identifies nonmonetary statistical amounts.

Status Indicates if a row in a table is active or inactive. You cannot display inactive
rows or pages or use them for running batch processes. Use inactive rather than
delete data you no longer use in order to maintain an audit trail.

User ID The system identifier for the individual who generates a transaction.

See Also

Enterprise PeopleTools PeopleBook, "PeopleSoft Process Scheduler," Understanding PeopleSoft Process

Scheduler

Enterprise PeopleTools PeopleBook, "Using PeopleSoft Applications," Working with Pages, Using Effective
Dates

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. xxiii
 Chapter 1

Getting Started With PeopleSoft

Enterprise Asset Management
This chapter provides an overview of PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Management and discusses:

• PeopleSoft Asset Management business processes.

• PeopleSoft Asset Management integration touchpoints.

• Implementing PeopleSoft Asset Management.

• ChartField security for PeopleSoft Asset Management.

PeopleSoft Asset Management Overview

This PeopleBook discusses the following functionality and business processes:

• Navigating in PeopleSoft Asset Management.

• Implementing PeopleSoft Asset Management.

• Converting to PeopleSoft Asset Management.

• Adding and maintaining assets.

• Working with asset budgeting.

• Working with leased assets.

• Adjusting, transferring and evaluating assets.

• Managing asset maintenance, warranties, repairs, and insurance.

• Using group asset processing.

• Using composite asset processing.

• Performing asset physical inventory.

• Working with joint venture assets.

• Processing depreciation.

• Using user-defined depreciation.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 1
Getting Started With PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Management Chapter 1

• Reviewing depreciation calculation results.

• Allocating depreciation expenses.

• Creating asset accounting entries.

• Retiring assets.

• Processing asset mass changes.

• Using PeopleSoft Asset Management reporting options.

• Using self-service web components.

• Using global features for asset management.

• Archiving asset information.

• Understanding depreciation calculations.

• Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary.

• PeopleSoft Asset Management reports.

PeopleSoft Asset Management Business Processes

The following graphic lists the PeopleSoft Asset Management business processes:

We cover these business processes in the business process chapters in this PeopleBook.

2 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 1 Getting Started With PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Management

PeopleSoft Asset Management Business Processes

PeopleSoft Asset Management Integration Touchpoints

Asset Management is the core product of the PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management suite, which
also includes:

• PeopleSoft Enterprise IT Asset Management

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Maintenance Management

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Real Estate Management

To use PeopleSoft Asset Management to full advantage, it is also important to understand the points of
integration between PeopleSoft Asset Management and the other PeopleSoft applications that you have
purchased, such as:

• PeopleSoft Enterprise General Ledger.

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Billing.

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Budgeting.

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Purchasing.

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Project Costing.

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Payables.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 3
Getting Started With PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Management Chapter 1

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Strategic Sourcing.

• Third-party applications for computer-aided facilities management, tax provider systems applications.

Because applications share information, you must plan to work closely with the implementation teams that
install other PeopleSoft applications to ensure that PeopleSoft provides the full functionality and efficiency
that your company requires.

We discuss integration considerations in the implementation chapters in this PeopleBook. Supplemental

information about third-party application integrations is on the PeopleSoft Customer Connection web site:

PeopleSoft Asset Management integrates with these PeopleSoft applications:

PeopleSoft Asset Management integration with other products

4 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 1 Getting Started With PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Management

Enabling ChartField Security for PeopleSoft Asset Management

PeopleSoft ChartField security provides a flexible, rule-based approach to administer security at a data level.
ChartField security is supported in PeopleSoft Asset Management and across other PeopleSoft Financials and
Supply Chain Management (FSCM) applications. The ChartField security feature prevents unauthorized
employees and contractors from viewing and editing sensitive financial data by restricting access to data
stored with specific ChartField values.

The primary features for ChartField security are:

• Enforce security rules by user, role, or permission list.

• Enable ChartField security for all products or selectively by product.

• Enable or disable ChartField security selectively by component.

• Define rules to accommodate end-user areas of responsibility.

• Refine access rules by product feature or component.

• Support super user access to minimize setup

• Define components as exceptions to override security rules.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Securing ChartFields" and PeopleSoft
Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Securing ChartFields," Securing ChartFields for
PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Management.

Implementing PeopleSoft Asset Management

PeopleSoft Setup Manager enables you to review a list of setup tasks for your organization for the products
that you are implementing. The setup tasks include the components that you must set up, listed in the order in
which you must enter data into the component tables, and links to the corresponding PeopleBook
documentation.

PeopleSoft Financials also provides component interfaces to help you load data from your existing system
into PeopleSoft tables. Use the Excel to Component Interface utility with the component interfaces to
populate the tables.

Component Component Interface Reference

Agencies (AGENCY_DEFN) See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Establishing Asset Processing," Pages Used to
Define Asset Attributes.

Define AM Allocation Basis See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(ALLOC_BASIS_GRP) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Setting Up Depreciation Processing."

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 5
Getting Started With PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Management Chapter 1

Component Component Interface Reference

Area Definition (AM_AREA_TBL) See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Establishing Asset Processing," Setting Up Area
Definitions.

Define Criticality Code See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(AM_CRIT_LEVEL) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Establishing Asset Processing," Setting Up
Criticality Codes.

Asset Indexes (AM_INDEX_TBL) See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Setting Up Accounting Entry and Financial
Processing for PeopleSoft Asset Management,"
Pages Used to Define Financial Processing.

AM Location Definition See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(AM_LOCATION) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Establishing Asset Processing," Pages Used to
Define Asset Attributes.

Asset Owners See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(AM_OWNER_COMP) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Establishing Asset Processing," Establishing Asset
Ownership.

Asset Owner Operators See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(AM_OWNER_OPR_COMP) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Establishing Asset Processing," Establishing Asset
Ownership.

Accounting Entry Template IDs See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(AMAE_TMPL_ID_PNL Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Setting Up Accounting Entry and Financial
Processing for PeopleSoft Asset Management,"
Defining Accounting Entries.

Asset Class (ASSET_CLASS) ASSET_CLASS_CI See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Establishing Asset Processing," Setting Up Asset
Classes.

Asset Hazardous Code ASSET_FSC_DEFN_C See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(ASSET_FSC_DFN) I Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Establishing Asset Processing," Setting Up
Hazardous Codes.

Bus Tax Rate for Asset/Location See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle
(ASSET_LOC_RATE) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Setting Up Tax Processing and Tax Reporting,"
(FRA) Defining Business Tax by Location.

6 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 1 Getting Started With PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Management

Component Component Interface Reference

Asset Thresholds See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(ASSET_THRESHOLDS) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Setting Up Tax Processing and Tax Reporting,"
(AUS) Defining VAT Thresholds.

Define Asset Management Books See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(BOOK_DEFN1) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Establishing PeopleSoft Asset Management
Business Units," Defining Business Unit Processing
Options.

BU Aggregate R&D Expenditure ( See Chapter 23, "Using the Global Features of
BU_AGG_RD) PeopleSoft Asset Management," Defining Asset
R&D Categorization, page 477.

Asset Management Business Unit See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(BU_DEFN) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Establishing PeopleSoft Asset Management
Business Units," Creating PeopleSoft Asset
Management Business Units.

Capital Acquisition Plan Type See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(CAP_TYPE) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Setting Up Accounting Entry and Financial
Processing for PeopleSoft Asset Management,"
Pages Used to Define Financial Processing.

Asset Category CATEGORY_DEFN_C

(CATEGORY_DEFN) I

Depr Convention Builder See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(CONV_BLDR_PNLG) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Setting Up Depreciation Processing," Setting Up
Depreciation Conventions.

Copy All Depr Conventions See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(CONV_COPY_ALL_COMP) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Setting Up Depreciation Processing," Setting Up
Depreciation Conventions.

Copy Depreciation Conventions See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(CONV_COPY_PNLG) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Setting Up Depreciation Processing," Setting Up
Depreciation Conventions.

Cost Types (COST_TYPE_DEFN) See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Setting Up Accounting Entry and Financial
Processing for PeopleSoft Asset Management,"
Pages Used to Define Financial Processing.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 7
Getting Started With PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Management Chapter 1

Component Component Interface Reference

Capitalization Limits Codes See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(DEPR_CAP_LIMIT) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Setting Up Accounting Entry and Financial
Processing for PeopleSoft Asset Management,"
Setting Up Capitalization Limits.

Capitalization Thresholds See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(CAP_THR_DEFN) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Setting Up Accounting Entry and Financial
Processing for PeopleSoft Asset Management,"
Setting Up Capitalization Thresholds.

Combination Editing Options See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(AM_CEDT_SSRC) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Setting Up Accounting Entry and Financial
Processing for PeopleSoft Asset Management,"
Enabling Combination Editing.

Depreciation Conventions See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(DEPR_CONVENTION) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Setting Up Depreciation Processing," Setting Up
Depreciation Conventions.

Depreciation Limits See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(DEPR_LIMIT_DEFN) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Setting Up Depreciation Processing," Defining
Depreciation Limits.

Depreciation Schedules DEPR_SCHEDULE_D See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(DEPR_SCHEDULE_DEFN) EFN_CI Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Setting Up Depreciation Processing," Setting Up
Depreciation Schedules.

Depreciation Terms Definition DEPR_TERMS_DEFN See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(DEPR_TERMS_DEFN) _CI Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Setting Up Depreciation Processing," Defining
Depreciation Terms and Rates.

Accounting Entry Templates See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(DIST_TEMPLATE_DEFN) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Setting Up Accounting Entry and Financial
Processing for PeopleSoft Asset Management,"
Defining Accounting Entries.

Fair Value Valuation Methods See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(AM_FV_METHOD_DEFN) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Setting Up Accounting Entry and Financial
Processing for PeopleSoft Asset Management,"
Enabling Combination Editing.

Fair Value Groups

(AM_FV_GROUP_DEFN)

8 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 1 Getting Started With PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Management

Component Component Interface Reference

Fair Value Templates See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(AM_FV_TEMPLAT_DEFN) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Setting Up Accounting Entry and Financial
Processing for PeopleSoft Asset Management,"
Enabling Combination Editing.

FERC Code Definition See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application

(FERC_CD_DEFN) Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining
Financials and Supply Chain Management Common
Definitions," Pages Used to Define Additional
Common Information.

Financing Codes (FINANCE_CD) See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Setting Up Accounting Entry and Financial
Processing for PeopleSoft Asset Management,"
Pages Used to Define Financial Processing.

Insurance Types See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(INSURANCE_TYPE) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Establishing Asset Processing," Pages Used to
Define Asset Attributes.

Inter Unit Transfer Definition IU_TRF_DEFN_TBL_ See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle
(IU_TRF_DEFN_TBL) CI Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Setting Up Accounting Entry and Financial
Processing for PeopleSoft Asset Management,"
Defining Accounting Entries.

Joint Venture BU Allocations See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(JV_BUS_ALLOC) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Establishing Asset Processing," Defining Joint
Venture Allocations.

Define Maintenance Types See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(MAINT_TYPE_DEFN) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Establishing Asset Processing," Defining
Maintenance Types.

Multi-Shift Definition ( See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

MULTI_SHIFT_DEFN) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Setting Up Depreciation Processing," (DEU)
Setting Up Multi-shift Codes.

Owner Information See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(OWNER_INFO_DEFN) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Establishing Asset Processing," Establishing Asset
Ownership.

Physical Inventory Scheduling See Chapter 12, "Performing Asset Physical

(PI_SCHEDULE ) Inventory," Setting Up a Physical Inventory, page
279.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 9
Getting Started With PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Management Chapter 1

Component Component Interface Reference

Physical Inventory Sys Setup See Chapter 12, "Performing Asset Physical
(PI_SYSTEM_SETUP) Inventory," Setting Up a Physical Inventory, page
279.

Define Asset Profiles (PROFILE) PROFILE_CI See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle
Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Establishing Asset Processing," Setting Up Asset
Profiles.

Lease Schedule See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(PYMNT_SCHED_TBL) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Establishing Asset Processing," Defining Lease
Payment Schedules.

Qualified Investments (QIV) See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Setting Up Tax Processing and Tax Reporting,"
(USA) Defining Qualified Investment Codes.

Return Information See Chapter 23, "Using the Global Features of

(RETURN_INFO_DEFN) PeopleSoft Asset Management," Processing Local
Tax Reports, page 515.

Define Report Drilldown See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(RPT_DRILL_FLD_G) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Establishing Asset Processing," Establishing Drill-
Down Field Groups.

Book Class Security See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application

(SEC_BUBOOK_CLS) Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Securing Your
System."

Book Operator Security See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application

(SEC_BUBOOK_OPR) Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Securing Your
System."

Asset Tax Classes See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(TAX_CLASS_DEFN) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Setting Up Tax Processing and Tax Reporting,"
(CAN, IND, and USA) Defining and Maintaining
Tax Classes.

Tax Credit Status See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(TAX_CR_STATUS) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Setting Up Tax Processing and Tax Reporting,"
Defining Tax Credits.

Tax Credits (TAX_CREDITS) See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Setting Up Tax Processing and Tax Reporting,"
Defining Tax Credits.

10 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 1 Getting Started With PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Management

Component Component Interface Reference

Retirement Basis Reduction See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(TRAN_EXCLUDE_TBL) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Setting Up Tax Processing and Tax Reporting,"
Setting Up Retirement Basis Reduction Codes.

Transaction Groups See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(TRANS_PNL_GRP) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Setting Up Accounting Entry and Financial
Processing for PeopleSoft Asset Management,"
Defining Accounting Entries.

Define Transaction Codes See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(TRANSACTION_CODE) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Setting Up Accounting Entry and Financial
Processing for PeopleSoft Asset Management,"
Setting Up Transaction Codes.

User Defined Depreciation Rate UD_DEPR_RATE_CI See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle
(UD_DEPR_RATE) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Setting Up Depreciation Processing," Defining
Depreciation Terms and Rates.

User Defined Methods See Chapter 15, "Using User-Defined Asset

(UD_METHOD) Depreciation," Creating a User-Defined
Depreciation Method, page 333.

User Defined Methods - Copy See Chapter 15, "Using User-Defined Asset
(UD_METHOD_COPY) Depreciation," Creating a User-Defined
Depreciation Method, page 333.

User Defined Variables See Chapter 15, "Using User-Defined Asset

(UD_VARIABLE_DEFN) Depreciation," Creating or Selecting Variables, page
330.

Define Units of Production See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle

(UOP_DEFN) Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Establishing Asset Processing," Setting Up Units
of Production Definitions.

Account (GL_ACCOUNT) ACCOUNT_CF See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application

Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining and Using
ChartFields," Adding Account Values.

Alternate Account (ALTACCT) ALTACCT_CF See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application

Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining and Using
ChartFields," Adding Alternate Account Values.

Operating Unit OPER_UNIT_CF See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application

(OPERATING_UNIT) Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining and Using
ChartFields," Adding Operating Unit Values.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 11
Getting Started With PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Management Chapter 1

Component Component Interface Reference

Department (DEPARTMENT) DEPT_CF See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application

Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining and Using
ChartFields," Adding Department Values.

Project ID (PROJECT) PROJECT_CF See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application

Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining and Using
ChartFields," Adding Project Values and Grant
Values.

Product (PRODUCT) PRODUCT_CF See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application

Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining and Using
ChartFields," Adding Product Values.

Fund Code (FUND_DEFINITION) FUND_CF See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application

Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining and Using
ChartFields," Adding Values for Expansion
ChartFields 1, 2, and 3.

Chartfield 1 (CHARTFIELD1) CHARTFIELD1 See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application

Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining and Using
ChartFields," Adding Values for Expansion
ChartFields 1, 2, and 3.

Chartfield 2 (CHARTFIELD2) CHARTFIELD2 See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application

Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining and Using
ChartFields," Adding Values for Expansion
ChartFields 1, 2, and 3.

Chartfield 3 (CHARTFIELD3) CHARTFIELD3 See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application

Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining and Using
ChartFields," Adding Values for Expansion
ChartFields 1, 2, and 3.

InterUnit Template IU_INTER_TMPLT See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application

(IU_INTER_TMPLT) Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Using Interunit and
Intraunit Accounting and ChartField Inheritance,"
Defining Interunit Templates.

IntraUnit Template IU_INTRA_TMPLT See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application

(IU_INTRA_TMPLT) Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Using Interunit and
Intraunit Accounting and ChartField Inheritance,"
Defining Intraunit Templates.

InterUnit Pair Maintenance IU_INTER_PR_BASIC See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application

(IU_INTER_PR_BASIC) Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Using Interunit and
Intraunit Accounting and ChartField Inheritance,"
Using Mass Maintenance for Interunit Pairs.

Market Rates (RT_RATE_PNL) See PeopleSoft Enterprise Global Options and

Reports 9.1 PeopleBook, "Processing Multiple
Currencies," Establishing Market Rates.

12 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 1 Getting Started With PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Management

Component Component Interface Reference

Market Rate Definition See PeopleSoft Enterprise Global Options and

(MARKET_RATE_DEF) Reports 9.1 PeopleBook, "Processing Multiple
Currencies," Defining Market Rates.

Currency Quotation Method See PeopleSoft Enterprise Global Options and

(CURR_QUOTE_PNL) Reports 9.1 PeopleBook, "Processing Multiple
Currencies," Defining Currency Quotations.

Ledgers for a Unit EM_BUS_UNIT_LED See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application

(BUSINESS_UNIT_LED) Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up
Ledgers," Defining Ledgers for a Business Unit.

Value Added Tax Code TAX_CODE_VAT See PeopleSoft Enterprise Global Options and
(TAX_CODE_VAT) Reports 9.1 PeopleBook, "Working with VAT,"
Setting Up VAT Authorities, and Tax Codes.

VAT Accounts by Business Unit TAX_BU_CODE_VAT See PeopleSoft Enterprise Global Options and
(TAX_BU_CODE_VAT) Reports 9.1 PeopleBook, "Working with VAT,"
(Optional) Defining VAT Accounts by General
Ledger Business Unit.

VAT Entity (VAT_ENTITY_ID) VAT_ENTITY_ID See PeopleSoft Enterprise Global Options and
Reports 9.1 PeopleBook, "Working with VAT,"
Setting Up VAT Entities.

Vat Defaults CI Component VAT_DEF_CI See PeopleSoft Enterprise Global Options and
(VAT_DEF_CI) Reports 9.1 PeopleBook, "Working with VAT,"
Establishing VAT Defaults.

Customer Group Table See PeopleSoft Enterprise Order to Cash Common

(CUST_GROUP_TBL) Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Maintaining
Additional Customer Information," Establishing
Customer Group Tables.

Contact Info (CONTACT_INFO) See PeopleSoft Enterprise Order to Cash Common

Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Maintaining
Contacts."

General Information See PeopleSoft Enterprise Order to Cash Common

(CUSTOMER_GENERAL) Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Maintaining General
Customer Information."

User Preferences (OPR_DEFAULT) OPR_DEFAULT_FIN See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application

Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining User
Preferences."

Other Sources of Information

In the implementation planning phase, take advantage of all PeopleSoft sources of information, including the
installation guides, data models, business process maps, and troubleshooting guidelines. A complete list of
these resources is in the preface of the About These PeopleBooks with information on where to find the most
up-to-date version of each.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 13
Getting Started With PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Management Chapter 1

See Also

Enterprise PeopleTools PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Setup Manager

Enterprise PeopleTools PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Component Interfaces

About These PeopleBooks

14 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
 Chapter 2

Navigating in PeopleSoft Asset

Management
This chapter discusses how to use custom Navigation Center pages in PeopleSoft Asset Management.

Using Custom Navigation Center Pages in PeopleSoft Asset

Management
PeopleSoft Asset Management provides custom navigation center pages that contain groupings of folders that
support a specific business process, task, or user role.

Note. In addition to the custom navigation center pages, PeopleSoft Asset Management provides menu
navigation, standard navigation pages, and PeopleSoft Navigator.

Pages Used to Navigate in PeopleSoft Asset Management

This table lists the custom navigation Asset Definitions Center pages that are used to navigate implementation
tasks in PeopleSoft Asset Management:

Page Name Navigation Usage

Asset Management Main Menu, Asset Management Access primary PeopleSoft Asset
Management menu options and
activities.

Asset Definitions Center Main Menu, Asset Management Access primary PeopleSoft Asset
Management Center menu options
and activities.

Asset Transactions Click Asset Transactions on the Asset Access the Asset Transaction folder
Management menu page. to administer financial and
nonfinancial asset transactions,
including adds, adjustments, transfers,
and retirements.

Owned Assets Click Owned Assets on the Asset Access the Owned Assets folder to
Transactions menu page. enter, copy, update, and display
owned asset information.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 15
Navigating in PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 2

Page Name Navigation Usage

Express Add Click Express Add on the Owned Access the Express Add page to
Assets page. create a new asset with only financial
data.

Basic Add Click Basic Add on the Owned Assets Access the Basic Add page to enter or
page. update financial assets with physical
and financial details.

View Component Hierarchy Click View Component Hierarchy on Access the Asset Component
the Owned Assets page. Hierarchy page to display an asset
hierarchy in a grid.

Manage Component Hierarchy Click Manage Component Hierarchy Access the Asset Component
on the Owned Assets page. Hierarchy page to display an asset
hierarchy in a grid as well as to insert
and remove assets from the hierarchy.

Copy Existing Asset Click Copy Existing Asset on the Access the Copy Existing Asset page
Owned Assets page. to copy existing asset information to a
new asset ID.

Calculate Replacement Cost Click Calculate Replacement Cost on Access the Calculate Replacement
the Owned Assets page. Cost page to calculate and update
indexed replacement costs.

Define Asset Operational Information Click Define Asset Operational Info Access the Define Asset Operational
on the Owned Assets page. Information page to enter
nonfinancial assets or update physical
details of existing assets.

Maintain Property Occupants Click Maintain Property Occupants Access the Maintain Property
on the Owned Assets page. Occupants page to enter property
occupant information.

Leased Assets Click Leased Assets on the Asset Access the Leased Assets folder to
Transactions menu page. enter and update leased asset
information.

Express Add Click Express Add on the Leased Access the Lease Express Add page
Assets page. to create capital or operating leases
with appropriate payment and
depreciation schedules.

Update Lease Information Click Update Lease Information on Access the Update Lease Information
the Leased Assets page. page to enter or update leased assets
with physical and financial details.

Create Expense Schedule Click Create Expense Schedule on the Access the Lease Expense Schedule
Leased Assets page. page to generate new lease expense
schedules.

16 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 2 Navigating in PeopleSoft Asset Management

Page Name Navigation Usage

Transfer Operating Lease Click Transfer Operating Lease on the Access the Transfer Operating Lease
Leased Assets page. page to transfer an operating lease to
a new ChartField.

Acquisition Details Click Acquisition Details on the Asset Access the Acquisition Details folder
Transactions menu page. to review acquisition details from
vouchers, purchase orders, and
receipts.

Review Purchase Orders Click Review Purchase Orders on the Access the Review Purchase Orders
Acquisition Details page. page to review purchase order data
such as business unit, PO ID, and
related contracts.

Review Receivers Click Review Receivers on the Access the Review Receivers page to
Acquisition Details page. review receiving details such as
business unit, item ID, or vendor
receipt quantities.

Review Vouchers Click Review Vouchers on the Access the Review Vouchers page to
Acquisition Details page. review acquisition details from
vouchers.

Asset Book Information Click Asset Book Information on the Access the Asset Book Information
Asset Transactions menu page. component to review, add, or update
asset books.

Define Tax/Depr Criteria Click Define Tax/Depr Criteria on the Access the Define Tax/Depr Criteria
Asset Book Information page. page to define asset book and tax
depreciation attributes.

Add/Copy Asset Book Click Add/Copy Asset Book on the Access the Add/Copy Asset Book
Asset Book Information page. page to copy to a new book or convert
book currency in mass.

Parent-Child Relationship Click Parent-Child Relationship on Access the Parent-Child Relationship

the Asset Transactions menu page. folder to review parent-child
relationships.

Create Parent Click Create Parent on the Parent- Access the Create Parent page to
Child Relationship page. create umbrella parent asset;
description only asset.

Parent-Child Basic Information Click Parent-Child Basic Information Access the Parent-Child Basic
on the Parent-Child Relationship Information page to enter and update
page. basic physical and financial data for
parent or child assets.

Review Parent-Child Click Review Parent-Child on the Access the Review Parent-Child page
Parent-Child Relationship page. to review parent assets and the
associated child asset information.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 17
Navigating in PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 2

Page Name Navigation Usage

Review Parent-Child NBV Click Review Parent-Child NBV on Access the Review Parent-Child NBV
the Parent-Child Relationship page. page to view parent-child net book
value; select and deselect included
children.

InterUnit Parent-Child Trans Click InterUnit Parent-Child Trans on Access the InterUnit Parent-Child
the Parent-Child Relationship page. Trans page to run the process for
interunit parent-child transfers.

Capital Acquisition Planning Click Capital Acquisition Planning on Access the Capital Acquisition
the Asset Transactions menu page. Planning folder to create and
administer Capital Acquisition Plans
(CAP).

Create (CAP) Plan Click Create (CAP) Plan on the Access the Create (CAP) Plan page to
Capital Acquisition Planning page. define and update capital acquisition
plans (CAP).

Load Budgeting Asset Catalog Click Load Budgeting Asset Catalog Access the Load Budgeting Asset
on the Capital Acquisition Planning Catalog page to load the budgeting
page. asset catalog.

Send to Budgeting Click Send to Budgeting on the Access the Send to Budgeting page to
Capital Acquisition Planning page. configure the interface for PeopleSoft
Budgeting.

Run Report Click Run Report on the Capital Access the Run Report page to create
Acquisition Planning page. capital acquisition plan (CAP)
reports.

Financial Transactions Click Financial Transactions on the Access the Financial Transactions
Asset Transactions menu page. folder to perform financial asset
maintenance transactions like
adjustments and transfers.

Cost Adjust/Transfer Asset Click Cost Adjust/Transfer Asset on Access the Cost Adjust/Transfer
the Financial Transactions page. Asset page to perform cost
additions/adjustments, transfers,
recategorizations, revaluations,
markups, and interunit transfers.

CGU Impairment Click CGU Impairment on the Access the CGU Impairment page to
Financial Transactions page. process CGU impairments.

Impairment WorkSheet Click Impairment Worksheet on the Access the Impairment Worksheet
Financial Transactions page. page to process impairments.

Revaluation WorkSheet Click Revaluation Worksheet on the Access the Revaluation Worksheet
Financial Transactions page. page to revalue assets using different
methods.

Fair Value Click Fair Value on the Financial Access the Fair Value page to assign
Transactions page. the fair value for individual assets.

18 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 2 Navigating in PeopleSoft Asset Management

Page Name Navigation Usage

Revaluation in Mass Click Revaluation in Mass on the Access the Revaluation in Mass page
Financial Transactions page. to collectively revalue assets.

Change/Delete Pending Trans Click Change/Delete Pending Trans Access the Change/Delete Pending
on the Financial Transactions page. Trans page to update transactions in
the Pending Transaction table before
running depreciation processing.

Cost Summarization Click Cost Summarization on the Access the Cost Summarization page
Financial Transactions page. to process cost summarization.

Update Non-Capitalized Cost Click Update Non-Capitalized Cost Access the Update Non-Capitalized
Asset on the Financial Transactions Cost page to update noncapitalized
page. cost.

Cap Threshold Validation Click Cap Threshold Validation on Access the Capitalization Threshold
the Financial Transactions page. Validation page to check if an asset
still belongs to the appropriate
capitalization category after
upcoming adjustments.

Capitalization Summary Report Click Capitalization Summary Report Access the Capitalization Summary
on the Financial Transactions page. Report page to review trackable assets
originated due to the threshold limit.

Asset Disposal Click Asset Disposal on the Asset Access the Asset Disposal folder to
Transactions menu page. dispose of assets.

Retire/Reinstate Asset Click Retire/Reinstate Asset on the Access the Retire/Reinstate Asset
Asset Disposal page. page to retire and reinstate financial
assets.

Disposal Worksheet Click Disposal Worksheet on the Access the Disposal Worksheet page
Asset Disposal page. to submit selected assets for disposal.

Approve Disposals Click Approve Disposals on the Asset Access the Approve Disposals page to
Disposal page. approve pending asset disposal
requests.

Auto-Retire Fully Depr Assets Click Auto-Retire Fully Depr Assets Access the Auto-Retire Fully Depr
on the Asset Disposal page. Assets page to define auto-retire
criteria to collectively retire fully
depreciated assets.

Retire/Reinstate Non-Fin Asset Click Retire/Reinstate Non-Fin Asset Access the Retire/Reinstate Non-Fin
on the Asset Disposal page. Asset page to retire and reinstate
nonfinancial assets.

History Click History on the Asset Access the History folder to review
Transactions page. book and cost history.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 19
Navigating in PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 2

Page Name Navigation Usage

Review Book Click Review Book on the History Access the Review Book page to
page. review book change history.

View Parent Component Click View Parent Component on the Access the View Parent Component
History page. to view the Parent component.

Review Cost Click Review Cost on the History Access the Review Cost page to
page. review capitalized and noncapitalized
asset cost transactions.

Review Inflation Click Review Inflation on the History Access the Review Inflation page to
page. review asset inflation history.

Archive Cost/Depreciation Click Archive Cost/Depreciation on Access the Archive Cost/Depreciation

the History page. page to archive asset cost and
depreciation information from
production tables.

Restore Cost/Depreciation Click Restore Cost/Depreciation on Access the Restore Cost/Depreciation

the History page. page to restore archived asset cost and
depreciation data to production tables.

Depreciation Click Depreciation on the Asset Access the Depreciation folder to

Management menu page process and review regular and group
asset depreciation.

Open Transactions Click Open Transactions on the Access the Open Transactions page to
Depreciation page. create, review, and purge open
transaction data.

Processing Click Processing on the Depreciation Access the Processing page to

page. calculate depreciation and run
depreciation-related processes.

Group Asset Depreciation Click Group Asset Depreciation on Access the Group Asset Depreciation
the Depreciation page. page to consolidate, apply, and
calculate group asset depreciation.

What-If Scenarios Click What-If Scenarios on the Access the What-If Scenarios page to
Depreciation page. request and review what-if
depreciation scenarios.

Review Depreciation Info Click Review Depreciation Info on Access the Review Depreciation Info
the Depreciation page. page to review depreciation
information.

Depreciation Process Log Click Depreciation Process Log on Access the Depreciation Process Log
the Depreciation page. page to review depreciation
processing results for errors.

20 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 2 Navigating in PeopleSoft Asset Management

Page Name Navigation Usage

Accounting Entries Click Accounting Entries on the Asset Access the Accounting Entries folder
Management menu page. to process and close accounting
activities.

Create Accounting Entries Click Create Accounting Entries on Access the Create Accounting Entries
the Accounting Entries page. page to create asset accounting
entries.

Close Depreciation Click Close Depreciation on the Access the Close Depreciation page
Accounting Entries page. to close period depreciation by
generating accounting entries for the
ledger.

Review Financial Entries Click Review Financial Entries on the Access the Review Financial Entries
Accounting Entries page. page to review accounting entries.

Review Operating Leases Click Review Operating Leases on Access the Review Operating Leases
the Accounting Entries page. page to review accounting entries for
operating leases.

Close Accounting Period Click Close Accounting Period on the Access the Close Accounting Period
Accounting Entries page. page to close an accounting period to
prevent accounting entries in that
period.

Review Asset Journals Click Review Asset Journals on the Access the Review Asset Journals
Accounting Entries page. page to review asset journal
information.

Calculate Inflation Click Calculate Inflation on the Access the Calculate Inflation page to
Accounting Entries page. run the process to calculate inflation
amounts for assets.

Revalue AUS Click Revalue AUS on the Access the Revalue AUS page to
Accounting Entries page. revalue assets (Australia).

Review Expense Entries Click Review Expense Entries on the Access the Review Expense Entries
Accounting Entries page. page to display accounts created by
the Clearing Reconciliation process .

Allocate Depreciation Expense Click Cost and Depreciation Access the Allocate Depreciation
Summary on the Accounting Entries Expense component to allocate
page. depreciation expense.

Financial Reports Click Financial Reports on the Asset Access the Financial Reports folder to
Management menu page. produce reports and load reporting
tables.

Cost and Depreciation Summary Click Cost and Depreciation Access the Cost and Depreciation
Summary on the Financial Reports Summary page to review summarized
page. depreciation activity, cost activity,
and net book value.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 21
Navigating in PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 2

Page Name Navigation Usage

Load Reporting Tables Click Load Reporting Tables on the Access the Load Reporting Tables
Financial Reports page. folder to load PeopleSoft Asset
Management reporting tables.

Asset Details Click Asset Details on the Financial Access the Asset Details folder to
Reports page. create asset information reports.

Leased Assets Click Leased Assets on the Financial Access the Leased Assets folder to
Reports page. create lease asset reports.

Accounting Entries Click Accounting Entries on the Access the Accounting Entries folder
Financial Reports page. to generate account activity
summaries, alternate account activity,
reverse and reserve amounts, and
statutory reports.

Cost and Depreciation Click Cost and Depreciation on the Access the Cost and Depreciation
Financial Reports page. folder to create asset depreciation
reports.

Retirement Click Retirement on the Financial Access the Retirement folder to create
Reports page. asset retirement reports.

Generate AM Charts Click Generate AM Charts on the Access the Generate AM Charts
Financial Reports page. folder to generate PeopleSoft Asset
Management charts.

Send/Receive Information Click Send/Receive Information on Access the Send/Receive Information

the Asset Management menu. folder to send and receive PeopleSoft
Asset Management data and
transactions.

Preview AP/PO Information Click Preview AP/PO Information on Access the Preview AP/PO
the Send/Receive Information page. Information page to review the
PeopleSoft Purchasing/Payables
interface tables.

Retrieve Info from AP/PO Click Retrieve Info from AP/PO on Access the Retrieve Info from AP/PO
the Send/Receive Information page. page to run preinterface tables into
the transaction loader.

Load Transactions Click Load Transactions on the Access the Load Transactions folder
Send/Receive Information page. to load, consolidate, and unitize
transactions to PeopleSoft Asset
Management.

Load Interface Click Load Interface on the Access the Load Interface folder to
Send/Receive Information page. send data to and receive data from
PeopleSoft Asset Management tables.

22 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 2 Navigating in PeopleSoft Asset Management

Page Name Navigation Usage

Import Data via Spreadsheet Click Import Data via Spreadsheet on Access the Import Data via
the Send/Receive Information page. Spreadsheet folder to import new
assets from a spreadsheet using a
Component Interface utility.

Approve Financial Information Click Approve Financial Information Access the Approve Financial
on the Send/Receive Information Information folder to review and
page. approve financial interface table
transactions.

Approve Physical Information Click Approve Physical Information Access the Approve Physical
on the Send/Receive Information Information folder to review and
page. approve physical interface table A
and B transactions.

Approve Lease Information Click Approve Lease Information on Access the Approve Lease
the Send/Receive Information page. Information folder to review and
approve lease interface table
transactions.

Computer Aided Facility Mgmt Click Computer Aided Facility Mgmt Access the Computer Aided Facility
on the Send/Receive Information Mgmt folder to integrate department,
page. property, and employee information.

Taxes Click Taxes on the Asset Access the Taxes folder to process
Management menu. and produce tax reports.

Update CCA Click Update CCA on the Taxes page. Access the Update CCA folder to
update capital cost allowance
balances.

Calculate Local Taxes Click Calculate Local Taxes on the Access the Calculate Local Taxes
Taxes page. folder to update local tax information
in local tax returns (Japan).

Depreciation Click Depreciation on the Taxes page. Access the Depreciation folder to
calculate and update tax balances
(India).

Reports Click Reports on the Taxes page. Access the Reports folder to create
tax-related asset reports.

Asset Property Tax Click Asset Property Tax on the Access the Asset Property Tax page
Taxes page. to enter asset property taxes.

Service and Maintenance Click Service and Maintenance on the Access the Service and Maintenance
Asset Management menu. folder to create and maintain
insurance and service/repair
information.

Asset Insurance Click Asset Insurance on the Service Access the Asset Insurance page to
and Maintenance page. define asset insurance information.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 23
Navigating in PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 2

Page Name Navigation Usage

Asset Warranties Click Asset Warranties on the Service Access the Asset Warranties page to
and Maintenance page. maintain asset warranty and service
coverage information.

Maintenance Contract Terms Click Maintenance Contract Terms on Access the Maintenance Contract
the Service and Maintenance page. Terms page to enter or update terms
and coverage in maintenance
contracts.

Review Maintenance History Click Review Maintenance History Access the Review Maintenance
on the Service and Maintenance page. History page to review maintenance
history.

Track Service and Repairs Click Track Service and Repairs on Access the Track Service and Repairs
the Service and Maintenance page. page to enter or update asset service
and repair information.

Asset Inspection Click Asset Inspection on the Service Access the Asset Inspection page to
and Maintenance page. maintain asset inspection, cost, and
coverage information.

Asset Checkout Click Asset Checkout on the Service Access the Asset Checkout page to
and Maintenance page. check out assets for service and
repair.

Asset Meter Information Click Asset Meter Information on the Access the Asset Meter Information
Service and Maintenance page. folder to enter and update asset meter
reading and to review meter reading
history.

Reports Click Reports on the Service and Access the Reports folder to create
Maintenance page. warranties and license information
reports.

Physical Inventory Click Physical Inventory on the Asset Access the Physical Inventory folder
Management menu. to access asset physical inventory
processing.

Physical Inventory/Mass Change Click Physical Inventory/Mass Access the Physical Inventory/Mass
Change on the Physical Inventory Change page to define mass change
page. parameters for physical inventory
processing.

Create Schedules Click Create Schedules on the Access the Create Schedules page to
Physical Inventory page. create a physical inventory schedule.

Create Extract Rules Click Create Extract Rules on the Access the Create Extract Rules page
Physical Inventory page. to define physical inventory extract
rules.

24 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 2 Navigating in PeopleSoft Asset Management

Page Name Navigation Usage

Define Inventory Occurrence Click Define Inventory Occurrence Access the Define Inventory
on the Physical Inventory page. Occurrence page to establish physical
inventory (PI) control ID and default
PI asset transactions.

Load/Match/Reconcile PI Info Click Load/Match/Reconcile PI Info Access the Load/Match/Reconcile PI

on the Physical Inventory page. Info page to export or import asset
data to or from a bar code scanning
device.

Process CSV Files Click Process CSV Files on the Access the Process CSV Files page to
Physical Inventory page. create a comma-separated values
(CSV) file.

Verify Duplicate Tags Click Verify Duplicate Tags on the Access the Verify Duplicate Tags
Physical Inventory page. page to identify duplicate asset tags
scanned by physical inventory counts.

Verify Duplicate Serial ID Click Verify Duplicate Serial ID on Access the Verify Duplicate Serial ID
the Physical Inventory page. page to identify duplicate asset tags
scanned during physical inventory
counts.

Verify Scanned Data Click Verify Scanned Data on the Access the Verify Scanned Data page
Physical Inventory page. to enter search criteria for physical
inventory.

Review Matching Results Click Review Matching Results on Access the Review Matching Results
the Physical Inventory page. page to review discrepancies between
asset data and scanned physical
inventory data.

Review Inventory History Click Review Inventory History on Access the Review Inventory History
the Physical Inventory page. page to review assets' physical
inventory history.

Review Extracted Data Click Review Extracted Data on the Access the Review Extracted Data
Physical Inventory page. page to review asset extract
information.

Run Physical Inventory Reports Click Run Physical Inventory Reports Access the Run Physical Inventory
on the Physical Inventory page. Reports page to create the Physical
Inventory report.

Mass Change Click Mass Change on the Asset Access the Mass Change folder to
Management menu. define Mass Change templates and
process transactions.

Define Criteria Click Define Criteria on the Mass Access the Define Criteria page to
Change page. define mass change selection criteria.

Run Request Click Run Request on the Mass Access the Run Request page to run
Change page. the Mass Change process.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 25
Navigating in PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 2

Page Name Navigation Usage

Print an Asset Click Print an Asset on the Asset Access the Print an Asset page to
Management menu page. print asset detail information.

Search for an Asset Click Search for an Asset on the Access the Search for an Asset page
Asset Management menu page. to locate an asset and view with
drilldown detail functions.

Asset Definitions Center Click Asset Definitions Center on the Access the Asset Definitions Center
Asset Management menu. folder to administer asset setup and
configuration.

See Also

Chapter 1, "Getting Started With PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Management," page 1

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Navigating in PeopleSoft
Asset Lifecycle Management"

26 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
 Chapter 3

Implementing Asset Management

This chapter provides an overview of the steps to implement Asset Management

Understanding Asset Management

PeopleSoft provides a set of documentation components that complement each other to present all the
information you need to implement Asset Management. Before you do, it is helpful to understand the various
elements used in tandem with Asset Management.

Asset Management is the core financial product of the PeopleSoft Asset Lifecycle Management (ALM)
Solution. The other products that compose the ALM product suite are:

• PeopleSoft Enterprise IT Asset Management.

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Maintenance Management.

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Real Estate Management.

The Asset Repository Manager (ARM) is the central feature used in common by these products. The asset
repository is essentially the asset database, the core of asset processing. From the asset repository, assets are
made available to other products in pursuance of their respective business processes.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Understanding
PeopleSoft Asset Lifecycle Management," Understanding the Asset Repository.

The products included in the ALM product suite also integrate directly with PeopleSoft Enterprise Human
Capital Management.

Finally, Asset Management integrates with other Financials and Supply Chain Management products,
including:

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Billing.

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Budgeting.

• PeopleSoft Enterprise General Ledger.

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Project Costing.

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Payables.

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Purchasing.

• PeopleSoft Strategic Sourcing.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 27
Implementing Asset Management Chapter 3

Understanding the Asset Management Implementation Process

To implement Asset Management, you will find the information required to set up the tables and options used
by Asset Management and the other ALM products in the following resources:

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals PeopleBook.

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals PeopleBook

• PeopleSoft Enterprise IT Asset Management PeopleBook

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Maintenance Management PeopleBook

• PeopleSoft Enterprise Real Estate Management PeopleBook

Because the information you may need to fully implement Asset Management involves more than one
PeopleSoft product, you need to refer to the Getting Started chapter in each PeopleBook for specific
implementation and integration information.

Use the PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals PeopleBook to find detailed information about the
following functionality and processes:

• Defining Financials and Supply Chain Management common definitions.

• Setting installation options for PeopleSoft applications.

• Defining user preferences.

• Securing your system.

• Defining and using ChartFields.

• Editing ChartField combinations.

• Configuring ChartFields.

• Summarizing ChartFields using trees.

• Using entry events.

• Using alternate accounts.

• Defining accounting calendars.

• Setting up ledgers.

• Using journal generator.

• Using interunit and intraunit accounting and ChartField inheritance.

• Processing allocations.

• Setting up on-demand processing.

Use the Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals PeopleBook to find detailed information about the
following functionality and processes:

28 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 3 Implementing Asset Management

• Establishing asset business units and cash generating units

• Establishing asset processing, including defining asset attributes, profiles, ownership and reporting
options.

• Setting up accounting entry and financial processing.

• Setting up depreciation processing.

• Setting up tax processing and tax reporting.

• Integrating with other products.

• Using delivered workflows for assets.

• Configuring background processing for assets.

• Working with the Loader Table Data Dictionary.

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook

PeopleSoft Enterprise Global Options and Reports 9.1 PeopleBook

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook

PeopleSoft Enterprise IT Asset Management 9.1 PeopleBook

PeopleSoft Enterprise Maintenance Management 9.1 PeopleBook

PeopleSoft Enterprise Real Estate Management 9.1 PeopleBook

PeopleSoft Enterprise Financials, Enterprise Service Automation, Asset Lifecycle Management Portal Packs
9.1 PeopleBook

PeopleSoft Enterprise Billing 9.1 PeopleBook

PeopleSoft Enterprise General Ledger 9.1 PeopleBook

PeopleSoft Enterprise Payables 9. PeopleBook

PeopleSoft Enterprise Project Costing 9.1 PeopleBook

PeopleSoft Enterprise Purchasing 9.1 PeopleBook

PeopleSoft Enterprise Strategic Sourcing 9.1 PeopleBook

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 29
 Chapter 4

Converting to PeopleSoft Asset

Management
This chapter provides an overview of converting to PeopleSoft Asset Management and discusses how to:

• Convert with a customized Structured Query Report (SQR).

• Run the Transaction Loader Edit program.

• Preview and approve results.

• Populate PeopleSoft Asset Management tables with asset data.

• Depreciate converted assets.

• Close the conversion process.

• Load retired assets.

• Convert lease information.

Understanding Conversion to PeopleSoft Asset Management

You can convert data using any number of methods that are available to you. You may want to generate a
custom program after mapping records and fields from the existing database to the new PeopleSoft database;
or you can perform the steps that are outlined in this chapter, using the application engine processes that are
available from Oracle to convert the data.

The general tasks are:

1. Set up the database tables that will store accounting structure and asset information.

2. Transfer data from the existing system to PeopleSoft Asset Management.

No strict rules exist for performing these tasks. The pace and flow of the implementation will be guided by
the requirements of your business environment, available personnel resources, and any unexpected events that
you may encounter during the process.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 31
Converting to PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 4

If you use the PeopleSoft application engine processes that are described in this chapter to convert your data,
Asset Management business units and books must be established before you transfer data into the loader
tables. The sequence of other table setups are more flexible. You may want to partially complete the
conversion before doing some table setup. For example, as you set up the Location table, you can refer to the
record layout from your conversion file to determine how many different locations you need to establish and
what they should be called. In general, however, you should complete the table setup that provides your
system structure to begin building your asset management database. Your table setup must be complete
before you can finish converting your asset data. The final conversion step, depreciating converted assets,
cannot be carried out until all PeopleSoft Asset Management tables are set up. Setting up the database tables
that provide your accounting structure and store asset information is discussed in previous chapters. Please
refer to these for more details of the tasks involved.

Data validation is an important step as you plan and implement the conversion. Before you begin converting
asset data from the current system, look closely at the existing data. Depending on the integrity of the source
data, your first step should be to validate the existing data before you begin converting. At various intervals of
the data conversion process, you will have the opportunity to examine the data. Create checks and balances as
part of your conversion plan to test data that is being loaded into the PeopleSoft database.

Note. The Excel to CI PeopleTools spreadsheet utility enables you to use a PeopleSoft Asset Management
template to upload asset data from another source to the PeopleSoft database. You should not plan to use this
utility to convert your initial database. This utility is designed to assist in situations in which manual data
entry would be tedious. Because the Excel to CI utility is limited to importing 65K rows of data at a time,
large volumes of data cannot be uploaded. Because this utility has no automatic error checking, you should
carefully review all rows of data being uploaded and correct any problems as you discover them. Finally, the
Asset Management template that is used for Excel to CI does not populate the INTFC_PHY_B tables. Data
uploaded by this method may require additional manual data entry. Given these constraints, using the Excel to
CI utility to convert legacy data to new PeopleSoft records is not recommended.

See Also

Appendix A, "Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary," page 531

Prerequisites
Before proceeding with the data conversion, you must set up your business units and tables.

We strongly recommend that you add and depreciate some assets online before beginning the conversion
process.

Performing these actions is a good test of your table setup. They enable you to test your Asset Profiles to
ensure that they are working the way you intended, and you can see how the depreciation program works and
how it is affected by different variables and conventions. Knowing what to expect from the PeopleSoft Asset
Management application before you begin the conversion will assist you in making decisions for planning
and carrying out the conversion.

32 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 4 Converting to PeopleSoft Asset Management

Converting with a Customized SQR

To transfer data from an existing system into PeopleSoft Asset Management loader tables, you can write a
custom SQR and use the delivered Asset Management application engines in this way:

1. Write and run a program that transfers data from the existing system into the Asset Management loader
tables.

The following table describes the interim tables in Asset Management:

Table Description

INTFC_FIN Contains financial asset data.

INTFC_PHY_A Contains physical asset data.

INTFC_PHY_B Contains physical asset data.

Note. When writing this SQR, note that for load types of CN1 that use NEXT in the ASSET_ID field,
each load line should have a unique INTFC_ID. This unique value ensures that Asset IDs are generated
correctly. In all other cases, you should use one INTFC_ID for each set of transactions with the same load
type.

Note. The sample conversion program, AMCV1000.SQR, and its SQC links are not supported.

2. Run the Transaction Edit program (AMIFEDIT) to perform edit checks on the specified data fields to
ensure that the information you load into PeopleSoft Asset Management is correct. The data fields that are
edited include ChartFields, business units, and books.

3. Preview and approve data in the loader tables.

Use the Financials Transactions page, Physical Transactions A page, and Physical Transactions B page to
see which data was loaded into the loader tables.

4. Use the Transaction Loader process (AMIF1000) to transfer information from the loader tables into your
Asset Management tables.

This process reads data in the INTFC_FIN, INTFC_PHY_A and INTFC_PHY_B tables and then
populates the Asset Management tables with the asset data. This data appears in Asset Management as
open transactions.

The AMIF1000 process has two options for populating open transaction accounting and transaction date
fields with respect to how costs and accumulated depreciation are loaded. Search for RJS2-34 in
AMIF1000 and choose the option that matches your business needs before running the program.

See Chapter 4, "Converting to PeopleSoft Asset Management," Using Transaction Loader Conversion
Dates Options, page 37.

5. Convert and depreciate the assets.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 33
Converting to PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 4

Note. When converting data from another system to PeopleSoft Asset Management, you should convert data
as of the period before you want the system effective. You should calculate depreciation as of the first period
that the system is effective.

For example, if you want the system to be effective on January 1, 2006, you should convert all your data as of
December 31, 2005. The fiscal year, START_PD, and END_PD on the depreciation table should be 2005, 12,
12. The TRANS_DT and DTTM_STAMP should be December 31, 2005. However, you should calculate
depreciation with OPEN_TRANS accounting and transaction dates of January 1, 2006.

The following diagram shows the Asset conversion process:

Asset conversion process

See Also

Appendix A, "Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary," page 531

Running the Transaction Loader Edit Program

Before running the Transaction Loader (AMIF1000) program, you must run the Transaction Loader Edit
(AMIFEDIT) program to check for valid values. The Transaction Loader Edit program edits the fields you
specify, validates values, and marks those values that are in error. Using one or both of two available queries,
you can check the results and view messages for those fields that are in error. This process helps ensure that
the data is correct when it is entered by the Transaction Loader into PeopleSoft Asset Management tables.

This section discusses how to:

• Use the Transaction Loader Edit page.

• View the results of the Transaction Edit program.

34 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 4 Converting to PeopleSoft Asset Management

Pages Used to Run the Transaction Loader Edit Program

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Transaction Loader Edit RUN_AMIFEDIT1 Asset Management, Run the Transaction Edit
Send/Receive Information, program.
Load Transactions, Edit
Transactions, Edit
Transactions

BU Book Chartfields AMIFEDIT_CF_SEC Click the Chartfields link on Select ChartField summary
Summarize the Transaction Loader Edit options for the transaction
page. loader edit process.

Using the Transaction Loader Edit Page

Access the Transaction Loader Edit page (Asset Management, Send/Receive Information, Load Transactions,
Edit Transactions, Edit Transactions).

Edit Transactions page

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 35
Converting to PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 4

Interface Edit Options

Select all the fields on which you want to perform the edit valuation. Deselect those fields that will have no
values because you do not use the field (that is, optional fields Category and Tax Class.).

Note. The default condition is to run edit checks on all of these fields. They are all selected when you first
display the page. To prevent an edit check on a particular field, deselect that check box.

Find Trans Load ID (transaction load ID)

System Source Generates the transactions that you want to edit.

Load Type A more detailed version of Trans Type. One trans type can generate several
different load types.

Note. Whenever you rerun the Transaction Edit program, old message files from the previous run are deleted.

Viewing the Results of the Transaction Edit Program

To view results from the Transaction Edit program, run the following two queries:

• AM_INTFC_PHY_A_MSG (Interface Physical A Edit Messages) to see physical records.

• AM_INTFC_FIN_MSG (Interface Financial Edit Messages) to see financial records.

Previewing and Approving Results

After the asset data is in the loader tables, you will need to verify that the information in the loader tables is
correct and approve all the load lines that you want to load into PeopleSoft Asset Management. This review
and approval process is designed to prevent you from inadvertently loading massive amounts of invalid data
into the system.

Use the Financials Transactions page, Physical Transactions A page, and Physical Transactions B page to see
which data was loaded into INTFC_FIN, INTFC_PHY_A, and INTFC_PHY_B. If you find errors, you can
either correct them online using the SQL query tool or modify your custom SQR and run the program again.

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Integrating PeopleSoft
Asset Management with Other Products," Previewing Data in the Loader Tables

36 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 4 Converting to PeopleSoft Asset Management

Populating Asset Management Tables with Asset Data

This data conversion step populates PeopleSoft Asset Management database tables with the data that you just
loaded into INTFC_FIN, INTFC_PHY_A, and INTFC_PHY_B by running the Transaction Loader
Application Engine, AMIF1000.

The Transaction Loader is also used for mass transactions. After performing a mass change, run this
Application Engine to create entries in Asset Management tables.

Note. You must run the Transaction Edit program (AMIFEDIT) before running the Transaction Loader,
especially at conversion time. The Transaction Edit program performs edit checks on the data fields that you
specify to help ensure that the information you load into PeopleSoft Asset Management is correct. Review the
data that is loaded into INTFC_FIN, INTFC_PHY_A, and INTFC_PHY_B and look carefully at the
Transaction Loader Application Engine (AMIF1000) before you run it. You may need to change some of the
data defaults that it contains.

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Integrating PeopleSoft
Asset Management with Other Products," Running the Transaction Loader

Using Transaction Loader Conversion Dates Options

At conversion, you have two options when you use the Transaction Loader to populate open transaction
accounting and transaction dates:

• Make the open transaction accounting and transaction dates the first day of the following period of the
specified accounting date.

• Make the open transaction accounting and transaction date the same as the date that is specified in the
Financial Interface table (INTFC_FIN).

First Day of the Following Accounting Period

To populate the open transaction accounting and transaction dates with the first day of the following
accounting period, perform these steps.

1. Sign in to the Application Design.

2. Open Application Engine AMIF_FIN_PHY.

3. Scroll down to section 200120 and click the plus sign to expand the section.

4. Make sure that Step 100 and Step 120 are Inactive and Step 130 is Active.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 37
Converting to PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 4

Populate Dates as Specified in INTFC_FIN

To populate the open transaction accounting and transaction dates with the date that is specified in the
INTFC_FIN table, perform these steps:

1. Sign in to the Application Design.

2. Open Application Engine AMIF_FIN_PHY.

3. Scroll down to section 200120 and click the plus sign to expand the section.

4. Make sure that Step 100 and Step 120 are Active and Step 130 is Inactive.

Depreciating Converted Assets

The final step in converting to PeopleSoft Asset Management is to process all the open transactions that were
created by the Transaction Loader. You will run the programs to:

• Calculate depreciation (AM_DEPR_CALC).

• Create accounting entries (AM_AMAEDIST).

• Close depreciation (AM_DPCLOSE).

Note. When converting data from the current system to PeopleSoft Asset Management, you should convert
data as of the period before you want the system effective. You should calculate depreciation as of the first
period that the system is effective.

For example, if you want the system to be effective on 01/01/06, you should convert all of the data as of
12/31/05. The fiscal year, START_PD and END_PD on the depreciation table, should be 2005, 12, 12,
respectively. The TRANS_DT and DTTM_STAMP should be 12/31/05. However, you should calculate
depreciation with OPEN_TRANS accounting and transaction dates of 01/01/06.

For converted assets and assets that are loaded through the Transaction Loader, the default is to book
accumulated depreciation to the previous period. However, any accumulated depreciation is booked to the
current period:

1. If you populate the START_PD, END_PD and FISCAL_YEAR fields in the Financial Loader table
(INTFC_FIN) with values for the current period.

2. If the amount in the DEPR field is not 0.

Closing the Conversion Process

At this point, the conversion has created all the data in the system, and all assets are depreciated. Before you
can move into full production, you must now close the conversion process by completing these steps:

• Verify the conversion to approve conversion results.

• Restore disk space by removing unnecessary tables from the system.

38 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 4 Converting to PeopleSoft Asset Management

• Update security to restrict access to the conversion SQRs now that they are no longer needed.

Page Used to Close the Conversion Process

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Receive Conversion Data RUN_AMCV2000 Asset Management, Run the Interface Loader
Send/Receive Information, program to delete data from
Load Interface, Receive the loader tables.
Conversion Data, Receive
Conversion Data

Verifying the Conversion

You must run implementation checks to make sure that all the calculations used the correct values, followed
the methods that you intended, and so forth. By balancing the conversion, you verify that the currency
amounts in the system are those that you expect to see. If they are not, you need to verify your source system
data and check the SQRs to determine where you might have inadvertently used the wrong depreciation
method, an invalid date, or some other variable that affects calculations.

Restoring Disk Space

Access the Receive Conversion Data page (Asset Management, Send/Receive Information, Load Interface,
Receive Conversion Data, Receive Conversion Data).

Receive Conversion Data page

When the conversion is complete, you will want to release the disk space that is occupied by all the interim
tables that you used in the process. Working backwards, you can delete data from the tables that were
populated by using the Interface Loader.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 39
Converting to PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 4

Load/Delete Process Buttons

Select Delete Fin/Phy and run this request. Process Scheduler runs the AMCV2000 process at user-defined
intervals.

Updating Security
You may want to restrict access to the Interface Loader and Transaction Loader after the conversion is
completed and approved. Review the system security page settings and make changes as warranted.

See Also

Enterprise PeopleTools PeopleBook, "Security Administration"

Loading Retired Assets

You can add retired assets and asset history to the database. The load type ARA is used specifically for
loading historical information for assets that are already retired.

For this load type, the Transaction Loader inserts records into the Asset field and, if applicable, Asset
Custodian,Asset Location,Warranty,Attribute,License,Comments,PI Asset History,Parent Asset, and
Acquisition Detail fields. It creates Book and Cost rows, as well as one row of accumulated depreciation for
each book, all using the transaction type ADD. After modifying some of the values in INTFC_FIN and
changing the transaction type to RET, the Transaction Loader inserts Cost and Retirement rows. The status of
the assets is set to D (Disposed) for retired assets.

To load retired assets:

• Consider prerequisites for retiring assets.

• Populate loader tables.

• Review the retired asset data.

Considerations for Retiring Assets

Before loading retired assets, note these considerations:

• Assets should be fully depreciated and retired.

You can add partially retired assets, but the remaining cost basis will not be depreciated or processed in
any way.

• The depreciation process (AM_DEPR_CALC) need not be run after the retired assets are loaded.

40 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 4 Converting to PeopleSoft Asset Management

• After you add retired assets, you can reinstate them.

Note. The ARA interface type was designed to load fully depreciated, retired, or historical assets in cases
for which AM_DEPR_CALC would never run and the assets would never be reinstated. To accommodate
reinstatement of historical assets in this case, change the ARA interface type as needed.

Populating Loader Tables

To load retired assets using the ARA load type, follow these instructions to populate the loader tables:

• If you have a valid asset profile that is effective-dated correctly and the assets have the same amounts for
cost, depreciation, gain/loss, and so on for each book (use the same depreciation conventions), you can
load the retired assets with the DEFAULT_PROFILE_SW set to Y.

In this case, you should set DEFAULT_PROFILE_SW to Yon INTFC_FIN and INTFC_PHY_A, enter
the valid profile ID in INTFC_PHY_A, and make only one entry in INTFC_FIN for each asset. Leave the
BOOK field blank.

• If this is not the case, set the DEFAULT_PROFILE_SW to N and load one record for each book for each
asset into INTFC_FIN. Consequently, if one asset reports to two books, you will load two records for the
asset into INTFC_FIN.

Enter the accumulated depreciation into INTFC_FIN.DEPR, one entry for every ChartField combination.
Each entry in INTFC_FIN corresponds to a row in PS_DEPRECIATION.

To simplify populating the load tables, one entry in INTFC_FIN is used to create both an ADD and a RET
cost row for each book.

The key difference between the ADD and the RET rows is the DTTM_STAMP. The Transaction Loader loads
the ADD row first, and then it increments the DTTM_STAMP by one day, sets the RETIRE_SW to 1, and
multiplies COST and QUANTITY by negative 1 (−1). It then loads this as the RET row.

Note that when the Transaction Loader finishes successfully, values in all the INTFC_FIN rows for ARA
INTFC_TYPE and INTFC_ID will have changed. If you want to rerun the transaction using the same
INTFC_ID entries:

• Subtract one day from DTTM_STAMP.

• Set RETIRE_SW back to 0.

• Set the LOAD_STATUS to New (pending).

• Multiply the COST and QUANTITY by negative 1 (−1).

These actions restore the rows to their original values.

Reviewing Retired Asset Data

After you load retired assets, pay close attention to these INTFC_FIN fields:

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 41
Converting to PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 4

INTFC_FIN Field Name Value

DEPR Accumulated depreciation.

INTFC_TYPE ARA.

RETIREMENT_DT The asset historical retirement date.

DTTM_STAMP Although you can set this to any value, we recommend

that you set it to the earliest date/time stamp used for
any of the assets that you are loading. This setting will
ensure that it is earlier than all the retirement dates.

RETIRE_QUANTITY Make sure it is a negative number.

RETIREMENT_AMT Make sure it is a negative number.

FISCAL_YEAR Represents the fiscal year (FY) of the accumulated

depreciation.

START_PD Starting period.

END_PD Ending period.

GAIN_LOSS Gain or loss.

END_DEPR_DT Ending depreciation date.

BEGIN_DEPR_DT Beginning depreciation date.

ACTIVITY_SW 0

RETIRE_SW 0 (AMIF1000 handles the switch to 1 for the RET cost

row).

RETIREMENT_RSV Accumulated depreciation.

Also pay close attention to these INTFC_PHY_A fields:

42 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 4 Converting to PeopleSoft Asset Management

INTFC_PHY_A Field Name Value

CAPITALIZATION_SW 2

PROFILE_ID Must be valid in PROFILE_DET_TBL if you set

DEFAULT_PROFILE_SW = Y in INTFC_FIN and
INTFC_PHY_A..

When using the Transaction Loader, you need not populate those fields that contain data in the
PROFILE_DET_TBL if you provide a valid PROFILE_ID and set DEFAULT_PROFILE_SW to Y on both
INTFC_FIN and INTFC_PHY_A.

Converting Lease Information

The interface load table INTFC_LEASE contains leased asset information for lease schedules that were
already calculated. This lease interface table is used to add leases to PeopleSoft Asset Management tables
using the Transaction Loader interface type LAD (Leased Asset Addition). The lease payment schedule
information should be populated in the INTFC_LEASE table; it is not calculated by the Transaction Loader.

Before running the Transaction Loader, the INTFC_LEASE, INTFC_FIN and INTFC_PHY_A tables must be
loaded with leased asset information. The new ASSET_IDs are calculated if the interface table ASSET_ID
fields are set to NEXT. If NEXT ASSET_ID is used, each INTFC_LINE_NUM should represent one
ASSET_ID, and the same INTFC_LINE_NUM should be used for all three interface tables.

These fields are required in INTFC_LEASE:

• PYMNT_DT

• PYMNT_SCHED_ID (Do not populate this field with NEXT; it will not be assigned automatically.)

• LEASE_TERM

• LEASE_TYPE

• IMPLICIT_RATE

• PV_MLP

• CAP_LEASE_AMT

• LEASE_DT

• MRP

• INTEREST_EXPENSE

• OBLIGATION_REDUCE

• EST_LIFE

These fields can have values of zero or N, or the default value from the profile (if you are using default profile
switch = "Yes"):

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 43
Converting to PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 4

• FV

• BPO

• BPO_PAYMENT

• BORROW_RATE

• ACTUAL_RESIDUAL

• GUAR_RESIDUAL

• TSFR_OWNERSHIP_FLAG

• RENEWAL_OPTION

• ITC_AMT

• EXECUTORY_COSTS

If LEASE_TYPE = O (Operating Lease), then DEFAULT_PROFILE_SW must equal N. If it is an operating

lease asset, then the BOOK field in the LEASE_OPER record will be populated with the DEFAULT_BOOK
in the BUS_UNIT_TBL_AM record.

All of the preceding fields affect the LEASE_BOOK. The INTFC_FIN.LIFE on the LEASE_BOOK should
be calculated as FREQUENCY × LEASE_TERM. For example, if the PYMNT_SCHED_ID is monthly and
LEASE_TERM = 24, then LIFE = 24 and ESTIMATED LIFE = 24. The preceding data is needed for lease
adjustments in Asset Management.

When the INTFC_LEASE table is populated, you can use the Load Preview-Lease page to review and correct
lease data before uploading to the PeopleSoft Asset Management tables.

Pages Used to Convert Lease Information

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Load Preview-Lease INTFC_LEASE Asset Management, Review and, if necessary,

Send/Receive Information, correct lease data before
Approve Lease Information, uploading it to PeopleSoft
Review Asset Management tables.

Load Approval - Lease INTFC_LEASE_APPR Asset Management, Approve lease data before
Send/Receive Information, uploading to PeopleSoft
Approve Lease Information, Asset Management tables.
Approve

44 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
 Chapter 5

Adding and Maintaining Assets

This chapter provides an overview of adding and maintaining assets and discusses how to:

• Add and maintain asset information.

• Maintain asset meters.

• Maintain warranties.

• Maintain asset book information.

• Add assets with the Asset ExpressAdd component.

• Copy an asset.

• View and manage the component asset hierarchy.

• Create parent-child asset relationships.

• Calculate asset replacement costs.

• Define asset operational information.

• Search for assets.

• Print asset information.

• Add assets with the Excel to Component Interface utility.

Understanding Adding and Maintaining Assets

PeopleSoft Asset Management stores the following types of asset information:

• Financial information includes details about cost, books, depreciation method and convention, and useful
life.

• Physical information includes asset tag numbers, specifications, location, custodian, and manufacturer.

Oracle's PeopleSoft Asset Lifecycle Management (ALM) solution provides complete access to the entire asset
portfolio, regardless of asset class, and featuring visibility into total cost of ownership by enabling cost
tracking associated with acquisition as well as lifetime maintenance and performance.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 45
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Working with other products within the PeopleSoft ALM solution, including PeopleSoft IT Asset
Management, PeopleSoft Maintenance Management, and PeopleSoft Real Estate Management, PeopleSoft
Asset Management provides functionality for the completeplan to retire business process, from the initial
planning and acquisition of assets to the end-of-life disposal of assets.

PeopleSoft Asset Management provides a common Asset Repository Manager (ARM), accessible to all
PeopleSoft ALM products and other PeopleSoft integrated products, which stores all asset data. The
repository provides a single source for all physical, financial, or operational asset data.

Adding Assets

After you establish PeopleSoft Asset Management foundation tables, you can add assets. This section
discusses the different ways to add assets. The approach that you use depends on the needs of your
organization and how much information is available when the assets are added.

To add assets, you can:

• Use Express Add to add assets using an asset profile for default book and depreciation information.

When assets are capitalized, most of the critical information is derived from the asset profile by default,
and detailed physical information can be entered later.

• Use Basic Add when much of the physical information is readily available at the start.

You can capitalize the asset immediately or later using the appropriate asset profile.

• Use Define Asset Operational Info to add nonfinancial assets.

• Use Excel to CI to add assets by uploading asset information from PeopleSoft's integrated Excel
spreadsheet component interface.

This process enables you to add multiple assets to generate PeopleSoft-formatted data from a predefined
Excel asset template.

The PeopleSoft system enables asset receiving when you use PeopleSoft Purchasing, PeopleSoft Payables, or
PeopleSoft Project Costing. You can initially add an asset with only its physical information and then
capitalize the asset when you receive financial information from the invoice. Conversely, you can initially
add the asset's financial information when you order it and then add the physical information once it is
received; or you can enter all of the information at once.

You can also add assets through PeopleSoft Project Costing, along with all of the pertinent project
information.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Project Costing 9.1 PeopleBook, "Managing Assets," Setting Up and Using
Express Capitalization.

PeopleSoft Asset Management allows you to use transaction currencies for multinational transactions. This
enables you to maintain a base or local currency and conduct transactions with foreign entities by selecting a
transaction currency for individual transactions. By establishing an exchange rate to convert the currencies,
you can complete transactions in multiple currencies and convert them back to the base currency as needed.

Capitalization Threshold

PeopleSoft Asset Management can determine capitalization status of an asset based on its cost according to
limits that you define. When adding new assets, either online or batch, the system automatically classifies
them according to their cost into one of the following categories:

46 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

• Capital Assets - The system generates an asset ID and stores physical and financial information. Financial
information is stored in the cost table. The system also stores acquisition details. Therefore, these assets
are trackable from both a physical and financial standpoint. This term is interchangeable with Financial
Assets.

• Noncapital Assets - The system generates an asset ID and stores physical but not financial information on
the cost table (COST). The cost information is stored in the Non-capitalized cost table. The system also
stores acquisition details. Therefore, these assets are trackable from a physical standpoint only. This term
is synonymous with Trackable Assets or Nonfinancial Assets.

• Expense Assets - The system does not generate an asset ID. If an asset is entered online that does not meet
the capitalization threshold, an error message appears saying that the asset has been catalogued as an
expense due to its cost amount and could not be considered as an asset. If the asset is entered in batch, the
system stores a message in an audit table that explains why that interface line was not processed. Because
of their low cost, these assets are considered an expense when acquired and there is no interest to track
them within the Asset Repository.

The Capitalization Threshold functionality is optional and can be enabled at the installation and business unit
levels. Define the actual capitalization thresholds at the asset profile level. PeopleSoft Asset Management
automatically catalogues the capitalization status for batch and online asset additions, provides processes to
deal with adjustments to the original cost, balances out any potential clearing account with other feeder
systems, and provides reports and audit trails to facilitate control of these transactions.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up
Accounting Entry and Financial Processing for PeopleSoft Asset Management," Setting Up Capitalization
Thresholds.

Document Sequencing

Statutory requirements in some countries require that all financial transactions (documents) be classified into
different transaction types, and that within each transaction type, all documents entered be numbered
sequentially. The document sequencing feature helps you maintain established business practices by meeting
both of these requirements.

Document sequencing is available for transactions that you create either online or through background (batch)
processing. When you activate document sequencing, the system automatically assigns a sequence number to
each document (invoice, voucher, journal, and so on) that you create. You can also enter sequence numbers
manually. When you delete, change, or unpost a document, the system may generate additional document
sequence numbers, as appropriate.

The document sequence page (AM_DOC_SEQ) is used throughout the PeopleSoft Asset Management
application where a financial transaction occurs: Express Add, Basic Add, Cost Adjustment and Transfer,
Leases, Copy Assets, Adjust Accumulated Depreciation, Update/Delete Pending Transactions, Impairment,
and Retirement. Each page displays a document sequencing tab for the entry and enables you to view, enter,
or override document sequence information.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up
Accounting Entry and Financial Processing for PeopleSoft Asset Management," Defining Document
Sequencing.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 47
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Component Changeout

When you integrate PeopleSoft Asset Management with PeopleSoft Maintenance Management, component
changeout functionality (swapping of older or broken components for newer replacement components) is
enabled. The component changeout feature enables you to manage asset component swapping when failure or
replacement is required to maintain an asset. A component is replaced with a "like-component" and the
characteristics and attributes of the new component are associated with the overall larger asset. A component
can be removed from one asset and marked for reuse in another asset. A component can also be served by
parts. PeopleSoft Asset Management enables you to maintain an equipment parts list and associate it with an
asset.

The Asset Repository manages the complete setup for component changeout functionality with predefined
defaulting component hierarchy, and makes this information available to the work order operator to facilitate
completion of the tasks associated with component changeout transactions.

The component changeout transaction installs, replaces, removes, and disposes component assets within the
Asset Repository. The process allows asset transfer and disposal transactions, which are then passed to
PeopleSoft Asset Management through the Transaction Loader process.

When the option to remove assets for reuse is selected, you map the ChartField accounts to be used for the
transfer by entering the information on the Warehouse Mapping page through the Transaction Loader
process. When the option to replace assets is selected, the transferred assets are updated with new
replacement asset information through the Transaction Loader.

Meters and Warranties

Some assets are delivered with warranties or other maintenance contracts. As well, some assets may be
insured where replacement of parts or service is covered under the insurance contract. PeopleSoft Asset
Management enables you to track warranty, maintenance, and insurance information associated with assets.

Some assets make use of meters to track usage for maintenance or billing purposes. Asset Management
provides meter types and meter reading pages to monitor asset usage for these purposes.

See Chapter 9, "Managing Asset Maintenance, Repair, Warranties, and Insurance," page 229.

Adding and Maintaining Asset Information

This section discusses how to:

• Add asset basic information.

• Enter asset details.

• Enter asset acquisition details.

• View asset tax information.

• Enter document sequencing information.

• Enter asset location, comments, and attributes information.

• Enter custodial, license, and manufacturer information.

48 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

• Enter property assets.

• Enter property taxes.

• Enter asset supplemental data.

• Add attachments.

Pages Used to Add or Change Asset Information

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

General Information ASSET_GENERAL_01 Asset Management, Asset Add asset basic information
Transactions, Owned manually, or modify
Assets, Basic Add existing asset information.

Asset R&D Information ASSET_RD_SP Click the Set R and D Info Enter information about
(asset research and link on the General R&D assets. In Australia,
development information) Information page. this information is used for
tax reporting purposes;
otherwise, it is
informational only.

Warehouse Mapping AM_WH_MAP_ASSET Click the Asset Warehouse Enter transfer information
Mapping link on the defaults for assets used in
General Information page. component changeout for
PeopleSoft Maintenance
Management. This page is
used by PeopleSoft IT Asset
Management and
PeopleSoft Maintenance
Management to transfer
assets to a defined
warehouse. Custodian,
Location, and Employee ID
are also available.
Custodian will inherit the
ChartFields defined for the
warehouse.

Asset Management - AM_ADD_ATTACH_SEC Click the Attachments link Add relevant supporting
Attachments on the General Information documents to an asset
page. transaction.

Fair Value AM_FMV_DEFN Click the Fair Value Details Update fair value (FV)
link on the General information for each asset.
Information page. The data is stored on the
AM_FMV record and is
used for revaluation of the
asset in accordance with
statutory requirements.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 49
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

(JPN) Local Tax Return LTAX_ADD_INFO_SEC Click the Local Tax Enter local tax information
Information link on the when you acquire
General Information page. depreciable fixed assets.

Note. Report local tax

return information for
Japan.

Operation/Maintenance ASSET_GENERAL_02 Asset Management, Asset Enter detailed physical

Transactions, Owned information
Assets, Basic Add,
Operation/Maintenance

Work Order Management AM_WOM_OPT_ASSET Click the Work Order Enter Work Order–related
Options for Components information relevant to the
link on the asset.
Operation/Maintenance
page.

Hazardous Asset Codes ASSET_FSC Click the Hazardous Code When an asset is defined as
Info link on the hazardous, describe it by
Operation/Maintenance selecting at least one
page. hazardous code from the
list.

Asset Acquisition Detail ASSET_ACQ_DETAIL Asset Management, Asset Store information about
Transactions, Owned how the asset was acquired
Assets, Basic Add, Asset and keep track of the
Acquisition Detail separate costs and
acquisition details of
components that make up
an asset.

Note. If PeopleSoft Asset

Management is integrated
with PeopleSoft Payables,
PeopleSoft Receivables,
PeopleSoft Purchasing, or
PeopleSoft Project Costing,
these source systems will
enter the information
automatically.

50 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Acquisition Details ASSET_ACQ_DET_AP Click the Interfaces Info View or enter information
link on the Acquisition about assets acquired
Detail page. through other PeopleSoft
applications. If Asset
Management is integrated
with other PeopleSoft
applications, the source
systems send the asset
information through
delivered interfaces. If not,
you can add the information
here.

Acquisition Detail ASSET_ACQ_DET_CF Click the Acquisition Detail Enter acquisition ChartField
Chartfields Chartfields link on the details for the asset.
Asset Acquisition Detail
page.

Doc Sequencing (document AM_DOC_SEQ Asset Management, Asset Enter document sequencing
sequencing) Transactions, Owned information.
Assets, Basic Add, Doc
Sequencing

Tax ASSET_ACQ_DET_VAT Click the Tax link on the Enter tax information for
Asset Acquisition Detail the asset. This feature is
page. available only if the
business unit is activated for
value-added tax (VAT)
processing.

Location/Comments/Attribu ASSET_IMAGE Asset Management, Asset Record the location and

tes Transactions, Owned physical properties of the
Assets, Basic Add, asset (such as color, height,
Location/Comments/Attribu and weight) and store
tes comments about it; view a
stored image of the asset.

Assets by Location - RUN_AMAS2200 Asset Management, Generate a report of assets

Parameters Financial Reports, Asset sorted by location.
Details, By Location

Manufacture/License/Custo ASSET_CUSTODIAN Asset Management, Asset Record custodial

dian Transactions, Owned information, maintain
Assets, Basic Add, license information, and
Manufacture/License/Custo store manufacturer-related
dian information.
Or click the More
Manufacturer Info link on
the Operation/Maintenance
page.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 51
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

License Address ASSET_LIC_ADDR_SEC Click the Address button Enter address information
on the associated with an asset
Manufacture/License/Custo license.
dian page in the License
Information group box.

License Information - RUN_AMAS1700 Asset Management, Service Generate a report of asset

Parameters and Maintenance, Reports, licenses.
License Information

Asset Property ASSET_PROPERTY Asset Management, Asset Enter details to manage

Transactions, Owned property assets and to
Assets, Basic Add, Asset maintain property-specific
Property attributes such as
identifying information,
asset hierarchy, area and
occupancy, and legal
descriptions. This page tab
appears when the asset type
of Property is selected;
however, if Lease
Administration is not a
selected product within
Installation Options and
Space Management
Installed is not selected
within the Asset
Management Installation
Options, the Property page
is disabled.

Record Property Taxes ASSET_PROP_TAX Click the Enter Property Enter property tax details
Taxes link on the Asset including due dates, taxing
Property page. authorities, and payments.

Asset Supplemental Data AM_ASSET_SD Asset Management, Asset Record additional data
Transactions, Owned based upon asset business
Assets, Basic Add, Asset unit, asset type, subtype,
Supplemental Data manufacturer, and model.

Adding Asset Basic Information

Access the General Information page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Owned Assets, Basic Add,
General Information).

52 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Basic Add - General Information page

Unit Displays the business unit in which the asset is defined.

Asset ID Select the default value Next to have the system automatically assign the next
available number. You can also enter an alphanumeric value of your own.

Note. When entering joint venture assets that are shared among several business
units, it is recommended that you assign a unique asset ID. This ensures that the
assets created at the participant level all have the same ID as the assets created at
the joint venture business unit level. For example, you might use the prefix JV,
which would generate an asset ID such as JV000022.

Tag Displays the tag number for assets already entered.

Asset Status Displays of the current status of the asset, such as In Service.

Description and Short Enter identifying and descriptive information about the asset. The short
Description description can be an abbreviated description.

CAP # (capital Enter a capital acquisition plan number and associated sequence number, if
acquisition plan number) applicable. The capital acquisition plan number ties the asset to a capital
and Seq # (sequence acquisition plan. Only valid numbers set up in the Capital Acquisition Plan table
number) are accepted. The sequence number defines the detailed elements of the capital
acquisition plan.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 53
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Taggable Asset and Tag If you use tags to track assets, enter the tag number assigned to the asset. This
Number automatically selects the Taggable Asset check box. Asset Management performs
physical inventory using the asset tag number. If the business unit for this asset is
set up to allow a default tag number based on the asset ID, the default tag number
appears here.

Note. You must use tag numbers to perform physical inventory with the Asset
Management physical inventory application.

See Chapter 12, "Performing Asset Physical Inventory," page 275.

Asset Class If you use classifications to define assets within categories, enter the asset class
code here. The asset class enables you to identify assets for reporting purposes.
The asset class is also used as a VAT driver.

Asset Type Select a value to indicate a type of asset. The available options are:
Equipment
Facility
Fleet
Furniture
Hardware
Intangible
Machinery
Other
Property
Software

Asset Subtype Select a value to indicate a subset of asset type. Subtypes are optionally user-
defined and directly related to the asset type. Only asset subtypes of the selected
asset type are available when defining the asset.

54 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Asset Status Select the appropriate asset status from the following options:
• Budgeted: Asset is budgeted but not placed in service.

• Work in Progress: Asset is acquired for a project under way.

• Requisitioned: Necessary paperwork has been completed for acquisition.

• Commitment: Budget has been approved and the asset is being acquired.

• Received (not in service): Asset has been received but not yet placed in
service.

• In Service: Indicates the date the asset is available for use. The transaction
date is the default.

• Disposed: Asset has been disposed of.

• Transferred: The asset has been transferred from one business unit to another.

• Suspended: Depreciation has been suspended for the asset.

Acquisition Date Enter the date when the asset was acquired. This field is automatically populated
if the asset was added from a feeder system, such as Purchasing or Payables.

Placement Date Enter the date that the asset is placed in service for physical purposes.

(JPN) Collateral Asset Japanese accounting principles require that assets offered as collateral be treated
according to financial reporting regulations under the commercial law. If this
asset is such a collateral asset, select one of the available options that comply
with Japanese requirements.
See Chapter 23, "Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management,"
(JPN) Using PeopleSoft Asset Management Options to Meet Japanese
Requirements, page 503.

Acquisition Code The acquisition code indicates how you acquired the asset. Select one of the
following options:
• Donated: Use for donated assets.

• Constructed: Use for constructed assets.

• Leased: Use to tie an asset to a capital or operating lease. You must also
specify the capital or operating lease asset ID.

• Like Exchange: This option is not valid for this page. You must add like
exchanges in the Asset ExpressAdd component.

• Purchased: This option is used for purchased assets. This is the default value.

• Trade In: This option is not valid for this page. You must add traded-in assets
in the Asset ExpressAdd component.

• Transferred: Transferred, either within the same business unit or to another

business unit.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 55
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

FERC Code (Federal The FERC Code is used to identify depreciation according to FERC guidelines.
Energy Regulatory This field is used in the U.S., usually to identify group assets, such as telephone
Commission code) poles, highway signs, or other assets used in mass quantities.

Financing Code Enter the code as you have defined it. Financing codes enable you to analyze
debit and credit relationships for capital-intensive and government projects.

In Physical Use Select or deselect this check box to resolve discrepancies between the asset
repository and IT asset discovery. Changes made to this page are incorporated in
the main asset record within the asset repository. The physical use indicator is
affected when adding, transferring, retiring or reinstating hardware assets within
PeopleSoft Asset Management. Only those assets that have the physical use
indicator selected are included in the ITAM comparison process.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise IT Asset Management 9.1 PeopleBook, "Working with
the Asset Repository," Understanding the Compare Asset Repositories Process.

Fair Value This display-only field indicates the FV of the asset as updated from the Fair
Value page. The FV is used in the calculation of asset revaluation.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1
PeopleBook, "Setting Up Accounting Entry and Financial Processing for
PeopleSoft Asset Management," Enabling Combination Editing.

Appraisal Date This display-only field indicates the date when the current FV was updated.
When the asset is added to the database, the appraisal date is the same as the
acquisition date by default.

Replacement Cost Indicates how much it would cost to replace the asset. When the asset is added to
the database, the replacement cost is equal to the total base cost of the asset by
default. The replacement cost can be derived by associating the asset to a cost
index, such as the consumer price index (CPI) or inflation index. The association
of the replacement cost index can be applied by default from the asset profile; the
replacement cost is then calculated considering the base cost and the index
amounts. The result is displayed here.

Last Update If you are calculating the replacement cost using an index, the date that you
performed the last update appears here. When the asset is added, this date is the
accounting date.

Index Name and Enter the adjustment of the replacement cost using an index, such as the
Subindex Name consumer price index. When you calculate the replacement cost, the original
replacement cost is adjusted by the index and subindex that you specify. Enter
valid codes. These are established on the Indexes page during implementation.

Parent/Child and Parent For a parent or child asset, select the appropriate option in the Parent/Child field.
ID If it is a child asset, enter the parent ID with which it is associated. The default
value is None. Parent and child assets cannot also be composite or group assets.

Profile ID Enter a profile ID. Asset profiles are set up in the Asset Profile component.

56 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Threshold ID This value defaults from the capitalization Threshold ID that is associated with
the asset profile for a given asset. When adding an asset, the system uses the
capitalization definition for the applicable Threshold ID to determine the
appropriate capitalization action to take. Upon clicking the Capitalize button on
the Asset Acquisition Detail page, the system compares the cost of the asset with
the cost and basis option as defined on the Capitalization Threshold page and
then classifies the new asset into one of the following brackets:
• Capital Asset

• Non-Capital Asset (trackable)

• Expensed Asset

Note. This field appears only if the capitalization threshold option is enabled
within Asset Management Installation Options and if the capitalization threshold
option is enabled for a given business unit.

Note. You can select a Threshold ID other than the default value to use in the
capitalization evaluation for an asset.

Note. Actions such as "To Capitalize Later" and "Never Capitalize" do not
trigger the capitalization threshold evaluation.

See Chapter 5, "Adding and Maintaining Assets," Capitalization Threshold, page

46.

(JPN) Reporting Life Enter the reporting life for Japanese composite assets. This life is used for
calculating average life of the composite asset.

Set R and D Info (set Click to access the Asset R&D Information page, where you can enter
research and development identifying information for the asset.
information)
(JPN) Local Tax Click to access the Local Tax Return page. This link is visible when establishing
Information setup options for Japan tax reporting.
See Chapter 23, "Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management,"
(JPN) Using PeopleSoft Asset Management Options to Meet Japanese
Requirements, page 503.

Asset Warehouse Click to access the Warehouse Mapping page.

Mapping
Auction Status Displays the status of an asset that has been submitted to Strategic Sourcing for
auction.

Region Code Select a region to categorize property assets by regions. Used for reporting.

Capitalized Asset Indicates whether the asset has been capitalized. This check box is display-only.

New Asset Select if this is a new asset.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 57
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Available For Use Select if the asset is available to be used.

Composite Asset and Composite asset processing enables you to group assets so that their total cost is
Composite Asset ID carried by one asset and depreciated that way. By selecting this option, you
indicate that this single asset is a composite asset, and associated assets are
known as composite members. This feature is frequently used by utility
companies, and it meets the requirements to use the Japanese Composite
Depreciation Method.
When you select the Composite Asset check box on the Asset Information page,
an Asset ID field appears. Associate the composite member by selecting the asset
ID of a composite asset.
See Chapter 11, "Using Composite Asset Processing," page 269.

(AUS) Schedule Type If this is an Australian business unit, select a schedule type code.
Code
(AUS) Calculate Last Click to generate the last date of mandatory review for the asset.
Date of Review
Note. You cannot access the Schedule Type Code field, the Calculate Last Date
of Review button, or the Last Date of Mandatory Review field if the last date of
mandatory review has already been calculated, unless you are in correction
mode.

(AUS) Last Review DT Displays the last date of mandatory review for the asset. The last date of
mandatory review is stored at the asset level.
See Chapter 23, "Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management,"
(AUS) Using PeopleSoft Asset Management Options to Meet Australian
Requirements, page 475.

Book Page Click to save the component and access the Book (ASSET_BOOK_01) page.

(AUS) Identifying R&D Assets

Access the Asset R&D Information page (click the Set R and D Info link on the General Information page).

Asset Management enables you to identify assets for the purpose of calculating research and development
deductions.

R and D Plant (research Select to identify the asset as specifically allocated for research and development.
and development plant)
R and D Start Date Enter the start date for the asset.
(research and
development start date)
Use NBV (use net book Select to use net book value for your tax reporting purposes. Click the OK button
value) to return to the Asset Information page.

See Chapter 23, "Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management," (AUS) Using PeopleSoft
Asset Management Options to Meet Australian Requirements, page 475.

58 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

(JPN) Creating a Local Tax Return

Access the Local Tax Return page (click the Local Tax Information link on the General Information page).

Local Tax Return page

Asset Management enables you to calculate and run reports as required by Japanese local tax laws, including
all required information for the local depreciable asset tax return. When the Localization Country field on the
User Preferences - Overall Preferences page is set to JPN,the Establish Business Units component for
PeopleSoft Asset Management includes the Business Unit Info for Japan page. If you select Use JPN Local
Tax from the AM Business Unit Definition page (JPN Info link) , you enable access to the Local Tax Return
page from the General Information page.

Complete the fields as necessary to generate the Japanese local tax return.

See Chapter 23, "Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management," (JPN) Using PeopleSoft
Asset Management Options to Meet Japanese Requirements, page 503.

Using Asset Warehouse Mapping

Access the Warehouse Mapping page (click the Asset Warehouse Mapping link on the General Information
page).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 59
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Warehouse Mapping page

Default Mapping from Select to apply the asset ChartFields, location and custodian from the asset ID.
Asset The option displays as not selected (unchecked) by default. If the option is not
selected, the system will use the ChartFields mapped at the business unit level.

Operating Unit,Fund Displays the ChartField account codes to be used for the transferred component
Code,Department, (asset). Only the active ChartFields for your system appear.
Program Code,Class
Field,Budget Reference,
Product,and Project
Location Code Select the location code where the replaced or transferred asset will be physically
stored.

Custodian Select the custodian or physical "owner" of the asset.

EmplID (employee ID) Enter the employee ID assigned to the asset.

Adding Attachments

Access the Asset Management - Attachments page (click the Attachments link on the General Information
page).

60 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Asset Management - Attachments

Add Attachment Click this button to attach files as supporting documentation for an asset. Supply
a description of the file or files that you attach.

User, Name, and Once you add attachments and save the asset, the User, Name and Date/Time
Date/Time Stamp Stamp related to the user who added the attachments are automatically supplied.

Delete Click to delete an attachment.

Adding Fair Value Details

Access the Fair Value page (click the Fair Value Details link on the General Information page).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 61
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Fair Value page

Fair value is used in establishing revaluation of assets. PeopleSoft Asset Management stores this information
for each asset and allows you to add a new fair value (FV) on a regular basis, leave it blank, or let it stay as
original cost, depending upon your business requirements.

See Chapter 8, "Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets," Capturing and Maintaining Asset Fair Value
(FV), page 205.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up
Accounting Entry and Financial Processing for PeopleSoft Asset Management," Enabling Combination
Editing.

Entering Asset Details

Access the Operation/Maintenance page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Owned Assets, Basic Add,
Operation/Maintenance).

62 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Operation/Maintenance page

Operation/Maintenance page

Asset Structure

This section discusses how to define the asset structure. Assets can be catalogued as assets of a certain type,
with sequential subtypes, assets that are components of a higher level asset, or clustered assets, multiple
assets that combine to establish a whole asset.

Asset Type Displays the asset type for this asset from a list of valid definitions.

Asset Subtype Displays the asset subtype to this asset type. Only one asset subtype can be
applied to an asset type.

Component Of Enter the asset ID that this asset is a component of.

Begin Date Enter the date when the relationship begins. This field is only visible when a
component is assigned or updated.

Clustered Asset Select to indicate that the asset is part of a larger entity or cluster. A clustered
asset is similar to a group asset. This field is used for reporting purposes only.

Work Order Options for Go to the Work Order Options for Components page to define options for work
Components orders.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 63
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Manufacturer Information

This section provides information to define asset manufacturer information.

Serial ID Enter the asset serial number ID, if available. The serial ID is required for asset
type hardware.

Mfg ID (manufacturing Enter the asset manufacturing ID, if available.

ID)
Model Enter the asset model information or ID, if available.

Version Enter the asset version information or ID, if available.

More Manufacturer Info Click this link to go to the Asset Manufacture/License/Custodian

(more manufacturer (ASSET_CUSTODIAN) page.
information)

Asset Resource Information

This section provides information to define the asset as a resource.

Schedulable Select if the asset can be scheduled by users. For example, a crane extension can
be used on multiple cranes at multiple project sites. It may require separate
inspections and certifications from the crane. It could be used to replace a similar
extension in use on another crane that must be taken out of service for repairs or
inspection. Because it can be used on more than one crane, it may be considered
a schedulable asset. Only schedulable assets can be checked out using the asset
checkout feature.

Allow Overbooking Select if the asset schedule of the asset can be overbooked.

Use As Tool Select if the asset is used as a tool in another event. This requires that an asset
subtype be associated with the asset.

Charge Back Select if the asset can be charged back to a department, operating unit, project or
other cost expensing entity.

WO Unit (work order Enter the associated work order business unit accessing the asset. This option is
unit) available if PeopleSoft Maintenance Management is installed.

Shop This option is available if PeopleSoft Maintenance Management is installed. It is

used for defaulting the location where the asset needs to be worked on during
repair.

Crew Select the crew name from the list of crews associated with the work order unit
and shop that you previously selected.

Note. This option is available if PeopleSoft Maintenance Management is

installed.

64 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Maintenance Information

This section provides maintenance information about the assets.

Repairable Select if the asset can be repaired as needed.

Repair Status Select a repair status of the asset. This field is available when the Repairable
option is selected.
Values are Needs Repair,In Repair, and None. Repair status can be updated from
PeopleSoft Maintenance Management if the Repairableoption is selected.

Parts List Select a corresponding equipment parts lists (EPL) established for this asset. It is
important to be sure that all the criteria match in order to assign an EPL template
to the asset (Asset Type, Subtype, Manufacturer ID, Model, and Product
Version.)

WO Location (work Select the work order location for the asset. This location designates where the
order location) repair will take place. The values are Asset, Shop or Other.

Criticality Select the appropriate level of criticality for the asset. Criticality levels are
defined on the Asset Criticality page (AM_CRIT_LVL). Select Set up
Financials/Supply Chain, Product Related, Asset Management, Service and
Repair, Criticality Code. You can establish meaningful levels of criticality for
your organization when defining the criticality code and associated description.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1
PeopleBook, "Establishing Asset Processing," Defining Asset Attributes.

Offline Designate whether the asset is available or offline. (The field is informational
only.)

Other Information

Hazardous Asset Select if the asset is considered a predominant or significant hazardous material.

Note. The federal government of the United States defines hazardous materials
and waste to include: "Solid, liquid, or gaseous waste, or combination of these
wastes, which because of its quantity, concentration or physical, chemical, or
infectious characteristics may cause significantly to an increase in mortality or an
increase in serious irreversible or incapacitating illness or pose a substantial
present or potential hazard to human health or the environment when improperly
treated, stored, transported, disposed of, or otherwise managed."

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 65
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Hazardous Code Info Click to access the Hazardous Code Information page, where you can indicate
(hazardous code hazardous material information by selecting assigned codes. The PeopleSoft
information) system is delivered with the U.S. Federal Supply Class (FSC) codes, or you can
select from codes that are created during implementation to suit your specific
needs.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1
PeopleBook, "Establishing Asset Processing," Setting Up Hazardous Codes.

Non-Owned Asset Select if this asset is not owned.

Replacement Asset and Select if this is a replacement asset. When an asset (or asset component) has been
Asset ID replaced by another in PeopleSoft Maintenance Management, this field
automatically displays the associated new asset ID.

Note. The asset ID displayed here shows the replaced asset ID. The new asset
that replaced this asset has a new asset ID on the General Information page.

Asset is Available, Select and complete contact information if the asset is available for reassignment
Contact, and Phone # to another person.
(phone number)
Linear Asset Identify an asset as linear within the Asset Repository. These are assets that have
coordinates for their start and end points, such as a pipeline, train track, or a
highway. You can identify linear assets at the asset subtype level when defining
subtypes. In this way, when you select a subtype for the asset, the Linear Asset
check box automatically inherits the designation that was made for the asset
subtype. You can, however, override the subtype linear designation here at the
individual asset level.

Note. Identification of linear assets facilitates potential integrations with third-

party products.

IT Asset Related Information

This section discusses how to define IT asset–related information.

IP Address Enter the IP address of the asset.

CPU Enter the CPU identifier.

Using Work Order Options for Components

Access the Work Order Management page (click the Work Order Options for Components link on the
Operation/Maintenance page).

66 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Work Order Management page

This page defines the transfer include and exclude rules for components swapped out and interunit transfer
options. It is available when PeopleSoft Maintenance Management is installed. It is also available on the
business unit, asset type, and subtype pages. You can define the rules at this level as an exception. If the
Default Rules from Asset check box is not selected, the options are unavailable for selection as the options
will be taken from other levels unless you specifically select the option to use it at the asset level.

Default Rules from Check to enable rules from asset. If you leave this check box cleared, the system
Asset will take the default from a higher level and the other two fields will be
unavailable for selection.

Retire Assets Select to allow asset subcomponent disposal when the asset component is retired.
Components
Transfer Out Asset Select to allow transfer of subcomponents when the asset component is
Components for Reuse transferred.

Asset Warehouse Click to view the Warehouse Mapping page.

Mapping

InterUnit Transfer Select the asset information to include with the transfer when there is an interunit
Defaults Options transfer.

Using Hazardous Asset Codes

Access the Hazardous Asset Codes page (click the Hazardous Code Info link on the Operation/Maintenance
page).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 67
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Hazardous Asset Codes page

When an asset is defined as hazardous, describe it by selecting at least one hazardous code from the list. This
feature supports U.S. FSC codes, which are delivered with PeopleSoft Asset Management. When you mark
an asset as hazardous and associate a descriptive code with it, you can also provide additional information
about its location and custodian and other pertinent data (in the Basic Add component). You can use this
information to generate a report to monitor or track hazardous assets.

Hazardous Code Select a code number.

Hazardous Type and These fields display the values contained in the definition for the code from the
Items Contained Hazardous Codes table established at implementation.

Entering Asset Acquisition Details

Access the Asset Acquisition Detail page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Owned Assets, Basic Add,
Asset Acquisition Detail).

68 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Asset Acquisition Detail page

Use the Asset Acquisition Detail page to enter costs before they have been approved for capitalization. Once
they are approved, you can then capitalize them. The total capitalizable costs entered here appear by default
in the Capitalize Information collapsible section.

Enter the following information for each acquisition detail line:

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 69
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

System Source Enter the source system from which the acquisition detail was derived for
PeopleSoft Asset Management. The system source that you enter must be valid in
the PeopleSoft Financials and Distribution Source table, and is typically
Purchasing (PO), Payables (AP), or Project Costing (PC).

Incentive ID Enter an investment incentive ID. This field is informational only.

Capitalize This field indicates the capitalization status of an existing asset. or Select the
intended capitalization action when adding an asset. The possible values are:
• Already Capitalized

• Already Non Capitalized

• Consolidated

• Never Capitalize

• To Capitalize Later

• To be Capitalized

If an asset has not already been capitalized, you can assign it a status of To be
Capitalized or Never Capitalize. PeopleSoft Asset Management enables you to
associate books with non capitalized assets with the Never Capitalize status.
Based on the option that you select, either the Capitalization Information section
or the Non Capitalization Information section appears on the page.

Interfaces Info Click to access a separate page where you can enter acquisition details
(interfaces information) information.

Acquisition Detail Click to access a separate page for storing ChartField information. Enter the
Chartfields operating unit, department, product, and project ID that you want to associate
with the acquisition detail line.

Capitalization Information and Non Capitalization Information

Use the Capitalization Information section to capitalize assets using the book information provided by the
asset profile. Enter cost information into asset books. This section only displays when adding an asset.

Use the Non Capitalization Information section to add non capitalized costs associated with an asset at book
level. This group box displays only when selecting the Never Capitalize option for the Capitalize field.

Local tax legislation may require capital gains tax in relation to the disposal of assets. Noncapitalized costs
may need to be included in resultant capital gain (or loss) calculations.

Profile ID Identifies a profile that is set up in the Asset Profile table. The current asset
automatically displays all financial and tax depreciation information defined in
that profile. You must enter a profile ID for each asset that you capitalize.

70 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Accum Depr in Current Select and add accumulated depreciation for the asset to be booked to the current
Pd (accumulated period. Otherwise, accumulated depreciation is booked to the previous period.
depreciation in current This check box appears only if you are capitalizing an asset.
period)
Transaction Date and By default, these fields display the current date or the dates specified as user
Accounting Date defaults. Transactions in Asset Management are entered after they have occurred.
The Transaction Date field reflects the accrual date that the event took place,
while the Accounting Date field reflects when it was booked or sent to
accounting in the system. The transaction date must be earlier than or equal to the
accounting date. For capitalized assets, note that any difference between
accounting and transaction dates affects depreciation as well as posting or
booking.

Transaction Code Identifies which accounting entry template is used for the asset. The system
accepts only a valid combination of asset category, transaction code, cost type,
and transaction type for which accounting entry templates exist.

Capitalize Click the Capitalize button to capitalize the asset and add cost rows for all books
in the profile ID. The cost rows that appear by default equal the total of all
capitalizable acquisition detail rows. You can change this amount. The Capitalize
button is no longer present once you click it.

Non-Capitalize Click the Non-Capitalize button to add rows for all books in the profile ID. The
cost rows that appear by default equal the total of all noncapitalizable acquisition
detail rows. This button appears only when Never Capitalize is selected from the
Capitalize options.

Left to Capitalize After capitalization, all capitalizable cost rows on the Asset Acquisition Detail
page are marked as capitalized. Therefore, the amount left to be capitalized is 0
until you add more capitalizable cost rows to the Asset Acquisition Detail page.

Left to Non Capitalize After capitalization, all noncapitalizable cost rows on the Asset Acquisition
Detail page are marked as noncapitalized. Therefore, the amount left to be
noncapitalized is 0 until you add more noncapitalizable cost rows to the Asset
Acquisition Detail page.

Accum Depr For capitalized assets, enter the amount of depreciation already recognized. If
(accumulated you are adding assets that have depreciation from prior years or prior periods,
depreciation) enter that amount in this field.

Note. As long as all acquisition detail lines are for the same set of ChartFields (Product, Project, Department)
and for the same category and cost type, you can enter them all at once and capitalize them later by clicking
the Capitalize button. However, if you enter acquisition detail lines for more than one set of ChartFields and
for more than one category and cost type, you must enter and capitalize the acquisition detail lines for each
set of ChartFields and for each category and cost type separately.

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing Asset
Processing," Setting Up Asset Profiles

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 71
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Viewing Asset Tax Information

Access the Tax page (click the Tax link on the Asset Acquisition Detail page).

Note. This link appears only when the business unit is activated for value-added tax (VAT) processing.

Tax page

Enter tax information for the asset.

Note. This information is optional except where VAT is applied. The system only validates the tax amounts
entered; it does not store them.

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing PeopleSoft
Asset Management Business Units," Defining VAT Defaults

PeopleSoft Enterprise Global Options and Reports 9.1 PeopleBook, "Working with VAT"

Entering Document Sequencing Information

Access the Doc Sequencing page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Owned Assets, Basic Add, Doc
Sequencing).

72 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Doc Sequencing page

Document sequencing is enabled at the general ledger business unit level. Rows are editable or not depending
upon the Keep Ledgers in Sync option defined at the ledger group level. If it is enabled, then only the primary
ledger is editable; if it is not enabled, all the books that post entries to GL are editable.

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up Accounting
Entry and Financial Processing for PeopleSoft Asset Management," Defining Document Sequencing

Entering Location, Comments, and Attributes Information

Access the Location/Comments/Attributes page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Owned Assets,
Basic Add, Location/Comments/Attributes).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 73
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Location/Comments/Attributes page (1 of 2)

74 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Location/Comments/Attributes page (2 of 2)

Record an asset's location and physical properties (such as color, height, and weight), enter comments, a
detailed description, and associate user-defined custom attributes. You can also use this page to attach and
view a stored image of the asset.

Entering Custodial, License, and Manufacturer Information

Access the Manufacture/License/Custodian page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Owned Assets,
Basic Add, Manufacture/License/Custodian; or, click the More Manufacturer Info link on the
Operation/Maintenance page).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 75
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Manufacture/License/Custodian page (1 of 2)

76 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Manufacture/License/Custodian page (2 of 2)

Record custodial information, maintain license information, and keep track of manufacturer-related
information.

Entering Property Assets

Access the Asset Property page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Owned Assets, Basic Add, Asset
Property).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 77
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Asset Property page

Property Information

This page appears when the asset type of Property is selected; however, if Lease Administration is not a
selected product within Installation Options or Space Management Installed is not selected within the Asset
Management Installation Options, the Property page does not appear.

Property ID The property asset ID is displayed after the record is saved.

78 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Property Class Select the property class from the available options. PeopleSoft delivers the
following hierarchy of property classes:
Site
Building
Floor
Area
Space

Property Subclass Select the property subclass from the available user-defined options, if any.

Property Name and Enter the property name and descriptions. If these are entered on the General
Description Information page, they will follow to this page.

Hierarchy

Parent Property Select the parent property ID. Only the property asset IDs within this business
unit are available.

Site ID Enter the site property ID.

Building ID Enter the building property ID. The field is available when the site property ID
has been populated. The system performs an edit to check that higher level
hierarchical fields are populated.

Floor ID Enter the floor property ID. The field is available when the site property ID and
the building property ID have been populated. The system performs an edit to
check that higher level hierarchical fields are populated.

Area ID Enter the area property ID. The field is available when the site property ID,
building property ID, and floor property ID have been populated. The system
performs an edit to check that higher level hierarchical fields are populated.

Note. The last hierarchical definition for a property is Space. The space property ID is the same as the
Property ID and is not displayed at this level.

Attributes

Total Area Enter the total measurement of the area of the property.

Unit of Measure Enter the unit of measure for the total area. If this field is unavailable for
selection, the unit of measure is populated by default from the information
selected when the asset was entered.

Occupancy Select the occupancy status of the property from the available values: Occupied
or Vacant.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 79
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Current Occupancy Enter the current number of occupants for the property.

Ownership Select the ownership status of the property from the available options: Owned or
Leased.

Maximum Occupancy Enter the maximum number of occupants for the property. This may be a legal
definition.

Occupants Information Click this link to access the Maintain Property Occupants page. On this page, you
can add property occupant details such as occupant type, occupant ID, move in
and move out dates, as well as asset components.

When no hierarchy is established, the default values for Unit of Measure is Feet, for Occupancy,Occupied,
and for Ownership is Owned.

When a parent property ID is established, then unit of measure, occupancy, and ownership values are
inherited from the parent property.

When the parent property ID changes, however, only the unit of measure is inherited from the parent. This is
because ownership and occupancy values do not usually change from parent to parent asset. For example, if
Property A is leased but the parent ID changes, the property does not change ownership. It is still leased.
Similarly, if a parent property changes, it does not automatically change from occupied to vacant.

Note. If you have defined custom attributes on the Asset Attributes page to be associated with an asset, the
asset attributes will display with a unit of measure field. You can select the appropriate attributes from your
user-defined attributes for this property as needed.

Description

This section is available only if the asset is a property defined as a site or building.

Parcel Number Enter the parcel number, usually provided within the grant or deed of trust.

Lot Number Enter the lot number, usually provided within the grant or deed of trust.

Block Number Enter the block number, usually provided within the grant or deed of trust.

Legal Description Enter the legal description, usually provided within the grant or deed of trust.

Entering Property Taxes

Access the Record Property Taxes page (click theEnter Property Taxes link on the Asset Property page).

80 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Record Property Taxes page

If the asset property is defined as Site or Building, the Enter Property Taxes link is available on the Asset
Property page. Click the link to display the Record Property Taxes page where informational data can be
entered for taxes applicable to the property.

Entering Asset Supplemental Data

Access the Asset Supplemental Data page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Owned Assets, Basic
Add, Asset Supplemental Data).

Asset Supplemental Data page

Supplemental data is used within PeopleSoft Maintenance Management for additional asset attribute details.
The attribute groups displayed for each asset depend upon the values that are selected for the asset type, asset
subtype, manufacturer, model, and business unit. The attributes displayed are user-defined and reflect how the
attribute groups work.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 81
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing Asset
Processing," Defining Asset Attributes.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Maintenance Management 9.1 PeopleBook, "Using Supplemental Data."

Maintaining Asset Meters

This section provides an overview of asset meters and discusses how to:

• Associate meters with assets.

• Enter meter readings.

• Review meter reading history.

Understanding Asset Meters

Meters associated with assets are used to monitor asset usage and can trigger maintenance tasks based on the
statistical units, such as mileage, measured by the meter. For example, a common asset meter is the odometer
installed in a company vehicle that measures the number of miles the vehicle has traveled. For this type of
asset, it is common for certain maintenance activities to be performed on it based on the number of miles
traveled by the vehicle since the last maintenance event.

A less common, but familiar application, involves public utilities. State and local agencies use asset
monitoring devices such as a water or electric meters attached to a home or commercial entity to measure the
amount of water or electricity consumed by the entity. The units consumed are measured on a routine basis
and the occupant is usually billed for the units consumed. The maintenance events associated with these types
of meters may not have anything to do with the number of units measured since the meter was last read and
other maintenance plans will have to be affected.

PeopleSoft uses meters to both measure asset usage and to trigger preventive maintenance tasks. Asset meter
activities are performed within PeopleSoft Asset Management and PeopleSoft Maintenance Management
applications. To enable meters, you must first define asset meter types. The meter types are associated with
specific asset IDs.

Pages Used to Maintain Asset Meters

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Asset Meters ASSET_METER Asset Management, Service Define asset meter by

and Maintenance, Asset assigning meter types and
Meter Information, associate the meter to
Establish Meter Reading, assets.
Asset Meters

Enter Meter Readings AM_METER_READ1 Asset Management, Service Enter meter readings for an
and Maintenance, Asset asset.
Meter Information, Enter
Meter Readings

82 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Prior Reading AM_METER_READ2 Asset Management, Service Enter prior meter reading
and Maintenance, Asset information.
Meter Information, Enter
Meter Readings, Prior
Reading

Update Meter Readings AM_MTR_RD_UPD Asset Management, Service You can use the Update
and Maintenance, Asset Meter Readings page to
Meter Information, Update correct prior meter readings.
Meter Readings

Meter Reading Comments AM_MTR_RD_CMT Click on the Comment link Enter comments relevant to
from the Update Meter meter reading updates.
Readings page.

Meter Readings History AM_MTR_RD_HIS Asset Management, Service View meter reading history
and Maintenance, Asset for an asset.
Meter Information, Meter
Reading History

Meter Reading Details AM_MTR_RD_HID Click the Detail link on the View details about the
Meter Reading History meter reading history for an
page. asset including the
date/time, source operator
ID, and daily average.

Associating Meters with Assets

Access the Asset Meters page (Asset Management, Service and Maintenance, Asset Meter Information,
Establish Meter Reading, Asset Meters).

Asset Meters

Meter Type Select the meter type to be associated to this asset.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 83
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Copy to Comp. (copy to Select if this meter should also be associated with any asset components
component) associated with this asset (optional). This enables the component asset to use the
same meter reading variations entered for its higher-level component assets.
The meter reading inheritance rules are as follows:
• The subcomponent inherits the reading from its immediately higher level
component.

If the higher component is also enabled to copy readings, the asset continues
escalating to higher levels until finding the asset that is not enabled to inherit
readings, or the parent asset. The inherited reading is derived from this asset.

• The inherited reading is recorded in the component when it is saved at the

higher asset level.

• Components cannot inherit readings from upper levels if any intermediate

level has its inherit reading option turned off.

For example, assume three levels of components: grandparent, parent, child.

All use an odometer as the meter ID type but the parent asset has the copy
option cleared. In this example, the child cannot inherit its grandparent's
odometer reading.

Note. The example is used to describe the physical inheritance rules of meter
readings and has no relationship to the Parent-Child financial transaction in
Asset Management.

• Components cannot inherit readings from upper levels if any intermediate

level does not have the same meter type defined across the different levels.

For example, an asset has three levels of components, A, B, and C. A meter

type is associated with asset A and C, but not B; in this case, C would not
inherit its meter reading from A. As assets B and C are both components of
asset A, then B must also inherit readings from A, or neither asset B nor C
may inherit readings from A.

Est. Daily Avg. Displays the estimated average based on the actual readings taken when the
(estimated daily average) number of readings specified to calculate the daily average has not been reached.
The field is available when the meter type is enabled to maintain daily average.
Estimated daily average is always a positive value.

Override Avg. (override Select to override the actual daily average. The field is available when the meter
average) type is enabled to override the actual daily average.

Act. Daily Avg. (actual Displays the system-calculated actual daily average. It can be zero or greater than
daily average) zero. You can edit the value if the Override Avg. option is selected, but a new
average is calculated when a new meter reading is entered. The field is available
when the Maintain Average option is enabled for the meter type.

Required for Work Select to override a meter as required for any kind of work order as a condition to
Order change its status to complete. This option defaults from the Meter Type
Definition page and can be overridden here on the Asset Meters page. This field
displays only if PeopleSoft Maintenance Management is installed.

84 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Primary Designate the primary meter type for the asset. This is used in the Asset
Maintenance Cost Analysis online component in PeopleSoft Maintenance
Management.

Entering Meter Readings

Access the Enter Meter Readings page (Asset Management, Service and Maintenance, Asset Meter
Information, Enter Meter Readings).

Enter Meter Readings page

Enter current reading information in the work area.

Activate Select this check box to activate entries for the row.

Date and Time Enter the date and time of the meter reading. The system current date and time
displays by default.

Meter Type (Required) Select a valid meter type for this asset ID. Valid meter types are those
that are associated with the asset and active.

Reading and Variation (Required) Record the current meter reading.

Enter either the actual reading or variation from the last reading. If you had a
reading of 12,000 km for an odometer and now you have 12,450 km, you can
enter 450 in the variation field or 12,450 km in the Reading field above. The
system automatically calculates the value for one field based on the entry made
to the other field. The variation is used for the Copy to Components function.
Variation is validated so that the reading does not fall outside the low and high
limits established for the meter when the Reading field is automatically
calculated. The Variation and Reading fields are both required when you have
selected the Replaced option.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 85
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Rollover Check this option if rollover is enabled and should only be selected when the
meter surpasses the upper limit. When selected, the meter resets to zero on the
Assets Meters page once this reading is saved.
When the meter passes its established upper limit and begins a new cycle, the
system keeps track of the accumulated usage. This applies only to increasing and
decreasing meter types that also have enabled the Allow Rollover option.

Replaced Select this option when the meter tool has been replaced. Both the Reading and
Variation fields must be completed in this instance. This enables the system to
calculate the total accumulated reading for the selected meter type. In the
Reading field, enter the actual reading measured in terms of the new meter. In the
Variation field, enter the difference between the last reading and the new one.
These entries will be the basis to recalculate the accumulated meter reading when
the page is saved.

Accum. Reading The last accumulated reading displays. If the Replaced option is selected, or if
(accumulated reading) this is the first reading of the asset, this field is enabled for edit. Enter the new
accumulated reading or complete the Reading and Variations fields to recalculate
accumulated reading.

UOM (units of measure) Displays the units of measure for this type of meter.

The following validations occur when the page is saved:

• The meter type entered cannot be duplicated for the same date and time or the system generates an error
message.

• The reading/variation field must be completed or the system generates an error message.

• The accumulated reading or variation and the reading fields must be completed when the replaced option
is selected or the system generates an error message.

• Readings must fall into the lower and upper limit range established at the meter type definition level or
the system generates an error message.

• If the meter type is increasing or decreasing and the user enters a lower or greater reading than the prior
reading, the system will generate an error message.

If the meter type is increasing or decreasing and defined to allow rollover, the message warns that the
rollover option must be selected before saving.

When you save the page, the meter readings entered become part of the meter history.

Using the Prior Reading tab, you can view the last entry made for the meter type. It also displays rollover or
replacement activity from the prior meter reading.

You can enter comments related to a meter reading by using the Comments link.

86 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Updates to meter readings can be entered to modify existing readings. When making changes to meter
readings, the change impacts not only the variation/reading of the changed meter reading but also the
variation of the immediately following reading. You can modify the meter reading dates; this may cause
meter readings that do not follow the rules of variations for increasing type of readings and conversely for
decreasing type of readings as we have outlined on the enter readings page. Daily average will only be
recalculated if the change affects the last n numbers of readings, where n is the number of readings
established at the meter type definition level. Modifying meter reading dates could end up in having meters
out of sequence that is, not entered and listed from the oldest to the newest). For auditing purposes, select the
option to keep track of that out-of-sequence entries.

Reviewing Meter Reading History

Access the Meter Readings History page (Asset Management, Service and Maintenance, Asset Meter
Information, Meter Reading History).

Meter Readings History page

Search for and review meter readings history by business unit and asset ID. You can further refine the results
by entering a meter type and date range. The results display the following information.

As of Date/Time Displays the date and time of the meter reading listed.

Meter Type Displays the type of meter associated to the asset and reading.

Rollover If selected, indicates that a meter rollover occurred.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 87
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Replaced If selected, indicates that a replaced reading was entered, usually due to a
rollover.

Reading Displays the meter reading entered for the meter reading listed.

Variation Displays the calculated change from the prior meter reading.

Accum. Reading Displays the accumulated readings.

(accumulated reading)
UOM (units of measure) Displays the units of measure for the meter type.

Maintaining Warranties
This section provides an overview of asset warranties and lists the pages used to maintain asset warranties.

Understanding Asset Warranties

Many assets are acquired with a standard manufacturer's warranty that the asset is free of defects and what
remedies are available to you if the asset manifests a warranted defect during normal use, such as eligibility
for a replacement asset, or a loaner while the warranted asset is repaired. The warranty often defines the
period for which the asset is warranted, the maintenance and repair responsibilities of the owner, and the
procedures for making a claim in the event a defect in the asset is discovered.

Warranties are sometimes available for extension. This may involve the issuance of a separate warranty that
becomes active when the original warranty expires. Or it may warrant components of the asset that the
standard warranty excludes. A warranty may contain different expiry dates for different components of the
asset. It may provide for on-site repairs, may require return material authorizations (RMA), and may or may
not be transferable.

PeopleSoft provides the ability to set up standard warranties and associate a warranty to an individual asset
and provides warranty templates to apply a standard warranty to multiple assets at one time.

Pages Used to Maintain Asset Warranties

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Asset Warranties ASSET_WARRANTY Asset Management, Service Associate warranties to an

and Maintenance, Asset asset ID and store warranty
Warranties information including
effective date, end date,
coverage and contact
information. Multiple
warranties can be applied to
a single asset.

88 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Search For Asset Warranty AM_WTMPL_SRH Click the Apply Warranties Search for warranty
Templates from Templates link on the templates to apply to the
Asset Warranties page. asset. Templates are created
by setID. Search parameters
include asset type, asset
subtype, vendor ID, model,
and item ID.

Maintaining Asset Book Information

Add books to assets either by entering the assets through the Asset ExpressAdd component or capitalizing
them on the Asset Information page of the Asset Basic Information component.

The pages in the Asset Book Definition component enable you to enter book information that is different
from that in your asset profile IDs.

This section discusses how to:

• Identify asset books and other depreciation information.

• Add global attributes.

• Add tax information for the book.

Pages Used to Maintain Asset Book Information

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Book - Depreciation ASSET_BOOK_01 Asset Management, Asset Identify the asset's books
Transactions, Asset Book and some of the information
Information, Define needed for calculating
Tax/Depr Criteria depreciation. An asset can
be linked to any number of
books. Typically, separate
books are required for
financial and tax purposes.

Depreciation Method ASSET_DEPR_DETAILS Select the Special Set special depreciation

Information Depreciation check box and terms and select an
then click the Special Terms accounting method for
link on the Book - them. These are commonly
Depreciation page. used to meet depreciation
requirements for specific
countries.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 89
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Book - Tax ASSET_BOOK_02 Asset Management, Asset Specify property type, tax
Transactions, Asset Book depreciation criteria, and
Information, Define tax credit options. If the
Tax/Depr Criteria, Book - fields on this page are not
Tax available, the book was not
set up as a tax book on the
Business Unit/Book
Definition page.

Identifying Asset Books and Other Depreciation Information

Access the Book - Depreciation page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Asset Book Information,
Define Tax/Depr Criteria).

90 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Book - Depreciation page

In Service Date Enter the date that the asset was made available for use from a financial
standpoint. This date and the depreciation convention determine when
depreciation starts for this book. This date is reflected in the Begin Depr Date
field.

Depreciate When In Select to allocate annual depreciation as of the date that you placed the asset in
Service service. If you do not select this option, PeopleSoft Asset Management allocates
annual distribution as of the date determined by the depreciation convention. This
option is valid only in the year that the asset was acquired.

Convention Enter the convention that the system uses to prorate depreciation for the asset.
Asset Management is delivered with most standard depreciation conventions set
up in the Depreciation Conventions table. The system derives the beginning
depreciation date from the convention and the placed-in-service date. For
example, if you began using an asset on May 3, 2006, and selected Actual Month
as the depreciation convention, PeopleSoft Asset Management would begin
depreciating this asset on May 1, 2006. If you selected Following Month as the
convention, depreciation would begin on June 1, 2006.

Adjust Convention Enter the adjustment convention that the system uses to prorate cost adjustments
for the asset.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 91
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Retirement Convention Enter the retirement convention that the system uses to prorate retirement for the
asset.

Retire Option Select the retirement calculation option to be processed for assets within a given
book. These retirement options are available at the profile, book and asset levels.
See Chapter 19, "Retiring Assets," Retiring an Asset, page 379.

Select a depreciation method in the Depreciation Method field. Some depreciation methods require you to
enter additional information. Depending on the method that you select, additional fields will display as
needed, and as described in the following table:

Method Fields

Declining Balance w/SL by Limit % DB Pct (declining balance percent) and Limit Pct (limit
percent)

Declining Balance Percent, Low Limit, and Monthly

Declining Balance w/SL DB Pct

Depreciation Schedule Schedule

Flat Rate % Percent, Low Limit, and Avg Option (averaging option)

France Derogatory Balance DB Pct,Percent, Low Limit, and Depr Pass Life
(depreciate past life)

Germany Staffel Method DB Pct,Percent, Low Limit, and Depr Pass Life

Japan - Intangible / Strt Line DB Pct,Percent, Low Limit, and Depr Pass Life

Japan - Tangible / Declining Balance DB Pct,Percent, Low Limit, and Depr Pass Life
Used for assets acquired before April 1, 2007.

Japan - Tangible / Strt Line DB Pct,Percent, Low Limit, and Depr Pass Life
Used for assets acquired before April 1, 2007.

Japan - Changes DB to SL DB Pct,Percent, Low Limit, Depr Pass Life

Japan - Changes DB to SL Rev DB Pct,Percent, Low Limit, Depr Pass Life

Used for assets acquired on or after April 1, 2007.

92 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Method Fields

Japan - Tangible / Strt Line Rev DB Pct,Percent, Low Limit, Depr Pass Life
Used for assets acquired on or after April 1, 2007.

Japan - Extended / Strt Line DB Pct,Percent, Low Limit, Depr Pass Life
Used for fully depreciated assets under the Tangible /
Strt Line and Tangible / Declining Balance methods that
are subject to an extended depreciation useful life of
five years using a Straight Line depreciation method
starting from the first period of the following fiscal year.

Japanese - Lease Depreciation No additional fields display.

Manual Depreciation No additional fields display.

The manual depreciation method enables you to adjust
depreciation amounts using different method. To use
manual depreciation, you must first create depreciation
entries using another method. Once this has been done,
you can make your adjustments.

Straight Line No additional fields appear.

Straight Line Percent Percent

Sum of the Years No additional fields appear.

Units of Production UOP ID (units of production ID)

User Defined Method Method ID,DB Pct,Percent, Low Limit, and Depr Pass
Life

The following table defines the additional fields:

Limit Pct (limit percent) Enter to specify a limit for depreciation as a percentage of cost.

UOP ID (units of Enter the units-of -production ID, production information, and transaction
production ID) information to use for the asset.

DB Pct (declining balance Enter the percentage of declining balance depreciation to be taken each year until
percent) the amount calculated by the straight line method is greater.

Percent Enter the percentage of original basis to be taken in depreciation each year.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 93
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Low Limit Enter an amount. When the asset basis reaches this limit, the remaining basis is
taken in depreciation and the asset is fully reserved. Low limit is specific to
group assets and flat rate.

Depr Pass Life Select this if you want to continue to depreciate this asset past its useful life. This
(depreciate past useful option is used for certain countries' governmental regulations and in utilities
life) industries to depreciate an asset to the end of a depreciation calendar.

Method ID Enter the user-defined method to use.

Schedule Enter a schedule to use for depreciation.

Avg Option (average Generally, this field is used by utility companies to depreciate composite assets.
option) The averaging options are expressly designed to work with the flat rate
depreciation method.

Monthly Monthly averaging takes an average monthly asset balance and multiplies it by
the annual depreciation rate. The result is then applied against a period allocation
(1/12, 2/12, 3/12, and so on) to derive a year-to-date (YTD) depreciation amount.
The difference between the newly calculated YTD depreciation and the previous
YTD depreciation is the amount booked to the current period. This is applicable
to the declining balance method only.

Yearly Yearly averaging is similar to monthly averaging except that a yearly average
balance is used. Because this amount is not known until the end of the year, it is
usually estimated and adjusted periodically as the actual figures become
available.

Note. Using the flat rate depreciation method causes any depreciation to be posted to the end of the calendar.
If this is not the intention, you must enter a low limit of .01 when you first select the depreciation method in
the Asset Book Definition component for the asset. If you have not already done this, update the Depreciation
Method field by selecting Flat Rate and entering .01 in the Low Limit field that appears.

Calculation Type Select Remaining Value to deduct any accumulated depreciation from the cost
basis and depreciate the remaining value over the remaining life of the asset.
Most assets are depreciated using this option. Use Life-to-Date to calculate the
difference between the depreciation allowed and the depreciation taken.
Typically, you use life-to-date calculations when there is a change in accounting
principle, such as depreciation method. Changes of this type require an
adjustment for the differences in accumulated depreciation to date. For example,
if you took 20,000 USD depreciation over a two year period but the amount
allowed was 24,000 USD, the difference of 4,000 USD would be expensed as an
adjustment to accumulated depreciation in the current period.

Low Value Select to identify assets with costs below a certain level for special depreciation
processing. This is a requirement for Germany.

Useful Life Enter the number of periods. This is used to perform the depreciation calculations
for the financial books.

94 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

End Depr Date (end Enter a value to have depreciation end at a particular time. At the ending
depreciation date) depreciation date, the remaining asset basis is taken in depreciation and the asset
is fully reserved.

Future Depr Yrs (future Asset Management calculates and stores depreciation until the end of the asset's
depreciation years) life. However, for optimal processing performance and greater table efficiency,
you can specify a fixed number of years for which depreciation is calculated and
stored.

Note. It is strongly recommended that you use the Future Depreciation Years
option for group assets and for a large number of assets.

Special Depreciation or If you are working in a global environment and want to use special depreciation
Special Terms terms to meet specific country requirements, select the Special Depreciation
check box and click Special Terms to open the Depreciation Method Information
page, where you can select global attributes for depreciation.

Depr Limit (depreciation Depreciation limits generally apply to tax books, but they can also be used for
limit code) financial books. The tableset delivered with Asset Management contains
depreciation limits currently dictated by the U.S. Internal Revenue Service for
luxury automobiles.

Cost Basis Limit Enter the limit on the depreciable basis of this asset. If the actual cost of an asset
is greater than its depreciable basis, the difference produces a gain when the asset
is retired.

Salvage % (salvage Enter the residual value of the asset subtracted from the cost to determine the
percentage) and Salvage depreciable basis used in depreciation calculations. You can enter it either as a
Value flat rate or as a salvage percentage (a percentage of the asset's total cost). If you
use a salvage percentage, the system recalculates the salvage value as you add
additional costs for the asset.

(DEU) Multi-Shift Code Enter rates by which depreciation should be increased based on the number of
production shifts an asset is used.

Child Inherits Parent's Select if the child asset inherits the parents remaining life. When you use parent-
Life child component assets, all child assets have their own cost basis and
depreciation attributes that are independent of the parent asset. Because the
child's asset life may differ from the life of the parent asset, you may need to
specify that a new child asset of a parent asset inherit the remaining life of the
parent asset.

Impairment Process Select to make an asset available for impairment processing.

See Chapter 8, "Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets," Adjusting for
Asset Impairment, page 213.

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up Depreciation
Processing"

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 95
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Adding Global Attributes

Access the Depreciation Method Information page (select the Special Depreciation check box and then click
the Special Terms link on the Book - Depreciation page).

Select one of the following accounting method options:

Allowance Special depreciation amounts are not booked with the standard depreciation
amounts. Journal entries are generated that include only the standard
depreciation. PeopleSoft Asset Management does not support automatic
generation of journal entries for the special depreciation allowance accounting
method. You may need to run two reports—the Reserve for Special Depreciation
report and the Reversal for Special Depreciation report—and then generate the
journal entries manually into the General Ledger system.

Expense Total amounts of special depreciation and standard depreciation are booked and
journal entries are generated that include the total of the standard and special
depreciation amounts.

Reserve Special depreciation amounts are not booked with the standard depreciation
amounts. Journal entries are generated that include only the standard
depreciation. PeopleSoft Asset Management does not support automatic
generation of journal entries for the special depreciation reserve accounting
method. You may need to run two reports—the Reserve for Special Depreciation
report and the Reversal for Special Depreciation report—and then generate the
journal entries manually into PeopleSoft General Ledger.

Additional fields are provided to comply with the depreciation methods used in countries other than the U.S.
If your current depreciation method requires these fields, enter Special Terms, Accel Terms (accelerated
terms), Initial Terms, andIncr Rate (increased rate).

When you use additional terms, they affect depreciation calculations as follows:

Term Depreciation

Special Depreciation × Rate

Accelerated Depreciation × Rate

Initial Cost × Rate

Increase Depreciation × Rate

The Year of Change field is available only if the depreciation method is Japan-Change DB to SL. Enter the
year of the change in calculation methods.

96 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up
Depreciation Processing," Defining Depreciation Terms and Rates.

Adding Tax Information for the Book

Access the Book - Tax page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Asset Book Information, Define
Tax/Depr Criteria, Book - Tax).

Book - Tax page

Tax

Property Type and These fields determine the amount of gain treated as ordinary income upon the
Property Code disposition of the asset.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 97
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Regulation Regulation is an indication of the tax system that you elect. Each tax system has
an effective date that is validated against the asset's placed-in-service date. Select
a regulation to identify the depreciation system elected for this asset. Options are:
• A (accelerated): Accelerated Cost Recovery System (ACRS).

• D (depreciation): Asset Depreciation Range (ADR).

• F (facts): Conventional Facts and Circumstances.

• G (guidelines): Asset Class Guideline.

• M (modified): Modified Accelerated Cost Recovery System (MACRS).

Recovery Life and For reporting purposes, you can further classify the asset by specifying the
Recovery SubType recovery life (expressed in years) and the recovery subtype. For example, the
code for a 15-year life might be 15 and the code for low-income housing might
be LI.

Guideline Class All current U.S. classifications are set up in the Tax Class table in the delivered
tableset

Section 179 Select if you elect to expense all or a portion of the cost. You can expense assets
up to an aggregate maximum of 200,000 USD per year, provided that the
organization's gross income does not exceed the limitation specified by U.S.
federal tax law. Investment credits are automatically calculated based on the
criteria entered on the Tax Credit page.

Listed Property Select the Listed Property check box to define the asset as listed property and
select its Listed Property Type. Listed properties are certain kinds of assets that
are conducive to mixed business and personal use, such as:
• Passenger automobiles under a certain weight.

• Any other property used for transportation such as trucks, buses, boats,
airplanes, motorcycles, and other vehicles for transporting persons or goods.

• Any property of a type generally used for entertainment or recreation or

amusement such as photographic, phonographic, communication, and video-
recording equipment.

• Any computer and related peripheral equipment unless it is used only at a

regular business establishment and owned or leased by the person operating
the establishment.

• Any cellular telephone (or similar telecommunications equipment) placed in

service or leased in a tax year beginning after 1989.

(FRA) Business Tax Select to indicate that the business tax is applicable. This option enables you to
calculate and report a business tax assessed on the gross value of fixed assets.
This is a requirement in some countries.

98 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Corp. Sec.291 Select if the organization is a corporation. This check box must be selected if the
(corporation section 291) company is a corporation in order for the Tax Retirement Capital Gains report
(AMTX3210) to accurately reflect the correct Sec. 1231/Ordinary gains.

(USA) Depreciation Select to indicate if the asset qualifies for the depreciation bonus in the first year.
Bonus The options you see depend on the effective date, the acquisition date, and in
service date of the asset as well as state or local application of the bonus
depreciation allowance. Your choices are:
• American Recovery & Reinvest: Select if the qualifying asset is acquired and
placed in service after December 31, 2009 and before January 1, 2010 (before
January 1, 2011 for certain longer-lived property)

• Gulf Opportunity Zone: Select for certain types of property acquired in the
hurricane zone (as defined in H.R. 4440) after August 28, 2005 and placed in
service before December 31, 2007 (December 31, 2008 for nonresidential
real property or residential rental property) to apply a 50 percent depreciation
bonus.

• New York Liberty Zone: Select if the acquisition date and in service date is
after September 10, 2001 and before December 31, 2007.

• None: Select if the acquisition date and in service date of the asset is before
September 10, 2001 or May 5, 2003.

• Section 101- Federal: Select if the acquisition date and in service date is after
September 10, 2001 and before December 31, 2005 to apply the 30 percent
bonus. Select if the acquisition date and in service date is after May 5, 2003
and before December 31, 2005 to apply the 50 percent bonus.

• Section 101- Local: Select if local or state allowance of the bonus

depreciation should be applied.

• Stimulus Act: Select if the qualifying asset is placed in service on or after

January 1, 2008 and on or before December 31, 2008 (before 2010 for certain
property.)

Note. An asset is not eligible for the depreciation bonus if it is not within the
eligible date ranges.

(USA) Bonus Percent Enter the percent amount of the depreciation bonus to be applied to the books for
this profile. This could be 30 percent to 50 percent depreciation bonus. The
amount depends on the acquisition date and in service date of the asset as well as
state or local application of the depreciation allowance. For example, if your state
adopted the bonus depreciation as a percentage of the federal percentage, the
amount may be calculated as an amount other than the federally allowed 30
percent or 50 percent amounts.

Tax Credits Options

The rate and amount of the tax credit are based on federal tax law and determined by the qualified investment
code, tax credit type, tax credit code, and the basis reduction option in Asset Management.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 99
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Basis Red (basis Displays the total reduction of the cost basis, if any. The total reduction amount
reduction) is updated each time that you change tax credit information.

Qualified Investment Corresponds to the option you enter in the Tax field.
Code
Tax Credit Type Although the investment tax credit was essentially repealed on December 31,
1985, certain business incentive credits can still be taken. Currently, you can
specify the following credits:
• R (rehabilitation): Building rehabilitation credit.

• E (energy): Energy credit.

• I (investment): Regular investment credit.

Tax Credit Code Enter a value in this field to further define the tax credit—for example, a 20
percent rehabilitation tax credit is available for certified historic buildings.

Basis Reduction Option Some credits require a corresponding reduction in the asset's cost basis. In this
field, specify whether the basis needs to be reduced. Options are:
• B (basis): Reduction based on tax credit.

• P (percentage): Reduction based on specified percentage.

• N (no): No reduction required.

Asset Management calculates the percentage and computation amount based on the following calculations:

(Book Cost) × (Qualified Investment Percentage) = (Amount Qualifying for Tax Credit)

(Amount Qualifying) × (Tax Credit Percentage) = (Amount of Tax Credit)

(Amount of Tax Credit) × (Basis Reduction Percentage) = (Amount That Basis Is Reduced)

Adding Assets with the Asset ExpressAdd Component

The Asset ExpressAdd component is a series of pages that enable you to add owned assets quickly and
efficiently. Assets added with the Asset ExpressAdd component are assigned a capitalization status
automatically when you save, and most of the information in the pages can be defaulted from an asset profile.
This component also enables you to enter accumulated depreciation for assets.

When entering joint venture assets that are shared among several business units, it is best to assign a unique
asset ID. This ensures that the assets created at the participant level have the same ID as the asset created at
the joint venture business unit level. You can make these asset IDs easy to identify by including the prefix JV,
for example, you might create the asset ID JV000022.

When entering assets that have a parent/child relationship, you must first enter a parent ID on the Cost/Asset
Information page before assigning the profile ID default.

Add assets with the Asset ExpressAdd component as follows:

100 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

1. Enter information about how the asset will be capitalized. (If you are adding parent/child assets, you must
specify the parent ID in this step.)

2. Assign a profile ID.

3. Identify the asset's books and information needed for calculating depreciation.

4. Specify property type and tax depreciation criteria.

See Also

Chapter 7, "Working With Leased Assets," page 141

Pages Used to Add Assets with the Asset ExpressAdd Component

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Cost/Asset Information ASSET_ENTRY_00 Asset Management, Asset Enter information about

Transactions, Owned how the asset will be
Assets, Express Add capitalized.

Depreciation Information ASSET_ENTRY_01 Asset Management, Owned If you set up book

Assets, Express Add, information in the asset
Depreciation Information profile, all book information
appears by default. The
Depreciation Information
page identifies the asset's
books and information
needed for calculating
depreciation. An asset can
be linked to any number of
books. Typically, separate
books are required for
financial and tax purposes.
If you manage assets in
multiple currencies, each
currency can have its own
book.

Tax Information ASSET_ENTRY_02 Asset Management, Owned Specify property type and
Assets, Express Add, Tax tax depreciation criteria and
Information identify the investment
credits that are taken for the
current asset. If the fields on
this page are unavailable,
the book was not set up as a
tax book.

Capitalizing Assets
Access the Cost/Asset Information page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Owned Assets, Express
Add).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 101
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Cost / Asset Information

Asset Information

Accum Depr in Current Select to have the system book accumulated depreciation for the asset to the
Pd (accumulated current period. Otherwise, accumulated depreciation is booked to the previous
depreciation in current period. If that is the case, you may need to reopen the period.
period)

102 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Trans Date (transaction Typically, the transaction date represents the date that you actually acquired the
date) and Acctg Date asset and the accounting date represents the date that the transaction is posted to
(accounting date) the general ledger. The accounting date is validated against the
FIN_OPEN_PERIOD table to determine the period to which the transaction is
posted. The difference between the transaction date and the accounting date
determines if any prior period depreciation needs to be calculated. For example,
suppose that a computer was acquired and placed in service on March 15, 2001,
but the information was not entered in PeopleSoft Asset Management until
August 1, 2001. All general ledger periods prior to August are closed. In this
case, PeopleSoft Asset Management automatically calculates depreciation
starting in March and posts it to the general ledger in August.

Location Identify the asset location by selecting from a list of valid values. Identification
of the asset location is required for managing hazardous material assets, which
must often be monitored and reported on. This location is automatically
populated with the ship from location for VAT-enabled business units.

Trans Code (transaction Identify which accounting entry template is used for the asset, such as
code) Abandoned, Inventory, or Scrapped. The system accepts only valid combinations
of the category, cost type, transaction code, and transaction type for which
accounting entry templates exist.

Currency and Rate Select the currency and exchange rate type.
Type

Note. When working with parent/child assets, you must go to the Asset Additional Information section and
enter the parent ID before you select Default Profile.

Asset Cost Information

Enter one row of cost information before populating fields with the default information from the asset profile.

Cost Type Break down portions of the asset cost, and enter as many cost types as needed for
each transaction. For example, the costs of constructing a building are often
broken down into categories reflecting the type of cost, such as material, labor,
permits, and so on. Only valid cost types are accepted. The cost types are user-
defined during the system implementation.

Salvage Displays the salvage value that is calculated based on the option defined at the
asset profile level (either flat amount or percentage). Salvage value is prorated
based on a ChartField's cost if a flat amount is used, and it appears as a
percentage of cost if the percentage option is selected.

Accum Depr Enter the amount of depreciation already recognized. If you are adding assets that
(accumulated have depreciation from prior years or prior periods, enter that amount in this
depreciation) field.

YTD Depr (year to date If any portion of the accumulated depreciation amount applies to the current
depreciation) fiscal year, enter the amount of that portion.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 103
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Note. After you save this page, you cannot change the asset information here. To modify the information, you
must use the Asset Cost Adjust/Transfer page or the Basic Add page. When working with parent/child assets,
remember to designate the parent ID before you continue.

Asset Additional Information

Asset Type Select a value to indicate a type of asset. The available options are:
Equipment
Facility
Fleet
Furniture
Hardware
Intangible
Machinery
Other
Property
Software

Asset Subtype Select a value to indicate a subset of asset type. Subtypes are optionally user-
defined and directly related to the asset type. Only asset subtypes of the selected
asset type are available when defining the asset.

CAP # (capital The capital acquisition plan (CAP) number ties the asset to a CAP. Enter a valid
acquisition plan number) number and sequence. You set up CAP numbers in the CAP table.
and Seq #(sequence
number)
Threshold ID This value defaults from the capitalization Threshold ID that is associated with
the asset profile for a given asset. You can override the Threshold ID if needed.
When adding an asset, the system uses the capitalization definition for the
applicable Threshold ID to determine the appropriate capitalization action to
take. Upon saving, the system compares the total cost of the line (cost x quantity)
with the cost established for each bracket, as well as the basis option to decide
the action to take.

Note. This field appears only if the Capitalization Threshold feature is enabled
within Asset Management Installation Options and if the feature is enabled
within the specific business unit.

Serial ID If applicable, enter the serial number for the asset.

Asset Class This field is used to classify assets for reporting purposes. It can be used in
combination with an asset category to refine asset classification. These fields can
also be used for VAT purposes.

104 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Asset Status Indicate the status by selecting one of the following options:
• Budgeted: Asset is budgeted but not placed in service.

• Commitment: Budget has been approved and you are preparing to acquire the
asset.

• Disposed: Asset is no longer in service.

• In Service: This is the date that the asset is available for use. The transaction
date is the default.

• Received: Asset was received but is not yet placed in service.

• Requisitnd (requisitioned): Necessary paperwork has been completed for

acquisition.

• Suspended. Depreciation has been suspended for this asset

• Transferred. This asset was transferred from another business unit.

• WIP (work in progress): Asset is acquired for a project under way.

FERC Code Select a FERC code if it applies.

Acquisition Date and Enter the date the asset was acquired and select an acquisition code:
Acquisition Code Construct, Donated, Leased, Like Exch, Purchased, Trade In, and Transfer

Collateral Asset Japanese accounting principles require that assets offered as collateral be treated
according to financial reporting regulations under the commercial law. If the
asset is a collateral asset, select one of the available options that comply with
Japanese requirements.

Parent/Child and Parent If you are adding a parent or child asset, select the parent-child asset option that
ID applies. The default is None. If this is a child asset, enter the parent asset ID with
which to associate it.

Note. Parent and child assets cannot also be group assets or collateral assets.

Hazardous Asset Check if the asset qualifies as hazardous.

Taggable Asset Check if the asset can be physically assigned a tag number.

Capitalized Asset This check box is display-only, and the status is determined automatically by the
asset profile.
Noncapitalized assets have no cost or books and are not depreciated in Asset
Management. Sometimes you need to track physical information only (such as
location, physical specifications, number of units, and so forth), but you don't
want information about the assets to appear in the general ledger.

Composite Asset Check if the asset is a composite asset.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 105
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Set R and D Info (set Click this link to enter research and development information on the Asset R&D
research and development Information page. In Australia, this option is used for tax reporting purposes.
information) Otherwise, this field is informational only.

Hazardous Code Info Click on this link to go to the Hazardous Asset Codes page and select a
(hazardous code hazardous code to identify with and associate to this asset.
information)

Copying an Asset
This section discusses how to copy an asset.

Page Used to Copy an Asset

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Create Asset Copies ASSET_COPY_01 Asset Management, Asset Copy an existing asset if its
Transactions, Owned financial and physical
Assets, Copy Existing Asset information is similar to
that of a new asset that you
want to create. Copy the
existing asset and change
only the financial and
physical information that is
different. The system
automatically assigns the
new asset a different asset
ID. Alternatively, you can
specify an asset ID.

Note. If you copy a

nonfinancial asset, the
financial information will
not be available.

Copying an Asset
Access the Create Asset Copies page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Owned Assets, Copy Existing
Asset, Create Asset Copies).

106 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Create Asset Copies page

Search assets to be copied by business unit, asset ID, tag number, parent ID, description, asset status, or
threshold ID.

Note. Child assets can be copied, but parent assets cannot.

Asset Copy Options

Select or deselect the data to be included in the copy

Asset

The next available asset ID will be assigned. Enter the additional asset attributes for the copy.

Book

Quantity, Cost, Displays the asset quantity, cost, category, and cost type.
Category, and CT (cost
type)
Salvage Value Displays a value that is calculated based on the selections for this field at the
asset profile level (either flat amount or percentage). The salvage value is
prorated based on a ChartField's cost if a flat amount is used. It appears as a
percentage of cost if the Percentage option has been selected.

See Also

Chapter 5, "Adding and Maintaining Assets," Adding and Maintaining Asset Information, page 48

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 107
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Viewing and Managing the Component Asset Hierarchy

This section provides an overview of component asset hierarchies and discusses how to:

• View the asset component hierarchy.

• Manage the asset component hierarchy.

Understanding Component Asset Hierarchies

Assets can be considered as components of other assets of a higher level. For example, when you acquire
specialized heavy duty equipment, such as cranes, tractors, or construction vehicles, it may be practicable to
view specific elements of the asset as individual "subassets" that serve the overall asset it is a part of. A crane
may use a specialized extension for larger projects, but the extension device must be attached to a crane
before it is useful. In this case, the extension can be considered a component of the crane. It is, however, an
expensive piece of equipment with a separate depreciable life from the crane and you would, therefore, want
to maintain it as an asset rather than an expendable part of the crane.

In turn, the extension may also be used to support another component of itself, an optional set of hooks or
lifters, for example. In such a case, the lifters are a component of the extension and the extension is a
component of the crane. In this way, you may have multiple assets that serve one another as components of
an asset at a higher level or that create a component hierarchy.

PeopleSoft Asset Management enables you to view and manage up to nine levels of asset component
relationships from the Asset Component Hierarchy page. You can move assets within the hierarchy as
needed, view those changes through the Summary of Changes page, and run a report to view changes within
asset components for all assets, financial assets or nonfinancial assets.

Pages Used to View and Manage the Asset Component Hierarchy

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Asset Component Hierarchy AM_HGRID Asset Management, Asset View associated asset
Transactions, Owned component relationships
Assets, View Component within the hierarchy
Hierarchy (display only).

Asset Component Hierarchy AM_HGRID Asset Management, Asset Update associated asset
Transactions, Owned component relationships by
Assets, Manage Component moving assets within the
Hierarchy hierarchy.

Provide Reason for the AM_HGRID_REASN_SEC Click the Comments icon Provide a reason and details
Modification from the Asset Component for the modification.
Hierarchy page. This icon is
visible when a change is
made to move an asset
within the hierarchy.

108 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Summary of Changes AM_HGRID_DISP_CHG Click the Review Changes Review the summary of
link from the Asset changes made within the
Component Hierarchy page. asset hierarchy.

Asset Component Hierarchy RUN_AMCH1000 Asset Management, Run the Asset Component
Move Financial Reports, Asset Hierarchy Move report to
Details, Asset Component view a list of assets that
Hierarchy Move. were moved. Run this report
for all assets, financial
assets or nonfinancial
assets. (SQR)

Viewing the Asset Component Hierarchy

Access the Asset Component Hierarchy page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Owned Assets, View
Component Hierarchy).

Asset Component Hierarchy page (View)

This page appears as display only. Review the details within the Asset Component Hierarchy.

Action After selecting a check box beside an asset, select one of the following actions
and click the Go button:
• Focus on Selected Row - Refresh the grid using the selected row as the
starting point of the hierarchy.

• Focus on Top Asset - Refresh the grid using the highest asset as the starting
point of the hierarchy.

Note. The View Component Hierarchy provides a subset of actions that are available within the Manage
Component Hierarchy.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 109
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Managing the Asset Component Hierarchy

Access the Asset Component Hierarchy page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Owned Assets,
Manage Component Hierarchy).

Asset Component Hierarchy page (Manage)

Select component assets and move them within the hierarchy. The Asset Component Hierarchy page displays
up to nine levels. If the hierarchy of asset components is more than nine levels deep, you can manipulate the
whole hierarchy by focusing on specific branches of the component tree.

Note. Property asset types are not editable. When you enter a property type of asset, after clicking the Search
button, the page will display as if the View Component Hierarchy was used.

Action Choose one of the following actions:

• Insert Asset on Row Below - Insert a row in the grid just below the selected
row. When selecting the first row of the grid, the insert creates a child of the
first row.

• Remove Asset from Hierarchy - Remove the row from the grid and enter a
reason for the removal on the secondary page that is provided.

• Focus on Selected Row - Refresh the grid using the selected row as the
starting point of the hierarchy.

• Focus on Top Asset - Refresh the grid using the highest asset as the starting
point of the hierarchy.

Select that asset and click the Indent Row icon. This action moves the selected
Indent Row
asset down in the hierarchy so that it is a child of the prior row number (asset) in
the grid.

Outdent Row Click to move the selected asset up one level in the hierarchy.

110 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Move Item Use Click to move the indented asset up to a different parent. If the parent asset is
Sequence Up moved, all of the child assets are moved with it.

Move Item Use Click to move the selected asset down one row level.
Sequence Down
Expand All link Click to expand the entire hierarchy to view and manage all assets within the
grid.

Review Changes link Click to display a summary of changes made within the asset hierarchy
(Summary of Changes page.)

Comments Add a comment to explain the reason for the change on the Provide Reason for
the Modification page.

Upon save, this icon indicates that there have been no comments entered for the
Comment Warning
hierarchy change.

Warning Upon save, this warning icon displays; mouse over text provides a detailed
description of the warning for the following reasons:
• No comment provided.

Click the comment icon to add or update a comment.

• Custodian information not updated.

Select the Operation/Maintenance tab to add or update the employee ID or

department.

• Location information not updated.

Select the Operation/Maintenance tab to add or update the location or area

ID.

Indicates that the row has been removed from the hierarchy.
Row Deleted

Error Indicates an invalid use of the Component field.

Click the Asset Search icon to search for an asset. The system searches
Asset Search
PeopleSoft Maintenance Management (MM) assets if that product is installed. If
MM is not installed, the search is directed to PeopleSoft Asset Management for
retrieval.

Click to view asset details for the given asset. You will be directed to the Define
Asset Details
Asset Operational Information page when PeopleSoft Maintenance Management
is installed. When PeopleSoft Maintenance Management is not installed, you are
directed to the Basic Add page for asset details.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 111
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Operation/Maintenance Tab

This page displays only if PeopleSoft Maintenance Management is installed. It provides the
Operation/Maintenance details for the assets such as Custodian, Asset Criticality, Repairable Flag, Repair
Status, VIN, Serial ID, EmplID, Department, Location Code, and Area ID.

Providing Comments

Provide comments with a detailed explanation of the change.

Provide Reason for the Modification page

When a component is removed from the hierarchy, you must indicate a reason for this action. This comment
page is automatically displayed and contains a reason drop down list in addition to the comment entry field.
Both Reason and Comment are mandatory in the case of a removal from the hierarchy.

Reviewing Changes Made to the Asset Hierarchy

Access the Summary of Changes page (click the Review Changes link on the Asset Component Hierarchy
page).

112 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Summary of Changes page

Reporting Changes to the Hierarchy

Access the Asset Component Hierarchy Move run control page (Asset Management, Financial Reports, Asset
Details, Asset Component Hierarchy Move, Asset Component Hierarchy Move).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 113
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Asset Component Hierarchy Move page

Type of Report Select to run the report for All assets, Financial Assets, or Non Financial Assets.
When you select Financial Assets, the financial asset parameters appear.

Creating Parent-Child Asset Relationships

This section provides an overview of parent-child asset relationships and discusses how to:

• Create an asset parent.

• View child assets.

• Add parent and child component assets.

• Use the Child Inherits Life of Parent feature.

• Update parent-child basic information.

• Select child assets.

• View parent and child assets.

114 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Understanding Parent-Child Asset Relationships

Some assets stand alone, while others are grouped together for ease of processing and reporting. Parent-child
assets are assets that are grouped together. For example, a computer can be regarded as several separate assets
such as a monitor, a CPU, and a printer.

Three approaches you might use to add the computer as an asset follow:

• Add the computer as a single asset.

You use this approach to capitalize the asset with one cost, depreciate it as a single unit, and physically
track it as one item.

• Create a parent asset that is not an actual asset but rather a conceptual asset (for reporting purposes) that
ties together the various asset components.

In Asset Management, this is referred to as a parent onlyasset. Use the asset ID to tie together all the
components as child assets. Each component has its own cost basis, depreciation, and physical tracking
information.

• Identify one of the asset's components as the parent when you enter it.

In PeopleSoft Asset Management, this is referred to as a parent component asset. Give it an asset ID, and
use that ID to tie together the other components as child assets. Each component has its own cost basis,
depreciation, and physical tracking information.

Note. Group assets or members cannot be used as parent-child assets.

Pages Used to Create Parent-Child Asset Relationships

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Asset Parent ASSET_PARENT Asset Management, Asset Add an asset that is used
Transactions, Parent-Child only for reporting purposes
Relationship, Create Parent, as an umbrella for child
Asset Parent assets. Add or delete
comments. Link to a list of
all child assets for a parent
asset that has already been
created.

Create Parent - Child Assets CHILDASSETS_ALL Click the Child Assets link View child assets related to
on the Asset Parent page. the parent asset.

Asset Information ASSET_GENERAL_01 Asset Management, Asset Add a parent asset or a child
Transactions, Owned asset; select the appropriate
Assets, Basic Add, Asset parent asset for a child
Information asset.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 115
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Cost/Asset Information ASSET_ENTRY_00 Asset Management, Asset Add a parent asset or a child
Transactions, Owned asset; select the appropriate
Assets, Express Add, parent asset for a child
Cost/Asset Information asset.

General Parent Info ASSET_GEN_PAR_CHD Asset Management, Asset Update basic information
Transactions, Parent-Child about a parent asset.
Relationship, Parent-Child
Basic Information, General
Parent Info

Location ASSET_LOCATION Asset Management, Asset Update location information

Transactions, Parent-Child about a parent asset.
Relationship, Parent-Child
Basic Information, Location

Custodian/License ASSET_CUSTODIAN Asset Management, Asset Update custodian or license

Transactions, Parent-Child information about a parent
Relationship, Parent-Child asset.
Basic Information,
Custodian/License

Child Assets CHILD_ASSETS Asset Management, Asset Select child assets to

Transactions, Parent-Child include in the update to a
Relationship, Parent-Child parent asset.
Basic Information, Child
Assets

Parent and Child Assets PARENT_CHILDASSETS Asset Management, Asset View an asset and any child
Transactions, Parent-Child assets associated with it.
Relationship, Review Use links associated with
Parent-Child each child to access other
components of Asset
Management.

Creating an Asset Parent

Access the Asset Parent page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Parent-Child Relationship, Create
Parent, Asset Parent.)

Parent assets created on this page cannot have associated costs and physical characteristics. Therefore, you
cannot view them in the Parent-Child Basic Information component. Also, you cannot view them or perform
transactions on them in the Asset Cost Adjust/Transfers component, the Asset Retirements component, or the
Parent-Child NBV component. You can, however, view them on the Inquire - Parent and Child Assets page.

Viewing Child Assets

Access the Child Assets page (click the Child Assets link on the Asset Parent page).

You can use this page to view a child asset if you have added it with future transaction and accounting dates
that have not yet passed. You cannot view such an asset on the Inquire - Parent and Child Assets page.

116 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Adding Parent and Child Component Assets

You can add parent and child assets by using the Asset Basic Information component or the Asset
ExpressAdd component. Before you can identify a child asset of a parent, you must first identify the parent
asset.

Using the Child Inherits Life of Parent Feature

When you use parent-child component assets, all child assets have their own cost basis and depreciation
attributes that are independent of the parent asset. Because the child's asset life may differ from the life of the
parent asset, you may need to specify that a new child asset of a parent component asset inherit the remaining
life of the parent asset. For example, suppose that a car is depreciated using a five-year life. After two years, a
CD player is added as a child asset to the car (which is the parent asset). You can depreciate the CD player
over the remaining depreciable life of the car—that is, three years. The child asset then takes on the remaining
life of the parent component asset. You can also override the child's asset life with a different life, if
necessary.

Setting Up the Child Inherits Life of Parent Feature

You must select the Child Inherits Parent's Life option on the following two pages before you can use it:

• On the Asset Management page of the Installation Options component.

• On the Business Unit/Book Feature page of the Asset Management Business Unit Definition component.

Applying the Child Inherits Life of Parent Feature to a Child Asset

To apply the Child Inherits Parent's Life feature to a child asset:

1. Add the child asset using the Cost/Asset Information page of the Asset ExpressAdd component, and enter
the cost.

2. Expand the Asset Additional Information group box.

From the Parent-Child drop-down list box, select Child to indicate that this is a child asset. Select an ID
for the parent asset in the Parent ID field. You must enter a parent ID before you select Default Profile.

3. From the Asset Cost Information group box, enter asset cost information for the child asset as it applies.

Click the Default Profile button to capitalize the asset and create all the corresponding asset books.

4. When prompted, click Yes to have the system recalculate the book's asset life based on the parent's
remaining life.

5. Access the Depreciation Information page, and click the Default Parent's Life button to view or
recalculate the child asset's life.

The Default Parent's Depr Attributes page appears. The Parent Depreciation Attributes section shows the
asset life information for the parent asset. The Child Depreciation Attributes section shows the asset life
information for the child asset that Asset Management calculates from the remaining life of the parent
asset.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 117
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

6. Examine the calculated remaining life information, and either accept the remaining life for the child asset
or change it by entering a new life

Note. Remember when working with parent/child assets, you must go to the Asset Additional Information
section and enter the parent ID before you click the Default Profile button.

Updating Parent-Child Basic Information

Use the pages within the Parent-Child Basic Information component to update basic information about a
parent and its child assets.

Note. Parent assets created on the Asset Parent page (parent-only assets) do not have cost or basic
information. They cannot be viewed in the Parent-Child Basic Information component. Also you cannot view
them or perform transactions on them in the Cost Adjust/Transfer Asset component, the Retire/Reinstate
Asset component, or the Review Parent-Child NBV component. If you want to use a parent asset as an
umbrella asset for reporting purposes only and access these components to manipulate child assets in mass,
you can create a 0-cost parent asset as opposed to a parent-only asset.

Any adjustments made to parent assets are not made to the associated child assets. To make a change to an
associated child asset, select the child asset on the Child Assets page.

Details entered on the Location/Comment/Attributes page or the Manufacture/License/Custodian page are not
automatically copied from a parent to its child assets.

See Also

Chapter 5, "Adding and Maintaining Assets," Adding and Maintaining Asset Information, page 48

Selecting Child Assets

Access the Child Assets page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Parent-Child Relationship, Parent-
Child Basic Information, Child Assets).

118 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Child Assets page

To include a child asset, select the check box in the Selected column.

Tag Number Displays the tag assigned to the child asset. Parent and child assets may share the
same tag number. You can sort child assets according to this field.

Description Displays the child asset description. You can sort child assets according to this
field.

Child Asset ID Displays the asset ID assigned to the child asset. You can sort child assets
according to this field.

Cost Displays the cost of the child asset. You can sort child assets according to this
field.

Currency Displays the currency in which child asset costs are stored. You can sort child
assets according to this field.

Acq Date (acquisition Displays the date that the asset was acquired. You can sort child assets according
date) to this field.

Asset Information Click a link in this column to access another copy of the Asset Information page
of the Asset Basic Information component. The component is populated with the
child asset information.

Include Parent Asset Clearing this default setting enables you to update at once all or selected child
assets while excluding the parent asset. However, the update details must be
specified on the parent.

Note. If you select the Include Parent Asset check box and the transaction is complete, the pages continue to
show the parent asset as retired, transferred, or recategorized. The retained parent values are not displayed
until you save and exit the pages and then access the component again.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 119
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Viewing Parent and Child Assets

Access the Parent and Child Assets page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Parent-Child Relationship,
Review Parent-Child).

If the status of a parent asset is Retired or Disposed and the asset has child assets that are still in service, the
child assets are orphaned. If you have added a child asset and given it future transaction and accounting dates
that have not yet passed, you cannot view that child asset on this page. However, you can view it by clicking
the link for the child asset on Asset Parent page.

Calculating Asset Replacement Costs

This section provides an overview of asset replacement cost and lists the page used to calculate replacement
cost.

Understanding Asset Replacement Cost

Your tangible working assets are one of the greatest investments made in any enterprise. As certain assets
approach the end of their useful lives, you need to be able to anticipate expenditures to replace these assets.
You may need to get a replacement cost as you explore insurance coverage for property, equipment,
computers, and other assets. Similarly, you may need to replacement calculate the cost in the event of an
unforeseen loss, such as when plants or equipment are destroyed in a fire or a natural disaster.

PeopleSoft Asset Management provides the Calculate Replacement Cost application engine (AMRCCAL)
that will make a replacement cost calculation of all assets, assets with new activity, or a selected range of
assets, based on an index that you apply to the equation, such as the consumer price index (CPI) or other
indexes you maintain.

Page Used to Calculate Replacement Cost

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Calculate Replacement Cost RUN_AMRCCAL Asset Management, Asset Calculate asset replacement
Transactions, Owned cost.
Assets, Calculate
Replacement Cost,
Calculate Replacement Cost

Defining Asset Operational Information

The Asset Operational Information component provides an efficient way to add and maintain nonfinancial
assets. The operational and maintenance fields are available as they are in the Basic Add component but
without the financial fields. From this component, however, you can access both financial and nonfinancial
assets.

120 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

This component also provides a Maintenance Workbench to more easily access other areas of interest within
the Service and Maintenance component. The Maintenance Workbench includes links to asset insurance,
warranties, inspection, checkout, maintenance history, meter reading, and service and repairs.

Note. Group assets, composite assets, and parent/child assets are not created through this component.

Pages Used to Add and Maintain Asset Operational Information

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Define Asset Operational AM_OM_ASSET_ADD Asset Management, Asset Add nonfinancial assets and
Information - Asset Transactions, Owned corresponding details
Information Assets, Define Asset including asset type,
Operational Info, Asset manufacture, asset resource,
Information location, custodian, license
information, and physical
attributes. Include an image
of the asset and use the
Maintenance Workbench to
track service and repairs,
warranties, and other
maintenance details.

Define Asset Operational ASSET_PROPERTY Asset Management, Asset Enter details to manage
Information - Asset Transactions, Owned nonfinancial property assets
Property Assets, Define Asset and to maintain property-
Operational Info, Asset specific attributes such as
Property identifying information,
asset hierarchy, area and
occupancy, and legal
descriptions. This page tab
appears when the asset type
of Property is selected;
however, if Lease
Administration is not a
selected product within
Installation Options and
Space Management
Installed is not selected
within the Asset
Management Installation
Options, the Property page
is disabled.

Define Asset Operational AM_CUSTOMIZE_PAGE Click the Customize Page Customize the layout of the
Information - Customize Layout link from the Define Asset Information page to
Page Layout Asset Operational hide, expand or collapse
Information page. various sections on the
page.

Asset Supplemental Data AM_ASSET_SD Asset Management, Asset Record additional data
Transactions, Owned regarding hardware
Assets, Define Asset information and
Operational Info, Asset maintenance information
Supplemental Data for nonfinancial assets.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 121
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Adding Operational Nonfinancial Assets

Access the Define Asset Operational Information - Asset Information page (Asset Management, Asset
Transactions, Owned Assets, Define Asset Operational Info, Asset Information).

Define Asset Operational Information page (1 of 2)

122 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Define Asset Operational Information page (2 of 2)

The Define Asset Operational Information page provides an efficient way of capturing data for physical
operators who do not handle financial information. You can review both financial and nonfinancial assets
from this page and make changes to the attributes; however, there are no financial implications.

Any changes you make, such as custodian or location, appears as a new entry rather than an update to the
existing entry. The effective date is the system date and the profile ID is editable only when adding a new
asset.

Note. The Capitalization Threshold feature is not available for assets that are added using this component.

See Chapter 5, "Adding and Maintaining Assets," Adding Asset Basic Information, page 52.

Customizing the Asset Operational Information Page Layout

Access the Define Asset Operational Information - Customize Page Layout page (click the Customize Page
Layout link on the Define Asset Operational Information page).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 123
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Define Asset Operational Information - Customize Page Layout page

Searching for Asset Information

This section discusses how to search for an asset.

Page Used to Search for Asset Information

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Search for an Asset AM_LOOKUP_PNL Asset Management, Search Search for an asset based on
for an Asset specified criteria. After you
find assets that meet the
criteria, you can view them
in greater detail. Use links
to quickly access other
components in the system
and perform transactions on
selected assets.

Searching for an Asset

Access the Search for an Asset page (Asset Management, Search for an Asset).

124 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Search for an Asset page

Note. The asset search utility includes searching by the Description field. If processing is very slow,
PeopleSoft recommends that an index of the DESCR field be created for the ASSET table to improve
performance.

Enhancing Search Performance

When an organization maintains a high volume of property assets, it is recommended that you create new
indexes and alternate search keys to enhance search performance.

Alternate search keys should be created for the following fields:

1. Table ASSET_SITE change Record Definition to include PROPERTY_NM as an Alternate Search Key
field.

2. Table ASSET_BLDG change Record Definition to include PROPERTY_NM as an Alternate Search Key
field.

3. Table ASSET_FLOOR change Record Definition to include PROPERTY_NM as an Alternate Search

Key field.

4. Table ASSET_AREA change Record Definition to include PROPERTY_NM as an Alternate Search Key
field.

The following new indexes should be created on the ASSET_PROPERTY table:

1. PS_ASSET_PROPERTY(BUSINESS_UNIT,SITE_PROPERTY_ID).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 125
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

2. PS_ASSET_PROPERTY(BUSINESS_UNIT,BLDG_PROPERTY_ID).

3. PS_ASSET_PROPERTY(BUSINESS_UNIT,FLOOR_PROPERTY_ID).

4. PS_ASSET_PROPERTY(BUSINESS_UNIT,AREA_PROPERTY_ID).

5. PS_ASSET_PROPERTY(IS_LEASED, BUSINESS_UNIT, SITE_PROPERTY_ID,

BLDG_PROPERTY_ID, FLOOR_PROPERTY_ID, AREA_PROPERTY_ID).

Asset Search Criteria

Use the Asset Search Criteria,Acquisition Details, and Retrieve group boxes to establish the search criteria.
Each group box enables you to confine the search to specific tables according to the following rules:

• Asset table information is always retrieved.

• Cost information is retrieved if any of the cost fields are used in the search criteria, or the Cost
Information check box is selected.

For example, if you enter a category and the asset is capitalized, the cost information for the asset is
retrieved regardless of whether the cost information check box is selected. However, if you don't populate
any of the cost fields in the search criteria, you need to select the Cost Information check box. If you don't
need to view cost data, leave the check box blank.

• Asset acquisition information is retrieved if any of the fields in the Acquisition Details group box are used
in the search criteria, or if the Acquisition Information check box is selected.

• Location code is retrieved if the location field is used to retrieve asset information or if the Location check
box is selected.

• The Non Capital Asset check box is used only when the Acquisition Information and Cost Information
check boxes are selected, or when fields from the Asset Search Criteria and Acquisition Details group
boxes are specified.

Click the Hint link for additional information when selecting criteria.

Search Results - Select One Asset to Continue

Search results display with details available from these tabs:

• Asset Information: This tab shows business unit, asset ID, description, asset type, asset subtype, tag
number, serial ID, and status.

• Asset Cost Information: This tab shows business unit, asset ID, description, ChartFields, cost type,
quantity, cost, and currency.

• Acquisition Detail: This tab shows business unit, asset ID, description, PO business unit, PO number,
receiving business unit, receipt number, AP business unit, voucher ID, PC business unit, project ID, and
activity.

• Owner/Custodian: This tab shows business unit, asset ID, description, employee ID, custodian, asset
custodian department ID, and offsite status.

• Work Maintenance: This tab shows business unit, asset ID, description, use-as-tool option, schedulable
option, capitalized asset option, overbooking option, work order location, work order business unit, work
order shop, and VIN.

126 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

• More: This tab shows business unit, asset ID, description, profile ID, parent ID, group ID, location, lease
end date, manufacturing ID, model, and replacement cost.

Display all columns by clicking theShow all Columnsicon.

You can sort options to arrange the asset list order. For example, if you click Asset ID, assets are ordered
according to the asset number assigned in either ascending or descending order.

Note. Some results may contain multiple ChartFields. To display them, click either the Asset Cost
Information tab or the Show all Columns icon.

Drill-Down To

The drill-down functionality enables you to review detailed information about a selected asset within different
Asset Management components. You can also use the drill-down functionality to copy or print an asset.
Select one of the following options to view detailed asset information in a new window:

• Asset Accounting Entries.

• Asset Basic Information.

• Asset Cost Adjust/Transfers.

• Asset Cost History.

• Asset Depreciation.

• Asset Retirements.

• Copy Asset.

• Define Tax/Depr Criteria (define tax and depreciation criteria).

• Print an Asset.

• View Component Hierarchy.

Printing Asset Information

This section lists the page used to print asset information.

Page Used to Print Asset Information

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Printable view of Asset AM_LOOKUP_PRINT Asset Management, Print an Generate a printed copy of
Asset the asset basic information,
default book and
depreciation attributes, and
asset cost information for
the default book.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 127
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Adding Assets with the Excel to Component Interface Utility

The PeopleTools Excel to Component Interface utility enables you to add assets from a predefined
spreadsheet template. You can use the utility to upload new asset information during a conversion or when
adding assets acquired from an acquisition or merger. You can add financial data and physical data. Once the
data is uploaded, it is available for the Transaction Loader process to process the asset additions as financial
add transactions (FAD).

Note. The amount of data that can be uploaded from a spreadsheet is limited by the spreadsheet utility.
Consequently, this method of conversion is inappropriate for large-volume data conversions.

This section provides an overview of how to import asset information with the Excel to Component Interface
utility and discusses how to:

• Enter data to import assets.

• Preview the data to be imported through a spreadsheet.

See Also

Enterprise PeopleTools PeopleBook, PeopleSoft Component Interfaces

Understanding How to Import Asset Information with the Excel to Component

Interface Utility
The PeopleSoft system provides a template to import and add transactions financial data from the spreadsheet
to Asset Management tables INTFC_FIN and INTFC_PHY_A with the Excel to Component Interface utility.

Here is an overview of the steps to add assets using import data from an Excel spreadsheet:

1. Connect to the database by entering the database connect information on the template Connect
Information tab.

You need the PeopleSoft web server name, port, PeopleSoft Pure Internet Architecture or portal name,
and default local node.

2. Select the predefined component interface (INTFC_FINPHY_SS_A) to populate the template on the
Template tab.

3. Select the fields that are used to enter data.

Select New Data Input to format the Data Input tab with the selected data fields for the component
interface.

4. Input data for all identified and selected record levels on the Data Input tab.

5. Stage the input data to the Stage & Submit Data tab.

128 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

6. Review the data that is ready for staging on the Stage & Submit Data tab.

Submit data for error-checking and transmission to the database, if successful.

7. Errors are returned to the Stage & Submit Data tab; select the Post Results option to return processing
errors to the Data Input tab for reworking.

8. Submit data to the PeopleSoft Asset Management database as needed to successfully transmit all input
data to Asset Management.

9. Preview the financial and physical data, using the menu option for importing data through a spreadsheet.

10. Run the Transaction Loader process to add assets to the database.

Pages Used to Add Assets with the Excel to Component Interface Utility

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Import Data Via INTFC_FINPHY_SS Asset Management, Preview data uploaded from
Spreadsheet Send/Receive Information, ExcelToCI utility to import
Import Data via and add financial
Spreadsheet, Financial and transaction data to Asset
Physical, Import Data Via Management tables
Spreadsheet INTFC_FIN and
INTFC_PHY_A before
running the transaction
loader. If you want to
change any information,
you must go back to the
ExcelToCI utility to make
changes.

Entering Data to Import Assets

Access the Excel to Component Interface (ExcelToCI.xls) spreadsheet (Asset Management, Send/Receive
Information, Import Data via Spreadsheet, Financial and Physical, Import Data Via Spreadsheet).

Connect and select the component interface to be used for the asset upload: INTFC_FINPHY_SS_A. Select
the data fields to be entered and format the Data Input tab by selecting New Data Input. Access the Input Data
page of the Excel to Component Interface utility. The following table describes the entries for required fields
to upload asset FAD transactions. Many other data fields are available to enter data through the template in
addition to the ones described here; these are not required or key fields.

Record Level 000 identifies the common key field values to be shared by INTFC_FIN and INTFC_PHY_A.
Record level 100 contains data fields for the INTFC_FIN table and record level 200 identifies the data fields
for the INTFC_PHY_A table.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 129
Adding and Maintaining Assets Chapter 5

Row Property Input Description Entry Required

Interface ID (INTFC_ID) Use a unique previously unused Required

INTFC_ID.
Lock the Installation_AM table by
updating the INTFC_ID to the next
INTFC_ID.
Use that INTFC for the CIS.

Interface Line Number The INTFC_LINE_NUM must be Required

(INTFC_LINE_NUM) unique for each ASSET_ID.

Business Unit (BUSINESS_UNIT) Required

Asset Identification (ASSET_ID) This field can be NEXT. Required

Asset Book Name (BOOK) BOOK can be entered if the default

profile SW (switch) = Y, but all the
books need to be entered if the
default profile SW = N (multiple
lines for each asset, one line per
book).

Date/Time Stamp This field should be populated by Required

(DTTM_STAMP) the user. If left blank, the current
time is entered for the row on which
it is blank. If a different date-time
stamp exists for the same asset, the
asset cannot be created.

Transaction Load Type Either FAD, ADD, CN1 & CN2

(INTFC_TYPE) should be entered. If left blank,
FAD is populated as the
INTFC_TYPE

System Source (SYSTEM_ Always populated as CIS.

SOURCE)

Interface Status (INTFC_STATUS) Always populated as DON.

Load Status (LOAD_STATUS) Always populated as NEW.

Default Books from Profile Required

(DEFAULT_PROFILE_SW)

Here is a portion of the input page:

130 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 5 Adding and Maintaining Assets

Example of Input Data page

When the data input is complete, stage the data to the Stage & Submit tab. Data is transmitted to the database
from the Stage & Submit page.

Previewing the Data to Be Imported Through a Spreadsheet

Access the Import Data Via Spreadsheet page (Asset Management, Send/Receive Information, Import Data
via Spreadsheet, Financial and Physical, Import Data Via Spreadsheet).

Select the FIN and PHY data to be uploaded from the Excel to Component Interface utility. Enter search
criteria. You can search by interface ID, interface line number, business unit, transaction load type, system
source, auto-approval status, load status, asset identification, and asset book name. Preview the data before
running the Transaction Loader process. If you need to enter changes, you must return to the Excel to
Component Interface utility to make them or update them in preview pages depending upon user permissions

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 131
 Chapter 6

Working with Asset Budgeting

This chapter provides an overview of asset budgeting and capital acquisition planning, and discusses how to:

• Define new capital acquisition plans.

• Adjust capital acquisition plans.

• Link assets to existing capital acquisition plans.

• View capital acquisition plans.

• Run capital acquisition plan reports.

Understanding Asset Budgeting

Charting foreseeable acquisitions is sometimes straightforward, but can often involve assets with high levels
of complexity. The capital acquisition planning functionality in PeopleSoft Asset Management and
PeopleSoft Budgeting handles your plans when they involve a single asset, and also accommodates
acquisitions that span several phases and involve many different components. For more complex acquisitions,
PeopleSoft enables you to define a master plan with an unlimited number of subsidiary plans. As you acquire
assets, you can associate them with the capital acquisition plan and maintain an up-to-date view as your
business makes each expenditure included in the plan.

Each plan you set up is assigned a type. Types provide a categorization method that you can use when you
generate reports.

You can have as many capital acquisition plan types as you need to reflect the range of categories that you
want to track. Each time you design a capital acquisition plan, assign a type.

Before you work with capital acquisition planning, you must create business units and establish capital
acquisition plan types.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Integrating
PeopleSoft Asset Management with Other Products," Integrating with Budgeting.

Understanding Capital Acquisition Planning

The PeopleSoft Asset Management and Budgeting products provide a straightforward page set for entering a
plan, enabling you to link assets to that plan and to update cost and asset summaries so that you have an
overview at a glance.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 133
Working with Asset Budgeting Chapter 6

When you establish a new plan, you provide ChartField information to identify the project and you enter a
cost estimate and cost limit. Plans consist of a single asset or multiple asset component in a large project. You
can provide a text description and justification for the plan, and you can enter multiple authorizations for each
asset within a plan.

Once you assign a plan to Open status, you can link assets to the plan as they are acquired. All associated
assets appear on one summary page; cost summary information is provided on another. As the status of each
asset changes, the summary totals reflect that progress; you can see how much of your acquisition amount is
represented by assets in different life phases.

Note. You cannot link assets to a plan until the plan is assigned an Open status. Assign open status to a
capital acquisition plan on the Capital Acquisition Planning - Details page.

Defining New Capital Acquisition Plans

To appropriate funds for a capital acquisition, you set up a capital acquisition plan by assigning a type;
indicating the ChartFields affected; entering cost information; and providing a plan description, justification,
and authorization.

Pages Used to Define New Capital Acquisition Plans

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Capital Acquisition BD_CAP_DETAILS Asset Management, Asset Add a new capital

Planning - Details Transactions, Capital acquisition plan.
Acquisition Planning,
Create (CAP) Plan, Details

CAP Detail Long BD_CAP_DET_SEC Select the Sel (select) check Enter a long description for
Description box on the Capital a selected item in the capital
Acquisitions Planning - acquisition plan.
Details page, and click
Save.
Click the Long Descr (long
description) button.

CAP Details - Annual Cost BD_CAP_COST_SEC Select the Sel (select) check Enter and keep track of
box on the Capital CAP annual cost for a
Acquisitions Planning - selected item in the capital
Details page, and click acquisition plan.
Save.
Note. The values you enter
Click the Annual Cost on this page are for
button. information only. The
system does not use this
information for any
validation purposes.

134 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 6 Working with Asset Budgeting

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

CAP Details - Justification BD_CAP_JUSTIFY_SEC Select the Sel (select) check Enter a detailed justification
box on the Capital for a selected item in the
Acquisitions Planning - capital acquisition plan.
Details page, and click save. (optional)
Click the Justification
button.

CAP Details - Authorization BD_CAP_AUTH_SEC Select the Sel (select) check Authorize each item in the
box on the Capital capitalization acquisition
Acquisitions Planning - plan.
Details page, and click save.
Click the Authorization
button.

Assigning Capital Acquisition Plan Name and ChartFields

Access the Capital Acquisition Planning - Details page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Capital
Acquisition Planning, Create (CAP) Plan).

Note. Column visibility and order for grids may vary by implementation. Use the scroll bar to view all the
available columns.

CAP Class Select a class:

• Cost Reduction

• Expansion

• Necessity

• New

Details

The Details group box can contain a single entry if the plan is for a standalone asset, or it can contain many
assets that make up a larger project. For example, an expansion project for the Customer Service Department
could have three CAP Seq # (sequence numbers), one each to build out a building wing, interior design
plans, and furniture and fixtures.

Note. Since this is a new plan, the Original/Adjustment Switch should be set to Original. When you revise
existing plans, be sure to select Adjustment instead.

Description Enter a description for the asset, which may be similar to the plan name if the
plan contains only one sequence number. This description and the CAP Sequence
number show on the other detail pages associated with capital acquisition
planning for the asset.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 135
Working with Asset Budgeting Chapter 6

CAP Type Select a type. The available CAP types are those defined when you established
asset processing. You can generate reports that segregate the assets by the CAP
Type you assign here.

Status Statuses are used for reporting purposes, organizing information or when making
adjustments to existing plans. Select a status from the options on the drop-down
list:
• Open: Select this option to open a CAP. You can only associate assets to a
CAP that has an open status.

• Closed: Select this option to close the CAP. The CAP Plan sequence will not
be treated as closed until its status is set to Closed; It does not matter if the
closing date in the Est Comp field has expired.

• Entered: Select this status when first entering a CAP.

• On Hold: Select this status if the CAP is on hold.

• Approval 1, 2 or 3: Select these statuses to denote the approval phase of the

CAP.

Est Comp (estimated Enter an estimated completion date to be used for tracking this plan. When all the
completion) items in this plan are acquired, access the page again and enter the Date Closed.
Remember, you must also set the Status to Closed to keep assets from being
added to this CAP after it is closed.

Requester To ensure that the audit trail is accurate, enter a requester.

Estimated Cost The cost you enter displays on the CAP Summary page. You can adjust the cost
estimate as time passes by selecting theAdjustment option in the
Original/Adjustment Switch field and specifying a different cost. The total of the
adjustments and the updated cost estimate also display on the CAP Summary
page.

Cost Limit Enter a maximum cost for the CAP plan; or, enter a % Over Allowed and the
system calculates the cost limit automatically based on the percentage that you
specify.

% Over Allowed Specify a percentage to add a margin to your cost estimate. If you specify an
(percentage over allowed) amount, the system enables you to add an asset to the plan that pushes your
acquisition costs above the limit you set. The system automatically calculates the
Cost Limit based upon the estimated amount and the percentage over estimated
amount that you specify. The disparity is reflected in the SQRs for capital
acquisition planning.

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing Asset
Processing"

136 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 6 Working with Asset Budgeting

Adjusting Capital Acquisition Plans

Once a capital acquisition plan is established, there are a variety of revisions and additions you can make. All
the information originally entered can be modified, and you have the option to change the original
information or leave it intact and tag your changes as adjustments. The Original or Adjustment option on the
Detail page reflects your categorization options.

You may not want to keep track of text changes you make to a plan, but you probably need to maintain the
history of fluctuations in estimated costs and cost limits. The CAP Summary page separates the original cost
estimate and cost limit from adjustments made to these amounts, so you can see the changing financial picture
at a glance. You have these options:

• If you want the cost modifications to display separately, be sure that you select the Adjustment option on
the Detail page before you enter cost information.

• If you want to change the original cost rather than make an adjustment, leave the Original option selected
on the Detail page, and access pages by using Update/Display as the action.

Note. Keep in mind that the capital acquisition pages are not effective-dated, so you need to use the
Adjustment option if you want to maintain a history of the changes you make to any plans.

Linking Assets to Existing Capital Acquisition Plans

One of the advantages of capital acquisition planning is that it gives you a measure against which you can
chart capital expenditures to ensure that you stay within the projected budget. Once you have completed a
capital acquisition plan, you want to ensure that the assets you acquire under that plan are associated with it
so that you can view the totals as you approach the estimated cost or cost limit.

Each time you add an asset in PeopleSoft Asset Management, you have the option to assign it a capital
acquisition plan number that links it to an open capital acquisition plan. This link can also be made in
Purchasing when you create requisitions or purchase orders to purchase assets. Assets created using the
interface from Purchasing are automatically associated with the CAP assigned on the requisition.

Note. The capital acquisition plan must have a status of Open to have assets associated with it. A capital
acquisition plan that is still in approval phases cannot have assets linked to it.

Viewing Capital Acquisition Plans

PeopleSoft Asset Management and PeopleSoft Budgeting offer you a view of capital acquisition plans from
different perspectives. You can see a list of all the assets that are linked to a particular plan, display any
capital or operating lease payments associated with a particular plan, or view a summary of cost information.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 137
Working with Asset Budgeting Chapter 6

Pages Used to View Capital Acquisition Plans

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Capital Acquisition BD_CAP_ASSETS Asset Management, Asset View a list of financial

Planning - Financial Assets Transactions, Capital assets associated with a
Acquisition Planning, plan. The link between an
Create (CAP) Plan, asset and a plan is made on
Financial Assets the Asset Basic Information
- Asset Entry page or the
ExpressAdd Cost/Asset
Information page when you
add a new asset. The link
between an asset and the
plan can also be made when
you create assets using the
Purchasing/Assets interface
for requisitions or purchase
orders.

Note. You must associate

the asset with the capital
acquisition plan by
specifying the appropriate
plan number on the Asset
Basic Information - Asset
Entry page, the ExpressAdd
- Cost/Asset Information
page, or the
Purchasing/Asset interface.

Capital Acquisition BD_CAP_NF_ASSETS Asset Management, Asset View a list of nonfinancial

Planning - Non-Financial Transactions, Capital assets associated with a
Assets Acquisition Planning, plan. The Non-Financial
Create (CAP) Plan, Non- Assets page is populated by
Financial Assets the CAP_ASSET_NF_VW
view with nonfinancial
assets that are not retired.

Capital Acquisition BD_CAP_LSE_PAY Asset Management, Asset View a list of any capital
Planning - Capital Lease Transactions, Capital lease payments associated
Payments Acquisition Planning, with a capital acquisition
Create (CAP) Plan, Capital plan.
Lease Payments

138 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 6 Working with Asset Budgeting

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Capital Acquisition BD_CAP_OPR_LSE_PAY Asset Management, Asset View a list of any operating
Planning - Operating Lease Transactions, Capital lease payments associated
Payments Acquisition Planning, with a capital acquisition
Create (CAP) Plan, plan. The operating lease
Operating Lease Payments payment data is populated
by the
CAP_LSE_OPR_VW view,
which pulls the schedule
from the
PS_LEASE_SCHED
record.

Capital Acquisition BD_CAP_SUMMARY Asset Management, Asset Review cost information

Planning - Summary Transactions, Capital related to the plan. The
Acquisition Planning, system automatically totals
Create (CAP) Plan, the costs of both
Summary nonfinancial and financial
assets associated with the
capital acquisition plan and
shows values by estimated
costs, cost limits, and asset
status categories.

Running Capital Acquisition Plan Reports

Run the Capital Acquisition Planning report from the Capital Acquisition Planning - Parameters page.

Page Used to Run Capital Acquisition Plan Reports

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Capital Acquisition RUN_AMCP2000 Asset Management, Asset Set parameters for the
Planning - Parameters Transactions, Capital capital acquisition plan
Acquisition Planning, CAP reports: Capital Acquisition
Reports, CAP Reports Planning (AMCP2000),
CAP by Department
(AMCP2010) and CAP
Assets (AMCP2100).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 139
 Chapter 7

Working With Leased Assets

This chapter provides an overview of leased assets, lists prerequisites, and discusses how to:

• Define payment schedules.

• Add or update capital and operating leases.

• Create lease expense schedules.

• Integrate lease payments with PeopleSoft Payables.

• Transfer operating leases.

• Retire or reinstate leases.

• Generate lease reports.

Understanding Leased Assets

PeopleSoft Asset Management incorporates full lease management functionality, including calculating and
printing lease payment schedules, calculating leased asset revenues, and verifying leases as operating or
capital leases, in accordance with the United States Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) Statement
13. It also provides the ability to define step leases as well as a robust lease payment integration with
PeopleSoft Payables for automatic voucher creation.

In PeopleSoft Asset Management, you can retire and reinstate leased assets and track interim payments.

This section discusses:

• Capital and operating leases.

• Step leases.

• Lease payment integration with PeopleSoft Payables.

Note. Your transactions are maintained with multiple currencies if you use them in conjunction with leased
assets.

Capital and Operating Leases

There are two basic types of leases: capital leases and operating leases.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 141
Working With Leased Assets Chapter 7

• A capital lease is treated as a financial asset.

It has a lease term and lease payment amount. The lease is carried on the balance sheet and is periodically
depreciated.

• An operating lease is treated as a nonfinancial asset to which no cost information is associated. It is

normally expensed and can include rent and monthly payments that are expensed periodically.

PeopleSoft Asset Management uses the lease classification rules for capital and operating leases as
proscribed by the country requirements that were established during the setup of book location. For
example, in the United States, leased assets are defined and governed by Financial Accounting Standards
Board (FASB) Statement 13.

Note. The United States FASB 13 lease classification rules apply to all countries unless otherwise noted.
For example, in Germany, the threshold for capitalization is 90 percent of the leased asset's economic life,
as compared to 75 percent under the United States' generally accepted accounting principles. In Canada,
the classification of capital or operating leases is the same as that defined in the United States FASB 13.
PeopleSoft Asset Management supports the United States, Germany, Canada, and Australia for least type
verification.

Step Leases
A step lease features variable payment amounts and variable timing over the term of the lease.

Examples of step leases include:

• Step-down leases with decreasing or declining lease payments.

• Step-up leases with increasingly larger lease payments during the lease term.

• Skip-payment leases in which payments are not required during certain periods.

This table provides an example of a step-down lease schedule:

Number of Terms Frequency Payment Amount

6 Monthly $400

18 Monthly $350

This table provides an example of a quarterly step-lease payment schedule. It is suggested that you use three
payment schedules with due dates as shown.

Schedule Due Dates

Schedule 1 January, April, July, October

Schedule 2 February, May, August, November

142 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 7 Working With Leased Assets

Schedule Due Dates

Schedule 3 March, June, September, December

For an annual step-lease payment schedule, it is suggested that you use 12 payment schedules, with one
schedule for each of the 12 months as the payment due date.

Lease Payment Integration with PeopleSoft Payables

You can enable the lease payment integration between PeopleSoft Asset Management and PeopleSoft
Payables to automatically generate vouchers for lease payments that are calculated in Asset Management.
This includes both capital and operating leases. Additionally, the lease payment schedule segregates the
principal and interest of each payment and is used by the Depreciation Close process (AMDPCLOS) to
generate the payment accounting entries. The lease payments can be allocated on a monthly basis, in
accordance with GAAP, and Asset Management generates the associated monthly accrual accounting entries.
Lease Interest Contra and Lease Obligation Contra accounts must be established as clearing accounts, which
are offset by the Payables voucher entries. This integration is enabled at the Asset Management business unit
level.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Integrating
PeopleSoft Asset Management with Other Products," Integrating with PeopleSoft Payables - Sending Lease
Payments to Payables.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing
PeopleSoft Asset Management Business Units," Selecting Asset Management Interface Options.

Once you have enabled the lease payment integration with PeopleSoft Payables at the business unit level:

• Complete the Payables Integration page within the Leased Assets component with pertinent integration
information by asset.

• Review payment date, integration status, and Payables information for lease payments that are selected
for Payables integration using the Review Payments page.

• Approve pending lease payments to Payables (if the pre-approval option is not enabled).

• Upload payments to be processed to Payables.

• Run AP/AM Payment Reconciliation report.

See Chapter 7, "Working With Leased Assets," Integrating Lease Payments with PeopleSoft Payables, page
161.

Defining Payment Schedules

This section discusses how to add or modify payment schedules for leases.

Before you can add leased assets to your system, you must define at least one payment schedule to indicate
when a lease starts and ends. Leases can share the same payment schedule ID.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 143
Working With Leased Assets Chapter 7

Page Used to Define Payment Schedules

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Payment Schedules LEASE_SCH_ID Set Up Financials/Supply Add or modify payment

Chain, Product Related, schedules for leases.
Asset Management,
Financials, Payment
Schedules, Payment
Schedules

Defining Lease Payment Schedules

Access the Payment Schedules page (Set Up Financials/Supply Chain, Product Related, Asset Management,
Financials, Payment Schedules, Payment Schedules).

144 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 7 Working With Leased Assets

Payment Schedules page

Complete the information about the begin date, end date, lease term, and payment frequency.

Number of Payments Enter a value to determine the number of lease payments for the lease schedule.
Per Year

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 145
Working With Leased Assets Chapter 7

Prorate Lease Expense Select to prorate the accounting entries that are generated for lease payments by
the depreciation close process (AMDPCLOS) on a monthly basis. The lease
payment schedule segregates the principal and interest of each payment and is
used by the AMDPCLOS process to generate the payment accounting entries.
The prorated amounts are allocated as well according to their respective
ChartField distributions.

End of Month Due Date Select to always schedule a payment on the last day of the month.

Populate After completing the fields about the payment schedule, click the Populatebutton
to automatically populate the Payment Datecolumn fields.

Adding Capital and Operating Leases

This section discusses how to:

• Enter basic information about the lease and lease terms.

• (Optional) Enter information about cost, ChartFields, and depreciation.

• (Optional) View or update a step-lease payment schedule.

• View or update a lease payment schedule.

Pages Used to Add Capital and Operating Leases

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Express Add - Definition ASSET_LEASE_01 Asset Management, Asset Create a capital lease or an
Transactions, Leased operating lease.
Assets, Express Add

Update Lease Information - ASSET_LEASE_01 Asset Management, Asset Update a capital lease or an
Definition Transactions, Leased operating lease.
Assets, Update Lease
Information

Express Add - Cost ASSET_LEASE_02 Asset Management, Asset Enter cost, ChartField, and
Transactions, Leased depreciation data for a
Assets, Express Add, Cost leased asset.

Update Lease Information - ASSET_LEASE_02 Asset Management, Asset Update cost, ChartField,
Cost Transactions, Leased and depreciation data for a
Assets, Update Lease leased asset.
Information, Cost

146 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 7 Working With Leased Assets

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Express Add - Step Lease ASSSET_LEASE_05 Asset Management, Asset Enter a step-lease payment
Payment Transactions, Leased schedule.
Assets, Express Add, Step
Lease Payment

Update Lease Information - ASSET_LEASE_05 Asset Management, Asset Update a step-lease

Step Lease Payment Transactions, Leased payment schedule.
Assets, Update Lease
Information, Step Lease
Payment

Express Add - Payment ASSET_LEASE_03 Asset Management, Asset Create or view lease
Schedule Transactions, Leased payment schedules.
Assets, Express Add,
Payment Schedule

Update Lease Information - ASSET_LEASE_03 Asset Management, Asset Update lease payment
Payment Schedule Transactions, Leased schedules.
Assets, Update Lease
Information, Payment
Schedule

Update Lease Information - ASSET_LEASE_06U Asset Management, Asset Update operating lease
Operating ChartFields Transactions, Leased ChartField information.
Assets, Update Lease ASSET_LEASE_06 and
Information, Operating ASSET_LEASE_06U are
ChartFields used to allocate operating
lease payments to a
particular set of
ChartFields.

Creating a Lease
Access the Express Add - Definition page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Leased Assets, Express
Add).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 147
Working With Leased Assets Chapter 7

Leased Assets - Express Add - Definition page (1 of 2)

Leased Assets - Express Add - Definition page (2 of 2)

Profile ID Enter an ID if you want to use the default information from an asset profile to
define this asset. You must enter a profile ID for a capital lease because all
depreciation information is stored in the profile ID. A profile ID is not required
for an operating lease.

148 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 7 Working With Leased Assets

Trans Date (transaction Enter a transaction date and accounting date for the lease. For leases, the
date) and Acctg Date payment date is based on the transaction date. For example, if a lease begins in
(accounting date) October and you need to start the payments in the same month, enter a
transaction date of October 1. The accounting date has no bearing on the payment
date.

CAP #(capital acquisition Select the associated Capital Acquisition Plan number for this leased asset or
planning number) and Seq look up the associated Asset ID Sequence number if one has been assigned.
#(sequence number)
Trans Code (transaction Select the accounting entry template that is used for transactions relating to this
code) asset.

Asset Type Select the asset type from the available established values. You must enter Asset
Type for operating leases if you do not enter a profile.

Subtype Select the asset subtype from the available defined values for the selected Asset
Type.

Currency Select the currency for the transactions that are processed with this asset.

Serial ID Enter the Serial ID that is associated with this asset. Serial IDs track physical
inventory, especially for IT assets.

Tag Number Enter the tag number that is associated with this asset. Tag numbers track
physical inventory.

Note. To perform a physical inventory with PeopleSoft Asset Management, your

assets must use tag numbers.

Rate Type The exchange rate that is defined for the default book for the business unit
appears by default in this field. You can select a different rate type.

Lease Information

Lease IDandDescription Select from the available lease IDs assign a new ID for this business unit and add
a description of the lease. Description is required only if a Lease ID has been
assigned.

Vendor IDandVendor Select the Vendor ID from the list of available vendors for this asset and enter
Contact contact information. Vendor ID is required if Lease ID is assigned.

Responsibility Enter the name of the person who is responsible for this leased asset. Required if
Lease ID is entered.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 149
Working With Leased Assets Chapter 7

Acceptance Date Indicates the date that the lease contract is accepted (signed and returned to the
lessor). If you complete the Interim Rent (Monthly) field in the Lease Term
group box, you must enter an acceptance date that is earlier than the
commencement date of the lease. Interim rent starts on the acceptance date and
ends on the commencement date. You enter the amount of the interim rent in the
Interim Rent (Monthly) field.

Receipt Date Enter the date the leased asset is received. This is an information-only date fields
for reporting purposes.

Lease End Date Enter the date the leased asset is received. Lease End Date becomes required
when a Lease ID is entered. This date is used for the Lease End Date report.

Display Alert Days Enter the number of days in advance to receive the Lease End Date pagelet based
on the Lease End Date. This field appears only if PeopleSoft IT Asset
Management (ITAM) is installed.

Commence Date and These fields represent the first and last lease payment date (regardless of interim
Expiration Date rent), and appear only after you save the page.

Inception Date This field appears when viewing this page in Update/Display mode. The date that
is displayed is the date of the original transaction.

Comment Enter any comments to be noted for this leased asset.

Note. If LEASE is entered and PeopleSoft ITAM is installed then Description, Lease End Date, Vendor Id
and Responsibility are required fields.

Lease Term

Lease Term Enter the number of periods in this lease.

Estimated Life The number of periods that you entered in Lease Term field appears by default.
You can change this value.

Interest Rate (%) Enter the approximate percentage of profit the lessor gains by leasing the asset to
(interest rate percentage) you. This number must be an annual interest rate percentage in whole numbers.

Borrowing Rate (%) Enter the interest rate that you would have incurred at the inception of the lease if
you had borrowed the necessary funds to purchase the leased asset. This number
must be an annual interest rate percentage in whole numbers.

Payment Schedule ID If you want the system to define a lease payment schedule, enter a payment
schedule ID. Capital leases must have a payment schedule ID. The values that
you can select are set up on the Payment Schedule page when you specify the
payment frequency and number of periods.

150 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 7 Working With Leased Assets

Fair Value Enter the fair value. The system uses the fair value to verify the lease type. It also
records this value on the AM_FMV table to use in the asset revaluation process.
The system calculates the capitalized lease amount using the lesser of the Present
Value Lease Payments and Fair Value field values.
If the present value of the lease payments is less than the fair value, the
capitalized lease amount equals the present value of the minimum lease payment
(MLP).
If the fair value is less than the present value of lease payments, the capitalized
lease amount equals the fair value.
You might want to change the interest rate so that the net present value equals the
fair value.
If you do not enter a fair value, the capitalized lease amount equals the present
value of the MLP.

FV Template ID (fair Select a fair value template, which includes the valuation method, level and
value template ID) premise. If left blank, the fair value is created but the additional valuation
information is not provided.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1
PeopleBook, "Setting Up Accounting Entry and Financial Processing for
PeopleSoft Asset Management," Enabling Combination Editing.

FV Group ID (fair value This field is active only when the selected FV Template ID has a valuation
group ID) premise of In Use. The default value is supplied from the selected FV Template
ID; however, you can override it and select another FV Group ID.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1
PeopleBook, "Setting Up Accounting Entry and Financial Processing for
PeopleSoft Asset Management," Enabling Combination Editing.

Guar. Residual Value Calculates depreciation based on the amount of the residual value of the leased
(guaranteed residual asset that is guaranteed by the lessee to the lessor and considered as part of the
value) minimum lease payments.

BPO (bargain purchase Select if this lease includes a bargain purchase option, which represents a
option) payment by the lessee to the lessor at the end of the lease term, allowing the
lessee to obtain title to the leased property.

BRO (bargain renewal Select if this lease includes a bargain renewal option, which requires a payment if
option) the lease agreement grants the lessee the right to renew or extend the lease. If the
agreement specifies that the lease must be renewed or extended, a penalty might
be required for failure to renew.

Transfer Ownership end Check if there is an ownership transfer of the asset at the end of the lease period.
lease
Step lease Select if the lease is a step lease. A step lease features variable payment amounts
and/or variable timing over the term of the lease.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 151
Working With Leased Assets Chapter 7

Minimum Rental Enter the minimum rental payment. This field is not required for step leases.
Payment (MRP)
Note. You must either enter a minimum rental payment here or complete the cost
information on the Cost page. Otherwise, the system cannot calculate the lease
payment schedule.

Minimum Lease Display a minimum lease payment.

Payments (MLP)
• If there is no bargain purchase option (and you entered a bargain renewal
option instead):

MLP = (MRP × Lease Term ÷ 12 periods per year × number of payments per
year) + Guaranteed Residual + BRO.

• If there is a bargain purchase option:

MLP = (MRP × Lease Term ÷ 12 periods per year × number of payments per
year) + BPO.

Present Value Lease Displays the present value of the lease payments for a step lease.
Payments The system uses two formulas to determine the present value of the total payment
for a step lease.
• For the first payment in the schedule, the formula looks at the present value
of an ordinary annuity for a series of payments of any amount:

P1 = Pymt × ([ 1 – (1 + Intr) ^ -npymt ] ÷ (intr))

where:

P1 = Present value of an ordinary annuity.

Pymt = Periodic payment amount.

Intr = Periodic interest rate.

npymt = Number of payments.

• For payments that are made after the first payment, the formula looks at the
present value of a single future amount:

P2 = Single_Future_Pymt × (1 ÷ (1 + intr) ^ nper)

where:

P2 = Present value of a single future amount.

Single_Future_Pymt = Future amount.

intr = Periodic interest rate.

nper = Number of periods.

The example illustrates the calculations using an interest rate of 7.2 percent.

152 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 7 Working With Leased Assets

Number of Terms Frequency Payment Amount

6 Monthly 400 USD

18 Monthly 350 USD

PV1 equals Present value of the first payment in the schedule:

400 USD × ([ 1 - (1 + 0.01) ^ -6 ] ÷ (0.01) ) = 2,350.40 USD

PV2 equals Present value of the second payment in the schedule:

[350 USD × ([ 1 - (1 + 0.01) ^ -18 ] / (0.01) )] × (1 ÷ 1.01 ^ 6) = 5,744.88 USD

Present value of the total cash flow equals: 2,350.40 + 5,744.88 = 8,095.28 USD

Note. The lease term during the renewal period is considered part of the overall lease term.

Capitalized Lease Enter the cost. The system uses the following method to calculate lease
Amount payments:
Capitalized Lease Amount - Prior Obligation Reduction = Residual Capitalized
Lease Amount
Residual Lease Amount × (Annual Implicit Interest Rate / Number of Periods per
Year) = Interest Expense per Period
Interest Expense per Payment + Obligation Reduction = MRP

For example, this table illustrate a full payment schedule for a simple capital leased asset with a capitalized
amount of 10,500 USD, an interest rate of 7 percent, a monthly payment of 908.53 USD, and 12 periods per
year:

Period Residual Obligation Interest Expense Payment in USD

Capitalized Lease Reduction
Amount in USD

1 10,500.00 847.2800562 61.24994377 908.53

2 9,652.71 852.2225232 56.30747678 908.53

3 8,800.49 857.1938213 51.33617873 908.53

4 7,943.29 862.1941186 46.33588144 908.53

5 7,081.10 867.2235843 41.30641574 908.53

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 153
Working With Leased Assets Chapter 7

Period Residual Obligation Interest Expense Payment in USD

Capitalized Lease Reduction
Amount in USD

6 6,213.88 872.2823885 36.2476115 908.53

7 5,341.59 877.3707024 31.15929757 908.53

8 4,464.22 882.4886982 26.0413018 908.53

9 3,581.73 887.6365489 20.89345107 908.53

10 2,694.10 892.8144288 15.7155712 908.53

11 1,801.28 898.022513 10.50748703 908.53

12 903.26 903.2609776 5.26902237 908.53

Interim Rent (Monthly) Enter the amount of monthly interim rent for a capital or operating lease. Interim
rent is common for quarterly leases. Interim rent starts on the acceptance date and
ends on the commencement date of the lease. Once the lease officially begins, the
normal rental payment amount is tracked by the lease payment schedule.
PeopleSoft Asset Management prorates the first month of interim rent. You can
see interim rent payments on the Express Add - Payment Schedule page
(ASSET_LEASE_03).
Select Capitalize Interim Rent if you want to include these interim payments as
part of your asset cost.

Note. You must post journal entries for interim rent each month by running the
Depreciation Close process (AM_DPCLOSE).

Capitalize Interim Rent Select this check box to capitalize. When selected, the interim rent is added to the
cost of the leased asset.

154 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 7 Working With Leased Assets

Calculate Click to have the system calculate the lease payment schedule.
Before the system can calculate the lease payment schedule, you must have:
• Defined a payment schedule.

• Entered (for leases other than step leases) the minimum rental payment on
this page or entered cost information on the Express Add - Cost page.

• For step leases, entered payment information on the Express Add - Step
Lease Payment page.

You can see the results of the calculation on the Express Add - Payment
Schedule page.

Lease Payment Type

Select a payment type: Advance or Arrears. You can use either type for both capital leases and operating
leases. More details on these two payment types are provided in this table:

Calculation Advance Payment Type Arrears Payment Type

Present Value Factor Total payment terms for present value Total payment terms for present value
factor excludes the term of the advance factor equal the total terms of the
(or first) payment. lease.

Present Value of Minimum Lease Equals: (Present Value Factor × Equals: Present Value Factor ×
Payments Periodic Payment Amount) + Advance Periodic Payment Amount.
payment.

Amortization Schedule Period interest expense equals: Period interest expense equals:
Capitalized Amount × the period Capitalized Amount × the period
interest rate. interest rate.
The Capitalized Amount used for the
first period of the payment excludes
the advance payment amount.

Advance Select if an asset is leased with the first payment that is due before the lease
begins. For advance payments, the interest expense is not calculated.
If the present value is calculated on a lease with 12 monthly payments of 100.00
USD and an interest rate of seven percent, then the calculated present value
factor is 10.6254.
Calculated present value = 100 USD + 10.6254 × 100 = 1,162.54 USD

Arrears An arrears payment type means that an asset is leased with the payment due at
the end of the period. This is the lease payment type by default. If the present
value is calculated on a lease with 12 monthly payments of 100.00 USD and an
interest rate of seven percent, then the calculated present value factor is 11.5571.
Calculated present value = 11.5571 × 100 = 1,155.71 USD

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 155
Working With Leased Assets Chapter 7

Lease Type

When you select the lease type, you can verify that you have selected the correct lease type for a country. If
you do not select either the Capital or the Operating options, the system selects the lease type for you. The
system can verify the lease types for the U.S., Canada, Germany, and Australia. Canada uses the same criteria
as the U.S. for classifying capital and operating leases. Germany uses a higher threshold for the lease term (90
percent instead of 75 percent).

Note. You cannot change a lease type from capital to operating or from operating to capital. If you must
change the lease type, you must first retire the leased asset and then reenter the lease with the appropriate
lease type.

Capital Select if the lease is a capital lease.

According to FAS13, a capital lease must meet one of the following criteria:
• There is an ownership transfer at the end of the lease.

• The lease contains a bargain purchase option (BPO).

• The lease term is 75 percent or more of the asset life.

In Germany, the lease term is 90 percent of the leased asset's economic life.

• The present value of the minimum lease payment is 90 percent or more of the
fair value of the asset.

Operating Select if the lease is an operating lease.

Verify Click this button to verify if the lease meets the criteria for a capital lease or an
operating lease. If the lease type meets the criteria, the system displays a message
confirming that the criteria for FAS13 has been met. If you do not select the
Capital or Operating option before clicking the Verify button, the system looks
at the information that you have entered on this page about the lease, including
the country code, and selects the lease type for that country.

Note. This verification test is disabled for leased assets that use an Indian
business unit; designation of capital or operating leases is manual for assets in
India.

See Chapter 23, "Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management,"
(IND) Using PeopleSoft Asset Management Options to Meet Indian
Requirements, page 496.

(Optional) Entering Information About Cost, ChartFields, and Depreciation

Access the Cost page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Leased Assets, Express Add, Cost).

156 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 7 Working With Leased Assets

Cost page

If you did not enter a minimum rental payment (MRP) on the Definition (ASSET_LEASE-01) page, you
must complete the cost information on this page.

The system uses the cost information on this page to calculate the lease payment schedule. Use the Cost,
Chartfields, and Depreciation tabs to enter more details. Because the ChartFields are effective-dated, you can
use them to track transfers.

Note. If you are working with a step lease, you do not have to enter any information on this page.

Viewing or Updating a Step-Lease Payment Schedule (Optional)

Access the Express Add - Step Lease Payment page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Leased Assets,
Express Add, Step Lease Payment).

Access the Update Lease Information - Step Lease Payment page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions,
Leased Assets, Update Lease Information, Step Lease Payment).

Step Lease Payment page

If you checked the Step lease check box on the Definition (ASSET_LEASE-01) page, you can use this page
to change payment information.

Enter a line number, enter the lease term (number of periods), select a payment frequency, and enter a
payment amount. For example, you could define a step lease that consists of six monthly payments of 400.00
JPY followed by 18 monthly payments of 350 JPY.

If you are defining a skip payment, enter a payment frequency, the number of lease terms, and a payment
amount of zero (0.00).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 157
Working With Leased Assets Chapter 7

Note. The line numbers must be in sequential order. For example, if you update a lease schedule and need to
insert a row between lines 1 and 2, you can use a line number such as 1.2.

After you are done working with this page, you must return to the Definition (ASSET_LEASE-01) page and
click the Calculate button to generate the lease payment schedule.

Viewing or Updating a Lease Payment Schedule

Access the Express Add - Payment Schedule page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Leased Assets,
Express Add, Payment Schedule).

Access the Update Lease Information - Payment Schedule page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions,
Leased Assets, Update Lease Information, Payment Schedule).

Payment Schedule

The system calculates the payment schedule on this page when you click the Calculate button on the Express
Add - Definition page.

You can update the information on this page as needed.

Note. In case of capitalizing the interim rent, payments are noted with a C rather than I next to the payment
line. You can change this designation by modifying message number 8015,37, using the PeopleTools
Message Catalog.

If you elect to process periodic depreciation accounting entries, the system creates the journal entries that are
shown in the following table:

Action Debits Credits

Add • AD Accumulated Depreciation • DE Depreciation Expense

• FA Leased property under • LO Obligations under capital

capital leases (capitalized lease leases
amount)

158 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 7 Working With Leased Assets

Action Debits Credits

Adjust • AD Accumulated Depreciation • DE Depreciation Expense

• FA Leased property under • LO Obligations under capital

capital leases (capitalized lease leases
amount)

Transfer In • FA Leased property under AD Accumulated Depreciation

capital leases (capitalized lease
amount)

• DE Depreciation Expense

Transfer Out AD Accumulated Depreciation • FA Leased property under

capital leases (capitalized lease
amount)

• DE Depreciation Expense

Retire • CA Proceeds [Proceeds] • LG Guaranteed Residual

Payable [Guaranteed Residual]
• LO Obligations under capital
leases [Guaranteed Residual] • FA Leased property under
capital leases [Current Cost]
• AD Accumulated Depreciation
[Current Reserve] • GL Gain/Loss on leased
property [Remaining Payments
• LO Obligations under capital + ((Proceeds − Removal Cost)
leases [Remaining Lease + (Cost − Reserve))
Payments]

Creating Lease Expense Schedules

This section discusses how to create lease expense schedules by running the Lease Expense Schedule process.

You must run this process:

• After setting up a step lease.

• After adjusting transactions in a step lease.

• Before running the depreciation close process.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 159
Working With Leased Assets Chapter 7

Note. The purpose of running the lease expense schedule process is to prorate payment and interest expenses
so that the proper amounts are sent to the general ledger (GL) according to the FASB. You must run this
process for all leases that have non-monthly payment schedules.

AMLSESCH reads PS_LEASE_SCHEDULE and creates PS_LEASE_SCHED2, which contains all the step-
lease non-monthly payment information. AM_DPCLOSE reads PS_LEASE_SCHED2 (through
PS_LEASE_CHART3_vw) to distribute the payment and interest expenses to the GL.

The Lease Expense Schedule process spreads non-monthly lease payments (such as quarterly payments)
throughout the year, dividing them into monthly amounts on the lease expense schedule. The results are
different for capital leases and operating leases:

• For operating leases, the lease expense schedule allocates non-monthly payments to monthly amounts.

• For capital leases, the lease expense schedule allocates non-monthly interest expense to monthly amounts,
and the payment amount is fully allocated on the date that the payment is due.

The following example uses an arrears type lease for a quarterly payment:

Payment Date Payment Amount Interest Expense

June 1, 2009 300 33

The lease expense schedule allocates the payments as shown:

Payment Date Payment Amount Interest Expense

April 1, 2009 0.00 11

May 1, 2009 0.00 11

June 1, 2009 300 11

If the general ledger period is closed, the allocation is carried forward to the next open period.

Note. Operating leases do not have interest expense on the payment schedule.

Page Used to Run the Lease Expense Schedule Process

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Lease Expense Schedule LEASE_SCHED2_RQST Asset Management, Asset Run the lease expense
Transactions, Leased schedule process.
Assets, Create Expense
Schedule, Create Expense
Schedule

160 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 7 Working With Leased Assets

Running the Lease Expense Schedule Process

Access the Create Expense Schedule page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Leased Assets, Create
Expense Schedule, Create Expense Schedule).

Create Expense Schedule page

Select Open Trans If you select this option, use the From Open Trans and To Open Transfields to
Range (select open select a range of transaction values.
transaction range)
Select Asset Range If you select this option, use the From Asset and To Assetfields to select the asset
range.

Integrating Lease Payments with PeopleSoft Payables

This section discusses how to:

• Enable the lease payment integration.

• Set up clearing accounts.

• Set up lease payment integration information by asset.

• Review and approve lease payment information.

• Upload lease payments to Payables.

• Run AP/AM Payment Reconciliation report.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 161
Working With Leased Assets Chapter 7

Page Used to Integrate Asset Management Lease Payments with PeopleSoft

Payables

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Asset Management BUS_UNIT_INTFC_OPT Set Up Financials/Supply Enable the Asset

Definition - Interface Chain, Business Unit Management lease payment
Options Related, Asset integration with PeopleSoft
Management, Asset Payables for a business unit.
Management Definition,
Interface Options

Payables Integration ASSET_LEASE_07 Asset Management, Asset Select Payables integration

Transactions, Leased information by asset for
Assets, Express Add, each scheduled payment.
Payables Integration
Asset Management, Asset
Transactions, Leased
Assets, Update Lease
Information, Payables
Integration

Review Payments LEASE_INTFC_REVW Asset Management, Review lease payment

Send/Receive Information, information and payment
Approve Lease Information, status for scheduled or
Review Payments, Review processed lease payments to
Payments Payables.

Approve Payments LEASE_INTFC_APPR Asset Management, Review and approve lease

Send/Receive Information, payments that are scheduled
Approve Lease Information, to interface with Payables
Approve Payments, (if the pre-approval option
Approve Payments is not enabled for the
business unit).

Lease Payments to Payables AMAPLEAPMT_RQST Asset Management, Run the Lease Payments to
Send/Receive Information, Payables (AMAPLEASE)
Load Interface, Lease Application Engine process.
Payments to Payables,
Lease Payments to Payables

AP/AM Payment AMAPLEAPMT_RQST Asset Management, Run the AP/AM Payment

Reconciliation Financial Reports, Leased Reconciliation report
Assets, AP/AM Payment
Reconciliation, AP/AM
Payment Reconciliation

Enabling the Lease Payment Integration

Access the Asset Management Definition - Interface Options page (Set Up Financials/Supply Chain, Business
Unit Related, Asset Management, Asset Management Definition, Interface Options).

162 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 7 Working With Leased Assets

The lease payment integration sends to Payables the information that is stored in the book that is defined as
the Lease Book on the AM Business Unit Definition page.

Enable the lease payment integration for the business unit by selecting the Lease Interface Processing check
box. Additionally, select whether to auto approve vouchers and enter the default Payables business unit on the
Interface Options page.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing
PeopleSoft Asset Management Business Units," Selecting Asset Management Interface Options.

Setting Up Clearing Accounts

Set up Lease Obligation Contra and Lease Interest Contra accounts as clearing accounts. Both accounts are
credited in Asset Management and debited subsequently during the voucher posting process in Payables. The
following table presents an example of lease payment entries within the respective applications using the LPY
accounting entry template:

Application Account Debit Credit Distribution

Type

Asset Management Lease Obligation 950 LO

Asset Management Lease Obligation (950) LP

Contra

Asset Management Lease Interest Expense 50 LI

Asset Management Lease Interest Contra (50) LC

Payables Lease Obligation 950

Contra

Payables Lease Payable (950)

Payables Lease Interest Contra 50

Payables Lease Payable (50)

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up
Accounting Entry and Financial Processing for PeopleSoft Asset Management," Creating Accounting Entry
Templates.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 163
Working With Leased Assets Chapter 7

Setting Up Lease Payment Integration Information by Asset

Access the Payables Integration page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Leased Assets, Express Add,
Payables Integration ) or (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Leased Assets, Update Lease Information,
Payables Integration).

Payables Integration page

Payment Date The default payment dates are populated from the Payment Schedule page. You
can update the payment dates as needed.

Payment Total Displays the payment amounts that are established on the Payment Schedule
page. This field is not editable.

Payables Integration Select only those lines that you want to forward to Payables for payment. If a line
is not selected, then the other fields are not editable. By default, this check box is
selected for every line for which the business unit has been enabled for
integration with Payables.

AP Business Unit Displays the default Payables business unit from the business unit level (Interface
Options page). You can enter a different business unit (there are some cases
where multiple Payables business units pertain to the same AM business unit).

Voucher ID Displays the PeopleSoft Payables voucher ID once the transaction has been
processed by the integration and Payables has created the voucher.

Invoice Number (Optional) Enter the invoice number to appear in the Payables voucher.

164 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 7 Working With Leased Assets

Payment Status Displays the integration status. Valid values for this field are:
• Approved-Auto - Initial status when the Auto Approve check box is selected
at the business unit level (Interface Options page). Transaction has not yet
been processed.

• Pending Approval - Initial status when the Auto Approve check box is not
selected at the business unit level (Interface Options page). Transactions with
this status must be approved before processing.

• Approved - Transaction is approved and ready for integration processing to

Payables.

• Error - Transaction did not process successfully.

• In Process - Transaction is currently being processed by the integration to

Payables.

• On Hold - Transaction has intentionally been detained from processing to

Payables.

• Processed - Transaction has been successfully processed through the

integration to Payables and the voucher has been created.

• Sent to AP - Transaction has been successfully processed through the

integration to Payables.

• Cancelled - Transaction has been intentionally omitted from processing. This

is for tracking purposes since deselecting the Payables Integration check box
produces the same outcome.

When a transaction is approved or processed through the integration, the

transaction line is no longer editable. All fields are unavailable except the
Voucher ID field, which becomes link to the corresponding voucher within
PeopleSoft Payables. The voucher information is access through a new window.

Reviewing and Approving Lease Payment Information

Access the Review Payments page (Asset Management, Send/Receive Information, Approve Lease
Information, Review Payments, Review Payments ).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 165
Working With Leased Assets Chapter 7

Review Payments page

Use the Review Payments page to review the integration status of the lease payments, select or deselect to
send payments through the Payables Integration process and change the Payables business unit, if needed, for
payments that are not yet approved or processed.

Select the desired parameters and click the Search button to retrieve payments for review.

Asset Identification Displays the asset ID for the lease payment based on the criteria that you provide.

Payment Status Displays the payment status.

See Chapter 7, "Working With Leased Assets," Setting Up Lease Payment
Integration Information by Asset, page 164.

Payables Integration Select those lines that you want to forward to Payables for payment. If a line is
deselected, then the other fields are not editable. By default, this check box is
selected for every line for which the business unit has been enabled for
integration with Payables.

AP Unit Select a different Payables business unit for a transaction, if necessary, and save
the page.

Access the Approve Payments page (Asset Management, Send/Receive Information, Approve Lease
Information, Approve Payments, Approve Payments ).

166 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 7 Working With Leased Assets

Approve Payments page

Use the Approve Payments page to review, approve, or change the payment status of the lease payments. This
page is similar to the Review Payments page except that you can change the payment status on this page.

Select the desired parameters and click the Search button to retrieve payments that are eligible for approval.

Asset Identification Displays the asset ID for the lease payment based on the criteria that you provide.

Payment Status Displays the current payment status. Select to approve or change the current
payment status of the lease payment.
See Chapter 7, "Working With Leased Assets," Running the AP/AM
Reconciliation Report, page 169.

Payables Integration Override the current payables integration selection. Select lines that you want to
forward to Payables for payment. Deselect to keep a transaction from being sent
through the integration process. Once deselected, the payment will not show up
again in a future search.

AP Unit Override the Payables business unit for a transaction, if necessary, and save the
page.

Uploading Lease Payments to Payables

Access the Lease Payments to Payables page (Asset Management, Send/Receive Information, Load Interface,
Lease Payments to Payables, Lease Payments to Payables )

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 167
Working With Leased Assets Chapter 7

Lease Payments to Payables

Run the Lease Payments to Payables (AMAPLEASE) Application Engine process. Select the criteria for the
lease payments to process for the integration.

This process populates the voucher build integration tables with the necessary information for Payables
processing. Payables then continues to process the lease payments from the voucher build staging tables to
create the corresponding vouchers. When the vouchers are generated, Payables inserts the voucher ID and
line number into the Asset Management records. The lease payment information is reflected in the asset-
related fields at the distribution level.

The lease ID is displayed on the Invoice Information page within Payables.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Payables 9.1 PeopleBook, "Entering and Processing Vouchers Online: General
Voucher Entry Information."

Note. To avoid the potential risk of resending these payments to Asset Management as adjustments to
existing assets, Payables assigns a unique origin source for vouchers that are created from the lease payment
integration with Asset Management.

Business Unit Select the Asset Management business unit from which to process payments. The
default value is the business unit that is specified within user preferences.

Profile ID (Optional). Select to limit integration processing to a specific profile. Only

profiles that are associated with leased assets are available.

Invoice Date Select the date to be displayed on the Payables voucher. If blank, the system
supplies the default system date.

168 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 7 Working With Leased Assets

Running the AP/AM Reconciliation Report

Access the AP/AM Payment Reconciliation page (Asset Management, Financial Reports, Leased Assets,
AP/AM Payment Reconciliation, AP/AM Payment Reconciliation).

AP/AM Payment Reconciliation run control page

Run the AP/AM Payment Reconciliation (AMAP1001 ) report. The reconciliation process compares
information about the lease payments from the Asset Management tables with the voucher information that is
stored in the Payables tables. The resulting report includes the Asset Management lease payment schedule
with payment statuses along with the corresponding Payables voucher information, such as voucher ID,
invoice date, payment amount, voucher status and payment status.

Business Unit Select the Asset Management business unit for which to process the
reconciliation report. You can select from the business units for which the
integration is enabled.

AP Business Unit (Optional). Select the Payables business unit for which to process the
reconciliation report information.

From Date and Through (Optional). Select the date range for which to run the reconciliation report.
Date

Transferring Operating Leases

This section describes how to transfer an operating lease.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 169
Working With Leased Assets Chapter 7

Page Used to Transfer Operating Leases

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Operating Lease Chartfields LEASE_OPER_TFR_01 Asset Management, Asset Transfer an operating lease,
Transactions, Leased for example, from one
Assets, Transfer Operating department to another.
Lease, Operating Lease
Chartfields

Transferring an Operating Lease

Access the Operating Lease Chartfields page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Leased Assets,
Transfer Operating Lease, Operating Lease Chartfields).

Operating Lease Chartfields page

This page displays the current ChartFields for the lease.

Use the New Chartfields section to change the Oper Unit(operating unit), Fund Code, Department, Program,
Class Field, Budget Reference,Product, Project,and Category. The Category field is required for an operating
lease.

Click the Edit Trans Dates button to change the transaction date.

Retiring or Reinstating Leases

Leased assets are retired or retired and reinstated using the same processes as all other assets. Review those
sections of this PeopleBook for more information.

170 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 7 Working With Leased Assets

See Also

Chapter 19, "Retiring Assets," page 375

Generating Lease Reports

PeopleSoft Asset Management has several reports that you can use to view information about leases that is
required to satisfy generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) and to comply with FAS 13. You can
use the lease reports provided to view when a lease expires, create an annual footnote disclosure report, view
summary or detail information about a specific lease, or view a lease amortization schedule.

You may also review operating leases.

You must run the Lease Expense Schedule (LEASE_SCHED2) process before you run a lease report.

This section discusses the:

• Lease Expiration report.

• Lease Footnote Disclosure Summary and Lease Footnote Disclosure Detail reports.

• Lease Summary Information, Lease Detail Information, and Lease Amortization Schedule reports.

• AP/AM Payment Reconciliation report.

Note. PeopleSoft IT Asset Management also provides a report called Lease End Date.

Pages Used to Generate Lease Reports

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Lease Expiration RUN_AMLE2400 Asset Management, Define the run parameters

Financial Reports, Leased for the Lease Expiration
Assets, Lease Expiration report (AMLE2400). Use
the report to list leases that
expire as of today's date,
after a certain number of
days from a specified date,
or within a date range that
you select.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 171
Working With Leased Assets Chapter 7

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Lease Footnote Disclosure RUN_AMLE2300 Asset Management, Define the run parameters
RUN_AMLE2310 Financial Reports, Leased for a Lease Footnote
Assets, Footnote Disclosure Disclosure Detail and Lease
Footnote Disclosure
Summary reports
(AMLE2300 and
AMLE2310, respectively).
Use at the end of each fiscal
year to view all outstanding
capital and operating lease
commitments for the next
five years. The report also
provides the monthly lease
payment and yearly totals.

Lease Information RUN_AMLE2000 Asset Management, Define the run parameters

Financial Reports, Leased for the following reports:
Assets, Summary or Detail
• Lease Summary
Information
(AMLE2000)

• Lease Detail
Information
(AMLE2100)

• Detail Amortization
Schedule (AMLE2200)

AP/AM Payment AMAPLEAPMT_RQST Asset Management, Run the AP/AM Payment

Reconciliation Financial Reports, Leased Reconciliation report
Assets, AP/AM Payment
Reconciliation, AP/AM
Payment Reconciliation

See Also

Appendix C, "PeopleSoft Asset Management Reports," page 653

172 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
 Chapter 8

Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating

Assets
This chapter provides an overview of adjusting, transferring, and evaluating assets and discusses how to:

• Adjust cost and transfer assets.

• Transfer parent-child assets to other business units in mass.

• Revalue assets using the Revaluation Worksheet.

• Revalue assets in mass.

• Capture and maintain asset fair value (FV).

• Update noncapitalized costs.

• View cost history and summarize cost rows.

• Update the general ledger with adjustments and transfers.

• Modify or delete pending asset transactions.

• Adjusting for asset impairments.

Understanding Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets

Periodically, it is necessary to make changes to asset records to correct errors or add newly received
information. You can modify any information that has been entered about assets, including cost, market
value, quantity, depreciation rules, location, physical attributes, and so on.

Sometimes adjustment and transfer changes have a financial or tax impact. Changes to physical information
about an asset, such as its weight, do not affect cost or depreciation. However, changing quantity, cost,
depreciation attributes, or department affect your financial and tax books.

In compliance with accounting standards, many companies must carry assets at fair value. As a result,
frequent revaluation of assets may be necessary, depending on requirements. PeopleSoft Asset Management
provides a revaluation worksheet to facilitate potentially frequent revaluation of one or multiple assets using
the Cost Based or Depreciation Write-off methods of revaluation. Additionally, you have the option of using
the Revaluation in Mass process where the Net Method of revaluation is available, as well as the other two
methods. These tools provide the capability to properly deal with the depreciation distribution between
original cost and revalued basis

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 173
Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets Chapter 8

You must also be able to undertake an effective impairment test cycle for assets on at least an annual cycle at
the balance sheet date depending on business industry and location. PeopleSoft Asset Management provides
an impairment evaluation process that allows you to assess potential impairment of user-defined asset
selections. The impairment worksheet enables you to enter recoverable amounts and automatically calculates
potential impairment losses. Subsequent to this review, the impairment worksheet generates the associated
accounting entries to enable you to recognize these adjustments in your accounting system. This process
eliminates manual steps and minimizes accounting errors.

PeopleSoft supports the ability to maintain asset histories. Information on a per-asset basis is available within
each record. Cost summary reporting and asset component hierarchy history reporting are both also available.

Adjusting Cost and Transferring Assets

This section provides an overview of cost adjustments and asset transfers and discusses how to:

• Define asset transactions.

• Enter cost information for transactions.

• Specify transfer to/from books information

• Mark assets up or down.

• Select a child asset for adjustment or transfer.

• Enter child asset details.

• Add advanced transaction details.

See Also

Chapter 5, "Adding and Maintaining Assets," Creating Parent-Child Asset Relationships, page 114

Understanding Cost Adjustments and Asset Transfers

To adjust cost and transfer assets:

• Select the type of transaction, enter accounting and transaction dates, and specify the transaction data that
is required to update the general ledger.

• Make the actual adjustments or cost entries.

• Select some, none, or all child assets to include in the transaction that you are performing. The Child
Assets page appears only when the asset you are transacting against is a parent asset and the transaction
type is a transfer. A separate Application Engine process is provided for transferring parent-child assets
between business units.

Note. Adjustments to parents do not automatically filter down to the child assets; therefore, the Child
Asset page does not appear for adjustments. Instead, add another child asset. A reminder message will
appear stating that child assets are associated with the parent asset that you are adjusting.

174 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets

• Use the Pending Transaction page for workflow processing.

• If you have changed information in a book that posts to your general ledger, PeopleSoft Asset
Management generates the appropriate accounting entries when you run Create Accounting Entries
(AM_AMAEDIST) or Depreciation Close (AM_DPCLOSE). The asset account is updated when you
generate and post the journal entries.

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up Accounting
Entry and Financial Processing for PeopleSoft Asset Management," Defining Accounting Entries

Pages Used to Adjust Cost and Transfer Assets

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Main Transaction ASSET_COST_01 Asset Management, Asset Identify the

Transactions, Financial cost/adjust/transfer
Transactions, Cost transaction that you want to
Adjust/Transfer Asset, Main perform.
Transaction

Cost Information ASSET_COST_01A Click the GO! button on the Enter or adjust cost
Main Transaction page. information that is required
by the transaction that you
initiated from the Main
Transaction page.

Asset Location Transfer ASSET_COST_02_S2 Click the Change Location Change the location for an
link on the Cost Information asset.
page.

Asset Cost IU Transfer ASSET_COST_02 Click the InterUnit Transfer Select the asset information
Options link on the Cost that you want transferred
Information page. with the asset. The link
appears on the page only
after you select Fixed Price
MarkUp as the action on the
Main Transaction page.

Asset Cost IU Book ASSET_COST_02_S1 Click the Transfer To/From Specify how cost
Transfer Books link on the Cost information for the transfer
Information page. will be passed between
business books. This link
appears when you have
selected InterUnit Transfer
as the action on the Main
Transaction page and when
you have entered the
business unit to transfer to.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 175
Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets Chapter 8

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

InterUnit Proceeds N/A Click the Proceeds button Apply a markup or

on the Cost Information markdown to the asset that
Page. This button appears you are transferring.
on the page only when you
select Fixed Price Mark Up
as the action on the Main
Transaction page.

Child Assets CHILD_ASSETS Asset Management, Asset Select child assets to

Transactions, Financial include in the transfer or
Transactions, Cost recategorization that you
Adjust/Transfer Asset, have initiated against the
Child Assets parent assets.

Child Asset TRF/RCT AM_PARCHD_TRF_RCT Click Child Details on the Specify transaction
Overrides Asset Cost/Adjust Transfer overrides for a specific
Child Assets page. child asset. You can specify
specific convention,
quantity, cost, transaction
percentage, transaction date
and accounting date for the
child asset on this page.

Parent Asset Adv Txn FULL_PART_SEC Click the Advanced Txn Specify transaction
options Details link on the Asset overrides for all child assets
Cost/Adjust Transfer Child at once.
Assets page.

Defining Asset Transactions

Access the Main Transaction page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Financial Transactions, Cost
Adjust/Transfer Asset).

Main Transaction page

176 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets

Transaction Date and Displays the current date or the dates that are specified as operator defaults. As a
Accounting Date rule, transactions are entered in PeopleSoft Asset Management some time after
they have occurred. Any difference between accounting and transaction dates
will affect depreciation as well as posting.
See Chapter 5, "Adding and Maintaining Assets," Adding and Maintaining Asset
Information, page 48.

Transaction Code (Optional) Select a code to help identify which accounting entry template to use
for this transaction.

Rate Type Enter the currency exchange rate type to use for this transaction.

Copy Changes to Other Select to copy the changes that you make to other books.
Books
Transfer Other Books Select to transfer the changes that you make to other books by Amount or
by Percent.

Adjust Other Books by Select to adjust the other books by Amount or Percent.
Select Percent to transfer a percentage of the amount from subsequent books. For
example, suppose you have an asset with two books, Corporate and Federal. The
cost amount for Corporate is 5000.00 USD and is 4000.00 USD for Federal.
If you transfer 2500.00 USD from the Corporate book, select Copy Changes to
Other Books, and then specify the Percent option. 2500.00 USD will be
transferred from the Corporate book and 2000.00 USD will be transferred from
the Federal book.
If you select Amount, a transfer of 2500.00 USD from both books will occur.
If you have a multicurrency business unit, the Amount option will be overridden
by Percent when you transfer or recategorize an asset.

Note. If you do not select the Copy Changes to Other Books option, when the
book that you are changing is associated with a ledger group that contains
multiple ledgers, and the Keep Ledgers In Synccheck box is selected for the
ledger group, changes will be copied to other books that associated with the same
ledger.

Include Convention The options are to Exclude or Include a depreciation convention. The
depreciation convention automatically displays AM (actual month) for all
transactions (except for Adjustments, which invokes the convention specifically
defined for adjustments.) If you choose to have the convention included, the
convention will be copied to all books. If you choose to have the convention
excluded, the convention will not be copied to all books. You can override each
book separately at the transaction level also.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 177
Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets Chapter 8

Action Select the financial transaction to be performed. Select an action and click the
GO! button:
• Addition:

Adds an adjustment cost line with transaction type of ADD as a result of

alternate or multiple funding sources, and so on. This option works the same
as Adjustment, except that the transaction type in the cost table will be ADD
instead of ADJ. If you use multiple currencies to track asset transactions,
access toTransaction Currency fields for Adjust All Rowsand Adjust Current
Row Byare available. When you click Apply, these fields are unavailable for
entry. The transaction cost is converted to the base cost and added to the total
cost of the asset. Exchange rates cannot be viewed from this component.

• Adjustment: Adjusts the cost or quantity of an existing row and adds a line
with a transaction type of ADJ. If you use multiple currencies to track asset
transactions, access toTransaction Currency fields for Adjust All Rowsand
Adjust Current Row By are available in this activity. When you click Apply,
these fields are unavailable for entry. The transaction cost is converted to the
base cost and added to the total cost of the asset. Exchange rates cannot be
viewed from this component.

• Fixed Price MarkUp: Applies a markup to the asset that you are transferring.
Transaction Currency fields are unavailable for enter for this activity.

• InterUnit Transfer: Transfers an asset from one business unit to another with
different legal entities. Transaction Currency fields are unavailable for entry
for this activity. You can also perform InterUnit transfers from regular assets
to a group asset ID.

• Recategorize: Changes an asset category or cost type. Asset Categories

classify assets by type for accounting entry purposes. Transaction Currency
fields are unavailable for entry for this activity.

• Revaluation: Revalues an asset by percentage. Revaluation occurs as a result

of a monetary revaluation or to account for inflation and is prescribed by a
governmental entity. This value is used mostly in countries with high rates of
inflation. Transaction Currency fields are unavailable for entry for this
activity.

Note. Revaluation from this page is based upon the Cost of the assets
disregarding the current Net Book Value, current Fair Value and any prior
Impairment made to the asset. For example, a revaluation adjustment of
15,000 USD means an increment in the asset's cost of that amount using the
Cost type indicated for revaluation with no further calculations. If you want
to calculate the revaluation considering the mentioned parameters, you must
use the Revaluation Worksheet or the Revaluation in Mass process.

See Chapter 8, "Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets," Revaluing

Assets Using the Revaluation Worksheet, page 194.

See Chapter 8, "Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets," Revaluing

Assets In Mass, page 203.

178 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets

• Transfer: Transfers an asset within the same business unit. For example, you
can make a transfer between two departments or two operating units as an
intraunit transaction as opposed to a transaction between two distinct and
separate business units, or an interunit transaction.Transaction Currency
fields are unavailable for this transaction.

Entering Cost Information for Transactions

Access the Cost Information page (On the Main Transaction page, click the GO! button).

Cost Information page (1 of 2)

The Cost Information page displays different fields and value options depending upon the action that you
select before clicking the GO! button: addition, adjustment, recategorization, revaluation, or transfer
activities.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 179
Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets Chapter 8

Cost Information page (2 of 2)

In the example pictured, the Cost Information page displays interunit transfer or fixed-price markup-activity
information.

Note. If you want to perform multiple transactions, complete one transaction, and then save and reenter the
page to begin the next transaction. Doing so preserves the audit trail for each transaction.

Note. Transaction currency appears by default from the asset book base currency. Each line can reflect a
different transaction currency, depending on the transaction. Balances are displayed in the base currency after
the transaction currency is converted to the base currency.

Change Location Click to change the asset's location.

Convention Convention appears by default as Actual Month for all transactions, with the
exception of Adjustments, which has its own convention. If you selected the
Copy Changes to Other Books check box on the Main Transaction page and
selected Exclude in the Include Convention check box, the convention will not be
copied to all books. You need to override each book separately.

Cost History Shows cost balance for the selected asset. You cannot update information here,
but you can review cost rows and their associated ChartFields for an asset.

We discuss the remaining fields on the Cost Information Page in the context of the transaction being
performed. Some fields are available only for certain transactions.

180 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets

Note. If the asset transactions that you want to adjust are still pending (depreciation has not yet been run), you
may, depending on the transaction type, be able to delete or change them.

Cost History

Expand this group box to view cost history information.

The information displayed includes ChartField information, Salvage Value, Category and Cost Type.

Edit Cost Information

Add new cost rows in the Edit Cost Informationgroup box.

Cost,Percent, and Enter as necessary, and enter additions and adjustments for any appropriate
Quantity ChartFields.

Adjusting Total Cost or Quantity

You can adjust the total cost of an asset by either a percentage of its original cost or by a specific cost
amount.

Adjust All Rows By Enter the appropriate percentage or amount in the appropriate fields: Percent,
Quantity, and Cost. The default is a positive adjustment. To make a negative
adjustment, enter a negative percentage or amount. In a transaction, you can
adjust the cost either by percent or cost, but not both.
You can adjust the total quantity of an asset by entering the Quantity adjustment.
The default is a positive adjustment. If you want to make a negative adjustment,
you must enter a negative quantity.

Apply Click to prorate the adjustment and add it to each cost row in cases of multi-
ChartField asset. If the asset has one ChartField combination, the cost is added to
the total cost. The system automatically calculates and displays the adjusted total
cost. If the cost that is entered is in a different currency than the base currency of
your book, the cost is converted to the base currency before the cost rows are
adjusted.

Note. Changes are applied only to the current book unless you select the Copy
Changes to All Books check box on the Main Transaction page. If you select this
option, your changes will be visible after you save the page and then restart it.

Note. Currency for Adjust by Percent is the same as the base currency of the
book. However, Currency for Adjust by Cost can be any valid value.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 181
Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets Chapter 8

Adjusting Cost or Quantity by Cost Row

Cost andQuantity To adjust the cost or quantity for a particular cost row, enter the new field values
directly into the cost row. You can adjust an asset's cost for individual cost rows
by entering the new cost into the Cost field for each cost row that you'd like to
change. To adjust the quantity for individual cost rows, enter the new quantity
into the cost rows, not the number of units by which quantity will increase or
decrease.
For example, if the quantity should be adjusted from 1 to 2, enter 2. This
changes only the quantity, not the cost.

Note. To establish an audit trail, you should change cost information one field at
a time. For example, if you need to change the department and adjust the cost,
enter the new department and save your change, and then go back and adjust the
cost.

Apply Click to apply the adjustment to each cost row. The system automatically
calculates and displays the adjusted total quantity.

Transferring Assets Within a Business Unit

Periodically, you need to transfer assets from one department, product, or project to another. In addition to
physically relocating the assets, you may need to change some of the ChartField elements to correctly allocate
asset cost and depreciation expense. You can perform full, partial, or retroactive transfers.

Note. This transaction describes transferring assets within a business unit.

See Chapter 8, "Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets," Transferring Parent-Child Assets to Other
Business Units (Interunit Transfers) In Mass, page 192.

Full Transfers – Edit Cost Information

A full transfer requires you to transfer all units or the total cost of the asset.

Oper Unit (operating Enter the new values into the appropriate fields.
unit), Dept (department),
Program, Product, and
Project (and any other
delivered or customized
Chartfield)

Partial Transfers – Edit Cost Information

Partial transfers are useful when you want to assign an asset's cost and depreciation to two or more sets of
ChartFields. To partially transfer an asset, you need to perform a separate transfer for each set of ChartFields.

182 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets

Oper Unit (operating For each transfer, select the appropriate ChartFields, and enter quantity and
unit), Dept (department), amount in the Edit Cost Information group box.
Project, or Product (and For example, suppose department 43000 has two automobiles, worth a total of
any other delivered or 60,000 JPY. You plan to transfer one car from department 43000 to 12000, and
customized Chartfield) the other from department 43000 to 14000. Because the cost of the assets will
eventually be allocated to two separate sets of ChartFields, you'll need to perform
two separate transfers. Each transfer will move 30,000 JPY out of department
43000 and into departments 12000 and 14000.

Retroactive Transfers

You may want to transfer assets retroactively if they were transferred during a prior accounting period, but
are not yet entered in PeopleSoft Asset Management. To do this, enter the transaction and accounting dates on
the Main Transaction page and enter the appropriate cost information in the Edit Cost Information group box.
The system will create correcting entries that back out depreciation from the original department for the
period between the transaction date and the accounting date. Prior period depreciation for that same period
will be posted for the new department.

Recategorizing Assets – Edit Cost Information

You may want to recategorize assets either because you entered the incorrect category or cost type, or
because you have created a new category or cost type and want to transfer existing assets to the new
reclassification.

Category and Cost Type Change the values as needed. Recategorizing an asset affects depreciation.

Revaluing Assets

Revaluation as defined here is based upon the original cost of the asset without consideration of any prior
impairment nor taking into account the fair value or net book value of the asset at the time of revaluation. For
revaluation that includes these considerations, use the Revaluation Worksheet or the Revaluation in Mass
process.

See Chapter 8, "Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets," Revaluing Assets Using the Revaluation
Worksheet, page 194.

See Chapter 8, "Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets," Revaluing Assets In Mass, page 203.

Cost Type To revalue assets, select an action of revaluation, which will change the cost type
to R, and enter the appropriate percentage in the Adjust All Rows By Percent
field. Click Apply. The system will create an adjustment cost line with cost type
of R.

Note. This action is only available if the revaluation process is enabled at the
Installation Options and Business Unit/Book levels. The cost type that is used
here depends upon the cost type for revaluation that is established at the Business
Unit/Book level. The cost type, R, is the default value.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 183
Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets Chapter 8

Note. Entering changes to cost information and transacting transfers, recategorizations and revaluations affect
prior calculated depreciation and accounting entries. You must run both depreciation and accounting entry
processing when you make these changes.

Transferring Assets to Other Business Units (Interunit Transfers)

PeopleSoft Asset Management gives you full flexibility in performing Interunit transfers. You can fully or
partially transfer assets from one business unit to another, or from one business unit to many others. You can
do full or partial transfers by cost, quantity, or percentage.

Note. You can perform interunit transfers from group assets to other group assets, group assets to regular
assets and from regular assets to group assets.

Note. You cannot perform interunit transfers on joint venture business units.

Interunit processing is performed through the PeopleSoft Centralized Inter/IntraUnit Processor. It provides
consistent setup and centralized processing to manage Inter/Intraunit transactions.

Note. In cases in which you want to perform an Interunit transfer between two asset management business
units that report to different PeopleSoft General Ledger business units, you should retire the asset from the
first business unit and add it to the second business unit. (Use an action of ADD instead of TRF). However,
when both asset management business units report to the same general ledger business unit, Interunit transfers
automate transactions for you no matter which transaction you choose.

The procedures for performing interunit transfers that are discussed in this section do not apply to parent-
child assets. You do Interunit transfers for parent-child assets using the Parent-Child IU Transfer page (
AM_PARCHD_IU application engine program).

Note. To transfer parent and child assets among business units in this application engine, you must set up the
appropriate InterUnit Transfer Definitions.

In the New Unit field, select the business unit to which you are transferring the asset. The New Asset ID field
is populated by default as NEXT. You can change this value if necessary. Do not enter an existing asset ID
unless you want to transfer costs between the two assets.

Select a profile ID that is valid for the new business unit to set up book reporting. Trans Code (transaction
code) identifies which accounting entry template to use for this transaction. Only valid combinations for
accounting entry templates that exist are accepted.

Click the InterUnit Transfer Options link to access the InterUnit Transfer Options page, where you can select
the asset information that you want transferred with the asset.

Click Transfer From/To Books link to access the Transfer From/To Books page where you specify the way in
which cost information is passed between business unit books. This link displays after supplying the value in
the New Unit field.

Select the Remaining Life check box to depreciate the transferred (ADD) asset through its remaining life.
This check box is deselected by default, which allows the transferred (ADD) asset to calculate depreciation
over its full useful life. The full useful life depends upon the selection of the Use Profile check box. If
deselected, the useful life is derived from the source asset. If the Use Profile check box is selected, the useful
life is derived from the target unit profile.

Use the fields in the Edit Cost Information group box to specify the cost and quantity to be transferred.

184 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets

Select the Use Profile option to get profile attributes when New Profile ID has been enabled. If it is not
enabled, the profile attributes are derived from the "from" or original asset profile. When using the
capitalization threshold feature, the Use Profile option establishes which threshold is used for the new asset. If
this check box is deselected, the system uses the anchor profile threshold. If the check box is selected, the
system uses the threshold defined in the target profile.

Note. You can run the capitalization threshold validation in the new business unit if you want to validate the
status again.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up
Accounting Entry and Financial Processing for PeopleSoft Asset Management," Setting Up Capitalization
Thresholds.

Click Proceeds to open the InterUnit Proceeds page, where you can specify a markup value to be applied to
the transferred assets in the receiving business unit. This feature is often used in European countries.

You can perform full interunit transfers from one business unit to another, or from one business unit to many
others. You can also perform a partial interunit transfer in which the original business unit retains a portion of
the asset but transfers part of it to another business unit.

Note. When performing a partial interunit transfer when multiple ChartField combinations within the same
book are involved, you must delete the entry or entries in the page for the ChartField combination that you do
not want to transfer. Additionally, it is recommended that if you want to do a partial transfer to more than one
business unit, you should do them separately.

Full Interunit Transfers from One Business Unit to Another

Full interunit transfers from one business unit to another are the simplest transfers to perform. After you have
completed the information in the Enter New Unit group box and its pages and saved the Cost Information
page, all cost rows are transferred to the new business unit.

Full Interunit Transfers from One to Many Business Units

You can transfer to as many business units as existing cost rows. To do this, enter one of the receiving
business units in the New Unit field in the Enter New Unit group box. Complete the rest of the Interunit
transfer information. Review each cost row in the Edit Cost Information group box. All cost rows will show
the new business unit that you entered in the New Unit field. Change the business unit for each cost row as
appropriate. In this way, you can transfer all cost rows for an asset to multiple business units.

Note. Transaction currency is supplied by default from the base currency of the book. Each line can reflect a
different transaction currency depending on the transaction. Balances are displayed in the base currency after
the transaction currency is converted to the base currency. The system allows interunit transfers across
business units with different base currencies when using the TRANSFER action.

Partial Interunit Transfers

You can transfer part of an asset to a different business unit and enable the original business unit to retain a
portion of it. To do this, enter the receiving business unit in the New Unit field in the Enter New Unit group
box. Complete the rest of the Interunit transfer information. Review each cost row in the Edit Cost
Information group box. All cost rows will show the new business unit that you entered in the New Unit field.
To retain partial ownership of the asset with the original business unit, delete the entry or entries with the
ChartField combination for which you do not want to transfer.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 185
Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets Chapter 8

Accumulated Depreciation Adjustment for Group Assets

PeopleSoft estimates the NBV for Group Members when they are being transferred to a new business unit or
being recategorized. This estimation of the accumulated depreciation amount is calculated in the Group Asset
Depreciation Calculation process. You can, however, override the estimated calculation by clicking the
Accum Depr button and supply your own accumulated depreciation value. When you select a member asset
for Fixed Price MarkUp, InterUnit Transfer, Recategorize, or Transfer, the Accum Depr button appears on
the Cost/Information page. When you click the button, you are prompted to enter the accumulated
depreciation value.

See Also

Chapter 8, "Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets," Transferring Parent-Child Assets to Other
Business Units (Interunit Transfers) In Mass, page 192

Specifying Transfer To/From Books Information

Access the Asset Cost IU Book Transfer page.

The transactions that are generated to pass book information for Interunit transfers differ depending on how
many To books a From book is passing information to, and whether it is passing the information using a
Transfer Book action or an Add Book action.

Note. Assets that you transfer to new business units using the Add Book action will have a cost row of zero
on the new business unit until you run the Depreciation Calculation application engine program
(AM_DEPR_CALC). Running this program updates the asset's cost row with its net book value from the
From book.

Using a From Book Once

When you use a From book once only, an Add Book action generates a retirement for the From book and an
add to the To book. A Transfer Book action generates a Transfer Out for the From book and a Transfer In for
the To book.

The asset that is retired receives an asset status of Disposed on the From book.

These tables show that assets that you transfer between books using the action Transfer Book receive a status
of Transferred.

From Book From Trans To Book To Trans Action

CORPORATE Transfer Out CORPORATE Transfer In Transfer Book

FEDERAL Transfer Out FEDERAL Transfer In Transfer Book

186 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets

From Book From Trans To Book To Trans Action

CORPORATE Transfer Out CORPORATE Transfer In Transfer Book

FEDERAL Retire FEDERAL Add Add Book

From Book From Trans To Book To Trans Action

CORPORATE Retire CORPORATE Add Add Book

FEDERAL Retire FEDERAL Add Add Book

Using a From Book for Two or More Transfers

When you use a From book for two or more Transfer Book actions, only one Transfer Out transaction is
generated. Because this takes care of the cost on the From book, no additional Transfer Out transactions are
generated for that book.

This table shows that assets that you transfer between books using the Transfer Book action receive a status
of Transferred.

From Book From Trans To Book To Trans Action

CORPORATE Transfer Out CORPORATE Transfer In Transfer Book

CORPORATE LOCAL Transfer In Transfer Book

Using a From Book for Both Transfer and Add

When you use a From book for both a Transfer Book and an Add Book, a Transfer Out transaction is
generated for the Transfer Book. Because this takes care of the cost on the From book, the Add Book does not
generate a retirement for that book.

This tables shows that assets that you transfer between books using the Transfer Book action receive a status
of Transferred.

From Book From Trans To Book To Trans Action

CORPORATE Transfer Out CORPORATE Transfer In Transfer Book

CORPORATE LOCAL Add Add Book

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 187
Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets Chapter 8

Using a From Book for Two or More Adds

When a From book is used for two or more Add Book actions, a retirement is generated for the first Add
Book action. Because this takes care of the cost on the From book, no further retirements are generated for it.

This table shows that the asset that was retired receives a status of Disposed on the From book.

From Book From Trans To Book To Trans Action

CORPORATE Retire CORPORATE Add Add Book

CORPORATE LOCAL Add Add Book

Retiring a Book

When an asset is transferred from a business unit with two books to a business unit with more than two
books, the asset pulls the additional book's mapping from the Interunit Business Unit/Book Definition page
and profile.

For example, if you do a transfer from CAN01 (two books - ASSET-CAD/ASSET-USD) to US001, the
mapping might be like this:

ASSETS-CAD ------> CORP

ASSETS-USD ------> FEDERAL

ASSETS-USD ------> ACE

ASSETS-USD -------> AMT

Some of the information such as life for the new business unit and book comes from the profile. The transfer
amounts and so on are calculated from the FROM business unit or book, as previously outlined.

Note. When you transfer from a business unit with three books to a business unit with two books, the cost
information on the extra From Book is automatically retired. You do not need to enter an action.

This table shows that assets that are retired receive a status of Disposed.

From Book From Trans To Book To Trans Action

CORPORATE Transfer Out CORPORATE Transfer In Transfer Book

LOCAL Transfer Out LOCAL Transfer In Transfer Book

FEDERAL Retire

188 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets

Marking Assets Up or Down

Access the Interunit Proceeds page.

You can transfer an asset from one business unit to another and have the receiving business unit receive the
assets at a marked up cost by specifying either a fixed markup cost or a fixed markup percentage. To do so,
enter the net markup price in Interunit Proceeds or the net markup percentage in Mark Up/Down Percent. The
default is a positive adjustment. If you want to decrease the price or percentage, you must enter a negative
amount. Enter the number of assets in Transfer Quantity.

Note. If you were to enter both an Interunit proceeds (Price) and a Mark Up/Down percent, the percent
overrides the price.

You can complete a partial transfer and a fixed price markup or markdown by using a two-step method. For
example, you may want to do a partial transfer of four computers out of a total quantity of ten computers and
mark up the price as well. The first step is to perform an Interunit transfer for six computers. Complete this
transaction, and then do a fixed price markup on the remaining four computers, and transfer them to the new
business unit.

PeopleSoft Asset Management processes markups in the following ways:

• The markup percentage of the asset is specified on the cost of the asset.

• The cost of the asset is marked up or down for all the ChartFields in proportion to the original cost
distribution of the asset.

• You can have the markup affect one or all of the asset's books during the transfer.

The Keep All Books in Sync option for the acquiring business unit controls whether the markup is done
on one book or all the asset's books.

• The book information for the asset in the acquiring business unit comes from the asset profile that is
specified at the time of the sale (on the Cost Information page).

This includes the depreciation method and convention, asset life, and so on.

• The selling business unit manages the markup price as proceeds.

Accumulated depreciation is not passed on to the new business unit.

Selecting a Child Asset for Adjustment or Transfer

Access the Child Assets page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Financial Transactions, Cost
Adjust/Transfer Asset, Child Assets).

The Child Assets page appears for child assets when you select the Transfer or the Recategorize actions on
the Main Transaction page.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 189
Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets Chapter 8

Child Assets page

Note. Parent assets that are created on the Parent Asset page (parent-only assets) do not have cost or basic
information. They cannot be viewed in the Parent-Child Basic Information component, nor can they be
viewed or transacted against in the Asset Cost/Adjust Transfers component; the Asset Retirements
component; or the Parent-Child NBV component. If you want to use a parent asset as a reporting umbrella
only and access these pages to manipulate child assets in mass, you should create a zero cost parent asset
instead of a parent only asset. Also, to transact against parent and child assets at once, parent and child must
share the same asset profile.

Select All Click Select All to include all child assets with the parent in the transaction that
you have initiated.
To include some child assets, select the Selected check boxon the specific rows.

Include Parent Asset Select to include the parent asset in this transaction.

Advanced Txn Details Click this link to access the Parent Asset Adv Txn options page. Specify
(advanced transaction transaction overrides for all child assets at once. For example, you would use this
details) page to specify that only 50 percent of the cost of all child assets be transferred
between departments, while the parent asset is fully transferred. Select to apply
as full transaction, actual percentage, or transaction amount.
See Chapter 8, "Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets," Adding
Advanced Transaction Details, page 191.

Note. Only child assets available for transfer based on the specified accounting date can be selected. The
system compares the last accounting dates for the child assets as specified on the Book table with the
accounting date of the current transaction to make this determination.

Entering Child Asset Details

Access the Child Asset TRF/RCT Overrides page (On the Child Assets page, click the Child Details link).

190 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets

Child Asset TRF/RCT Overrides page

Convention Select a depreciation convention.

Quantity or Cost Enter the quantity or cost to use in this transaction for the child asset. For
example, if you were transferring all costs for the parent from one department to
another, but wanted to transfer only 500 USD for the child asset, you would enter
500 in Cost.

Transaction Percentage You can specify a percentage of the child asset's cost to include by entering it in
the Transaction Percentage field.

Transaction Date and Enter a transaction date or an accounting date if you want it to differ from the
Accounting Date dates that you entered for the parent's transaction.

Adding Advanced Transaction Details

Access the Advanced Transaction Details page (On the Asset Cost/Adjust Transfer Child Assets page, click
the Advanced Txn Details link ).

Select one of these options:

Full Transaction Applies the full transaction to all child assets. Select this check box when you are
partially transferring the parent asset, for example, but want to fully transfer all
associated child assets.

Actual Percentage Enter the percentage of the costs of the child assets to apply to this transaction.
For example, if you enter 50 percent, then 50 percent of the costs of all child
assets will be included in the transaction even though a different percentage has
been specified for the parent asset.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 191
Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets Chapter 8

Transaction Amount Enter a specific amount of the costs of the child assets to apply to this
transaction. For example, if you enter 250, USD 250 of the costs of each child
asset will be included in the transaction.

Transferring Parent-Child Assets to Other Business Units (Interunit

Transfers) In Mass
Use the Parent-Child IU Transfer (AMPC_IUT_RQST) component to transfer parent-child assets from one
business unit to another. The transfer process uses the application engine AM_PARCHD_IU.

This section discusses how to transfer parent-child assets from one business unit to another.

Page Used to Transfer Parent-Child Assets to Other Business Units In Mass

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Parent-Child IU Transfer AMPARCHDIU_RQST Asset Management, Asset Run the AM_PARCHD_IU

Transactions, Parent-Child Application Engine process
Relationship, InterUnit to transfer Parent-Child
Parent-Child Trans assets from one business
unit to another.

Transferring Parent-Child Assets from One Business Unit to Another

Access the Parent-Child IU Transfer page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Parent-Child
Relationship, InterUnit Parent-Child Trans).

192 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets

Parent-Child IU Transfer page

Unit Select the business unit from which you are transferring assets.

New Unit Select the acquiring business unit.

New Group ID This field displays when the New Unit field points to a Group Asset business
unit. This is used when you want to extend parent/child functionality to group
assets.
See Chapter 10, "Using Group Asset Processing," page 249.

Convention Select the depreciation convention.

Transaction Date Enter the transaction date.

Accounting Date Enter the accounting date for the transaction.

Transaction Code Identifies which accounting entry template to use for this transaction. Only valid
combinations for which accounting entry templates exist are accepted.

Parent Asset Select the parent asset from which you are transferring assets.

Profile ID Select an ID that is valid for the new business unit to set up book reporting.

Include Parent Asset Clear this check box to transfer all or selected child assets at once while leaving
the parent asset out of the transaction.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 193
Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets Chapter 8

Revaluing Assets Using the Revaluation Worksheet

This section lists the page used to revalue assets using the Revaluation Worksheet.

The Revaluation Worksheet allows you to revalue financial assets in accordance with International
Accounting Standards (IAS 16) to reflect current fair value, provided that the net book value (NBV) of an
asset is less than its fair value (FV) at a given point.

Note. Since the NBV is required for determining the revaluation amount, the depreciation reporting table
must be loaded prior to performing revaluation.

Page Used to Revalue Assets Using the Revaluation Worksheet

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Revaluation Worksheet AM_REVALUATION Asset Management, Asset Search for financial assets
Transactions, Financial using the desired criteria,
Transactions, Revaluation mark them for revaluation,
Worksheet supplying the current fair
value amount and click the
Save button. Changes take
effect upon save as the
Transaction Loader
(AMIF1000) is
automatically invoked,
provided the Auto-Run
Transaction Loader options
within Asset Management -
User Preferences are
selected.

Revaluing Assets Using the Revaluation Worksheet

Access the Revaluation Worksheet page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Financial Transactions,
Revaluation Worksheet).

194 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets

Revaluation Worksheet page (1 of 2)

Business Unit Select a business unit for your search criteria. This is a required field and
displays only business units whose revaluation option is enabled.

Book Name Select a book for your search criteria. This is a required field and displays the
default book for the business unit that you select in the Business Unit field.

Cost Type (Optional) Select a Cost Type to narrow your search criteria.

Asset Category (Optional) Select a Category to narrow your search criteria.

Location (Optional) Select a Location to narrow your search criteria.

Profile ID (Optional) Select a Profile ID to narrow your search criteria.

Asset Class (Optional) Select an Asset Class to narrow your search criteria.

From Asset ID/To Asset (Optional) Select an asset or a range of assets to further narrow your search
ID: criteria.

ChartField Search (Optional) Use this link to search assets by ChartField.

Criteria

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 195
Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets Chapter 8

FV Percentage (%): (fair (Optional) Use a percentage that applies to all assets that appears in the search
value percentage) result section when the Retrieve button is pushed. Enter a value that is less than
zero if there is a decrease from the original value. If both FV percent and NBV
percent exist, the system uses the FV percent.
For example, assume that Asset A has a Fair Value of 10,000 USD and the FV
has been effective for two years. If you enter a value of 25, it will change the FV
of the asset to 12,500 USD with the revaluation date when page is saved, which
is 125 percent x Original FV (125% x 10000 = 12500). The calculated FV will
appear in the result section.

FV Template ID (fair Select an existing fair value template, if applicable. This provides an efficient
value template ID) way to populate the other fair value fields. Upon clicking the Retrieve button, the
FV Template ID and FV Group ID in the Asset Search Results retrieves default
values from the Revaluation Information section. When marking rows and saving
the page, the fair value fields are updated on the Fair Value record (AM_FMV).

FV Group ID(fair value Default value populates from the selected FV Template ID. You can override the
group ID) default value that is derived from the FV Template. If the valuation premise from
the FV Template is In-Exchange or the FV Template ID is blank, the FV Group
ID is disabled.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1
PeopleBook, "Setting Up Accounting Entry and Financial Processing for
PeopleSoft Asset Management," Enabling Combination Editing.

NBV Percentage (%): (Optional) Use a percentage that applies to all assets that appears in the search
result section when the Retrieve button is pushed. You must enter a value that is
greater than zero in this field; otherwise, it will cause the FV to be less than the
NBV and no revaluation will occur.
For example, assume that Asset B has a Fair Value of 9,000 USD and a Net Book
Value of 10,000 USD. The FV has been effective for two years. If you enter a
value of 30, it will change the FV to 13,000 USD (130% x 10,000) with the
revaluation date when the page is saved. The calculated FV will appear in the
result section.

Accounting Date Enter the date that the revaluation is to be booked. This date must fall within the
open period range and cannot be earlier than the revaluation date.

196 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets

Copy Revaluation to Select this check box if you want the revaluation amount in a given book to
Other Book populate other books whose revaluation process is enabled.
PeopleSoft Asset Management copies the revaluation amount to other books in
the ledger group as long as the Keep Ledgers in Sync (KLS) option is selected. If
the option Copy Revaluation to Other Books is checked, PeopleSoft Asset
Management copies the same amount to the books with the revaluation process
selected for books that do not point to the ledger group. Depending on the
selection of these options, when Copy Zero Impair/Revalue Rows is checked, the
system copies zero revaluation data in all the remaining books.
For example: Suppose you have a business unit with six books (A, B, C, D, E, F),
with the first three books, A, B and C pointing to a ledger group, the ledger group
is synchronized with the general ledger business unit and book B is pointing to
the primary ledger. However, the other three books, D, E and F, do not point to
general ledger and books A, B, C, and E have the revaluation option enabled.
PeopleSoft Asset Management processes the revaluation against the primary
book, B. The system then copies the revaluation adjustment to book A and book
C because they are in the same ledger group, regardless of the status of the
optionsCopy Revaluation to other books and Copy Zero Impair/Revalue Rows. If
Copy Revaluation to other books is selected, the system copies the same
revaluation adjustment to book E because the revaluation option is selected for
that book. If the Copy Zero Impair/Revalue Rows option is selected, the system
copies zero revaluation rows into book D and F. If theCopy Revaluation to other
books option is not selected andthe Copy Zero Impair/Revalue Rows option is
selected, the system copies zero impairment rows to books D and F. When both
options are not selected, the system does not copy any impairment or revaluation
row to books D, E and F.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 197
Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets Chapter 8

Revalue Method Select the method used to calculate the asset revaluation. This is a required field
and includes the following options:
• Dpr Wt-Off (depreciation write-off)

This option appears only if the Revaluation Write-off flag is turned on at the
Business Unit/Book level. The depreciation write-off method writes off the
accumulated depreciation as of the revaluation date. The asset value is
increased to reflect the current fair value and a revaluation surplus is
recorded.

This table shows, at a high level, what happens with the depreciation write-
off method when the original asset cost is 20,000 USD, the NBV is 19,000
USD and the FV is 22,000 USD:

Account Debit / (Credit) Description

Fixed Asset 2,000 FV less Original Cost (22,000 -

20000)

Accumulated 1,000 Original Cost less NBV (20,000 -

Depreciation 19,000)
(write-off)

Revaluation (3,000) FV less NBV (22,000 - 19,000)

Surplus

Note. With the previous accumulated depreciation written off, the adjusted
basis of the asset is 22,000 USD and subsequent depreciation is calculated
keeping, untouched the original depreciation amount, plus adjustments to
fully depreciate the asset by the end of its useful life.

Note. If there is a remaining impairment processed previously for the asset,

under the depreciation write-off method, the system first eliminates it and
only the remaining value generates a revaluation surplus.

198 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets

• Cost Based

This method leaves the accumulated depreciation to-date in tact and adjusts
the asset cost by the difference between the asset NBV and the FV.

This table shows, at a high level, what happens with the Cost Based method
when the original asset cost is 20,000 USD, the NBV is 19,000 USD and the
FV is 22,000 USD:

Account Debit / (Credit) Description

Fixed Asset 3,000 FV less NBV (22,000 - 19,000)

Revaluation (3,000) FV less NBV (22,000 - 19,000)

Surplus

Note. The total cost of the asset is now 23,000 USD with a remaining
accumulated depreciation of 1,000. Subsequent depreciation is calculated
based on the new total cost to fully depreciate the asset by the end of its
useful life.

The actual accounting entries that are recorded as a result of these two
revaluation methods are comprised of separate accounts so as to leave the
original entries in tact. These accounts and corresponding distribution types
are:

• Provision for Revaluation, (PR distribution type), is the Revaluation

Surplus account and records the gain on the revaluation. This account is
credited when creating the revaluation surplus and debited with the asset
disposal.

• Reversal of Depreciation, (RD distribution type), is the realized gain

during the usage of the asset and is credited periodically along with the
asset depreciation.

• Provision for Revaluation Contra, (RC distribution type), is the

depreciated amount of the Provision for Revaluation and is used for
facilitating calculations at the moment of transferring or doing a
recategorization. It acts for Provision for Revaluation as Accumulated
Depreciation acts for the fixed asset account. It is debited periodically
along with the asset depreciation and credited with the asset disposal.

• Inv Prop (investment property) - Investment property measured at fair value

is considered nondepreciable according to International Accounting
Standards (IAS). When you select this field value and click the Retrieve
button, those assets that were designated as investment property are retrieved.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1

PeopleBook, "Setting Up Accounting Entry and Financial Processing for
PeopleSoft Asset Management," Enabling Combination Editing.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 199
Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets Chapter 8

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1

PeopleBook, "Setting Up Accounting Entry and Financial Processing for
PeopleSoft Asset Management," Defining Accounting Entries.

Convention Enter the depreciation convention. The default value is AM (actual month).
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1
PeopleBook, "Setting Up Depreciation Processing," Setting Up Depreciation
Conventions.

Revaluation Comments Use this link to record transaction level details.

Revaluation Date: Enter the date that the revaluation takes place. This is the transaction date and is
used to determine the NBV and the FV.

Include current Period Select this option if the current period depreciation is to be accumulated. For
Depr. example: if you perform the revaluation at the end of period 12 (the final period
in the year) but you do not want to include period 12 depreciation to compare
with FV, you would not select this check box.

Exclude Assets Revalue (Optional) Select a date that may assist you in retrieving assets that have not been
After: revalued recently.

Frequency Select the frequency of the revaluation. This is used for audit purposes.

Retrieve Click the Retrieve button to retrieve the assets based on your search criteria.

Asset Search Results

Once you click the Retrieve button, the Asset Search Results page appears. The Asset Search Criteria section
collapses and the revaluation information is visible but disabled.

200 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets

Revaluation Worksheet page (2 of 2)

Mark to Revalue Click to revalue the selected assets. The revaluation status of the selected assets
is changed to Revalue and when the page is saved, the asset is revalued.

Mark to not Revalue Click to change the revaluation status of the selected assets to Don't Revalue.
When the page is saved, the selected assets will not be revalued. A blank
revaluation status is treated the same as the "Don't Revalue" asset; however, this
designation marks the asset specifically as an asset that should not be revalued
and the asset appears in the audit table.

Mark to Update FV Click to update the FV in mass without performing a revaluation. The revaluation
status will be FV and implies only an update in the FV table using the date of
revaluation as the appraisal and effective date. The FV is necessary for
comparison purposes in the revaluation process and this provides a convenient
way to update those values for in mass.

Remove From List Click to remove the selected assets from the grid. This action does not generate a
new Revaluation Status.

Refresh Click to update changes in the revaluation calculation if you modify the FV
before saving the page.

Mark Select those assets to which the action applies.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 201
Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets Chapter 8

Revaluation Status Displays the revaluation status of the asset. The values are:
• [blank]: Default value.

• Revalue: Displays when the Mark to Revalue button is selected. This inserts
the new FV into the FV table, if applicable, and creates transaction rows in
the financial interface table.

• Don't Revalue: Displays when the Mark to not Revalue button is selected. No
action is performed for the asset.

• FV: Displays the FV when the Mark to Update FV button is selected.

• Excluded: The system assigns this status after saving the page if the FV of the
asset is less than the NBV and the revaluation status was set to Revalue. In
this way, the system overrides the given status of an asset that should not be
revalued by definition.

Note. You can change the revaluation status until saving the page. Once you save
the page, all data becomes unavailable for change.

Asset ID Displays the asset identifier.

Cost Displays the total cost of the asset in the base currency.

Accumulated Displays the total depreciation in the base currency of the asset up to the
Depreciation revaluation period or prior period based on the "Include Current Period Depr."
option.

Note. If the convention is AD, prior period means prior day.

Net Book Value Displays the asset NBV. This value is copied from the Depreciation Reporting
table, which must be loaded before using the Revaluation Worksheet for
revaluation.

Fair Value Displays the FV converted from its original currency to the book's base currency
at the revaluation date rate. You can update the FV in the book's base currency
and at such time, a new entry is created in the FV table at the time of save as long
as the revaluation status is Revalue or FV. If you modify the given FV, click
refresh button to update the revaluation amount.

Revaluation Displays the revaluation adjustment amount. The system calculates the amount as
follows:
• Depreciation Write-Off Method: FV less NBVless Carry Cost (Impairment)
amount, if Revaluation is greater than zero.

• Cost Based Method: FV less NBV.

202 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets

Cost Adjustment Displays the cost adjustment amount. The system calculates this amount as
follows: FV less Cost.
• Depreciation Write-Off Method: FV less Cost.

• Cost Based Method: FV less NBV.

Accum. Depr. (Applies only when the Depreciation Write-off method is used.) Displays the
Adjustment amount of the accumulated depreciation adjustment due to revaluation.
(accumulated
depreciation
adjustment)
Impairment Reversal (Applies only when the Depreciation Write-off method is used.) Displays the
impairment reversal amount. The system calculates this amount as follows:
• If the Revaluation amount is greater than zero, the impairment reversal is the
Carry Cost (Impairment) value.

• If the Revaluation amount is less than zero, the impairment reversal is the FV
less the NBV.

Carry Cost Displays the sum of the Impairment Loss and prior Impairment Reversal (in the
(Impairment) base currency.)

Carry Cost Displays the sum of the prior Revaluation, Revaluation Reversal and Revaluation
(Revaluation) Write-off (in the base currency.)

Note. Upon saving, an audit trail is stored in two tables: AM_REV_AUD_HDR and AM_REV_AUD_DTL.

Revaluing Assets In Mass

This section lists the page that you use to revalue assets in mass.

You can run the AMREVAL process (Cost Based method) to revalue assets in mass that meet the criteria that
you specify. You can also run the AMAUSCAL process (Australian Revaluation or Net Method) or the
AMDEPRWRTOFF process (Depreciation Write-Off) in mass. To revalue assets in mass, access the Mass
Revaluation page.

Note. All three revaluation methods are available using the Mass Revaluation process: Cost Based (primarily
French revaluation), Depreciation Write-Off and the Net Method (Australian revaluation). In contrast, the
Revaluation Worksheet only allows the Cost Based and Depreciation Write-Off methods for revaluation.

When the NBV is required for determining the revaluation amount (as is always the case with the
AMDEPRWRTOFF), the depreciation reporting table must be loaded prior to performing the revaluation. If
you are using the Net Method, you do not need to load the depreciation reporting table prior to revaluation
(AMAUSCAL.)

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 203
Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets Chapter 8

When using the Cost Based Method (AMREVAL), you should load the depreciation reporting table for all
parameters except when using Cost Percentage. The Cost Percentage parameter does not require the
depreciation reporting table.

Note. The Cost Based (AMREVAL) and the Depreciation Write-Off (AMDEPRWRTOFF) processes update
the FV of the revalued assets.

When calculating the revaluation amount, you may select from the following parameters: FV, FV Percentage,
NBV Percentage, Cost Percentage or Amount. You may only select one parameter at a time and precedence
takes place hierarchically from top to bottom in the order that the parameters appear on the Mass Revaluation
run control page. Some parameters may not be available, depending upon the revaluation method that is
selected.

Note. The revaluation method selected on the run control page must match the process name that is selected
on the process scheduler request page.

See Also

Chapter 23, "Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management," page 469

Page Used to Revalue Assets In Mass

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Revaluation in Mass AMREVAL_RQST Asset Management, Asset Run a process to revalue, at

Transactions, Financial once, all assets that meet the
Transactions, Revaluation criteria that you specify.
in Mass, Revaluation in This process loads the
Mass interface tables and updates
the FV table if applicable;
you must then use the
Transaction Loader to
populate all the asset tables.

See Also

Chapter 8, "Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets," Revaluing Assets Using the Revaluation
Worksheet, page 194

Revaluing Assets Using Mass Revaluation

Access the Revaluation in Mass page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Financial Transactions,
Revaluation in Mass, Revaluation in Mass).

204 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets

Revaluation in Mass page

Capturing and Maintaining Asset Fair Value (FV)

Fair Value is a key factor in establishing revaluation of assets. PeopleSoft Asset Management stores this
information based on each asset and allows you to add a new fair value (FV) on a regular basis, leave it blank,
or let it stay as original cost, depending upon your business requirements. FV is not rolled up to the composite
asset from its members. and the FV history cannot be deleted for audit purposes.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 205
Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets Chapter 8

FV history cannot be deleted or updated for audit purposes unless you are authorized to edit within Correction
Mode. Any changes made in this value after performing revaluation do not affect existing revaluations.

You can load market values in mass using the Excel to CI component interface.

See Chapter 5, "Adding and Maintaining Assets," Adding Assets with the Excel to Component Interface
Utility, page 128.

This section lists the page that you use to capture and maintain asset FV.

Page Used to Capture and Maintain Asset FV

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Fair Value AM_FV_DEFN Asset Management, Asset Capture and maintain the
Transactions, Financial asset fair value that is to be
Transactions, Fair Value used in the revaluation
process.

Capturing and Maintaining Asset FV

Access the Fair Value page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Financial Transactions, Fair Value).

Fair Value page

206 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets

Effective Date Enter the date that the revaluation process will use to find FV at a specified point
in time.

Effective Sequence The system populates this field and is incremented when a new row is inserted
with the same effective date.

Fair Value: Enter the amount to be copied to the Basic Add page where the current fair value
is displayed.

Note. If the asset is a capital lease, synchronize the fair value entered from the
Lease Express Add page or the Update Lease Information page. The FV entered
on the lease page is inserted in the FV table with the transaction date as the
effective and appraisal dates. The valuation method is Acquisition Amount. The
FV becomes unavailable for edit on the FV table, but you can modify it on the
Lease Update page (ASSET_LEASE_01.) The system allows you to add/update
other rows. On this page, you can change only the original FV, and it is copied
into the FV table. A new row inserted on the FV page will not impact on the FV
field on the Lease Update page.

See Chapter 7, "Working With Leased Assets," page 141.

Currency Enter the currency to be used to measure the FV. This field value automatically
populates from the default book currency.

Rate Type Enter the rate type that will be used to convert FV to base currency when it is
used for revaluation. This field value automatically populates from the default
book rate type.

Valuation Method Select the valuation method that is to be used for this asset.

Valuation Premise Designate the valuation premise as either In-Use or In Exchange. If In Use is
selected, the Group By and FV Group ID fields appear.

Input Level Select the report input level for the asset: Level 1, Level 2 or Level 3. The default
value is blank.

Group By This field is active when the Valuation Premise is In-Use. Select the appropriate
grouping for the asset.

FV Group ID(fair value This field is active when the Valuation Premise is In-Use. Select the appropriate
group ID) FV Group ID.

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up Accounting
Entry and Financial Processing for PeopleSoft Asset Management," Enabling Combination Editing

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 207
Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets Chapter 8

Updating Noncapitalized Costs

This section lists the page that you use to update noncapitalized costs for assets.

Page Used to Update Noncapitalized Costs

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Update Non-Capitalized ASSET_NON_CAP_UPD Asset Management, Asset Update noncapitalized costs

Cost Transactions, Financial for an asset.
Transactions, Update Non-
Capitalized Cost, Update
Non-Capitalized Cost

Viewing Cost History and Summarizing Cost Rows

Use the Review Cost (COST_HISTORY) component to review cost history for capitalized and noncapitalized
assets.

Use the Cost Summarization (AM_COST_SUM_RUN) component to summarize cost rows.

This section provides overviews of cost history and cost summarization and discusses how to generate cost
summarizations:

Understanding Cost History

PeopleSoft enables you to view cost history of assets online. You can view cost history for both capitalized
and noncapitalized assets. Using the Cost History component, you can:

• View a history of an asset's transactions on the Cost History List page.

• View detail about a specific transaction on the Cost History Detail page.

• View a history of a noncapitalized asset's transactions on the Non Cap Cost History List page.

• View more detail about a specific transaction on the Non Cap Cost History Detail page.

Understanding Cost Summarization

Multiple transactions coming from PeopleSoft feeder systems rapidly create a large volume of cost history
lines. PeopleSoft Asset Management provides the Cost Summarization process to summarize multiple cost
lines that meet certain criteria into a single line. The process uses the Cost Summarization Run component
(AM_COST_SUM_RUN). You should run the process only after calculating depreciation
(AM_DEPR_CALC) and creating accounting entries (AM_AMAEDIST).

208 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets

Cost summarization affects cost rows in the Cost table only. No changes are made to the Acquisition Detail
table. The fields that are summarized are Cost,Transaction Cost, and Quantity. Cost summarization creates an
audit table (AM_COST_SUM_AUD) that contains the original cost rows before summarization.

You can summarize cost rows that have matching values for:

• Business unit.

• Asset ID.

• Book.

• Category.

• Transaction type.

• Chart of accounts, or ChartField.

• Cost type.

• Transaction code.

• Accounting year and period.

• Transaction year and period.

• Depreciation convention.

Summarization updates the transaction date with the first day in the transaction period for all lines. It updates
the accounting date with the last day in the accounting period for all lines. The summarization is then based
on the new dates.

The only exception is the actual day (AD) convention.

When the transaction currency code or type differs, cost summarization uses the asset base currency as the
transaction currency, and currency type is blank.

Note. You can run cost summarization in streamline mode during the create accounting entry process using
the accounting entry component (AM_AMAEDIST).

Pages Used to View Cost History and Summarize Cost Rows

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Cost History List ASSET_TRANS_01 Asset Management, Asset View a history of an asset's
Transactions, History, transactions.
Review Cost, Cost History
List

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 209
Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets Chapter 8

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Cost History Detail ASSET_TRANS_02

• Asset Management, View more detail about a
Asset Transactions, specific transaction.
History, Review Cost,
Cost History List, Cost
History Detail

• Click the Detail link on

the Cost History List
page.

Non Cap History List ASSET_TRANS_03 Asset Management, Asset View a history of a
Transactions, History, noncapitalized asset's
Review Cost, Non Cap transactions.
History List

Non Cap History Detail ASSET_TRANS_04 Asset Management, Asset View more detail about a
Transactions, History, specific transaction.
Review Cost, Non Cap
History Detail

Cost Summarization AM_COST_SUM_RUN Asset Management, Asset Generate cost

Transactions, Financial summarizations.
Transactions, Cost
Summarization, Cost
Summarization

Generating Cost Summarizations

Access the Cost Summarization page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Financial Transactions, Cost
Summarization, Cost Summarization).

Business Unit The business unit is required.

Book Name If this field is blank, the cost summarization applies to all books.

Category Select a category to apply summarization only to that category. Leave blank to
include all categories.

From Asset ID and To Optionally enter a range of asset IDs to apply the summarization to specific
Asset ID assets. The assets that are available belong to the category when category is
defined and that have accounting entries already generated. If the To Asset ID
field is left blank, the summarization applies only to the asset ID that is specified
in the From Asset ID field.

Accounting Date Range The accounting date range is required for summarization. You can apply cost
summarization to multiple books with different calendars. Define the date range
according to the books that are selected.

210 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets

Note. When a line does not meet the criteria to summarize with other lines, no summarization occurs.

Cost summarization creates an audit table so that you can review the summarization details after you have
processed the summary.

Updating the General Ledger with Adjustments and Transfers

When you make adjustments or changes that affect your general ledger, PeopleSoft Asset Management
automatically creates corresponding journal entries that update the applicable accounts in your general ledger.
Specifically, journal entries are created when your changes require recalculation or when an asset is
transferred. The information that is used to create these journal entries comes from an Accounting Entry
template that is set up for adjustments and transfers.

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up Accounting
Entry and Financial Processing for PeopleSoft Asset Management," Defining Accounting Entries

PeopleSoft Enterprise General Ledger 9.1 PeopleBook, "Making General Ledger Journal Entries"

Modifying or Deleting Pending Asset Transactions

You can modify or delete financial asset transactions that are pending depreciation. (These are transactions on
which depreciation has not yet been run.) You can modify or delete the following pending asset transactions:

• Adds

• Adjustments

• Transfers

• Recategorizations

Warning! You cannot modify or delete retirement transactions, leased asset transactions, group asset
transactions, joint venture transactions, or parent/child asset transactions.

Note. Regarding the Copy Changes to Other Books option: when you delete an Add transaction, the deletion
applies to all books to which the asset reports. However, when you delete Adjustments, Recategorizations,
and Transfers transactions, you should review the delete at each book in the scroll area and click the Delete
button on each book. Also, if you are using this page only to change the accounting date, transaction date, or
transaction code, these changes will apply to all books to which the asset reports. To apply other types of
updates to pending transactions, you need to scroll through each book that you want to affect with the
modification. No other way is available to affect all books with an update.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 211
Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets Chapter 8

Pages Used to Modify or Delete Pending Asset Transactions

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Pending Trans PEND_TRANS_UPD_DEL Asset Management, Asset Update or delete

Update/Delete (pending Transactions, Financial transactions in Pending
transaction update and Transactions, Transaction table prior to
delete) Change/Delete Pending running depreciation
Trans, Pending Trans processing
Update/Delete (AM_DEPR_CALC).

Asset Addition PEND_TRANS_A1_SP Click the Update button or Review detail transaction
the Delete button on the information and then
Pending Trans modify or delete the
Update/Delete page. transaction.

Transaction Information ASSET_TRNINFO4_SEC Click the Edit Trans Info Modify the transaction or
button on the Pending Trans accounting date.
Update/Delete page.

Modifying or Deleting Pending Transactions

Access the Pending Trans Update/Delete page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Financial
Transactions, Change/Delete Pending Trans).

Review the information to make sure that this is the intended transaction that you want to modify or delete.

Click Update or Delete to review transaction information, and then either modify or delete it.

Click Edit Trans Info to edit the transaction date, accounting date, and the Transaction code.

Viewing Asset Transaction Details

Access the Asset Addition page (On the Pending Trans Update/Delete page, click the Update button or the
Delete button).

Depreciation Status You can change the status from Depreciable to Non Depreciable.

In Service Date Captures when the asset was placed in service. You can modify this date.

Accum Depr in Current Select if you want any accumulated depreciation for this asset to be booked to the
Pd (accumulate current period. Do not select the check box if you want accumulated depreciation
depreciation in current to be booked to the previous period, which you will probably have to reopen. The
period) default setting for this option is disabled, or clear. If you use this check box,
remember to select it for each book for the asset transaction that you are
modifying.

212 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets

Asset Transaction Detail

Modify the transaction directly in the cost row or rows.

Only certain fields are available for editing, based on the type of transaction that you are modifying:

Accum Depr Add the amount of any depreciation that is already recognized for the asset. If
(accumulated you are adding assets that have depreciation from prior years or prior periods,
depreciation) you can enter the depreciation here if you forgot to enter it when you added the
assets, or change it if you added depreciation before but want to change it now.

Transaction Type Fields You Can Update

ADD Cost, Quantity, ChartFields, Category, Cost Type, In

Service Date, Depreciation Status, Accumulated
Depreciation

ADJ Cost, Quantity

RCT Category, Cost Type

TRF ChartFields

Updating Transaction Information

Access the Transaction Information page (On the Pending Trans Update/Delete page, click the Edit Trans
Info button).

Trans Code (transaction code) is optional. It helps to identify which accounting entry template will be used
for this transaction. You can select only those valid combinations for which accounting entry templates exist.

Adjusting for Asset Impairment

Use the Impairment (AM_IMPAIR) component or the CGU Impairment (AM_CGU_IMPAIR_RUN)
component to perform impairment testing and create impairment adjustments to assets.

This section provides an overview of impairment testing, lists the pages used for impairment testing, and
discusses how to:

• Work with the impairment worksheet.

• Run the CGU Impairment Batch process.

• View and report impairment losses and reversals.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 213
Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets Chapter 8

Understanding Impairment Testing

PeopleSoft supports the requirements of International Accounting Standard (IAS) 36 by providing an
impairment test worksheet.

A generally accepted principle is that long-lived assets should be subject to some form of recoverable amount
constraint, that is, that the carrying amount of an asset does not exceed the amount that is recoverable from
the future economic benefits that the asset is expected to generate. When the carrying amount of an asset
exceeds its recoverable amount, the asset is described as impaired and the carrying value should be reduced to
the recoverable amount. Therefore, assets should be subject to some type of impairment evaluation or test.
The purpose of an impairment or recoverable amount test is to identify such assets and ensure that losses of
future economic benefits are properly recognized in a timely manner (asset values are reduced in the
statement of financial position, and expenses are recognized in the statement of financial performance).

In pursuance of this principle, the International Accounting Standards Board has defined IAS 36, This
requires that you ensure that your assets are carried at no more than their recoverable value. IAS 36 provides
a list of external and internal indicators of impairment as well as requirements for an impairment assessment
strategy and frequency-of-asset impairment review. Only assets that are identified as 'potentially impaired'
require an impairment assessment. If you have an indication that an asset may be impaired, then the enterprise
is required to calculate the asset's recoverable amount.

Note. To assess whether any assets you have are subject to impairment review, consult the most current
published IAS standards.

PeopleSoft also enables the definition of a Cash Generating Unit (CGU) and the association of CGUs with
business units to further support impairment testing. Impairment losses can be allocated to individual assets
on a CGU basis using the CGU Impairment utility. This batch process allocates CGU impairment data for
each asset and stores the details in the INTFC_FIN table. You can also initiate the transaction loader
(AMIF1000) to process and update asset tables automatically.

If an organization cannot determine recoverable value for an individual asset, it must identify the lowest
aggregation of assets that generate largely independent cash flows. These aggregations of assets are called
CGUs. CGUs are defined as the smallest identifiable group of assets that generates cash inflows from
continuing use, and are largely independent of the cash inflows from other assets or groups of assets. CGU
should be defined consistently from period to period. However, an asset that was previously part of a CGU
but which is no longer used, should be excluded from the CGU and assessed for impairment separately.

If you are required to perform impairment evaluation, at a minimum, you should evaluate assets at each
balance sheet date. You can test assets or CGUs for impairment at any time.

Impairment processing is enabled at the installation level. Impairments are then processed on assets that are
contained within the business unit where impairment processing is selected. You can select asset categories,
profiles, books, accounting entry template, CGUs, and individual asset IDs for impairment processing.

To process calculation of impairment, the system compares the following information:

• Carrying amount: The net book value (NBV) of the asset as it is currently recorded in the accounts.

214 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets

• Recoverable amount: The higher of an asset's Net Selling Price (NSP) or its Value In Use (VIU):

• The NSP is obtained from the sale of an asset in a bargained transaction between knowledgeable,
willing parties with reference to the price of an active market and less the costs of disposal.

• The VIU is the present value of estimated future cash flows that are expected to arise from the
continuing use of an asset, and from its disposal at the end of its useful life, (for example, the sum of
discounted cash flows).

The impairment worksheet can also apply an index to the carrying cost and calculates the potential NSP/VIU
cost. The system compares the carrying amount value to the recoverable amount value to calculate the
potential impairment. Any difference is the impairment loss.

An impairment reversal is required when a change has occurred in the estimates that are used to determine the
impairment loss. In this case, the carrying amount of the asset is increased to the recoverable amount, where
the recoverable amount does not exceed the original carrying amount.

You can also select impairment processing when running the Cost and Depreciation process.

To view impairment loss and reversal, use the Cost and Depreciation Summary page (AM_REPORT1). To
generate reports of impairments, use the Asset Impairment report (AM_IMPAIR_RPT_RUN) component.

Note. Impairment testing prescribed by IAS 36 is not required in all countries.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing
PeopleSoft Asset Management Business Units."

Pages Used to Make Impairment Adjustments

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Impairment Worksheet AM_IMPAIR Asset Management, Asset Select criteria to search for
Transactions, Financial assets that can potentially
Transactions, Impairment be impaired, to process
Worksheet, Impairment potential impairment, and to
Worksheet create loss adjustments
automatically.

Cash Generating Unit AM_CGU_DEFN_01 Click the CGU Details link Review the CGU definition.
Definition from the Impairment
Worksheet or from the
CGU Impairment run
control page to view (only)
the CGU definition.

More Filter Options AM_IMPAIR_CF_SEC Click the ChartField Search Filter search criteria by
Criteria link from the selecting ChartFields:
Impairment Worksheet Operating Unit, Fund Code,
page. Department, Program, Class
Field, Budget Reference,
Product, and Project.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 215
Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets Chapter 8

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Impairment Comments AM_IMPAIR_COMMENTS Click the Impairment Enter comments about this
Comments link from the impairment.
Impairment Worksheet OR
from the CGU Impairment
run control page.

CGU Impairment AM_CGU_IMP_RUN_CTL Asset Management, Asset Allocate impairment losses

Transactions, Financial to individual assets on a
Transactions, CGU CGU basis.
Impairment, CGU
Impairment

Cost and Depreciation AM_REPORT1 Asset Management, View impairment losses and
Financial Reports, Cost and reversals online using the
Depreciation Summary, Cost and Depreciation
Cost and Depreciation online view.

Impaired Asset Value AM_IMP_RPT_RUN_CTL Asset Management, Generate Crystal reports by

Report Financial Reports, Cost and category or CGU ID of
Depreciation, Asset impaired asset values.
Impairment, Impaired Asset
Value Report

Working With the Impairment Worksheet

Access the Impairment Worksheet page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Financial Transactions,
Impairment Worksheet).

216 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets

Impairment Worksheet page (1 of 2)

Enter the asset search criteria and impairment information.

Business Unit Select the business unit (required). The business unit is supplied from the search
dialog box.

Book Name Select the book name (required). The Book Name field is initially supplied by the
default book (when the book is enabled for impairment processing). The valid
values include only books for which impairment processing enabled.

Asset Category Select the asset category to search for assets by category. The valid values
include only categories for which impairment processing is enabled.

Location Select the asset location to search for assets by location. The valid values include
only locations for which impairment processing is enabled.

Cash Generating Unit Select from the valid CGUs for this business unit, book, profile, or category if
you want to impair at the CGU level.

Profile ID Select the asset profile ID to search for assets by profile. The valid values include
only locations for which impairment processing is enabled.

From Asset ID and To Select an asset ID or a range of asset IDs to be included.

Asset ID
ChartField Search Click the link to supply more filter options by ChartField to further narrow the
Criteria search.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 217
Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets Chapter 8

NSP Percentage (%)(net Apply and enter a net selling price percentage to determine the actual NSP.
selling price percentage)
Net selling price is the amount that is obtainable from the sale of an asset in a
bargained transaction (between knowledgeable, willing parties), less the costs of
disposal.
For example, suppose the net book value of an asset is 10,000.00 USD. But the
NSP is equal to 8,000.00 USD. The NSP percent is equal to 80 percent.

Copy Impairment to Select if you want the impairment carried over to other books.
other books
VIU Percentage (%) Enter the value in use percentage that you expect to determine the actual VIU
(value in use percentage) amount.
Value in use is the present value of estimated future cash flows that are expected
to arise from the continuing use of an asset, and from its disposal at the end of its
useful life.
For example, suppose the net book value of an asset is 23,500.00 USD. But the
VIU is unknown. You can apply a percentage that you expect , such as 70
percent, and the system will calculate the actual amount to be 16,450.00 USD.

Impairment Reversal Select if the potential impairment is a reversal of a prior impairment adjustment.

Note. This option appears only if impairment reversal is enabled for the business
unit.

Accounting Date Enter the accounting date of the impairment.

Convention Select the depreciation convention. The valid values are derived from those that
are defined for the business unit.

Impairment Strategy Select the impairment strategy. Valid values are: Asset and CGU.
• Asset: If asset is selected, the system makes the impairment adjustment asset
by asset.

• CGU: If CGU is selected, the system calculates the adjustment to the whole
CGU as a body. Impairment is based on all assets that are part of CGU
definitions. If CGU is selected, then a cash generating unit must be provided.
The CGU field in the search criteria section is only used to find out specific
groups but it does not say what kind of impairment will apply to them.

Frequency Select the frequency for performing the impairment test. the options include
Yearly,Semiannually,Quarterly,Monthly, and Other

Impairment Date This is the transaction date on which the system calculates carrying cost (NBV).
The depreciation for the impairment month is included in the NBV calculation.
For example, if the impairment date is between December 12, 2003 and
December 12, 2003, period 12 is included in the accumulated depreciation for the
calculation:
NBV=Cost-ACCUM

218 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets

Exclude Assets Impaired Enter the dates to exclude more recently impaired assets.
After
Use FV(use fair value) Select to retrieve the fair values in the NSP amount or VIU amount fields instead
of using the NSP Percentage(%) or VIU Percentage(%) fields for impairments.
These fields become unavailable when selecting the Use FV field. If this check
box is not selected, the fair values are retrieved from the NSP Percentage(%) or
the VIU Percentage(%) fields for impairments.

FV Action(fair value Select the action by which to update the fair value records from the NSP or VIU
action) amount fields. Select from the following fair value actions:
• No Action - (default) If Use FV is selected in conjunction with this action,
the fair values are retrieved in the NSP or VIU amount fields but the fair
values will not be updated.

• Update From NSP - If Use FV is selected in conjunction with this action, the
fair values are retrieved in the NSP Amount field to update impairments and
fair values.

• Update From VIU - If Use FV is selected in conjunction with this action, the
fair values are retrieved in the VIU Amount field to update impairments and
fair values.

• Update Higher - If Use FV is selected in conjunction with this action, the

fair values are updated from the higher value that is entered on the NSP or
VIU Amount in the results grid.

FV Template ID(fair Select an existing fair value template to populate the fair value fields. When the
value template ID) Retrieve button is pushed, the FV Template ID and Group ID in the Asset Search
Results will be defaulted from the values in the Impairment Information section.

FV Group ID(fair value Select when the valuation premise from the FV Template is In-Use. You can
group ID) override the default value from the template. This field is unavailable if the
valuation premise from the FV Template is In-Exchange.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1
PeopleBook, "Setting Up Accounting Entry and Financial Processing for
PeopleSoft Asset Management," Enabling Combination Editing.

Asset Search Results

When you are finished entering search criteria and impairment information, initiate the retrieval process. On
completion, the Search Criteria group box collapses. The Impairment Information group box is visible, but
unavailable for entry. You can initiate a new search or refine search of your returned results.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 219
Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets Chapter 8

Impairment Worksheet page (2 of 2)

The results of the assets matching the criteria that are entered are displayed in the Asset Search Results grid
on the worksheet. The grid contains two tabs:

• Impairment Information

• Asset Information

Use the buttons to mark assets to be impaired and assets not to be impaired, to remove assets from the list,
and to refresh the page.

Note. Selected assets must already have been processed for depreciation and included in the load depreciation
report table process before they are available to be reported in the impairment worksheet.

Impairment Information

This section enables you to select or exclude selected assets for impairment.

When you click the Check button, you will select all assets in the list. Use Mark
Mark to select the line.

Mark to Impair Click Mark to Impair and the system will set Impair Status toImpair for all
selected rows.

Mark to not Impair Click Mark to Not Impair and the system will set Impair Status to Don't Impair
for all selected rows.

220 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets

Mark to Update FV Click Mark to Update FV and the system will set Impair Status to FV for all
selected rows.

Remove From List Click Remove From Listto remove selected rows from Asset Search Results.

Refresh Click Refresh to recalculate all impairment information.

Impair Status Displays the status of selected assets to be impaired or not to be impaired.
Impaired assets will be inserted into INTFC_FIN table and Impairment audit
tables. Not impaired assets will be inserted into the impairment audit tables.

Asset ID Displays the asset ID for all assets meeting the search criteria.

Carry Cost (NBV) Displays the current carry cost (net book value) of the asset.

NSP% Enter the net selling price percentage that is applied to the carry cost.

NSP Amount Enter the NSP as an amount in the base currency.

VIU% Enter the value in use percentage that is applied to the carry cost.

VIU Amount Enter the VIU as an amount in the base currency.

Impairment Loss Displays the calculated impairment loss, usually the disposal cost. Impairment
loss = NBV- (greater than NSP or VIU). You can override this amount.

Revaluation Reversal If this asset had a revaluation before, you need to reverse the revaluation before
you allocate the loss.

Carry Cost The remaining amount that is attributable to prior impairment loss.
(Impairment)
Carry Cost The remaining amount that is attributable to prior impairment reversal.
(Revaluation)

When you have reviewed and selected assets to be impaired, save the worksheet. The saving process performs
the following tasks:

• The system creates a cost adjustment (with user define impairment loss cost type) for the impairment loss.

• The system creates a cost adjustment (user defined impairment reversal cost type) for the impairment
revaluation reversal.

• The transaction date and the impairment date are inserted and is the same for this transaction.

• If you do not provide an accounting date, the system looks for the last day of the open period and books
the transaction against that date. This date is validated against the open period.

• The system commits all validations at the time of the save.

• Upon saving the worksheet, the system places the actual adjustment in the staging table INTFC_FIN.

The system loads the adjustment in the main asset tables when the transaction loader (AMIF1000) is run.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 221
Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets Chapter 8

• The system automatically triggers the transaction loader (AMIF1000) to load the transactions if this
option has been selected.

• The system validates that the impairment date is less than or equal to the accounting date.

• When the impairment reversal box is checked, the system processes impairment reversal instead of
impairment loss.

Running the CGU Impairment Batch Process

Access the CGU Impairment page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Financial Transactions, CGU
Impairment).

CGU Impairment page

222 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets

Complete the applicable fields. When satisfied with the criteria, click Run. The batch process allocates CGU
impairment data to each asset.

Request

Business Unit Select the business unit (required). The business unit is supplied from the search
dialog box.

Book Name Select the book name (required). The book is initially supplied by the default
book (when the book is enabled for impairment processing). The valid values
include only books for which impairment processing is enabled.

Currency Code The currency code as defined for the Book.

CGU ID Select from the valid CGUs for this business unit, book, profile, or category if
you want to impair at the CGU level.

Exclude Assets Impaired Enter dates to exclude more recently impaired assets.
After

Impairment Information

Impairment Date Enter the date of the asset impairment. This is the transaction date on which the
system calculates carrying cost (NBV). The depreciation for the impairment
month is included in the NBV calculation. The system uses the current date by
default.

Impairment Strategy CGU: Impairment based on all assets that are part of CGU definitions.
The impairment strategy CGU appears by default when you are processing
impairment in batch mode.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 223
Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets Chapter 8

Copy Impairment to Select if you want the impairment carried over to other books.
other books PeopleSoft Asset Management copies the impairment amount to other books in
the ledger group as long as the Keep Ledgers in Sync (KLS) option is selected. If
the option Copy to Other Books is checked, PeopleSoft Asset Management
copies the same amount to the books with impairment amount selected, for books
that do not point to the ledger group. Depending on the selection of these options,
when Copy Zero Impair/Revalue Rows is checked, then the system copies zero
impairment data in all the remaining books.
For example: Suppose you have a business unit with six books (A, B, C, D, E, F),
with the first three books, A, B and C pointing to a ledger group, the ledger group
is synchronized with the general ledger business unit and book B is pointing to
the primary ledger. However, the other three books, D, E and F do not point to
general ledger and books A, B, C, and E have the impairment option enabled.
PeopleSoft Asset Management processes impairment loss against the primary
book B. The system then copies the impairment loss to book A and book C
because they are in the same ledger group regardless of the status of the options
Copy Impairment to other books and Copy Zero Impair/Revalue Rows . If Copy
Impairment to other books is selected, the system copies the same impairment
loss to book E because the impairment option is selected for that book. If the
Copy Zero Impair/Revalue Rows option is selected, the system copies zero
impairment loss into book D and F. If theCopy Impairment to other books option
is not selected andthe Copy Zero Impair/Revalue Rows option is selected, the
system copies zero impairment rows to books D and F. When both options are
not selected, the system does not copy any impairment or revaluation row to
books D, E and F.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting
Installation Options for PeopleSoft Applications," Defining Asset Management
Installation Options.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1

PeopleBook, "Establishing PeopleSoft Asset Management Business Units,"
Creating PeopleSoft Asset Management Cash Generating Units.

Accounting Date Enter the accounting date of the impairment.

Impairment Frequency Select the frequency for performing the impairment test. The options include
Yearly,Semiannually,Quarterly,Monthly, and Other

Impairment Reversal Select for the system to process impairment reversal instead of impairment loss.
Click the Calculate button to compute the net book value, prior impairment loss,
and prior revaluation reversal.
Click the Calculate Impairment Loss button to calculate the total impairment
loss.

Note. This option is available only if impairment reversal is enabled for the
business unit.

Convention Select the depreciation convention. The valid values are derived from those that
are defined for the business unit.

224 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets

Use FV(use fair value) Select to retrieve fair values that were previously captured. This selection enables
the Fair Value group box and disables the Carrying Values group box.

Note. You are not allowed to update fair values using the CGU impairment
process.

Carrying Values

The NBV is the equivalent to the carrying value.

Click the Calculate button to retrieve the current NBV for the selected assets.

Fair Value

Fair Value Click the Calculate button to retrieve the current fair value for the selected assets.

Net Selling Price

NSP Percentage (%)(net Enter the net selling price percentage.

selling price percentage)
For example, suppose the net book value of an asset is 10,000.00 USD. But the
net selling price (NSP) is equal to 8,000.00. The NSP percent is equal to 80
percent.
Net selling price is the amount obtainable from the sale of an asset in a bargained
transaction (between knowledgeable, willing parties), less the costs of disposal.

NSP Amount)(net selling Enter the net selling price amount.

price)

Value In Use

VIU %(value in use Enter the value in use percentage.

percentage)
Value in use is the present value of estimated future cash flows that is expected
to arise from the continuing use of an asset, and from its disposal at the end of its
useful life.
For example, suppose the net book value of an asset is 10,000.00 USD. But the
VIU is equal to 7,200.00 USD. The VIU percent is equal to 72 percent.

VIU Amount Enter the value in use amount. Value in use is the present value of estimated
future cash flows that are expected to arise from the continuing use of an asset,
and from its disposal at the end of its useful life.

Click the Calculate Impairment Loss button to compute total impairment loss.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 225
Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets Chapter 8

View and Report Impairment Losses and Reversals

This section discusses how to view and report impairment losses and reversals.

Viewing Impairment Loss Online

Access the Cost and Depreciation page (Asset Management, Financial Reports, Cost and Depreciation
Summary, Cost and Depreciation).

Cost and Depreciation page

Use the Cost and Depreciation online view to review impairment transactions. Search by business, book
name, and fiscal year (all required) or search by selected secondary ChartField criteria.

Select to drill down to details for each period by asset ID, accumulated depreciation account, fixed asset
account, asset category, asset profile, department, operating unit, product or project.

Reporting Asset Impairment Activity

Access the Impaired Asset Value Report run control page (Asset Management, Financial Reports, Cost and
Depreciation, Asset Impairment, Impaired Asset Value Report).

226 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 8 Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets

Impaired Asset Value Report page

Enter the report criteria for the report. You can have the report output sorted by asset category or by asset
CGU ID. You can see the Crystal report formats in the Reports appendix.

The business unit, impairment strategy and impairment date are required for the report.

Note. You must run the load depreciation report process for the dates on which you plan to evaluate the assets
or CGU in order to perform the impairment.

See Appendix C, "PeopleSoft Asset Management Reports," page 653.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 227
 Chapter 9

Managing Asset Maintenance, Repair,

Warranties, and Insurance
This chapter provides an overview of managing asset maintenance, repair, warranties, and insurance, and
describes how to:

• Enter maintenance details.

• Enter asset inspection information.

• Enter asset service and repair statistics.

• Track asset maintenance contracts.

• Enter warranty information.

• Enter insurance coverage information.

• Set up asset contract or warranty expiration notifications.

• Generate asset warranty reports.

• Review asset maintenance history.

Understanding Asset Maintenance, Repair, Warranties, and

Insurance
All assets usually require some level of maintenance service or repair. Many are also acquired with
accompanying insurance or warranties. PeopleSoft Asset Management provides features enabling you to
manage and track these asset attributes.

Asset Checkout

PeopleSoft Asset Management provides the asset check out functionality in order to prepare, configure and
maintain assets for use. This enables you to manage assets as they are moved around the enterprise for use in
multiple settings. As well, the usage can be monitored and intervening maintenance or service events can be
tracked while the asset is out of use.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 229
Managing Asset Maintenance, Repair, Warranties, and Insurance Chapter 9

Asset Maintenance, Service, and Inspection Management

At various intervals, all assets require some degree of maintenance, such as routine mechanics for company
vehicles or repainting an office or building. Scheduling and tracking this type of maintenance provides a more
complete picture of the true costs and revenues associated with these assets.

PeopleSoft Asset Management provides features to track the details of individual maintenance events by date
and time, the person responsible for the maintenance, the vendor who issued the maintenance contract or
warranty, and the cost.

Whenever an asset requires maintenance, you can track exactly when the maintenance takes place, how long
it will take, and how it will affect cost and performance. Annual tune-ups may require that some automobiles
are unavailable at certain times. Damages to machinery can result in large expenses due to unavailable
equipment, as well as replacement and repair costs.

PeopleSoft Asset Management additionally provides the tools to view the maintenance history by type of
maintenance performed or by the date that the maintenance was performed. Using inquiry pages, you can
determine if any asset, or group of assets, requires a particular type of maintenance too often. For example, a
vehicle that requires several quarts of oil more often than every 1,000 miles may have more severe underlying
problems. Similarly, a piece of equipment that requires repeated repair or replacement of a particular part may
be defective and should be replaced.

When you own assets that require expensive maintenance, you may acquire maintenance contracts with
providers covering service and repair. While maintenance contracts do not necessarily have a one-to-one
relationship with assets that require maintenance, you may still want to keep track of those contracts, the
assets that they cover, the extent of coverage provided, and so forth. PeopleSoft Asset Management provides
the tools to track such contracts and to determine repair and servicing costs, the time period covered in the
contract, and the exact coverage specified by the contract.

Keeping detailed records of maintenance events helps manage the physical aspects of your assets. You can
compare detailed repair estimates to actual costs and evaluate whether a warranty or maintenance contract on
the asset can lower the costs that you may incur. Or a review of an asset maintenance history can help you
make decisions about addressing underlying costs that are driving up the cost of production. Some assets
additionally require routine inspections related to licensing or other validations or certifications. PeopleSoft
Asset Management provides inspection and license tracking.

Asset Repair Data Management

In addition to tracking physical information about asset maintenance, it is useful to track detailed financial
information. PeopleSoft Asset Management enables you to track:

• How long an asset will be unavailable for use.

• Hours required to service or repair the asset.

• Costs for labor and materials.

• Any other expenses that you may incur, such as rental of necessary replacement equipment.

This type of detail enables you to assess asset maintenance and repair costs. For instance, as equipment grows
older, it may cost more to repair and service, especially if the parts are obsolete or out of stock. Tracking asset
service and repair statistics helps you to see the financial picture more clearly and may be instrumental in
helping you to decide when to retire or replace an asset.

230 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 9 Managing Asset Maintenance, Repair, Warranties, and Insurance

Asset Warranty Management

Warranties can often lower the cost of repair and maintenance of your assets. Keep track of any warranties
that you might have, which assets they cover, the period of coverage, the cost of the warranty, and so forth.
Manufacturers often warrant an asset, or part of an asset, using specific terms and indicating specific
conditions. Such information is easily accessible to all employees in your organization who might be
responsible for the physical aspects of asset management.

Asset Insurance Management

PeopleSoft Asset Management enables you to enter asset-specific insurance coverage information, including
key insured information, such as insured amount and insurer details. This provides immediate online access to
asset insurance information associated with a specific asset ID, rather than maintaining this information in a
separate database.

Checking Out Assets

This section discusses how to enter maintenance events and details.

Page Used to Check Out Assets

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Asset Checkout ASSET_CHECKOUT Asset Management, Service Check out an asset that can
and Maintenance, Asset be scheduled from available
Checkout assets.

Checking Assets Out for Maintenance Events

Access the Asset Checkout page (Asset Management, Service and Maintenance, Asset Checkout).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 231
Managing Asset Maintenance, Repair, Warranties, and Insurance Chapter 9

Asset Checkout page

WO Business Unit Select the business unit from which to select the work order for this asset.

Work Order Select the work order to associate with this asset checkout.

Task No. Select the task number associated with this checkout event.

Checkout By Select the person who checked out the asset.

Contact Info Enter any contact information regarding the checkout of this asset.

Location Select the location by business unit for the asset.

Shop Select the shop if applicable where the asset will be maintained.

Deployed BU Select the business unit to which the asset is deployed.

Deployed Asset ID Select the asset ID used when the asset is deployed.

Start Date Enter the start date for the asset deployment.

Start Time Enter the start time of the asset deployment

End Date Enter the ending date of the asset deployment.

End Time Enter the ending time of the asset deployment.

Checked In Check this box when the deployed asset has been checked in.

232 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 9 Managing Asset Maintenance, Repair, Warranties, and Insurance

Usage Amount Enter the usage amount of the asset. For example, if the asset usage is tracked by
a meter, a reading value can be entered.

Unit of Measure Select the usage amount unit of measure type, such as miles, gallons, etc.

Entering Asset Inspection Information

Use the Asset Inspection (ASSET_INSPECTION) component to enter information about required or other
inspection for a given asset.

This section discusses how to enter asset inspections.

Page Used to Enter Asset Inspection Information

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Asset Inspection ASSET_INSPECTION Asset Management, Service Enter details pertaining to

and Maintenance, Asset inspections performed for
Inspection the asset. The inspection
agency should be defined
first.

Entering Asset Maintenance Service and Repairs

Use the Track Service and Repairs (ASSET_MAINT_01) component to enter asset service and repair
statistics. This section lists the pages used and discusses how to:

• Enter asset maintenance event information.

• Enter statistical information for repairs.

• Enter payment information.

Pages Used to Enter Asset Service and Repair

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Asset Service/Repair - ASSET_MAINT_01 Asset Management, Service Provide the date and time of
Event and Maintenance, Track maintenance events and
Service and Repairs, Event identify the type of
maintenance, party
responsible for the
maintenance, and status of
the maintenance.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 233
Managing Asset Maintenance, Repair, Warranties, and Insurance Chapter 9

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Maintenance Details ASSET_MAINT_01_S Click the Maintenance Identify the type of

Description link on the maintenance, party
Asset Service/Repair responsible for the
Details - Event page. maintenance, and status of
the maintenance.

Statistics ASSET_MAINT_02 Asset Management, Service Enter detailed financial

and Maintenance, Service information pertaining to
and Maintenance, Track asset maintenance.
Service and Repairs,
Statistics

Related Meter Readings ASSET_MAINT_05 Click the Related Meter Enter meter reading
Readings link from the information relative to a
Statistics page. maintenance event for this
asset. This page enables you
to enter and view related
meter readings which may
have influenced the
maintenance event being
tracked.
See Chapter 5, "Adding and
Maintaining Assets,"
Entering Meter Readings,
page 85.

Meter Reading Details AM_MTR_RD_HID3 Click the Detail link from Use the details link to view
the Related Meter Readings asset meter reading details.
page.
See Chapter 5, "Adding and
Maintaining Assets,"
Reviewing Meter Reading
History, page 87.

Payment ASSET_MAINT_03 Asset Management, Service Enter information about a

and Maintenance, Service parts or services vendor.
and Maintenance, Track You can add any number of
Service and Repairs, payment records.
Payment

Asset Service/Repair ASSET_MAINT_04 Asset Management, Service Enter problems encountered

Details - Comments and Maintenance, Service or recommendations for
and Maintenance, Track repair and service. You can
Service and Repairs, maintain separate comments
Comments for each service/repair event
or you can keep a running
commentary covering all
events.

Describing Maintenance Events

Access the Track Service and Repairs Event page (Asset Management, Service and Maintenance, Track
Service and Repairs, Event).

234 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 9 Managing Asset Maintenance, Repair, Warranties, and Insurance

Track Service and Repairs - Event page

Date/Time Displays the date and time that each maintenance event was entered into
PeopleSoft Asset Management.

Type Enter a valid maintenance type. This field is required to save the event.

Note. You can complete the rest of the fields on this page at any time.

Status Select the status of the maintenance event:

Complete:Maintenance and repairs are done and ready for inspection.
Complete-Pickup:Asset is ready for return to service.
In Process:Asset is undergoing maintenance or repairs.
Inspected:Maintenance and repairs have been approved.
Scheduled:Maintenance event has been planned and scheduled.
Scheduled-Pickup:Asset has been scheduled for pickup.

Problem ID If applicable, enter an ID for this maintenance event.

WO Unit Select the work order business unit from which to select the work order for this
asset maintenance event.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 235
Managing Asset Maintenance, Repair, Warranties, and Insurance Chapter 9

Work Order ID Select the work order ID to associate with this asset.

Task Number Select the task number associated with this maintenance event.

Repair Code Enter a repair code, if used. This field may be populated automatically when you
have installed PeopleSoft Maintenance Management.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Maintenance Management 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting
Up and Generating Preventive Maintenance Work Orders."

Responsibility Enter the name of the person responsible for this asset, if used. This field may be
populated automatically when you have installed Maintenance Management.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Maintenance Management 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting
Up and Generating Preventive Maintenance Work Orders."

This Asset is Offsite Check this box to indicate the asset is located off site.

Pickup Date and Pickup Enter the date the asset is scheduled for pickup and the contact name.
Contact
Ready Date Time Enter the date and time the repaired asset is scheduled to be ready.

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing Asset
Processing"

Entering Statistical Information for Repairs

Access the Track Service and Repairs - Statistics page (Asset Management, Service and Maintenance, Service
and Maintenance, Track Service and Repairs, Statistics).

236 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 9 Managing Asset Maintenance, Repair, Warranties, and Insurance

Track Service and Repairs - Statistics page

Typically, you enter estimates of the hours and monetary costs first. Then, as information becomes available
or when the service is completed, you can go back and enter actual data in the following fields:

Down Hours and Enter the length of time that the asset is unavailable for service.
Estimated
Labor Hours and Enter the length of time for repair and maintenance labor.
Estimated
Labor Cost and Enter the monetary expense for repair or maintenance labor.
Estimated
Material Cost and Enter the monetary expense for items used in repair or maintenance materials.
Estimated
Tools Cost and Enter the monetary expense for items used in repair or maintenance tools.
Estimated
Purchase Cost and Enter the purchase cost for items used in repair or maintenance.
Estimated
Other Cost and Enter miscellaneous costs, such as subcontracting, replacement equipment, or
Estimated rental equipment.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 237
Managing Asset Maintenance, Repair, Warranties, and Insurance Chapter 9

PeopleSoft Asset Management keeps a running total of both the actual Total Cost and Estimated total cost.
Use this worksheet to compare your estimates with actual figures for determining if:

• The time and cost of maintaining the asset is within the expected margins.

• You must revise your estimates.

• You must find a more economical way to maintain your assets.

To view meter reading details for this asset, click on the Related Meter Readings link.

To view downtime details for this asset, click on the Downtime Detail link. Downtime detail is supported by
PeopleSoft Maintenance Management.

Entering Payment Information

Access the Track Service and Repairs - Payment page (Asset Management, Service and Maintenance, Service
and Maintenance, Track Service and Repairs, Payment).

Track Service and Maintenance - Payment page

Enter information about asset parts or services, including vendor, purchase orders, and voucher IDs. You can
also associate the payment with a contract ID. You can add any number of payment records.

Tracking Asset Maintenance Contracts

This section discusses how to:

238 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 9 Managing Asset Maintenance, Repair, Warranties, and Insurance

• Add or modify maintenance contracts.

• Add maintenance contract terms.

Understanding Asset Maintenance Contracts

Use the Maintenance Contract Terms (MAINT_CONTRACT_01) component to track such contracts and to
determine repair and servicing costs, the time period covered in the contract, and the exact coverage specified
by the contract.

To track maintenance contracts:

• Add or modify maintenance contracts on the Maintenance Contracts - Detail page.

• Enter the terms of each maintenance contract and the coverage that it provides.

Note. You cannot set up maintenance contracts without first setting up a Vendor table. You need not set up
all vendor tables, but you must at least set up a list of vendors.

Pages Used to Track Asset Maintenance Contracts

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Maintenance Contracts - MAINT_CONTRACT_01 Asset Management, Service Add or modify maintenance

Detail and Maintenance, contracts.
Maintenance Contract
Terms

Maintenance Contracts - MAINT_CONTRACT_02 Asset Management, Service Enter the terms of each
Coverage and Maintenance, maintenance contract and
Maintenance Contract the coverage that it
Terms, Coverage provides.

Adding or Modifying Maintenance Contracts

Access the Maintenance Contracts - Detail page (Asset Management, Service and Maintenance, Maintenance
Contract Terms).

You can add multiple records for any contract. By creating separate records with different dates in the
Effective Date field, you can maintain a history of when the contract was first issued and any subsequent
renewals. To identify the contract currently in use, make its StatusActive.

The information in this page helps you to track maintenance contracts. You can enter when the contract was
issued, when it expires, what you had to pay for it, and the vendor honoring the contract. You can also
identify the person who is responsible for ensuring that the assets covered by this contract are maintained and
repaired as required.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 239
Managing Asset Maintenance, Repair, Warranties, and Insurance Chapter 9

Adding Maintenance Contract Terms

Access the Maintenance Contract - Coverage page (Asset Management, Service and Maintenance,
Maintenance Contract Terms, Coverage).

In the Coverage field, enter any information about the coverage provided under each maintenance contract,
the cost of such coverage, or any other contract-related information.

Entering Warranty Information

Enter warranty information on the Asset Warranty (ASSET_WARRANTY) page.

This section lists prerequisites and discusses how to:

• Enter asset warranty information.

• Apply warranties from templates.

Prerequisites
Before entering asset warranty information, you can:

• Define standard warranty templates.

• Define asset warranty templates.

When these tables have been defined, the templates and defaults are available for assignment to asset
warranties.

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing Asset
Processing"

Pages Used to Enter Warranty Information

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Asset Warranty ASSET_WARRANTY Asset Management, Service Enter warranty information.

and Maintenance, Asset
Warranties

Search for Asset Warranty AM_WTMPL_SRH Click the Apply Warranties Search to find a defined
Templates from Template link on the Standard Warranty
Asset Warranties page. Template to apply to the
asset.

240 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 9 Managing Asset Maintenance, Repair, Warranties, and Insurance

Entering Warranty Information

Access the Asset Warranty page (Asset Management, Service and Maintenance, Asset Warranties).

Asset Warranties page

Most of the information on this page helps you manage the repair of assets covered by manufacturer
warranties.

Sequence The sequence value is determined by the order or sequence of warranty terms
entered for this warranty. This system is enabled to support multiple warranties
per asset.

Effective Dateand Status Enter the effective date and status of the warranty. Use these fields to establish a
history of when each warranty is first issued and any subsequent information that
is relevant. You can add multiple warranty records for an asset. If the warranty is
currently valid, select Active in the its Status field.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 241
Managing Asset Maintenance, Repair, Warranties, and Insurance Chapter 9

Vendor ID Select a vendor by ID from the list of those available for this business unit.
Identifies the manufacturer. Only valid IDs set up in the Vendor Table are
accepted.

Contact ID Select a warranty contact by ID from the list of those available for this vendor.

Warranty Number Enter the warranty number or ID.

Warranty Name Select a warranty name from the list of those available for this SetID.

Warranty End Date Enter the date the warranty expires.

Coverage Specify the terms and conditions of each warranty in this memo field.

Applying Warranties from Template

Access the Search for Asset Warranty Templates page (Click the Apply Warranties from Template link on the
Asset Warranties page).

Use this search page to find a defined standard warranty template and apply the warranty terms to this asset.

Enter search criteria to restrict template selections based on:

• Asset Type

• Asset Subtype

• Vendor ID

• Model

• Item ID

The valid warranty templates matching the search criteria appear, and you may select one to associated with
this asset. Standard warranties are defined on the Standard Warranty Template.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing Asset
Processing," Setting Up Asset Warranties.

Entering Asset Insurance Information

This section lists prerequisites and discusses how to:

• Set up asset insurance vendors and types.

• Set up asset insurance.

Use the Asset Insurance (ASSET_INSURANCE) component to set up asset insurance.

242 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 9 Managing Asset Maintenance, Repair, Warranties, and Insurance

The Asset Insurance page captures all of the information necessary to track the insurance coverage for an
asset. The Asset Insurance by Company query is provided to enable viewing of the insurance by business unit
and vendor ID.

Note. (JPN) This feature satisfies the Japanese requirement to link an insurance policy ID to an asset ID.

Prerequisites
The asset insurance pages use data stored in the Vendor table and the Insurance Type table. Before you set up
asset insurance, you must first define these tables and establish an asset ID.

To use the Asset Insurance page, you must first:

• Establish insurance types.

• Set up asset insurance vendors.

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing Asset
Processing," Pages Used to Define Asset Attributes

Page Used to Set Up Asset Insurance Information

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Asset Insurance ASSET_INSURANCE Asset Management, Service Track insurance information

and Maintenance, Asset by asset ID.
Insurance

Setting Up Asset Insurance

Access the Asset Insurance page (Asset Management, Service and Maintenance, Asset Insurance).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 243
Managing Asset Maintenance, Repair, Warranties, and Insurance Chapter 9

Asset Insurance page

Unit Displays the business unit selected from the search criteria.

Asset ID Displays the asset ID selected from the search criteria and with which this
insurance information is associated.

Tag Displays the asset tag number selected from the search criteria.

Policy ID Displays the insurance policy ID if insurance information has previously been
established or displays the ID entered when adding a new value.

Insurance Co (insurance Displays the name of the insurance company for this coverage. The company
company) must already be defined in the vendor file.

Insurance Type Display or change the insurance type to correspond with this policy coverage.
The available insurance types are defined during the setup process.

244 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 9 Managing Asset Maintenance, Repair, Warranties, and Insurance

Insurance Information

Effective Date Indicates when the insurance coverage takes effect. If you want a history of
changes, add new rows to the table and use effective dating to update insurance
coverage, rather than making changes to the initial row.

Status Refers to the status of the Effective Date row.

Descr (description) Enter a description of the asset.

Long Descr (long Enter a description of the asset.

description)
Issue Date Enter the insurance coverage issue date.

Expiration Dt (expiration Enter the insurance coverage expiration date.

date)
Valuation Type Designate the insurance valuation calculation type used for this coverage. No
processing takes effect as a result of this entry, but this entry identifies the
appropriate calculating method in effect. The available insurance valuation types
are:
• Curr Market Value at Mkt Rate (current market value at market rate): Value
at market rate.

• User Entered: Enter a definition.

• Value as New and Insure: Value as new and insure if repurchased.

Insurance Indicator Designate the type of asset and risk associated with the asset:On Loan or High
Value. Use this indicator to identify assets with any special insurance
characteristics for reporting purposes.

Insured Value Enter the amount of the insured asset value.

Policy Currency Select the policy currency type. The value of this field is defaulted from the base
currency of the business unit default book.

Current Value Enter the current value of the asset.

Appraised Value Enter the appraised value of the asset.

Min Insured Val Enter the minimum amount of insurance for the asset.
(minimum insured value)
Last Indexation Dt (last Enter the last date on which an indexation for the asset took place.
indexation date)
Premium Amount Enter the amount of the premium in full or periodically.

Premium Frequency Enter the type of premium schedule such as annual, quarter, month and so on.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 245
Managing Asset Maintenance, Repair, Warranties, and Insurance Chapter 9

Total Cost Displays the total cost, which is derived from the COST table and reported in the
base currency of the default book.

User Defined Amount Corresponds to User Entered value.

Replacement Cost Displays the replacement cost, which is derived from the replacement cost
calculated for the asset and stored on the Basic Asset page.

Date of last update Displays the date of the last update to the replacement cost.

Comments Enter any comments. This is a free-text field.

Generating the Asset Warranties Report

You can generate an asset warranty report to review asset warranty information. This section lists the page
used to generate this report.

Page Used to Generate the Asset Warranty Report

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Warranties RUN_AMAS1600 Asset Management, Service Specify run control

and Maintenance, Reports, parameters to generate an
Warranties, Warranties asset warranty report. The
warranties reports lists
Asset ID, Description,
Warranty, Vendor ID, End
Date, Coverage.

Reviewing Asset Maintenance History

This section lists the pages used to review asset maintenance history.

246 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 9 Managing Asset Maintenance, Repair, Warranties, and Insurance

Page Used to View Asset Maintenance History Summaries

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Asset Service/Repair ASSET_MAINT_SUM_01 Asset Management, Service View a summary of asset

History - Maint History by and Maintenance, Review maintenance by
Type (asset service/repair Maintenance History, maintenance type. From the
history - maintenance Maintenance History by Work Order tab, you can
history by type) Type link directly to the work
order and review
maintenance, cost and work
order details.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 247
 Chapter 10

Using Group Asset Processing

This chapter provides an overview of group asset processing and discusses how to:

• Add group member assets.

• Add group asset IDs with background processing.

• Perform transactions on group member assets.

• Consolidate group member assets.

• Calculate depreciation for group assets.

• Run the Group Member Estimated Net Book Value report.

• Change rates retroactively.

• Review asset book history.

Understanding Group Asset Processing

PeopleSoft Asset Management is fully equipped to handle group asset processing for organizations such as
utility companies or other entities that support a communal infrastructure—such as federal, state, or municipal
public utilities, highways, and roads—or other infrastructure that owns, leases, or uses depreciable assets.

Group assets are treated as a single entity for the purpose of depreciation but as multiple entities for all other
purposes. These entities may reside in different locations, or they may be in different stages of their service
lives. Nevertheless, you consolidate and depreciate their collective cost as if it were that of a single asset.

Some items commonly tracked as group assets include telephone poles, pipelines, and wire. Some of these
group assets can be identified by the Federal Energy Regulatory Commission (FERC) code (delivered with
the PeopleSoft system) and depreciated according to FERC guidelines. Group assets are added without cost
information. The group member assets are added with associated cost information. Asset transactions, except
depreciation and accounting entries, are performed on group member assets. After performing transactions
against group members and before running depreciation against the group, the Group Asset Consolidation
process is run, consolidating group member cost information at the group asset level. Depreciation is then run
against the group asset, and the resulting accounting entries are made.

This section discusses:

• Asset transactions.

• Depreciated group assets.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 249
Using Group Asset Processing Chapter 10

• Retired group members.

• Strategy for asset grouping.

Asset Transactions
All transactions, except depreciation and accounting entries, are performed on the group asset's member
assets. The member assets can be adjusted, transferred, recategorized, retired, reinstated, and so forth—just
like any other asset. You can even transfer group member assets from one group asset to another.

The system applies asset transactions at the group member level. The resulting cost is then consolidated, and
the total depreciable basis is depreciated at the group asset level.

Depreciated Group Assets

Each group asset is associated with an average service life that is usually set by the local regulatory agency.
The system uses the asset's remaining service life to calculate a group depreciation rate. The group
depreciation rate is usually calculated annually and remains fixed for the entire year. The system then applies
this rate to the asset's depreciable basis (the sum of the depreciable bases of its group members) to calculate
depreciation expense.

Depreciation expense is booked to general ledger by applying the depreciation rate either to an average
account balance for the period (using an averaging option) or to actual activity for the period.

Average service life studies provide the basis for calculating average remaining life for a group of assets.
Average service life studies are performed every three or four years, depending on the length of the local
regulatory agency's rate cases.

Because depreciation rates are calculated by using remaining service life at the group asset level, and
depreciation also takes place at the group asset level, it is not possible to over-depreciate group members.

Flat rate depreciation methods calculate depreciation until the calendar ends. Alternatively, if you don't want
to calculate depreciation until the end of the associated calendar, you can specify the number of future years
for which depreciation should be calculated when you add the asset.

Note. PeopleSoft Asset Management supports only the flat rate depreciation method for group asset
processing.

Note. For optimal processing performance and greater table efficiency, you should specify the number of
future years for which depreciation will be calculated rather than calculating it to the end of the calendar. Use
the Future Depreciation Years option to do this.

See Also

Chapter 5, "Adding and Maintaining Assets," page 45

Retired Group Members

Retirements can be processed only against group members.

250 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 10 Using Group Asset Processing

Because all group members of a group asset are generally depreciated as a single unit, and because the
depreciation rate is based on a group average remaining life, all assets that are retired from within a group
should be fully depreciated with no gain or loss.

However, not all assets that are managed by an organization are fully depreciated when they are retired.
PeopleSoft Asset Management enables you to retire a group member as either fully depreciated or not fully
depreciated. If not fully depreciated, gain or loss is calculated for the group member. Any accumulated
depreciation is moved to the group asset.

Strategy for Asset Grouping

Before you set up group asset processing, consider how you want to group the assets. Asset grouping is not
standardized; however, there are key components that apply almost universally. Assets can be grouped by
FERC account or subaccount at the highest level. Vintage year and location are also commonly included in a
grouping strategy.

Depreciation of group assets identified by the FERC code is usually calculated and booked to the general
ledger at the FERC account level by using a group asset depreciation rate. Assets are summed by vintage year
within the FERC account to provide statistics to support life studies and, subsequently, to derive the group
rate for the FERC account and vintage year. Grouping by vintage year is also required to support reporting of
deferred taxes. Regulatory agencies require reporting of assets by location or jurisdiction. Consequently, they
require grouping by location.

Other factors that you should consider in determining how to group assets include depreciation policies, tax
reporting requirements, jurisdictional reporting requirements, and corporate accounting procedures. Assets
grouped together should have these attributes in common.

This diagram shows an asset grouping scheme:

Asset grouping scheme

Note. All group asset processes are available for processing with multiple currency transactions enabled.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 251
Using Group Asset Processing Chapter 10

Prerequisites
To enable group asset processing, you must first set it up at the system and business unit book levels. To set
up group asset processing:

1. Select Set Up Financials/Supply Chain, Install, Installation Options, Asset Management, and then select
the Group Asset Processing check box.

2. Add or select a business unit and books for group asset processing.

You can use any book or business unit for group asset processing.

3. Associate the books with the business unit, and enable group asset processing at the business unit book
level.

You must also select the ChartFields that the system will use to store depreciation records and
subsequently charge with depreciation accounting entries.

Because group asset processing is enabled at the book level, a business unit might track assets in both a
group asset processing book and another book that does not have group asset processing enabled. An asset
would appear exactly the same in both books, but transactions would be processed differently. PeopleSoft
Asset Management enables you to track assets in each of the books. Also, you can add a regular asset to
the business unit that has group asset processing. The system prompts you to confirm that you want to add
the asset as a regular asset.

Adding Group Member Assets

PeopleSoft Asset Management links each group asset to an asset profile. After the profile is linked to the
asset, any group members that are added using that profile are automatically linked to that group asset. Much
of the book information appears by default from the profile, as well.

To add group member assets:

1. Add a profile for the group member assets.

Be sure to associate this profile with the group asset processing books. Remember, each asset profile that
you use for adding group member assets must be used by a single business unit. If you have multiple
business units that perform group asset accounting, each one must have a unique set of asset profiles for
adding group member assets. In this case, you may want to add a business unit identifier to the asset
profile ID to facilitate recognition.

2. Using the ExpressAdd component, add a group asset ID.

Use the group asset profile to display the default book information for the asset. Do not add any cost
information. Be sure to enter transaction and accounting dates that cover all group member assets. In the
Group Flag field, select Group ID.

252 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 10 Using Group Asset Processing

3. Link the group asset ID to the group member profile.

Return to the profile that you created. On the Depreciation page, select the Group Asset ID field. A list
appears with all group assets for the business unit. Select the group asset (and all related group members)
to link to this profile. You can override the default and enter a different group asset when you add the
group members.

Next, add group member assets. Do this online or in a background process. It is recommended that you add
group member assets using a background process. This reduces the likelihood of errors, frees up human
resources, and saves time.

See Also

Chapter 5, "Adding and Maintaining Assets," Adding and Maintaining Asset Information, page 48

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing Asset
Processing," Setting Up Asset Profiles

Adding Group Member Assets with Background Processing

Add group member assets by using background processing if the assets originated in another system. In that
case, all asset data exists in either relational tables or a flat file format. To load the asset data into PeopleSoft
Asset Management, you perform the steps discussed here.

To add group member assets with background processing:

1. Add a value for the PROFILE_ID field to each asset record.

2. Set the value of the PROFILE_ID field to equal the asset profile on which you want to base the group
member assets.

Information in the profile populates the GROUP_ASSET_ID field and GROUP_ASSET_FLAG field in
the Asset Management loader tables.

Note. The GROUP_ASSET_FLAG field must be set to M, and the GROUP_ASSET_ID field must be
populated with the ID of a group asset. If these aren't set properly, group asset accounting does not work.

The next step depends on whether the data resides in relational tables or in flat files.

Relational Table Data

If the data resides in relational tables, write a Structured Query Report (SQR) to transfer the data to the
PeopleSoft Asset Management loader tables. Then run the Transaction Loader process to transfer the load
lines into PeopleSoft Asset Management as open transactions.

Note. Follow the same procedure outlined within the Custom SQR Conversion section in the Converting to
PeopleSoft Asset Management chapter.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 253
Using Group Asset Processing Chapter 10

See Also

Chapter 4, "Converting to PeopleSoft Asset Management," page 31

Adding Group Member Assets Online

Add group member assets online using the Asset ExpressAdd component.

When you add a group member asset online, remember that you must enter a group member profile ID for the
asset. The group member profile automatically associates the group member with a particular group asset,
flags it as a group member asset, and links it to a group asset processing book (or books). Remember, you
must select a profile ID that is unique to the business unit.

Make sure that the Group Asset Flag field is set to Grp Member in the ExpressAdd component.

See Also

Chapter 5, "Adding and Maintaining Assets," Adding and Maintaining Asset Information, page 48

Adding Group Asset IDs with Background Processing

Group asset IDs, like group member assets, can be loaded using a background process. In the Transaction
Loader, you use the Default_Profile_SW = "N" option. Consequently, you must load one record for each
book of each asset into INTFC_FIN.

Load these required fields into the PS_INTFC_FIN table when adding group asset IDs:

• INTFC_ID

• INTFC_LINE_NUM

• BUSINESS_UNIT

• ASSET_ID

This is the group asset ID.

• BOOK

• DTTM_STAMP

• APPROVAL_SW

• LOAD_STATUS

• DEFAULT_PROFILE_SW = 'N'

• CATEGORY

254 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 10 Using Group Asset Processing

• METHOD

Set the method to FL (flat rate).

• DEPR_PERCENT

• CONVENTION

• DEPR_AVG_OPTION

• IN_SERVICE_DT

• TRANS_DT

• CURRENCY_CD

Load these fields into the PS_INTFC_PHY_A record when loading group asset IDs:

• INTFC_ID

• INTFC_LINE_NUMBER

• BUSINESS_UNIT

• ASSET_ID

This is the group asset ID.

• DTTM_STAMP

• INTFC_TYPE

• SYSTEM_SOURCE

• APPROVAL_SW

• LOAD_STATUS

• DEFAULT_PROFILE_SW

• ASSET_STATUS

• FINANCIAL_ASSET_SW

• PROFILE_ID

• GROUP_ASSET_FLAG

• CURRENCY_CD

• CUSTODIAN_EFFDT

• LOCATION_EFFDT

Note. You can include physical attribute data (asset location and asset custodian) for the group asset;
however, the custodian and location effective-dated fields are required. The physical attribute data must be
loaded into the PS_INTFC_PHY_A table.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 255
Using Group Asset Processing Chapter 10

Note. If a profile is already created for a group asset ID and you load the group asset ID in a background
process, the system detects the profile ID in the PROFILE_DET_TBL table and returns an error.

See Also

Chapter 5, "Adding and Maintaining Assets," Pages Used to Add or Change Asset Information, page 49

Chapter 4, "Converting to PeopleSoft Asset Management," page 31

Performing Transactions on Group Member Assets

This section discusses how to transfer group members among group assets.

Although you depreciate grouped assets and make accounting entries at the group asset level, you perform all
other transactions for grouped assets at the group member level. You can perform these transactions on group
member assets:

• Adds

• Adjustments

• Transfers

• Recategorizations

• Retirements

• Reinstatements

Perform these transactions on group member assets the same way in which you perform these transactions on
other assets.

You can override the estimated accumulated depreciation at the group member level on the following
transactions:

• Asset transfers

• Interunit transfers

• Fixed price markup

• Recategorizations

• Retirements

See Chapter 10, "Using Group Asset Processing," Running the Group Member Estimated Net Book Value
Report, page 264.

256 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 10 Using Group Asset Processing

Transferring Group Members Among Group Assets

Transfer a group member asset from one group asset to another by using the Asset Book Definition
component.

To transfer group member assets:

1. Access the Asset Book Definition page.

2. Change the group asset ID to the new group that you want to associate with the member asset.

3. Enter the transaction date and accounting date.

Note. Enter a group asset ID for a group asset processing book only.

Consolidating Group Member Assets

This section provides an overview of consolidation of group member assets and discusses how to run the
Group Asset Consolidation process (AMGRPCON).

Understanding Consolidation of Group Member Assets

PeopleSoft Asset Management provides the Group Asset Consolidation process, which consolidates (or
summarizes) group member asset cost information at the group level, based on ChartFields that you specify.
Once the process has been run, cost and depreciation information for all group members is stored at the group
level. The process summarizes asset addition (ADD) and asset adjustment (ADJ) transactions. Other
transactions such as transfers, retirements, and reinstatements are copied to the group asset level without
consolidation because the system calculates reserve at the group member level. However, after you run
depreciation for these transactions, they are consolidated at the group level the next time that you run the
Group Asset Consolidation process.

The Group Asset Consolidation process uses the transaction period in which the ADD or ADJ transaction
occurs, except when you use the actual-day depreciation convention. In that case, the process uses the actual
transaction date. The period of the in-service date is also a factor when consolidating ADD transactions.

You must run the Group Asset Consolidation process before you depreciate group assets. When you next run
the process to summarize new group member additions and adjustments, the process consolidates the new
transactions with the previously summarized transactions for greater table efficiency.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 257
Using Group Asset Processing Chapter 10

Pages Used to Consolidate Group Member Assets

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Consolidate AMGRPCON_RQST Asset Management, Run the process that

Depreciation, Group Asset consolidates cost
Depreciation, Consolidate, information for group
Consolidate member assets. The process
summarizes cost
information of group
members at the group level,
based on the ChartFields
that you specify on the
Business Unit/Book
Definition page. Run this
process before calculating
depreciation for group
assets.

Group Member Open AMGRPCON_DET_SEC Click Open Trans for Group Review open transactions
Transaction Detail Members on the Group for group members.
Asset Consolidation page.

Running the Group Asset Consolidation Process

Access the Group Asset Depreciation - Consolidate page (Asset Management, Depreciation, Group Asset
Depreciation, Consolidate, Consolidate).

258 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 10 Using Group Asset Processing

Group Asset Depreciation - Consolidate page

Note. Accumulated depreciation for group member assets is loaded at the member asset level, and the Group
Asset Consolidation (AMGRPCON) process consolidates at a group level.

Consolidation Example for Asset Additions

This example shows how group member cost information is consolidated for asset additions. In this example,
Project ID and Category represent the ChartFields selected for summarization. The example is based on a
monthly depreciation calendar.

This table shows the cost records for nine member assets that belong to one group asset before you run the
Group Asset Consolidation process:

As Trans Acct In Dpr Ope Dept Project Catego Cost Cost Group
set Date Date Svc Cnv r ID ID ry Type Asset
ID Date Unit

AS 01/01/ 01/01 01/01/ AM PLA 3200 000000 AUTO C 1,000 GRP1

SE 09 /09 09 NT0 0 0001
T01 1

AS 01/05/ 01/31 01/15/ AM PLA 5300 000000 AUTO NA 2,000 GRP1

SE 09 /09 09 NT0 0 0001
T02 5

AS 01/31/ 01/31 01/01/ AM NA 5300 000000 AUTO M 1,300 GRP1

SE 09 /09 09 0 0001
T03

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 259
Using Group Asset Processing Chapter 10

As Trans Acct In Dpr Ope Dept Project Catego Cost Cost Group
set Date Date Svc Cnv r ID ID ry Type Asset
ID Date Unit

AS 01/20/ 01/20 01/15/ AM PLA 1020 000000 AUTO C 2,300 GRP1

SE 09 /09 09 NT0 0 0002
T04 6

AS 01/25/ 01/31 01/20/ AM NA NA 000000 AUTO NA 4,300 GRP1

SE 09 /09 09 0002
T05

AS 01/31/ 01/31 01/20/ FM PLA 2932 000000 AUTO NA 6,290 GRP1

SE 09 /09 09 NT0 1 0002
T06 7

AS 12/31/ 01/06 01/01/ AM PLA 3200 000000 AUTO C 3,400 GRP1

SE 08 /09 09 NT0 0 0001
T07 1

AS 01/15/ 01/15 12/15/ FM PLA 3200 000000 AUTO C 3,400 GRP1

SE 09 /09 08 NT0 0 0001
T08 1

AS 01/31/ 01/31 12/31/ FM PLA 5300 000000 AUTO C 1,230 GRP1

SE 09 /09 08 NT0 0 0001
T09 1

This table shows how the Group Asset Consolidation process consolidates the nine group member cost rows
into five group asset cost rows:

Group ID Trans Acct In Svc Depr Project ID Category Cost

Date Date Date Conv

GRP1 01/01/09 01/31/09 01/01/09 AM 0000000001 AUTO 4,300.00

GRP1 01/01/09 01/31/09 01/01/09 AM 0000000002 AUTO 6,600.00

GRP1 01/01/09 01/31/09 01/01/09 FM 0000000002 AUTO 6,290.00

GRP1 12/01/08 01/31/09 01/01/09 AM 0000000001 AUTO 3,400.00

GRP1 01/01/09 01/31/09 12/01/08 FM 0000000001 AUTO 4,630.00

The cost rows are consolidated in this way:

• Group row 1 summarizes group member rows 1, 2, and 3.

• Group row 2 summarizes group member rows 4 and 5.

260 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 10 Using Group Asset Processing

• Group row 3 summarizes group member row 6.

• Group row 4 summarizes group member row 7.

• Group row 5 summarizes group member rows 8 and 9.

Each of the group cost rows is then depreciated separately. In addition, the begin depreciation date for each
asset is updated in this way:

Asset ID (Group Members) Updated Begin Depreciation Date

ASSET01 01/01/09

ASSET02 01/01/09

ASSET03 01/01/09

ASSET04 01/01/09

ASSET05 01/01/09

ASSET06 02/01/09

ASSET07 01/01/09

ASSET08 01/01/09

ASSET09 01/01/09

Consolidation Summary Levels

The consolidation summary levels are:

• Business unit.

• Book.

• Group asset ID.

• Depreciation convention.

• Transaction period (except when the actual-day convention is used; in that case, the actual transaction
date is used instead of the period).

• Period of accounting date.

• Period of in-service date (ADD transactions only).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 261
Using Group Asset Processing Chapter 10

• Category ChartField (required).

• General ledger ChartFields and cost type (optional, depending on the settings on the Business Unit/Book
Definition page).

Consolidation Example for Asset Adjustments

This example shows how group member cost information is consolidated for asset adjustments. In this
example, Project ID and Category represent the ChartFields selected for summarization.

This table shows the cost records for nine member assets that belong to one group asset before you run the
Group Asset Consolidation process:

Asset Tran Acct DeprC Oper Dept Projec Catego Cost Cost Group
ID s Date onv Unit ID t ID ry Type Asset
Date

ASSET 03/01/ 05/01/0 AM PLAN 32000 000000 AUTO C 200 GRP1

01 09 9 T01 0001

ASSET 03/12/ 05/12/0 AM PLAN 53000 000000 AUTO NA 120 GRP1

02 09 9 T05 0001

ASSET 03/15/ 05/31/0 AM NA 53000 000000 AUTO M 250 GRP1

03 09 9 0001

ASSET 03/31/ 05/12/0 AM PLAN 10200 000000 AUTO C 90 GRP1

04 09 9 T06 0002

ASSET 03/20/ AM NA 11000 000000 AUTO NA 120 GRP1

05 09 05/30/0 0002
9

ASSET 04/30/ 05/15/0 AM PLAN 29321 000000 AUTO NA 75 GRP1

06 09 9 T07 0002

ASSET 04/30/ 06/01/0 AM PLAN 32000 000000 AUTO C 200 GRP1

07 09 9 T01 0001

ASSET 05/15/ 06/14/0 AM PLAN 32000 000000 AUTO C 430 GRP1

08 09 9 T01 0001

ASSET 05/31/ 06/30/0 AM PLAN 53000 000000 AUTO C 892 GRP1

09 09 9 T01 0001

This table shows how the Group Asset Consolidation process consolidates nine group member cost rows into
five group asset cost rows:

262 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 10 Using Group Asset Processing

Group ID Trans Acct Date DeprConv Project ID Category Cost

Date

GRP1 03/01/09 05/31/09 AM 0000000001 AUTO 570

GRP1 03/01/09 05/31/09 AM 0000000002 AUTO 210

GRP1 04/01/09 05/31/09 AM 0000000002 AUTO 75

GRP1 04/01/09 06/30/09 AM 0000000001 AUTO 200

GRP1 05/01/09 06/30/09 AM 0000000001 AUTO 1322

The cost rows are consolidated in this way:

• Group row 1 summarizes group member rows 1, 2, and 3.

• Group row 2 summarizes group member rows 4 and 5.

• Group row 3 summarizes group member row 6.

• Group row 4 summarizes group member row 7.

• Group row 5 summarizes group member rows 8 and 9.

Calculating Depreciation for Group Assets

This section discusses how to run the Group Asset Depreciation process.

Page Used to Calculate Depreciation for Group Assets

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Group Asset Depreciation RUN_AMDPCGRP Asset Management, Run the depreciation

Depreciation, Group Asset calculation process for
Depreciation, Calculate, group assets. View the
Group Asset Depreciation Asset Batch Process error
log for information about
problems that occurred
during the process.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 263
Using Group Asset Processing Chapter 10

Running the Group Asset Depreciation Process

Access the Group Asset Depreciation page (Asset Management, Depreciation, Group Asset Depreciation,
Calculate, Group Asset Depreciation).

Select the parameters that this process will use to include assets in the calculation.

View the Asset Batch Process error log for information about problems that occurred during the process but
did not terminate the process.

Indexing to Increase Processing Performance

To increase processing performance, PeopleSoft recommends that you create an index, as follows:

CREATE INDEX ON PS_OPEN_TRANS (BUSINESS_UNIT,GROUP_ASSET_ID,BOOK,TRANS_TYPE,DTTM_⇒

STAMP)

Running the Group Member Estimated Net Book Value Report

This section provides an overview of the estimated net book value calculation and discusses how to run the
Group Member Estimated Net Book Value (NBV) report.

Understanding the Estimated Net Book Value Calculation

The Group Member Estimated Net Book Value (NBV) report enables you to estimate the net book value of
asset members. The report provides the estimated accumulated depreciation of the member by using the
following formula:

Cost of member (cost) − Estimated life-to-date depreciation of member, using historical rate of the group
(expense) = Estimated net book value

Note. The report provides only an estimate of the NBV.

See Also

Chapter 8, "Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets," Specifying Transfer To/From Books
Information, page 186

264 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 10 Using Group Asset Processing

Page Used to Run the Group Member Estimated Net Book Value Report

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Group Member Estimated RUN_AMDP2150_RPT Asset Management, Estimate the net book value
NBV Financial Reports, Cost and (NBV) of an asset member
Depreciation, Group before selling the asset.
Member Estimated NBV,
Group Member Estimated
NBV

Running the Group Member Estimated Net Book Value Report

Access the Group Member Estimated NBV page (Asset Management, Financial Reports, Cost and
Depreciation, Group Member Estimated NBV, Group Member Estimated NBV)

Group Member Estimated NBV page

Note. The business unit and book name must be associated with a group asset.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 265
Using Group Asset Processing Chapter 10

Load Member Select to record the member accumulated depreciation. If this check box is not
Reporting Table selected, the report is printed and the member accumulated depreciation is not
recorded in the table (DEPR_RPT_MEM).

Changing Rates Retroactively

Utility companies often must use an interim depreciation rate pending FERC settlement of a rate case. The
process of changing rates retroactively enables utility companies to retroactively recalculate group
depreciation using a new rate.

This section discusses how to process retroactive rate changes.

Pages Used to Change Rates Retroactively

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Create New Group Rate AMGRPRRC_RQST Asset Management, Enter a new rate and initiate
Depreciation, Group Asset the Group Asset Rate
Depreciation, Create New Change process.
Group Rate, Create New
Group Rate

Group Asset Depreciation RUN_AMDPCGRP Asset Management, Run the depreciation

Depreciation, Group Asset calculation process for
Depreciation, Calculate, group assets. This process
Group Asset Depreciation picks up the retroactive rate
change (RRC) open
transaction records and
recalculates depreciation as
of the transaction date.

Run Depreciation Close DEPR_CLOSE_RQST Asset Management, Run the depreciation close
Process Accounting Entries, Close process (AM_DPCLOSE)
Depreciation, Run to pick up the prior period
Depreciation Close Process depreciation (PDP) entries
and generate accounting
entries.

Processing Retroactive Rate Changes

To process retroactive rate changes:

1. On the Create New Group Rate page, enter the new rate, a range of assets to which the rate applies, and
the transaction date on which the rate change retroactively became effective.

266 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 10 Using Group Asset Processing

2. Run the Group Asset Rate Change process (AMGRPRRC).

The process updates the asset book and creates a book history entry with the new rate for the range of
group assets that you specify. It also creates RRC open transaction records.

3. When you next run the Group Asset Depreciation process (AMDPCGRP), it picks up the RRC open
transaction records and recalculates depreciation as of the transaction date.

The Group Asset Depreciation process also generates PDP entries in the depreciation table for the
difference in the depreciation amounts.

4. When you next run the Depreciation Close process (AM_DPCLOSE), it picks up the PDP entries and
generates accounting entries.

Reviewing Asset Book History

The Asset Book History component enables you to review a list of all book changes for an asset. You can use
the Book History List page or view the details of a listed item on the Book History Detail page.

This section lists the pages used to review asset book history.

Pages Used to Review Asset Book History

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Asset Book History - List ASSET_BOOK_HIST1 Asset Management, Asset Review a list of book
Transactions, History, changes for an asset.
Review Book, List

Asset Book History - Detail ASSET_BOOK_HIST2 Asset Management, Asset Review the details of a book
Transactions, History, change for an asset.
Review Book, Detail
Click a Detail link from
Detail the Asset Book
History - List page.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 267
 Chapter 11

Using Composite Asset Processing

This chapter provides an overview of composite asset processing and discusses how to:

• Add a composite asset.

• Add a composite member asset.

• Capitalize composite members into composite assets.

• Retire composite members from composite assets.

• Load composite asset transactions.

• Perform transactions on composite assets.

Understanding Composite Asset Processing

Composite Asset Processing, frequently used by utility companies, is a way of grouping many assets so that
their total cost is carried by, and depreciated as, one asset. This single asset is termed a composite asset, and
associated assets are known as composite members.

In composite processing, no transaction detail is carried by individual composite members. All transaction
detail, including any gain or loss accrued upon retirement, is rolled up to the composite asset level. Once this
rollup occurs, no transaction detail is retained by composite members. Because depreciation occurs at the
composite asset level, only the composite asset carries any information—such as book, depreciation method,
prorate convention, or life—that relates to depreciation.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 269
Using Composite Asset Processing Chapter 11

Composite asset processing

Because the composite asset carries all the cost for its associated composite members, it is a financial, or
capitalized, asset. The composite asset can also carry its own cost information or not, as required, although no
individual detail is retained once the total cost has been rolled up. Composite member assets, on the other
hand, are nonfinancial assets, or not capitalized, and carry no cost information. Instead, they carry acquisition
detail, which is summed up and capitalized at the composite asset level.

All transactions are performed at the composite asset level except for adjustments to acquisition detail.
Adjustments are made at the composite member level and then rolled up to the composite level.

Note. The fair value (FV) of the asset does not roll up from the composite member to the composite level.

Summing up and adjusting cost information for composite assets is accomplished through a mass change that:

• Sums the acquisition detail for each ChartField combination contained in the affected Composite Member
assets.

• Inserts one cost row into the Composite Asset for the total of each ChartField combination.

Note. Composite members are not considered in the Capitalization Threshold evaluation.

Adding a Composite Asset

Using Asset Basic Information, you must perform three steps to add a composite asset:

270 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11 Using Composite Asset Processing

1. Select the Composite Asset check box on the General Information page.

After you save the asset, make note of its Asset ID.

2. Enter an asset Profile ID on the General Information page.

3. Capitalize the asset on the Asset Acquisition Detail page by selecting the Capitalize button.

You can enter cost information or not, as required.

See Chapter 5, "Adding and Maintaining Assets," Adding and Maintaining Asset Information, page 48.

Adding Composite Member Assets

Using Asset Basic Information, you must perform these steps to enter composite member assets:

1. Associate the member with a composite asset.

Select the Composite Asset check box on the General Information page and associate the composite
member by selecting a composite asset in the Composite Asset ID field.

2. On the Asset Acquisition Detail page, assign a Capitalize status of To be Capitalized.

The composite member is uncapitalized with no cost rows. You can use a Profile ID for composite
member assets if you want. However, you must use a nonfinancial asset profile. A composite member
asset may display an Amount left to Capitalize if it has any acquisition detail. This amount is displayed
until the composite member is capitalized into its associated composite asset.

3. Add appropriate acquisition details to the composite member on the Asset Acquisition Detail page.

Note. A nonfinancial Asset Profile does not contain any book information. On the pages of the Asset
Basic Information component, Capitalized Asset should not be selected.

4. Select an asset type (if no profile has been established).

See Chapter 5, "Adding and Maintaining Assets," page 45.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing Asset
Processing," Setting Up Asset Profiles.

Capitalizing Composite Members into Composite Assets

To capitalize composite members into their associated composite asset, you need to create and run a mass
change definition using the Mass Change Template CC - Capitalize into Composite.

In Execution Sequence 1, enter the composite asset ID into which you want to capitalize your composite
members, the Business Unit to which the composite asset belongs, and the Composite Member Asset IDsyou
want to capitalize. You need not capitalize all composite member assets at one time.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 271
Using Composite Asset Processing Chapter 11

In Execution Sequence 2, enter the Composite Member Asset ID and the Profile TableSet ID associated with
that Business Unit. This information is required to improve system performance. There are no defaults to
enter for this Mass Change Type.

Be sure to enter the Transaction Date and Accounting Date that are required by PeopleSoft Asset
Management. You can also select the transaction currency as necessary.

See Also

Chapter 20, "Processing Asset Mass Changes," page 421

Retiring Composite Members from Composite Assets

To retire composite members from their associated composite asset, you need to create and run a mass change
definition using the Mass Change Template CR - Composite Retirement.

In Execution Sequence 1, enter the Composite Asset ID from which you want to retire your composite
members, the business unit to which the composite asset belongs, and the Composite Member Asset IDs you
want to retire. You need not retire all composite member assets at one time.

In Execution Sequence 2, enter the business unit associated with your composite asset and the Profile
TableSet ID associated with that Business Unit. This information is required to improve system performance.

Enter the defaults for the retirement, including a Disposal Code, Retirement Type, and Retirement
Convention, and indicate whether this is a Voluntary or Involuntary Retirement.

Be sure to enter the Transaction Date and Accounting Date that are required by PeopleSoft Asset
Management.

See Also

Chapter 20, "Processing Asset Mass Changes," page 421

Loading Composite Asset Transactions

After you have run a Composite Asset mass change, use the Transaction Loader to load results of the mass
change into the PeopleSoft Asset Management tables.

The Load Type for capitalize into composite transactions is CIC. The Load Type for retire from composite
transactions is either PRT or RET, depending on whether you are doing a partial or a full retirement.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Integrating
PeopleSoft Asset Management with Other Products," Running the Transaction Loader.

272 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 11 Using Composite Asset Processing

Understanding the Effect of Capitalization into Composite

After your composite member assets are capitalized, they are designated Already Capitalized on the Asset
Acquisition Detail page. The Capitalization Information group box is inactive. The Asset Acquisition Detail
page no longer displays an amount or quantity that is left to capitalize.

The Composite Asset into which you capitalized will now contain one cost row for each ChartField
combination represented in the acquisition detail of the composite members you just rolled up. To view this,
select Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Financial Transactions, Cost Adjust/Transfer Asset, Cost
Information.

Note. The Cost Information page appears after clicking the Search button.

Understanding the Effect of Retirement from Composite

After you retire a Composite Member from a Composite Asset, the cost row for the ChartField combination
you retired will be decreased by the amount you retired. To view this, select Asset Management, Asset
Transactions, Asset Disposal, Retire/Reinstate Asset, Retire Assets. You can also view this information on the
Cost Information page.

Because Composite Member Assets carry no cost information, you will not see any change in them after
retirement.

Performing Transactions on Composite Assets

All transactions on composite assets are performed at the composite asset level except adjustments to cost.
Adjustments to cost/quantity are made at the composite member level as adjustments to acquisition detail, and
then rolled up to the composite level and capitalized, where they are recognized as adjustments to total
cost/quantity.

Transaction on composite Elements

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 273
Using Composite Asset Processing Chapter 11

Adjustments to Cost/Quantity
Using Asset Basic Information, you must perform three steps to adjust the cost/quantity of a composite asset:

1. Add a row of acquisition detail to one of the associated Composite Members.

This row should equal the amount of the desired cost/quantity adjustment and contain the appropriate
ChartField combination. The additional row is reflected in the Amount Left to Capitalize on the Asset
Acquisition Detail page. If you want to add cost/quantity for more than one ChartField combination, enter
additional rows.

2. Use Mass Change to capitalize the adjusted Composite Member into the Composite Asset.

3. Run the Transaction Loader.

Recategorizations and Transfers

Recategorizations and transfers on composite assets are performed at the composite level. Perform these
transactions on composite assets as you would for any other asset by using the Asset Cost Adjust/Transfers
component.

To transfer a composite asset:

1. Select Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Financial Transactions, Cost Adjust/Transfer Asset to
access the Main Transaction page.

2. Select the Transaction Date, Accounting Date, Transaction Code, and Rate Type. Select Transfer in the
Action drop-down list box. The Transaction Type for transfers is TRF.

3. Enter new ChartField information into the appropriate fields on the Cost Information page.

We recommend that you change information one field at a time to establish an audit trail. For example, if
you need to change the department and project, first enter the new department and save the change. Then
go back and change the project.

The Composite Asset may have several cost rows, each for a separate ChartField combination. These
rows are the totals, by ChartField combination, of all the acquisition detail for the associated Composite
Member Assets that have been capitalized into the Composite Asset.

4. Save your changes.

See Chapter 8, "Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets," page 173.

274 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
 Chapter 12

Performing Asset Physical Inventory

This chapter provides an overview of asset physical inventories and discusses how to:

• Set up a physical inventory.

• Define the extract scope, the scan scope, and the physical inventory controls.

• Process a physical inventory.

• View physical inventory history.

Understanding Physical Inventories

This section lists prerequisites and discusses:

• Physical inventory processing steps.

• Physical inventory terminology.

• Hardware and software for physical inventory processing.

Prerequisites
Before you can perform a physical inventory in PeopleSoft Asset Management, all assets must have tag
numbers. They must also belong to a particular department or location, or you must have some other way to
track their whereabouts.

Physical Inventory Processing Steps

These are the steps of physical inventory processing:

1. (Optional) Extract physical inventory asset data from PeopleSoft Asset Management.

PeopleSoft Asset Management provides a physical inventory system that enables you to extract asset data
from the PeopleSoft Asset Management database into a sequential file and then load it into a bar code
scanning device. You can also extract data from third-party information technology (IT) asset discovery
tools. Such discovery tools belong to a class of software that you can use instead of bar coding for
laptops, computers, and other IT equipment. These discovery tools poll the assets over a network and
update a central database.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 275
Performing Asset Physical Inventory Chapter 12

2. (Optional) Use the extracted physical inventory data to generate a sequential file that a bar code scanner
or inventory device can use, and enter the file into the scanner.

Steps 1 and 2 are necessary only if you want to display data from your PeopleSoft Asset Management
database as you scan each asset. The displayed information can include asset IDs, tag numbers, serial
numbers, manufacturers, models, descriptions, departments, locations, and so forth. This asset data can
provide instant information about an asset's history.

3. After you scan assets, load the scanned data into PeopleSoft Asset Management and resolve any duplicate
tag numbers and serial numbers.

4. After you match the physical inventory scan scope to the scanned data, generate physical inventory results
for review.

5. Generate transactions based on the results.

You then load the transactions to reconcile the data in PeopleSoft Asset Management with the physical
inventory results.

6. Delete the physical inventory transactions when you no longer need them.

7. Delete the physical inventory results when you no longer need them.

8. Delete the physical inventory scanned asset data when you no longer need it.

9. (Optional) If you created an extract file, delete that file when you no longer need it.

As an example of how physical inventory is processed, suppose that you are inventorying computer
equipment. An IT discovery tool obtains the physical attributes of a workstation, along with the amount of
installed memory, the type of monitor, the amount of free hard disk space, and the installed software on the
computer. You then load physical inventory data and the physical information gathered by the discovery tool
software into PeopleSoft Asset Management The physical inventory processing determines the assets that
have been added, transferred, or retired. Using these results, you perform matching and generate transactions
to reconcile the data in PeopleSoft Asset Management with the results of the physical inventory.

This diagram shows the process flow of a physical inventory:

Physical inventory process

Physical Inventory Terminology

The following terms are integral to physical inventory processing and reconciliation.

276 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 12 Performing Asset Physical Inventory

Physical Inventory ID A physical inventory control ID you assign within PeopleSoft Asset Management
for each physical inventory that you perform.

Extract scope Set of all assets that you might scan during a physical inventory. This set of
assets is broader than the scan scope. It should include all possible locations,
departments, profiles, cost limits, categories, class types and subtypes for the
assets to be inventoried.

Extract data Data extracted from PeopleSoft Asset Management before you perform the
physical inventory scan. This data should include all assets that you might scan
during the physical inventory scan.

Extract file PeopleSoft Asset Management creates a sequential file of the physical inventory
data collected for each asset. The files are created as random access files when
you enter a tag or serial number. One is sorted by tag number and one is sorted
by serial number.

Physical inventory scan Process of scanning assets with a bar code scanning device, such as a handheld
Palm device that uses solutions from third party vendors.

Physical inventory scan Set of all assets that are defined in PeopleSoft Asset Management as belonging to
scope a particular location or department to be scanned.

Physical inventory scan Data collected by the bar code scanning device during the physical inventory.
data
Mass Change Definition PeopleSoft Asset Management Mass Change functionality is used to define the
extract scope and the scan scope. The mass change definition is a user-defined
extract scope and scan scope. The extract scope includes all assets that might be
scanned during the inventory. The scan scope includes the area of the actualscan.

Overs Any assets that appear in the scanned data but not in the scan scope.

Unders Any assets that appear in the scan scope but not in the scanned data.

Hardware and Software for Physical Inventory Processing

To use the full range of the physical inventory functionality, you need additional hardware and software
beyond the standard PeopleSoft system setup. These requirements are listed here.

Hardware

Here are the additional hardware requirements for physical inventory processing:

Portable bar code A handheld unit that you can use to collect asset data.
reader
Bar code scanning wand A device that you use to physically scan bar codes. The wand is usually
purchased along with the bar code reader.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 277
Performing Asset Physical Inventory Chapter 12

Thermal transfer label A printer for printing labels. If you have a relatively large number of assets (more
printer than 10,000), you should purchase a label printer.

Note. You can integrate the Physical Inventory feature of PeopleSoft Asset Management with virtually any
bar coding hardware.

Software

If you plan to print your own labels, you can use a Windows-based label-printing software package.

To view PeopleSoft Asset Management data on a scanning device while you scan assets, you need to develop
your own application for the scanner or use the program that PeopleSoft Asset Management provides. This
application reads data from the extract file, displays the data to the operator, and records any data that the
operator enters. PeopleSoft has developed a sample application to run on a DOS-based bar code scanner. The
program is written in Microsoft QuickBasic, and you can configure it easily. This application (which
comprises the files PI.BAS and PI.EXE) is packaged with PeopleSoft Asset Management and resides in the
\PI directory.

You need to transfer files between the computer and the bar code scanner. To do this, you can use any
communications application transfers information from a computer to a scanning device.

In addition to (or in lieu of) bar coding, you can use an auto-discovery tool from any that are available on the
market.

Asset Management comes with a number of programs (in the \PI directory) for physical inventory processing
on DOS-based scanners. This table lists these programs:

Program Description

PI.BAS This is the BASIC source code for the scanner application that you use to
perform the physical inventory.

PI.EXE This is the compiled version of PI.BAS that runs on the scanner. You need a
BASIC compiler to generate an executable file if you change this code.

PISORT.BAS This is a BASIC source code program that sorts the sequential extract file that
Asset Management creates. This application creates two random access
files—one that is sorted by tag number (EXT.TAG) and one that is sorted by
serial number (EXT.SER). These files are read by PI.EXE when the user
enters a tag or serial number.

PISORT.EXE This is the compiled version of PISORT.BAS. It is called from the batch file
EXTCOPY.BAT.

278 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 12 Performing Asset Physical Inventory

Program Description

EXTCOPY.BAT This batch file is used to download extract files to the scanner. Edit this file so
that it:
• Calls the communications software to connect to the scanner.

• Calls PISORT to sort the extract file.

• Deletes EXT.TAG and EXT.SER from the scanner.

• Downloads new versions of EXT.TAG and EXT.SER.

You may need to edit EXTCOPY.BAT if you want to copy files to the
appropriate drive on the scanner. This requirement may vary among different
scanning devices.

SCANCOPY.BAT This batch file is used to upload the SCAN.DAT file from the scanner to
\TEMP\SCAN.DAT. You can modify the program to copy the SCAN.DAT
file from the appropriate drive on the scanner.

See Also

Chapter 20, "Processing Asset Mass Changes," page 421

Setting Up a Physical Inventory

To set up a physical inventory in PeopleSoft Asset Management, use the Physical Inventory System Setup
component (PI_SYSTEM_SETUP). This section provides an overview of setting up a physical inventory and
discusses how to set up a physical inventory.

Page Used to Set Up a Physical Inventory

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Physical Inventory/Mass PI_SYSTEM_SETUP Asset Management, Review relationships

Change Physical Inventory, Physical between physical inventory
Inventory/Mass Change, fields and mass change
Physical Inventory/Mass definitions.
Change
Note. Unless you have
altered the physical
inventory system (for
example, by adding fields),
do not change information
on this page.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 279
Performing Asset Physical Inventory Chapter 12

Setting Up a Physical Inventory

Access the Physical Inventory Setup page (Asset Management, Physical Inventory, Physical Inventory/Mass
Change, Physical Inventory/Mass Change).

Physical Inventory/Mass Change page

When you perform step 5 of the physical inventory process (generating physical inventory results), the
Structured Query Report (SQR) AMPI1000 uses data from this page to compare asset field values and
determine the types of transactions that need to be generated. A physical inventory mass change process
(AMIF1000) also uses this page to reload transactions into PeopleSoft Asset Management after the physical
inventory is reconciled.

Note. The information on this page is prepopulated to work with the delivered physical inventory programs.
Modify this page only if you have made alterations to the physical inventory system—for example, by
creating new fields.

Defining the Extract Scope, the Scan Scope, and the Physical
Inventory Controls
To define the extract and scanning scope, and set up the inventory controls for a physical inventory, use the
Physical Inventory component. This section provides an overview of defining the extract scope, the scan
scope, and the physical inventory controls and discusses how to:

• Define the extract scope and the scan scope.

280 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 12 Performing Asset Physical Inventory

• Define physical inventory control parameters.

• Define physical inventory control transaction defaults.

• Set up physical inventory schedule information.

Understanding Extract Scopes and Scan Scopes

Physical inventory matching and reconciliations are based on two separate sets of asset data that you define—
the extract scope and the scan scope. Each of these sets is based on location, department, or both. The first set
is the data that you originally extract from PeopleSoft Asset Management and load into a scanning device.
The extract scope includes all possible locations and departments for the assets to be inventoried. This
enables the bar code scanner to find PeopleSoft Asset Management data for most of the assets that it scans.
Define separate scopes for capital assets, noncapital assets and operating leases.

If you have not performed physical inventory in several years, define a broad extract scope. Because many
assets may have been redistributed in the interim, the extract scope might even include the entire business
unit.

Note. If you are using an IT asset discovery tool only, you do not need to define an extract scope.

The scan scope defines the scope of the actual physical inventory—that is, where the inventory actually
occurs. For example, suppose that you plan to take inventory on the second floor of a five-floor building.
Because the assets may have been redistributed since the last inventory, the extract scope might include assets
on all five floors. However, the scan scope would include only assets on the second floor.

The system compares the scan scope with the actual scanned data when PeopleSoft Asset Management
generates physical inventory results. Any assets that appear in the scan scope but not in the scanned data are
called unders, and they create retirements when you generate transactions. Any assets that appear in the
scanned data but not in the scan scope areovers, and they create physical adds when you generate
transactions. Other differences between the scan scope and the scanned data create transfers and changes in
the assets' nonfinancial information. These assets are assigned the status inventoried.

Pages Used to Define Extract Scopes, Scan Scopes, and Physical Inventory
Controls

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Physical Inventory Control - PI_CNTL_01 Asset Management, Before you extract asset
Definition Physical Inventory, Define data, you must establish a
Inventory Occurrence, physical inventory control
Definition ID within Asset
Management for each
physical inventory that you
perform. Define the
physical inventory ID here.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 281
Performing Asset Physical Inventory Chapter 12

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Physical Inventory Control - PI_CNTL_02 Asset Management, Specify the defaults for any
Transaction Defaults Physical Inventory, Define transactions and asset
Inventory Occurrence, retirements that are
Transaction Defaults generated from the physical
inventory.

Create Schedules PI_SCHEDULE_01 Asset Management, Set up physical inventory

Physical Inventory, Create schedule information. If
Schedules, Create several people perform
Schedules physical inventories
simultaneously at different
locations, you may need to
track the status of each
inventory.

Asset Mass Change MC_DEFN_00 Asset Management, Mass Add or update a mass
Definition - Description Change, Define Criteria change definition.

Asset Mass Change MC_DEFN_01 Asset Management, Mass Specify the mass change
Definition - Criteria and Change, Define Criteria, criteria for selecting rows,
Defaults Criteria and Defaults and identify the columns
and values to be changed.

Asset Mass Change MC_DEFN_AM Asset Management, Mass Complete mass change
Definition - AM Specific Change, Define Criteria, information that is unique to
Fields AM Specific Fields and required by Asset
Management mass changes.

Asset Mass Change MC_DEFN_02 Asset Management, Mass Generate and check the
Definition - Generate SQL Change, Define Criteria, SQL text generated by a
Generate SQL mass change definition
before you run it.

Asset Mass Change MC_DEFN_03 Asset Management, Mass Determine the last time a
Definition - Execution Change, Define Criteria, mass change definition was
History Execution History run and what the specific
input parameters were.

Defining the Extract Scope and the Scan Scope

Access the Asset Mass Change Definition - Description page (Asset Management, Mass Change, Define
Criteria).

Use this page to define the extract scope and the scan scope in PeopleSoft Asset Management. The extract
scope should include all assets that might be scanned during the inventory. The scan scope should include the
area of the actual scan.

Note. You must define a scan scope. An extract scope is necessary only if you want the scanning device to
display asset data from the PeopleSoft Asset Management database as you scan each asset.

282 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 12 Performing Asset Physical Inventory

Because the Physical Inventory functionality of PeopleSoft Asset Management is based on mass changes, you
use the Asset Mass Change functionality to define the extract scope and the scan scope, as described here:

• Access the Asset Mass Change Definition - Description page, by selecting PI Extract (physical inventory
extract) or PI Scan Scope (physical inventory scan scope) as the Mass Change Template ID to specify the
template on which to base this extract scope or scan scope.

The archive ID and archive date are optional on this page. The description that appears is derived from the
mass change template that you select; you can modify the description.

• On the Asset Mass Change Definition - Criteria and Defaults page, select criteria for the inventory scope.

In the Criteria group box, enter the department or location (or both) from which to extract asset data or
define a scan scope. Add rows to select additional departments and locations. You can define these values
explicitly or by using SQL operators. If you leave either the Department or Location Field blank, you
retrieve all possible values for that field.

• You do not need to use the Asset Mass Change Definition - AM Specific Fields page.

The additional parameters this page enables you to specify can be specified on the Physical Inventory
pages.

• On the Asset Mass Change Definition - Generate SQL page, create a SQL statement that is based on the
criteria that you set up on the Asset Mass Change Definition - Criteria and Defaults page.

After you complete the page, save the mass change definition, making sure that the Execute SQL Upon
Saving check box is cleared. Because the Physical Inventory SQR program uses the physical inventory
mass change definitions, they cannot be executed online.

See Also

Chapter 20, "Processing Asset Mass Changes," page 421

Defining Physical Inventory Control Parameters

Access the Define Inventory Occurrence - Definition page (Asset Management, Physical Inventory, Define
Inventory Occurrence).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 283
Performing Asset Physical Inventory Chapter 12

Define Inventory Occurrence - Definition page

Before you extract asset data, you must establish a physical inventory control ID for each physical inventory
that you perform. Specify the Extract and Scan IDs.

Note. Each physical inventory occurrence must have a unique ID. Physical inventory IDs cannot contain
spaces. Use an underscore instead of a space in a physical inventory ID.

Unit Enter the business unit for which you want to conduct an inventory. If you are
using an IT asset discovery tool, you can process all business units by leaving the
Unit field blank, or you can process a single business unit by making a business
unit selection.

Book Name Enter a Book Name to process assets for physical inventory that were added to a
book other than the one that is designated as the current default book value on the
AM Business Unit Definition page. If you leave the Book Name blank, the
system uses the current default book value from the AM Business Unit Definition
page. In this way, if you change your designated default book value on the AM
Business Unit Definition page, you can create a separate Physical Inventory ID to
process those assets in physical inventory that were added with the old default
book value.

Start Date and End Date Enter dates for information purposes only; these are not used for processing the
data.

Last Step This page indicates the last step that you performed in the current physical
inventory. Refer to this page to ensure that you perform all steps in the proper
sequence.

284 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 12 Performing Asset Physical Inventory

Capital Extract ID Enter the mass change definition that the system uses to extract asset data for
capital assets from Asset Management.

Non Capital Extract ID Enter the mass change definition that the system uses to extract asset data for
(non capital extract) noncapital assets from Asset Management.

Oper Lease Extract ID Enter the mass change definition that the system uses to extract asset data for
operating leases from Asset Management.

Capital Scan ID Enter the mass change definition that the system uses to define the scope of this
physical inventory—that is, the set of capital assets to be scanned.

Non Capital Scan ID Enter the mass change definition that the system uses to define the scope of this
physical inventory - the set of noncapital assets to be scanned.

Oper Lease Scan ID Enter the mass change definition that the system uses to define the scope of this
(operating lease scan) physical inventory - the operating leased assets to be scanned.

Note. You can supply any or all three mass change values for extract and scan (capital, noncapital and
operating lease). This provides the ability to define different filtering criteria for each.

Defining the Physical Inventory Control Transaction Defaults

Access the Physical Inventory Control - Transaction Defaults page (Asset Management, Physical Inventory,
Define Inventory Occurrence, Transaction Defaults).

Physical Inventory Control - Transaction Defaults page

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 285
Performing Asset Physical Inventory Chapter 12

Auto Approval

Approve Select this check box to have the system automatically approve the transactions
that are generated from the inventory. PeopleSoft strongly recommends that you
review and approve all transactions that are generated during the physical
inventory process before you load them into PeopleSoft Asset Management.

Transactions Enabled

Use the check boxes in this group box to select the types of transactions that you want to generate. For
instance, you may not want the results of the physical inventory to generate any financial transactions. In such
cases, you would clear the Transfers and Retirementscheck boxes. Select from the following types of
transactions:

Non-Financial Adds Select that the results of the physical inventory generate nonfinancial additions.

Operating Lease Select that the results of the physical inventory generate nonfinancial retirements.
Retirement This triggers the mass change associated with this transaction type as a result of
nonfinancial unders.

Retirements Select that the results of the physical inventory generate unders.

Transfers Select that the results of the physical inventory generate transfers.

Operating Lease Select that the results of the physical inventory generate operating lease transfers.
Transfer(operating lease This triggers the mass change associated with this transaction type when a
transfers) discrepancy occurs between the stored and the scanned department records.

Physical Asset Changes Select that the results of the physical inventory generate physical asset changes
This includes changes in the custodian department.

Asset Updates Select that the results of the physical inventory generate any asset updates.

Non-Capital Transfer Select that the results of the physical inventory generate non capital transfers.
(non capital transfers) This triggers the mass change associated with this transaction type when a
discrepancy occurs between the stored and the scanned department records.

Transaction Defaults

Transaction Date, The current date will display by default in the Transaction Date and Accounting
Accounting Date, and Date fields. You may override these and enter a transaction code as needed.
Transaction Code
User ID Enter the user ID of the person who performs the physical inventory.

286 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 12 Performing Asset Physical Inventory

Interface ID and Open By default, the system populates the Interface ID and Open Transaction ID fields
Transaction ID with the next available values. When you process the generated transactions
using the Transaction Loader, (AMIF1000) refer to the interface ID on this page.
You can use the open transaction ID to locate depreciation open transactions that
are created as a result of the physical inventory.

Retirement Defaults

Disposal Code Select the method for retiring assets.

Retirement Convention Select to indicate how you want to prorate retired assets.

Retire Option Select one of the following retirement options:

• Calculate Gain/Loss

• Fully Depr no Future Expense

• Fully Depr with Future Expense

Voluntary Conversion Select to identify whether the retirement takes place for intended or unintended
reasons. Options are Voluntary and Involuntary for the retirement default.

Type Select Ordinary or Extraordinaryto define the types of retirements that you
generate.

Setting Up Physical Inventory Schedule Information

Access the Create Schedules page (Asset Management, Physical Inventory, Create Schedules, Create
Schedules).

Create Schedules page

Schedule ID Set up one Schedule ID or as many unique IDs as you like. For instance, if you
have several branches, you might want a separate schedule for each branch. Enter
an informative description for each Schedule ID.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 287
Performing Asset Physical Inventory Chapter 12

Start Date and End Date You can leave the end date field blank until the inventory has actually been
completed.

PI ID(physical inventory You can enter a code to identify the physical inventory by date, location, or some
ID) and PI Leader other identifier. You may also assign a physical inventory leader.
(physical inventory
leader)

Note. Scheduling information is not used in any physical inventory processing. It is informational only.

Processing a Physical Inventory

This section discusses how to:

• (Optional) Extract asset data (step 1).

• (Optional) View the results of the extract.

• (Optional) Create an extract file (step 2).

• Load asset inventory data (step 3).

• Find duplicate tags.

• Find duplicate serial numbers.

• Generate physical inventory results (step 4).

• Review physical inventory results.

• Generate physical inventory transactions (step 5).

• Delete physical inventory transactions (step 6).

• Delete physical inventory results (step 7).

• Delete physical inventory scanned data (step 8).

• (Optional) Delete an extract file (step 9).

After you define the extract scope, the scan scope, the physical inventory control ID, and the physical
inventory schedule, you can extract data from PeopleSoft Asset Management tables. When the extract is
complete, you can use the extract data in subsequent steps of the physical inventory process.

In order to process physical inventory, you must execute each step in its proper order. For each step, enter the
physical inventory ID and select the type of export or import output that you want—for example, comma-
separated values (CSV) file, generate labels, scanner file, or web service. If you are generating an output file,
you also need to provide a file name.

288 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 12 Performing Asset Physical Inventory

Note. Because steps 2 and 3 require writing and reading files, you should run the AM_PIJOB, which consists
of the AMPI1000 SQR program and AM_PIWS_RUN Application Engine program that are executed in
parallel for these steps from the file location. For example, if you are writing and reading files from
c:\temp\file.txt or c:\temp\scan.dat, you would run the process on the client. If you are
writing and reading files from a directory on the PeopleSoft Internet Architecture server, run the process on
that server.

Pages Used to Process Physical Inventory

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Load/Match/Reconcile PI RUN_AMPI1000 Asset Management, Execute each step of the

Info Physical Inventory, Physical Inventory process.
Load/Match/Reconcile PI It is recommended that you
Info, Load/Match/Reconcile add a new run control ID
PI Info for each physical inventory
control ID (PI ID). Also use
this run control ID for
subsequent steps within the
same PI ID.

Review Extracted Data PI_EXTRACT_01 Asset Management, (Optional) View the results
Physical Inventory, Review of the extract data one asset
Extracted Data, Review at a time. You can also
Extracted Data search by PI line number,
asset ID, department, tag
number, serial ID, and
location. The PI line
number reflects the number
of this asset in the extract
sequence. For instance, the
third asset that was
extracted falls on PI Line
Number 3. The system
presents you with all the
assets that match your
criteria. Select the one you
want to view.

Note. You can run the

report AMPI2000 to list all
the information that has
been extracted. Run this
from the Physical Inventory
Reports page.

Scanned Data PI_SCAN_01 Asset Management, Verify scanned data for the
Physical Inventory, Verify Physical Inventory ID.
Scanned Data

Duplicate Tags PI_SCAN_DUP_TAG Asset Management, Conduct searches for

Physical Inventory, Verify finding and correcting
Duplicate Tags physical inventory data.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 289
Performing Asset Physical Inventory Chapter 12

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Duplicate Serials PI_SCAN_DUP Asset Management, Conduct searches for

Physical Inventory, Verify finding and correcting
Duplicate Serial ID physical inventory data.

Results PI_RESULTS_01 Asset Management, View the results of the

Physical Inventory, Review matching process.
Matching Results

Details PI_RESULTS_02 Asset Management, View the original and

Physical Inventory, Review scanned data.
Matching Results, Details
Note. You can run reports
that list inventoried assets
(AMPI2200), unders
(AMPI2210), and overs
(AMPI2220).

Extracting Asset Data (Step 1)

Access the Load/Match/Reconcile PI Info page (Asset Management, Physical Inventory,
Load/Match/Reconcile PI Info, Load/Match/Reconcile PI Info).

Load/Match/Reconcile PI Info page

290 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 12 Performing Asset Physical Inventory

This step executes the actual data extract from PeopleSoft Asset Management. When you extract data, you do
not need to enter a file name or file type. The data is saved in a relational table called PI_EXTRACT. Click
the Extract button and click the Run button. If you want to view the extract data before using it in subsequent
steps, access the Extract Data page.

Viewing the Results of the Extract

Access the Review Extracted Data page (Asset Management, Physical Inventory, Review Extracted Data,
Review Extracted Data).

View the extract data one asset at a time. You can search by Physical Inventory ID, PI line number, asset ID, ,
tag number, , and location. The PI line number reflects the number of this asset in the extract sequence. For
instance, the third asset that was extracted falls on PI Line Number 3. The system presents you with all the
assets that match your criteria. Select the one you want to view.

Review Extracted Data page

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 291
Performing Asset Physical Inventory Chapter 12

Creating an Extract File (Step 2)

Access the Load/Match/Reconcile PI Info page. (Asset Management, Physical Inventory,
Load/Match/Reconcile PI Info, Load/Match/Reconcile PI Info). This step creates an output file from the
extract data.

Export/Import Select CSV for a comma-separated values (CSV) file.

Select Scanner File as the import or export file type, and enter a file name (as
well as any additional path information) for the file that you want to generate.
The output file is formatted for loading into a bar code scanning device in
preparation for performing physical inventory.
To create a file for printing labels rather than performing inventory, select
Generate Labelsas the export or import file type. A label file is created for the
printer in a different format from the one used for a scanning device.
To generate files for both a scanning device and a printer, perform step 2 twice
with a different output file type each time.
Select Web Service to use the Integration Broker web service option to load the
physical inventory data. This happens without any input or initiation. As soon as
an inbound XML message is received from the third party vendor, the associated
handler loads the scanned data.

Note. When using the web service option, remember to supply the file size for
chunking on the Asset Management Installation Options page. This specifies the
chunk size for the message GET_PIDATA. See PeopleSoft Enterprise
Application Fundamentals PeopleBook, Setting Installation Options for
PeopleSoft Applications,

Gen Extr File (generate Click this button and then click the Run button.
extract file)

Note. The EXTCOPY.BAT file is configured to copy the extract file to the A:\ drive for demonstration or
quick overview purposes. You need to modify EXTCOPY.BAT if you want to copy the extract file to the
appropriate drive on a scanner.

Copy the scanner program (PI.EXE) and scanner file to the MS-DOS based scanning device. You can easily
do this using a communications software package. You may wish to use a certified integration solution
provided by recommended software vendors. Consult the bar code scanning device manual and software
vendor for more information.

Once you have loaded the extract file and scanner program into the inventory-scanning device, you can
perform the physical inventory. Each time that you scan an asset that is included in the extract file, the
scanner displays the asset's information, such as tag number, description, serial ID, asset ID, and custodian.
For the asset that you scan, you can retain or modify the values displayed on the scanner.

While you are performing the physical inventory scan, the scanning device creates a sequential file that
contains information on all the scanned assets. The next step is to load the scanned file into PeopleSoft Asset
Management for review.

292 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 12 Performing Asset Physical Inventory

Note. The files EXTCOPY.BAT and PI.EXE reside in the \PI directory. EXTCOPY.BAT is no longer
supported, but it may be useful for a quick overview of the process.

Review the section on hardware requirements for further information about bar code scanners and methods of
moving data to and from scanning devices.

If you are using an IT asset discovery tool from a third party vendor , you need to run a gateway extract so
that you have a file to load into PeopleSoft Asset Management.

Loading Asset Inventory Data (Step 3)

Access the Load/Match/Reconcile PI Info page (Asset Management, Physical Inventory,
Load/Match/Reconcile PI Info, Load/Match/Reconcile PI Info).

After completing the physical inventory with the scanning system, download the scanner data into a
workstation or network server so that it can be converted back into a PeopleSoft Asset Management table
called PI_SCAN. You do this using a communications software package or by using the certified integration
solution provided by various software vendors. Consult the bar code scanning device manual or software
vendor for more information.

Note. PeopleSoft Asset Management provides an unsupported file called SCANCOPY.BAT (found in the \PI
directory) that can be edited to copy the SCAN.DAT file from the scanner to the computer. You may need to
modify the copy statement in SCANCOPY.BAT so that it copies from the drive letter corresponding to the
scanner's drive. This is similar to the modification that you may need to make to EXTCOPY.BAT.

Once the scanner files are available to load into Asset Management, you can run step 3 of the physical
inventory process.

Enter the directory and file name of the inventory file. This is most likely \TEMP\SCAN.DAT. If located on
the PeopleSoft Internet Architecture server, you can run the next process on the server.

Click the Load Scan File button and click the Run button to load the scan data into PeopleSoft Asset
Management. You can load as many files as you need by renaming SCAN.DAT (during the bar code
scanning process) with unique file names and loading each file separately.

Note. If you have written your own scanning program or modified PI.BAS to configure fields or field lengths,
you need to update the file formats in AMPI1000.SQC to match.

Finding Duplicate Tags

Access the Verify Duplicate Tags page (Asset Management, Physical Inventory, Verify Duplicate Tags,
Verify Duplicate Tags).

It is very common for an asset to be scanned multiple times during physical inventory, thus creating more
than one entry with the same tag or serial number. In order for PeopleSoft Asset Management to perform
inventory reconciliation, each tag or serial number must be unique. Therefore, it is extremely important that
you identify and resolve any duplicate entries. If any duplicate entries exist when results are generated, these
entries are marked as errors and are not processed any further.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 293
Performing Asset Physical Inventory Chapter 12

Verify Duplicate Tags page

You can search on a tag and a physical inventory line number. The physical inventory line number reflects
the number of this asset in the scanning sequence. For instance, the third asset that was scanned falls on
physical inventory line number 3.

If duplicates exist, the system displays a page on which you can correct or delete assets that have duplicate
numbers.

The IP Alias and IP Address fields describe the internet protocol attributes of IT assets that are extracted from
the IT discovery tools database.

Finding Duplicate Serial Numbers

Access the Verify Duplicate Serial ID page (Asset Management, Physical Inventory, Verify Duplicate Serial
ID, Verify Duplicate Serial ID).

294 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 12 Performing Asset Physical Inventory

Verify Duplicate Serial ID page

The Duplicate Serial Number page is similar to the Duplicate Tags page except that you are reviewing created
records that have a duplicate Serial ID number.

Generating Physical Inventory Results (Step 4)

Access the Load/Match/Reconcile PI Info page.

After the inventory data is loaded into Asset Management, you clean up the data. Then you can run step 4,
which performs matching between a physical inventory scan scope and scanned data and creates physical
inventory results for review.

Note. Before you generate results, you should use the Verify Duplicate Tags page and Verify Duplicate Serial
ID page to clean up any possible errors in the scanned data.

File Name You can leave this field blank for this step.

Gen Results (generate Click the Gen Results button and click the Run button to initiate processing.
results) and Run Note that this step may take some time to complete due to the amount of
information that must be processed.
Because this step involves some complex processing, you may want to have your
database administrator optimize the database before you execute the step.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 295
Performing Asset Physical Inventory Chapter 12

Reviewing Physical Inventory Results

Access the Results page (Asset Management, Physical Inventory, Review Matching Results, Results).

Results page

The PI Match Status (physical inventory match status) field displays an asset's physical inventory status when
results are generated and matching is performed. An asset can have one of the following statuses:

Status Reason Transactions Generated

Accel NA NA

All I, O, U

Discard

Initial

Inventory Asset was scanned during inventory as Transfers and physical changes
expected. (description, location,
department, custodian, and so
on).

296 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 12 Performing Asset Physical Inventory

Status Reason Transactions Generated

None

Over Asset was scanned but not expected. Physical adds.

Special

Under Asset was expected but not scanned. Retirements.

Manual Review This check box is selected if the scanner operator requested a special review for
Required this asset.

Results in Error This check box is selected if the physical inventory processing cannot process a
result further. Four error conditions may apply:
• Duplicate tags.

If any duplicate tags still exist in the scanned data, the results generated for
those duplicates contain errors.

• Multiple sets of ChartFields.

If an asset has multiple sets of ChartFields (that is, the cost is divided
between two departments), an error results. Physical inventory processing
cannot handle such assets.

• Asset retired.

An asset recorded as Retired in Asset Management was scanned. Physical

inventory processing doesn't process reinstatements automatically. Complete
these in the Retiring Financial Assets component.

• InterUnit candidate.

A scanned tag was found for an asset in a business unit other than the one for
which you're processing physical inventory. You should transfer it from that
business unit to the physical inventory business unit. Physical inventory
processing doesn't perform interunit transfers automatically. Complete these
in the Asset Cost Adjust/Transfers component.

These errors are exceptions to the rule and should not occur frequently or in
high volumes. Results that are in error do not generate transactions and
should be resolved manually.

Results Notification

If you use Workflow, this section contains fields that are used in workflow processing to generate automatic
physical inventory results notifications. These can be sent to a worklist, an email address, or both.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 297
Performing Asset Physical Inventory Chapter 12

Generating Physical Inventory Transactions (Step 5)

Access the Load/Match/Reconcile PI Info page (Asset Management, Physical Inventory,
Load/Match/Reconcile PI Info, Load/Match/Reconcile PI Info).

After matching is performed, you create physical inventory transactions that reconcile the data in Asset
Management with the results of the physical inventory.

Enter the PI ID (physical inventory ID), click the Gen Trans (generate transactions) button, and click the Run
button to begin generating the transactions.

Because this step involves some complex processing, you may want to have the database administrator
optimize the database before you run it.

Note. This step takes the longest time to process, so be sure that you are satisfied with the generated results
before you load the transactions. You can see the results of the matching process by reviewing the Results
page and the Results Detail page.

After you have created, reviewed, and approved the reconciliation transactions, you load them by using the
Interface Asset Information component and the Transaction Loader.

Deleting Physical Inventory Transactions (Step 6)

Access the Load/Match/Reconcile PI Info page (Asset Management, Physical Inventory,
Load/Match/Reconcile PI Info, Load/Match/Reconcile PI Info).

When you no longer need your physical inventory transactions, click the Del Trans (delete transactions)
button and click the Run button.

Deleting Physical Inventory Results (Step 7)

Access the Load/Match/Reconcile PI Info page (Asset Management, Physical Inventory,
Load/Match/Reconcile PI Info, Load/Match/Reconcile PI Info).

When you no longer need your physical inventory results, click the Delete Res (delete results) button and
click the Run button.

Deleting Physical Inventory Scanned Data (Step 8)

Access the Physical Inventory page (Asset Management, Physical Inventory, Load/Match/Reconcile PI Info).

When you no longer need your physical inventory scanned data, click the Delete Scan button and click the
Run button.

Deleting an Extract File (Step 9)

Access the Load/Match/Reconcile PI Info page (Asset Management, Physical Inventory,
Load/Match/Reconcile PI Info, Load/Match/Reconcile PI Info).

298 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 12 Performing Asset Physical Inventory

When you no longer need your physical inventory extract file, click the Delete Ext (delete extract) button and
click the Run button.

Viewing Physical Inventory History

This section lists the pages used to view physical inventory history.

Pages Used to View Physical Inventory History

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Review Inventory History PI_ASSET_HIST1 Asset Management, View a history of all the
Physical Inventory, Review instances that an asset has
Inventory History, Review been inventoried by PI ID,
Inventory History Inventory date and user.

Run Physical Inventory RUN_AMPI2000 Asset Management, Generate physical inventory

Reports Physical Inventory, Run reports, specifying Physical
Physical Inventory Reports, Inventory ID, location and
Run Physical Inventory department.
Reports

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 299
 Chapter 13

Working with Joint Venture Asset

Processing
This chapter provides an overview of joint venture processing and discusses how to:

• Add and maintain joint venture assets.

• Change ownership allocations for existing joint ventures.

Understanding Joint Venture Processing

The Joint Venture Processing feature of PeopleSoft Asset Management enables you to accurately track
finances when two or more business units share in the ownership of an asset or a group of assets. To use this
feature, you must set up a Joint Venture Business Unit, identify business units that participate in the joint
venture, and associate all of the business units with their respective equities.

The following graphic illustrates the relationship between a joint venture business unit and its participants. A
joint venture business unit owns 100 percent of all joint venture assets. Participating business units are each
assigned an equity percentage of the jointly owned assets. When you add, adjust, or retire an asset at the joint
venture business unit level, similar transactions take place at the participant level, with cost and depreciation
prorated according to each participant's equity percentage.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 301
Working with Joint Venture Asset Processing Chapter 13

Joint venture processing

Equity percentages are defined in the Joint Venture Allocation table when you set up the PeopleSoft Asset
Management tables. The sum of the participants' percentages must equal 100 percent. Equity percentages are
allotted to participating business units according to the values you enter in the joint venture allocation table.

This allocation table sets up joint venture processing for Participants 1, 2, and 3, which own 60 percent, 20
percent, and 20 percent of the joint venture assets, respectively:

Business Unit Percentage

Joint Venture Business Unit 100

Participant 1 60

Participant 2 20

Participant 3 20

Most transactions on joint venture assets are performed at the Joint Venture Business Unit level. These
transactions are automatically performed at the participant level as well, with cost, fair market and
depreciation information prorated based on each participant's equity percentage.

For example, asset ID JV00022 was entered for the Joint Venture Business Unit. With USD 10,000 of
remaining value and USD 2,000 in accumulated depreciation, these assets are created based on the previous
allocation table:

302 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 13 Working with Joint Venture Asset Processing

Unit Asset ID Book Remaining Value Accumulated

Depreciation

Joint Venture JV000022 CORP 10,000 2,000

Business Unit

NA NA FEDERAL 10,000 2,000

Participant 1 JV000022 CORP 6,000 1,200

FEDERAL 6,000 1,200

Participant 2 JV000022 CORP 2,000 400

FEDERAL 2,000 400

Participant 3 JV000022 CORP 2,000 400

FEDERAL 2,000 400

Adds,Adjusts, and Retirements must take place at the Joint Venture Business Unit level. Changes in
ownership allocation—such as additions and deletions of participants and reallocations of equity
percentages—must be made at the Joint Venture Participant level.

Prerequisites for Joint Venture Processing

Joint Venture Processing requires setup steps that you need to follow to use this feature. These steps must be
completed in the correct order so that subsequent options are available for selection.

To set up joint venture processing:

1. Select Set Up Financials/Supply Chain, Install, Installation Options, Asset Management and select the
Joint Venture Processing check box on the Installation Options - Asset Management page.

2. Select Set Up Financials/Supply Chain, Business Unit Related, Assets, Asset Management Definition and
define at least one Joint Venture Business Unit on the PeopleSoft AM Business Unit Definition page.

The option to define a Joint Venture Business Unit is active only if you enabled Joint Venture Processing
in step 1.

3. Create one business unit for each participant in the joint venture relationship to establish Joint Venture
Processing.

These are standard business units and there are no additional steps to perform. Profiles for joint venture
participant business units must have the same Profile ID as the joint venture business unit.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 303
Working with Joint Venture Asset Processing Chapter 13

4. Associate the Joint Venture Participants with a particular Joint Venture Business Unit and define the
percentage of asset ownership allocated to each participant to complete the last step in establishing Joint
Venture Processing.

Do this by setting up a Joint Venture Allocation table for each Joint Venture Business Unit.

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing PeopleSoft
Asset Management Business Units"

Adding and Maintaining Joint Venture Assets

Most transactions on joint venture assets are performed at the Joint Venture Business Unit level. These
include asset acquisitions, cost adjustments, retirements, and intrabusiness unit transfers (for example,
transfers from one department, product, project, or category to another within the same business unit).

Note. InterUnit transfer of joint venture assets is not available or supported.

Joint venture asset transactions are executed just as they are for any non-joint venture asset with no special
steps to take. However, it is recommended that you establish a naming convention to distinguish assets that
are shared by a joint venture. For example, you might assign a joint venture asset an asset ID that begins with
the letters JV.

Joint venture asset transactions are automatically executed at the participant level as well, with cost and
depreciation information prorated based on each participant's equity percentage. Acquisition detail table
entries are not prorated. Any change in the ownership allocation of joint venture assets (ownership transfers)
must be performed at the joint venture participant level.

Changing Ownership Allocations for Existing Joint Ventures

You must define and run a mass change to change the ownership allocation of assets in an existing joint
venture. The Joint Venture Allocation table affects only newly added assets, which means that changes made
to the allocation table do not affect existing joint venture assets.

Additions and deletions of participants and reallocations of equity percentages are recorded as sales
transactions. This results in either a gain or a loss on the part of the selling participant. The value of the sale
proceeds for the selling participants is recorded as the capital cost incurred by the buying participants.

PeopleSoft Asset Management processes these changes by retiring some portion of the equity percentage
from the selling participant (to calculate gain/loss) and then transferring percentages between business units
until the desired ownership ratio is achieved. The mass change transfers an established amount of the asset
cost and quantity from one business unit to another (a one-to-one transfer). Because of this, you may need to
run the mass change multiple times (up to the number of participating business units minus 1) to effect the
desired change. For instance, if you have three original participants and want to add another, you might run
the mass change three times: between business units 1 and 4, 2 and 4, and 3 and 4.

304 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 13 Working with Joint Venture Asset Processing

Defining a Mass Change for Joint Venture Processing

To change the ownership allocation of assets in an existing joint venture, PeopleSoft Asset Management is
delivered with these joint venture mass change templates:

Mass Change Template Description

JVA-Joint Venture BU Addition Adds a joint venture participant.

JVP-Joint Vent BU Add (w/Prof) Adds a joint venture participant using book values from
the new business unit's profile ID.

JVR-Joint Venture BU Removal Removes a joint venture participant.

JVT-JV Allocation Change Transfers the allocation percentages for a joint venture
from one business unit to another.

Note. After you run these changes, it is a good idea to update the allocation table to reflect the new equity
percentages. Joint venture mass changes do not affect Joint Venture Allocation tables, and you must change
these tables to reflect the updated joint ventures.

In addition to selecting the appropriate mass change template, make other selections that are specific to joint
venture processing. PeopleSoft Asset Management requires a Transaction Date and an Accounting Date.

Depending on the joint venture mass change template you select, you may also need to select a set of default
values for some or all of these fields:

Joint Venture Business Value is inserted into INTFC_FIN table.

Unit to Add to
Percentage of Cost Enter a decimal value—for example, enter 0.50 for 50 percent.

Disposal Code Choose a disposal code from the available options. Disposal codes are fully
described in Retiring Assets.

Total Proceeds Enter 0 if there are none.

Percentage of Quantity Enter a decimal value—for example, enter 0.50 for 50 percent.

Total Removal Cost Enter 0 if there is none.

Retirement Type Enter either Extraordinary or Ordinary to indicate how the gain or loss that
results from a retirement should be reported. This is for information only.

Retirement Convention Select a retirement convention. This indicates how depreciation will be
calculated through retirement.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 305
Working with Joint Venture Asset Processing Chapter 13

Voluntary/Involuntary Enter either Voluntary or Involuntary to indicate the reason for a retirement. This
is for information only.

See Chapter 20, "Processing Asset Mass Changes," page 421.

Adding a Joint Venture Participant

The Mass Change application engine program adds a joint venture participant business unit to an existing
joint venture and performs these additional functions:

• Retires an established percentage of cost and quantity from one business unit and its books by using the
defaults you specify for the retirement.

• Adds the same percentage of cost and quantity to the new business unit and its books by using the
proceeds you specify for the retirement.

When defining the mass change, select JVA-Joint Venture BU Addition as the Mass Change Template used to
add a joint venture participant. If you want to use book values from the profile ID of the new participant
business unit, select the JVP-Joint Vent BU Add (w/Prof) mass change template.

In Execution Sequence 1, select the book or books from which you want to retire a portion of assets. Specify
the Joint Venture Business Unit from which you want to retire assets so that these values can be applied to the
new participant business unit.

In Execution Sequence 2, enter default values for the mass change.

Note. Before adding a business unit to an existing joint venture, that business unit must be fully established.

Removing a Joint Venture Participant

When Mass Change removes a joint venture participant business unit from an existing joint venture, it also
performs these functions:

• Retires the total cost and quantity from one business unit and its books, using the defaults you specify for
the retirement.

• Adds that cost and quantity to another business unit and its books, using the proceeds you specify for the
retirement.

When defining the mass change, select JVA-Joint Venture BU Removal as the Mass Change Template used to
remove a joint venture participant.

In Execution Sequence 1, select the book or books that you want to remove. Specify the Joint Venture
Participant Business Unit you want to remove.

In Execution Sequence 2, enter default values for the mass change.

Changing Joint Venture Ownership Allocations

When the Mass Change process changes ownership allocations for an existing joint venture, it also performs
these functions:

306 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 13 Working with Joint Venture Asset Processing

• Retires a percentage of the cost and quantity from one business unit and its books, using the defaults
specified for the retirement.

• Adds that same percentage of cost and quantity to another business unit and its books, using the proceeds
specified for the retirement.

When defining the mass change, select JVT-JV Allocation Change as the Mass Change Template used to
change joint venture ownership allocations.

In Execution Sequence 1, select the department or departments from which you want to transfer joint venture
assets. Specify the Joint Venture Business Unit from which you want to transfer assets.

In Execution Sequence 2, enter default values for the mass change.

Loading Joint Venture Transactions

After you run a joint venture mass change, use the Transaction Loader to load results of the mass change into
the PeopleSoft Asset Management tables.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Integrating
PeopleSoft Asset Management with Other Products," Running the Transaction Loader.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 307
 Chapter 14

Processing Asset Depreciation

This chapter lists prerequisites, provides overviews of depreciation processing and depreciation of group
assets, and discusses how to:

• Process depreciation.

• Expand depreciation by period.

• Create pending depreciation transactions.

• View depreciation-related information.

• Adjust accumulated depreciation.

• Run depreciation reports.

Prerequisites
Before you begin to depreciate assets, you must set them up with required depreciation attributes.

You must set up the following attributes:

• Depreciation method.

• Prorate convention.

• Depreciable basis.

• Estimated useful life.

• Placed-in-service date.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing
PeopleSoft Asset Management Business Units."

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing Asset
Processing," Setting Up Asset Profiles.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up
Depreciation Processing."

See Chapter 5, "Adding and Maintaining Assets," page 45.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 309
Processing Asset Depreciation Chapter 14

Understanding Depreciation Processing

PeopleSoft Asset Management can calculate depreciation for more than 18,000 different scenarios, depending
on the depreciation attributes that you select. Most standard depreciation methods and prorate conventions are
delivered, along with functionality for you to define your own depreciation methods and prorate conventions.
In the United States, PeopleSoft Asset Management calculates tax credits and tax credit recapture. Standard
depreciation reports are provided, as well as reports that enable you to comply with the U.S. Tax 40% Rule,
the U.S. Alternative Minimum Tax (AMT), and the U.S. Adjusted Current Earnings (ACE). Outside the U.S.,
PeopleSoft Asset Management provides depreciation methods that are commonly used in Europe, Australia,
India, and Japan, as well as other methods that are used globally.

PeopleSoft Asset Management calculates the annual depreciation based on the asset's life, depreciable cost
basis, placed-in-service date, and any depreciation limits that you specify. You can set up required
depreciation attributes on three levels: You can enter them in your business unit books, define them when you
set up asset profiles, or specify them when you add assets to the system.

When you set up your business unit books, specify whether each book is a financial book, a tax book, or a
financial book with tax information. This specification acts as a filter, enabling you to select options that
correspond to the book type that you specified. For example, if you define a book as a tax book in the U.S.,
PeopleSoft Asset Management does not allow you to select depreciation attributes that are not supported by
U.S. federal tax code.

Asset profiles function as templates. They provide a quick way to enter asset information, especially
depreciation criteria. Rather than enter the book, method, convention, life, and tax credit information each
time that you add an asset, you can use the asset profile to supply that information by default. When you enter
assets, specify the profile ID. If any depreciation information in the profile does not apply, you can override
it.

You can also specify depreciation attributes as you add assets to PeopleSoft Asset Management. Do this if the
asset profile does not contain the depreciation criteria that you want for the asset. If you use more than one
book, specify the depreciation criteria for each book.

To ensure correct depreciation processing, the PeopleSoft detail calendar that you use must include at least
five years prior to the life of the oldest asset. For example, if the life of the oldest asset began on January 1,
2000, your calendar must begin no later than January 1, 1995. These prior periods are required for correct
depreciation processing.

Build detail calendars beyond the end depreciation date of the asset as well. When you do this, the system
calculates depreciation over the longer period correctly for any added assets that have a longer than usual
service life. If any short tax years are contained within this five-year period, create a calendar of more than
five years to ensure correct depreciation.

If you use a depreciation method that relies on tables specifying the percentage of depreciation that is
expensed for each period, review the delivered depreciation schedules. If you use depreciation schedules that
are different from those delivered, you must add a schedule with the appropriate percentages for each in-
service period for each year of life.

PeopleSoft Asset Management provides all standard prorate conventions. In addition, it enables you to build
new conventions based on calendars and to copy conventions from one setID to another as appropriate.

310 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 14 Processing Asset Depreciation

Note. PeopleSoft Asset Management enables you to change both depreciation conventions and schedules as
you deem necessary. If you change either the schedule or convention, you get a warning that the convention
and the schedule do not agree. When you save your change, PeopleCode changes the convention or the
schedule for you. The depreciation will calculate correctly whether you enter a change to schedule or
convention and in either order.

Steps for Processing Depreciation

Follow these steps to process depreciation:

1. Run the Depreciation Calculation Application Engine process (AM_DEPR_CALC).

2. Review open transactions.

3. Change depreciation attributes and expand periods as needed.

4. Review the depreciation processing results for errors.

5. Create pending depreciation transactions.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 311
Processing Asset Depreciation Chapter 14

6. Create period depreciation accounting entries.

When you have completed processing depreciation, you must go on to create accounting entries for the
period depreciation. Before you create any accounting entries, check the processing options to determine
whether the system runs processes automatically or whether you must schedule processing.

To create period depreciation accounting entries:

• Determine which periods are open to ensure that depreciation is expensed to the correct period.

To verify periods, use the Establish Business Units component, and access the Asset Management
Definition page. Click the Update Open Periods link to review open and closed periods on the Open
Period Update page.

If the open periods show that the current accounting period is open, you can create period depreciation
accounting entries. If not, you must close the prior period manually and open the current period before
creating period depreciation accounting entries.

• Account for any depreciation that is allowed for time during which an asset was not established in
PeopleSoft Asset Management.

When you acquire assets (or place assets in service) during one accounting period but add them to
PeopleSoft Asset Management during a different accounting period, you need to account for any
depreciation that is allowed for the time during which the asset was not established in PeopleSoft
Asset Management. You can do this by adjusting the transaction and accounting dates.

Typically, the transaction date represents the date that you actually acquired the asset and the
accounting date represents the date that you begin expensing depreciation. The accounting date is
validated against the open periods for PeopleSoft Asset Management that are stored in the
FIN_OPEN_PERIOD table to determine the period to which it is expensed. The difference between
the transaction date and the accounting date determine whether any prior period depreciation needs to
be calculated. For example, suppose that a computer was acquired and placed in service on March 15,
2005, but the information was not entered into PeopleSoft Asset Management until August 1, 2005.
All periods prior to August are closed. PeopleSoft Asset Management automatically calculates
depreciation starting in March, and it reflects this depreciation in the August period. When period
depreciation accounting entries are created for August, they will reflect all depreciation activity since
March.

Note. This is the only time life-to-date calculations take place without being selected.

• Create accounting entries for the amount that you enter during the Add process for assets with
accumulated depreciation.

When you add an asset with accumulated depreciation, you can create accounting entries for the
amount that you enter during the Add process. When the asset has been added, accumulated
depreciation is updated each time that you create new period depreciation accounting entries.

312 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 14 Processing Asset Depreciation

• Set up the depreciation allocation calendar.

The amount of depreciation that you can expense for each period depends on how you set up your
calendar. You can define the periods as months. When you set up your calendar, specify the year, the
number of periods in each year, the beginning and ending date of each period, and the name of each
period. For example, if you use a monthly calendar, the first period might be called January or April.

You also specify the portion of depreciation to be allocated for each period. For example, if you use a
monthly calendar, you can specify that 1/12 of the annual depreciation amount is allocated to each
period.

• Close accounting periods.

When you have created accounting entries for depreciation for an accounting period, you must close
it.

See Also

Chapter 18, "Creating PeopleSoft Asset Management Accounting Entries," page 355

Chapter 18, "Creating PeopleSoft Asset Management Accounting Entries," Running the Depreciation Close
Process, page 371

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing PeopleSoft
Asset Management Business Units"

Understanding Depreciation of Group Assets

Group assets are treated differently from regular assets for depreciation purposes. Before you run depreciation
on group assets, you must run a process that consolidates group member asset cost information at the group
level. Then, you can depreciate group assets using the Group Asset Depreciation Calculation page.
PeopleSoft Asset Management supports only the flat-rate depreciation method for group assets.

See Also

Chapter 10, "Using Group Asset Processing," page 249

Processing Depreciation
This section provides an overview of processing depreciation and discusses how to:

• Run the Depreciation Calculation process (AM_DEPR_CALC).

• Review open transactions.

• Change depreciation attributes.

• Review the depreciation processing results for errors.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 313
Processing Asset Depreciation Chapter 14

Understanding Depreciation Processing

You must run depreciation to account for every transaction that you perform on an asset. For example, when
you transfer an asset, you may need to run depreciation to correctly reflect the new department that is using
the asset. For some transactions (including adjustments, transfers, and recategorizations), the depreciation
calculation process moves the stored depreciation amounts from department to department or category to
category, depending on the transaction that you are performing and the ChartFields that you specify.

Pages Used to Process Depreciation

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Depreciation Calculation RUN_AMDPCALC Asset Management, Run the Depreciation

Depreciation, Processing, Calculation process.
Calculate, Depreciation
Calculation

Open Transaction Detail OPEN_TRANS_DETAIL Asset Management, Review detailed

Depreciation, Open information about an open
Transactions, Review, Open transaction.
Transaction Detail
Note. You can view open
tax transactions by using the
same process when you
select Asset Management,
Taxes, Reports, Review
Open Tax Transactions,
Open Transactions- Tax.

Depreciation Process Log AM_ERROR_LOG Asset Management, Review depreciation

Depreciation, Depreciation processing results for errors.
Process Log, Depreciation
Process Log

Running the Depreciation Calculation Process (AM_DEPR_CALC)

Access the Depreciation Calculation page (Asset Management, Depreciation, Processing, Calculate,
Depreciation Calculation).

Unit Select a business unit from which to select a book or range of assets.

Book Name Select a book to further narrow the assets to be included in processing.

From Asset ID and To Enter a range of assets to include in processing.

Asset ID

314 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 14 Processing Asset Depreciation

Process Frequency Select the frequency for the process from these values:
Always
Don't
Once

Delete Stage Row Select the staged rows to delete:

All
Current
No

Note. Accumulated depreciation for group member assets is loaded at the member asset level.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Configuring
PeopleSoft Asset Lifecycle Management Background Processes."

Reviewing Open Transactions

Access the Open Transaction Detail page (Asset Management, Depreciation, Open Transactions, Review,
Open Transaction Detail).

You can review open transactions broadly—for example, by searching for them by business unit. Review
open transactions more specifically by including more criteria in your search.

Open Transaction Searches

Use broad or narrow search criteria to identify a list of open transactions. In addition to business unit, you can
specify asset identification, asset book name, transaction date, or accounting date. Alternatively, you can
specify the action type of a pending transaction. Also, each open transaction can have a status, which you can
use to further narrow the search criteria.

Actions of Open Transactions

Each pending transaction can have an action type associated with it. The following list shows the action types
that are available:

• Asset Addition

• Asset Cost Adjustment

• Asset Recategorization

• Asset Reinstatement

• Asset Retirement

• Asset Transfer

• Book Adjustment

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 315
Processing Asset Depreciation Chapter 14

• Budgeted Depreciation

• Budgeted Lease Payments

• Depreciation

• Inflation Adjustment

• Lease Payment

• Manual Reserve Adjustment

• Prior Period Depreciation

• Resume Depreciation

• Retro Rate Change for Group Assets

• Suspend Depreciation

Depreciation Calc Status

Completed Depreciation Depreciation has been calculated for the transaction.

Held For Transfer In When you process interunit transfers, PeopleSoft Asset Management processes
the out and in transactions at the same time. This status indicates that the
transaction is being held until its corresponding transfer-out can be processed.

Never Calculate The Depreciation Calculation process never includes the transaction.
Depreciation
Pending Depreciation Depreciation has not yet been calculated for the transaction.

In Processing Depreciation calculation is processing.

Acctg Entry Creation Status

Completed Distribution The transaction has been sent to the general ledger.

Never Calculate The distribution process never includes the transaction.

Distribution
Pending Distribution The transaction has not yet been sent to the general ledger.

Reporting Process Status

The reporting process status reflects the status in connection with the depreciation reporting table.

Completed The transaction has been uploaded to the depreciation reporting table.

Never The transaction will not be processed.

316 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 14 Processing Asset Depreciation

Pending The transaction has not yet been uploaded to the depreciation reporting table.

Group Consolidation Status

Completed Sum The summarization process has been completed on the transactions for group
Composite member assets.

Grouped Composite The asset is a group asset.

Member Depreciation A book change has been made on a group member (such as changing its
convention or in-service date).

Never Sum Composite The transactions are never used by the summarization process.

Pending Sum Composite The summarization process has not yet been completed on the transactions for
group member assets.

When you have searched for all open transactions based on specified criteria, you can view particular open
transactions in detail.

Changing Depreciation Attributes

PeopleSoft Asset Management enables you to change depreciation attributes as necessary. You may find it
necessary to:

• Change the effective date.

Changing the effective date of depreciation attributes may become necessary to accommodate changes in
tax law or company policy. You can set up anticipated changes for future use by effective-dating them.
You can also affect prior periods by changing the effective date.

• Change the depreciation limit.

Changing the depreciation limits on assets may change the amount of depreciation that you can expense
on an asset in a given year. This, in turn, changes the depreciation amount that is allocated to each period.
If necessary, the life of the asset is extended to depreciate the asset fully.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 317
Processing Asset Depreciation Chapter 14

• Change the status.

Asset depreciation status is book-specific. Therefore, an asset can be depreciable for one book and
nondepreciable for another. There is no limit to the number of times that an asset can have its depreciation
suspended. Also, there is no limit on the length of time for which it can be suspended.

When you change the status of an asset from Depreciable to Nondepreciable, the system deletes future
depreciation calculations. All transactions that are performed while the asset is suspended take into
account only the depreciation that has occurred as of that time.

While an asset is in a suspended state (that is, has a status of Nondepreciable), you can still perform
financial transactions on it. Those transactions generate appropriate accounting entries with a transaction
date indicating when the transaction actually took place. Adjustments generate one accounting entry for
the cost adjustment. Transfers generate two accounting entries—one for the cost transfer and one to
transfer accumulated depreciation. Retirements generate accounting entries for cost, accumulated
depreciation, and any gain or loss.

Note. You cannot perform interunit transfers on assets that have been suspended.

When you change a nondepreciable asset to a depreciable asset, PeopleSoft Asset Management performs
a remaining value calculation and calculates depreciation based on all depreciation parameters. The time
during which depreciation was suspended is not taken into account against the asset's life.

See Appendix B, "Understanding Depreciation Calculations," Calculating Depreciation When Salvage Value
Exceeds Net Book Value (NBV), page 647.

Reviewing the Depreciation Processing Error Log

Access the Asset Processes Error Log page (Asset Management, Depreciation, Depreciation Process Log,
Depreciation Process Log).

You can review each processing instance for errors that may have occurred during processing. You can view
the business unit, asset ID, and other information that is related to the error along with a message describing
the problem. You can then correct the problem or continue.

Expanding Depreciation by Period

To maintain optimal table size and increase depreciation processing efficiency, store depreciation entries by
fiscal year. However, if you need to store depreciation entries by period rather than by fiscal year, use the
Expand Depreciation by Period page to expand fiscal year storage to period storage.

This section discusses how to expand the depreciation period.

318 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 14 Processing Asset Depreciation

Page Used to Expand Depreciation by Period

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Expand Depreciation by AMDPEXPD_RQST Asset Management, Store depreciation entries

Period Depreciation, Processing, by period. You can expand
Expand by Period, Expand storage one fiscal year at a
by Period time.

Expanding the Depreciation Period

Access the Expand Depreciation by Period page (Asset Management, Depreciation, Processing, Expand by
Period, Expand by Period).

Enter a fiscal year and process frequency. You can run the process for only one fiscal year at a time.

Run Options

Unit Option Select a business unit option, either All or One. If you select One, select a
business unit in the field that appears.

Book Option Select either All or One. If you select One, select a book name in the field that
appears.

GRP Asset Opt(group Select a book group asset option, either All or Range. If you specify a range,
asset option) select values in the From Asset field and the To Asset ID field.

Creating Pending Depreciation Transactions

This section discusses how to create open depreciation transactions.

Page Used to Create Pending Depreciation Transactions

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Open Transactions - Create AMOPNTRNS_RQST Asset Management, Run a process that creates
Depreciation, Open open transactions.
Transactions, Create, Create

Creating Open Depreciation Transactions

Access the Depr Recalc page (Asset Management, Depreciation, Open Transactions, Create).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 319
Processing Asset Depreciation Chapter 14

Use this page to run a process that opens transactions. This is necessary when you have used the Future Depr
Years (future depreciation years) option to limit depreciation calculations to a specific number of years rather
than the asset's useful life. For example, if you had limited future depreciation years to two, and you were
now entering the third year, you would run this process before running depreciation so that the depreciation
calculations would account for all open transactions.

Run Options

Select an asset type. Options are:

All Assets Recalculates depreciation for all assets.

Group Asset Recalculates depreciation for all group assets.

Non Group Asset Recalculates depreciation for all assets except group assets.

Process Scheduler runs the Create Pending Depreciation Transactions (AMOPNTRNS) process at user-
defined intervals.

Viewing Depreciation-Related Information

You can view depreciation-related information for both regular assets and parent-child assets online.

This section discusses how to:

• View basic asset depreciation information.

• View net book value and depreciation.

• View period depreciation.

• View child asset depreciation.

Pages Used to View Depreciation-Related Information

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Asset Depreciation - Asset DEPR_ALL_MAIN Asset Management, View a summary of basic

Depreciation, Review asset and depreciation
Depreciation Info, Asset information.
Depreciation, Asset

320 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 14 Processing Asset Depreciation

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Asset Depreciation - DEPR_ALL_YEAR Asset Management, For regular assets, calculate

Depreciation Depreciation, Review an asset's net book value
Depreciation Info, Asset and view its depreciation
Depreciation, Depreciation information for the year.
For parent-child assets,
calculate net book value.
Depreciation information by
year does not appear.

Asset Depreciation - Period DEPR_ALL_PERIOD Asset Management, View depreciation for the
Depreciation Depreciation, Review periods that you specified
Depreciation Info, Asset when you entered the asset.
Depreciation, Depreciation,
Period Depreciation

Child Assets CHILD_ASSETS Asset Management, Asset Specify child assets to

Transactions, Parent-Child include in a parent asset's
Relationship, Review net book value calculation.
Parent-Child NBV, Child
Assets

Viewing Basic Asset Depreciation Information

Access the Asset Depreciation - Asset page (Asset Management, Depreciation, Review Depreciation Info,
Asset Depreciation, Asset).

Asset Depreciation - Asset page

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 321
Processing Asset Depreciation Chapter 14

Parent assets that are created on the Parent Asset page (parent-only assets) do not have cost or basic
information. They cannot be viewed in the Parent Child Basic Information component. Also, you cannot view
them or perform transactions on them in the Asset Cost/Adjust Transfers component; the Asset Retirements
component; or the Parent-Child NBV component. If you want to use a parent asset as an umbrella asset for
reporting purposes only and access these components to manipulate child assets in mass, create a 0-cost
parent asset as opposed to a parent only asset. Also, to transact against parent and child assets at once, parent
and child must use the same asset profile.

Viewing Net Book Value and Depreciation

Access the Asset Depreciation - Depreciation page (Asset Management, Depreciation, Review Depreciation
Info, Asset Depreciation, Depreciation).

Asset Depreciation - Depreciation page (1 of 2)

322 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 14 Processing Asset Depreciation

Asset Depreciation - Depreciation page (2 of 2)

Net Book Value To calculate the net book value of the asset, enter values in the As Of Fiscal Year
field and the Period field, and click the Calculate NBV (calculate net book value)
button. The system displays the cost, salvage value, accumulated depreciation,
and net book value for the selected asset, fiscal year, and accounting period.

Yearly Depreciation Displays depreciation amounts by year through the last year of the asset's life.

Note. Yearly depreciation amounts are not shown for parent-child assets.

Viewing Period Depreciation

Access the Asset Depreciation - Period Depreciation page (Asset Management, Depreciation, Review
Depreciation Info, Asset Depreciation, Depreciation, Period Depreciation).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 323
Processing Asset Depreciation Chapter 14

Asset Depreciation - Period Depreciation page

Get Period Depreciation

Expense Select to view depreciation expense for the year that is specified.

Accum (accumulated) Select to view accumulated depreciation for the year that is specified.

Note. If you do not select Expense, but you do select Accum, only the amounts that affected accumulated
depreciation appear. The system does not show the expense for that year. For example, when an asset is
added with accumulated depreciation, no corresponding expense amount exists. If you do not select Accum,
but you do select Expense, the system displays the amounts that affected the expense account, but not the
accumulated depreciation for that year.

Year Select a year to display its period depreciation entries.

Get Period Depr (get Click to have the system calculate depreciation that was allocated to each period
period depreciation) for the year specified and display the information. You can change the period
depreciation amounts. Note that when you modify the period depreciation, you
change the depreciation method to manual depreciation.

Period Depreciation

Click the Depr. Accum Adjustment (depreciation accumulated adjustment) link to make adjustments to
accumulated depreciation.

324 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 14 Processing Asset Depreciation

Note that if you perform two transfers on the same asset in the same accounting period (on the same set of
ChartFields), the Asset Depreciation - Period Depreciation page displays only a net result of both transfers.
For example, suppose that an asset with an actual month convention is added to department 12000 on August
31, 2006, with a cost of 10,000.00 JPY and a life of five years. On September 30, 2006, the asset is
transferred to department 14000 using the same convention. The asset is then transferred again on the same
day to department 21100. The Asset Depreciation - Period Depreciation page displays the following entries
for the transfers:
12000 2006 8 DPR 166.66

12000 2006 9 TFR -166.66

21100 2006 9 TFR +166.66

No entry exists for the transfer in and out of department 14000 on the same day, as this is a net 0. Note,
however, that the depreciation table has two additional rows for both transfer out and transfer in.

Viewing Child Asset Depreciation

Access the Child Assets page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Parent-Child Relationship, Review
Parent-Child NBV, Child Assets).

Click the Select All button to include all child assets with the parent in the net book value calculation.

To include particular child assets, select the Selected check box for a row.

Tag Number Displays the tag that is assigned to the child asset. Parent and child assets can
share the same tag number.

Description Displays the child asset description.

Child Asset ID Displays the asset ID that is assigned to the child asset.

Asset Status Displays the asset status of the child asset.

Cost Displays the cost of the child asset.

Currency Displays the currency in which child asset costs are stored.

Acq Date (acquisition Displays the date that the asset was acquired.
date)
Asset Information Click to open a new Asset page in the Asset Depreciation component. The page
is populated with the child asset.

The Include Parent Asset check box is selected by default. Clearing it enables you to calculate net book value
at once for all or selected child assets while excluding the parent asset from the calculation.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 325
Processing Asset Depreciation Chapter 14

Adjusting Accumulated Depreciation

Use the Depreciation Accumulated Adjustment page to adjust accumulated depreciation. After saving the
page, click the Asset Depreciation link to view the adjustment.

Note. Each book must be adjusted separately. If multiple books are associated with the same ledger group
with KLS (Keep Ledgers in Synch) activated, the adjustment amount is converted and copied from the
primary book to the secondary books if no adjustment amounts are entered in the secondary book.

This section lists the page that you use to adjust accumulated depreciation.

Page Used to Adjust Accumulated Depreciation

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Depr Accum Adjustment DEPR_ACCUM_ADJ Asset Management, Make adjustments to

(depreciation accumulated Depreciation, Processing, accumulated depreciation.
adjustment) Adjusted Accumulated
Depr, Depr Accum
Adjustment

Running Depreciation Reports

This section provides an overview of depreciation reports and discusses how to load the depreciation
reporting table.

Understanding Depreciation Reports

PeopleSoft Asset Management provides a full complement of depreciation-related reports. Before you can run
depreciation reports, you must load the Depreciation Reporting table (PS_DEPR_RPT). The table stores life-
to-date and year-to-date depreciation amounts. You should run the process once at the beginning of the year
for all assets in your system, and on a monthly or other regular basis thereafter for new open transactions.

To run depreciation reports:

1. Load the Depreciation Reporting table.

2. Run the Depreciation by Period report.

3. Run the Depreciation by Fiscal Year report.

4. Run the Depreciation Activity report.

326 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 14 Processing Asset Depreciation

Pages Used to Run Depreciation Reports

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Depr Reporting Table AMDPREPT_RQST Asset Management, Load the Depreciation

(Depreciation Reporting Financial Reports, Load Reporting table
table) Reporting Tables, Depr (PS_DEPR_RPT). Use this
Reporting Table, Depr table for all depreciation
Reporting Table reports.

Depreciation by Period RUN_AMDP2200 Asset Management, Run the Depreciation by

Financial Reports, Cost and Period report.
Depreciation, Depreciation
by Period, Depreciation by
Period

Depreciation by Fiscal Year RUN_AMDP2300 Asset Management, Run the Depreciation by

Financial Reports, Cost and Fiscal Year report.
Depreciation, Depreciation
by Fiscal Year,
Depreciation by Fiscal Year

Depreciation Activity RUN_AMDP2000 Asset Management, Run the Depreciation by

Financial Reports, Cost and Activity report.
Depreciation, Depreciation
Activity, Depreciation
Activity

Loading the Depreciation Reporting Table

Access the Depr Reporting Table page (Asset Management, Financial Reports, Load Reporting Tables, Depr
Reporting Table, Depr Reporting Table).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 327
Processing Asset Depreciation Chapter 14

Depr Reporting Table page

Run Options

Use Open Trans (use Select to pick up only new open transactions since you last ran the process.
open transactions)
Keep Other Fiscal Years Select to process a new year but retain other years in the table.

Note. The Depreciation Reporting table should be loaded only for the current fiscal year, or at most two fiscal
years (depending on your reporting requirements).

You should run the AMDPREPT_RQST process throughout the year to account for new transactions that
were created during the year by selecting the Use Open Trans check box.

328 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
 Chapter 15

Using User-Defined Asset Depreciation

This chapter provides an overview of user-defined depreciation and discusses how to:

• Create a user-defined depreciation method.

• View user-defined variables.

• Review user-defined methods.

• Generate a user-defined depreciation SQC program.

• Copy a user-defined depreciation method.

• Select a user-defined depreciation method for an asset.

Understanding User-Defined Depreciation

PeopleSoft Asset Management enables you to create and use your own depreciation method. This section
provides the information that you need to do so.

To create and use depreciation methods:

1. Review the variables available for use in your depreciation formula.

This section includes a table that lists the commonly used user-defined depreciation variables. Also
included is an inquiry page, where you can review these variables within the system. Review the available
variables, and then proceed to create depreciation formulae.

2. Define the formula that you want to use for depreciation.

Do this in a series of steps, and then review the steps on a summary page that we provide for this purpose.

3. Assign the user-defined method to assets.

You can do this on several different pages within the system.

4. Save the user-defined depreciation method.

5. Generate a user-defined method SQC program.

This SQC is called by the main depreciation calculation program, AM_DEPR_CALC, during depreciation
calculations. It processes all user-defined depreciation methods by setID.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 329
Using User-Defined Asset Depreciation Chapter 15

Creating or Selecting Variables

PeopleSoft provides a listing of the user-defined depreciation variables that are commonly used to construct
the depreciation formula. The following table shows the variable name, the corresponding program variable,
and whether a variable can be assigned a calculation result. Review this information to see if you can use it to
construct your formula.

Variable Program Variable Assign To Flag

ALLOC_LIFE # ALLOC_LIFE N

ALLOC_TOTAL #ALLOC_TOTAL N

ASSET_BASIS #ASSET BASIS N

ASSET_COST #ASSET_COST N

ASSET_COST_PER_CHARTFIELD #LINE_COST N

ASSET_LIFE #ASSET_LIFE N

BEGIN_DEPR_PERIOD #BEGIN_DEPR_PD N

BEGIN_DEPR_YEAR #BEGIN_DEPR_FY N

CURRENT_YEAR #SELECTED_FY N

DB_PERCENT #DB_PERCENT N

DEPR #DEPR Y

DEPR_LOW_LIMIT # DEPR_LOW_LIMIT N

DEPR_PERCENT #FLAT_PERCENT N

LIFE_IN_YEARS # LIFE_IN_YEARS N

LIFE_REMAINING #LIFE_REMAINING N

330 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 15 Using User-Defined Asset Depreciation

Variable Program Variable Assign To Flag

LINE_COST_FRACTION #LINE_COST_FRACTION N

LTD_DEPR #LTD_DEPR N

NO_OF_PERIODS_IN_YEAR #NUMBER_OF_PERIODS N

NO_OF_PERIODS_TO_DEPR # ALLOC N

RESULT_A #RESULT_A Y

RESULT_B #RESULT_B Y

RESULT_C #RESULT_C Y

RESULT_D #RESULT_D Y

RESULT_E #RESULT_E Y

RESULT_F #RESULT_F Y

RESULT_G #RESULT_G Y

RESULT_H #RESULT_H Y

RESULT_I #RESULT_I Y

RESULT_J #RESULT_J Y

RESULT_K #RESULT_K Y

RESULT_L #RESULT_L Y

RESULT_M #RESULT_M Y

RESULT_N #RESULT_N Y

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 331
Using User-Defined Asset Depreciation Chapter 15

Variable Program Variable Assign To Flag

SALVAGE_VALUE #SALVAGE_VALUE N

TOTAL_PERIODS_DEPR #PERIOD_COUNT_ACCUM N

UDX1 # UDX1 Y

UDX2 # UDX2 Y

UDX3 # UDX3 Y

UDX4 # UDX4 Y

UDX5 # UDX5 Y

UDX6 # UDX6 Y

Page Used to Create or Select Variables

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

User Defined Variables UD_VARIABLE_DEFN Set Up Financials/Supply Create a new variable or

Chain, Product Related, select an existing variable.
Asset Management,
Depreciation, User Defined
Variables, User Defined
Variables

Review User Defined UD_VARIABLE_INQ Set Up Financials/Supply View or select an existing

Methods - User Defined Chain, Product Related, variable.
Variables Asset Management, Review
User Defined Methods,
User Defined Variables,
User Defined Variables

Creating or Selecting Variables

Access the User Defined Variables page (Set Up Financials/Supply Chain, Product Related, Asset
Management, Depreciation, User Defined Variables, User Defined Variables).

332 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 15 Using User-Defined Asset Depreciation

User Defined Variables page

Assign To Variable Indicates whether you can assign the resultant value to this variable.

Program Variable Identifies and references the user-defined variable name with the corresponding
internal AM_DEPR_CALC or AMDPCUDM program variable name.

Initialize Note. This check box appears only for variables that have the Assign To Variable
selected.

Determines whether you can initialize the content of a variable during

consecutive year calculation in order to use the variable content in the calculation
for the subsequent years.

Creating a User-Defined Depreciation Method

Once you have designed the depreciation formula, you must enter it into PeopleSoft Asset Management. The
User Defined Method component consists of three pages on which you define the custom depreciation
formula, see a summary page of the formula that you entered, and add comments about the formula for
reference as appropriate.

The User Defined Methods component (UD_METHOD) contains the pages to create and review custom
depreciation formulas.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 333
Using User-Defined Asset Depreciation Chapter 15

This section provides and overview of and discusses how to create and view user-defined depreciation
methods, particularly how to:

• Enter the user-defined depreciation method.

• Summarize the user-defined method.

• Describe the user-defined method.

Pages Used to Create a User-Defined Depreciation Method

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

User-Defined Method - UD_METHOD_DEFN Set Up Financials/Supply Create a user-defined

Definition Chain, Product Related, depreciation method.
Asset Management,
Depreciation, User Defined Note. Method ID is the
Methods five-character identifier for
the user-defined
depreciation method that
you create.

User Defined Methods - UD_METHOD_INQ Set Up Financials/Supply View the custom

Definition (inquiry) Chain, Product Related, depreciation formula.
Asset Management, Review
User Defined Methods,
User Defined Methods

User Defined Methods - UD_METHOD_SUMMARY

• Set Up View a visual representation
Summary Financials/Supply of the complete depreciation
Chain, Product Related, formula that you entered.
Asset Management,
Depreciation, User
Defined Methods,
Summary

• Set Up
Financials/Supply
Chain, Product Related,
Asset Management,
Review User Defined
Methods, User Defined
Methods, Summary

334 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 15 Using User-Defined Asset Depreciation

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

User Defined Methods - UD_METHOD_COMMENT

• Set Up Enter or view additional
Comment Financials/Supply comments or explanations
Chain, Product Related, of this depreciation method.
Asset Management,
Depreciation, User
Defined Methods,
Comment

• Set Up
Financials/Supply
Chain, Product Related,
Asset Management,
Review User Defined
Methods, User Defined
Methods, Comment

Entering the User-Defined Depreciation Method

Access the User Defined Methods - Definition page (Set Up Financials/Supply Chain, Product Related, Asset
Management, Depreciation, User Defined Methods, Definition).

User Defined Methods - Definition page

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 335
Using User-Defined Asset Depreciation Chapter 15

Formula Sequence

The system displays a sequence number. The sequence numbers are incremented by 10s (10, 20, and so on).
You can change the sequence number if you like. Add a description of the sequence in the field provided.

For example, you can break the following depreciation formula into steps that you can enter as separate
sequences on this page:

Depreciation = (Asset Cost / Asset Life) × Number of Periods to be Depreciated

You can write the depreciation formula as two steps, or sequences:

1. Step 1

Result A = Asset Cost / Asset Life

2. Step 2

Depreciation = Result A × No. of periods to be depreciated

Condition

None The default.

If Indicates the beginning of an If statement within an If-Then-Else construct.

Then Indicates the beginning of the Then statement within an If-Then-Else construct.

Else Indicates the beginning of the Else statement within an If-Then-Else construct.

And Indicates that you want to include both variables in the search.

Or Indicates that you want to include either variable in the search.

You can create and/or statements, if-then-else statements, and multiple if-then-else statements. You cannot
use nested if statements.

Operand 1

Constant Select to indicate a value, and then enter the value.

Variable Select to indicate a user-defined variable.

Operation

Select the arithmetic operator.

336 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 15 Using User-Defined Asset Depreciation

Operand 2

Constant Select to indicate a value, and then enter the value.

Variable Select to indicate a user-defined variable.

Result

Result Specify a name for the result of this operation. The result can be any user-defined
variable for which the Assign To Variable check box on the User Defined
Variables page is selected.

Validate Click to ensure that the syntax that you entered is correct. The program performs
a validation check and prompts you with an error message to correct any syntax
mistakes.

Sort Click to redisplay the sequence of steps that you entered in ascending sequence
order, if you have edited some steps into the formula.

End If

Select End If to indicate that this is the end of an If-Then-Else construct.

Generating a User-Defined Depreciation SQC Program

Once you have created a new user-defined depreciation method, you must regenerate the AMUDDEPR.SQC
program that is called by the main depreciation calculation program AM_DEPR_CALC during the
depreciation calculation process.

Page Used to Generate a User-Defined Depreciation SQC Program

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Generate User Defined RUN_AMUD_METHOD Set Up Financials/Supply Regenerate the

Methods Chain, Product Related, AMUDDEPR.SQC
Asset Management, program that is called by the
Depreciation, Generate User main depreciation
Defined Methods, Generate calculation program
User Defined Methods AM_DEPR_CALC during
the depreciation calculation
process.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 337
Using User-Defined Asset Depreciation Chapter 15

Using the User Defined Method Generate Page

Access the Generate User Defined Methods page (Set Up Financials/Supply Chain, Product Related, Asset
Management, Depreciation, Generate User Defined Methods, Generate User Defined Methods).

Generate User Defined Methods page

The program automatically processes all user-defined depreciation method IDs that you created for that setID.

Note. Make sure that you copy the output file as AMUDDEPR.SQC in the same directory where the
AMDPCALC.SQR program is located.

If you receive any error messages when you run AM_DEPR_CALC, verify that you have copied the SQC
properly to the directory where AMDPCALC is stored.

Process Scheduler runs the AMUDMTHD process at user-defined intervals.

Copying a User-Defined Depreciation Method

You can copy an existing user-defined depreciation formula when you define a new method that is similar to
an existing one. You can copy the existing formula and modify it for the requirements of the new method,
rather than defining it from scratch.

338 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 15 Using User-Defined Asset Depreciation

Page Used to Copy a User-Defined Depreciation Method

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

User Defined Method Copy UD_METHOD_COPY Set Up Financials/Supply Copy a user-defined

Chain, Product Related, depreciation method.
Asset Management,
Depreciation, User Defined Note. Enter the method ID
Methods-Copy, User of the user-defined
Defined Method Copy depreciation method that
you want to copy.

Copying a User-Defined Method

Access the User Defined Method Copy page (Set Up Financials/Supply Chain, Product Related, Asset
Management, Depreciation, User Defined Methods-Copy).

User Defined Method Copy page

New SetID Select the ID for the new depreciation method; it may be the same or different
from the depreciation method from which you are copying.

New Method ID Enter an ID and a description for the new depreciation method. The description
and Comment field appear by default from the old method; you can modify them.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 339
Using User-Defined Asset Depreciation Chapter 15

After you have saved the new method, click the Go to Maintain User Defined Method Page link to modify the
new copied method, if appropriate.

Note. You must save the new depreciation method before you can modify it.

Selecting a User-Defined Depreciation Method for an Asset

Once you have created a user-defined depreciation method and generated the SQC, the method is available
for selection as the depreciation method to be used for an asset. You do this when you:

• Specify a user-defined depreciation method for the asset profile.

• Complete an Asset Book Definition.

• Add an asset with ExpressAdd.

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing Asset
Processing," Setting Up Asset Profiles

Chapter 5, "Adding and Maintaining Assets," page 45

340 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
 Chapter 16

Reviewing Asset Depreciation Calculation

Results
This chapter provides an overview of what if depreciation and discusses how to:

• Perform what if depreciation modeling.

• Load the new book value depreciation results into a spreadsheet program.

Understanding What If Depreciation

PeopleSoft Asset Management provides you with the ability to perform what if depreciation simulation
modeling and to load the net book value results into a spreadsheet program for analysis.

Using what if depreciation simulation modeling, you can determine, evaluate, and compare the depreciation
amounts for assets if you were to change all or some of the depreciation parameters. For example, you may
want determine the effect on depreciation if you change the prorate convention from mid-month to mid-
quarter, or if you change the depreciation method from straight line to sum of the years digits. You can
experiment with depreciation to determine what the effect on depreciation would be without changing the
actual depreciation parameters for an asset.

Another useful benefit of the What If Depreciation feature is to project the depreciation if you add an asset
and run the actual depreciation program. For example, you can create an asset and run the What If
Depreciation program rather than running the actual depreciation program. You can then see what the
depreciation amount for the asset would be, go back and modify the depreciation parameters accordingly, and
then perform the actual depreciation.

To perform what if depreciation simulation, the assets must already exist in the system. Add at least one asset
to perform the simulation. The What If Depreciation feature uses only Add and Transfer In transactions for
modeling.

Performing What If Depreciation

To generate what if depreciation simulation:

• Perform what if depreciation.

• View what if depreciation results.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 341
Reviewing Asset Depreciation Calculation Results Chapter 16

Pages Used to Perform What If Depreciation

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

What If Depreciation RUN_AMDPCOMP Asset Management, Perform what if

Depreciation, What If depreciation.
Scenarios, Request, What If
Depreciation

What If Depreciation DEPR_ALL_PRD_COMP Asset Management, View results of what if

Results DEPR_ALL_YEAR_COMP Depreciation, What If depreciation.
Scenarios, Review
DEPR_ALL_MAIN_COMP

Performing What If Depreciation

Access the What If Depreciation page (Asset Management, Depreciation, What-If Scenarios, Request, What
If Depreciation).

342 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 16 Reviewing Asset Depreciation Calculation Results

What If Depreciation page

Save the what if depreciation changes that you make and run the program. If you want to run multiple
modeling comparisons using the same range of assets, use different run control IDs.

The What If Depreciation page uses the AM_DEPR_COMP application engine program to run simulated
depreciation instead of the actual depreciation program (AM_DEPR_CALC).

Process Scheduler runs the AM_DEPR_COMP application engine process at user-defined intervals.

Viewing What If Depreciation Results

Access the What If Depreciation Results page (Asset Management, Depreciation, What-If Scenarios,
Review).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 343
Reviewing Asset Depreciation Calculation Results Chapter 16

What If Depreciation page

You can view the results of what if depreciation using this What If Depreciation Inqury component or you
can run a query to review results.

Using either method, examine the depreciation results to see the consequences of the depreciation parameter
modifications that you made, or to see the projected depreciation if you ran depreciation for an asset. You can
run the results of the query to Excel. Go back and modify the depreciation results accordingly, and then run
the actual depreciation program (AM_DEPR_CALC), if applicable.

Loading the Net Book Value Depreciation Results Into a

Spreadsheet Program
You can load the net book value depreciation results into a spreadsheet program.

344 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 16 Reviewing Asset Depreciation Calculation Results

Page Used to Load the Net Book Value Depreciation Results into a
Spreadsheet Program

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Net Book Value Table RUN_AMLDNBVT Asset Management, Generate an online report of
Financial Reports, Load depreciation processing
Reporting Tables, Net Book results, run a query to view
Value Table, Net Book them, and export the results
Value Table into a spreadsheet program
for manipulation.

Note. You can run different

modeling simulations for
the same range of assets by
giving each simulation a
different Run Control ID.
Net book value information
is loaded to the Asset Net
Book Value table
(ASSET_NBV_TBL) and is
available to view online.

Loading Depreciation Results Into a Spreadsheet Program

Access the Net Book Value Table page (Asset Management, Financial Reports, Load Reporting Tables, Net
Book Value Table, Net Book Value Table).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 345
Reviewing Asset Depreciation Calculation Results Chapter 16

Net Book Value Table page

Specify the as of fiscal year (in the As Of FY field) and accounting period (in the Period field).

Once you have loaded the Net Book Value Table, you can run any of the following Crystal reports:

• Crystal Report - Asset NBV by ChartField (AMNB1000).

• Crystal Report - Asset NBV by Category (AMNB1010).

• Crystal Report - Asset NBV by Location (AMNB1030).

346 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
 Chapter 17

Allocating Asset Depreciation Expenses

This chapter provides an overview of allocating depreciation expenses, describes the prerequisite tasks, and
describes how to:

• Set up the depreciation allocation process.

• Run the allocation process.

Understanding the Depreciation Allocation Business Process

PeopleSoft Asset Management enables you to allocate depreciation expenses or asset costs across multiple
departments or ChartField combinations. The allocation might be divided equally among all departments or
selected ChartField combinations, or it might be calculated on a factor that is appropriate to your business,
such as a prorata basis.

In some business environments, allocation of depreciation expenses to departments or ChartField

combinations other than those assigned to an asset's cost might be required. For example, depreciation
expenses for shared services assets such as HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning) for a store in a
mall might be needed to allocate the expenses across all departments using the service. The allocation might
be spread evenly among all departments, or it might be calculated on a prorata basis based on the square
footage of each department or some other factor.

PeopleSoft Asset Management enables you to create and process allocations before posting depreciation to
the general ledger. Allocation amounts are derived in PeopleSoft Asset Management from the DIST_LN
table, which is populated by accounting entry generation programs such as the Accounting Entry Creation
process (AM_AMAEDIST) and the Depreciation Close process (AM_DPCLOSE). The allocation process
must be run after running these programs and before journal generation. The allocation program takes
unposted journal lines from the DIST_LN table, processes them according to the defined allocation, and
creates new allocation entries. Also, lines that have already been sent to the general ledger by previous
journal generation are available to allocate.

Processing Allocations With Fund Accounting

When an educational or governmental entity acquires a capital asset, the transaction is usually accounted for
as a budgeted or funded acquisition. Other programs within PeopleSoft provide the tools to perform budget
checking, such as in the Purchase Order and Accounts Payable transaction processing. After the transaction to
acquire the asset is completed, PeopleSoft Asset Management creates ongoing depreciation transactions. It is
important that the asset depreciation entries do not inherit the original budget reference during creation of
period depreciation entries because the original budget reference is not appropriate for future year's
depreciation.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 347
Allocating Asset Depreciation Expenses Chapter 17

For example, assume that the current financial year is 2008 with budget year of 2007. An asset was added on
01/01/2005 with a budget year of 2005. All of the depreciation rows for 2008 are created with the budget year
of 2005. When the depreciation entries for 2008 are posted to the general ledger, they have an incorrect
budget year of 2005.

To accommodate the use of budget or fund accounting in PeopleSoft Asset Management, it is recommended
that you use the allocation process to reallocate the depreciation and other transactions to the active budget
reference and year. This program is run after the accounting entry creation process and depreciation close
process have been run.

Prerequisites
You must have already defined transaction groups to set up the allocation basis for asset costs and
depreciation. If you use budget or fund accounting, it is recommended that you establish an asset or budget
reallocation transaction group, such as All to include all transaction types that apply, such as ADD, DPR,
PDP, RCT, RET, and TRF.

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing Asset
Processing"

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up Accounting
Entry and Financial Processing for PeopleSoft Asset Management"

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up Depreciation
Processing"

Setting Up the Depreciation Allocation Business Process

Use the Allocation Basis Group component (ALLOC_BASIS_GRP) to set up the Depreciation Allocation
business process:

• Define the allocation basis, which determines how and in what proportion the journal line amounts are
distributed to various targets.

• Define the sources and destinations for the cost/depreciation to be allocated.

• Link assets to a defined allocation basis.

348 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 17 Allocating Asset Depreciation Expenses

Pages Used to Set Up the Depreciation Allocation Business Process

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Allocation Basis Definition ALLOC_BASIS_PNL Set Up Financials/Supply Define basic information for
- Definition Chain, Product Related, your allocation basis.
Asset Management,
Accounting, Allocation
Basis Definition

Allocation Basis Definition ALLOC_BASIS1_PNL Set Up Financials/Supply Specify the sources and
- Allocations Chain, Product Related, destinations for the
Asset Management, allocation.
Accounting, Allocation
Basis Definition,
Allocations

Asset Allocations ALLOC_DEFN_PNL Asset Management, Associate assets with

Accounting Entries, Allocation Basis IDs.
Allocate Depreciation
Expense, Asset Allocations,
Asset Allocations

Entering the Allocation Basis Definition

Access the Allocation Basis Definition - Definition page (Set Up Financials/Supply Chain, Product Related,
Asset Management, Accounting, Allocation Basis Definition).

Allocation Basis - Definition page

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 349
Allocating Asset Depreciation Expenses Chapter 17

Transaction Group Select a transaction group which combines depreciation types for allocating
expenses. In the case of using budget or fund accounting, select the transaction
group that is used for budget or fund reallocations.

Allocation Type Select one:

• Copy: Select to override a value so that ownership can be assigned (for
example, to one department while expense is charged to another department).

• Evenly: Select to distribute the Total Allocation Units equally among the
allocation destinations.

• Prorata: Select to distribute the Total Allocation Units in the way you
specify in the Destination group box on the Allocation Basis Definition -
Allocations page.

Note. If you select Prorata as the allocation type, enter a Unit of Measure
and the number of Total Allocation Units.

Unit of Measure If you select Prorata as the allocation type, enter a unit of measure. This is the
criteria you are going to use to do the allocation.

Total Allocation Units The total quantity of your units of measure that are used to perform the
allocation. You enter the allocation units for each destination to establish the
allocation ratio for each destination.

Defining the Source and Destinations

Access the Allocation Basis Definition - Allocations page (Set Up Financials/Supply Chain, Product Related,
Asset Management, Financials, Allocation Basis Definition, Allocations).

350 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 17 Allocating Asset Depreciation Expenses

Allocation Basis Allocations page

Complete the applicable ChartField sources and destinations.

If you are using a prorata allocation, enter the Allocation Units for each destination in the Destination group
box.

Defining Allocations for Assets

Access the Asset Allocations page (Asset Management, Accounting Entries, Allocate Depreciation Expense,
Asset Allocations, Asset Allocations).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 351
Allocating Asset Depreciation Expenses Chapter 17

Asset Allocations page

Specify the criteria for the allocation by selecting the ChartFields to which you will associate the criteria. To
generate proper search results for asset IDs, first populate one or all of the following fields:

• Book Name

• Category

• Cost Type

• Oper Unit

• Fund

• Dept (department)

• Program

• Class

• Bud Ref (budget reference)

• Product

• Project

Note. The system might not display all ChartFields. The available ChartFields are dependent upon the
definitions that you have created during implementation.

Cost Type Select the Cost Type to further narrow your search results.

352 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 17 Allocating Asset Depreciation Expenses

Allocation Basis Id Enter the Allocation Basis ID for this allocation; this is the default basis for this
allocation.

Note. Use the upper Allocation Basis Id field to quickly establish the allocation
basis value by default to each one of the selected asset IDs. Entering a value in
the Allocation Basis Idfield in this portion of the page doesnot narrow your
search.

Within the group box on the page, you can also associate each Asset ID with an Allocation Basis Id .

When using budget or fund accounting, define the assets against which allocations should be run. For
example, include all assets that pertain to the budget reference year 2001. After running the accounting entry
generation process (AM_AMAEDIST) and the depreciation close (AM_DPCLOSE) process, the
Depreciation Allocation (AMALLOC) process with the appropriate budget Allocation ID can be run for the
applicable fiscal year and period.

Performing the Depreciation Allocation Business Process

You can create allocation entries in the DIST_LN table by running the Depreciation Allocation (AMALLOC)
process.

Note. The allocations process calls the centralized processor to generate balanced Inter/IntraUnit entries.

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Using Interunit and Intraunit Accounting
and ChartField Inheritance"

Page Used to Run the Depreciation Allocation Business Process

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Process Allocation AMALLOC_RQST Asset Management, Create allocation entries in

Accounting Entries, the DIST_LN table. If
Allocate Depreciation necessary, the allocations
Expense, Process process calls the IU
Allocation, Process Processor to create balanced
Allocation entries.

Running the Depreciation Allocation Process

Access the Process Allocation page (Asset Management, Accounting Entries, Allocate Depreciation Expense,
Process Allocation, Process Allocation).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 353
Allocating Asset Depreciation Expenses Chapter 17

Process Allocation page

Enter a Business Unit,Allocation Id, and Accounting Period to process allocations. Select a Process
Frequency.

When processing for budget and fund accounting allocations, first run the accounting entry generation
process (AM_AMAEDIST) and the depreciation close (AM_DPCLOSE) process. Then run the Depreciation
Allocation (AMALLOC) process with the appropriate budget Allocation ID for the applicable fiscal year and
period. These steps will change the entries to reflect the correct budget reference in the accounting entries for
assets that were created in prior fiscal year and period.

354 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
 Chapter 18

Creating PeopleSoft Asset Management

Accounting Entries
This chapter lists prerequisites, provides overviews of asset information flow and accounting entry setup, and
discusses how to create accounting entries.

Prerequisites
Before you initiate any processing, you should review your application options. Ensure that you have:

• Defined business unit and book accounting entry options.

• Established the accounting entry template IDs to be used for PeopleSoft Asset Management processing.

• Established the accounting entry templates to be used for PeopleSoft Asset Management processing.

• Determined the depreciation open and close status for periods.

Understanding Asset Information Flow

Each financial transaction that is entered into PeopleSoft Asset Management can be used to generate balanced
accounting entries. These entries in turn can be summarized and written to a journal, which can then be rolled
up and posted to the general ledger system.

Balanced accounting entries are generated from financial transactions and are the basis for creating journals
that are posted to the general ledger. The primary sources of accounting entries within PeopleSoft Asset
Management include:

• Accounting entries that are created from financial transactions such as asset additions, adjustments,
allocations or retirements.

• Accounting entries that are created from depreciation close for a particular accounting period.

• Accounting entries that are created from lease payments.

Others include processing transactions to adjust for inflation and accounting entries that are created from an
active integration with other PeopleSoft products such as Billing, Purchasing, and Payables.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 355
Creating PeopleSoft Asset Management Accounting Entries Chapter 18

Each time financial asset information is entered or adjusted, PeopleSoft Asset Management creates an open
transaction. This transaction remains open until accounting entries are created or depreciation is calculated for
the transaction. The process for accounting entry creation generates accounting entries for all financial
transactions that are not related to depreciation. The Depreciation Close process (AM_DPCLOSE) generates
accounting entries for depreciation in a particular accounting period.

Note.

To create accounting entries:

1. Enter asset transactions.

Based on the context of the transaction that you enter, the system creates an open transaction with a
transaction type such as Add, Transfer, Adjust, Retire, and so forth. These open transactions form a list of
accounting entry or depreciation tasks to be processed.

2. Calculate depreciation for open transactions.

3. Create asset transaction accounting entries by running the Accounting Entry Creation process
(AM_AMAEDIST), which applies the appropriate accounting entry templates to the open transactions
that were created in step 1.

Selection of an accounting entry template is determined by the accounting entry template ID, category,
cost type, transaction type, and transaction code of the asset transaction. You can run this process at any
interval. You should run the process more than once a month to prevent the process from being slowed at
period close time. Use Process Scheduler to schedule and automatically initiate these processes.

4. At the end of each accounting period, create depreciation accounting entries by running the Depreciation
Close process; the process applies the depreciation (DPR) and prior depreciation period (PDP) accounting
entry templates to the asset depreciation table.

Run this process only once for each accounting period, and only after all of the transaction activity for the
period has been completed.

5. Reverse accounting entries by running the Depreciation Close process with the option Reverse Posted
Entries selected.

This option reverses only those journal entries that have been created and posted to the general ledger, and
creates reversal entries.

This diagram shows the processes for creating accounting entries:

356 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 18 Creating PeopleSoft Asset Management Accounting Entries

Processes for creating accounting entries

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up
Accounting Entry and Financial Processing for PeopleSoft Asset Management."

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing Asset
Processing."

Understanding Accounting Entry Setup

This section discusses:

• Business unit and book accounting entry options.

• Accounting entry templates.

• Depreciation close status.

Business Unit and Book Accounting Entry Options

Business unit and book accounting entry options are defined in the Establish Business Units component, and
they control which business unit book is used to create accounting entries. Select one book for each business
unit to create accounting entries.

Note. When processing accounting entries, you should understand the relationship between PeopleSoft Asset
Management business units and PeopleSoft General Ledger business units. If you are using different business
units for the applications because you use multiple ledgers, you must be sure to specify the ledger. The ledger
is required when you are searching on the Asset Journals page. Failing to enter the value generates an error,
and the journal lines for business units that are different do not appear, even though the PeopleSoft Asset
Management entries are generated and posted to the journal tables.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 357
Creating PeopleSoft Asset Management Accounting Entries Chapter 18

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing
PeopleSoft Asset Management Business Units."

Accounting Entry Templates

The accounting entry template is the central table that the system uses to create accounting entries, which are
the basis for general ledger journals. The accounting entry template defines accounting entry types based on
asset category, cost type, transaction type, transaction code, and accounting entry template ID. For each
accounting entry type, you specify:

• The accounts to use during accounting entry.

• The journal template to use for recording actual transactions.

• The budget journal template to use to record budget transactions.

When you add an accounting entry template in PeopleSoft Asset Management, the system populates it with
standard accounting entry types (distribution types), based on the asset category, cost type, and action that is
specified for all supported features that require accounting types.

If impairment and revaluation options are enabled at the installation level, you can specify within the cost
type definition if you want to enable a given cost type for impairment or revaluation processing. If enabled,
the system displays the appropriate impairment and revaluation related accounts at the Accounting Entry
Template level.

Use the features within the Accounting Entry Template ID component to define accounting entry template
IDs that include or exclude the appropriate accounting entry (distribution) types for each type of transaction.
The accounting entry template IDs can be associated with business unit-level features such as the Book Code
feature, the Derogatory Depreciation feature, the Like Kind Exchange feature, and the Revaluation feature.

Accounting entry types are delivered with the PeopleSoft system, and each asset event has an associated set
of accounting entry types. For each combination of category, cost type, transaction code, and accounting
entry template ID, you must set up an accounting entry template for the following transaction types:

Transaction Type Description

ADD Additions.

ADJ Adjustments.

TRF Transfers.

RCT Recategorizations.

DPR Depreciation expense.

PDP Prior period depreciation.

358 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 18 Creating PeopleSoft Asset Management Accounting Entries

Transaction Type Description

RET Retirements (also used for processing reinstatements).

LPY Lease payments.

INF Inflation adjustment.

Note. If you enter a transaction into the system with a combination of category, cost type, transaction code,
and accounting entry template ID for which no accounting entry template exists, the accounting entry process
will fail the next time it is run.

DPR and PDP transaction types are used only on an accounting entry template with a blank transaction code.

Accounting Entry Types (Distribution Types)

Asset Management creates accounting entries by using standard accounting entry types (distribution types),
based on the asset category, cost type, and action that is specified for all supported features that require
accounting entry types. The following tables list the accounting distribution types that are associated with
each accounting entry feature.

Following are the distribution types for the ADD (addition) transaction type (if there is no 'X' for a
distribution type (blank), that type is not applicable for the listed feature):

Type Description Basic Expens Lease Derogatory Like Kind Revaluation

ed Exchange
Asset

AD Accumulate X X
d
Depreciation

AP Contra X X X
Asset

DD Accumulate X
d
Derogatory
Depreciation

DE Depreciation X X
Expense

DR Derogatory X
Depreciation
Reversal

DX Derogatory X
Depreciation
Expense

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 359
Creating PeopleSoft Asset Management Accounting Entries Chapter 18

Type Description Basic Expens Lease Derogatory Like Kind Revaluation

ed Exchange
Asset

EX Expense X

FA Fixed Asset X X

IV Investment X X
Property

IX Investment X X
Property
Accumulate
d
Depreciation
Adjustment

LO Lease X
Obligation

TI Trade In X X

UR Unrecognize X X
d Gain/Loss

RL Recognized X X
Loss

PR Provision X
for
Revaluation

Following are the distribution types for the ADJ (adjustment) transaction type:

Type Description Basic Expens Lease Derogatory Like Kind Revaluation

ed Exchange
Asset

AD Accumulate X X
d
Depreciation

AP Contra X X X
Asset

DD Accumulate X
d
Derogatory
Depreciation

DE Depreciation X X
Expense

360 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 18 Creating PeopleSoft Asset Management Accounting Entries

Type Description Basic Expens Lease Derogatory Like Kind Revaluation

ed Exchange
Asset

DR Derogatory X
Depreciation
Reversal

DX Derogatory X
Depreciation
Expense

EX Expense X

FA Fixed Asset X X

IV Investment X X
Property

LO Lease X
Obligation

PG Investment X X
Property
Gain

PL Investment X X
Property
Loss

PR Provision X
for
Revaluation

RD Reversal of X
Depreciation

IM Impairment X X
Loss

IN Impairment X
Contra

Here are the distribution types for the TRF (transfer) transaction type:

Type Description Basic Lease Derogatory Like Kind Revaluation

Exchange

AD Accumulated X X
Depreciation

DD Accumulated X
Derogatory
Depreciation

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 361
Creating PeopleSoft Asset Management Accounting Entries Chapter 18

Type Description Basic Lease Derogatory Like Kind Revaluation

Exchange

DR Derogatory X
Depreciation
Reversal

DX Derogatory X
Depreciation
Expense

FA Fixed Asset X X

IV Investment X X
Property

PR Provision for X
Revaluation

RC Provision for X
Revaluation
Contra

Here are the distribution types for the RCT (recategorize) transaction type:

Type Description Basic Lease Derogatory Like Kind Revaluation

Exchange

AD Accumulated X X
Depreciation

DD Accumulated X
Derogatory
Depreciation

DR Derogatory X
Depreciation
Reversal

DX Derogatory X
Depreciation
Expense

FA Fixed Asset X X

IV Investment X X
Property

PR Provision for X
Revaluation

RC Provision for X
Revaluation
Contra

362 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 18 Creating PeopleSoft Asset Management Accounting Entries

Here are the distribution types for the RET (retire) transaction type:

Type Description Basic Lease Derogatory Like Kind Revaluation

Exchange

AD Accumulated X
Depreciation

AP Contra Asset X

BI Proceeds to X (If Billing is

Billing installed)
Account

CA Proceeds X

DD Accumulated X
Derogatory
Depreciation

DR Derogatory X
Depreciation
Reversal

DX Derogatory X
Depreciation
Expense

FA Fixed Asset X

GA Gain X

GL Loss X

IV Investment X
Property

LG Lease X
Guarantee
Contra

LO Lease X
Obligation

LU Lease X
Guarantee
Obligation

MA Mortgage - X
Others

ML Mortgage - X
Comp

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 363
Creating PeopleSoft Asset Management Accounting Entries Chapter 18

Type Description Basic Lease Derogatory Like Kind Revaluation

Exchange

NV Net Book X
Value

PR Provision for X
Revaluation

RC Provision for X
Revaluation
Contra

RD Reversal of X
Depreciation

RG Recognized X
Gain

RM Removal X
Contra

SL Sales of Fixed X
Asset

TI Trade In X

UG Unrealized X
Gain

UL Unrealized X
Loss

Here are the distribution type for the DPR (depreciation) transaction type:

Type Description Basic Lease Derogatory Like Kind Revaluation

Exchange

AD Accumulated X X
Depreciation

DD Accumulated X
Derogatory
Depreciation

DE Depreciation X X
Expense

DR Derogatory X
Depreciation
Reversal

364 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 18 Creating PeopleSoft Asset Management Accounting Entries

Type Description Basic Lease Derogatory Like Kind Revaluation

Exchange

DX Derogatory X
Depreciation
Expense

RC Provision for X
Revaluation
Contra

RD Reversal of X
Depreciation

Here are the distribution types for the PDP (prior period depreciation) transaction type:

Type Description Basic Lease Derogatory Like Kind Revaluation

Exchange

AD Accumulated X
Depreciation

DD Accumulated X
Derogatory
Depreciation

DE Depreciation X
Expense

DR Derogatory X
Depreciation
Reversal

DX Derogatory X
Depreciation
Expense

RC Provision for X
Revaluation
Contra

RD Reversal of X
Depreciation

Here are the distribution types for the LPY (lease payment) transaction type:

Type Description Basic Lease Derogatory Like Kind Revaluation

Exchange

LC Lease Interest X
Contra

LI Lease Interest X

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 365
Creating PeopleSoft Asset Management Accounting Entries Chapter 18

Type Description Basic Lease Derogatory Like Kind Revaluation

Exchange

LO Lease X
Obligation

LP Lease X
Obligation
contra

Here are the distribution types for the INF (inflation) transaction type:

Type Description Basic Lease Derogatory Like Kind Revaluation

Exchange

IA Inflation X
Accum Depr

IB Inflation X
Accum Depr

IC Inflation Cost X
Adjustment

ID Inflation Cost X
Adjustment

IG Inflation Gain X

IL Inflation Loss X

IP Inflation X
Period Depr

IQ Inflation X
Period Depr

IY Inflation YTD X
Depr

IZ Inflation YTD X
Depr

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up
Accounting Entry and Financial Processing for PeopleSoft Asset Management," Defining Accounting Entries.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing
PeopleSoft Asset Management Business Units," Creating PeopleSoft Asset Management Business Units.

366 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 18 Creating PeopleSoft Asset Management Accounting Entries

Depreciation Close Status

You can run the Depreciation Close process only in an open period. You use the Business Unit/Book
Definition page to determine which accounting periods have been closed. Select Depreciation Closed List to
display all closed periods.

Note. Open and close accounting periods are maintained in General Ledger and migrated with the financial
subsystems. Each subsystem application can either use the periods that are created in General Ledger or
update the open and close periods at the application business unit level.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining Accounting Calendars,"
Defining and Updating Open Periods and Adjustment Periods.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing
PeopleSoft Asset Management Business Units," Defining Open Periods.

Creating Accounting Entries

This section provides an overview of the Depreciation Close process, lists common elements, and discusses
how to:

• Request accounting entry creation.

• Run the Depreciation Close process.

• Close accounting periods.

Understanding the Depreciation Close Process

The Depreciation Close process generates period depreciation accounting entries for all depreciable assets in
a particular accounting period, including lease payments and offset accounts for the period. Run this process
only for an accounting period that has not yet been closed. You can reverse or rerun this process if errors are
detected in the results. The flexible run parameters allow processing to close the period, reversing the output
of the last posting run, or reversal with reprocessing of the close entries.

Open and close accounting periods are maintained in General Ledger and migrated to the financial
subsystems. Each subsystem application can either use the periods that are created in General Ledger or
update the open and close periods at the application business unit level.

When you run the Depreciation Close process, you have two options: Rerun Depreciation Close and Reverse
Posted Entries. The following examples demonstrate how these options affect processing.

Example of the Rerun Depreciation Close Option

With Rerun Depreciation Close enabled and the journal entries not yet created, the Depreciation Close
process creates a new accounting entry, as shown in this table, and deletes the existing one (if any). If the
journal entries have already been created, depreciation close will neither delete nor generate entries. No
actions occur.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 367
Creating PeopleSoft Asset Management Accounting Entries Chapter 18

DISTRIBUTIO DTTM_STA AMOUNT GL_DISTRIB_ REVERSE REVERSE_DT Journal ID Journal Dttm

N_TYPE MP STATUS _STATUS TM_STAMP Stamp

AD 2009-09-05 –110.00 N NULL NULL

14:25:20

DE 2009-09-05 110.00 N NULL NULL

14:25:20

When the journal entries have been posted, the system updates the general ledger distribution status to D
(done).

This table shows the results after the PeopleSoft General Ledger run:

DISTRIBUTIO DTTM_STA AMOUNT GL_DISTRIB_ REVERSE REVERSE_DT Journal ID Journal Dttm

N_TYPE MP STATUS _STATUS TM_STAMP Stamp

AD 2009-09-05 –110.00 D NULL XX Journal

14:25:20 Dttmstamp

DE 2009-09-05 110.00 D NULL XX Journal

14:25:20 Dttmstamp

Example of the Reverse Posted Entries Option

When the Reverse Posted Entries option is selected and the journal entries have been created, the original
entry is reversed with new rows inserted showing the reversed amounts. The new entries display the statuses
R for reversal and X for reversed entries.

This table shows the original entry:

DISTRIBUTIO DTTM_STA AMOUNT GL_DISTRIB_ REVERSE REVERSE_DT Journal ID Journal Dttm

N_TYPE MP STATUS _STATUS TM_STAMP Stamp

AD 2009-09-05 –110.00 D X NULL XX Journal

14:25:20 Dttmstamp

DE 2009-09-05 110.00 D X NULL XX Journal

14:25:20 Dttmstamp

This table shows the reversed entry:

DISTRIBUTIO DTTM_STA AMOUNT GL_DISTRIB_ REVERSE REVERSE_DT Journal ID Journal Dttm

N_TYPE MP STATUS _STATUS TM_STAMP Stamp

AD 2009-09-12 110.00 N R 2003-09-05

17:37:25 14:25:20

DE 2009-09-12 –110.00 N R 2003-09-05

17:37:25 14:25:20

368 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 18 Creating PeopleSoft Asset Management Accounting Entries

Example of Both the Rerun Depreciation Close and Reverse Posted Entries Options

When the Reverse Posted Entries and the Rerun Depreciation Close options are both selected, and the journal
entries have been created, then the original entry is reversed as shown in the previous example, and a new
accounting entry is created.

This table shows the original entry:

DISTRIBUTIO DTTM_STA AMOUNT GL_DISTRIB_ REVERSE REVERSE_DT Journal ID Journal Dttm

N_TYPE MP STATUS _STATUS TM_STAMP Stamp

AD 2009-09-05 –110.00 D X NULL XX Journal

14:25:20 Dttmstamp

DE 2009-09-05 110.00 D X NULL XX Journal

14:25:20 Dttmstamp

This table shows the reversed entry:

DISTRIBUTIO DTTM_STA AMOUNT GL_DISTRIB_ REVERSE REVERSE_DT Journal ID Journal Dttm

N_TYPE MP STATUS _STATUS TM_STAMP Stamp

AD 2009-09-12 110.00 N R 2003-09-05

17:37:25 14:25:20

DE 2009-09-12 –110.00 N R 2003-09-05

17:37:25 14:25:20

This table shows the results of the rerun with the new entry:

DISTRIBUTIO DTTM_STA AMOUNT GL_DISTRIB REVERSE REVERSE_DT Journal ID Journal Dttm

N_TYPE MP _STATUS _STATUS TM_STAMP Stamp

AD 2009-09-12 –140.00 N NULL NULL

17:37:25

DE 2009-09-12 140.00 N NULL NULL

17:37:25

Common Elements Used in This Section

Request ID Displays the number of process requests that you have submitted.

Unit Enter the business unit for which transactions are processed.

Book Name Enter the book for which transactions are processed.

Currency Displays the currency in which the transactions are processed, based on the base
currency for the selected book or business unit.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 369
Creating PeopleSoft Asset Management Accounting Entries Chapter 18

Pages Used to Create Accounting Entries

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Create Accounting Entries AM_AMAEDIST_RQST Asset Management, Set up and initiate a request
Accounting Entries, Create or set of requests for
Accounting Entries, Create accounting entry creation.
Accounting Entries

Run Depreciation Close DEPR_CLOSE_RQST Asset Management, Enter and initiate a

Process Accounting Entries, Close depreciation close request
Depreciation, Run or requests.
Depreciation Close Process

Close Accounting Period DEPR_CLOS_PD Asset Management, Close accounting periods to

Accounting Entries, Close ensure that you do not make
Accounting Period, Close any new transactions in the
Accounting Period period.

Review Financial Entries - ASSET_DIST_LIST Asset Management, Review accounting

List Accounting Entries, Review financial entries in summary
Financial Entries, List list.

Note. In the case where

there are multiple "Future-
dated" EFFDT, only the
MAXIMUM effective-dated
row will be displayed in the
prompt for ACCOUNT in
the Review Financial
Entries component.

Review Financial Entries - ASSET_DIST_DETAIL Asset Management, Review accounting

Detail Accounting Entries, Review financial entries in detail.
Financial Entries, Detail
Note. In the case where
there are multiple "Future-
dated" EFFDT, only the
MAXIMUM effective-dated
row will be displayed in the
prompt for ACCOUNT in
the Review Financial
Entries component.

Review Operating Leases - ASSET_NF_DIST_LN Asset Management, Review operating lease

List Accounting Entries, Review entries in summary list.
Operating Leases, List

Review Operating Leases - LEASE_DIST_DETAIL Asset Management, Review operating lease

Detail Accounting Entries, Review entries in summary list.
Operating Leases, Detail

370 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 18 Creating PeopleSoft Asset Management Accounting Entries

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Review Asset Journals AM_GL_DRILL Asset Management, Review asset journal

Accounting Entries, Review information.
Asset Journals

Calculate Inflation - DEPR_INF_RQST Asset Management, Run a process to calculate

Request Accounting Entries, inflation for assets.
Calculate Inflation, Request

Review Expense Entries - ASSET_NF_LIST Asset Management, Review the expense entries
List Accounting Entries, Review (nonfinancial assets) that
Expense Entries, List were created by running the
Clearing Reconciliation
process.

Review Expense Entries - ASSET_NF_DET Asset Management, Review the expense entry
Details Accounting Entries, Review details (nonfinancial assets)
Expense Entries, Details that were created by
running the Clearing
Reconciliation process.

Clearing Reconciliation AM_CLEREC_RQST Asset Management, Run the process to reconcile

Accounting Entries, the clearing account that is
Clearing Reconciliation, created by trackable assets
Clearing Reconciliation from feeder systems against
the expense account.

Requesting Accounting Entry Creation

Access the Create Accounting Entries page (Asset Management, Accounting Entries, Create Accounting
Entries).

Cost Summarize Select to create cost summary while creating accounting entries.

From Asset ID and To Enter the transaction range to process.

Asset ID

Note. The system calls the Inter/IntraUnit central processor to create balanced accounting entries.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Using Interunit and Intraunit
Accounting and ChartField Inheritance."

Running the Depreciation Close Process

Access the Run Depreciation Close Process page (Asset Management, Accounting Entries, Close
Depreciation).

Fiscal Year and Period Enter the appropriate fiscal year and open periods to be closed.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 371
Creating PeopleSoft Asset Management Accounting Entries Chapter 18

Rerun Depreciation Select to delete all existing accounting entries that haven't been generated as
Close journal entries for depreciation expense and lease obligations for the specified
business unit, book, fiscal year, and period. The system generates new entries.
To generate new journal entries and to reverse a journal entry, run a request with
both Rerun Depreciation Close and Reverse Posted Entries options selected.
To rerun depreciation close for budgeted depreciation, run a request with both
Rerun Depreciation Close and Create Budgeted Depreciation options selected.

Reverse Posted Entries Select to reverse only those accounting entries that have been created and posted
to the general ledger, including all existing accounting entries for depreciation
expense and lease payments for the specified business unit, book, fiscal year, and
period. The process creates reversal entries and marks the old entries with a
status of Reversed. If journal entries have not been created, the entries marked
Reversed are not used by the Journal Generator process.
To reverse entries that are created and post them again, use Reverse Posted
Entries in tandem with Rerun Depreciation Close. When you do this, the original
journal entry is reversed and a new entry is created.
When an entry has not been posted to the general ledger, use the rerun option.
Reverse Posted Entries does not reverse unposted entries.

Create budgeted Displays the resulting accounting entries as budgeted depreciation and lease
Depreciation payments. These entries are posted to the budget ledger that is specified in the
Business Unit Book options page when you run the Journal Generator process.

Process a range of assets Select to process a specific range of assets for a business unit, book, fiscal year,
and period. Use this option to split up a large volume of assets for a particular
business unit and book. Because the program AM_DPCLOSE commits its work
after each request, selecting this option accelerates the process. You can also use
this selection with the parallel option to take advantage of servers that have
parallel processors. This speeds up processing for large volumes of data.
For example, to increase throughput when creating depreciation accounting
entries for 1,000,000 assets, you can enter 10 requests to process 100,000 assets
each. Select Process in Parallel, and assign a processing sequence number to each
process request. Processing sequence numbers must be unique.
Use care when specifying From asset ID and To asset ID processing parameters,
as these parameters are inclusive. Overlapping can occur, and no edit is available
to verify that you have set up inclusive asset ranges. For example, suppose that
request 1 is processed from asset ID 0001 and to asset ID 0005. If request 2 is
processed from asset ID 0005 and to asset ID 9999, asset 0005 is processed
twice. You can use Query to verify ranges by counting the number of assets in
total and number of assets per range.

Note. If you use the interface between PeopleSoft Asset Management and PeopleSoft Billing, accounting
entries are created by these integrated transactions. How the entries are created is described in more detail in
the PeopleSoft Billing documentation.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up
Accounting Entry and Financial Processing for PeopleSoft Asset Management," Pages Used to Define
Accounting Entry for PeopleSoft Asset Management.

372 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 18 Creating PeopleSoft Asset Management Accounting Entries

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Integrating
PeopleSoft Asset Management with Other Products."

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing
PeopleSoft Asset Management Business Units," Understanding Asset Management Business and Cash
Generating Units.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise General Ledger 9.1 PeopleBook, "Making General Ledger Journal Entries."

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Billing 9.1 PeopleBook, "Integrating with PeopleSoft Asset Management."

Closing Accounting Periods

Access the Close Accounting Period page (Asset Management, Accounting Entries, Close Accounting Period,
Close Accounting Period).

Enter the year and period to be closed, and save the page. When a period has been closed, you cannot create
additional depreciation-related accounting entries for that period.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise General Ledger 9.1 PeopleBook, "Managing Interim and Year End Closing."

Running the Clearing Reconciliation Process

Access the Clearing Reconciliation page (Asset Management, Accounting Entries, Clearing Reconciliation,
Clearing Reconciliation).

Clearing Reconciliation page

PeopleSoft Asset Management provides an optional Capitalization Threshold feature that, once enabled, can
automatically determine capitalization status of an asset, by profile, based on its cost or quantity according to
limits that you define. The system classifies assets as capital, noncapital, or expense. The Clearing
Reconciliation process (AM_CLEREC) provides a way to reconcile accounting entries for expensed assets.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 373
Creating PeopleSoft Asset Management Accounting Entries Chapter 18

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up
Accounting Entry and Financial Processing for PeopleSoft Asset Management," Setting Up Capitalization
Thresholds.

When assets came from other sources, a debit is usually recorded to a fixed asset account and a clearing
account is credited that was previously debited in the source system. When an asset is deemed trackable
because of the specified threshold, the asset ID is generated but no accounting activities take place. This
reconciliation process provides a way to balance out the clearing account that was debited in the source
system and debit the expense account instead. This is not applicable to expensed (trackable) assets that are
entered directly in Asset Management with no clearing account.

Enter the parameters and run the process. The system searches noncapital assets for the specified parameters
in the acquisition detail. For each noncapital row that matches the system source, the following entry is
generated in the DIST_LN table:

Debit Credit Distribution Type

Expense Account EX

Clearing Account AP

374 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
 Chapter 19

Retiring Assets
This chapter provides an overview of asset retirement and discusses how to:

• Retire financial assets.

• Retire nonfinancial assets.

• Reinstate assets.

• Run the Tax Retirement Capital Gains report (AMTX3210).

Understanding Asset Retirement

PeopleSoft Asset Management enables you to fully or partially retire assets in the past, present, or future.
Occasionally, a retirement transaction may require a reversal. In that case, you can reinstate a retired asset
using the pages in the Asset Retirements component.

You retire assets when they are either disposed of or no longer in use. When you retire an asset, PeopleSoft
Asset Management creates all the necessary journal entries. For example, when you sell an asset, the system
calculates depreciation through the date of the sale, as well as any gain or loss. In addition, you can have the
system create journal entries corresponding to each of these events. Gains and losses are booked to separate
accounts, providing flexibility in updating general ledger journals and balances.

An asset is retired by its book designation; therefore, you can retire an asset in one book, but it is still
available for depreciation in others. You can reinstate retired assets at any time. When assets are reinstated,
depreciation starts again for them if they are not fully depreciated.

Retirement Types
Assets are fully or partially retired by quantity or by cost. You can also enter retroactive retirement
information for assets that were actually retired in a prior accounting period.

Full Retirement

When the full quantity and total cost of an asset are retired, the asset is considered fully retired. The asset is
taken off the books after the retirement has been fully processed and accounting entries have been created. No
further depreciation accrues.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 375
Retiring Assets Chapter 19

Partial Retirement

You can partially retire an asset, and the system continues to process depreciation for the amount that
remains. Two types of partial retirement are available:

• By quantity

You can partially retire assets by quantity. For example, if you have 250 computers, and you sell 50 of
them to employees, you enter the 50 units as the quantity retired. PeopleSoft Asset Management
calculates the corresponding cost.

• By cost

You can partially retire assets by cost. For example, suppose that you partially retire a computer for the
price of the computer monitor, 400 USD, and you sell the monitor for 100 USD. The total cost of the
computer is 1500 USD. The cost (400 USD) is the amount retired, and the 100 USD is the proceeds from
the sale. PeopleSoft Asset Management automatically calculates the gain or loss based on these amounts.

Prior Period

To enter a retirement transaction for an asset that was actually retired in a prior accounting period, you must
enter transaction and accounting dates that reflect the actual retirement and the accounting period in which
you want the retirement posted. For example, suppose that an asset sold on April 30 was processed as a
retirement in PeopleSoft Asset Management on June 30. By the time the asset is entered as a retirement,
depreciation expense for May and June post to the general ledger. That posting results in overstated
accumulated depreciation and an incorrect gain or loss. To correctly process this retirement, you would
specify April 30 as the transaction date and—assuming all prior periods are closed—June 30 as the
accounting date. PeopleSoft Asset Management then reverses the accumulated depreciation attributable for
May and June and calculates the correct gain or loss on the asset.

Retiring Financial Assets

This section discusses how to:

• Retire an asset.

• Define other retirement options.

• Select retirement transactions by ChartField.

• Select child assets.

• Review a capital gain summary for retirements.

• Integrate retired asset information with PeopleSoft Billing.

• Specify how value-added tax (VAT) is calculated for asset retirement.

• Auto-retire fully depreciated assets.

• Initiate asset retirement using the disposal worksheet.

• Put assets up for auction.

376 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 19 Retiring Assets

Pages Used to Retire Financial Assets

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Retire Assets ASSET_RETIRE_01 Asset Management, Asset Retire or reinstate an asset.

Transactions, Asset Click the appropriate button
Disposal, Retire/Reinstate to access other fields based
Asset on your selection.

Like Kind Exchange LIKE_KIND_EXCH Click the Like Kind Enter fair values and
Exchange Info (like-kind descriptions for each asset
exchange information) link to add multiple assets as
on the Retire Assets page. part of a like-kind
In the Retire As field, select exchange.
the Like Kind Exchange
option to display the link.

General Info CUST_GENERAL1 Click the Customer General Search for and select
Info link on the Retire customer information to add
Assets page. for retirements by sale or
trade.

Retire/Reinstate Assets - ASSET_RETIRE_02 Asset Management, Asset Select assets to be retired

Other Options Transactions, Asset based on gain or loss and on
Disposal, Retire/Reinstate other options.
Assets, Other Options

Retire/Reinstate Assets - By ASSET_RETIRE_03 Asset Management, Asset Override PeopleSoft Asset

ChartField Transactions, Asset Management calculations
Disposal, Retire/Reinstate when shared assets are
Assets, By Chartfield partially retired.

Child Assets CHILD_ASSETS Asset Management, Asset Select child assets to

Transactions, Asset include in a retirement
Disposal, Retire/Reinstate transaction that you have
Asset, Child Assets initiated against the parent
on the Retire Assets page.

Child Asset Retirement AM_PARCHD_RET01 Click Child Details on the Specify retirement overrides
Options Child Assets page. for a specific child asset.
For example, you might
specify a different
retirement disposal code for
the child asset.

Advanced Transaction FULL_PART_SEC Click Child Details on the Specify transaction

Details Child Assets page. overrides for all child assets
at once.

Proceeds and Removal Cost AM_PARCHD_ALLOC Click the Allocation Option Specify allocation options
Allocation link on the Child Assets to calculate removal cost
page. and proceeds for the parent
(if selected) and selected
children.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 377
Retiring Assets Chapter 19

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

VAT AM_VAT_TRANS_RET Asset Management, Asset Specify options to use to

Transactions, Asset calculate VAT on an asset
Disposal, Retire/Reinstate retirement.
Asset, VAT

Auto-Retire Fully Depr RUN_AMRETFDA Asset Management, Asset Identify run-control

Assets (automatically retire Transactions, Asset parameters to initiate the
fully depreciated assets) Disposal, Auto-Retire Fully Auto-Retire Fully
Depr Assets Depreciated Assets process
(RUN_AMRETFDA).

Auto-Retired Assets RUN_AMRET001 Asset Management, Identify run-control

Financial Reports, parameters to generate the
Retirement, Auto-Retired Auto-Retire Assets report.
Assets Report

Proceeds and Removal Cost ASSET_RETIRE_SEC1 Click the Base Amounts View the transaction in the
and Exchange Rate icon. base currency, alternate
currency, and associated
exchange rate.

Capital Gain ASSET_RETIRE_05 Asset Management, Asset View the calculations for
Transactions, Asset capital gains or losses for a
Disposal, Retire/Reinstate retirement transaction.
Assets, Capital Gain

Bill Information ASSET_RETIRE_07 Asset Management, Asset Define default values for
Transactions, Asset PeopleSoft Billing.
Disposal, Retire/Reinstate
Assets, Bill Information

AM/BI Interface (Asset RUN_AMBI_INTFC Asset Management, Run the PeopleSoft Asset
Management - Billing Send/Receive Information, Management - Billing
interface) Load Interface, Interface interface.
AM to Billing

Disposal Worksheet AM_EXPRESS_RET1 Asset Management, Asset Identify and submit assets
Transactions, Asset for disposal.
Disposal, Disposal
Worksheet

Asset Information, AM_DISPOSAL_00 Click the Retrieve button on Retrieve assets according to
the Disposal Worksheet the search criteria entered.
Retirement Information,
page. The system displays the
Other Accounting Asset Information,
Information Retirement Information, and
Other Accounting
Information tabs.

378 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 19 Retiring Assets

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

ChartField Search Criteria AM_LOOKUP_CF_SEL Asset Management, Asset Select ChartFields to use as
Transactions, Asset search criteria.
Disposal, Disposal
Worksheet
Click the ChartField Search
Criteria link.

Ownership Details AM_DISPOSAL_01 Asset Management, Asset View the original asset
Transactions, Asset owner selection attributes.
Disposal, Disposal
Worksheet
Click the View Ownership
Details link.

Approve Disposals AM_DISP_APPR01 Asset Management, Asset Deny or approve a

Transactions, Asset retirement disposal, or place
Disposal, Approve it on hold.
Disposals

Retiring an Asset
Access the Retire Assets page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Asset Disposal, Retire/Reinstate
Asset, Retire Assets).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 379
Retiring Assets Chapter 19

Retire Assets page

Trans Date (transaction The transaction date reflects the date that the retirement actually occurred.
date) Usually, an actual transaction occurs before you enter it in PeopleSoft Asset
Management. The transaction date and the prorate convention determine how
much of the depreciation taken in PeopleSoft Asset Management must be
recovered.

Acctg Date (accounting The accounting date determines when the retirement transaction is posted to the
date) general ledger.

Rate Type Select an exchange rate type for the transaction if you use multiple currencies in
processing and the retirement transaction is not in the base currency of the
business unit.

In Physical Use This flag is informational only on the Retire Assets page. Only those assets that
are selected for physical use are included in the ITAM comparison process. If
this flag was selected before retirement, it is automatically deselected after the
asset is retired. This flag can be selected or deselected on the Basic Add page or
the Define Asset Operational Info page.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise IT Asset Management 9.1 PeopleBook, "Working with
the Asset Repository."

380 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 19 Retiring Assets

Book

Book Name Enter the book in which this asset retirement is recorded.

Retire As Specify the type of retirement transactions to process by selecting from the list of
disposal codes. Then, depending on the asset's status, click GO or Reinstate..
Until you click one of these buttons, you cannot enter information into other
fields.

Note. To reinstate a specific retired transaction, scroll to the transaction and

select the Reinstate check box before clicking the Reinstate button.

Copy Changes to Other Selected by default, this option keeps all books in sync by copying this
Books transaction to all other books that are defined for the asset. Clear the check box if
you do not want to copy changes to other books.

Base Currency, As of These fields display the corresponding information as defined for this asset in the
Quantity and Cost selected book before you save your changes. You can use this information as a
reference when you enter quantity or amount information to partially retire an
asset.

Note. If you process asset transactions in multiple currencies, the retirement

transaction can be performed in a currency different from that of the asset base
currency or the book currency. The Base Currency field is informational. It
displays the default currency from the selected asset's business unit.

Disposal Codes

Disposal codes reflect the Retire As action that is selected to initiate the retirement transaction. PeopleSoft
Asset Management calculates gain or loss amounts depending, in part, on the disposal code that you select.
This table describes the available options in the Retire As field:

Code Usage Gain/Loss

Abandonment Select when the asset has no resale Gain/loss calculations are based on
value and it is left behind. For the asset net book value.
example, consider leasehold
improvements. At the end of the
lease term, the improvements are
generally left behind and no
removal costs are incurred when
you turn over the improvement to
the lessor.

Auto-Retire Fully Depr Asset Select when the asset is fully Gain/loss calculations are based on
depreciated. the asset net book value.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 381
Retiring Assets Chapter 19

Code Usage Gain/Loss

Cannibalize for Other Assets Select when the asset has been Gain/loss calculations are based on
dismantled and the parts are reused the asset net book value.
within the organization. For
example, if an employee reuses a
monitor that is part of an unused
computer, you would retire the
monitor as cannibalized. Typically,
cannibalized assets are partially
retired. They have no proceeds and
no removal costs.

Casualty Loss Select when an asset is PeopleSoft Asset Management

unintentionally destroyed. If the deducts the accumulated
asset cannot be sold, you may incur depreciation from the retirement
removal costs disposing of it. amount and adds the removal costs
Retiring an asset as a casualty may to determine the amount of the
have tax consequences if you have casualty loss.
tax credits and the asset is not fully
depreciated.

Disappeared Assets Select when an asset cannot be Gain/loss calculations are based on
located and you are not sure the asset net book value.
whether the asset was abandoned or
stolen. Disappeared assets have no
proceeds or removal costs.

Disposal Due to Theft Select when an asset has been Stolen assets have no proceeds and
stolen. no removal costs.

Donated to External Group Select when an asset is donated. PeopleSoft Asset Management
You typically use this option when deducts the accumulated
assets are donated to nonprofit depreciation from the retirement
organizations for tax purposes. amount, treating proceeds and
removal costs as appropriate, to
determine the gain or loss.

Note. VAT is applicable for VAT

business units.

382 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 19 Retiring Assets

Code Usage Gain/Loss

Expensed Select when an asset has The accounting entry template for
adjustments to the original cost that this disposal code reflects the loss
requires reclassification from account as the expense. Previous
capital asset to expensed asset due depreciation expense is recognized
to its cost. If the Capitalization as expense too. The Interface Type
Threshold feature is enabled, Asset is RET.
Management automatically assigns
this disposal code through the
Capitalization Threshold Validation
process if the original cost falls
below the capitalization threshold.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset
Lifecycle Management
Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Setting Up Accounting Entry and
Financial Processing for PeopleSoft
Asset Management," Setting Up
Capitalization Thresholds.

Like Kind Exchange Select to process like-kind See Chapter 19, "Retiring Assets,"
exchanges under U.S. federal tax Like-Kind Exchange Processing,
code. page 389.

Missing Asset Select when an asset is missing. Gain/loss calculations are based on
Missing assets have no proceeds the asset net book value.
and no removal costs.

Retirement by Sale Select if you sell an asset. (If you The proceeds and removal cost
sell the entity that owns the asset, from the sale, less the net book
you must retire all assets that are value of the asset, determines the
owned by the entity.) You can use gain or loss.
the interface with PeopleSoft
Billing to generate the bill. Note. VAT is applicable for VAT
business units.

Returned to Inventory Select when the asset is returned to PeopleSoft Asset Management
a common internal pool where it is deducts the accumulated
available for others to use. depreciation from the retirement
amount, treating proceeds and
removal costs as appropriate, to
determine the gain or loss.

Note. VAT is applicable for VAT

business units.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 383
Retiring Assets Chapter 19

Code Usage Gain/Loss

Scrapped Assets Select when the asset is no longer The gain/loss calculations include
useful and has no resale value. removal costs; accumulated
depreciation is deducted and then
the removal costs are added to
derive the amount of the gain or
loss.

Traded In for another Asset Use when you are trading one asset PeopleSoft Asset Management
for another. deducts the accumulated
depreciation from the retirement
See Processing Trade-Ins.
amount, treating proceeds and
removal costs as appropriate, to
determine the gain or loss.

Note. VAT is applicable for VAT

business units.

Quantity When you select a disposal code, the system automatically populates the
Quantity field with the total number of units, and the Retirement Amount field
with the total cost for all units. Adjust either the quantity or the cost for a partial
retirement. If you adjust the number of units, the cost is recalculated. If you
adjust the cost, the quantity is recalculated. When performing a full retirement, it
is not necessary to adjust quantity or amount retired; enter any proceeds from the
sale of this asset and any removal costs that you may have incurred. When
performing a partial retirement, change either the quantity or cost that will be
retired.

Removal Cost and RC Enter the amount of any cost for removal and select the currency for the cost.
Curr (removal cost
currency)
Proceeds and Pr Curr Enter the amount of the proceeds for the transaction and select the currency of
(proceeds currency) the proceeds.

When you have transactions involving currencies other than base currency, click
the Base Amounts and Exchange Rate icon to access the Proceeds and Removal
Cost page. You can review base amounts and exchange rates. You cannot make
changes on this page.

Convention Specify the convention to use to calculate depreciation through retirement.

Generally, the same depreciation convention is used to retire an asset as was used
when the asset was in service. However, you can change the convention to
manipulate depreciation processing. For example, assuming a calendar year, an
asset retired on April 15 will be depreciated as follows:
Actual Day: (asset is depreciated through April 15)
Actual Month: (asset is depreciated through March 31)
Following Month: (asset is depreciated through April 30)

384 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 19 Retiring Assets

Transaction Code Select to identify the reason for the retirement or reinstatement.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 385
Retiring Assets Chapter 19

Retire Option Select the retirement calculation option to be processed for the transaction.
Options are:
• Calculate Gain/Loss

Select to calculate gain or loss that is associated with the retirement of an

asset without fully depreciating the asset. Select if assets should not be fully
depreciated at retirement so that the accounting entries passed to the general
ledger will include gain or loss information.

• Fully Depr no Future Expense

Select to process the asset as fully depreciated with no future depreciation

expenses, regardless of how much depreciation has actually been calculated.
The accounting entries passed to the general ledger will not include gain and
loss information. (This remains true as long as no proceeds or removal cost
have been assigned for that particular asset.)

This option is used generally within the utility industry for group assets and
assumes that assets are fully depreciated at retirement regardless of how
much depreciation has actually been calculated. Depreciation expense is
debited for the full cost basis of the asset at the time of retirement, resulting
in no gain or loss. Net book value (NBV) will remain, however.

• Fully Depr with Future Expense

Select to process the asset as fully depreciated, regardless of how much

depreciation has actually been calculated, but future depreciation expenses
may be created. The accounting entries passed to the general ledger will not
include gain and loss information. (This remains true as long as no proceeds
or removal cost have been assigned for that particular asset.) The depreciation
close process (AM_DPCLOSE) generates the accounting entries for any
remaining expense.

Note. Fully depreciated assets are also called fully reserved assets.

For example, if you retire an asset with an original cost basis of 10,000 USD and
accumulated depreciation of 8,000 USD, the NBV is 2,000 USD. When you run
the Accounting Entry Creation process (AM_AMAEDIST) to create accounting
entries, the system looks at the selection for the Retire Option field:
If you select Calculate Gain/Loss, the system creates the following accounting
entries: Debit Accumulated Depreciation for 8,000 USD; Debit Loss for 2,000
USD; and Credit Fixed Asset for 10,000 USD.
If you select Fully Depr no Future Expense, no gain or loss is recorded, and the
accounting entries are Debit Accumulated Depreciation for 10,000 USD and
Credit Fixed Asset for 10,000 USD.
If you select Fully Depr with Future Expense, the accounting entries are Debit
Accumulated Depreciation for 10,000 USD; Credit Fixed Asset for 10,000 USD;
Debit Depreciation Expense for 2,000 USD; and Credit Accumulated
Depreciation for 2,000 USD.

Note. When you select Fully Depr with Future Expense, the first two rows are
created by the Accounting Entry Creation process (AM_AMAEDIST.) The last

386 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 19 Retiring Assets

two rows are created by the Depreciation Close process (AM_DPCLOSE.)

Note. The default for the Retire Option is from the Asset Book level. If the Retire
Option at the Asset Book level is blank, the default value comes from the Asset
Profile table. If this is also blank, the default value is Calculate Gain/Loss.

Retirement Amt Displays the amount of the retirement transaction in the base currency.
(retirement amount)
Base Removal Cost Displays the base removal cost, translated to the base currency.

Base Proceeds Displays the base proceeds, translated to the base currency.

Accum Depr Displays the accumulated depreciation for the asset, which is displayed after you
(accumulated have run the depreciation calculation process (AM_DEPR_CALC).
depreciation)
Gain/Loss Displays the amount of the gain or loss on the transaction after you run the
depreciation calculation process (AM_DEPR_CALC).

Customer/Ship from Information

This region of the Retire Assets page enables you to retrieve customer information that is related to a
retirement-by-sale transaction. The fields appear only when this value is selected as the retirement option or if
the retirement option is Traded In, Donated, or Returned to Inventoryand the business unit is VAT-enabled.

Ship from Loc (ship from The default ship-from location is the asset location. If no asset location is
location) defined, the default is the business unit location. This field is required only for
business units that are VAT-enabled.

Customer ID Enter the customer ID for the customer who is billed for the transaction. The
value that is entered determines VAT values. When you enter the customer ID,
default values for customer location, bill-to-location, sold-to, and ship-to
information are supplied automatically, if applicable. Click the Search button to
view a list of the valid customer IDs for the business unit. When you enter a
customer ID, the location is set to the default location and the ship-to and sold-to
Customer IDs and locations are set to the same values.

Loc (location) Enter the location ID for the customer location that is associated with the
customer ID.

Note. Click the Search button to view a list of the valid customer location IDs for
the business unit.

Sold To Customer Enter the customer ID for the customer that ordered and purchased the asset. This
value is not necessarily the same as the value in the Customer ID field.

Sold Loc (sold location) Enter the location ID for the customer that ordered or purchased the asset. This
value is not necessarily the same as the location in the Loc field.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 387
Retiring Assets Chapter 19

Ship To Customer Enter the customer ID where the assets will be shipped. Depending on the
PeopleSoft Billing interface options that you selected, this field appears when
shipping information is associated with the selected customer ID. This value is
not necessarily the same as the value in the Customer ID field.

Ship Loc (buyer location) Enter the location ID associated with the ship-to customer. Customers can have
several location addresses associated with them, each identified by a location
number.

Create Bill Select to generate a PeopleSoft Billing invoice when the disposal method is
Retirement by Sale. This option does not appear if PeopleSoft Asset Management
is not integrated with PeopleSoft Billing or if you did not enable the interface at
implementation.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Billing 9.1 PeopleBook, "Integrating with PeopleSoft Asset Management."

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Integrating
PeopleSoft Asset Management with Other Products," Integrating with PeopleSoft Billing.

Customer General Info

Click the Customer General Info (customer general information) link to access the Customer General
Information page. A new window opens and displays the page.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Order to Cash Common Information 9.1 PeopleBook, "Maintaining General
Customer Information."

VAT

To access the VAT page, click this link or select the VAT tab at the top of the page. This tab and link appear
only for VAT-enabled business units.

Note. The VAT default values are automatically applied the first time that you access the page by clicking the
link. However, if you change the customer, ship-from, or ship-to information after the VAT default values are
applied, the default values are not automatically updated. In this case, go to the VAT page and click the Reset
All VAT Defaults button to redetermine all the defaults. This action is not necessary if only the proceeds
information has changed.

The fields that appear on the VAT page are specific to the transaction that is recorded. In addition to
depending on proceeds, the VAT default values that appear depend on the customer ID, location, ship-to ID,
ship-to location, and ship-from location (or the ship-to country, ship-to state, buyer's registration country, and
ship-from location if no customer information is available). The VAT drivers also determine which default
values appear. The VAT drivers for assets are, in descending order of precedence: asset class, customer
location, customer, PeopleSoft Asset Management business unit definition, VAT entity registration, and VAT
country. The algorithm for the defaults selects information from asset class first, followed by customer
location, followed by customer, and so on.

VAT is enabled based on the disposal code that is used in the transaction. VAT applies for the following
disposal codes:

• Retirement by Sale

• Traded In for Another Asset

388 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 19 Retiring Assets

• Donated to External Group

• Returned to Inventory

See Chapter 19, "Retiring Assets," Specifying How VAT Is Calculated for Asset Retirement, page 401.

Traded-In Asset Processing

To retire an asset by trading it for another asset:

1. Retire the asset using the disposal code in the Traded-In for Another Asset field.

2. Enter the amount that is gained through the trade-in into the Proceeds field.

3. Run depreciation to calculate the gain or loss amount.

4. Add the new asset by using the Asset ExpressAdd component and select Trade-in as the acquisition code.

5. Enter the asset ID of the asset that you traded into the Trade-in field.

Note. Be sure to run depreciation whenever you retire an asset. This process calculates the gain or loss
amount. The proceeds are offset against the cost of the asset that is acquired as part of the exchange.

Like-Kind Exchange Processing

Access the Like Kind Exchange page by clicking the Like Kind Exchange Info link on the Retire Assets page.
For the Retire As field, select the Like Kind Exchange option to display the link.

PeopleSoft Asset Management supports 1031 Like-Kind Exchange regulations under the U.S. federal tax
code. It enables you to:

• Retire an asset using a like-kind disposal code, recognize the gain that results, and roll the correct tax
basis over to the newly acquired asset.

• Verify, through a comparison of the disposition date and the replacement date, that the 180-day exchange
rule is met.

• Generate appropriate accounting entries for like-kind exchanges.

• Run reports that detail each like-kind transaction and show the carry forward of the tax basis from the old
assets to the new assets.

Click the Like-Kind Exchange Info link to enter retirement information that is specific to a retirement
transaction.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 389
Retiring Assets Chapter 19

Like Kind Exchange page

To process like-kind exchanges:

1. Retire an asset using the like-kind exchange disposal code.

• Enter any cash that is received as part of the exchange in the Cash field. Cash that is received in a like-
kind exchange is taxable and is often referred to as boot.

• Enter the fair value of the like asset that you will be adding in the FV Like-Kind field.

For example, if you are retiring a building and adding another building that is valued at 60,000 USD,
enter 60,000 into the FV Like-Kind field. If you plan to add more than one like asset, select One to
Many to access the one-to-many list, where you can enter the values and descriptions of assets that
you are adding.

• If you will also receive non-like property as part of this exchange, enter its fair value in the FV Non
Like-Kind field.

A gain that is realized through the acquisition of non-like property is taxable.

• Enter the amount of your liability into the Net Liability field.

For example, if you are surrendering a building with a mortgage of 70,000 USD and acquiring a
building with a mortgage of 30,000 USD, then enter 40,000 USD as the net liability.

The system sums the values in the Cash, FV and Net Liability fields and populates the Proceeds field with
the result. You cannot change this amount.

PeopleSoft Asset Management prorates basis calculations when you perform a one-to-many exchange.

390 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 19 Retiring Assets

2. Run the Depreciation Calculation process, which calculates both the realized gain and the recognized
gain.

You can view the result of this calculation in the Gain/Loss field on the Retire Assets page. Any realized
loss is not recognized.

3. Add the new asset by using the Asset ExpressAdd component.

Select Like-Kind Exchange as the acquisition code, and select the asset ID of the retired asset.

The asset category automatically displays the category of the retired asset, and the cost fields are
populated with the cost basis for the new asset. You cannot change either the category or the cost
amounts.

Note. The FV entered on the Like Kind Exchange page is not automatically assigned as the fair value of
the newly acquired asset.

See Chapter 5, "Adding and Maintaining Assets," Adding and Maintaining Asset Information, page 48.

PeopleSoft Asset Management prorates basis calculations when you perform a one-to-many exchange.

One to Many ID Enter a one-to-many ID to identify the exchange.

Transaction Trade In For each asset that you add, enter a trade-in value and description.
Value/Description

Like-Kind Exchange Example

If the owner of Building A wants to exchange it for Building B, Building A is retired using the like-kind
disposal code, and Building B is added through the Asset ExpressAdd component.

Transaction Building A (Retiring) Building B (Adding)

Cost 85,000 USD 60,000 USD

Liability (Mortgage) 70,000 USD 30,000 USD

Accumulated Depreciation 10,000 USD None

PeopleSoft Asset Management calculates boot, which is any cash or non-like property that is involved in the
transaction, like this:

(Cash Received) + (FV of Non-like Property Received) + (Liability Assumed) = Boot

Note. Boot is money or other property that does not qualify for nonrecognition of gain.

In this example, boot is calculated like this: 0 + 0 + 40,000 = 40,000.

When you run the Depreciation Calculation process, the process identifies the recognized gain as the lesser of
the boot amount or the realized gain.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 391
Retiring Assets Chapter 19

In this example, in which the boot amount is 40,000 and the realized gain is 25,000, the recognized gain is
25,000.

PeopleSoft Asset Management calculates the cost basis of the property exchanged (retired) like this:

(Cost) − (Accumulated Depreciation) = (Cost Basis of Property Exchanged)

In this example, it is calculated like this: 85,000 – 10,000 = 75,000

PeopleSoft Asset Management calculates the cost basis of the added property added like this:

(Basis of Retired Property) − (Boot Amount) + (Recognized Gain or Loss) = (Basis of the Added Property)

In this example, it is calculated like this: 75,000 − 40,000 + 25,000 = 60,000

Defining Other Retirement Options

Access the Retire/Reinstate Assets - Other Options page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Asset
Disposal, Retire/Reinstate Assets, Other Options).

Retire/Reinstate Assets - Other Options page

Gain/Loss Calculations

PeopleSoft Asset Management provides three methods for calculating retirement gain or loss. You can use
these methods separately or in combination. Select the appropriate check box in the Gain/Loss Calculations
group box.

392 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 19 Retiring Assets

Use Original Cost and Select to exclude certain kinds of transactions from the calculation. Do this by
Basis Reduction Code selecting a basis reduction code (this selection is required when Use Original
Cost is selected). For example, if you revalued an asset but want to exclude the
revaluation from the gain/loss calculation at retirement, then you would select the
basis reduction code that you set up to exclude revaluations. PeopleSoft Asset
Management reverses the revaluation and calculates gain/loss using the resulting
net book value.

Note. For the Use Original Cost option to work correctly, any transaction types
that you want to exclude must have distinct transaction codes.

Recalc Cost Using Index Select to adjust the cost of an asset, as well as any subsequent transactions,
(recalculate cost using according to any index that you have set up in PeopleSoft Asset Management.
index), Index Name, and For example, if you have set up an index to account for inflation, you can
SubIndex calculate gain/loss using the original cost and any subsequent transactions
adjusted for inflation. This enables you to book the gain or loss adjusted for
inflation. When you select this check box, you must enter an index and subindex
to use in the recalculation.

Reference Code Enter information to track the asset, such as retirement documentation or asset
ID. This field is optional.

Include Non-Capitalized Select to include any noncapitalized costs in the net book value of an asset.
Costs
Trade In Asset Displays the ID of the new traded-in asset.

Auto-Retired Indicates that the asset was automatically retired by the Auto-Retire process
(AMRETFDA).

Conversion

Voluntary and Select one or the other to indicate whether this is a Voluntary or Involuntary
Involuntary retirement. This selection is informational only

Type

Ordinary and Select to indicate how the gain or loss that results from the retirement should be
Extraordinary reported. This selection is informational only.

Selecting Retirement Transactions by ChartField

Access the Retire/Reinstate Assets - By ChartField page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Asset
Disposal, Retire/Reinstate Assets, By Chartfield).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 393
Retiring Assets Chapter 19

By Chartfield page

Override the system selections by entering an amount in the Retire Amt (retire amount) field or the Quantity
field. Typically, you use this page only when assets are split between departments or partially retired.

For example, suppose that the Sales and Marketing departments share 40 color monitors worth a total of
10,000 USD, and these assets are added to PeopleSoft Asset Management. Based on projected use, the Sales
department is allocated 70 percent of the total cost and quantity and Marketing is allocated 30 percent. After a
couple of years, all the color monitors are upgraded to flat screen, resulting in the retirement of monitors with
a total cost of 10,000 USD. Based on the original allocation of cost, the system fully retires the assets with 70
percent of the retirement amount allocated to Sales (department 21101) and 30 percent to Marketing
(department 22001).

However, if Sales decides that some of their monitors are worth keeping, only 50 percent, rather than 70
percent, of the total cost is retired. To make these changes, either override the amount in the Retire Amt field
with 5,000 USD allocated to the Sales department or override the amount in the Quantity field with 20
allocated to Sales.

Note. When you perform a retirement by ChartField, for each ChartField combination you can retire only a
cost or quantity that is less than or equal to the amount that was originally apportioned to that ChartField
combination.

Selecting Child Assets

Access the Child Assets page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Asset Disposal, Retire/Reinstate
Asset, Child Assets).

394 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 19 Retiring Assets

Child Assets page

Note. The Child Assets page appears in several different components of PeopleSoft Asset Management.
Within the Asset Retirements component, use the Child Assets page to select child assets to include in the
retirement transaction that you have initiated against its parent on the Retire Assets page. Also, you cannot
view or perform transactions on child assets whose parent was created using the Asset Parent page.

Click Select All to include all child assets with the parent in the transaction that you have initiated.

Note. Parent assets created on the Parent Asset page (parent-only assets) do not have cost or basic
information. They cannot be viewed in the Parent Child Basic Information component, nor can they be
viewed or transacted against in the Asset Cost/Adjust Transfers component, the Asset Retirements
component, or the Parent-Child NBV component. If you want to use a parent asset as a reporting umbrella
only and access these pages for manipulating child assets in mass, we suggest creating a zero-cost parent asset
rather than a parent-only asset. Also, to transact against parent and child assets at one time, parent and child
must use the same asset profile. Also, be aware that physical asset components will not be retired when the
physical parent component is retired.

To include only some child assets, select the Selected check box for the appropriate rows.

Tag Number The tag that is assigned to the child asset. Parent and child assets can share the
same tag number.

Description The child asset description.

Child Asset ID The asset ID that is assigned to the child asset.

Cost The cost of the child asset.

Currency The currency in which child asset costs are stored.

Acq Date(acquisition The date the asset was acquired.

date)

The Include Parent Asset check box is selected by default. Deselecting it enables you to perform transactions
on child assets while excluding the parent asset from the transactions. However, the transaction details must
be specified on the parent.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 395
Retiring Assets Chapter 19

Child Details

Click the Child Details link to access the Child Asset RET Overrides page, where you can specify overrides
for a specific child asset for the transaction, including disposal code, removal cost, proceeds, quantity, retire
amount, transaction percentage, convention and retirement option.

Asset Information

Click the Asset Information link to access another copy of the Retire Assets page. The page will open
populated with the child asset.

Advanced Transaction Details

Click the Advanced Txn Details (advanced transaction details) link to access the Parent Asset Adv Txn
Options page, where you can specify overrides that will be applied to all child assets at one time.

Proceeds and Removal Cost Allocation

Click the Allocation Option link to access the Proceeds and Removal Cost Allocation page. This link is only
visible for retirements on the Child Assets page.

Proceeds and Removal Cost Allocation page

396 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 19 Retiring Assets

Allocation Type Select one of the following allocation types:

• Proportion: The cost of the selected child assets is divided by the cost of the
parent asset to determine the percent of removal cost and proceeds to
allocate. The removal cost and proceeds are then multiplied by the respective
percentages to determine the allocation ((child cost / parent cost) * proceeds
or removal cost).

• Prorata: This allocation type can be based on cost or quantity, depending

upon your selection in the Alloc. Basis field. The total cost or quantity for all
selected assets is summed. (If the Include Parent Asset check box is selected,
the parent cost or quantity is also summed. For each child selected on the
Child Asset page, include the cost or quantity. Then for each individual asset,
the cost or quantity is divided by the summed amount to give the assets
percentage of the total for all assets. This number will then be multiplied by
the Removal Cost and/or Proceeds to determine that assets share of the
amounts entered: ((asset cost / summed cost) * proceeds or removal cost).
This can also be quantified as: (proceeds/parent cost) * child cost .

• Evenly: The amounts entered for removal cost and proceeds are distributed
evenly between the selected assets (children and parent, if selected).

• Copy: The amounts entered for removal cost and proceeds are copied as is to
the selected assets (children and parent, if selected).

Alloc. Basis(allocation This option is only available when the Allocation Type field value is Prorata.
basis) Select to allocate proceeds and removal cost based on:
• Cost

• Quantity

Removal Cost and RC The default value is the parent's removal cost. Retain this original value or
Curr (removal cost change the removal cost to be allocated.
currency)
Proceeds and Pr Curr The default value is the parent's proceeds. Retain this value or change the
(proceeds currency) proceeds to be allocated.

Include Parent Asset This check box retains the value of the Include Parent selection from the Child
Asset page. If the check box is not selected on the Child Asset page, the selection
is not available for the Proceeds and Removal Cost Allocation page. This
selection determines if the parent asset's cost or quantity will be considered for
the allocation chosen. This only affects the Prorata and Evenly allocation types
and determines if the parent asset value changes. If this option is not selected, the
parent asset will not be considered in the calculation or disbursement.

Click OK to trigger the allocation calculation and disbursement of the removal cost and proceeds to the
selected assets according to the options that are specified. The Child Asset page will then display. You can
run the allocation as necessary; the latest values override any values that already exist on the selected assets.
Rounding differences are placed in last asset child that is processed.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 397
Retiring Assets Chapter 19

Reviewing a Capital Gain Summary for Retirements

Access the Capital Gain page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Asset Disposal, Retire/Reinstate
Assets, Capital Gain).

Capital Gain page

The Capital Gain tab appears when the business unit is enabled for Australian tax. The capital gains or losses
for the retirement transaction are summarized on this page after retirement processes have run.

Integrating Retired Asset Information with PeopleSoft Billing

Access the Bill Information page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Asset Disposal, Retire/Reinstate
Assets, Bill Information).

Bill Information page

Note. Only assets that are retired with the disposal code Retirement by Sale are affected.

398 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 19 Retiring Assets

PeopleSoft Asset Management can be fully integrated with PeopleSoft Billing to automatically create bills
when you retire assets using the Retirement by Sale disposal code. If you have implemented PeopleSoft
Billing with PeopleSoft Asset Management and you have activated the PeopleSoft Asset Management-Billing
interface for the processing business unit, this additional retirement tab is enabled.

BI Unit (billing business Select the PeopleSoft Billing business unit that processes the asset sale to
unit) generate an invoice for the sale transaction. The PeopleSoft Billing business unit
is defined at the business unit level, but it can be overridden at the asset level.

Trans Status (transaction Displays the transaction status of the invoice within the PeopleSoft Asset
status) Management process. Values are:
• Pending

When you opt to generate an invoice through PeopleSoft Billing for a

retirement transaction, the default status is Pending until the transaction is
processed by the PeopleSoft Asset Management-Billing interface
(AM_BI_INTFC).

• In Progress

When the PeopleSoft Asset Management - Billing interface is running, the

transaction status is updated to In Progress.

• Complete

When the retirement transaction has been loaded into PeopleSoft Billing for
processing, the transaction status is updated to Complete.

• Ignore

If you reinstate this asset before the PeopleSoft Asset Management -Billing
interface is processed, the bill create and credit bill transactions appear in the
interface. In this case, the PeopleSoft system cancels the initial retirement and
the status of the billing request changes to Ignore. To proceed with the
retirement, you must reenter the retirement transaction. You cannot generate
a reinstatement until PeopleSoft Billing creates the invoice number (after
BIIF0001 is run). If you reinstate this asset before the PeopleSoft Asset
Management-Billing interface is processed but after running depreciation
calculation for the retirement, the system cancels the initial retirement and the
status of the billing request is changed to Ignore.

Invoice When the transaction has been processed in PeopleSoft Billing, the invoice
number that is assigned appears for future reference.

Line Seq (line sequence) When the invoice for the sale transaction has been processed in PeopleSoft
Billing, the line sequence number for this transaction appears. This value
identifies the invoice line number for the asset sale, and it appears when the
invoice is generated by PeopleSoft Billing.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 399
Retiring Assets Chapter 19

PeopleSoft Asset Management sends retirement information to the PeopleSoft Asset Management-Billing
business unit (usually the one with the same general-ledger business unit) and then PeopleSoft Billing
generates the invoice to the customer (also a general-ledger business unit). Depending on which PeopleSoft
Payables business unit has been defined in the InterUnit billing definition (general ledger business unit
definition), PeopleSoft Billing sends asset InterUnit information to PeopleSoft Payables, taking the vendor
and location from the retired asset's general-ledger business unit.

If a retirement is processed due to an InterUnit transfer, the information is also sent to PeopleSoft Payables,
including asset ID, asset profile, and cost type. When you are performing an InterUnit transaction, you must
complete additional information.

AM Unit Enter the business unit where the system adds or adjusts the asset through the
interface with PeopleSoft Payables.

Asset ID By default, the value is Next, but you can select another existing asset ID.

Profile ID Select the profile for the asset.

Cost Type (Optional) Select a cost type.

When you click Save, the retirement-by-sale create bill transactions are assigned the transaction status
Pending. Select the pending transactions to be included when you are ready to run the PeopleSoft Asset
Management-Billing (AMBI_INTFC) interface.

Processing Retirement with Sale Transactions in the PeopleSoft Billing Interface

Access the AM/BI Interface page (Asset Management, Send/Receive Information, Load Interface, Interface
AM to Billing).

After you enter retirement transactions for assets that PeopleSoft Billing invoices, you can initiate the process
to load the transactions for the AM/BI Interface process (RUN_AMBI_INTFC). Before you launch this
process, the retirement entries must be generated.

Enter the run control ID to use or add a new one. Enter the business unit and the asset ID range to be
processed, and click Run.

The process assembles the pending transactions that you have entered, attaches an interface ID, changes the
transaction status to In Progress, and displays the transactions in a view page (PS_INTFC_BI). The
transactions are loaded into PeopleSoft Billing for processing.

You can run the AM/Billing Transaction Status report to review the transactions that were processed. You
can review accounting entries before or after the PeopleSoft Asset Management-Billing interface has been
run.

Note. Reinstatements are processed according to two rules. First, if the reinstatement is performed before
sending the retirement information to PeopleSoft Billing, neither transaction is processed by the PeopleSoft
Asset Management-Billing interface. Second, reinstatements cannot be performed until the PeopleSoft Asset
Management-Billing interface application (BIIF0001) has been run for the asset's previous retirement.

When transactions between PeopleSoft Asset Management and PeopleSoft Billing occur, the system provides
a clearing account, Proceeds to Billing, which accumulates the income from the transactions and matches the
transactions to the PeopleSoft Asset Management accounting entries. This maintains balanced accounting
entries between the applications.

400 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 19 Retiring Assets

Running the AM/Billing Transaction Status Report

Access the AM/Billing Transaction Status page (Asset Management, Send/Receive Information, Load
Interface, Interface AM/ Billing).

Enter the appropriate PeopleSoft Asset Management business unit, and range of dates for the transactions that
you want to review. Click Run to generate and view the report.

Note. When processing a retirement-by-sale for a parent asset, you cannot generate an invoice for each child
asset in the same transaction. You have to dispose of each child asset separately.

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Integrating PeopleSoft
Asset Management with Other Products," Integrating with PeopleSoft Billing

Specifying How VAT Is Calculated for Asset Retirement

Access the VAT page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Asset Disposal, Retire/Reinstate Asset,
VAT).

VAT page (1 of 2)

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 401
Retiring Assets Chapter 19

VAT page (2 of 2)

If asset transactions involve VAT, the Retire/Reinstate Assets component includes the VAT page.

You must complete the following tasks before you can access this page:

• Set up the VAT defaults.

Associate the business unit with a general ledger business unit that is associated with a VAT entity.

• Enter customer ship-from information.

• Enter a proceeds amount on the Retire Assets page.

• Select Create Accounting Entries on the Business Unit/Book Definition page.

402 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 19 Retiring Assets

When you retire an asset, the VAT information is recorded with a VAT account entry type of VO (VAT
output). If you reinstate an asset that you have retired with VAT options, the reinstatement reverses the VAT
entries. When you reinstate an asset, the reversal of the VAT is recorded with a VAT account entry type of
VORE (VAT output reinstatement).

The VAT page contains several collapsible sections. Each section contains fields that are blank or that display
default values. VAT entries are created for all books that generate accounting entries if the associated general
ledger business unit is linked to a VAT entity.

The Book collapsible section displays information that is supplied by default from the book that is associated
with this asset.

The Retirement collapsible section displays information that is supplied by default from the current retirement
transaction that is being processed, or it contains blank fields. Within this section are several group boxes that
contain blank and populated fields.

The VAT Calculations collapsible section shows the calculated totals for the VAT transaction based on the
values that are selected on the page. It also displays the default VAT information for the business unit,
customer, and location.

Physical Nature

This collapsible section describes the physical nature of transactions. Options are Goods and Services.
PeopleSoft Asset Management manages transactions for goods only.

Physical Nature Indicates whether an object is a good or a service. In many countries, you must
report the sale or purchase of goods separately from services.

VAT Locations

You use location information to directly determine the reporting country, defaulting state, customer
registration country, and treatment. This information is in turn used to determine customer exception type,
VAT controls, and VAT details.

Ship From Country By default, this field displays the same value that is entered in the Ship from Loc
field on the Retire Assets page. This is the asset location or the PeopleSoft Asset
Management business-unit location.

Ship From State If the ship-from country is defined as tracking VAT by state or province, by
default this field displays information (when available) based on the Ship from
Loc field on the Retire Assets page.

Ship To Country By default, this field displays the customer's shipping address. This field always
has an initial value.

Ship To State If the ship-to country is defined as tracking VAT by state or province, by default
this field displays the information (when available) from the customer's shipping
address. .

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 403
Retiring Assets Chapter 19

VAT Defaults

VAT Registrations The fields in this collapsible section are:

• Reporting Country: Displays the country for which this VAT is reported.
This is the VAT entity's VAT registration country, and it determines many of
the VAT defaults.

• Customer Registration Country and Customer Registration ID: Display the

registration country and ID of the bill-to customer.

• Customer Exception Type: Displays the exception that is granted to the

customer. Options are None, Exonerated, and Suspended. This value is
specified for the bill-to customer.

• Defaulting State: If the reporting country requires that VAT be tracked by

state or province, this field displays the state within the reporting country that
is used to retrieve values from the VAT Defaults table.

• Certificate ID: If applicable, displays the ID of the VAT exception certificate

that may have been issued to the customer.

404 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 19 Retiring Assets

VAT Controls • Calculate at Gross or Net: Indicates how VAT is calculated. Options are:

• Gross: The system calculates VAT before it applies any early payment
discounts.

• Net: The system calculates VAT after it deducts early payment discounts.
If two percentage discounts exist, the system uses the larger of the two
when it calculates VAT. The system does not use discount amounts, only
discount percentages.

The default value comes from the VAT entity registration driver.

Note. PeopleSoft Asset Management does not manage payment discount.

Consequently, net and gross produce the same result. When the
retirement transaction is passed to PeopleSoft Billing and a prompt
payment discount is available on the invoice, the final VAT that
PeopleSoft Billing calculates differs from the estimated VAT that
PeopleSoft Asset Management calculates.

• Recalculate at Payment: Select to enable the recalculation of VAT at payment

time to allow for any early payment discounts if you are calculating VAT at
gross. This selection causes the system to adjust the VAT amount at the time
of payment if the discount has been taken. This value is set by the VAT entity
registration driver.

If you select Net as the VAT calculation method, recalculation at payment is

not permitted.

You can select recalculation at payment if the entry is passed to PeopleSoft

Billing.

• Calculation Type: The default value comes from the PeopleSoft Asset
Management business unit driver. Options are:

• Exclusive: VAT is not included in the proceeds. The VAT basis amount is
equal to the proceeds amount. The system calculates the VAT amount by
multiplying the VAT basis amount by the VAT rate.

• Inclusive: VAT is included in the proceeds. First, the system calculates

the VAT basis amount by dividing the proceeds amount by 1 plus the
VAT rate. The system then calculates the VAT amount by taking the
difference between the VAT basis amount and the proceeds amount.

Note. When the retirement transaction is passed to PeopleSoft Billing,

only the Exclusive option is allowed.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 405
Retiring Assets Chapter 19

• Declaration Point: Select to indicate when VAT transaction information is

recognized for reporting purposes. Options are:

• Invoice: VAT is recognized at time of invoice.

• Payment: VAT is recognized at time of payment.

• Accounting: VAT is recognized at the time of accounting.

• Delivery: VAT is recognized on delivery.

This value is set by the VAT entity registration driver and by the defaults
in the VAT hierarchy (specifically the PeopleSoft Asset Management
business unit, customer, and customer location).

Note. A VAT declaration point of payment is not valid in PeopleSoft

Asset Management.

• Declaration Date: By default, displays the date of the retirement. You can
override this to the actual delivery date.

• Rounding Rule: Displays the VAT rounding rule. The value comes from the
VAT country driver or VAT entity registration driver definition. Values are:

• Natural Round: Amounts are rounded normally (up or down) to the

precision that is specified for the currency code. For example, for a
currency that is defined with two decimal places, 157.4659 would round
up to 157.47, but 157.4649 would round down to 157.46.

• Round Down: Amounts are rounded down. For example, for a currency
that is defined with two decimal places, 157.4699 would round down to
157.46.

• Round Up: Amounts are rounded up with a rounding precision to one

additional decimal place. For example, for a currency that is defined with
two decimal places, 157.4659 would round up to 157.47, but 157.4609
would round down to 157.46.

406 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 19 Retiring Assets

VAT Treatments Treatment: Displays the VAT treatment. Options for asset retirements are:
• Domestic Goods Sale: Sale of goods where the supplier and customer are
located in the same country.

• EU Distance Sale: Sale of goods between European Union (EU) countries in

which the supplier is registered in an EU country and the purchaser is not
registered in an EU country. The VAT rate that is charged is the rate that
applies in the supplier's country.

• EU Goods Sale: Sale of goods between EU countries.

• EU Sale (Simplification): A transaction between an intermediary and the

purchaser in which a sale of goods occurs between EU countries involving
three parties: the purchaser, an intermediary (bill-from) supplier, and the
actual goods supplier. Each party is located in a different EU country and
registered in that country but not in either of the other two countries. This
VAT treatment differs from normal EU sales in that the supplier is required
to print a different message on the invoice referencing the statute that applies
to triangulation, rather than the one that references the statute for normal EU
sales.

• No VAT Processing: Sale does not require VAT processing.

• Outside of Scope: Sale is outside the scope of VAT.

• Zero-rated Goods Export: Export of goods is subject to 0-rated VAT.

Within the PeopleSoft system, detail VAT treatment values on the transaction
lines are used to apply the precise defaults that apply to the transaction lines. The
treatment is determined based the rules that apply to the transaction. No VAT
reporting or processing can take place without this value.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 407
Retiring Assets Chapter 19

VAT Details The fields in this collapsible section are:

• Applicability: Options are:

• Taxable: VAT is chargeable. This may be at a 0 or non-0 rate.

• Exempt: Item is nontaxable or exempt from VAT, and no VAT is

charged.

• Exonerated: Item is subject to exoneration from VAT.

• Outside of Scope of VAT: Item is outside the scope of VAT, and no VAT
is charged.

• Suspended: This option is used when the purchasing organization has

been granted suspension from paying VAT. This is the same as taxable at
a 0 rate.

• VAT Only: This option does not apply to PeopleSoft Asset Management;
it applies in PeopleSoft Payables only when you are entering a third-party
voucher and within General Ledger when you are entering a journal line
against a VAT account.

• N/A (not applicable): This is valid only for transactions that are
completely non-VAT applicable.

• VAT Code: Displays the VAT code that defines the rate at which VAT is
calculated for the line. These are established on the Tax Code VAT page.
Select Set Up Financials/Supply Chain, Common Definitions, VAT and
Intrastat, Value Added Tax.

• Tax Rate: Displays the VAT percentage.

• Transaction Type: Displays the code that categorizes and classifies the
transaction for VAT reporting and accounting. These codes are established on
the VAT Transaction Types page. Select Set Up Financials/Supply Chain,
Common Definitions, VAT and Intrastat, Value Added Tax.

408 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 19 Retiring Assets

Adjust/Reset VAT This collapsible section contains these elements:

Defaults
• Adjust Affected VAT Defaults: When you change VAT defaults on this page,
the VAT defaults might be associated with other unchanged VAT defaults on
the page. For accuracy and consistency, click this button to have the system
adjust the VAT defaults that are affected by those that you modified on this
page. All changes to VAT defaults that affect other VAT defaults are
retained.

Note. Always click the Adjust Affected VAT Defaults button after changing
defaults on the VAT page.

• Levels: For asset retirement, you cannot select which levels to update. The
Reset option always resets the defaults at this level only.

• Reset All VAT Defaults: Click to have the system reset the VAT defaults
based on the value at this level only. All changes that you made to VAT
defaults will be lost.

Click the Information button to list the fields that are adjusted when you select
Adjust Affected VAT Defaults.

VAT Calculations

Transaction Amount Displays the amount of the transaction in the transaction currency. This is
automatically calculated based on the proceeds amount.

Transaction Amount Displays the amount of the transaction in the base currency.
Base
Basis Amount Displays the amount on which the VAT is calculated in the transaction currency.
If VAT is calculated at net, this amount is net of any discounts.

Note. PeopleSoft Asset Management does not manage billing discount

functionality.

Basis Amount Base Displays the amount on which the VAT is calculated in the base currency. If
VAT is calculated at net, this amount is net of any discounts.

Tax Rate Displays the applicable VAT percentage.

Recorded Amount Displays the amount of VAT that is recorded for this transaction in the
transaction currency. This is an estimated amount. If PeopleSoft Asset
Management is integrated with PeopleSoft Billing, this value is called the
Estimated Amount.

Recorded Amount Base Displays the amount of VAT that is recorded for the transaction in the base
currency. If PeopleSoft Asset Management is integrated with PeopleSoft Billing,
this value is called the Estimated Amount.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 409
Retiring Assets Chapter 19

Recalculate Click to recalculate the VAT for the line.

All VAT edits are applied when you click Save.

Note. In PeopleSoft Asset Management, if you retire an asset and pass the information to PeopleSoft Billing,
the VAT Transaction Loader process does not retrieve the VAT information from PeopleSoft Asset
Management but from the bill that is created in PeopleSoft Billing. However, if the retirement transaction
remains in PeopleSoft Asset Management, the VAT Transaction Loader process gets the VAT information
from PeopleSoft Asset Management.

When you run the Accounting Entry Distribution process (AM_AMAEDIST), use the accounting entry
template that you would normally use for asset retirements. To make the VAT entry, the system uses an
account from the VAT accounting entry template, based on the combination of VAT code, VAT account
type, and VAT transaction type that is specified for the retirement. The system first determines whether VAT
ChartFields are defined by the VAT code and general-ledger business unit. If no VAT accounting information
is found at that level, the system then checks for VAT ChartFields that are defined at the VAT code level. If
the retirement is passed to PeopleSoft Billing, PeopleSoft Asset Management does not generate accounting
entries in connection with VAT because PeopleSoft Billing creates them.

Note. If PeopleSoft Asset Management is not integrated with PeopleSoft Billing, then although VAT is
recorded when retiring an asset, PeopleSoft Asset Management does not generate a financial document such
as a VAT invoice. If you also record the sale of an asset in PeopleSoft Billing or PeopleSoft Receivables, you
might inadvertently record the applicable VAT a second time. In this case, you must ensure that the VAT is
not reported on the VAT return twice.

Instead of using the VAT that is recorded in PeopleSoft Asset Management to generate the VAT return, you
can use that information to enter the invoice for the sale of the asset in PeopleSoft Billing or PeopleSoft
Receivables. In this case, you can copy the VAT into the VAT Transaction table. When running the VAT
Transaction Loader process, do not run the process for all products and do not select Asset Management as a
VAT transaction source.

Alternatively, you can exclude the PeopleSoft Asset Management VAT transactions from your VAT return.
To do so, assign a specific VAT transaction type to asset retirement transactions. Then do not include that
VAT transaction type on any line in the VAT report definition (or include it on an additional line in the VAT
report definition but do not include the line in the Crystal report format).

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing PeopleSoft
Asset Management Business Units," Defining VAT Defaults

PeopleSoft Enterprise Global Options and Reports 9.1 PeopleBook, "Working with VAT"

PeopleSoft Enterprise General Ledger 9.1 PeopleBook, "Processing Value-Added Tax Transactions in
General Ledger"

PeopleSoft Enterprise Billing 9.1 PeopleBook, "Calculating VAT in PeopleSoft Billing"

410 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 19 Retiring Assets

Auto-Retiring Fully Depreciated Assets

Access the Auto-Retire Fully Depr Assets page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Asset Disposal,
Auto-Retire Fully Depr Assets).

Auto-Retire Fully Depr Assets page

You can retire many assets without individually identifying them by running the Auto-Retire process
(AMRETFDA). You enter selection criteria to qualify eligible assets for auto-retirement on the process
request, and all selected assets are automatically retired by the process. Only fully depreciated assets can be
retired by this process. Fully depreciated assets are assets with an end depreciation date that is less than or
equal to the retirement transaction date.

Selection Criteria

Business Unit This field is required. Select a business unit from the drop-down list. Only
business units that have been enabled with the auto-retire feature appear.

Book Name Select a business unit book from the drop-down list. Only books that have been
enabled with the auto-retire feature appear.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 411
Retiring Assets Chapter 19

Copy Changes to Other Select to keep all books in sync. The system copies the transaction to all books
Books that are set up for an asset.

Category, From Asset, Select as applicable to narrow the parameters by categories or by a range of asset
and To Asset IDs.

Cost Limit Select assets that cost less than or equal to the cost limit.

Low Value Assets Only Select this check box to retrieve only low-value assets.

Clustered Assets Only Select this check box to retrieve only clustered assets.

Trans Date(transaction Enter the applicable transaction or accounting date to define the selection criteria.
date) and Acctg Date
(accounting date)

Retirement Options

Convention Enter a retirement convention to override the asset profile default.

Transaction Code Select a transaction code to identify the reason for the retirement.

Reference Code (Optional) Enter information to track the asset, such as retirement documentation
or an asset ID.

Initiating Asset Retirement Using the Disposal Worksheet

PeopleSoft Asset Management provides the Disposal Worksheet page as a quick method to select assets to
retire based on the following elements: ChartField combination, location, department, manufacturer, or other
fields that are related to the assets.

Use of the worksheet depends on the establishment of asset-to-owner relationships as well as owner-to-
operator relationships to enable the selection, review, and approval of asset disposal. When the Asset Owner
and Asset Owner User links are defined, the asset owner can generate and submit a disposal worksheet for
processing or approval. After the approval process has been established, an asset owner can review asset
disposal requests from worklist entry notifications. Requests can be approved, denied, or designated as
pending. Upon approval of the request, you can submit the disposal worksheet for processing through the
AMIF1000 transaction processor.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing Asset
Processing," Establishing Asset Ownership.

Generating the Disposal Worksheet

Access the Disposal Worksheet page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Asset Disposal, Disposal
Worksheet).

412 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 19 Retiring Assets

Disposal Worksheet page

This page provides numerous selection options to retrieve assets for retirement. Assets that are available for
retrieval are determined by asset ownership and user ID.

You can search for assets using ChartField search criteria, and you can view asset ownership information by
clicking the View Ownership Details link.

Asset Search Criteria Identify assets that are eligible for disposal based on the user's established asset
ownership. Assets can be identified based on:
• Unit

• Book

• Category

• Serial ID

• Asset ID

• Location

• Tag Number

• Profile ID

• More Filter Options - select to further limit the search by ChartFields.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 413
Retiring Assets Chapter 19

Acquisition Details To further identify assets for disposal, complete the following fields:
• PO Unit (purchasing unit )

• Receipt Unit

• AP Unit(payables unit)

• PC Bus Unit (projects business unit)

• PO No.(PO number)

• Receipt No(Receipt number)

• Voucher

• Project ID

When you click Retrieve, the result set appears in the tabbed grid at the bottom of the disposal worksheet.
You can begin again by pressing the New Search button, and use the link to view ownership details.

Asset Action

The system returns a list of assets that meet the search criteria. You can review and reselect options to create
a new list of assets.

So that you can process assets for disposal, retirement information is specified to indicate the date and reason
for an action.

Disposal Code (Optional) Select the disposal code for all assets in the worksheet list to identify
the reason for the disposal of the assets.

Retire Dt (retirement Enter a retirement date, which can be retroactive or future-dated. This date is
date) applied to all assets in the worksheet list. The default is the current date.

Accounting Dt Enter the accounting date to be recorded if different from the current date. This
(accounting date) date is applied to all assets in the worksheet list.

Set All Click to apply the retirement information to all assets in the list.

The list is presented on three tabbed views: Asset Information, Retirement Information, and Optional
Accounting Information (such as cost). The information may be hidden, depending on established
permissions.

Asset Information

This tabbed view displays the asset ID, description, tag number, category, and serial ID.

Submit for Disposal, Select assets for disposal individually by selecting the Dispose check box, or
Select All, and Deselect select (or deselect) all.
All

414 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 19 Retiring Assets

Retirement Information

This tabbed view displays the asset ID, cost, quantity, retire quantity, proceeds, proceeds currency, removal
cost, and removal cost currency.

Retire Qty(retire Enter the number of assets to be retired.

quantity)
Proceeds,PR Curr Enter any proceeds or removal cost along with the currency in which the
(proceeds currency), proceeds or costs were incurred as applicable.
Removal Cost, and RC
Curr (removal cost
currency)
Disposal Code Select disposal codes for each asset individually by entering the code in this field.

Retire Dt Enter the retirement date.

Detail Click to view the Asset Details (AM_DISPOSAL_02) page.

Optional Accounting Information

This tabbed view displays the asset ID and accounting date.

Accounting Date Enter the accounting date for the retirement transaction.

Trans Code (transaction Enter a transaction code to be applied to each asset individually.
code)

Submit Asset Disposal Information

Click Submit for Disposal when you have completed the disposal worksheet. The disposal request is
processed when you run the Transaction Loader process. It is routed for approval, if required, depending on
the permissions that are established for the operator.

Approving Disposal Worksheet Requests

Access the Approve Disposals page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Asset Disposal, Approve
Disposals).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 415
Retiring Assets Chapter 19

Approve Disposals page

The approval process is managed by the workflow settings for your organization. If the worksheet that you
submit for disposal requires approval before being processed by the Transaction Loader process, a worklist
entry is created and routed to the approver. Multiple assets can be associated with one worklist entry. The
user who receives the worklist item approves or denies the disposal request.

The approver has the following three approval-status disposal options:

Denied The request is not approved and an email notification is sent to the disposal
requestor.

Approved The request is approved and the item is loaded to the Transaction Loader process
for processing.

Pending No action is taken on the item, and the request is placed on hold.

The approver can then select Mark As Worked for the worklist item.

Putting Assets up for Auction

When a bid is awarded through Strategic Sourcing, the bid price is returned to PeopleSoft Asset Management
as proceeds for the asset that was sold. This transaction updates the asset with the appropriate information for
completing the retirement transaction.

Note these points assets that are put up for auction:

• For you to enter an asset as a line item for sale in an auction event, the asset must not have the PeopleSoft
Asset Management statuses other than Disposed and Transferred. It must not be a Lease Asset, or a
Hazardous Asset. The auction status is equal to Allowed to be auctioned.

• When you post the event, the PeopleSoft Asset Management auction status changes to Sent to Auction.

• The auction status remains at Sent to Auction until the event is awarded or canceled.

416 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 19 Retiring Assets

If the event is not approved or is not awarded, you must set the status to Allowed to be Auctioned to remove
the Sent to Auction status for the asset. When the event is awarded, Strategic Sourcing sends information to
PeopleSoft Asset Management, and you must run the Transaction Loader (AMIF1000) process to finalize the
retirement. Strategic Sourcing changes the auction status to Sold in Auction.

Note. PeopleSoft Asset Management does not allow PeopleSoft Strategic Sourcing to access data for
hazardous materials, intangible assets, or partial retirements. Assets with a status of Sent to Auction are
excluded from any transactions in PeopleSoft Asset Management until the status is changed by PeopleSoft
Strategic Sourcing.

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Strategic Sourcing 9.1 PeopleBook, "Creating Events"

Retiring Non-Financial Assets

This section discusses how to retire a non-financial asset.

Page Used to Retire Non-Financial Assets

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Non-Financial Retire ASSET_RET_NF_01 Asset Management, Asset Retire non-financial assets.

Transactions, Asset
Disposal, Retire/Reinstate
Non-Fin Asset

Retiring a Non-Financial Asset

Access the Non-Financial Retire page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Asset Disposal,
Retire/Reinstate Non-Fin Asset).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 417
Retiring Assets Chapter 19

Non-Financial Retire page

Select a Trans Code and Ret Type type. Because the asset is a non-financial asset, there is no gain or loss
calculation result.

To retire the non-financial asset, click the Retire button.

Note. Nonfinancial assets and operating leased assets do not have cost information. The retirement process,
therefore, only involves changing the status of the asset to Inactive (or Disposed.) In the case of an operating
lease, any future lease payments are stopped.

Reinstating Assets
This section provides an overview of asset reinstatement and discusses how to reinstate an asset.

Understanding Reinstatement of Assets

On occasion, you may need to reinstate an asset that has been retired.

When you reinstate an asset, all fields on the Retire Assets page become unavailable for data entry. If you
want to subsequently retire this asset after reinstatement, you must access the page again.

Reinstatements generate credit lines in PeopleSoft Billing if the retirement has been passed to PeopleSoft
Billing. You cannot generate a reinstatement until PeopleSoft Billing creates the invoice number (after the
BIIF0001 process is run). If you reinstate an asset before the PeopleSoft Asset Management-Billing interface
is processed but after running the depreciation calculation for the retirement, then the PeopleSoft system
cancels the initial retirement and the status of the billing request changes to G (ignore). In the AM/Billing
Transaction Status report, you can track the original invoice for each reinstatement.

Note. Reinstatement of non-financial assets involves changing the asset status to In Service. In the case of an
operating lease, it involves restarting future lease payments.

418 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 19 Retiring Assets

Pages Used to Reinstate Assets

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Retire Assets ASSET_RETIRE_01 Asset Management, Asset Retire or reinstate an asset.

Transactions, Asset
Disposal, Retire/Reinstate
Asset

Non-Financial Asset Retire ASSET_RET_NF_01 Asset Management, Asset Retire or reinstate non-
Transactions, Asset financial assets.
Disposal, Retire/Reinstate
Non-Fin Asset

Reinstating an Asset
Access the Retire Assets page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Asset Disposal, Retire/Reinstate
Asset).

Scroll through the retired transactions and select the Reinstate check box for the retirement transaction that
you want to reinstate for a financial asset. Then, click the Reinstate button. For a nonfinancial asset, from the
Non Financial Asset Retirement page, select Reinstate.

Note. Only one retired asset transaction can be reinstated at a time. If several retired assets transactions are
selected for reinstatement, only the first selected transaction in the list is reinstated.

If no retirement transaction is selected for reinstatement and you click the Reinstate button, the last retirement
transaction against the assets is reinstated.

PeopleSoft Asset Management performs the reinstatement automatically. The Proceeds, Removal Costs,
Accumulated Depreciation, and Gain/Loss fields are reset to 0, and the amount in the Retire Amt field is
added back to the balance sheet (for financial assets only).

If depreciation has not been calculated for the gain/loss on retirement, selecting Reinstate causes the
retirement rows that you previously created to be purged from the system.

All journal entries that were created by the retirement are reversed. To ensure that asset information posts
correctly, the system generates a depreciation request when you reinstate assets. The transaction date is
automatically set to the retirement date. If you accidentally or erroneously retired an asset in the wrong
period, you have to deduct depreciation from the time the asset was actually retired. Any depreciation to
which you were entitled during the accounting periods in which this asset was retired will be calculated and
posted to the current accounting period as prior depreciation.

Running the Tax Retirement Capital Gains Report (AMTX3210)

This section lists prerequisites and the pages used to run the Tax Retirement Capital Gains report.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 419
Retiring Assets Chapter 19

Prerequisites
Before you can run the Tax Retirement Capital Gains report, you must run these processes:

• Open Trans - Tax Report

This process assigns open transaction IDs for the transactions of assets that do not use straight-line
depreciation.

• Depreciation Calculation Tax

This process calculates straight-line depreciation for all the pending assets in the process and marks the
status as complete.

Pages Used to Run the Tax Retirement Capital Gains Report

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Run Open Trans Tax (run RUN_AMTXOPEN Asset Management, Run a process that assigns
open transaction tax) Depreciation, Processing, open transaction IDs to the
Process Open Trans for transactions for assets that
Tax, Process Open Trans do not use the straight-line
for Tax depreciation method.

Calculate SL Depr for Tax RUN_AMDPCALC_TAX Asset Management, Run the process that
Depreciation, Processing, calculates straight-line
Calculate SL Depr for Tax, depreciation for all the
Calculate SL Depr for Tax pending assets in the
AMTXOPEN process and
mark the status as complete.

Note. For corporations, you

must select the Corporation
Sec. 291 check box on the
Book - Tax page to have the
system calculate the
ordinary gain and the Sec.
291 gain differently.

420 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
 Chapter 20

Processing Asset Mass Changes

This chapter provides an overview of mass changes in Asset Management and discusses how to:

• Define mass changes.

• Run mass changes.

• Verify data in the loader tables.

• Approve changes.

• Populate Asset Management tables with mass change data.

• Depreciate changed assets.

• Review Asset Management mass change templates and types.

Understanding Mass Changes in Asset Management

Regular business cycles sometime require you to make the same change to a large group of assets. In these
situations, Asset Management provides Application Engine processes that you request from the processing
menu within the application. In addition, the PeopleTools Mass Change application can be used for most
processing needs. This section provides information about Mass Change and its uses in Asset Management.

Suppose a business restructuring requires you to transfer all assets from the marketing department to the
corporate communications department. Transferring these assets manually would be onerous and likely to
introduce errors. Mass Change, on the other hand, enables you to select a particular set of assets from the
database, define the desired changes on those assets, and make those changes online or in the background
using scheduled processing.

Because most businesses perform the same types of mass changes repeatedly, you can define mass changes
using templates. These templates simplify mass change definition by storing information that enables you to
select certain data from the database and modify it in specific ways. (Usually, you have to modify only
selection and replacement values.) Asset Management is delivered with a full complement of Mass Change
templates that serve the needs of most business applications. You can also create your own templates as
needed.

Note. Because Mass Change can modify a large number of assets during scheduled processing, only the most
experienced users should use Mass Change functionality. These users should have both a solid understanding
of SQL and an extensive knowledge of Asset Management.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 421
Processing Asset Mass Changes Chapter 20

Processing mass changes with Asset Management consists of a definition phase and a processing phase. First,
you define the selection criteria and changes to be made to the selected data, and then you run the Mass
Change process (either online or in the background). You can run most types of mass changes online;
however, there are a few types that you can run using only Process Scheduler.

To process mass changes in Asset Management:

1. Select a mass change template and use it to define a mass change.

Outline the criteria for selecting rows and identify the columns and values to modify.

2. Run the mass change process (RUN_MASSCHNG) to select, change, and transfer the data to the loader
tables.

3. (Optional) Preview the data for suitability.

4. Run the Transaction Loader Application Engine process (AMIF1000) to load the data from the loader
tables into Asset Management tables.

5. Run the batch depreciation program.

You must run depreciation when the mass change process is complete. You might also want to empty the
INTFC_FIN, INTFC_PHY_A, and INTFC_PHY_B loader tables to free valuable disk space.

Note. The U.S. tax 40 percent rule states that if more than 40 percent of your total aggregate depreciable basis
(other than residential property, nonresidential real property, and railroad grading and tunnel bores) is placed
in service during the last three months of the year, all assets must be depreciated using the mid-quarter
convention. Assets placed in service and disposed of during the same tax year are not taken into account. To
comply with the U.S. tax 40 percent rule, you must write a report to select all eligible assets, calculate their
aggregate basis, and divide this basis into your total asset aggregate basis. If the result is more than 40
percent, you then must run the mass change process on the eligible assets to change the depreciation
convention to a mid-quarter convention, and recalculate life-to-date depreciation.

See Also

Chapter 19, "Retiring Assets," page 375

Appendix A, "Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary," page 531

Defining Mass Changes

Before you run the mass change process that transfers and alters data, you must provide information about the
changes that you want to make. Use the pages in the Mass Change Definition (MC_DEFN) component to do
so.

This section discusses how to:

• Add or update mass change definitions.

• Specify mass change criteria and defaults.

• Specify mass change fields specific to Asset Management.

422 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 20 Processing Asset Mass Changes

• Generate mass change SQL text.

Pages Used to Define Mass Changes

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Asset Mass Change MC_DEFN_00 Asset Management, Mass Add or update a mass
Definition - Description Change, Define Criteria change definition.

Asset Mass Change MC_DEFN_01 Asset Management, Mass Specify the mass change
Definition - Criteria and Change, Define Criteria, criteria for selecting rows,
Defaults Criteria and Defaults and identify the columns
and values to be changed.

Asset Mass Change MC_DEFN_AM Asset Management, Mass Complete mass change
Definition - AM Specific Change, Define Criteria, information that is unique to
Fields (asset management AM Specific Fields and required by Asset
specific fields) Management mass changes.

Asset Mass Change MC_DEFN_02 Asset Management, Mass Generate and check the
Definition - Generate SQL Change, Define Criteria, SQL text that is generated
Generate SQL by a mass change definition
before you run it.

Asset Mass Change MC_DEFN_03 Asset Management, Mass Determine the last time that
Definition - Execution Change, Define Criteria, a mass change definition
History Execution History was run and identify the
specific input parameters.

Adding or Updating Mass Change Definitions

Access the Asset Mass Change Definition - Description page (Asset Management, Mass Change, Define
Criteria, Description).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 423
Processing Asset Mass Changes Chapter 20

Asset Mass Change Definition - Description page

If this is a new mass change definition, select a mass change template. After you enter a template and move
out of the Mass Change Template field, the field becomes unavailable for entry and the page is populated
with data from the template.

Note. You may need to execute a group of mass changes in series. The mass change functionality makes it
possible to define groups of mass changes and execute them all using one run control. Use the Mass Change
Definition page to do this. No mass change groups are shipped with Asset Management.

See Chapter 20, "Processing Asset Mass Changes," Reviewing Asset Management Mass Change Templates
and Types, page 441.

Specifying Mass Change Criteria and Defaults

Access the Asset Mass Change Definition - Criteria and Defaults page (Asset Management, Mass Change,
Define Criteria, Criteria and Defaults).

424 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 20 Processing Asset Mass Changes

Asset Mass Change Definition - Criteria and Defaults page

Fields in the Criteria scroll area define the columns that are used as a basis for selecting data from the
database. You must specify the operator and the value to which the column is to be compared.

For example, to select all the rows for department 21101, use the = operator and a value of 21101. To specify
a range of values, use the Between operator and specify the two values, for example 12000 and 21000.

This table lists the values in the Operation drop-down list box, how they are used, and an example of each
operator as used on a set of hypothetical business units, including M02, M04, M04A, M04B, M04C, M06,
and M30:

Operator Meaning Example Result

Between Value A and Between two values BTW M04 M04, M04A, M04B,
Value B M04C, M06
BTW M06

Equal To Equal to = M06 M06

Greater Than Greater than > M06 M30

Greater Than or Equal Greater than or equal to > = M06 M06, M30
To

In Subset In a subset of IN M04 M04, M06

IN M06

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 425
Processing Asset Mass Changes Chapter 20

Operator Meaning Example Result

Is Blank Equal to a space IS BLANK NA

character. Used for
character fields.

Is Not Blank Not equal to a space NOT BLANK M04, M04A, M04B,
character. Used for M04C, M06, M30
character fields.

Is Not Null Not equal to no NOT NULL NA

characters. Used for date
fields.

Is Null Equal to no characters. IS NULL NA

Used for date fields.

Less Than Less than < M06 M02, M04, M04B, M04C

Less Than or Equal To Less than or equal to < = M06 M02, M04, M04B,
M04C, M06

Like Used for wildcard LIKE MO% M04, M04A, M04B,

searches. M04C, M06

Not Between Not between value A and BTW M04 M02, M30
value B
BTW M06

Not Equal To Not equal to < > M06 M02, M04, M04B,
M04C, M30

Not In Not in a subset of IN M04 M02, M04A, M04B,

(complement) M04C, M30
IN M06

Not Like Used in wildcard NOT LIKE M0% M30

searches.

Specifying Mass Change Fields Specific to Asset Management

Access the Asset Mass Change Definition - AM Specific Fields page (Asset Management, Mass Change,
Define Criteria, AM Specific Fields).

426 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 20 Processing Asset Mass Changes

Asset Mass Change Definition - AM Specific Fields page

Transaction Date Enter the date on which you made the change.

Accounting Date Enter the date on which you want this transaction posted to your general ledger.

Intfc ID (interface ID) Displays the next available ID. You can change these values, but they must be
and Open Transaction unique.
ID
User ID Appears automatically. You can change this value.

Auto Approval Status Select this check box to have the system automatically approve the transactions
that are generated from the mass change. PeopleSoft strongly recommends that
you review and approve all transactions that are generated during the mass
change process before you load them into PeopleSoft Asset Management.

Note. If you reuse an existing mass change definition, be sure to insert a value in the Next Intfc ID field by
clicking the New button. After you select New, Save the page, the system displays a new interface ID.

Generating Mass Change SQL Text

Access the Asset Mass Change Definition - Generate SQL page (Asset Management, Mass Change, Define
Criteria, Generate SQL).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 427
Processing Asset Mass Changes Chapter 20

Asset Mass Change Definition - Generate SQL page

Note. Whenever you change a table, mass change type, or mass change template, you must regenerate the
SQL text for any related mass change definitions.

Generate Click to generate the SQL text. Generating SQL might take several minutes.

Clear Sw(clear switch) Click to clear the SQL text for instances in which you want to change your mass
change definition and regenerate the SQL. Clearing SQL might take several
minutes.

SQL Statement

This scroll area lists the records on which a SQL statement operates and in what manner. Each record is
processed in sequence. This scroll area also contains the SQL text for each statement, which you can view but
not change. You can change statements only by altering the mass change type or template on which this
definition is based, or by altering the field criteria and defaults on the Mass Change Definition page.

Execute SQL Upon While online, select to run the SQL as soon as you save the page. Your user
Saving security determines whether you can run mass changes online. If you do not
select this check box, you can save this mass change definition and then run it in
the background using a run control.

Execution Seq (execution Indicates the order in which the SQL statements are run. Scroll through the
sequence) execution sequences to view each statement.

428 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 20 Processing Asset Mass Changes

Save Click this button when you are satisfied with the SQL text that is generated.

Note. If the SQL execution fails, the system rolls back all statements in the mass
change definition. Commits to the database are made only when all statements
have completed successfully.

Count After you have generated and saved your SQL text, click to display the number
of rows of data that were affected by this mass change. You can click this button
only on mass changes that run online.
Some execution sequences are based on previous sequences that have inserted
rows into an interim table. In these instances, clicking the Count button makes
sense for only some execution sequences.

Running Mass Changes

You can run most mass changes either online or in the background, although you must run some through
Process Scheduler using an application structured query report (SQR), such as the Physical Inventory SQR
report.

This section discusses how to run mass changes.

Page Used to Run Mass Changes

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Run Mass Change RUN_MASSCHNG Asset Management, Mass Run a mass change or mass
Change, Run Request change group in the
background.

Running Mass Changes

There are three methods for running mass changes:

• Run mass changes online.

• Run mass changes with Process Scheduler.

• Run mass changes in the background.

Running Mass Changes Online

Use the Asset Mass Change Definition - Generate SQL page (Asset Management, Mass Change, Define
Criteria, Generate SQL).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 429
Processing Asset Mass Changes Chapter 20

Running Mass Changes Using Process Scheduler

You must run mass changes that are based on the following mass change types through Process Scheduler
using an application SQR:

Mass Change Type Description

PI Extract Physical inventory extraction

PI Scan Scope Physical inventory scan scope

PI1 - Asset Table Update Physical inventory asset table update

PI2 - Asset Location Changes Physical inventory asset location changes update

PI3 - Department Transfers Physical inventory department transfers update

PI4 - Retire Assets Not Found Physical inventory retired assets not found update

PI5 - Add Assets Found In PI Physical inventory add assets found update

PI6 - Asset Custodian Changes Physical inventory asset custodian update

PI7 - Inventory History Insert Physical inventory history insert

PI9 - NCP Department Transfer Physical inventory non capital department transfer

PI10 - OPL Department Transfer Physical inventory operating lease department transfer

PI11 - Retire NCP Assets Physical inventory retire non capital assets

PI12 - Retire OPL Assets Physical inventory retire operating lease assets

IUF-IU Transfer to Foreign BU Interunit transfer to a foreign business unit

PRC - Parent Recategorization Parent and children category update

Process Scheduler runs the processes that you select at user-defined intervals.

You can run only those mass changes online that you are authorized to run online and that are based on
authorized templates. Mass change user security grants permission to run mass changes online.

430 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 20 Processing Asset Mass Changes

See Enterprise PeopleTools PeopleBook, "Security Administration."

See Enterprise PeopleTools PeopleBook, "PeopleSoft Process Scheduler."

Running Mass Changes in the Background

Access the Run Mass Change page (Asset Management, Mass Change, Run Request).

Run Mass Change page

Select a mass change run type. Each run type requires an additional execution parameter as described in this
table:

Run Type Execution Parameter

Execute Single Mass Change Mass Change Definition

Execute Mass Change Group Mass Change Group ID

Download File Preparation Download/Upload Data File.

Download Table to a File Download/Upload Data File.

Upload File Preparation Download/Upload Data File

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 431
Processing Asset Mass Changes Chapter 20

Run Type Execution Parameter

Upload File to Table Download/Upload Data File

Verifying Data in the Loader Tables

You can see what data was loaded by the mass change process into the Asset Management loader tables
(INTFC_FIN, INTFC_PHY_A, and INTFC_PHY_B). Viewing these tables provides the opportunity to
preview the data that loads into Asset Management tables when you run the Transaction Loader process. If
you find errors, you can either fix them online using your SQL query tool, or (preferably) modify the mass
change definitions and run the mass change again.

This section discusses how to:

• View data in the financial loader tables.

• Preview physical load data.

Pages Used to Verify Data in the Loader Tables

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Financial Transactions INTFC_FIN_01 Asset Management, View data in the financial

Send/Receive Information, interface tables. Verify the
Approve Financial financial data (which the
Information, Review, Transaction Loader process
Financial Transactions uses when populating Asset
Management tables) and
change incorrect data.

Approve Physical INTFC_PHY_A Asset Management, Preview the physical load

Information - Review-A Send/Receive Information, data. View the data one row
Approve Physical at a time and change
Information, Review-A, incorrect data.
Review-A

Approve Physical INTFC_PHY_B Asset Management, Preview the physical load

Information - Review-B Send/Receive Information, data. View the data one row
Approve Physical at a time and change
Information, Review-B, incorrect data.
Review-B

Lease Transactions INTFC_LEASE Asset Management, View records that you

Send/Receive Information, might have loaded for lease
Approve Lease Information, transactions (the
Review INTFC_LEASE table). Use
this page only if you're
converting leases from a
previous system.

432 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 20 Processing Asset Mass Changes

Viewing Data in the Financial Loader Tables

Access the Financial Transactions page (Asset Management, Send/Receive Information, Approve Financial
Information, Review, Financial Transactions).

Financial Transactions page

The contents of the Financial Transactions table (INTFC_FIN) appear here, one row at a time, as populated
by the mass change.

Errors normally involve assets that have recently undergone a financial transaction or transactions. The
transaction date that is assigned to the mass change is compared with the transaction date of each asset on
which that change is performed. If the asset transaction date occurs after the mass change transaction date, the
system marks the load line as an error.

Auto Approval Status Selected if you previously selected the Auto Approval Status check box on the
Asset Mass Change Definition - AM Specific Fields page.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 433
Processing Asset Mass Changes Chapter 20

Previewing Physical Load Data

Access the Physical Transactions A or Physical Transactions B page (Asset Management, Send/Receive
Information, Approve Physical Information, Review-A or Review-B).

Approve Physical Information - Review-A page

Auto Approval Status Selected if you previously selected the Auto Approval Status check box on the
Asset Mass Change Definition - AM Specific Fields page.

Approving Changes
After you have run the mass change process and populated the loader tables, you might need to approve all
changes before loading the resulting data into the Asset Management tables.

This section discusses how to:

434 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 20 Processing Asset Mass Changes

• Approve financial loader data.

• Approve physical loader data.

Pages Used to Approve Changes

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Approve INTFC_FIN_APPR Asset Management, View and approve the data

Send/Receive Information, in the financial loader table.
Approve Financial
Information, Approve,
Approve

Approve Physical A INTFC_PHY_APPR_A Asset Management, View and approve all

Send/Receive Information, changes that are pending
Approve Physical approval in the physical
Information, Approve-A, loader tables.
Approve-A
These changes are grouped
by transaction load ID and
load type. A load type is
similar to a transaction type,
but at a greater level of
detail. Each transaction type
in Asset Management can
generate several different
load types.

Approve Physical B INTFC_PHY_APPR_B Asset Management, View and approve all

Send/Receive Information, changes that are pending
Approve Physical approval in the physical
Information, Approve-B, loader tables.
Approve-B
These changes are grouped
by transaction load ID and
load type. A load type is
similar to a transaction type,
but at a greater level of
detail. Each transaction type
in Asset Management can
generate several different
load types.

Approving Financial Loader Data

Access the Approve Financial page (Asset Management, Send/Receive Information, Approve Financial
Information, Approve, Approve).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 435
Processing Asset Mass Changes Chapter 20

Approve Financial Information - Approve page

The system groups financial transaction changes by transaction load ID and load type. A load type is similar
to a transaction type, but at a greater level of detail. Each transaction type in Asset Management can generate
several different load types.

Load types include the following (changes marked with an asterisk are uncommon):

Load Type Name Financial or Physical Tables

AAD Additional Cost Add Financial

ACQ Insert Acquisition Detail Physical *

ADD Asset Add Financial

ADJ Asset Cost Adjustment Financial

ADP Revaluation Write-off Financial

ADQ Adjust Cost & Acquisition Detail Financial and physical *

ARA Add Retired Asset Financial and physical

ASD Asset Deletion Financial and physical

AUP Asset Information Update Physical

BKD Book Deletion Financial *

BKS Book Change Financial

BSD Selective Book Delete Financial *

436 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 20 Processing Asset Mass Changes

Load Type Name Financial or Physical Tables

CAP Asset Capitalization Financial

CLC Custodian/Location Change Physical *

CIC Capitalize into Composite Financial

CN1 Conversion of First Book Financial and physical

CN2 Conversion of Subsequent Books Financial

CLS Closed Voucher Financial

FAD Financial and Physical Add Financial

IHI Physical Inventory History Insert Physical

IUI InterUnit Transfer, In Side Financial and physical

IUO InterUnit Transfer, Out Side Financial

LAD Leased Asset Add Financial and physical *

NAD Non-Financial Add Physical

OPT Open Transaction Generator NA *

PHY Physical Asset Change Physical

PRT Partial Retirement Financial

RCT Asset Recategorization Financial

REI Asset Reinstatement Financial

REL Operating Lease Retire Physical

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 437
Processing Asset Mass Changes Chapter 20

Load Type Name Financial or Physical Tables

REN Non Capital Retire Physical

RET Asset Retirement Financial

RNA Retired Non-Financial Asset Physical

RAQ Replace Acquisition Detail Physical

BSD Selective Book Delete Financial

TRF IntraUnit Transfer Financial

TRO Operating Lease Transfer Physical

TRN Non Capital Transfer Physical

You can approve or reject each load type by selecting or clearing the Approval check boxes. Use the scroll
bar to move from one screen to the next.

Approving Physical Loader Data

Access the Approve Physical A or Approve Physical B page (Asset Management, Send/Receive Information,
Approve Physical Information, Approve-A or Approve-B).

Approve Physical Information - Approve-A page

Approve Approve each load type by selecting its check box.

Populating Asset Management Tables with Mass Change Data

This section discusses how to populate Asset Management tables using the Transaction Loader process.

438 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 20 Processing Asset Mass Changes

Page Used to Populate Asset Management Tables with Mass Change Data

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Load Transactions into AM RUN_AMIF1000 Asset Management, Run the Transaction Loader
Send/Receive Information, process, which reads the
Load Transactions, Load loader tables and populates
Transactions into AM, Load Asset Management tables
Transactions into AM with the data.
Search for transactions to
run based on system source,
load type, load status, and
whether transactions consist
of physical or financial
records. You can use as
many or as few of these
criteria as necessary. The
more search criteria that
you use, the narrower your
search results become.

Populating Asset Management Tables Using the Transaction Loader Process

Access the Load Transactions into AM page (Asset Management, Send/Receive Information, Load
Transactions, Load Transactions into AM, Load Transactions into AM).

Load Transactions into AM page

Locate the Find Trans Load ID (find transaction loader ID) group box.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 439
Processing Asset Mass Changes Chapter 20

System Source If you do not know the transaction load IDs, enter the system source that
generated the transactions that you want to load, such as AM Batch or Strategic
Sourcing. Also, enter the load type.

Load Type A load type is a more detailed version of a transaction type. One transaction type
can generate several different load types.
Specify the transactions to load, such as Asset Add or Phys Add (physical
addition), if you know the range of transaction load IDs. You can specify
transactions by system source, from transaction load ID, and to transaction load
ID.

AM Business Unit Select a business unit if you want to limit the load process by business unit.

Load Status Select from the following values:

• Consolidat: (consolidated): Transactions consolidated.

• Errored: Transaction errors.

• Excluded: Transactions excluded.

• In Process: Transactions in process.

• Loaded: Transactions loaded.

• On Hold: Transactions on hold.

• Pending: Transactions pending.

• Replaced: Replaced by other interface records.

• Unitized: Transactions unitized (will not be loaded).

Financial Record or Select one depending on the type of transaction that you want to load.
Physical Records

Depreciating Changed Assets

To ensure that all the entries in the loader tables INTFC_FIN, INTFC_PHY_A, and INTFC_PHY_B have
been loaded, review the tables and check the load status of each entry. Each entry should have a load status of
DON (done).

If any entries have a status of ERR (error), the entries have been marked as errors. You might need to
complete them manually through the appropriate pages. Check the error message at the bottom of the Load
Preview page to determine what action you should take.

After you have corrected the errors, all that remains for you to do in the mass change process is to run the
depreciation calculation process. The financial changes that you made have created open transactions for each
of the affected assets. Running the depreciation calculation process (AM_DEPR_CALC) identifies these
changed assets and handles their depreciation appropriately.

440 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 20 Processing Asset Mass Changes

Reviewing Asset Management Mass Change Templates and Types

This section provides an overview of mass change templates and types for Asset Management.

Understanding Mass Change Templates and Types

In most cases, the mass change template and the mass change type on which the template is based have the
same ID. If the mass change type ID is different than the mass change template ID, the type ID is provided in
parentheses under the template ID.

This table lists the mass change templates (and the mass change types on which the templates are based) that
are delivered with Asset Management:

Mass Change Template ID (Mass Mass Change Template Description / Asset Management
Change Type ID, If Different)

ADJ - Asset Cost Adjustment Enables you to change the cost of a group of assets.

Archive Asset Depr Rpt Entries This mass change type copies the specified DEPR_RPT entries into the
DEPR_RPT_ARCH table. The system determines specified entries by
the selection criteria of the mass change template with the same name
(Archive Asset Depr Rpt entries). The system uses the Business Unit,
Book, and Fiscal Year fields to select the data.

Archive NBV Entries This mass change type copies the specified PS_ASSET_NBV_TBL
entries into the PS_ASSET_NBV_ARCH table.
PS_ASSET_NBV_ARCH stores the old net book value entries. You can
also use this table to retrieve the entries into a sequential file. The system
uses the Business Unit, Book, and As of Date fields to select the data.

Archive Asset Open Trans Archives asset open transaction entries in the PS_OPEN_TRANS table.
This template inserts entries into the Open Trans Archive table
(PS_OPEN_TRANS_ARCH) and selects from the PS_OPEN_TRANS
table.

Archive Assets Acctng Entries Helps archive asset accounting entries. This definition inserts rows into
(Archive Asset Acctng Entries) the PS_DIST_LN_ARCH table and selects from the production asset
accounting entry table (PS_DIST_LN). You can use the PS_DIST_LN
table to hold the old accounting entries and to unload the entries into a
sequential file.

ASD - Asset Deletion Inserts asset records into the INTFC_FIN table for deletion by Mass
Change.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 441
Processing Asset Mass Changes Chapter 20

Mass Change Template ID (Mass Mass Change Template Description / Asset Management
Change Type ID, If Different)

AUP - Asset Update Changes certain fields that are stored on the asset table. Inserts rows into
the INTFC_PHY_A table that the Transaction Loader process uses to
update (not insert) the asset table. You may update all non key fields on
the PS_ASSET table using this mass change definition. You may copy
this template or modify it to update fields as necessary.

BA - Book Addition Adds a new book to a business unit. You must add the asset profiles for
the new book before running this mass change template, and the book
you are adding must already exist for the business unit before processing.

BC - Book Copy Copies the book and cost information from one book to another. You can
use this process to perform a what-if analysis. You can also add a model
book to a group of assets to do some reporting. This mass change
template copies the data that you need from an existing book to your
model book.
The book to which you are copying must exist for the business unit
before processing this mass change. Criteria for this mass change
template must be entered twice; once for the non-retirement type
transactions on the first execution sequence, and a second time for
retirement transactions on the second execution sequence.

BKD - Book Deletion Removes an entire book from a business unit. This template loads one
row into the INTFC_FIN table with the business unit and book
combination. The Transaction Loader process then deletes all rows for
that business unit book from the following tables: BOOK,
BOOK_TAX_CR, COST, DEPRECIATION, DIST_LN,
OPEN_TRANS, and RETIREMENT.

BKS - Asset Book Change Enables you to change depreciation methods, life, depreciation schedules,
and convention combinations.

BSD - Selective Book Delete Enables you to selectively delete books for a group of assets. You specify
the business unit, book, and range of assets to delete. This differs from
the mass change type BKD, which deletes information for an entire
business unit/book combination.

CC - Capitalize Into Comp DB2 Capitalizes acquisition detail amounts into composite assets specifically
for the DB2 environment. This mass change template sums the
uncapitalized acquisition detail line amounts for the assets that are
associated with a composite asset.

CC - Capitalize Into Composite Capitalizes acquisition detail amounts into composite assets. This mass
change template sums the uncapitalized acquisition detail line amounts
for the assets that are associated with a composite asset.

442 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 20 Processing Asset Mass Changes

Mass Change Template ID (Mass Mass Change Template Description / Asset Management
Change Type ID, If Different)

CC - JPN Capitalize Comp DB2 Capitalizes Japanese acquisition detail amounts into composite assets
specifically for the DB2 environment. This mass change template sums
the uncapitalized acquisition detail line amounts for the assets that are
associated with a composite asset.

CC - JPN Capitalize Composite Capitalizes Japanese acquisition detail amounts into composite assets.
This mass change template sums the uncapitalized acquisition detail line
amounts for the assets that are associated with a composite asset.

CR - Composite Retirement Retires acquisition detail amounts from composite assets. This mass
change template inserts the retirement cost for each set of ChartFields
into INTFC_FIN.

Delete Asset Accntg Entries (Delete Deletes entries from the PS_DIST_LN table after they have been
Archived DIST_LN) archived.

Delete Asset Depr Rpt Entries Deletes the DEPR_RPT, DEPR_RPT_CF_SUM, and
DEPR_RPT_PD_SUM specified entries that are determined by the
selection criteria of the mass change template that you use. To delete
archived entries, enter the same selection criteria that you used for the
mass change archive of DEPR_RPT entries. To purge DEPR_RPT
entries, use the Business Unit, Book, and Fiscal Year fields as selection
criteria when you run the mass change.

Delete Asset NBV Entries Deletes the entries from the Asset Net Book Value table
(PS_ASSET_NBV_TBL). To delete archived entries, enter the same
selection criteria that you used for the mass change archive of Asset
NBV entries. To purge Asset Net Book Value entries, use the Business
Unit, User ID, and As of Date fields as selection criteria when you run
the mass change

Delete Asset Open Trans Deletes open transaction entries from the PS_OPEN_Trans table after
they have been archived.

EURO1 - InterUnit Trf − New Book Performs mass interunit asset transfers from one book to another within
the same business unit. The new book might have a different currency
code. An example might be if you are changing from a 13- to a 12-period
calendar. You must enter the business unit, the from book twice, and a
blank, which transfers all assets.

Note. If you copy this mass change template or use it as a basis to create
your template, and you are changing currencies, you must populate the
INTFC_FIN.MC_DEFN_ID field with the words Currency Conversion
(mixed case) on the transfer IN row. It does not matter what you enter in
the transfer OUT row; the name of the mass change suffices or you can
leave the row blank.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 443
Processing Asset Mass Changes Chapter 20

Mass Change Template ID (Mass Mass Change Template Description / Asset Management
Change Type ID, If Different)

InterUnit RET/Add w/Curr Conv Performs financial asset transfers from one business unit to another,
especially when the business units have different currencies and books.
Assets are retired in the from business unit and added in the to business
unit. This mass change template differs from others in that IUF does not
perform currency conversions.

Note. New setIDs for the to business unit are assigned by the Transaction
Loader process, not by Mass Change. If you preview the load
transactions prior to running the Transaction Loader process, you see that
the to business unit assets have the from business unit asset IDs. The
Transaction Loader process assigns new IDs when adding the assets to
the to business unit.

Note. To perform currency conversion when moving assets from one

business unit to another, use the default profile option in the Transaction
Loader process. This means that the profile IDs on the To business unit
must exist for the assets that are being moved from the From business
unit, and they must be the same profile IDs that were used in the From
business unit. Books that are associated with the profile ID may be
different.

Note. You cannot perform interunit transfers [retire/add] on group

assets.

InterUnit TRF w/Attrib, War, Lic Performs mass interunit transfers when asset attributes, warranty and
license information also need to be transferred. Two Physical A and two
Financial transactions are created, one for the From business unit and one
for the To business unit. Entries are also created in Physical B for
attribute, warranty, and license information transfers.

444 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 20 Processing Asset Mass Changes

Mass Change Template ID (Mass Mass Change Template Description / Asset Management
Change Type ID, If Different)

InterUnit TRF w/Currency Conv Performs financial asset transfers from one business unit to another,
(InterUnit TRF w/Curr Conv) especially when the business units have different currencies and books.
This mass change template performs currency conversion when business
unit and book currency codes are different in the From and To business
units.

Note. New asset IDs for the To business unit are assigned by the
Transaction Loader process, not by Mass Change. If you preview the
load transactions prior to running the Transaction Loader process, you
see that the To business unit assets contain the From business unit asset
IDs. The Transaction Loader process assigns new IDs when you add the
assets to the To business unit.

Note. To perform currency conversion when moving assets from one

business unit to another, the default profile option in the Transaction
Loader process is used. This means that the profile IDs on the To
business unit must exist for the assets that are being moved from the
From business unit, and they must be the same profile IDs that are used
in the From business unit. Books that are associated with the profile ID
may be different.

Note. You cannot perform interunit transfers (retire/add) on group assets.

IRC - Increase Rate Change Performs mass change for increase in special rates and accelerated
depreciation.

IUF - IU Transfer to Another BU Performs financial asset transfers from one business unit to another.
This template does not perform currency conversion. You can also refer
to the definition for the InterUnit RET/Add w/Curr Conv template.

IUT - Inter-Unit Transfer Performs mass interunit transfers of assets. You cannot perform interunit
transfers on group assets. This mass change type does not perform
currency conversion. Refer also to the definition for the InterUnit
RET/Add w/Curr Conv template.

JVA - Joint Venture BU Addition Adds a new business unit to a joint venture using the joint venture's
profiles.

JVP - Joint Venture BU Add (w/Prof) Adds a new business unit to a joint venture with the participant's profile.
Book table values that can be populated with default values from the
profile detail table are obtained from the profile ID for the new business
unit. This mass change type is similar to the JVA mass change type,
except that JVP uses the joint venture participant's profiles.

JVR - Joint Venture BU Removal Removes joint venture business units.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 445
Processing Asset Mass Changes Chapter 20

Mass Change Template ID (Mass Mass Change Template Description / Asset Management
Change Type ID, If Different)

JVT - JV Allocation Change Transfers the allocation percentage from one business unit to another.

PAD - Parent Asset Cost Adjust Changes the cost of a parent asset and all of its children.

Parent Retire w/Pro/RC Absolut Retires parent assets and their children. The system sets the proceeds and
removal cost for each asset as equal to the proceeds and removal cost that
were entered by the user.

Parent Retire w/Pro/RC Distrib Retires parent assets and their children. The system proportionally
distributes proceeds and removal costs by retirement amount.

Partial Parent Asset Transfer Performs partial asset transfers for a specific parent and all of its children
assets. The system transfers a percentage of cost and quantity between
the specified ChartFields.

Partial Retire Parent Proc Abs Partially retires parent assets and all of their children assets (children that
are financial assets). The percentage of retirement is specified by the
user.
The system sets the proceeds and removal costs for each asset as equal to
the proceeds and removal cost that were entered by the user.

Partial Retire Parent Proc Dis Partially retires parent assets and all of their children assets. The
percentage of retirement is specified by the user.
The system proportionally distributes proceeds and removal costs for
each asset based on the cost of each asset that is retired over the total cost
of all assets that are retired.

Partial Retire Proceeds Absolu Partially retires assets. The user specifies the percentage of retirement.
The system sets proceeds and removal costs for each asset as equal to the
proceeds and removal cost that were entered by the user.

Partial Retire Proceeds Dist (Part. Partially retires assets. Do not use this mass change type to do a full
Retirement Proceeds Dist) retirement. The system proportionally distributes proceeds by retirement
amount.

PHY - Physical Asset Changes Changes the physical side of assets, such as asset location and custodian.

PI Extract Extracts asset data from multiple Asset Management tables into one
physical inventory extract table.

446 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 20 Processing Asset Mass Changes

Mass Change Template ID (Mass Mass Change Template Description / Asset Management
Change Type ID, If Different)

PI Extract with Book Extracts asset data from multiple Asset Management tables into one
physical inventory extract table for assets that are established in a book
other than the current default book. The book value for the physical
inventory is specified on the Physical Inventory Control - Definition page
(Asset Management, Physical Inventory, Define Inventory Occurrence).

PI Scan Scope Scans scope for physical inventory mass change.

PI Scan Scope with Book Scans scope for physical inventory mass change for assets that are
established in a book other than the current default book. The book value
for the physical inventory is specified on the Physical Inventory Control -
Definition page (Asset Management, Physical Inventory, Define
Inventory Occurrence).

PI1 - Asset Table Updates (PI1 - Asset Processes scanned inventory data and places it in updates to the asset
Table Update) table.

PI2 - Asset Location Changes Changes the location table for an asset.

PI3 - Department Transfers Transfers departments for assets (used in physical inventory).

PI4 - Asset Retirements (PI4 - Retire Retires assets that are not found during physical inventory processing.
Assets Not Found)

PI5 - Physical Asset Adds (PI5 - Add Adds the "overs" into Asset Management, which are assets that were
Assets Found in PI) scanned in physical inventory but were not originally in Asset
Management. These assets are entered as a physical add only, not
financial.

PI6 - Asset Custodian Changes Changes an asset's custodian (used in physical inventory).

PI7 - Inventory History Insert Inserts records into the Physical Inventory Asset History table at the
close of physical inventory for every asset in the Results table with a
status of Inventory.

Note. You cannot run Mass Changes PI1 - PI18, PI Extract, and PI Scan
Scope online. They are used only by the Physical Inventory SQR.

PRC - Parent Recategorization Moves the cost of an asset from one asset category to another for a parent
asset and all of its children.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 447
Processing Asset Mass Changes Chapter 20

Mass Change Template ID (Mass Mass Change Template Description / Asset Management
Change Type ID, If Different)

PTF - Parent Asset Transfer Transfers the cost of a parent asset and all of its children out of the from
values and into the to values.

PTR - Partial Transfer by Dept (PTR- Performs partial asset transfers; which is where the system transfers a
Partial Asset Transfer) percentage of the cost and quantity of an asset between the ChartFields
specified.

RCT − Recategorization Moves the cost of an asset from one asset category to another.

REI - Reinstate Assets (REI - Reinstates retired assets.

Reinstatement)

REP - Reinstate Parent Assets Reinstates retired parent assets and all of their children.

Retire w/Proceeds/RC Absolute Retires assets. The system sets proceeds and removal cost for each asset
as equal to the proceeds and removal cost that were entered by the user.

Retire w/Proceeds/RC Distribut Retires assets. The system proportionally distributes proceeds and
removal cost for each asset based on the cost of each asset that is retired
over the total cost of all assets that are retired.

TM - Acctg Entry Template Copy Copies accounting entry templates from one setID to another.

TM - Actg Ent Tmpl Copy w/in Set Differs from the TM - Acctg Entry Template Copy template in that this
(TM - Acctg Entry Template Copy) template copies from one category to another within the same setID. The
TM - Acctg Entry Template Copy template copies accounting entry
templates from one setID to another setID.
This mass change empties the temporary tables, dumps the template rows
of the source setID and category into temporary tables, and copies the
temporary rows over to the permanent accounting entry template tables
for the target category that is specified.

Note. The system uses the temporary tables PS_DIST_TMPL_TMP and

PS_DIST_TMPLLN_TMP.

TRF - Full Transfer by Dept (TRF - Transfers assets from current ChartField values to the to values that are
Asset Transfer) entered by the user. The Cost Balance view gives the current cost at a
ChartField level and enables you to change those values.

Unload DIST_LN_ARCH to file Archives the PS_DIST_LN_ARCH table to a sequential file.

(Archive DIST_LN_ARCH to file)

448 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 20 Processing Asset Mass Changes

Mass Change Template ID (Mass Mass Change Template Description / Asset Management
Change Type ID, If Different)

Unload Open Trans to file (Unload Unloads entries from the Asset Open Transaction Archive table to a
Open Trans Archive) sequential file.

Upload Asset Acctng Entries (Load Loads the production asset accounting entry table (PS_DIST_LN) from
Archived DIST_LN) the accounting entry archive table (PS_DIST_LN_ARCH).

Upload Asset Open Trans (Upload Uploads open transactions into the PS_OPEN_TRANS table from the
Archive Open Trans) PS_OPEN_TRANS_ARCH table.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 449
 Chapter 21

Using Asset Management Reporting

Options
This chapter provides an overview of Asset Management reporting options and discusses how to use:

• Flexible reporting and print formats

• Online reports.

• Charting for financial data.

Understanding Asset Management Reporting Options

PeopleSoft delivers several kinds of report options within Asset Management. This section discusses:

• Reporting and formatting options.

• Online reporting via inquiry pages.

• Asset management financial chart generation.

Reporting and Formats

Asset Management reports are generated as the result of an asset management process or in response to an ad
hoc request for asset information. Processes and reports can be generated as part of scheduled batch activities
or as one-time requests, all of which are handled through the Process Scheduler. The type of report that is
generated is usually the result of how the data is to be presented or of the kind of processing that is required to
produce the desired results.

Asset Management provides reports to aid in tracking and reconciling asset transactions, capital acquisition
planning, depreciation, account activity, accounting entries, physical inventory, asset disposal and retirement,
and to meet tax reporting requirements. Reports supporting these same asset management activities on the
global level as well as statutory requirements are also available for Australia, Canada, France, Germany, Italy,
India, and Japan. All of the available reports that are associated with asset management are listed in
Appendix: Asset Management Reports in this PeopleBook.

Most of the reports that are used for different functions within Asset Management make use of the same data
but report it from a different perspective. For example, depreciation is often reviewed by ChartField activity.
It is, however, also useful to review depreciation based on a category or location. To that end, you may use a
report template that enables you to define the reporting-by method to be used.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 451
Using Asset Management Reporting Options Chapter 21

PeopleSoft delivers report templates that can be shared by all users to include or exclude information of your
choosing. The ChartField Format Template and the Report Fields Format Template control the sort order,
field length to display, field label overrides, amount field length, and sub-totaling. To accommodate the
varying needs of many users, print options are available to override the report title and to select the
ChartField by which to report, using Report By as the key, with a report suffix added to the report ID to
indicate what value is used for Report By.

Asset Management also provides the tools to produce reports in user-defined formats. Using report IDs or
user IDs as keys to reporting templates, multiple groups or individuals use the same general information
provided in a report but receive it in a dynamically defined format addressing the particular needs of the
group or individual.

Online Reporting

Asset Management provides online inquiries of the depreciation reporting table (DEPR_RPT), which displays
high level summary data for a period with details available via drill down functions that are defined at the
business unit/book definition level. When enabled for online reporting, selection criteria includes Business
Unit, Book, Fiscal Year, Period, Asset Category, Profile ID and ChartFields. The drill down feature provides
the option to view the data presented to the lowest level available.

Asset Management Charts

Asset Management provides the ability to display some financial data in 2-D, or stacked bar charts. This
option is available for generating data comparisons (for example, depreciation per operating units or by
book). By selecting the values to be compared, a full color coded chart is generated, which provides an at-a-
glance depiction of financial data.

Prerequisites
To use Asset Management reporting options, you must have:

• Established business units and book definitions.

The online reporting option is established at the business unit/book definition level. You must have
enabled this option for each business unit and each book that is associated with that business unit for
which you want to view online inquiries with drill down capability.

• Established ChartFields.

Report suffix is appended to the run control ID for a report and defaults to a ChartField order. If
additional ChartFields are to be defined, the new ChartFields must be included.

Online reporting selects data based on ChartFields:

• Defined drill down fields.

Online reporting enables users to view details of costs and depreciation from high level summary views to
the lowest reporting level available for reporting periods. Once you have defined the drill down fields,
you can view the details in finer granularity.

452 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 21 Using Asset Management Reporting Options

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing PeopleSoft
Asset Management Business Units"

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing Asset
Processing"

PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining and Using ChartFields"

Using Flexible Reporting and Formats

PeopleSoft enables you to generate reports and print them using your report format templates for the
following reports:

• Cost Activity (RUN_AMAS2000)

• Depreciation Activity (RUN_AMDP2000)

• Asset Net Book Value (RUN_AMDP2100)

• Asset Reclassifications (RUN_AMAS240)

• Asset Transfers (RUN_AMAS2300)

• Asset Acquisitions (RUN_AMAS2100 and RUN_AMAS2110)

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing Asset
Processing," Setting Up Reporting Options

Pages Used to Run Reports With Format Templates

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Parameters RUN_* Asset Management, Select a report and apply a

Financial Reports report format template in
the Report Print Options
group box or update or add
a report format template.

ChartField Format RPT_FMT_TMPL_SBP Click the Update/Add CF Update or add new

Template Template link in the Report ChartField format
Print Options group box. templates.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 453
Using Asset Management Reporting Options Chapter 21

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Report Fields Format RPT_FMT_TMPL2_SBP Click the Update/Add RF Update or add new report
Template Template link in the Report field format templates.
Print Options group box.

Running Flexible Reporting and Formats

Select Asset Management, Financial Reports, select the report to be generated. Select the Run Control ID
that is associated with your report or create a new one.

Asset Net Book Value page (Report Print Options)

Access the run control page for the report to be formatted with user-defined parameters and expand the
Report Print Options group box.

Note. Not all Asset Management reports are enabled with the flexible report format template feature.

454 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 21 Using Asset Management Reporting Options

Report Print Options

Report By Select from the valid Report By values by which data is to be reported for this
report type. For example, the report may use ChartFields and the information in
the report can be presented by any ChartField value. If you select DEPTID, the
data is grouped by department ID. If you select ACCOUNT, the same
information is retrieved but is grouped by account. The purpose or audience for
your report drives your selection.

CF Template ID Select the template ID for this report from the saved templates by clicking the
(ChartField Template ID) drop down arrow. Click theUpdate/Add CF Template link to go to the ChartField
Format Template page where you can add a new template or update an existing
template. The template contains the report format you have defined. For example,
perhaps you need a list of departments and expense totals for a period. You can
limit your report to include only the relevant fields for your task and save the
selected options as a template for future use.

Note. To add a new CF template ID, the CF Template ID field must be blank
before you select the Update/Add CF Template link.

RF Template ID (Report Select the RF template ID for this report from the saved templates by clicking the
Fields Template ID) drop down arrow. Click theUpdate/Add RF Template link to go to the Report
Fields Format Template page where you can add a new template or update an
existing template. This template contains the format you have defined for the
report fields. Select which fields to include in your report, such as Cost Balance,
Current Depreciation, and so on. You can override the field label as well.

Note. To add a new RF template ID, the RF Template ID field must be blank
before you select the Update/Add RF Template link.

Title Override Enter the title for the report. This field enables you to enter a meaningful report
title for this run of the report. If you do not enter a title, the system selects a
default value from the string table value of the technical value for the report.
Instead, it is useful to name your report based on the current reason, date, or
requester for the report.

Amount Length Enter the maximum number of spaces that are required for the Amount fields to
display. The default is 23 digits.

Update/Add CF Click this link to update or add a new ChartField format template.
Template
Update/Add RF Click this link to update or add a new report fields format template.
Template

ChartField Format Template

Access the ChartField Format Template page (click the Update/Add CF Template link in the Report Print
Options group box. of the report run control page).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 455
Using Asset Management Reporting Options Chapter 21

ChartField Format Template page

Select the ChartFields to include within the report, the display order and length, a label override and which
subtotals to print. You can also select to delete a template by clicking the Delete Template link.

Report Fields Format Template

Access the Report Field Format Template page (click the Update/Add RF Template link in the Report Print
Options group box. of the report run control page).

456 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 21 Using Asset Management Reporting Options

Report Fields Format Template page

Select the report fields to include within the report and override the labels if necessary.

RF Template ID (report Enter a template name and click the Add Template link.
fields template ID)

Add Template Click this link to add a new report format template after entering a template name
in the field. Once clicked, the report fields appear on the page from which to
select. This link is replaced by the Delete Template link after you have defined a
template.

Delete Template Click to delete an existing template.

See Also

Appendix C, "PeopleSoft Asset Management Reports," page 653

Enterprise PeopleTools PeopleBook: PeopleSoft Process Scheduler

Using Online Reporting

To use online reporting in Asset Management, you must first enable the option on the Asset Management
Business Unit/Book Definition page. You may optionally use drill down features and link group IDs to user
IDs to use with online reporting.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 457
Using Asset Management Reporting Options Chapter 21

Page Used to Generate Online Reports

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Cost and Depreciation AM_REPORT1 Asset Management, View summarized

Financial Reports, Cost and depreciation activity, cost
Depreciation Summary activity and net book value
from reporting tables and
drill down to details.

Generating Online Reports

You can define the drill down functions for online inquiries of the depreciation reporting table (DEPR_RPT).
The report displays high level summary data for a period with details available for drill down to the lowest
available level. The drill down definition is set up at the business unit, book definition level in the Financial
Reports component.

Access the Cost and Depreciation page (Asset Management, Financial Reports, Cost and Depreciation
Summary).

458 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 21 Using Asset Management Reporting Options

Cost and Depreciation page

Selection Criteria

Business Unit,Book All of these values are required.

Name,Fiscal Year, and The business unit is based on the user ID options.
Currency
The book name is the default book for the business unit, if the business unit is not
blank.
The fiscal year uses today's date from the calendar table, if the book name is not
blank.
CurrencyThe system uses the business unit, book name base currency for the
default currency.

Period Enter the period when the expected data is of high volume and selection criteria
is entered. If you leave the field blank, all periods display after performing your
search.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 459
Using Asset Management Reporting Options Chapter 21

Group Type This field is used only when the business unit/book name uses group assets. If
group assets is not defined at the installation level, Group Type will not display.
Select Group Asset,Group Member, or None.

Secondary Selection Criteria

Select any secondary criteria to further narrow the report results. The available options reflect the
ChartFields, asset category, asset profile ID, and cost type.

After you have entered the selection criteria and performed the search, the resulting data is summarized by
period. You can now drill down on any asset to the lowest level of data that can be viewed. This option is set
when you create the group ID definition. Drill down enables bidirectional summary data, so that you can drill
down and go back to a previous level of data. The system displays breadcrumbs to manage your drill down
layers.

Related amounts are grouped and viewed in separate tabs.

Net Book Value

Net book value includes period depreciation, year-to-date (YTD) depreciation, LTD depreciation, cost,
salvage value and net book value.

• Special term depreciation

Includes special depreciation, accelerated depreciation, increase depreciation, standard depreciation, and
initial depreciation.

Note. When no special term depreciation is tracked, this tab is hidden.

• ChartFields

Includes ChartFields that are available for drill down when the All Assets option is selected.

• Other Information

Includes profile ID, location, fixed asset account, and accumulated depreciation account when the All
Assets option is selected.

Depreciation Activity

Depreciation activity includes accumulated depreciation for additions, transfers, re-categorization,

retirements, reinstatements, and prior depreciation.

Note. When the group type Group Member is selected, depreciation activity is hidden.

Cost Activity

Cost activity includes cost addition, adjustment, transfer, re-categorization, retirement, and reinstatement.

Note. When Group Type is Group Asset, Cost Activity is hidden.

460 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 21 Using Asset Management Reporting Options

Charting Financial Data

When using Asset Management charting features, you select your criteria and view the resulting online chart
output.

Page Used to Chart Financial Data

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Selection Criteria AMCHART1 Asset Management, Select criteria and create

Financial Reports, Generate and view online charts of
AM Charts financial data.

Using Asset Management Financial Charts

Access the Selection Criteria page (Asset Management, Financial Reports, Generate AM Charts).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 461
Using Asset Management Reporting Options Chapter 21

Selection Criteria page

The Selection Criteria page defines the parameters for the chart. Values are derived to compare business
units, books, ChartFields, and totals for cost, accumulated depreciation, and net book value, and are depicted
in the resulting chart.

Compare Data

Compare Select the values you want to compare in the chart. For example, if business unit
is selected, you must select the business units to compare. The chart depicts the
comparison between the business unit values that you enter.

462 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 21 Using Asset Management Reporting Options

Cost,Accumulated Depr Select the summary totals to be compared. For example, to create a what-if
(accumulated scenario of business units for Germany and France operations, select
depreciation), Net Book Accumulated Depr to compare that value for each business unit. You must select
Value at least one summary total to compare or any combination of the three.

Note. When using reporting functions that report multiple currencies, the
comparison is always reported in the frombusiness unit currency.

ChartField Selection Further define the chart to display subtotals by ChartField.

Criteria
From Year and To Year Enter the range of fiscal years to include in the chart.

Chart Type Select the type of chart you want to assemble. The valid choices are 2-D
Horizontal Bar or Stacked Bar.

When you have selected all the appropriate criteria, gather the data by clicking the Searchbutton. The data
summary totals display, with one row for each fiscal year requested and one column for each field and value
selected. Before you can view the chart, you must press the Generate Chart button.

The chart image displays automatically on a second page tab. A legend is included in the chart for each color-
coded bar in the chart. A summary of the chart totals displays in the Chart Creation Data group box.

This illustration depicts a summary of the chart totals:

Example: Chart Image page

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 463
Using Asset Management Reporting Options Chapter 21

Example: Chart Summary Totals

464 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
 Chapter 22

Using Asset Management Self Service

Web Components
This chapter provides an overview of Asset Management self service web components and describes:

• Prerequisites to use Asset Management self service web components.

• Using self service application pages.

Understanding Self Service Components in Asset Management

Self-service web applications provide your employees secure and convenient access to information. For many
people, self-service applications provide an improved alternative to automated telephone prompting systems.
In addition, they can help ease the workload for internal support staff.

PeopleSoft delivers several self-service web components as templates. You can use the PeopleTools
Application Designer to modify these Web components just as you would any application components.

Asset Management provides four self-service web components:

Component Description

Assets Provides details for an individual asset, including the

reference information (ID, tag number, and serial
number), location, department, model, manufacturer,
and custodian.

Asset Transfer Request An employee can create and submit a request to indicate
an asset has been lost, stolen, inappropriately assigned,
or relocated to another department.

Asset Transfer Approval A manager can approve, deny, or hold an asset transfer
request that is submitted by an employee.

Department Assets Provides a list of all assets that are assigned to a

particular department for which the manager is
responsible.

The information displayed in these pages derives directly from the tables in Asset Management.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 465
Using Asset Management Self Service Web Components Chapter 22

Security
The user profile that is created for each individual who accesses the self-service web application determines
the pages the user can access. Create user profiles in the User Profiles - General page within the User Profile
component. Assign a role to each user profile and link roles to permission lists. Each permission list identifies
the pages that individuals assigned to a role can access. To modify the access for specific web pages for each
role, modify the permission list for the user's role.

Note. If a permission list is modified, it changes the access for all users who are assigned to roles to which the
permission list is linked.

Use the user profile to define to which data the user has access. For example, you can associate the user
profile for an employee with a specific employee ID. When employees sign on to the self-service web
application, they only receive access to asset management information for the employee that is assigned to
that employee ID. As another example, you can associate the user profile for a manager with a specific
employee ID. The manager receives access to asset management information for assets to which they are
assigned.

See Also

Enterprise PeopleTools PeopleBook, "Security Administration"

Asset Management Roles

Asset Management provides self-service Web pages for the following roles:

• Employees

• Managers

PeopleSoft delivers definitions for each of these roles. You assign permission lists to each role.

Employees have access to self-service web pages where they can perform the following tasks:

• View asset details.

• Create asset transfer requests.

Managers have access to self-service web pages where they can perform the following tasks:

• View asset details.

• View assets by department.

• Approve, deny, or hold asset transfer requests.

See Also

Enterprise PeopleTools PeopleBook, "Security Administration"

466 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 22 Using Asset Management Self Service Web Components

Prerequisites to Using Self Service Web Components

Before using Asset Management, you must set up the product application.

To use employee and manager data, you must also transfer data from the Human Resources database to the
Financials database. When using Human Capital Management applications, the system uses application
messaging to retrieve data from the Human Capital Management tables to the Financials tables. The
application messages that provide the data needed for Asset Management Self Service web components are
PERSON_BASIC_SYNC and PERSON_BASIC_FULL_SYNC.

Additionally, you must define user or employee IDs, user profiles, roles, and permission lists.

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing PeopleSoft
Asset Management Business Units"

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing Asset
Processing"

PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook

Enterprise PeopleTools PeopleBook, "Security Administration"

Enterprise PeopleTools PeopleBook, "Integration Tools"

Using Self Service Application Pages

This section describes the web pages that employees or managers can access to view or modify information
for Asset Management. The information that appears on the page and the use of the page might differ,
depending on the user's role. Both employees and managers can review asset information and submit asset
transfer requests. However, only managers can approve, hold, or deny asset transfer requests.

Note. Approvals on the self-service web application pages do not automatically generate transactions in Asset
Management. An email or a work list is sent to a corresponding employee to enter the action manually in
Asset Management.

Pages Used to Use Self Service Application Pages

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

My Assets AM_MY_ASSET Employee Self-Service, Employees view a list of

Assets, View/Transfer assets that are assigned to
Assets them, access asset detail
information, and submit
asset transfer requests.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 467
Using Asset Management Self Service Web Components Chapter 22

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Asset Information AM_MY_ASSET_DETAIL Click the Asset link on the Employees and managers
My Assets page view asset detail
information and submit
asset transfer requests.

Asset Transfer Request AM_MY_ASSET_RQST1 Click the Transfer button on Employees submit an Asset
the My Assets page Transfer Request to a
manager. The Asset
Transfer Request displays
asset detail and transfer
request information.

My Departments AM_MY_DEPT Manager Self-Service, Managers view a list of

Assets, My Departments departments that are
assigned to them and access
department's asset
information.

My Department AM_MY_DEPT_ASSET Manager Self-Service, Managers view a list of

Assets, View Department assets that are assigned to
Assets their departments, access
asset detail information, and
submit asset transfer
requests.

Approve Asset Transfer AM_MY_ASSETS_RQST2 Manager Self-Service, Managers approve, deny, or

Assets, Approve Asset hold asset transfer requests
Transfer submitted by themselves or
their employees.

Using the Asset Self-Service Component

Access the My Assets page (Employee Self-Service, Assets, View/Transfer Assets).

My Assets page

Employees view a list of assets that are assigned to them, access asset detail information, and submit asset
transfer requests

468 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
 Chapter 23

Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft

Asset Management
PeopleSoft Asset Management provides enhanced enterprise-wide global support. This chapter provides an
overview of Asset Management in global settings and discusses how to:

• (AUS) Use PeopleSoft Asset Management options to meet Australian requirements.

• (CAN) Use PeopleSoft Asset Management options to meet Canadian requirements.

• (FRA) Use PeopleSoft Asset Management options to meet French requirements.

• (DEU) Use PeopleSoft Asset Management options to meet German requirements.

• (IND) Use PeopleSoft Asset Management options to meet Indian requirements.

• (ITA) Use PeopleSoft Asset Management options to meet Italian requirements.

• (JPN) Use PeopleSoft Asset Management options to meet Japanese requirements.

Note. You must have established the correct international options at implementation to display and use these
pages.

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Getting Started with
PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals"

Chapter 1, "Getting Started With PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Management," page 1

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing PeopleSoft
Asset Management Business Units"

Understanding PeopleSoft Asset Management in Global Settings

Requirements for asset tracking and the subsequent taxing and reporting on assets vary around the world.
This chapter provides the information necessary to implement country-specific options to meet local tracking,
taxation, and reporting requirements for Asset Management.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 469
Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 23

Using PeopleSoft Asset Management in Australia

PeopleSoft Asset Management provides the options to identify assets for and calculate deductions of
expenditures on assets for research and development (R&D) based on aggregate values.

The system provides options to manage Australian tax credit allowances related to capital investment projects
that include provisions for rebates (often referred to as credits).

The system provides the options to track and report on the usage of assets requiring changes in creditable
purpose (CCP), assets that may be subject to goods and services tax (GST) or value-added tax (VAT), and
capital gains taxes (CGT).

The system provides the functionality to perform "net-method" asset revaluation in accordance with
Australian accounting standards (AASB1010 and AASB1041), which require crediting to related asset
accounts the balance of accumulated depreciation at the date on which an asset is revalued.

Using PeopleSoft Asset Management in Canada

PeopleSoft Asset Management enables you to calculate depreciation for tax purposes in Canada under the
terms of the Capital Cost Allowance (CCA) Reporting. In Canada, all depreciation is calculated on the pool
or class of assets by using the rate that is prescribed by the Income Tax Act.

The CCA calculation consists of several components. To calculate CCA, the undepreciated capital cost
(UCC) of assets at the beginning of the taxation year is determined, and acquisitions and dispositions during
the year are added and subtracted to obtain the balance that can be depreciated. A percentage depreciation and
CCA rate is applied to this UCC balance to determine the maximum amount that can be claimed. The CCA
that is claimed is deducted from the beginning UCC to calculate the UCC at the end of the year. The final
balance is used at the beginning of the following year.

Using PeopleSoft Asset Management in France

PeopleSoft Asset Management supports the specialized derogatory depreciation methods commonly used in
France.

The system provides the reporting features necessary to track and report the French business tax at the asset
book level and the asset profile level.

The system provides the functionality to perform asset revaluation as necessary.

Using PeopleSoft Asset Management in Germany

PeopleSoft Asset Management supports commonly used practices in Germany, including Staffel depreciation,
a half-year prorate convention, geometric digressive depreciation, a parameter-driven automatic retirement
process, and management of capitalization limits for low-value assets. In addition, PeopleSoft Asset
Management provides reports to meet German statutory requirements.

470 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 23 Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management

Using PeopleSoft Asset Management in India

PeopleSoft Asset Management provides asset processing features that correspond to the tax reporting
requirements established by the Indian Tax Depreciation Act of 1961. This local standard requires that assets
are grouped within a defined tax block. Currently India identifies four asset tax blocks: buildings, furniture
and fixtures, machinery and plant, and intangibles. Each block of assets is further assigned a tax groupor
class, and each class maintains an individual tax rate. The Indian tax year is a fixed fiscal calendar starting
April 1 and ending March 31. Tax depreciation is reported annually at the fiscal year to the tax authority per
asset block.

The system takes into account the rules regarding the treatment of capital and operating leases by enabling
you to designate them.

The system provides the Straight Line Percent depreciation method for India, which calculates depreciation
based on rates, and useful life is calculated on cost, salvage value, and depreciation rate combined.

The system provides the India Asset Tax Register, which reports all booked transactions to show the cost,
depreciation, and net book value of assets, as well as tax depreciation reporting options.

Using PeopleSoft Asset Management in Italy

PeopleSoft Asset Management enables you to produce a fixed-asset book, required by Italian regulations
(article 16, D.P.R. 600/73), to record information regarding depreciable fixed assets. The fixed-asset book
lists information that is relevant to fixed assets, including the date of purchase, original cost, accumulated
depreciation (beginning of year balance), depreciation rate, year-to-date (YTD) depreciation (current year
activity), retirement and disposal information, ending balance, and any revaluation and devaluation
information in a particular fiscal year for either the economic or fiscal book. Most Italian business entities use
an economic book to record depreciation that is not subject to fiscal constraints and a fiscal book to record
specific rules and depreciation methods that are regulated by fiscal authorities.

Using PeopleSoft Asset Management in Japan

PeopleSoft Asset Management supports commonly used practices in Japan, including depreciation methods
for fixed and leased assets, composite depreciation, and collateral assets. In addition, PeopleSoft Asset
Management provides reports to satisfy tax reporting requirements.

Prerequisites
Before you can perform some of the functions discussed in this chapter, you must have already performed
some or all of the following country-specific tasks:

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 471
Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 23

Country Task

VAT countries Set up the appropriate value-added-tax (VAT) defaults and reporting
options, and associate these defaults and options with business units or
VAT-driven entities.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals
9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing PeopleSoft Asset Management
Business Units," Defining VAT Defaults.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Global Options and Reports 9.1
PeopleBook, "Working with VAT."

(AUS) Australia

472 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 23 Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management

Country Task

Before processing asset revaluations, ensure • Select the Create Accounting Entries check box for the accounting
that these conditions have been set up for book that you are using on the Business Unit/Book Definition
Australia: page in the Asset Management Business Unit Definition
component.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management

Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing PeopleSoft
Asset Management Business Units."
• Set up the appropriate book definition for Australia on the Assets
Books page.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management

Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing PeopleSoft
Asset Management Business Units," Defining Business Unit
Processing Options.
• Verify that cost type R (revaluation) is available on the Cost
Types page and set as the Revaluation process.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management

Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing Asset
Processing," Defining Asset Attributes.
• Add new accounts for Provision for Revaluation (Equity) and
Reversal of Depreciation (Expense). Do this on the Accounts page
in the Design ChartFields component.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1

PeopleBook, "Defining and Using ChartFields."
• Define a set of accounting entry template IDs for each setID that
is affected by revaluation, and define accounting entry templates
for each category of asset that is affected by the revaluation using
cost type R on the Accounting Entry Template page.

These are necessary to generate accounting entries.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management

Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up Accounting
Entry and Financial Processing for PeopleSoft Asset
Management," Defining Accounting Entries.
• Run the detailed Net Book Value report by category
(AMDP2100).

This is not required, but is recommended.

(CAN) Canada

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 473
Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 23

Country Task

Set up the following conditions to calculate • Set up or modify CCA tax classes on the Tax Class page and
CCA reporting for Canada: specify the CCA percentage rate.

Asset pools or classes and CCA rates are set by governmental

regulations. In the year that assets are acquired, use 50 percent of
the normal rate. The value that you enter for an asset tax class for
the CCA rate percent is used later when you run a process to
calculate the CCA rate.

• On the Asset Book Definition - Book Tax page, select the tax
guideline class that reflects the CCA tax class to which the asset
belongs.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals

9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up Tax Processing and Tax Reporting,"
(CAN, IND, and USA) Defining and Maintaining Tax Classes.

(FRA) France

Set up the following conditions for France: • Establish your statutory book in the Business Unit/Book definition
component.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management

Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing PeopleSoft
Asset Management Business Units."
• To create accounting entries that include the derogatory accounts
required by France, set up an accounting entry template ID with
the derogatory feature selected.

• Define asset profiles as business tax applicable by selecting the

Business Tax check box in the Asset Profile component.

• Define asset books as business tax applicable by selecting the

Business Tax check box in the Asset Book Definition component.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals

9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up Tax Processing and Tax Reporting."

(DEU) Germany

Set up the following tables to process tax and • Establish capitalization limit codes for low-value assets.
depreciation for Germany:
• Create a user-defined Staffel depreciation method.

• Define special depreciation terms for accelerated depreciation and

associate the terms at the asset or book level.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals

9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up Tax Processing and Tax Reporting."
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals
9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up Depreciation Processing."

(IND) India

474 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 23 Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management

Country Task

Set up the following tables to process tax and • Asset blocks

depreciation for India:
Define assets blocks that are equivalent to the tax block in India.

• Tax classes

Set up or modify India tax classes on the Tax Class page and
specify the asset block and the tax percentage rate.

Tax class is used to define tax rates by group for processing tax
and depreciation in India. The tax group is a subcategory of the
tax block in India.

• Tax/report entities

Define the tax/report entity. The tax/report entity comprises one or

more business units. Tax reporting is disclosed per entity for
India.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals

9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up Tax Processing and Tax Reporting."
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook,
"Defining User Preferences," Defining Overall User Preferences.

(JPN) Japan

Set up the following tables to process tax and Set up the overall options for user preferences
depreciation for Japan: (OPR_DEF_TABLE_FS1) in the Common Definitions component:
Set the Localization Country value to JPN (Japan), which enables the
JPN Info (Japan information) link in the Define Business Units
component for Asset Management.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals
9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing PeopleSoft Asset Management
Business Units."

(AUS) Using PeopleSoft Asset Management Options to Meet

Australian Requirements
This section discusses how to:

• Define asset R&D categorization.

• Use the Australian tax credit allowance.

• Track changes in CCP.

• Report changes in CCP.

• Calculate CGT.

• Generate asset revaluation (net method).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 475
Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 23

Pages Used to Meet Australian Requirements

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Asset Unit Aggregate RD - BU_AGG_RD Set Up Financials/Supply Calculate research and

AUS (asset unit aggregate Chain, Product Related, development tax deductions
research and development - Asset Management, Taxes, for R&D plant assets.
Australia) Asset Unit Aggregate RD -
AUS, Asset Unit Aggregate
RD - AUS

Asset Profile PROFILE_DEFN Set Up Financials/Supply Define asset profiles.

Chain, Product Related,
Asset Management,
Profiles, Asset Profiles

General Information ASSET_GENERAL_01 Asset Management, Asset Add asset basic information
Transactions, Owned manually, or add or change
Assets, Basic Add, General existing asset information.
Information Also access the Set R&D
Info page.

Cost/Asset Information ASSET_ENTRY_00 Asset Management, Asset Enter information about

Transactions, Owned how this asset will be
Assets, ExpressAdd, capitalized. Also access the
Cost/Asset Information Set R and D Info page.

Asset R&D Information ASSET_RD_SP Click the Set R and D Info Enter information about
(asset research and link from the General R&D assets. For Australian
development information) Information page or from customers, use this page for
the Asset Additional tax reporting purposes. For
Information section on the others, this page is
Cost/Asset Information informational only.
page in ExpressAdd.

Tax Information ASSET_ENTRY_02 Asset Management, Owned Specify property type and
Assets, ExpressAdd, Tax tax depreciation criteria to
Information identify which investment
credits are taken for the
current asset. If the fields on
this page are unavailable,
you are working with a
book that was not set up as
a tax book.

RD Deductions - AUS RUN_AMTX10AU Asset Management, Taxes, Run a report to view the
(research and development Reports, RD Deductions - number of R&D
deductions - Australia) AUS concessions that can be
claimed.

476 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 23 Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Tax Credits - AUS RUN_AMTX20AU Asset Management, Taxes, Run the Tax Credit
Reports, Tax Credits - AUS Allowance Structured
Query Report (SQR) to
produce a report of total tax
credits by business units.

Australia CCP Report RUN_AMTX30AU Asset Management, Taxes, Report the apportionment of
(Australia changes in Reports, Tax CCP recoverable versus
creditable purpose report) nonrecoverable VAT on
invoices.

Defining Asset R&D Categorization

Enable R&D calculations and define assets as R&D eligible assets from the following pages:

• Asset Unit Aggregate RD page.

• Asset Profiles - Definition page.

• Set R and D Info page.

Enabling R&D Calculations

Access the Asset Unit Aggregate RD - AUS page (Set Up Financials/Supply Chain, Product Related, Asset
Management, Taxes, Asset Unit Aggregate RD - AUS, Asset Unit Aggregate RD - AUS).

To calculate the amount of deductions that it is possible to claim, enter the aggregate R&D amount for each
fiscal year. Enter the fiscal year, expenditure, and description for the business unit.

Defining an Asset as R&D Eligible on the Asset Profile Page

Access the Asset Profile - Definition page (Set Up Financials/Supply Chain, Product Related, Asset
Management, Profiles, Asset Profiles, Definition.) Asset profiles that are defined with R&D options that are
selected indicate that all assets that are added to your system by using this profile are used for R&D and are
entitled to R&D tax concessions.

R and D Plant Asset Select if this asset is used for R&D and is entitled to R&D tax concessions.
(research and
development plant asset)
R and D Start Date Enter the date on which the asset was first used exclusively for R&D. If you
(research and leave this field blank, the in-service date from the business unit's tax book is used
development start date) as the start date. The start date determines the first year in which you can claim
R&D concessions.

Use NBV for R and D Select if you want to base the R&D concessions calculation on the net book value
(use net book value for of the asset (at the R&D start date) instead of the book cost. This is useful when
research and an asset previously being depreciated as a non-R&D asset subsequently becomes
development) eligible for R&D concessions.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 477
Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 23

Defining an Asset as R&D Eligible on the Set R&D Information Page

Assets that are added to your system through either the Basic Add- General Information page or the
ExpressAdd-Cost/Asset Information page with R&D options selected identify that the asset is used for R&D
and therefore entitled to R&D tax concessions.

Access the Asset R&D Information page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Owned Assets, Basic Add,
General Information, Set R&D Info, Asset R&D Information page).

R and D Plant (research Select if you want to identify the asset as specifically allocated for R&D.
and development plant)
R and D Start Date Enter the R&D start date for this asset.
(research and
development start date)
Use NBV (use net book Select if appropriate for your tax reporting purposes. Click the OK button to
value) return to the Asset Information or Cost/Asset Information page.

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing Asset
Processing"

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up Depreciation
Processing"

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up Tax
Processing and Tax Reporting"

Chapter 5, "Adding and Maintaining Assets," page 45

Using the Australian Tax Credit Allowance

Australia tax law provides certain tax credit allowances related to capital investment projects that include
provisions for rebates (often referred to as credits). Unlike allowable deductions, the tax credits are not part of
the calculation of taxable income.

The tax credit allowance is calculated in this way:

Tax credit cost basis = book cost x basis reduction rate (%)

Tax credit = tax credit cost basis x tax credit (%)

To use this feature:

• Set up your own credit tables or modify the existing tables on the Tax Credits page.

• Assign a status to the defined tax credits.

The status enables you to classify assets when reporting credits. Use the Tax Credit Status page to enter or
modify a tax credit status.

478 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 23 Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management

• Enter tax credits against assets.

Use the Asset Profiles, Asset Book Definition, or Asset ExpressAdd component.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up Tax
Processing and Tax Reporting," Defining Tax Credits.

Entering Tax Credits Against an Asset

Tax credits are entered against an asset in the Asset Book Definition or Asset ExpressAdd component, or at
the asset profile level by using the Asset Profile Tax Credits page. You can enter tax credits against leased
assets by using the Asset Book Definition page after the asset has been entered through Leased Asset Entry.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing
PeopleSoft Asset Management Business Units," Creating PeopleSoft Asset Management Business Units.

See Chapter 7, "Working With Leased Assets," page 141.

Entering Tax Credits in the Asset Book Definition Component

The Tax Credit Options region on the Tax page (PROFILE_BK_03) of the Asset Profiles component
provides you with the options to identify which investment credits are taken for a selected asset. You must
specify the tax criteria before you can enter tax credits.

After you enter the tax credit code, PeopleSoft Asset Management retrieves the percentage figures that are
specified for the tax credit and calculates the computation amount using the following formula:

Book cost x basis reduction percentage = amount qualifying for the tax credit

Amount qualifyingx tax credit percentage = amount of tax credit

The sum of all tax credits that are defined in the current book appears in the Tax Credit field. The total tax
credit amount is updated each time that you change tax credit information.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing Asset
Processing," Setting Up Asset Profiles.

Entering Tax Credits in the Asset ExpressAdd Component

The Asset ExpressAdd component enables you to identify which investment credits are taken for a selected
asset from the Tax Credit Options region on the Tax Information page (ASSET_ENTRY_02). You must
specify the tax criteria before you can enter tax credits.

Access the Tax Credit Options group box on the Tax Information page.

Enter the tax credit code. You can optionally enter a tax credit status.

After you enter the tax credit code, PeopleSoft Asset Management retrieves the percentage figures that are
specified for the tax credit and calculates the computation amount by using the following formula:

Book costx basis reduction percentage = amount qualifying for the tax credit

Amount qualifying x tax credit percentage = amount of tax credit

The sum of all tax credits that are defined in the current book appears in the Tax Credit field. The total tax
credit amount is updated each time that you change tax credit information.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 479
Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 23

If you change the cost information on the Cost/Asset Information page of the Asset ExpressAdd component
after you have entered tax credits, click the Calculate Credit button to recalculate the amount of the credits.
This reloads the percentage figures from the Tax Credit table and then recalculates the amounts for all tax
credits that are defined for the current asset.

See Chapter 5, "Adding and Maintaining Assets," Adding Assets with the Asset ExpressAdd Component,
page 100.

Tracking Changes in CCP

Australian financial services organizations are required to track the usage of fixed assets that are used in
making input tax supply. Input tax that is not creditable is capitalized in the value of the asset and depreciated
accordingly. Creditable tax is eligible for refund and is not included in the value of the asset. Because a single
asset can be used by a business entity in multiple activities, some of which may be taxable or GST-free and
some of which may be input taxed, the full amount of GST that is paid must be recorded and apportioned
creditable and noncreditable based upon usage. Over the life of an asset, this apportionment must be reviewed
annually and adjusted to reflect the asset's current usage. The time period during which an asset is subject to
this review is determined by the cost of the asset. Review periods are maintained in the Asset Threshold-VAT
table referenced when assigning the last date of mandatory review.

Recording GST in Payables and Passing GST on to Asset Management

To track the apportionment of GST that is relevant to an asset, four fields are passed to Asset Management
from Payables using the Run Load Assets process (INTFAPAM):

• Asset ID

• Merchandise Amount

• Non Recoverable VAT

• Total VAT

Payables validates the information that you entered on the invoice before passing it to Asset Management.

Note. The invoice information must be validated in PeopleSoft Payables before it is passed to PeopleSoft
Asset Management. Invoice information cannot be rejected once it has reached PeopleSoft Asset
Management.

This diagram illustrates the interface process:

480 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 23 Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management

PeopleSoft Payables to PeopleSoft Asset Management GST process

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Payables 9.1 PeopleBook, "Processing Value Added Tax (VAT) in PeopleSoft
Payables."

Adding GST Online in Asset Management

You can enter GST information directly into Asset Management when entering an asset online through the
Asset Basic Information component. Use the Tax link on the Asset Acquisition Detail page to enter tax
amounts that are charged to the asset.

Changes in CCP are recorded on the same page that you use to enter an asset's GST amounts manually and to
designate recoverable and nonrecoverable amounts. When changing the usage percentage of an existing asset,
select the transaction type Adjustment rather than Addition; otherwise, the entry process is the same.

When working in a business unit that is identified for Australia, the Calculate Last Date of Review button
appears on the Asset Information page. Select a schedule type code, and click the Calculate Last Date of
Review button to generate the last date of mandatory review for the asset. The last date of mandatory review
is stored on the Asset Basic Information page.

See Also

Chapter 5, "Adding and Maintaining Assets," Adding and Maintaining Asset Information, page 48

Reporting Changes in CCP

Some organizations must track fixed assets that are used in making input tax supply. You can track the
change in the extent to which a fixed asset is used to make taxable supply from reporting period to reporting
period, and you can make adjustments for any change. For instance, in Australia, Australian financial services
organizations require a solution to record the apportionment of recoverable versus nonrecoverable VAT on
invoices. This information is then sent to PeopleSoft Asset Management for capital assets.

Access the Australia CCP Report page (RUN_AMTX30AU) to generate the report.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 481
Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 23

Calculating CGT
CGT legislation in Australia requires payment of tax on certain capital gains that are realized at the time of an
asset's sale, net of inflation, of all components of the cost basis. Tax deductions can also be realized in certain
circumstances for losses. PeopleSoft Asset Management provides pages on which you designate the
applicability of a gain or loss calculation for specific assets or for all of the assets in a book. When an asset on
which gain or loss has been designated as applicable is retired, the system calculates the gain or loss and
stores the results for later reporting. The gain or loss calculation is split into an assessable gain or loss and a
capital gain or loss amount.

Specifying Capital Gain or Loss Options for an Asset

There are multiple components where you can indicate that an asset is CGT-applicable if you want the capital
gain or loss calculated for an asset upon retirement:

• Asset Book Definition - Book Tax page (if the CGT calculation is applicable for assets on a book level).

• Asset Profile.

• ExpressAdd.

To be prompted to identify an asset as CGT-applicable, you must associate the book for the asset with the
country (Australia) on the Asset Book Definition page.

If CGT is applicable for this asset, select the CGT Applicable check box on any of these pages.

Run the Australian Retirements reports to view the results of CGT-applicable assets. Use these calculations:

Capital gain or loss = asset proceeds – indexed revalued amount or original price – removal amount

Assessable gain/loss = asset proceeds or original price – net book value – removal amount

These calculations use existing indexing tables containing local consumer price indexes (CPI). A logical
extension of this calculation is to determine the actual amount of tax to be paid, or in the case of a loss, the
tax credit that you can later net against a future capital gain.

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing Asset
Processing," Setting Up Asset Profiles

Chapter 5, "Adding and Maintaining Assets," page 45

Calculation of CGT
Here are the elements that are used in the calculation of a capital gain or capital loss on the disposal of an
asset:

• The cost base of the asset, which is used to determine the amount of a capital gain if the disposal of the
asset occurs within 12 months of the taxpayer's acquisition of the asset.

482 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 23 Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management

• The indexed cost base of the asset, which is used to calculate the amount of a capital gain if the taxpayer
disposes of the asset 12 months or more after the date of its acquisition.

• The reduced cost base of the asset, which is used to calculate the amount of a capital loss that arises on the
disposal of the asset.

Using the Asset Retirements page, you can view the CGT that is calculated upon retirement for each asset by
book.

The Retirement reports also contain CGT information.

Generating Asset Revaluation (Net Method)

Asset Management supports asset revaluations in accordance with Australian accounting standards
(AASB1010 and AASB1041), which require crediting to related asset accounts a balance of accumulated
depreciation at the date on which an asset is revalued.

Processing Revaluations

The net method of revaluation cannot be run from the Revaluation worksheet. You must use the process
described here.

To process asset revaluations:

• Run the Australian Revaluation process (AMAUSCAL) from Asset Management, Asset Transactions,
Financial Transactions, Revaluation in Mass

• Select the net method as the revaluation method, define the run control parameters and click the Run
button on the Process request page.

If you select the Include Current Period Depr (include current period depreciation) option, the process
includes the depreciation in the revaluation accounting entries.

Note. Not all of the parameters that are normally available from the run control page are available for
this revaluation method.

• Select the Australian Revaluation check box.

The process updates the Financial Loader table (PS_INTFC_FIN) with four rows for each asset
included in the process request: one for retirement (RET) with the total cost, one for reinstatement
(REI) with the total cost, one for an adjustment (ADJ) reflecting the difference between the original
cost and the cost calculated with revaluation parameters, and one for book change (BKS).

• (Optional) Preview the data in the Financial Loader table by using an online page.

• Run the Transaction Loader process (AMIF1000) to load the retirement transactions that are created by
revaluation.

Use the load type RET to find the load ID to process.

• Run the Depreciation Calculation process (AM_DEPR_CALC) to account for the retirement transactions.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 483
Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 23

• Run Transaction Loader (AMIF1000) to load the reinstatement transactions that are created by the
revaluation.

Use the load type REI.

• Run the Revaluation Australia process (AMAUSUPD) to update depreciation and distribution status for
retirement and reinstatement transactions.

• Run Transaction Loader (AMIF1000) to load the adjustment transactions that are created by the
revaluation.

Use the load type ADJ.

• Run Depreciation Calculation (AM_DEPR_CALC) to account for the adjustment transactions.

• Run Transaction Loader (AMIF1000) to load the adjustment transactions created by the revaluation.

Use the load type BKS.

• Run the Depreciation Calculation process (AM_DEPR_CALC) to account for the book change
transactions.

• Run the Accounting Entry Creation process (AM_AMAEDIST) to generate accounting entries.

• Run the Detail Net Book Value Report by Category (AMDP2110).

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Integrating PeopleSoft
Asset Management with Other Products," Previewing Data in the Loader Tables

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Integrating PeopleSoft
Asset Management with Other Products," Running the Transaction Loader

Chapter 8, "Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets," Revaluing Assets In Mass, page 203

Chapter 18, "Creating PeopleSoft Asset Management Accounting Entries," page 355

(CAN) Using Asset Management Options to Meet Canadian

Requirements
This section discusses how to:

• Calculate CCA reporting.

• Run the CCA Year-End Update process.

484 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 23 Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management

Pages Used to Meet Canadian Requirements

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Beginning of Year CCA_UCC_BEGIN Asset Management, Taxes, (Optional) Change UCC

Update CCA, Identify CCA beginning of year amounts
Begin Yr or CCA amounts.

CCA Year End Updates AMCCAUPD_RQST Asset Management, Taxes, Run the CCA Year End
(capital cost allowance year Update CCA, Update CCA Updates process
end updates) Year End (AMCCAUPD_RQST) to
extract the components
necessary for CCA
calculation, and populate
the CCA_YR_END_TBL.
This process uses the
extracted data to calculate
all CCA amounts that are
required by the CCA report.

CCA Yr End - Canada Rpt RUN_AMTX10CA Asset Management, Create the Revenue Canada
(capital cost allowance year RUN_AM_TX11CA Financial Reports, Year End report. Also
end - Canada report) Accounting Entries, CCA generate the CCA Year End
Year End CAN Extract report.

Calculating CCA Reporting

Asset Management enables you to calculate and report CCA amounts as required by Schedule 8 of Revenue
Canada.

To calculate the CCA:

• Set up or modify CCA tax classes on the Tax Class page, and specify the CCA percentage rate.

Asset pools or classes and CCA rates are set by governmental regulations. In the year that assets are
acquired, 50 percent of the normal rate should be used. The value that you enter for an asset tax class for
the CCA rate percent is used later when you run a process to calculate the CCA rate.

• On the Asset Book Definition - Book Tax page, select the tax guideline class that reflects the CCA tax
class to which the asset belongs.

• For each reporting fiscal year, associate a CCA UCC beginning year value with a CCA tax class.

• Run the CCA Year End Update process that extracts the data that is necessary for CCA calculation,
populates the CCA_YR_END_TBL table, and calculates all amounts that are required by the CCA report.

• Run the CCA Year End reports.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 485
Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 23

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up Tax
Processing and Tax Reporting," (CAN, IND, and USA) Defining and Maintaining Tax Classes

Running the CCA Year-End Update Process

Access the CCA Year End Updates Request page.

Enter the business unit, CCA book name, and applicable fiscal year. Select a process frequency. This process
is iterative. Run it as many times as necessary to complete CCA reporting. To run the process for multiple
business units, leave the Unit field blank.

The CCA Year End Update process populates the CCA_YEAR_END_TBL table with these values:

Business Unit Acquisitions

Book Adjustments

Fiscal Year Transfers

CCA Tax Class Net Proceeds

Currency Code Capital Gains

The process calculates CCA amounts according to the following formula:

UCC = UCC beginning of year + additions +/–adjustments – retirements

CCA = UCC–(50% * addition) *CCA rate

UCC end of year = UCC–CCA

(FRA) Using PeopleSoft Asset Management Options to Meet French

Requirements
PeopleSoft Asset Management supports asset management practices that are commonly used in France. This
section discusses how to:

• Report business tax.

• Depreciate assets by using the derogatory method.

• Revalue assets.

486 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 23 Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management

• Generate French statutory reports.

Pages Used to Meet French Requirements

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Business Tax Report RUN_AMBT1000 Asset Management, Taxes, Run the Business Tax report
Reports, Business Tax or the Business Tax by
Alternate Account report.

2054 2055 Reports EU_AM_RUNCNTRL Asset Management, Taxes, Obtain information on the
Reports, Statutory Report asset, its cost and net book
2054/2055 value, and all transactions
that occurred in the
specified reporting year,
including depreciation and
yearly depreciation.

Reporting Business Tax

To calculate and report a business tax that is assessed on the gross value of fixed assets:

• Define the business tax rates by country, year, and location.

• Define asset profiles as business tax applicable by selecting the Business Tax check box in the Asset
Profile component.

• Define asset books as business tax applicable by selecting the Business Tax check box in the Asset Book
Definition component.

• Run the Business Tax reports: Business Tax by Account or Business Tax by Alternate Account.

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing Asset
Processing," Setting Up Asset Profiles

Chapter 5, "Adding and Maintaining Assets," Maintaining Asset Book Information, page 89

Depreciating Assets by Using the Derogatory Method

PeopleSoft Asset Management supports derogatory depreciation and enables you to generate appropriate
accounting entries.

To use the derogatory method:

• Set up rates for use with the derogatory method by using the Depreciation Rate - User Defined page in the
Establishing Asset Processing component.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 487
Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 23

• Define appropriate reporting books for France.

In the statutory book, select France Derogatory Balance as the depreciation method.

Creating Accounting Entries for Derogatory Depreciation

By setting up the appropriate accounting entry information using an accounting entry template, you can
generate accounting entries and see the difference between depreciation that is reflected in the economic book
and the statutory book.

To set up appropriate accounting entries:

• Define the economic and statutory books at the business unit level.

Select the Derogatory Depreciation check box on the Business Unit/Book Definition page for the statutory
book.

• Add assets.

Identification of derogatory depreciation processing is defined at the business unit or book level.

• Select the Derogatory Accounting entries check box when setting the accounting entry template ID
Derogatory to define the accounting treatment for derogatory depreciation.

• Run the Depreciation Calculation process (AM_DEPR_CALC) for both books.

• Run the Accounting Entry Creation process (AM_AMAEDIST).

• Review depreciation entries on the Asset Depreciation - Period Depreciation page.

• Review accounting entries for each book in the Asset Accounting Entries component.

The pages in this component provide the accounting date, transaction type, account, and amount of each
entry.

• Run the French Net Book Value by Account report (AMFR2120) on the Report - Asset Net Book Value
page.

• After you specify parameters for the report and click the Run button, select the French Net Book Value by
Account check box from the process list that appears.

• Run the French Net Book Value by Alternate Account report (AMFR2121) on the Report - Alt Acct
Activity Detail page.

• After you specify parameters for the report and click the Run button, select the French Net Book Value by
Alternate Account check box from the process list that appears.

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing PeopleSoft
Asset Management Business Units"

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up Accounting
Entry and Financial Processing for PeopleSoft Asset Management," Defining Accounting Entries

488 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 23 Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management

Revaluing Assets
PeopleSoft Asset Management enables you to revalue assets as a whole by using an Application Engine
process. You can also revalue one or more assets at one time using the Revaluation Worksheet page. The
system enables you to track and report on the revalued amount separately.

Distribution types to support accounting entries for asset revaluation are available. When setting up
accounting entry templates, you can use the Derogatory accounting entry template ID and select Asset
Adjustments and Transfers. In the Accounting Entries column, Asset Management provides two entries:
Provision for Revaluation and Reversal of Depreciation.

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up Accounting
Entry and Financial Processing for PeopleSoft Asset Management," Defining Accounting Entries

Chapter 8, "Adjusting, Transferring, and Evaluating Assets," Revaluing Assets In Mass, page 203

Generating French Statutory Reports

French statutory reports EU_2054 and EU_2055 are attachments to the annual balance sheet and provide
information about the history and activity of assets during the specified fiscal year. Asset categories on both
reports are based on the French statutory chart of accounts. The system provides a reporting option to
generate both of these statutory reports for France.

Access the 2054 2055 Reports page.

(DEU) Using PeopleSoft Asset Management Options to Meet

German Requirements
This section provides an overview of commonly used German depreciation methods and discusses how to:

• Use a half-year prorate convention.

• Use geometric digressive depreciation.

• Process low-value assets.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 489
Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 23

Pages Used to Meet German Requirements

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

User-Defined Method UD_METHOD_DEFN Set Up Financials/Supply Create a user-defined

Chain, Product Related, Staffel depreciation method.
Asset Management,
Depreciation, User Defined
Methods

Auto-Retire Fully RUN_AMRETFDA Asset Management, Identify run control

Depreciated Assets Send/Receive Information, parameters to automatically
Financial Transactions, retire fully depreciated
Auto-Retire Fully Depr assets.
Assets

Capitalization Limit CD DEPR_CAP_LIMIT Set Up Financials/Supply Specify asset value

Chain, Product Related, minimums and associate
Asset Management, warning or error actions
Financials, Capitalization with assets whose values
Limits fall below those limits.

Depreciation Terms DEPR_TERMS_DEFN Set Up Financials/Supply Define special depreciation

Chain, Product Related, terms for accelerated
Asset Management, depreciation and associate
Depreciation, Terms the terms at the asset or
Definition book level.

Load History Report Table LOAD_AM_HIST_TBL Asset Management, Run one of two SQR
Reports, Load Reporting processes that load asset
Tables, Load Asset History data into tables where it can
Table be used for reports.
1. The AMLDDPHI.SQR
process loads
depreciation history
data into a table where
it can be used to run the
Depreciation History
reports.

2. The AMASHIST.SQR
process loads asset
history data into a table
where it can be used by
Asset History reports.

Note. Before running this

process, you must run a
process to load the
depreciation report table.

490 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 23 Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Asset History Reports RUN_AMDE1000 Asset Management, Run the Asset History Sheet
Reports, Owned Assets, reports that are attached to
Asset History Sheet annual balance sheets and
provide information about
the history of an asset and
its transactions.

Reconciliation AP/AM RUN_AMDE5000 Asset Management, Run a report to help you

(reconciliation accounts Reports, Cost and reconcile accounts payable
payable/asset management) Depreciation, asset vouchers with Asset
Reconciliation AP/AM Management asset
transaction information.

Staffel Depreciation Method

The Staffel depreciation method is used for depreciating buildings in Germany and other countries. The
Staffel depreciation method can be characterized as a "step straight line." For example, for a building with an
acquisition cost of $100,000 and a life of 25 years, the depreciation calculation is 10 percent ($10,000) per
year for years one through four, 5 percent ($5,000) per year for years five through seven, and 2.5 percent
($2,500) per year for years eight through twenty-five. These percentages vary due to legislation and the
acquisition date of the building.

Three Staffel Depreciation Methods

There are three common Staffel depreciation methods.

The first Staffel method is for domestic buildings that are used by an organization for non-habitational
purposes (for example, production buildings within Germany) and where the request to build was submitted
to the local construction authorities after March 31, 1985, but before February 28, 1989:

Year Percentage

Years 1–4 10% each year

Years 5–7 5% each year

Years 8–25 2.5% each year

Non-habitational buildings that do not fulfill the preceding criteria are depreciated according to this criteria:

Year Percentage

Years 1–8 5% each year

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 491
Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 23

Year Percentage

Years 9–14 2.5% each year

Years 15–50 1.25% each year

Exceptions (all buildings that are used for habitational use and where the request to build was submitted to
local construction authorities after February 28, 1989) are depreciated according to this criteria:

Year Percentage

Years 1–4 7% each year

Years 5–10 5% each year

Years 11–16 2% each year

Years 17–40 1.25% each year

Depreciation periods in Germany are based on calendar years (January 1 – December 31). Because not all
buildings are completed or purchased on January 1, if you activate an asset in a different month, you must
prorate the depreciation for the first year, including the month of asset addition. For example, the depreciation
amount for the first year is 36,000 EU if activated on January 1. But if the asset was activated on August 12,
the depreciation amount for the first year is 15,000 EU, reflecting the months August through December.

Also, you must prorate the depreciation in the year of asset retirement (or sale) excluding the month in which
it is retired. For example, the depreciation for the last year is 60,000 EU if the asset is retired at the end of the
year. But if the asset was retired or sold on August 12, then the depreciation amount must be adjusted to
35,000 EU, reflecting the months January through July.

Creating a User-Defined Staffel Depreciation Method

To calculate depreciation by using the Staffel method, you can create a user-defined depreciation method for
this formula. For example, in this case:

• The asset basis of the building is $100,000 (EU).

• The asset life is 25 years (300 periods).

• The depreciation convention is AM (actual month).

• The user-defined depreciation method name is Staffel.

To create a Staffel user-defined depreciation method, use the User-Defined Method page. Enter a description
for the method ID.

You must define the following four variables to create a Staffel user-defined depreciation method:

492 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 23 Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management

Result A= ALLOC_LIFE – Total Periods Depr

This calculation results in the number of remaining periods in weeks:

Result D=Result A/52

This is the number of remaining periods in years.

Result C=No Periods to Depr/Alloc Total

This provides the number of periods for the year to be depreciated / total periods for the year, for example, 6 /
12 for the first year.

Result B=Asset basis x Percentage

This result is:

Asset basis – Salvage value x Appropriate Staffel Percentage

Finally, to calculate the depreciation proration for the first year and the year of retirement, specify the
following in the formula:

Depreciation=Result B x Result C

See Also

Chapter 15, "Using User-Defined Asset Depreciation," page 329

Using a Half-Year Prorate Convention

PeopleSoft Asset Management supports the German half-year convention. The German half-year convention
differs from the U.S. half-year convention in that an asset takes a full year's depreciation if it was acquired in
the first half of the year. This convention is delivered in the tables shipped, but you can modify it as necessary
to suit a specific requirement.

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up Depreciation
Processing," Setting Up Depreciation Conventions

Using Geometric Digressive Depreciation

Geometric digressive depreciation calculates depreciation up to three times the annual straight-line
depreciation with a maximum of 30 percent of the asset cost per year. Asset Management supports this
depreciation method by providing the declining balance with a Switch to Straight Line depreciation method
option. To depreciate assets by using this method, select DB w/SL By Limit% on the Book-Tax page in the
Asset Book Definition component, the Depreciation page in the Asset Profiles component, or the
Depreciation Information page in the Asset ExpressAdd component. Specify 300 as the declining balance
percent and 30 as the limit percent.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 493
Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 23

See Also

Appendix B, "Understanding Depreciation Calculations," Declining Balance with Depreciation Limit, page
641

Processing Low-Value Assets

PeopleSoft Asset Management supports low-value asset processing by providing a capitalization limit table
where you can specify asset value minimums and associate warning or error actions with assets whose values
fall below those limits. Additionally, you can set the limit at which an asset is marked as a low-value asset.

Access the Capitalization Limit Cd page (Set Up Financials/Supply Chain, Product Related, Asset
Management, Financials, Capitalization Limits, Capitalization Limits).

Capitalization Limits page

After you have set up the necessary capitalization limits, select Table Lim (table limit) and the correct code as
the capitalization limit method on the Business Unit/Book Definition page in the Establish Business Units -
Asset Management Definition component.

When you add assets to that business unit and book combination, Asset Management checks the capitalization
limits against the amounts that are stored by code in the capitalization limit table.

In Germany, assets marked as low value should be depreciated in one year.

PeopleSoft Asset Management provides the PROGWG asset profile that is defined with depreciation
attributes that are appropriate for German low-value asset processing. These include depreciation using the
straight-line method and a useful life of 12 periods. Also, Asset Management provides the German First Day
Last Period depreciation convention that you can use to generate one accounting entry for the annual
depreciation for a low-value asset.

Low-value assets can be retired in mass using the Auto-Retire feature to satisfy the requirement that low-
value assets be fully depreciated and retired after the first year of service.

494 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 23 Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing PeopleSoft
Asset Management Business Units," Creating PeopleSoft Asset Management Business Units

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up Accounting
Entry and Financial Processing for PeopleSoft Asset Management," Setting Up Capitalization Limits

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up Depreciation
Processing," Setting Up Depreciation Conventions

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing Asset
Processing," Setting Up Asset Profiles

Special Depreciation Terms and Methods

Access the Terms Definition page (Set Up Financials/Supply Chain, Product Related, Asset Management,
Depreciation, Terms Definition, Terms Definition).

PeopleSoft Asset Management supports special depreciation methods that are used in Germany, such as
accelerated depreciation, by enabling you to define special terms and associate them at the asset and book
level.

Terms Definition page

After you have defined special terms, associate them with an asset or book by selecting the Special
Depreciation check box on the Depreciation Information page in the Asset ExpressAdd component.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 495
Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 23

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing Asset
Processing"

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up Depreciation
Processing"

Chapter 5, "Adding and Maintaining Assets," page 45

(IND) Using PeopleSoft Asset Management Options to Meet Indian

Requirements
PeopleSoft Asset Management addresses issues related to fixed-asset accounting in India. This section
provides an overview of asset depreciation processing for India and discusses how to process tax
depreciation.

Understanding Asset Depreciation Processing for India

PeopleSoft Asset Management provides asset processing features that correspond to the tax reporting
requirements established by Indian tax legislation. Indian tax law does not recognize depreciation on
individual assets. Instead, it groups similar pools of assets under a prescribed tax block. There are only four
tax blocks of assets provided for under the tax act: buildings, furniture and fixtures, machinery and plant, and
intangibles. Further, each tax block of assets comprises tax groups, and each tax group has its own individual
tax rate. The Indian tax year is fixed on a fiscal year calendar that runs from April 1 through March 31.
Annual tax depreciation is reported to the tax authority per tax block per fiscal year .

To meet these requirements, PeopleSoft Asset Management allows for the grouping of assets by asset blocks
for accumulating and reporting depreciation and taxes. Each asset block can have as many depreciation rates
associated with it as necessary to delineate Indian tax groups. To meet reporting requirements, a tax entity is
defined, associated with a specific book, and has as many business units and asset books associated with it as
necessary.

The Straight Line Percent method of depreciation in PeopleSoft Asset Management uses the asset useful life
to calculate the depreciation rate. India calculates useful life based on the depreciation rate guidelines
published by the governmental finance authority. The rates established depreciate 95 percent of the cost over
the useful life of the asset, at minimum: accelerated depreciation is allowed. India calculates depreciation
based on the rates rather than useful life. In addition, these rates also consider the residual or salvage value at
the end of the asset useful life. To determine useful life of an asset in India, the straight line percent method
multiplies the depreciation rate by cost and this results in the useful life. Further, there are two different ways
to calculate depreciation adjustments under the Indian Straight Line Percent method: remaining value and
life-to-date. All transactions use an actual day (AD) convention for calculating depreciation. Assets are
depreciated when they are placed in service. Processing for leased assets is included.

During the end-of-year processing of depreciation and taxes for India, assets are grouped into blocks based on
the tax entity and asset profile definition in place for the asset. The opening written down value (WDV) is
retrieved from the prior year WDV for the corresponding tax entity, asset block, and rate.

Asset Management provides these reporting processes to manage Indian tax and depreciation requirements:

496 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 23 Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management

• Produce the Asset Register - India: Reports an historical record of assets over the fiscal year period.

• Produce the Depreciation Balance - IND report: Displays the calculated opening WDV balance and
reports depreciation during the year.

• Calculate and Update Depreciation Balance - IND processes: Calculates depreciation balances for India
and provides an online update of balances (depending on your setup options).

The system provides functionality to process operating and capital leases when manually specified.

Pages Used to Meet Indian Requirements

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Calculate Balances IND AM_DEPR_TAX Asset Management, Taxes, Calculate tax depreciation
Depreciation, Calculate balances for India.
Balances IND, Calculate
Balances IND

Tax Depr Bal (tax TAX_DEPR_BAL Asset Management, Taxes, Displays tax depreciation
depreciation balances) Depreciation, Update balance for India that you
Balances IND can update.

Assets Register - IND RUN_AMDP2510 Asset Management, Reports historical

Financial Reports, Cost and depreciation for the fiscal
Depreciation, Assets year.
Register - IND

Depreciation Balance - IND TAX_DEPR_RQST Asset Management, Taxes, Generate tax depreciation
Reports, Depreciation balance report for the tax
Balance IND period.

Processing India Tax Depreciation

When you accumulate assets subject to India's depreciation and tax guidelines, you must first assign an asset
block, a guideline (tax) class, and a tax entity to each asset. Also, you should set up each asset to depreciate
when in service. These attributes are defined in the Book Definition component and the Book - Depreciation
(ASSET_BOOK_01) and Book - Tax (ASSET_BOOK_02) pages. When depreciation and tax processing
commences, the system retrieves these designated assets for processing.

See Chapter 5, "Adding and Maintaining Assets," page 45.

To process and report on depreciation and tax for India:

1. To process depreciation for India, request the depreciation calculation process (AM_DEPR_CALC).

See Chapter 14, "Processing Asset Depreciation," page 309.

2. To calculate depreciation balances for India for the tax period, request the process to calculate balances
for India (AMTX2000).

3. To update depreciation balances for India for the tax period, request the process to update balances for
India (TAX_DEPR_BAL).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 497
Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 23

4. To review the asset register for India, request the assets register for India (AMDP2510).

Calculating Tax Depreciation Balances for India

Access the Calculate Balances IND page (Asset Management, Taxes, Depreciation, Calculate Balances IND,
Calculate Balances IND).

Calculate Balances IND page

Tax/Reporting Entity Select the tax and reporting entity for this process. The available tax entities are
defined by the asset blocks, tax class tax rates, setID calendar, and business
unit/books that are associated with it.

Entity Book Select the entity book for this process. The entity book defines how to group the
tax or reporting information.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up Tax
Processing and Tax Reporting," (IND) Defining Tax Entities and Tax Options.

Updating Depreciation Balances for India

Access the Tax Depr Bal page (Asset Management, Taxes, Depreciation, Update Balances IND).

498 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 23 Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management

Tax Depr Bal page (1 of 2)

Tax Depr Bal page (2 of 2)

If your setup options have enabled manual adjustments to depreciation balances, you can access calculated
balances and enter adjustments in the Manual Adjustment column. No recalculations are processed on the
basis of any manual adjustment entered, but the values are added to the WDV.

Generating the Asset Register India

Access the Assets Register - IND page (Asset Management, Financial Reports, Cost and Depreciation, Assets
Register - IND, Assets Register - IND).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 499
Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 23

Assets Register - IND page

Selection Request Define the parameters for the asset register to report by business unit or report
Parameters entity. Complete these fields as dictated by your needs:
• Unit.

• Book.

• Report Entity.

• Entity Book.

• As of Fiscal Year.

• Detail or Summary (available only when you select to report by report

entity).

Processing Rules

When calculating the annual tax depreciation balances, the following rules apply:

• Tax depreciation is calculated for each tax group per the tax group tax rate.

• Opening balance (WDV) is required for each tax group each year.

The opening balance in the conversion year is entered; in subsequent years, the opening balance is
processed by Asset Management and is equal to the ending balance of the previous year.

500 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 23 Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management

• Additions and adjustments for the fiscal year are lumped together.

However, these are subgrouped separately to include assets that have been in use for more than 180 days
and those that have been in use for less than 180 days. For assets in use for less than 180 days, only 50
percent of the normal depreciation rate is allowed (per Section 32).

To determine the assets that fall in the category of Additions/Adjustments more than 180 days, the system
calculates the difference between the fiscal year end date (March 31) and the in-service date for ADD and
ADJ transaction types. For additions less than 180 days, the system calculates the difference between the
year end (March 31) and the in-service date for ADD and ADJ transaction types. If the in-service date is in
the current year but the acquisition date is in prior years, the asset is depreciated at the regular rate rather
than at 50 percent of the prescribed rate.

• Proceeds for the assets sold during the year are calculated.

• Use the formula for calculating WDV depreciation, where:

• A = Opening WDV/Balance.

• B= Proceeds from sale of an asset.

• C= Additions/Adjustments > 180 days.

• D= Additions/Adjustments < 180 days.

• E= Rate of Depreciation, Depr Value.

(A-B+C)xE+(DxE/2)=Depreciation Value (F)

Closing WDV=A-B+C+D-F

In case the entire tax block of assets ceases to exist (for example, all of the assets are sold or transferred), the
net income is taxed as short term capital gain. In this case, the opening WDV of all the tax groups in this
block becomes zero for the subsequent year.

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing Asset
Processing"

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up Tax
Processing and Tax Reporting"

Chapter 5, "Adding and Maintaining Assets," page 45

(ITA) Using PeopleSoft Asset Management Options to Meet Italian

Requirements
This section discusses how to generate the fixed-asset register for Italy.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 501
Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 23

Page Used to Meet Italian Requirements

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Fixed Asset Register RUN_AMDP2500 Asset Management, Specify report request

Financial Reports, Cost and parameters to generate the
Depreciation, Assets Assets Register - ITA
Register - ITA report.

Generating the Fixed-Asset Register for Italy

Access the Assets Register - ITA page (Asset Management, Financial Reports, Cost and Depreciation, Assets
Register - ITA, Assets Register - ITA).

Assets Register - ITA page

Define the parameters to generate the register.

502 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 23 Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management

(JPN) Using PeopleSoft Asset Management Options to Meet

Japanese Requirements
This section lists prerequisites and discusses how to:

• Use Japanese depreciation methods.

• Use special depreciation and increased depreciation.

• Use advanced depreciation.

• Use composite depreciation.

• Identify collateral assets.

• Use currency rounding options.

• Process local tax reports.

• Enter consumption tax.

Prerequisites
Many of the features for processing assets for Japan are dependent on the business unit information
definitions established at the business unit level. You must establish these business unit definitions in order to
complete processing for Japanese requirements.

Access the Business Unit Info for Japan page from the AM Business Unit Definition component (Set Up
Financials/Supply Chain, Business Unit Related, Assets, Asset Management Definition, AM Business Unit
Definition), Click the JPN Info link.

Note. To enable the JPN Info link, you must set up the overall options for user preferences in the Common
Definitions component: Set the Localization Country value to JPN (Japan).Set Up Financials/Supply Chain,
Common Definitions, User Preferences, Define User Preferences, Overall Preferences.

Corporate Book for Select the corporate book for Japan.

Japan
Tax Book for Japan Select the tax book for Japan.

Memorandum Amount Enter the memorandum amount at the end of the useful life of the asset as
and Currency required by the Japanese tax regulation (currently 1 JPY). This value can be
updated, as the law requires. This value is used in conjunction with the following
depreciation methods: J6 - Tangible Declining Balance, J7 - Tangible Straight
Line, and Japan Extended Straight Line. The memorandum amount reflects the
currency of the tax book for Japan as the default. For books that use one of the
aforementioned depreciation methods in a currency other than JPY, the
memorandum amount is translated to the respective book's currency. The
memorandum value is established for each asset business unit.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 503
Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 23

Advanced Depreciation Select if advanced depreciation is used.

Japan Composite Select if composite assets are used.

Use JPN Local Tax (use Select if local tax reporting is enabled.
Japan local tax)

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing
PeopleSoft Asset Management Business Units," (JPN) Defining Business Unit Information for Japan.

The following steps are recommended when implementing Japanese tax reform changes:

1. Establish the memorandum amount on the Business Unit Info for Japan page.

2. Verify that the proper and most current depreciation rates, guaranteed rates, and revised rates are
represented on the Life and Rate information secondary page [MR_AM_LIFERATE].

3. Select the appropriate depreciation methods at the asset profile level or override them at the asset level.

4. Use the Extended Depreciation Worksheet to select the eligible assets for extended depreciation. As an
alternative to the Extended Depreciation Worksheet, you can extend depreciation manually, asset by asset,
from the Define Tax/Depr Book page.

5. Run the Transaction Loader process prior to calculating depreciation and closing. However, this step is
not necessary if you have manually extended depreciation from the Define Tax/Depr Book page.

Pages Used to Meet Japanese Requirements

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Advanced Depreciation RUN_AMAD1000 Asset Management, Specify report request

Financial Reports, Cost and parameters to generate the
Depreciation, Advanced advanced Depreciation
Depreciation Amount or Advanced
Depreciation Reversal
Schedule report.

Owner Information OWNER_INFO_DEFN Set Up Financials/Supply Enter owner information

Chain, Product Related, that is printed on the
Asset Management, Owner Depreciable Asset Tax
Information Definition Return (Tax Roll) report.

Depreciation Rate-User UD_DEPR_RATE_TBL Set Up Financials/Supply Set up useful life and

Defined Chain, Product Related, depreciation rate tables.
Asset Management,
Depreciation, Rate-User
Defined

504 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 23 Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Life and Rate Information MR_AM_LIFERATE Set Up Financials/Supply Set up useful life and
Chain, Product Related, depreciation rate tables.
Asset Management,
Depreciation, Rate-User
Defined, Life and Rate
Information

Extended Depreciation AM_EXTENDED_DEPR Asset Management, Search for candidate assets

Worksheet Depreciation, Processing, according to desired
Extended Depreciation, parameters. Select to extend
Extended Depreciation or not extend the
depreciation period, remove
from the list and enter the
dates to resume
depreciation.

Return Information RETURN_INFO_DEFN1 Set Up Financials/Supply Enter information that is

Chain, Product Related, required for the Depreciable
Asset Management, Return Asset Tax Return (Tax
Information Definition Roll) report.

Local Tax Return LTAX_ADD_INFO_SEC Asset Management, Asset Enter local tax information
Transactions, Owned when you acquire
Assets, Asset ExpressAdd depreciable fixed assets.
Asset Management, Asset
Transactions, Owned
Assets, Asset Basic Add

Criteria and Defaults MC_DEFN_01 Asset Management, Mass Use the Mass Change
Change, Define Criteria, component to process
Criteria and Defaults composite depreciation for
Japan.

NBV - Assessment AMLTPROC_RQST Asset Management, Taxes, Run an SQR process to load
Calculation Calculate Local Taxes, asset data and calculate the
Calculate Amounts JPN theoretical net book value
and assessment value for
each asset.

Local Tax Information - LTAX_ADJ_01 Asset Management, Taxes, Change the theoretical net
Adjustment Calculate Local Taxes, book value and assessment
Adjust Amounts JPN value.

Local Tax Report RUN_LTAXPROCESS Asset Management, Taxes, Run local tax reports for
Reports, Local Tax Returns Japan.

Local Tax Information LTAX_COST_01 Asset Management, Taxes, Change the local tax office
Calculate Local Taxes, where the return is filed and
Change Local Tax JPN the asset return type.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 505
Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 23

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Extended Depreciation RUN_AMED1000 Asset Management, Taxes, Run the Extended

Report Reports, Extended Depreciation report to
Depreciation analyze the J1, J2, J6 and J7
asset depreciation in
compliance with Japanese
tax law as reformed.

National Tax RUN_AMNT1000 Asset Management, Taxes, Run a report of the

Reports, National Tax depreciation calculation
details to be reported to the
Japanese Tax Office. The
report includes all required
information for the National
Depreciable Asset Tax
Return Beppyo 16(1), (2) in
Japan.

Using Japanese Depreciation Methods

PeopleSoft Asset Management supports depreciation methods that are used in Japan for both fixed assets and
leased assets.

Fixed Assets

This table shows depreciation methods, the calculations used by the methods, and the types of assets to which
these methods are applied:

Asset Depreciation Methods Depreciation Calculation Method

(J3) - Intangible/Straight Line Acquisition cost * straight line depreciation rate based
on useful life (years)

(J1) - Tangible/Straight Line (assets placed in service For assets placed in service prior to April 1, 2007:
prior to April 1, 2007)
(Acquisition cost − 10% of acquisition cost) * straight
(J7) - Tangible/Straight Line (assets placed in service line depreciation rate based on useful life (years).
April 1, 2007 and beyond) For assets placed in service on or after April 1, 2007:
Cost basis * straight line rate effective on or after April
1, 2007.
Note. The straight line rates are derived from the Life
and Rate Information page for the J7 depreciation
method. The final year's depreciation is the annual
depreciation amount less the memorandum value (no
salvage value).

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management

Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up
Depreciation Processing."

506 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 23 Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management

Asset Depreciation Methods Depreciation Calculation Method

(J2) - Tangible/Declining Balance (assets placed in For assets placed in service prior to April 1, 2007:
service prior to April 1, 2007)
Beginning net book value * declining balance
(J6) - Tangible/Declining Balance (assets placed in depreciation rate based on useful life (years)
service April 1, 2007 and beyond) For assets placed in service on or after April 1, 2007:
If (beginning net book value * declining balance
depreciation rate of 250 percent) < (beginning net book
value * guaranteed rate per Japanese law) then, switch
to straight line method using the revised rate.
Note. Guarantee rates and revised rates are derived from
the Life and Rate Information page for the J6
depreciation method. The final year's depreciation is the
annual depreciation amount less the memorandum value
(no salvage value).

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management

Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up
Depreciation Processing."

(J5) - Change Declining Balance to Straight Line (Beginning net book value at method change – 10% of
acquisition cost) * straight line depreciation rate based
on useful life (years)
The only method to adapt the depreciation rate based on
useful life (years), this method is determined by
regulations instead of the rate based on useful life for
salvage year.

(J4) - Lease Depreciation Declining balance depreciation calculation result * 10/9.

Extended Straight Line Depreciation This depreciation method is used for fully depreciated
assets under J1 and J2 methods that are subject to an
extended depreciation useful life of five years using a
Straight Line depreciation method starting from the first
period of the following fiscal year. The basis for this
extended depreciation is the original 5 percent salvage
value. There is no salvage value for the new round of
depreciation but the memorandum value is taken from
the business unit definition.

Depreciation Rate

PeopleSoft Asset Management supports useful life in years as specified for Japan. This is applied from the
Rate-User Defined table (UD_DEPR_RATE_TBL, MR_AM_LIFERATE) in the Depreciation Rate-User
Defined component. To apply the appropriate depreciation rates, use the delivered depreciation methods for
Japan or add new ones as needed.

Access the Depreciation Rate-User Defined page (Set Up Financials/Supply Chain, Product Related, Asset
Management, Depreciation, Rate-User Defined).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 507
Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 23

Select a setID and a depreciation method code matching the depreciation method to be used. Enter the
effective date, and click the Life and Rate Information button. The Life and Rate Information page displays.

Life and Rate Information page

Enter the useful life and corresponding rates as determined by regulations issued from the Ministry of
Finance. The Guarantee Rate and Revised Rate fields are only used in the J6 depreciation method.

Note. Useful Life rates also use the Residual Rate Definition.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up
Depreciation Processing."

Leased Assets

PeopleSoft Asset Management supports the Declining Balance Depreciation Method - Finance Lease
(excluding transfer of ownership) 10/9 method, which is calculated in this way:

Declining balance depreciation calculation resultx10/9

508 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 23 Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management

Use the Depreciation Rate-User Defined - Life and Rate Information page to modify rates for the lease
depreciation method.

Example Values

This table shows the values used in an example using the Declining Balance Depreciation Method - Finance
Lease (excluding transfer of ownership) 10/9 method:

Acquisition Cost 1,000,000

Useful Life 5 years

Depreciation Rate 0.369

Calculation Results for Example Values

Using the values from the previous table and applying the Declining Balance Depreciation Method (J6) -
Finance Lease (excluding transfer of ownership) 10/9 method, the results are:

Year Depreciation Amount by Depreciation Amount by 10/9

Declining Balance Method Method

1 369,000 410,000

2 232,839 258,710

3 146,921 163,245

4 92,707 103,007

5 58,588 65,038

Total 900,000 1,000,000

Select the example depreciation methods on the Book-Tax page in the Asset Book Definition component, the
Depreciation page in the Asset Profiles component, or the Depreciation Information page in the Asset
ExpressAdd component.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 509
Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 23

Using the Extended Depreciation Worksheet

The 2007 Japanese Tax Reform affects not only assets that are placed in service after March 31, 2007 but also
increases the depreciation basis and expands the depreciation period for those fully depreciated assets that are
using the J1 and J2 depreciation methods. As a result, those depreciable assets acquired before April 1, 2007
are allowed, after having depreciated to the final depreciable limit, to depreciate the existing salvage value to
the memorandum value of 1 JPY in five years using the Straight Line method.

Use the Extended Depreciation Worksheet to apply the extended depreciation calculation to assets after they
have reached the depreciation limit under the J1 and J2 depreciation methods. You can also identify assets
that qualify for the extended depreciation using the Extended Depreciation Worksheet.

Access the Extended Depreciation page (Asset Management, Depreciation, Processing, Extended
Depreciation).

Extended Depreciation page

Enter the required fields Business Unit,Book Name, and Method to retrieve assets that are candidates for
extended depreciation (those assets depreciated using the J1 and J2 methods and are fully depreciated up to
95% of asset cost). You can also search by ChartField by clicking the ChartField Search Criteria link or use a
date range to retrieve assets whose original transaction dates fall within the given period.

510 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 23 Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management

The Transaction Information section relates to the information needed to perform the extension of the asset
useful life. It is applicable to the assets in the Results section. The Transaction Date should match the date
that depreciation resumes for extended depreciation. The Life End Date field shows the calculated date in
which the depreciation activity stops, including the additional period due to rounding down the remaining
depreciation.

Note. It is important to run the Depreciation Reporting Table load process (AMDPREPT) as a prerequisite to
retrieve fully depreciated assets from the Extended Depreciation page.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up
Depreciation Processing."

Using Special Depreciation and Increased Depreciation

PeopleSoft Asset Management supports special depreciation (initial and accelerated) and increased
depreciation used in Japan. This table shows the types of special depreciations and their associated accounting
methods, depreciation calculations, and additional notes as appropriate:

Depreciation Type Accounting Depreciation Notes

Method Method Calculation

Special Initial Expense Acquisition cost * Book the initial

special depreciation special depreciation
rate amount as the
depreciation
amount, and add it
to the standard
depreciation
amount.

Special Initial Reserve/Allowance Acquisition cost * Do not add the

special depreciation initial special
rate depreciation
amount to the
standard
depreciation
amount.

Special Accelerated Expense Standard Book the

depreciation accelerated
amount * depreciation
accelerated amount as the
depreciation rate depreciation
amount, and add it
to the standard
depreciation
amount.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 511
Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 23

Depreciation Type Accounting Depreciation Notes

Method Method Calculation

Special Accelerated Reserve/Allowance Standard Do not add the

depreciation accelerated
amount * depreciation
accelerated amount to the
depreciation rate standard
depreciation
amount.

Increased NA NA Standard
depreciation
amount * increased
depreciation rate

For the initial special depreciation and accelerated depreciation rate, specify the useful life in years and the
depreciation rate on the Depreciation Terms Definition page.

For the increased depreciation rate, enter the specific rate on the Depreciation Details page.

See Chapter 14, "Processing Asset Depreciation," page 309.

See Appendix B, "Understanding Depreciation Calculations," page 613.

Using Advanced Depreciation

You can also use advanced depreciation for Japan. This table shows the accounting methods that you can use
with advanced depreciation:

Accounting Method Action

Expense Adds a cost line to the Corporate and Tax book for the
advanced depreciation amount and enters a negative (–)
cost as a compressed amount on the Asset/Cost Adjust
Transfer page.

Allowance Adds a cost line to the Corporate and Tax book for the
advanced depreciation amount and enters a negative (–)
cost as a compressed amount on the Asset Cost/Adjust
Transfer page.
You must select A (allowance) as the cost type.

Reserve Adds a cost line to the Corporate and Tax book for the
advanced depreciation amount and enters a negative (–)
cost as a compressed amount on the Asset Cost
Adjust/Transfer page.
You must selectR (reserve) as the reserve method.

512 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 23 Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management

Advanced Depreciation Reports

When you adopt the advanced depreciation method by using the Allowance or Reserve method, you can
verify the allowance or reserve amount for the compressed amount by using the Advanced Depreciation
Amount of Advanced Depreciation Reversal Schedule report.

Using Composite Depreciation

Composite depreciation, as practiced in Japan, is supported by calculating the useful life in years or by using
the 5 percent retirement method.

Use the Mass Change component to process composite depreciation.

Note. To use the Composite Depreciation method for Japan, you must specify the Corporate and Tax book for
Japan and select Japan Composite when you establish asset management business units.

You can add composite depreciable assets and individual assets by using the Asset Basic Information page.
When you add composite depreciable assets, you must enter a profile ID, transaction date, and accounting
date, and then click the Capitalize button on the Asset Acquisition Details page. When you add individual
assets, you must enter the Reporting Lifein periods on the Asset Information page.

After adding composite depreciable assets and individual assets for composite assets, you must capitalize by
using the Mass Change template CC-JPN Capitalize Composite.

Calculating the Automatic Useful Life in Years for Composite Depreciable Assets

The total acquisition cost includes the acquisition cost of each composite member asset divided by its
respective useful life, calculating the depreciation amount for each composite member asset.

The acquisition costs of each composite member asset are then summed, and the total is divided by the
summed depreciation amounts for each composite member asset.

This table displays the depreciation values calculated to find the total depreciation for 20,000,000 of asset
costs:

Assets Acquisition Cost (A) Useful Life (B) Depreciation Amount

(A)/(B)

Asset1 1,000,000 4 years 250,000

Asset2 3,000,000 5 years 600,000

Asset3 4,000,000 4 years 1,000,000

Asset4 7,000,000 10 years 700,000

Asset5 5,000,000 8 years 625,000

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 513
Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 23

Assets Acquisition Cost (A) Useful Life (B) Depreciation Amount

(A)/(B)

Totals 20,000,000 NA 3,175,000

The calculation of composite depreciation useful life is then:

20,000,000 / 3,175,000 = 6.29 or 6 years (composite depreciation useful life)

Using the 5 Percent Retirement Method

When using this method, depreciable composite member assets are retired, and the book value is 5 percent of
the acquisition cost of each member asset retired.

Access the Mass Change page, and add the Mass Change Definition JPN Composite Retirement. Composite
member assets can be retired by using the mass change template CR-JPN Composite Retirement.

Criteria and Defaults page

Enter the composite asset ID to be retired in theField Value field. Specify Retire as Fully Depreciated in the
Mass Change Field Value field. Generate the SQL, and run the mass change.

See Chapter 20, "Processing Asset Mass Changes," page 421.

Identifying Collateral Assets

Japanese accounting principles require that assets that are offered as collateral be treated according to
financial reporting regulations under commercial law. Collateral assets are identified on the Cost/Asset
Information page in the Asset ExpressAdd component as one of these types in compliance with Japanese
reporting requirements:

514 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 23 Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management

• Factory Foundation Mortgage.

• Fixed Mortgage.

• Mortgage.

• Other.

See Chapter 5, "Adding and Maintaining Assets," Adding Assets with the Asset ExpressAdd Component,
page 100.

Using Currency Rounding Options

Rounding options are applied to depreciation calculations and asset salvage values. You can select rounding
options to be used for depreciation calculations on the Business Unit/Book Definition page in the Establish
Business Units - Asset Management Definition component, and for salvage value calculations on the
Depreciation page in the Asset Profiles component.

Select a rounding rule, which determines the type of rounding that is performed. Select the Currency
rounding type.

Select the rounding precision, rounding factor, and truncation. Round precision is the number of places to the
right or left of the decimal point to which the amount or number is rounded. Rounding factor is the number to
which the amount is rounded.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing
PeopleSoft Asset Management Business Units," Creating PeopleSoft Asset Management Business Units.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing Asset
Processing," Setting Up Asset Profiles.

Processing Local Tax Reports

Asset Management supports reporting requirements defined by Japanese local tax laws. The system provides
these reports, including all required information for the local depreciable asset tax return:

• Depreciable Asset Tax Return (Tax Roll or Depreciable Assets) report (AMLT1000).

• Asset Detail (Increased Assets/All Assets) report (AMLT1100).

• Asset Detail (Decreased Assets) report (AMLT1200).

To set up local tax reporting:

1. Define the localization country as Japan.

This enables the business unit information link for Japan. The link appears in the Establish Business Units
component. Use the User Preferences component, and set the overall preferences localization country to
JPN.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Application Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Defining User Preferences,"
Defining Overall User Preferences.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 515
Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 23

2. Define business unit information for Japan.

This defines the corporate and tax default books for Japan, as well as enables advanced depreciation,
composite asset functionality, and local tax usage. Specify the corporate and tax book that you use for
Japan when you establish asset management business units, and select the Use JPN Local Tax check box.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing
PeopleSoft Asset Management Business Units," Creating PeopleSoft Asset Management Business Units.

3. Define owner information definition for Japanese assets.

This defines the information needed to process your local tax return.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing
Asset Processing," Establishing Asset Ownership.

4. Define local tax information in the Asset Information component.

See Chapter 5, "Adding and Maintaining Assets," Maintaining Asset Book Information, page 89.

5. Define the local tax return processing information.

To run the reports:

• Process the theoretical net book value and assessment value calculation.

• Process local tax reports.

Defining Local Tax Return Information

Access the Return Information page (Set Up Financials/Supply Chain, Product Related, Asset Management,
Taxes, Return Information Defn. - JPN, Return Information Defn. - JPN).

516 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 23 Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management

Return Information Defn. - JPN page

Select an owner ID. Enter an owner code, capital amount (in millions of yen), recipient name of the taxation
office where the return is filed, business category, and the year and month that the company commenced
business.

Enter address information for up to three branch offices within the same city, district, or town (place of tax
payment).

Note. If a branch office is located at the same address that is defined on the Owner Information page, you can
leave these fields blank.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 517
Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 23

Tax Exception Select if you have assets to apply to the special treatment of the taxation
standard.

Special/Advanced Select if you have assets to be applied to special depreciation under the Special
Depreciation Taxation Measures Law, or to be applied to advanced depreciation under Articles
42 to 50 and Article 142 of the Corporation Tax Law, or from Article 42 to 44
and Article 165, or Article 58 of the Tax on Income Law.

Tax Free Asset Select if you have assets without taxation.

Life Reduction Select if you have assets that have been applied a shorter useful life approved by
the Director or the District Tax Office under the Corporate Tax Law − Govt.
Order 57-1 and Tax on Income − Govt. Order 130-1.

Increase Depreciation Select if you have assets that have been submitted on a detailed statement for
Notice increased depreciation to the tax office under the Corporation Tax Law − Govt.
Order 60 and Tax on Income Law − Govt. Order 133.

Blue Returns Select if you file a blue return under the Corporation Tax Law, Article 122.

Tax Acct Depr (tax Select a depreciation method in tax accounting.

account depreciation)
Building Category Select the possession classification of the building for the business place.

Reply Person Enter the name and telephone number of the accounting representative.

Licensed Tax Enter the name and telephone number of the licensed tax accountant.
Accountant
Rental Asset Select if you have rental assets.

Lessor Name and Enter the name and telephone number of the lessor.
Telephone

Use the Notes region to add any relevant descriptions, such as appendixes or remarks, or to identify any
attachments.

Entering Asset Local Tax Return Information

Access the Local Tax Return Information page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, Owned Assets, Basic
Add. Click the Local Tax Information Link).

Define the asset as New or Used, and select a local tax office.

Select one of these asset return type options:

• Structure

• Machinery

• Ship

518 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 23 Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management

• Airplane

• Vehicle

• Tool

Specify a numerator and denominator for the exception rate.

Specify a theoretical net book value and an assessment value for your information.

Note. The Theoretical Net Book Value and the Assessment Value fields are not required when you add a
newly acquired asset in the current year, but you must enter the asset's theoretical net book value and
assessment value reported in the previous year if you acquired assets in the previous year but added them to
Asset Management for the first time.

Calculating Theoretical Net Book Value and Assessment Value

Access the Theoretical NBV and Assessment Value page (Asset Management, Taxes, Calculate Local Taxes,
Calculate Amounts JPN).

Note. Enter the same local tax office code in both fields when you are reporting to a single tax office.

The results of this process populate the LTAX_INFO1_TBL.

Running Local Tax Reports

Select a range of local tax office codes to be declared for the theoretical net book value and assessment value.

Note. Enter the same local tax office code in both fields when you are reporting to a single tax office.

Specify a return year.

Select one of the Request Local Tax Return options:

All Include all assets.

Increase Include assets added and received by transfer in this fiscal year.

Changing the Local Tax Office and Asset Return Type

Enter the transaction date on which to change the local tax office and asset return type. Enter the new local
tax office code for filing the return.

Select one of these new asset return types:

• Structure

• Machinery

• Ship

• Airplane

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 519
Using the Global Features of PeopleSoft Asset Management Chapter 23

• Vehicle

• Tool

Changing the Local Tax Office and Asset Return Type While Transferring Assets

When you transfer assets, the operation process varies according to the transfer scenario. This table displays
the various operation processes:

Transfer Scenario Operation Process

Asset is partially transferred to another local tax office, Use InterUnit Transfer to change the local tax office, or
or the asset return type is changed, or both. the asset return type, or both.

Asset is fully transferred to another department ID and Use Transfer to change the local tax office or asset
the local tax office where the return is filed, and the return type.
asset return type has changed.

Asset is partially transferred to another department ID Use InterUnit Transfer to change the local tax office
and the local tax office where the return is filed, and the and asset return type.
asset return type has changed.

Entering Consumption Tax

Asset Management supports Japanese consumption tax on asset sales by using VAT functionality on the asset
Retirement page. In addition to entering VAT information, you can enter customer information for asset sales.

See Chapter 19, "Retiring Assets," Specifying How VAT Is Calculated for Asset Retirement, page 401.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Establishing
PeopleSoft Asset Management Business Units."

520 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
 Chapter 24

Archiving Asset Information

This chapter provides an overview of removing inactive asset information from your system and describes
how to:

• Archive cost and depreciation data.

• View archived data.

• Restore archived data.

Understanding Archiving
The tables that store asset information accumulate large volumes of data over time. Eventually some of this
data is no longer needed on a routine basis. You can use PeopleSoft Asset Management to archive inactive
data on the cost and depreciation of assets, and if that data is ever needed again, you can use PeopleSoft Asset
Management to restore the data that you archived. The benefits of archiving inactive data include improving
the performance of reports and processes and reducing the space that your system needs to store asset data.

Before you archive inactive asset information, you should keep these general guidelines in mind. You cannot
archive:

• Retired assets.

• Group assets.

• Assets with depreciation based on schedules.

You can archive active assets one at a time or by using a range of asset IDs. You must archive each asset
book by book. The fiscal year must be closed before an asset can be archived. The archive period
automatically defaults to the last period of the specified fiscal year.

You can archive an asset more than one time. If you archive an asset multiple times and later decide to restore
the data, you will need to restore each archive one by one. For example, if you archive an asset two times,
you will need to restore the asset information two times, one for each archive that was run.

The process that archives data actually moves application data from the application tables to the archive
tables. The process then deletes data from the application tables.

The archive tables are just like other application tables. You can back up these archive tables using another
disk or tape for storage and then manually delete the contents of the archive tables if desired. This approach
allows you to use tools, such as PS/Query or Crystal Reports, to report and review the contents of the
archived files. The data in the archived files can also be joined to the application tables to provide a complete
picture of activity including active and archived data.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 521
Archiving Asset Information Chapter 24

After you archive an asset, you cannot perform a transaction or a transfer involving that asset before the
archival date unless you restore the archived asset. For example, if the asset has been archived through
December 31 of the previous year, you will not be able to perform any transactions on the asset in the
previous year.

All historical data showing transaction costs in multiple currencies is supported in the archive and restore
processes. You can save transactions with multiple currencies just as they occurred and restore them as well.

You can archive, delete, and retrieve archived data, accumulated by a process that updates high volume asset
management transaction tables: ASSET_NBV_TBL, DEPR_RPT, OPEN_TRANS, and DIST_LN. Using the
Mass Change component, you can define mass change criteria and use the delivered template for each
transaction table to archive, delete, or view archived transaction details. This method enables improved
performance for day-to-day transactions while maintaining historical data for reporting and audit purposes.

See Also

Chapter 20, "Processing Asset Mass Changes," page 421

Archiving Inactive Assets

This section describes how to run a process that archives depreciation, cost, and book data.

Use the Archive Cost/Depreciation (AM_ARCHIV) component to archive asset management cost and
depreciation transactions.

Page Used to Archive Data

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Archive Cost/Depreciation RUN_ARCHIVE Asset Management, Asset Run the Asset Archive
Transactions, History, process (AMDPARCH) to
Archive Cost/Depreciation, archive inactive cost and
Archive Cost/Depreciation depreciation data.

Running the Asset Archive Process

Access the Archive Cost/Depreciation page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, History, Archive
Cost/Depreciation, Archive Cost/Depreciation).

522 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 24 Archiving Asset Information

Archive Cost/Depreciation page

Unit Select the business unit from which records will be archived.

Book Name You must archive an asset using each book it is associated with.

From Asset ID and To Use these fields to archive a range of asset IDs. To archive one asset, enter the
Asset ID asset ID in the From Asset field.

Fiscal Year By default, the process will archive data up to the last period of the fiscal year
you enter here. The fiscal year must be closed before an asset can be archived.

Archive ID When you run the process, the system populates this field with the run control ID
and stores the archive ID in the ARCHIVE_NO field on the depreciation table.
You must keep a record of this archive ID if you want to restore archived data.

The Asset Archive Application Engine (AM_CSDP_ARCH) process copies inactive data from the application
tables to archive tables. This process then deletes the archived data from the application tables and
consolidates the rows that are left.

For cost rows, the Asset Archive process consolidates multiple cost rows of data into one row.

For depreciation rows, all the depreciation rows prior to the Fiscal Year are summed up to create one ADD
row for accumulated depreciation. The archived records are stored in the depreciation history table.

Viewing Archived Data

You can use inquiry pages to look up different levels of information about archived data.

You can also use the following queries:

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 523
Archiving Asset Information Chapter 24

• COST_ARCHIVE

• DEPR_ARCHIVE

• BOOK_ARCHIVE

Use the Review Book (ASSET_BOOK_HIST) and the Review Cost (COST_HISTORY) components to view
archived asset data.

Pages Used to View Archived Data

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Review Book – List ASSET_BOOK_HIST1 Asset Management, Asset Review book change
Transactions, History, history.
Review Book, List

Review Book – Detail ASSET_BOOK_HIST2 Asset Management, Asset Review detailed book
Transactions, History, change history.
Review Book, Detail

Cost History List ASSET_TRANS_01 Asset Management, Asset View a history of an asset's
Transactions, History, transactions, including
Review Cost, Cost History assets that have been
List archived as an ADD
transaction. For archived
assets, the total cost
includes the sum of the
costs consolidated into one
cost row.

Cost History Detail ASSET_TRANS_02 Asset Management, Asset View more detail about a
Transactions, History, specific transaction.
Review Cost, Cost History
Detail
Select Detail from the Cost
History List page.

Non-Cap History List ASSET_TRANS_03 Asset Management, Asset View a history of a non-
Transactions, History, capitalized asset's
Review Cost, Non-Cap transactions, including
History List assets that have been
archived as an ADD
transaction. For archived
assets, the total cost
includes the sum of the
costs consolidated into one
cost row.

524 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 24 Archiving Asset Information

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Non-Cap History Detail ASSET_TRANS_04 Asset Management, Asset View more detail about a
Transactions, History, specific transaction for a
Review Cost, Non-Cap non-capitalized asset.
History Detail
Select Detail from the Non-
Cap History List page.

Restoring Archived Data

This section describes how to run a process that restores archived data.

Use the Restore Cost/Depreciation (AM_RESTORE) component to restore archived asset cost and
depreciation transactions.

Page Used to Restore Archived Data

Page Name Definition Name Navigation Usage

Run Restore RUN_RESTORE Asset Management, Asset Run the Asset Restore
Transactions, History, (AM_CD_RESTO)
Restore Cost/Depreciation, Application Engine process
Run Restore that copies data stored in the
archive tables back to the
application tables.

Running the Asset Restore Process

Access the Cost/Depreciation Restore page (Asset Management, Asset Transactions, History, Restore
Cost/Depreciation, Run Restore).

Unit Select the business unit from which records will be restored.

Book Name You must restore an asset in each book associated with the asset.

From Asset ID and To Use these fields to restore a range of archived asset IDs. To restore one archived
Asset ID asset, enter the asset ID in the From Asset field.

Archive ID Enter the run control ID that the system generated when the data was archived.
By default, the system displays the most recent run control ID for the Asset
Archive process.

The Asset Restore process restores the archived data by deleting the summed row in the application tables
and replacing it with the multiple rows of data stored in the archive tables.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 525
Archiving Asset Information Chapter 24

Archiving From Transaction Table Details

PeopleSoft provides the templates for the Mass Change component to archive, delete, and retrieve data from
high-volume transaction detail tables. The tables available for this process are:

• ASSET_NBV_TBL: Accumulates detail lines from net book value processing.

• DEPR_RPT: Accumulates detail lines from depreciation reporting.

• OPEN_TRANS: Accumulates detail lines from open transactions.

• DIST_LN: Accumulates information from creating accounting entries.

The transaction detail lines can also be deleted from the tables once they have been archived, or without
archive if the transactions are set to be purged. Data that is archived is also available for retrieval as needed
for reporting or audit purposes.

The steps for archiving, deleting or retrieving transaction detail from tables are:

1. Run Calculate Depreciation (AM_DEPR_CALC) process to generate depreciation calculations.

2. Run Depreciation Reporting (AMDPREPT) process and Load Net Book Value (AMLDNBVT) process to
collect the information provided by AM_DEPR_CALC. (If you are working with the OPEN_TRANS or
DIST_LN tables, you do not need to run these processes.)

3. Run the archive mass change using the appropriate template for the table from which transactions are
pulled.

4. Run the delete mass change using the appropriate template for the table from which transactions are
pulled.

5. Run the retrieve archived data mass change using the appropriate template for the table from which
transactions are to be viewed.

When you are ready to define the parameters of your archive mass change, access the Mass Change
component, Define Criteria (MC_DEFN_00) page. (Asset Management, Mass Change, Define Criteria,
Description.)

526 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 24 Archiving Asset Information

Archive – Mass Change, Define Criteria page

Add a new mass change and select the template that corresponds to the table and archive activity you want to
perform. The templates to archive, delete and retrieve detail are:

• Archive Asset Depr Rpt entries: This mass change type copies the specified DEPR_RPT entries into the
DEPR_RPT_ARCH table. Specified entries are determined by the selection criteria of the mass change
template with the same name (Archive Asset Depr Rpt entries). The following fields will be used to select
the data:

• Business Unit: If entered, mass change selects the specified business unit. If not entered, mass change
selects all business units.

• Book: If entered, mass change selects the specified book. If not entered, mass change selects all books

• Fiscal Year: It is recommended that you enter a fiscal year; mass change selects the specified value.

• Archive Asset NBV entries: This mass change type copies the specified PS_ASSET_NBV_TBL entries
into the PS_ASSET_NBV_ARCH table. PS_ASSET_NBV_ARCH is used to store the old net book value
entries, and it can also be used to retrieve the entries into a sequential file. The following fields will be
used to select the data:

• Business Unit: If entered, mass change selects the specified business unit. If not entered, mass change
selects all business units.

• Book: If entered, mass change selects the specified book. If not entered, mass change selects all books

• As of Date: It is recommended that you enter an As of Date; mass change selects the specified value.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 527
Archiving Asset Information Chapter 24

• Archive Asset Open Trans:This mass change type is used to archive Asset Open Transaction
(PS_OPEN_TRANS table) details. It inserts the selected entries into the Open Trans Archive table
(PS_OPEN_TRANS_ARCH). The following fields are used to select the data:

• Business Unit: If entered, mass change selects the specified business unit. If not entered, mass change
selects all business units.

• Book: If entered, mass change selects the specified book. If not entered, mass change selects all books

• Accounting Date: It is recommended that you enter an accounting date; mass change selects the
specified value.

• Archive Asset Acctng Entries This mass change template is used in the archiving of Asset Accounting
Entries (PS_DIST_LN table). It inserts selected rows into table PS_DIST_LN_ARCH.
PS_DIST_LN_ARCH is to archive the old accounting entries, and it can also be used to retrieve the
archived entries into a sequential file. The following fields are used to select the data:

• Business Unit: If entered, mass change selects the specified business unit. If not entered, mass change
selects all business units.

• Book: If entered, mass change selects the specified book. If not entered, mass change selects all books

• Accounting Date: It is recommended that you enter an accounting date; mass change selects the
specified value.

• Delete Asset Acctng Entries This mass change template is used to delete entries from the assets
accounting entry table (PS_DIST_LN) that have been archived. Enter the deletion selection criteria for:

• Business Unit: If entered, mass change selects the specified business unit. If not entered, mass change
selects all business units.

• Book: If entered, mass change selects the specified book. If not entered, mass change selects all books

• Accounting Date: It is recommended that you enter an accounting date; mass change selects the
specified value.

• Delete Asset Depr Rpt entries: This mass change type deletes the DEPR_RPT, DEPR_RPT_CF_SUM
and DEPR_RPT_PD_SUM specified entries that are determined by the selection criteria of the mass
change template you use. You should enter the same selection criteria used for the mass change archive of
DEPR_RPT entries if you want to delete archived entries. If you want to purge DEPR_RPT entries, you
should enter the following selection criteria when running the mass change:

• Business Unit: If entered, mass change selects the specified business unit. If not entered, mass change
selects all business units.

• Book: If entered, mass change selects the specified book. If not entered, mass change selects all books

• Fiscal Year: It is recommended that you enter a fiscal year; mass change selects the specified value.

528 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Chapter 24 Archiving Asset Information

• Delete Asset NBV entries:This mass change type deletes the entries from the Asset Net Book Value table
(PS_ASSET_NBV_TBL). You should enter the same selection criteria used for the mass change archive
of Asset NBV entries if you want to delete archived entries. If you want to purge Asset Net Book Value
entries, you should enter the following selection criteria when running the mass change:

• Business Unit: If entered, mass change selects the specified business unit. If not entered, mass change
selects all business units.

• Book: If entered, mass change selects the specified book. If not entered, mass change selects all books

• User ID: If entered, mass change selects the specified User ID. If not entered, mass change selects all
User IDs.

• As of Date: It is recommended that you enter an accounting date; mass change selects the specified
value.

• Delete Asset Open Trans: This mass change type deletes Open Transaction entries from table
PS_OPEN_TRANS. It should be used after they have been archived. Enter the:

• Business Unit: If entered, mass change selects the specified business unit. If not entered, mass change
selects all business units.

• Book: If entered, mass change selects the specified book. If not entered, mass change selects all books

• As of Date: It is recommended that you enter an as of date; mass change selects the specified value.

• Unload DIST_LN_ARCH to file

This mass change template is used to retrieve details from the archive table PS_DIST_LN_ARCH to a
sequential file. Enter the selection criteria:

• Archive ID

• Archive Date

• Unload Open Trans to File

This Mass Change Type is used to unload entries from the Asset Open Transaction Archive table to a
sequential file. Enter the Archive ID and Archive Date to be used as selection criteria.

• Upload Asset Open Trans

This Mass Change Type is used to upload Open Transactions into table PS_OPEN_TRANS from table
PS_OPEN_TRANS_ARCH. Enter the Archive ID and Archive Date to be used as selection criteria.

• Upload Asset Acctng Entries

This Mass Change Type is used to load the production asset accounting entry table (PS_DIST_LN) from
the accounting entry archive table (PS_DIST_LN_ARCH). Enter the Archive ID and Archive Date as
selection criteria for loading.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 529
 Appendix A

Understanding the Loader Table Data

Dictionary
This chapter provides an overview of the loader tables and discusses:

• Loader table INTFC_FIN.

• Loader table INTFC_PHY_A.

• Loader table INTFC_PHY_B.

• Transaction loader inserts.

• Interface types (load types)

Understanding the Loader Tables

This chapter contains descriptions and explanations of the usage of the fields in PeopleSoft Asset
Management loader tables INTFC_FIN, INTFC_PHY_A, and INTFC_PHY_B. This chapter, in conjunction
with the listing of these records in PeopleSoft Application Designer, provides all the information users need
to load data into PeopleSoft Asset Management using these tables. Information about records in the
Application Designer includes the field type, size, valid values, and other technical details. The field names
used in this chapter match the field names in the tables. For example, the field name for Interface ID in any
table is always INTFC_ID.

If any of these fields is modified in the application tables, then they must also be modified in the loader tables
if you will be using the Transaction Loader.

Loader Table INTFC_FIN

The following table describes the information found in Loader Table INTFC_FIN:

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 531
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

INTFC_ID Interface ID Key to this table. An interface ID Internal use Y

is typically assigned to a group of
transactions with the same load
type.
Use a unique, previously unused
INTFC_ID for each set of
transactions with the same load
type.
When using a load type of CN1
and NEXT in the ASSET_ID
field, use a unique INTFC_ID for
each asset.
For FADs and Conversions, if
INTFC_ID is the same for
multiple lines for an asset,
increment the
INTFC_LINE_NUM for each
line.

INTFC_LINE_N Interface Line Key to this table. Interface Line Internal use Y
UM Number Number is used as a key for
multiple lines for the same
Interface ID for transactions with
similar keys (for example,
multiple acquisition details, such
as CAP).
For FADs and Conversions, if
INTFC_ID is the same for
multiple lines for an asset,
increment the
INTFC_LINE_NUM for each
line.

BUSINESS_UN Business Unit Identifies the business unit of the BOOK, Y

IT financial transaction to be COST,
processed. (You should never DEPRECIATI
have more than one business unit ON,
per interface ID.) RETIREMEN
T,
OPEN_TRAN
S

532 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

ASSET_ID Asset Identifies the asset ID of the BOOK, Y

Identification financial transaction to be COST,
processed. For add interface DEPRECIATI
types (ADD, NAD, FAD, CN1, ON,
and so on), if this field contains RETIREMEN
the value 'NEXT' then T,
Transaction Loader will assign OPEN_TRAN
the next asset ID for this business S
unit.

BOOK Asset Book Identifies the asset book to be BOOK, Y when Default
Name processed. All financial COST, Profile Switch =
transactions must be assigned a DEPRECIATI N
book if the ON,
DEFAULT_PROFILE_SW = 'N'. RETIREMEN
T,
The financial information for an
OPEN_TRAN
asset (book, cost, depreciation,
S
retirements) addition can be
entered by creating transactions
manually. To do this, enter one
row into the INTFC_FIN table
for each book to which an asset
reports.
This information can also be
provided by default via the
profile. The Transaction Loader
will then populate the financial
tables for all books specified in
the profile from the one row in
INTFC_FIN. When the
DEFAULT_PROFILE_SW is set
to 'Y', book can be left blank ("
"). Books will be populated by
default from the profile, which is
populated in INTFC_PHY_A.
If you aredoing a CN1, set the
DEFAULT_PR0FILE_SW to 'N'.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 533
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

DTTM_STAMP Date/Time Populates the key field of COST, Y

Stamp datetime stamp in many tables. DEPRECIATI
Represents the date and time that ON,
this transaction was added to the RETIREMEN
system. While Date/Time Stamp T,
can be set to any value, we OPEN_TRAN
recommend that you set it to the S
date of the conversion to ensure
that this date will be earlier than
the date of any further
transactions.
This value is used as a key
because INTFC_LINE_NUM is
not always incremented (for
example, when creating
transactions via Mass Change).
Making this a key is a safeguard
against getting a duplicate insert.
If a single asset has multiple cost
rows, you may want to increment
this field by one second for each
subsequent row to prevent
duplicate inserts into PS_COST.

VOUCHER_ID Voucher ID Identifies the voucher associated Internal use

with the financial transaction.
This value is used in AP
integration. This field can be used
for PeopleSoft or non-PeopleSoft
integration. This field is in this
table so that the INTFC_FIN
transactions can be easily queried
by voucher. This field should be
populated if the transaction is
voucher related.

VOUCHER_LI Voucher Line Identifies the voucher line Internal use

NE_NUM Number number associated with the
financial transaction. This value
is used in AP integration. This
field can be used for PeopleSoft
or non-PeopleSoft integration.

DISTRIB_LINE Distribution Identifies the voucher line Internal use

_NUM Line Number distribution number associated
with the financials transaction.
This value is used in AP
integration. This field can be used
for PeopleSoft or non-PeopleSoft
integration.

534 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

OPERATING_U Operating Unit A ChartField that can be COST,

NIT customized. See the online DEPRECIATI
ChartField customization topic ON
for further discussion.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise
Application Fundamentals 9.1
PeopleBook, Understanding
PeopleSoft Enterprise ChartField
Configuration.

DEPTID Department A ChartField that can be COST,

customized. See the online DEPRECIATI
ChartField customization topic ON
for further discussion.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise
Application Fundamentals 9.1
PeopleBook, Understanding
PeopleSoft Enterprise ChartField
Configuration.

PRODUCT Product A ChartField that can be COST,

customized. See the online DEPRECIATI
ChartField customization topic ON
for further discussion.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise
Application Fundamentals 9.1
PeopleBook, Understanding
PeopleSoft Enterprise ChartField
Configuration.

FUND_CODE Fund Code A ChartField that can be COST,

customized. See the online DEPRECIATI
ChartField customization topic ON
for further discussion.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise
Application Fundamentals 9.1
PeopleBook, Understanding
PeopleSoft Enterprise ChartField
Configuration.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 535
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

CLASS_FLD Class Field A ChartField that can be COST,

customized. See the online DEPRECIATI
ChartField customization topic ON
for further discussion.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise
Application Fundamentals 9.1
PeopleBook, Understanding
PeopleSoft Enterprise ChartField
Configuration.

PROGRAM_CO Program Code A ChartField that can be COST,

DE customized. See the online DEPRECIATI
ChartField customization topic ON
for further discussion.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise
Application Fundamentals 9.1
PeopleBook, Understanding
PeopleSoft Enterprise ChartField
Configuration.

BUDGET_REF Budget A ChartField that can be COST,

Reference customized. See the online DEPRECIATI
ChartField customization topic ON
for further discussion.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise
Application Fundamentals 9.1
PeopleBook, Understanding
PeopleSoft Enterprise ChartField
Configuration.

AFFILIATE Affiliate A ChartField that can be COST,

customized. See the online DEPRECIATI
ChartField customization topic ON
for further discussion.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise
Application Fundamentals 9.1
PeopleBook, Understanding
PeopleSoft Enterprise ChartField
Configuration.

536 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

AFFILIATE_IN Fund Affiliate A ChartField that can be COST,

TRA1 customized. See the online DEPRECIATI
ChartField customization topic ON
for further discussion.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise
Application Fundamentals 9.1
PeopleBook, Understanding
PeopleSoft Enterprise ChartField
Configuration.

AFFILIATE_IN Operating Unit A ChartField that can be COST,

TRA2 Affiliate customized. See the online DEPRECIATI
ChartField customization topic ON
for further discussion.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise
Application Fundamentals 9.1
PeopleBook, Understanding
PeopleSoft Enterprise ChartField
Configuration.

CHARTFIELD1 ChartField 1 A ChartField that can be COST,

customized. See the online DEPRECIATI
ChartField customization topic ON
for further discussion.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise
Application Fundamentals 9.1
PeopleBook, Understanding
PeopleSoft Enterprise ChartField
Configuration.

CHARTFIELD2 ChartField 2 A ChartField that can be COST,

customized. See the online DEPRECIATI
ChartField customization topic ON
for further discussion.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise
Application Fundamentals 9.1
PeopleBook, Understanding
PeopleSoft Enterprise ChartField
Configuration.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 537
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

CHARTFIELD3 ChartField 3 A ChartField that can be COST,

customized. See the online DEPRECIATI
ChartField customization topic ON
for further discussion.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise
Application Fundamentals 9.1
PeopleBook, Understanding
PeopleSoft Enterprise ChartField
Configuration.

PROJECT_ID Project A ChartField that can be COST,

customized. See the online DEPRECIATI
ChartField customization topic ON
for further discussion.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise
Application Fundamentals 9.1
PeopleBook, Understanding
PeopleSoft Enterprise ChartField
Configuration.

CATEGORY Asset Category An asset ChartField that is used COST, Y

to derive the GL accounts for any DEPRECIATI
given financial transaction (used ON
in conjunction with Cost Type,
Trans Type, and Trans Code).
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset
Management 9.1 PeopleBook,
Creating PeopleSoft Asset
Management Accounting Entries,
Accounting Entry Templates.

COST_TYPE Cost Type An asset ChartField that is used COST,

to derive the GL accounts for any DEPRECIATI
given financial transaction (used ON
in conjunction with Trans Type,
and Trans Code). See the
Accounting Entries topic.
See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset
Management 9.1 PeopleBook,
Creating PeopleSoft Asset
Management Accounting Entries,
Accounting Entry Templates.

538 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

CF_SEQNO Chartfield Internal Use. Every combination COST,

Sequence of Chartfield values at the DEPRECIATI
Number Asset/Book level has a unique ON
ChartField sequence number
(CF_SEQNO), and every
ChartField sequence number
value at the Asset/Book level
represents one combination of
ChartField values. The values of
this field are not shared among
assets. When the cost of the asset
is transferred to a new
combination of ChartFields, the
ChartField sequence number is
assigned a new value.

INTFC_TYPE Interface Type, Identifies the type of transaction. Internal Use Y default CN1
also called Load Transaction Loader will process or CN2
Type this transaction based on this
field. A list of interface types and
their usage is included at the end
of this table.

SYSTEM_SOU System Source The source system that created Internal Use Y default CNV
RCE this transaction. Valid values are
listed in the translate table. This
field is used extensively by Asset
Management to drill back to
source systems. You can add
valid values to the translate table
for your external systems, or you
can use EXT. You can run
Transaction Loader selectively
for specific values of system
source.

APPROVAL_S Auto-approval Identifies whether the transaction Internal Use Y

W Status is approved or not. Transaction
Loader will only load approved
transactions. Valid values are 'Y'
for approved and 'N' for not
approved.

PI_ID Physical Used for internal processing. Do Internal Use

Inventory ID not populate. The physical
inventory ID that was entered
when defining physical inventory
is used here.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 539
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

INTFC_STATU Interface Status Used for internal processing. Internal Use Y default DON
S Default this field to 'DON'.

LOAD_STATU Load Status Identifies the status of this Internal Use Y NEW
S transaction. Updated by the
Transaction Loader. Valid values
are:
• NEW

Not processed.

• ERR

An error exists on this

transaction and it will not be
processed.

• DON

The transaction has been

successfully processed.

• CON

The transaction has been

consolidated into a different
transaction and it will not be
loaded.

• UNI

The transaction has been

unitized into a different
transaction and it will not be
loaded.

• HLD

The transaction is on hold.

This is used to prevent or
delay the processing of an
entry.

• INP

The transaction is in process.

This is the status while the
application engine is working
with the row.

ORIG_INTFC_I Original Used for internal processing. Do Internal Use

D Interface ID not populate.

540 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

ORIG_LINE_N Original Used for internal processing. Do Internal Use

UM Interface Line not populate.
Number

DEFAULT_PR Default Books Identifies whether a profile will Internal Use Y

OFILE_SW from Profile be used for an asset add or
capitalization by the Transaction
Loader. When this switch is set to
Y the fields in the BOOK table
are defaulted from the profile
tables rather than the loader
tables (INTFC_). When this
switch is set to Y, the category
and group asset ID on the COST
table, group asset ID on the
OPEN_TRANS table, a few
fields on the ASSET and
ASSET_ACQ_DET tables, and
the retirement convention on the
RETIREMENT table will also be
defaulted from the profile tables.
The profile_id is identified on the
INTFC_PHY_A table.
When this switch is set to C, the
category from the interface row is
retained. If the switch is set to G,
the group is retained. If the
switch is set to B, both the
category and the group are
retained.
When performing a CN1, you
must set the
DEFAULT_PROFILE_SW to N.
The default value of
DEFAULT_PROFILE_SW in
INTFC_FIN must match the
status of
DEFAULT_PROFILE_SW in
INTFC_PHY_A.
The section on Setting Up Asset
Profiles in the topic entitled
Establishing Asset Processing,
explains profile processing,
including which fields default
from a profile. Remember, the
values from a profile always
override the values on this table if
profile processing has been
chosen.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 541
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

TRANS_CODE Transaction Used to identify special COST,

Code accounting treatment for the DEPRECIATI
transaction. The category, cost ON
type, transaction type, and
transaction code together identify
the accounting entry template that
will be used for a given
transaction. The transaction code
allows you to specify an
alternative template to be used
for a transaction.
If you add or modify a
TRANS_CODE, you must set up
an Accounting Entry Template
for each additional Category/Cost
Type/Trans Code/Trans Type
combination it generates. For
more information on Transaction
Codes and Accounting Entry
Templates, refer to Establishing
Asset Processing.

TRANS_IN_OU Transaction Used to identify which side of a COST,

T In/Out transfer or recategorization this DEPRECIATI
transaction represents. Every ON
such transaction contains two
transactions. The outside of the
transaction adjusts the asset being
transferred/recategorized from.
The inside of the transaction
adjusts the asset being
transferred/recategorized to.
Valid values are 'O' and 'I'.

542 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

TRANS_DT Transaction Date Denotes the date this transaction COST, Y

occurred. Example: An asset was DEPRECIATI
purchased and placed into service ON,
on 15 April, 2007, but was added OPEN_TRAN
to the system on 5 June, 2007. S
The company wanted the add to
hit the general ledger for period 5
(May). In this example the
transaction date would be 15
April, 2007. The accounting date
most likely would be 31 May,
2007.
During conversion it is important
that this field represent the last
period for which depreciation has
been calculated.
For CN1 load types, the system
increments the TRANS_DT and
ACCOUNTING_DT you enter
into INTFC_FIN by one day. So
if you enter May 31, 2009 as your
transaction and accounting dates,
the system will use June 1, 2009.

ACCOUNTING Accounting Date Denotes the date this transaction COST, Y

_DT was accounted for. This date is OPEN_TRAN
passed to the general ledger. It is S
the difference between the
transaction date and the
accounting date that identifies a
retroactive transaction.
Remember, the accounting date
must always be greater than or
equal to the transaction date.
See the example of transaction
date for an example.
For CN1 load types, the system
increments the TRANS_DT and
ACCOUNTING_DT you enter
into INTFC_FIN by one day. So
if you enter 05/31/95 as your
transaction and accounting dates,
the system will use 06/01/95.

IN_SERVICE_ In Service Date The date the asset was placed in BOOK Y
DT service. This field is used in
conjunction with the convention
to determine the begin
depreciation date. This field only
relates to depreciable assets.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 543
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

IN_SERVICE_P In Service The calendar period in which the BOOK

D Period in service date falls. If this field is
not populated, the depreciation
calculation program will
calculate it.

IN_SERVICE_F In Service Fiscal The calendar fiscal year in which BOOK

Y Year the in service date falls. If this
field is not populated, the
depreciation calculation program
will calculate it.

DEPR_IN_SER Depreciate This field marks whether the BOOK Y default N

VICE_SW When in Service yearly depreciation in the year of
acquisition should be spread from
the in service date through the
end of the year or from the begin
depreciation date as calculated
using the convention and the in
service date. Example: In service
date = 1 April 1997, convention =
half year, begin depreciation date
= 1 July, 1997, 1997
Depreciation = $1,000. If this
field = 'Y' then the $1,000 will be
spread from 1 April to 31
December. If this field = 'N' then
the $1,000 will be spread from 1
July to 31 December.

BEGIN_DEPR_ Begin The date the asset begins BOOK

DT Depreciation depreciating. This field is
Date typically calculated by the
depreciation calculation program
(AM_DEPR_CALC) using the in
service date and the convention,
so you should leave this field
blank.

BEGIN_DEPR_ Begin Used for internal processing. Do BOOK

PD Depreciation not populate.
Period

BEGIN_DEPR_ Begin Used for internal processing. Do BOOK

FY Depreciation not populate.
Fiscal Year

544 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

BEGIN_FRACT Begin Used for internal processing. Do BOOK

ION Depreciation not populate.
Period Fraction

DEPR_CALC_S Depreciation Used for internal processing. Do BOOK

W Calculation not populate.
Switch

BEGIN_CALC_ Begin Used for internal processing. Do BOOK

DT Depreciation not populate.
Calculation Date

BEGIN_CALC_ Begin Used for internal processing. Do BOOK

PD Calculation not populate.
Period

BEGIN_CALC_ Begin Used for internal processing. Do BOOK

FY Calculation not populate.
Fiscal Year

CALCULATIO Calculation The type of depreciation BOOK Y

N_TYPE Type calculation that will be performed
by the depreciation calculation
program (AM_DEPR_CALC).
The valid values are 'R' for
remaining value and 'L' for Life-
to-Date. Most conversions will
use a remaining value type. For a
more detailed discussion of these
calculation types, please refer to
Appendix C: Understanding
Depreciation Calculations.
In general, if the Remaining
Value option is selected,
depreciation will be calculated
from the Transaction Date. If the
Life-to-Date option is selected,
depreciation will be calculated
from the Begin Depreciation
Date.

LAST_CALC_T Last Calculation Used for internal processing. Do BOOK

YPE Type not populate.

RSV_FRACTIO Reserve Fraction Used for internal processing. Do BOOK

N (RSV/Cost) not populate.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 545
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

RECALC_RSV_ Recalculate RSV Used for internal processing. Do BOOK

SW Fraction not populate.
(RSV/Cost)

SCHED_FRAC Fraction of Used for internal processing. Do BOOK

TION Schedule not populate.
Elapsed

YEAR_REM_F Year Remaining Used for internal processing. Do BOOK

RACTION Fraction not populate.

DEPR_STATUS Depreciation Marks the asset book as BOOK Y

Status depreciable or non-depreciable.
The valid values are 'D' for
depreciable and 'N' for non-
depreciable. If an asset is marked
non-depreciable, then the
depreciation calculation program
(AM_DEPR_CALC) will not
process it and no depreciation
will be posted. It can still be
capitalized, however, and Cost
and Book record rows will be
tracked.
If you mark an asset book as non-
depreciable, you must still enter a
life and convention for it.

REGULATION Depreciation Identifies the U.S. tax regulation BOOK

Regulation that covers this asset book. Valid
values are in the translate table.

RECOVERY_LI Recovery Life Identifies the U.S. tax recovery BOOK

FE life for this asset book.

RECOVERY_S Recovery Sub- Identifies the U.S. tax recovery BOOK

UBTYPE type sub-type for this asset book.

546 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

CONVENTION Prorate Identifies the depreciation prorate BOOK Y

Convention convention to be used with this
asset book. The convention is
applied to the in service date to
calculate the begin depreciation
date for the asset book. The valid
values must be set up on the
convention table prior to
implementation. PeopleSoft ships
a 'MODEL' set of conventions
with the system that can be
shared by your business units.

Note. If you are using a calendar

other than a standard, 12-period
calendar, you may need to
modify the MODEL set of
conventions or create new
convention definitions that match
the calendar or calendars you are
using.

LIFE Life Identifies the depreciable life of BOOK Y for most

this asset book. If the asset is depreciation
using a depreciation method that methods
uses life (such as straight line,
schedule, declining balance
switching to straight line, and so
on), then life is a required field.
Life is measured in periods. If
you are using a calendar that is
12 periods and the life of the
asset is 5 years, then the life field
would contain 60.

LIFE_REMAINI Remaining Life Used for internal processing. Do BOOK

NG not populate.

TAX_CLASS_A Guideline Tax Identifies the U.S. tax class BOOK

M Class associated with this asset book.

DEPR_PERCEN Percent Identifies the percent to be used. BOOK Y for flat rate
T This field is only used when the declining
depreciation method is flat rate or balance
declining balance. depreciation

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 547
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

DB_PERCENT Declining Identifies the declining balance BOOK Y for declining

Balance Percent percent. This field is only used balance with a
when the depreciation method is straight line
declining balance with switch to switch
straight line. depreciation

METHOD Depreciation Identifies the depreciation BOOK Y

Method method to be used. Valid values
are in the translate table.

DEPR_SCHED_ Depreciation Identifies the depreciation BOOK Y for

CD Schedule Code schedule to be used. This field is depreciation
only used if the depreciation method
method is schedule. This field Schedule
must reference a valid
depreciation schedule. The
schedules are defined by the user
in the Establish Asset Processing
window. PeopleSoft ships a
number of sample schedules in
the 'MODEL' TableSet.

Note. Life is a key field on the

Depreciation Schedule Code
table. Verify that the
Depreciation Schedule Code
selected is valid and life
corresponds to the value entered
in the life field.

DEPR_LIMIT_ Depreciation Identifies the depreciation limits BOOK

CD Limit Code to be used. Depreciation limits
are used to limit the amount of
depreciation expense that can be
taken in a given fiscal year. This
field must reference a valid
depreciation limit. The limits are
defined by the user in the
Establish Asset Processing
window. PeopleSoft ships a
number of sample limits in the
'MODEL' TableSet.

PROPERTY_C Property Code Identifies what code of property BOOK

D the asset book falls into for U.S.
tax processing purposes. Valid
values are '1' for section 1245
property and '2' for section 1250
property.

548 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

PROPERTY_T Property Type Identifies the type of property the BOOK

YPE asset book represents. Valid
values are 'R' for real property
and 'P' for personal property.

SALVAGE_VA Salvage Value The salvage or residual value that COST

LUE is to be used in the depreciation
calculation for this asset book. It
is subtracted from the cost to
determine the depreciable basis in
depreciation calculations.

TAX_CREDIT_ Tax Credit Used for internal processing. Do BOOK

SW Switch not populate.

BASIS_RED_T Basis Reduction The total amount of the reduction BOOK

OTAL Total in the cost basis for this asset
book.

BASIS_RED_R Basis Reduction The total amount of the recapture BOOK

ECAP Recapture of the basis reduction for this
asset book.

SEC179_TAKE Section 179 Identifies whether the asset book BOOK

N_SW Taken Switch has qualified under the U.S. Tax
regulation section 179. Valid
values are 'Y' for yes and 'N' for
no.

SEC179_AMT Section 179 If the asset book qualified for BOOK

Taken Amount section 179 expense, how much
was taken?

ACTIVITY_SW Activity Switch Identifies whether this transaction COST,

reflects an active ChartField DEPRECIATI
combination for an asset. This ON
field is numeric. When the sum
of the activity switch for a
ChartField combination for an
asset = 0, then this ChartField
combination is active.
For asset adds, this field is
always 0.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 549
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

RETIRE_SW Retirement Identifies whether this ChartField COST

Switch combination for the asset book
has been retired (fully) or not.
This field is numeric and works
the same as the activity switch.

QUANTITY Asset Quantity Represents the quantity of this COST

transaction. Remember, each
transaction's quantity is summed
to provide a balance at a given
point in time.

COST Cost Represents the cost of this COST Y

transaction. Remember, each
transaction's cost for an asset
book is summed to provide a
balance at a given point in time.

CURRENCY_C Currency Code This field represents the COST, Y

D transaction currency. This field is RETIREMEN
used to determine the currency T
conversion that will occur when
populating each asset book,
which may be in a different
currency.

TRANSFER_B Transfer For an interunit asset transfer to COST

U Business Unit transaction (transaction
type='TRF' and Transaction
in/out switch='I') this represents
the business unit the asset was
transferred from. For an interunit
asset transfer from transaction
(transaction type='TRF' and
Transaction in/out switch='O')
this represents the business unit
the asset was transferred to.

TRANSFER_AS Transfer Asset This field works just like the COST
SET_ID ID Transfer Business Unit, only it
represents the asset ID used in the
transfer transaction.

TRANSFER_B Transfer From This field works just like the COST
OOK Book Transfer Business Unit, only it
represents the book used in the
transfer transaction.

550 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

OPRID Operator ID The operator ID that initiated this COST,

transaction. OPEN_TRAN
S

FISCAL_YEAR Fiscal Year Represents the fiscal year in DEPRECIATI Y if the asset has
which the depreciation was taken. ON accumulated
depreciation
When converting depreciation
you must identify the time period
the depreciation covers. If
converting an asset for which
depreciation has been calculated
through June 1997, then the fiscal
year would be 1997, the start
period would be 6 and the end
period would be 6.

START_PD Start Period Represents the start period for DEPRECIATI Y if the asset has
which the depreciation was taken. ON accumulated
See the example above. depreciation

END_PD End Period Represents the end period for DEPRECIATI Y if the asset has
which the depreciation was taken. ON accumulated
See the example above. depreciation

YTD_FLAG Original Reserve Set value to 'N' for Depreciation DEPRECIATI Y if the asset has
Amount that represents ON accumulated
accumulated depreciation as of depreciation
the conversion date. Default to
'Y' for other depreciation
transactions.

DEPR Depreciation The depreciation amount of this DEPRECIATI Y if the asset has
Amount transaction. ON accumulated
depreciation

DEPR_YTD Year-to-Date Populate with Year To Date DEPRECIATI Y if the

Depreciation Depreciation ON depreciation
method is Sum
of Years,
Declining
Balance,
Declining
Balance with
Switch to
Straight line and
you are doing a
mid-year
conversion.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 551
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

RETIREMENT_ Retirement Date The retirement date of the RETIREMEN

DT transaction. This field is used for T
retirement transactions only.

RETIRE_CONV Retirement Represents the convention used RETIREMEN

ENTION Convention for the retirement transaction. T
The convention is used to
determine the end depreciation
date for this asset book. This field
is used for retirement transactions
only.

END_DEPR_D End The end depreciation date for this RETIREMEN

T Depreciation retirement transaction. This T
Date represents the date that
depreciation will stop for this
asset. The depreciation for that
period is then prorated to
determine the amount of
accumulated depreciation being
retired. This field is used for
retirement transactions only.

DISPOSAL_CO Disposal Code Represents a memo field RETIREMEN

DE detailing the method that was T
used to dispose of this asset. The
valid values for this field are in
the translate table. This field is
used for retirement transactions
only.

RETIREMENT_ Retirement Type Represents whether this RETIREMEN

TYPE retirement transaction was T
ordinary or extraordinary
according to U.S. Tax code. This
field is used for retirement
transactions only.

RETIREMENT_ Retirement Represents the status of the RETIREMEN

STATUS Status retirement transaction. The valid T
values are in the translate table.
The initial value should be 'N' for
a new retirement. This field is
used for retirement transactions
only.

552 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

VOLUNTARY Voluntary Represents whether the RETIREMEN

Conversion retirement was voluntary or T
involuntary. This is required by
U.S. tax code. The valid values
are in the translate table. This
field is used for retirement
transactions only.

TRADE_IN_AS Asset ID Bought Represents the asset ID that was RETIREMEN

SET_ID with Trade In bought using this asset as a trade- T
in. This field is only used for
retirement transactions.

TRADE_IN_DT Trade In Represents the date/time stamp of RETIREMEN

TM_STMP Date/Time the asset add transaction for the T
Stamp asset that was bought This field is
only used for retirement
transactions.

TRADE_IN_A Trade In The amount received for the RETIREMEN

MT Amount trade-in of an asset. This field is T
only used for retirement
transactions.

TRADE_IN_VA Trade In value To retire an asset by trading it for RETIREMEN Y

LUE another asset. T

CASH Cash "Cash received in a like-kind RETIREMEN Y

Received/Paid exchange is taxable and is often T
referred to as "boot". "

REFERENCE Reference Code A memo field that can be used to RETIREMEN

tie this retirement transaction to a T
reference document. This field is
only used for retirement
transactions.

LIABILITY_AS Liabilities "If you are surrendering a RETIREMEN Y

SUMED Assumed building with a mortgage of USD T
70,000 and acquiring a building
with a mortgage of USD 30,000,
you would enter 40,000 as the net
liability. "

NON_LIKE_KI FMV Non Like Fair Value for Non Like Kind RETIREMEN Y
ND Kind Property Property. T

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 553
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

RETIRE_QUAN Retirement The quantify of the asset book RETIREMEN

TITY Quantity being retired by this transaction. T
This field is only used for
retirement transactions.

RETIREMENT_ Retirement The amount of cost for the asset RETIREMEN

AMT Amount book being retired by this T
transaction. This field is only
used for retirement transactions.

PROCEEDS Retirement The proceeds received for this RETIREMEN

Proceeds asset. This value is used in the T
depreciation calculation program
to derive the gain/loss amount.
This field is only used for
retirement transactions.

REMOVAL_CO Removal Cost The cost of removal for this asset. RETIREMEN
ST This value is used in the T
depreciation calculation program
to derive the gain/loss amount.
This field is only used for
retirement transactions.

RETIREMENT_ Reserve Retired The accumulated depreciation RETIREMEN

RSV being retired by this transaction. T
This value is calculated by the
depreciation calculation program.
This field is only used for
retirement transactions.

GAIN_LOSS Retirement The gain/loss amount for this RETIREMEN

Gain/Loss retirement transaction. This value T
is calculated by the depreciation
calculation program. This field is
only used for retirement
transactions.

LEASE_REM_P Lease The number of payments RETIREMEN

AYMNTS Remaining remaining at the time of the T
Payments retirement. This field is
calculated by the program
AM_DEPR_CALC and does not
have to be populated. This field is
only used for retirement
transactions.

554 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

OPEN_TRANS_ Open The ID (key) for the OPEN_TRAN Y

ID Transaction ID OPEN_TRANS table. The S
OPEN_TRANS table is a "to do"
list for several programs, such as
AM_DEPR_CALC and
AM_AMAEDIST. If this
transaction requires processing
by these programs, an entry is
made to the OPEN_TRANS
table.
For performance reasons, this
field should be populated for
conversions. A single unique
OPEN_TRANS_ID can be used
for a group of the same
transaction types, for example,
CN1s.

CALC_DEPR_S Depreciation This field is used to determine OPEN_TRAN

TATUS whether depreciation needs to be S
calculated on this transaction.
Only financial transactions need
depreciation calculated. An open
transaction (OPEN_TRANS) is
created for those transactions that
will have depreciation calculated.
The OPEN_TRANS entry is then
used by AM_DEPR_CALC as a
"to do" list of transactions to
process.
Transaction Loader will populate
this field. It can be left blank.

Note. Open Transactions are still

generated for non-depreciable
assets.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 555
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

CALC_DIST_S Distribution This field is used to determine OPEN_TRAN

TATUS whether accounting entries need S
to be created for this transaction.
Only financial transactions on a
book marked for accounting entry
creation need to have accounting
entries created. An open
transaction (OPEN_TRANS) is
created for those transactions that
will have accounting entries
created. The OPEN_TRANS
table entry is then used by
AM_AMAEDIST as a "to do"
list of transactions to process.
Transaction Loader will populate
this field. It can be left blank.

MESSAGE_SE Message Set Used for internal processing. Do Internal Use

T_NBR Number not populate.

MESSAGE_NB Message Used for internal processing. Do Internal Use

R Number not populate.

BUSINESS_UN Joint Venture The parent JV business unit if the Internal Use
IT_JV Business Unit asset is part of a joint venture.

LIFE_END_DT Useful Life End This field represents the end date BOOK
Date of the useful life on the asset
book. This field can be used as an
alternate to the life field. Life and
life end date are mutually
exclusive. When you specify the
life end date, the depreciation
calculation program will
calculate the life field and store it
on the BOOK table.

DEPR_LOW_LI Depreciation This field represents the low BOOK

MIT Low Limit amount that net book value must
Amount reach before an asset stops
depreciating. This field is only
used by the declining balance
depreciation method. Since the
declining balance method does
not use a life, the low limit is the
way to specify when an asset
should become fully reserved.

556 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

SUSPEND_STA Suspend Status Indicates whether the book is BOOK

TUS currently "mothballed". Default
value for this field is blank. If the
book is "mothballed", enter a
value of 'Y' in this field.

SUSPEND_DT Suspend Date The date that depreciation was BOOK

suspended.

RESUME_DT Resume Date The date that depreciation was BOOK

resumed after a suspension.

SUSPENDED_P Number of The number of periods that BOOK

ERIODS Suspended depreciation was suspended for.
Periods

COST_BASIS_ Cost Basis Limit The maximum amount that can BOOK
LIMIT be capitalized for this asset book.

DEPR_AVG_O Averaging A special option that applies only BOOK Y default N

PTION Option to the flat rate depreciation
method. Valid values are 'M'
(Monthly), 'Y' (Yearly), or 'N'
(None).
If you're doing a conversion
(CN1), you must set this field to a
value, no matter what
depreciation method you're using.

UOP_ID Units of Represents the ID of the Units of BOOK

Production ID Production control table that
specifies the units of production
for this asset book.

IU_MAP_KEY InterUnit Map Used for InterUnit transfers. Appears on

Key COST.

MC_DEFN_ID Mass Change ID Used for internal processing. Do Internal Use

not populate.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 557
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

GROUP_ASSE Group Asset ID Used to identify which group BOOK,

T_ID asset group members report to. COST,
DEPRECIATI
ON,
OPEN_TRAN
S

UD_METHOD_ Method ID Identities the user-defined BOOK Y for

ID depreciation method to be used. depreciation
This field must reference a valid method user-
user-defined depreciation defined
method. The user defined
methods are specified in the
Establish Asset Processing
window.

INCLUDE_CAP CGT Applicable A flag which determines whether BOOK

_GAINS or not capital gains tax should be
included in the gain/loss of a
book. The
INCLUDE_CAP_GAINS is for
Australian customers.

REDUCED_CO Reduced Cost Amount used in calculating RETIREMEN

ST Basis gain/loss for Australian T
Customers.

CAPITAL_G_L Capital Gains Amount used in calculating RETIREMEN

and Loss gain/loss for Australian T
Customers.

RET_NON_CA Non-Capitalized Amount used in calculating RETIREMEN

P_AMT2 CGT amount. gain/loss for Australian T
Customers.

AM_BK_UD_C User-Defined BOOK

HAR1 character field

AM_BK_UD_C User-Defined BOOK

HAR2 character field

AM_BK_UD_D User-Defined BOOK

ATE1 date field

558 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

AM_BK_UD_N User-Defined BOOK

UM1 numeric field

AM_BK_UD_N User-Defined BOOK

UM2 numeric field

INCREASE_RA Increased Rate Used to calculate special BOOK

TE depreciation amount. You can
enter a rate and the standard
depreciation will be modified by
this percentage along all the life
of the asset. This rate is required
for Japanese calculations but can
be used for any country.

FULLY_DEPR_ Retire as Fully Used to retire assets as fully RETIREMEN

SW Depreciated depreciated. T

ACCOUNTING Accounting Supports 3 different accounting BOOK

_MTHD Method methods in Japan. In Expense
method, the standard depreciation
is modified with the special
depreciation. The accounting
entries in this method have
standard + special depreciation in
the same accounts. In Allowance
and Reserve Method, the
information must be in separate
accounts.

FUTURE_DEP Number of Number of future years of BOOK

R_YEARS Future depreciation to create when
Depreciation AM_DEPR_CALC runs. For
Years example: if value was 3 and
accounting fiscal year is 2000,
AM_DEPR_CALC will create
years: 2000, 2001 and 2002. If
left zero, AM_DEPR_CALC will
create all years of the life of the
asset.

SALVAGE_VA Salvage Value Used to populate an absolute BOOK

L amount in
COST.SALVAGE_VALUE by
Book on future transactions −
used only when default profile
switch = No

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 559
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

SALVAGE_PC Salvage Percent Used to calculate BOOK

T COST.SALVAGE_VALUE as a
percentage of the cost by asset
book on future transactions - used
only when default profile switch
= No

AUTO_RETIRE Auto-Retired Internal RETIREMEN

D_SW Fully T
Depreciated

RATE_DIV Rate Divisor Currency Conversion RETIREMEN Y

T, COST,
DEPRECIATI
ON

RATE_DIV_2 Rate Divisor Currency Conversion RETIREMEN Y

T, COST,
DEPRECIATI
ON

RATE_MULT Rate Multiplier Currency Conversion RETIREMEN Y

T, COST,
DEPRECIATI
ON

RATE_MULT_ Rate Multiplier Currency Conversion RETIREMEN Y

2 T, COST,
DEPRECIATI
ON

RT_EFFDT Rate Effective Currency Conversion RETIREMEN Y

Date T, COST,
DEPRECIATI
ON

RT_TYPE Rate Type Currency Conversion RETIREMEN Y

T, COST,
DEPRECIATI
ON

BILL_TO_CUS Customer Bill to Information. RETIREMEN Y

T_ID T

560 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

ADDRESS_SE Address Bill to Information. RETIREMEN Y

Q_NUM Sequence T
Number

SHIP_TO_CUS Ship To Ship to Information. RETIREMEN Y

T_ID Customer T

SHIP_TO_ADD Ship To Address Ship to Information. RETIREMEN Y

R_NUM Sequence Num T

SHIP_FROM_L Ship From Ship to Information. RETIREMEN Y

OC Location T

SOLD_TO_CUS Sold To Sold to Information. RETIREMEN Y

T_ID Customer T

SOLD_TO_AD Sold To Address Sold to Information. RETIREMEN Y

DR_NUM Sequence Num T

BILL_SOURCE Bill Source Billing Source. AMBI_INTF Y

_ID C_BILL

TOT_OBLIGAT Lease Total Leasing Obligation. BOOK Y

ION Obligation

TXN_CASH Transaction Cash in transaction currency. COST Y

Cash

TXN_COST Transaction Cost Cost in transaction currency. COST Y

TXN_CURREN Transaction Transaction Currency. COST Y

CY_CD Currency

TXN_CURREN Transaction Transaction Currency. COST Y

CY_CD2 Currency
Display

TXN_LIAB_AS Transaction Liab Assumed in transaction RETIREMEN Y

SUMED Liability currency. T
Assumed

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 561
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

TXN_NON_LIK FV Non Like- Non Like Kind in transaction RETIREMEN Y

E_KIND Kind currency. T

TXN_PROCEE Transaction Used to populate an amount for

DS Proceeds Billing - Asset Management
transactions.

TXN_REMOVA Transaction Removal Cost in transaction RETIREMEN Y

L_COST Removal Cost currency. T

TXN_TRADE_I Transaction Trade in value in transaction RETIREMEN Y

N_VALUE Trade-In Value currency. T

DEPR_BONUS Depreciation Depreciation Bonus Switch for BOOK Y

_SW Bonus Depreciation Calculation.

DEPR_BONUS Depreciation Depreciation Bonus Percentage BOOK Y

_PCT Bonus Percent for Depreciation Calculation.

PROCESS_INS Process Instance Internal field / Informational.

TANCE

SPECIAL_DEP Special Depreciation Calculation. BOOK Y

R_SW Depreciation

ACCELERATE Accelerated Depreciation Calculation. BOOK Y

D_TERMS Terms

INITIAL_TER Initial Terms Depreciation Calculation. BOOK Y

MS

SPECIAL_TER Special Terms Depreciation Calculation. BOOK Y

MS

YEAR_CHANG Year of Change Depreciation Calculation. BOOK Y

E

LIFE_IN_YRS Life in Years Depreciation Calculation. BOOK Y

MULTI_SHIFT Multi-Shift Code Depreciation Calculation. BOOK Y

_CODE

562 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

MULTI_SHIFT Shift Factor Depreciation Calculation. BOOK Y

_NBR Number

DEPR_LIMIT_P Depreciation Depreciation Calculation. BOOK Y

CT Limit Percent

DEPR_PASS_LI Depreciate Pass Depreciation Calculation. BOOK Y

FE_SW Life SW

DEROGATORY Derogatory Depreciation Calculation. BOOK Y

_SW Depreciation

ACCEL_DEPR Accelerated Depreciation Calculation. BOOK Y

Depreciation

INCREASE_DE Increased Depreciation Calculation. BOOK Y

PR Depreciation

INITIAL_DEPR Initial Depreciation Calculation. BOOK Y

Depreciation

SPEC_DEPR Special Depreciation Calculation. BOOK Y

Depreciation

STANDARD_D Standard Depreciation Calculation. BOOK Y

EPR Depreciation

IMPAIR_FLG Impairment Impairment Processing Switch. BOOK Y

Process

CC_FLAG Component Internal Use

Changeout
Old/New

ADJUST_CON Adjust Adjustment transaction BOOK, COST

VENTION Convention convention populated with values
from the CONV_TBL table.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 563
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

CAPVAL_VAL Capitalization Internal Use. The Capitalization

UE Value Threshold Validation process
populates this field. The value is
used by the system to validate
whether the asset still meets the
conditions to remain at the status
in which it was originally
catalogued when it was added.
Adjusting the original cost can
make an asset fall into a different
bracket and, therefore, the asset
needs to be recategorized to a
different capitalization status.

Loader Table INTFC_PHY_A

The PeopleSoft platform limits the maximum number of columns allowed in a table. Because of this
limitation, PeopleSoft created two physical interface tables. INTFC_PHY_A contains the most frequently
used physical interface fields, and INTFC_PHY_B contains the least frequently used physical interface fields.

The following table describes the information contained in Loader Table INTFC_PHY_A:

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

INTFC_ID Interface ID Key to this table. An interface Internal use Y

ID is typically assigned to a
group of transactions with the
same load type.
Use a unique, previously
unused INTFC_ID for each set
of transactions with the same
load type.
When using a load type of
CN1 and NEXT in the
ASSET_ID field, you'll need to
use a unique INTFC_ID for
each asset.
For FADs and Conversions, if
INTFC_ID is the same for
multiple lines for an asset,
increment the
INTFC_LINE_NUM for each
line.

564 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

INTFC_LINE_NU Interface Line The key to this table. Interface Internal use Y
M Number Line Number is used as a key
for multiple lines for the same
Interface ID for transactions
with similar keys (for example,
multiple acquisition details
such as CAP).
For FADs and Conversions, if
INTFC_ID is the same for
multiple lines for an asset,
increment the
INTFC_LINE_NUM for each
line.

BUSINESS_UNIT Business Unit The business unit that ASSET, Y

identifies the asset to be ASSET_ACQ
processed. This field is _DET,
required ASSET_CUS
TODIAN,
ASSET_LOC
ATION,
PARENT_AS
SET

ASSET_ID Asset The asset ID that identifies the ASSET, Y

Identification asset to be processed. This ASSET_ACQ
field is required. If this field _DET,
contains the value NEXT and ASSET_CUS
the interface type is FAD or TODIAN,
CN1, then the Transaction ASSET_LOC
Loader will assign the next ATION, and
asset ID for this business unit. many others

ASSET_TYPE Asset Type Asset classification. ASSET Y

ASSET_SUBTYP Asset Subtype Asset classification. ASSET Y

E

DTTM_STAMP Date/Time Populates the key field of Y

Stamp datetime stamp in many tables.
Represents the date and time
that this transaction was added
to the system. During
conversion,this field represents
the period through which
depreciation has been
calculated.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 565
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

VOUCHER_ID Voucher ID Identifies the voucher Internal use

associated with the financial ASSET_ACQ
transaction. This value is used _DET
in AP integration. This field
can be used for PeopleSoft or
non-PeopleSoft integrations.
This field enables INTFC_FIN
transactions to be easily
queried by voucher. This value
should be formatted if the
transaction is voucher related.

VOUCHER_LINE Voucher Line Identifies the voucher line Internal use

_NUM Number number associated with the ASSET_ACQ
financial transaction, which is _DET
used in AP integration. This
field can be used for
PeopleSoft or non-PeopleSoft
integrations.

DISTRIB_LINE_ Distribution Identifies the voucher line Internal use

NUM Line Number distribution number associated ASSET_ACQ
with the financial transaction, _DET
which is used in AP
integration. This field can be
used for PeopleSoft or non-
PeopleSoft integrations.

INTFC_TYPE Interface Type, Identifies the type of this Internal use Y

also called Load transaction. The Transaction
Type Loader will process this
transaction based on this field.
Valid values are listed in the
translate table.

MC_DEFN_ID Mass Change ID Used for internal processing. Internal use

Do not populate.

566 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

SYSTEM_SOURC System Source The source system that created ASSET_ACQ Y default CNV
E this transaction. Valid values _DET
are listed in the translate table.
This field is used extensively
by Asset Management to drill
back to source system. You
can add valid values to the
translate table for your external
systems. You can run the
Transaction Loader selectively
for specific values of system
source.

APPROVAL_SW Auto Approval Identifies whether the Internal use Y

Status transaction is approved or not.
The Transaction Loader will
only load approved
transactions. Valid values are
Y for approved and N for not
approved.

INTFC_STATUS Interface Status Used for internal processing. Internal use Y default DON
The default for this field is
DON.

LOAD_STATUS Load Status Identifies the status of this Internal use Y default NEW
transaction. Valid values are
'NEW' (not processed), 'ERR'
(an error exists on this
transaction and it will not be
processed), 'DON' (the
transaction was successfully
processed), CON (the
transaction was consolidated
into a different transaction and
it will not be loaded), UNI (the
transaction was unitized into a
different transaction and it will
not be loaded).

ORIG_INTFC_ID Original Used for internal processing. Internal use

Interface ID Do not populate.

ORIG_LINE_NU Original Used for internal processing. Internal use

M Interface Line Do not populate.
Number

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 567
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

DEFAULT_PROF Default Books Identifies whether a profile Internal use Y (Set = N for
ILE_SW from Profile will be used for an asset add by CN1)
the Transaction Loader. When
this switch is set to 'Y,' the
BOOK table will be populated
by default from the profile
tables rather than the load
tables (INTFC...). The category
in the cost table will also be
populated by default from the
profile tables. The profile_ID
is identified in the
INTFC_PHY_A table.
When performing a CN1, you
must set the
DEFAULT_PROFILE_SW to
'N'.
The value of
DEFAULT_PROFILE_SW in
INTFC_FIN must match the
value of
DEFAULT_PROFILE_SW in
INTFC_PHY_A.

TRANS_IN_OUT Transaction Identifies which side of a Internal use

In/Out transfer or recategorization this
transaction represents. Every
such transaction contains two
transactions. The outside of the
transaction adjusts the asset
being transferred or
recategorized from. The inside
of the transaction adjusts the
asset being
transferred/recategorized to.

PARENT_ID Parent Asset ID Identifies the parent of this ASSET,

asset. You can build PARENT_AS
Parent/Child relationships SET
using the Parent ID. A parent
can be an existing asset (the
parent ID is the asset ID of
another asset) or a virtual asset
(the parent ID is not an actual
asset ID). The parent ID should
always be a valid entry in the
record Parent_Asset. If an
entry does not exist in
Parent_Asset for the parent ID,
then the Transaction Loader
will create one.

568 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

PARENT_DESCR Parent Asset Describes the parent asset that PARENT_AS

Description will be entered on the table SET
parent_asset if an entry does
not exist.

PARENT_DESCR Parent Asset Indicates the long description PARENT_AS

LONG50 Long of the parent asset that will be SET
Description entered on the table
parent_asset if an entry does
not exist.

COMPONENT_O Component of Establishes the Asset ASSET Y

F_ID Asset Components structure.

ASSET_ASSIGNE Asset Assigned ASSET Y

D_TO To

TAGGABLE_SW Taggable Asset Indicates whether the asset is ASSET

Switch taggable or not. Valid values
are Y or N. A tag is the
physical tag that is affixed to
an asset.

TAG_NUMBER Tag Number The tag number that is ASSET

assigned to this asset.

DESCR Description Provides a 30-character ASSET

description of the asset.

DESCRSHORT Short Provides a 10–character (short) ASSET

Description description of the asset..

ASSET_STATUS Asset Status Indicates the status of the asset. ASSET Y default to I (in
The valid values are in the service)
translate table. This field is
generally for information
purposes only. No accounting
events are tied to this status.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 569
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

FINANCIAL_ASS Capitalized Identifies whether this asset ASSET Y

ET_SW Asset has been capitalized. Valid
values are 'Y' for yes and 'N'
for no. If an asset has not been
capitalized, the asset can have
no financial information or
transactions, such as BOOK,
COST, DEPRECIATION,
RETIREMENT,
OPEN_TRANS, and so on.
However, it can have
acquisition detail information
(ASSET_ACQ_DET). Since
acquisition detail is not tied to
accounting events—it is an
audit trail—you can store as
much expense information as
you like.

REPLACE_SW Replacement Identifies whether this is a ASSET

Asset replacement asset.

REPLACE_ASSE Replaced Asset If this is a replacement asset, ASSET

T_ID ID identifies the Asset ID of the
asset that was replaced.

CONVERSION_I Old Asset ID Identifies the ID in an old ASSET

D system for this asset. We
recommend that you do not try
to convert your Asset IDs from
your old system to Asset
Management. Since Asset ID is
only an internal key to this
system, you should let Asset
Management assign Asset IDs
to your assets. Then, you can
store the ID from the old
system in this field.

NEW_ASSET_SW New Asset Indicates if this asset was ASSET Y

acquired new. Valid values are
'Y' or 'N'.

570 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

AVAIL_SW Asset is Indicates if this asset is ASSET Y

Available available for resale. Valid
values are 'Y' or 'N'. When
marked 'Y this field can be
queried to identify assets that
are not being used by their
custodians and are available
for resale or internal transfer.
A PS/Query is shipped with
Asset Management as an
example.

AVAIL_CONTAC Availability Indicates who should be ASSET

T Contact contacted if the asset is
available and if someone is
interested in it.

AVAIL_PHONE Availability Indicates the phone number of ASSET

Phone the Availability Contact.

ACQUISITION_C Acquisition Identifies how this asset was ASSET

D Code acquired. The valid values are
in the translate table.

ACQUISITION_D Acquisition Date Identifies the acquisition date ASSET Y

T of this asset. This field is
memo-only and is not used for
any calculations.

FINANCING_CD Financing Code Identifies the user-defined ASSET

financing code. Should be a
valid value in the
FINANCE_CD_TBL.

ASSET_DTTM_S Asset Date/Time Used for internal processing. Internal use

TAMP Stamp Do not populate.

PROFILE_ID Asset Profile ID Identifies the profile to be used ASSET Y

for providing default book
information for an asset add.
This field is only used if the
INTFC_FIN.DEFAULT_PRO
FILE_SW = 'Y'. When that
field is set to Y, then Profile ID
must be populated with a valid,
effective-dated Profile ID in
the PROFILE_DET_TBL.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 571
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

ASSET_CLASS Asset Class Identifies the asset class of this ASSET

asset. This field is another way
to categorize your assets. This
field must be a valid value in
the ASSET_CLASS_TBL,
which is maintained in the
Establish Asset Processing
menu online.

CAP_NUM Capital Combined with ASSET

Acquisition Plan CAP_SEQUENCE, this field
Number identifies the Capital
Acquisition Planning (C.A.P.)
with which this asset is
associated. C.A.P. is a way of
specifying asset budgets or
appropriations.

MFG_ID Manufacturer ID Identifies the Manufacturer ID ASSET Y

of the asset.

MANUFACTURE Manufacturer Identifies the manufacturer of ASSET

R Name the asset.

MODEL Model Identifies the model of the ASSET

asset.

PROD_VERSION Product Version Identifies the product version ASSET

of the asset.

SERIAL_ID Serial ID Identifies the serial number of ASSET

the asset.

PRODUCTION_D Production Date Identifies the production date ASSET

T of the asset.

PLANT Manufacturing Identifies the plant that ASSET

Plant manufactured the asset.

MANUFACTUR_ Manufacturing Identifies the contact at the ASSET

CONTACT Contact plant that manufactured the
asset.

572 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

CAP_SEQUENCE C.A.P. Sequence Combined with CAP_NUM, ASSET

this field identifies the C.A.P.
with which this asset is
associated. C.A.P. is a way of
specifying asset budgets or
appropriations.

REPLACEMENT_ Replacement Identifies the estimated ASSET

COST Cost replacement cost of the asset.
This field can be processed by
the Indexing feature in Asset
Management.
The indexing feature only
updates replacement cost. It
does not populate this field
initially.

LEASE_ASSET_I Lease Asset ID For a noncapitalized asset that ASSET

D is associated with a lease,
indicates the Asset ID of that
lease. This field must identify a
capitalized asset ID with an
acquisition code of leased.

BUSINESS_UNIT Joint Venture Identifies the parent JV Used

_JV Business Unit business unit if the asset is part internally
of a joint venture.

INDEX_NAME Index Name Identifies which index to use in ASSET

revaluing asset cost.

INDEX_DETAIL_ Index Detail Same as INDEX_NAME. ASSET

NAME Name

LAST_INDEX_V Last Index Value Identifies the last index value ASSET Y
ALUE used to revalue assets, such as
the Consumer Price Index.

COMPOSITE_SW Composite Asset Indicates whether the asset is a ASSET

composite asset. Although
similar to parent/child assets,
composite assets are not virtual
assets. A composite asset exists
as a standard asset record
within the Asset Management
system.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 573
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

COMPOSITE_ID Composite Asset If applicable, enter the Asset ASSET

ID ID of the composite asset that
is associated with this asset
record.

FERC_CD FERC Code Identifies the FERC code ASSET

associated with this asset. The
valid values must be set up on
the FERC Code table before
implementation. PeopleSoft
ships a 'MODEL' set of FERC
codes with the system that can
be shared by your business
units.

SEQUENCE_NBR Sequence Sequences the acquisition ASSET_ACQ

_6 detail table. This field must be _DET
incremented for each
acquisition detail row for an
asset. The Transaction Loader
does not increment this field,
its value must be assigned
correctly in the
INTFC_PHY_A table.
Therefore, the feeder system
must set this field. For the
Payables and Purchasing
interface, this field is set by
AMPS1000.

ACQUISITION_D DESCR field for Describes the acquisition detail ASSET_ACQ

ESCR ACQ_DETAIL for this transaction. _DET

CAPITALIZATIO Capitalized Identifies whether this ASSET_ACQ

N_SW particular transaction should be _DET
capitalized. Valid values are in
the translate table.
This value must be set to 1, 2,
3, or 4 in order for acquisition
detail records to be inserted.

BUSINESS_UNIT AP Business Identifies the business unit ASSET_ACQ

_AP Unit from Accounts Payable that _DET
generated this transactions.

TXN_CURRENC Transaction Identifies the transaction ASSET_ACQ Y

Y_CD Currency Currency Code _DET

574 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

CURRENCY_CD Currency Code Represents the currency of the ASSET_ACQ Y

transaction. _DET

RATE_DIV Rate Divisor Identifies the currency ASSET_ACQ Y

conversion rate divisor. _DET

RATE_MULT Rate Multiplier Identifies the currency ASSET_ACQ Y

conversion rate multiplier. _DET

RT_TYPE Rate Type Identifies the currency ASSET_ACQ Y

conversion rate type. _DET

BUSINESS_UNIT PO Business Identifies the business unit ASSET_ACQ

_PO Unit from Purchasing that is _DET
associated with this
transaction.

PO_ID Purchase Order Identifies the PO number from ASSET_ACQ

Number Purchasing that is associated _DET
with this transaction.

PO_LINE_NBR Purchase Order Identifies the PO line number ASSET_ACQ

Line Number from Purchasing that is _DET
associated with this
transaction.

SCHED_NBR Schedule Identifies the schedule number ASSET_ACQ

Number from Purchasing that is _DET
associated with this
transaction.

PO_DIST_LINE_ PO Distribution Identifies the distribution line ASSET_ACQ

NUM Line Number number from Purchasing that is _DET
associated with this
transaction.

REFERENCE_ID Reference Identifies a general reference ASSET_ACQ

Number number associated with the _DET
acquisition of this asset.

INVOICE_DT Invoice Date Represents the date of the ASSET_ACQ

invoice associated with this _DET
transaction.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 575
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

VENDOR_ID Vendor ID Identifies the vendor ID from ASSET_ACQ

Accounts Payable or _DET
Purchasing that is associated
with this transaction.

VENDOR_NAME Vendor Name Identifies the name of the ASSET_ACQ

vendor associated with this _DET
transaction. This field is used
only when an external
purchasing or payable system
is used.

INVOICE_ID Invoice Number Identifies the invoice number ASSET_ACQ

of the invoice associated with _DET
this transaction.

TXN_AMOUNT Transaction Identifies the amount in the ASSET_ACQ

Amount transaction currency. _DET

AMOUNT Amount Identifies the amount of this ASSET_ACQ

transaction. This amount will _DET
be capitalized if capitalization
is requested. The Transaction
Loader does not use this field
for inserting cost. It uses the
amount field on Acq Detail.
The AMOUNT field should
match the COST field on
INTFC_FIN.

QUANTITY Quantity Identifies the quantity of this ASSET_ACQ

transaction. This quantity will _DET
be capitalized if capitalization
was requested. The
Transaction Loader does not
use this field for inserting cost.
It uses the quantity field on
Acq Detail. The QUANTITY
field should match the
QUANTITY field on
INTFC_FIN.

SALETX_AMT Sales Tax Identifies the amount of sales ASSET_ACQ

Distribution tax associated with this _DET
Amount transaction.

576 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

SALETX_AMT_B Base Sales Tax Identifies the Sale Tax Amount ASSET_ACQ
SE Amount in the transaction currency _DET

SALETX_CD Sales Tax Code Identifies the code representing ASSET_ACQ

the sales taxing authority _DET
associated with this
transaction.

USETAX_AMT Use Tax Identifies the amount of use tax ASSET_ACQ

Distribution associated with this _DET
Amount transaction.

USETAX_AMT_B Base Use Tax Identifies the Use Tax Amount ASSET_ACQ
SE Amount in the transaction currency. _DET

USETAX_CD Use Tax Code Identifies the code that ASSET_ACQ

represents the use taxing _DET
authority associated with this
transaction.

FREIGHT_AMT Freight Amount Identifies the amount of freight ASSET_ACQ

associated with this _DET
transaction.

FREIGHT_AMT_ Base Freight Identifies the Freight Amount ASSET_ACQ

BSE Amount in the transaction currency. _DET

BUSINESS_UNIT Business Unit Identifies the Purchasing ASSET_ACQ

_RECV Receive receiving business unit with _DET
which this transaction is
associated.

RECEIVER_ID Receiver ID Identifies the Purchasing ASSET_ACQ

receiving receiver ID with _DET
which this transaction is
associated with.

RECV_LN_NBR Receiver Line Identifies the Purchasing ASSET_ACQ

Number receiving line number with _DET
which this transaction is
associated.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 577
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

RECV_SHIP_SEQ Receiver Identifies the Purchasing ASSET_ACQ

_NBR Shipping receiving shipping sequence _DET
Sequence number with which this
Number transaction is associated.

RECV_DIST_LIN Receiver Identifies the Purchasing ASSET_ACQ

E_NUM Distribution receiving distribution line _DET
Line Number number with which this
transaction is associated.

DISTRIB_SEQ_N Distribution Identifies the Purchasing ASSET_ACQ

UM Sequence receiving distribution sequence _DET
Number number with which this
transaction is associated.

INV_ITEM_ID Inventory Item Identifies the inventory item ASSET_ACQ

ID ID with which this transaction _DET
is associated.

OPERATING_UN Operating Unit Identifies the operating unit ASSET_ACQ

IT (ChartField) associated with _DET
this transaction. This field
should be the same as the
corresponding ChartField in
the INTFC_FIN table. See the
online ChartField
customization topic for further
discussion.

DEPTID Department Identifies the department ASSET_ACQ

(ChartField) associated with _DET
this transaction. This field
should be the same as the
corresponding ChartField on
the INTFC_FIN table.

PRODUCT Product Identifies the product ASSET_ACQ

(ChartField) associated with _DET
this transaction This field
should be the same as the
corresponding ChartField on
the INTFC_FIN table.

FUND_CODE Fund Code Identifies a customizable ASSET_ACQ Y

ChartField. See the online _DET
ChartField customization topic
for further discussion.

578 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

CLASS_FLD Class Field Identifies a customizable ASSET_ACQ Y

ChartField. See the online _DET
ChartField customization topic
for further discussion.

PROGRAM_COD Program Code Identifies a customizable ASSET_ACQ Y

E ChartField. See the online _DET
ChartField customization topic
for further discussion.

BUDGET_REF Budget Identifies a customizable ASSET_ACQ Y

Reference ChartField. See the online _DET
ChartField customization topic
for further discussion.

AFFILIATE Affiliate Identifies a customizable ASSET_ACQ Y

ChartField. See the online _DET
ChartField customization topic
for further discussion.

AFFILIATE_INT Fund Affiliate Identifies a customizable ASSET_ACQ Y

RA1 ChartField. See the online _DET
ChartField customization topic
for further discussion.

AFFILIATE_INT Operating Unit Identifies a customizable ASSET_ACQ Y

RA2 Affiliate ChartField. See the online _DET
ChartField customization topic
for further discussion.

CHARTFIELD1 ChartField 1 Identifies a customizable ASSET_ACQ Y

ChartField. See the online _DET
ChartField customization topic
for further discussion.

CHARTFIELD2 ChartField 2 Identifies a customizable ASSET_ACQ Y

ChartField. See the online _DET
ChartField customization topic
for further discussion.

CHARTFIELD3 ChartField 3 Identifies a customizable ASSET_ACQ Y

ChartField. See the online _DET
ChartField customization topic
for further discussion.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 579
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

PROJECT_ID Project ID Identifies the project ASSET_ACQ

(ChartField) associated with _DET
this transaction This field
should be the same as the
corresponding ChartField on
the INTFC_FIN table.

CATEGORY Asset Category Identifies the category ASSET_ACQ Y

associated with this _DET
transaction. This field should
be the same as the category on
the INTFC_FIN table.

COST_TYPE Cost Type Identifies the cost type ASSET_ACQ

associated with this _DET
transaction. This field should
be the same as the cost type on
the INTFC_FIN table.

BUSINESS_UNIT Projects Identifies the business unit in ASSET_ACQ

_PC Business Unit Projects that generated this _DET
asset transaction. This value
can also come from the
Purchasing/Payables
integration.

MASTER_PROJE Master Project Identifies the master project in ASSET_ACQ

CT Projects that generated this _DET
asset transaction.

ACTIVITY_ID Activity ID Identifies the activity ID in ASSET_ACQ

Projects that generated this _DET
asset transaction. This value
can also come from the
Purchasing/Payables
integration.

RESOURCE_TYP Resource Type Identifies the resource type in ASSET_ACQ

E Projects that generated this _DET
asset transaction. This value
can also come from the
Purchasing/Payables
integration.

RESOURCE_SUB Resource Identifies the resource ASSET_ACQ

_CAT subcategory subcategory from Projects, _DET
Purchasing or Payables.

580 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

ANALYSIS_TYP Resource Identifies the resource analysis ASSET_ACQ

E Analysis type type in Projects that generated _DET
this asset transaction. This
value can also come from the
Purchasing/Payables
integration.

RESOURCE_CAT Resource Identifies the resource category ASSET_ACQ

EGORY category in Projects that generated this _DET
asset transaction. This value
can also come from the
Purchasing/Payables
integration.

CUSTODIAN_EF Asset Custodian Identifies the date the ASSET_CUS Y

FDT Effective Date custodian of this asset became TODIAN
effective. If the transaction is
an add, the date should be the
same as the trans_dt. This field
must be formatted with a valid
date on an add transaction,
whether or not the custodian is
known. The Transaction
Loader uses this value when
inserting custodian entries. If it
is null, no custodian entry is
loaded.

EFFSEQ Effective Identifies the sequence number ASSET_CUS

Sequence of the custodian. This value TODIAN
will be zero unless the asset
has had more than one
custodian for a given effective
date.

CUSTODIAN Custodian Identifies the name of the ASSET_CUS

custodian of this asset. TODIAN

EMPLID Asset Custodian Identifies the employee ID of ASSET_CUS

Employee ID the custodian of this asset. TODIAN

CUSTODIAN_DE Asset Custodian Identifies the department of the ASSET_CUS

PTID Department custodian of this asset. TODIAN

CUSTODIAN_PR Asset Custodian Identifies the project associated ASSET_CUS

OJECT Project with the custodian of this asset. TODIAN

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 581
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

OFFSITE_SW This Asset is Is this asset offsite? Valid ASSET_CUS

Offsite values are 'Y' or 'N'. TODIAN

AUTH_STATUS Authorization The status of the authorization ASSET_CUS

Status for this asset to be assigned to TODIAN
this custodian.

AUTHORIZATIO Authorization The name of the person will ASSET_CUS

N_NAME Name has authorized this asset to be TODIAN
assigned to this custodian.

AUTHORIZATIO Authorization The date of the authorization ASSET_CUS

N_DT Date for this asset to be assigned to TODIAN
this custodian.

LOCATION_EFF Location The date the location of this ASSET_LOC Y

DT Effective Date asset became effective. If the ATION
transaction is an add, the date
should be the same as the
trans_dt. This field must be
formatted with a valid date on
an add transaction, whether or
not the location is known.
Transaction loader uses this
when inserting location entries.
If it is null, a location entry is
not loaded.

LOCATION_EFF Location The sequence number of the ASSET_LOC

SEQ Effective location. This will be zero ATION
Sequence unless the asset has been in
more than one location for a
given effective date.

LOCATION Location The location of this asset. PI_ASSET_H

Should be a valid value on the IST
LOCATION_TBL.

PI_ID Physical Used for internal processing. ASSET_LOC

Inventory ID Do not populate. The physical ATION
inventory ID that was entered
when defining physical
inventory is used here.

INVENTORY_DT Last Inventory The last date that this asset was PI_ASSET_H
Date inventoried at this location. IST

582 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

PERFORMED_B Performed By The name of the person who PI_ASSET_H

Y performed the last inventory. IST

DOCUMENT_ID Document A reference document ID ASSET_LOC

associated with this asset. ATION

LOC_AUTH_STA Location The authorization status for ASSET_LOC

TUS Authorization this asset at this location. ATION
Status

LOC_AUTH_NA Location The name of the person who ASSET_LOC

ME Authorization authorized this asset to be at ATION
Name this location.

LOC_AUTH_DT Location The date the authorization was ASSET_LOC

Authorization given for this asset to be at this ATION
Date location.

REPLACE_COST Replacement Same as INDEX_NAME. ASSET

_DT Cost Date

GROUP_ASSET_ Group Asset Used for Group Asset ASSET

FLAG Flag Processing.

GROUP_ASSET_I Group Asset ID Used to identify which group BOOK,

D asset group members report to. COST,
DEPRECIATI
ON,
OPEN_TRAN
S

RD_PLANT_ASS R&D Plant Flag to indicate this asset is ASSET

ET Asset used for R&D.

RD_START_DAT R&D Start Date Date asset became used for ASSET
E R&D.

RD_USE_NBV Use NBV for Use net book value in gain/loss ASSET
R&D calculations for R&D assets.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 583
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

INCENTIVE_ID Incentive ID An incentive ID, as would be ASSET_ACQ

assigned to a grant. Assigned _DET
in Projects and sent to Asset
Management.

IP_ADDRESS IP Address The Internet Protocol address ASSET

of an asset, such as a computer
or printer. Can be uploaded
from Tangram's Asset Insight
during Physical Inventory.

IP_ALIAS IP Alias May be used to capture the ASSET

name of a user associated with
an asset, since IP addresses
may be dynamic. Can be
uploaded from Tangram's
Asset Insight during Physical
Inventory.

MERCH_AMT_B Merchandise Used in Payables/Assets ASSET_ACQ

SE amount integration. _DET

VAT_INV_AMT VAT Invoice Vat Invoice in Transaction ASSET_ACQ Y

Amount Currency. _DET

VAT_INV_AMT_ VAT invoice Used in Payables/Assets ASSET_ACQ

BSE amount integration. _DET

VAT_NRCVR_A VAT Non Vat Non Recoverable in ASSET_ACQ Y

MT Recoverable Transaction Currency. _DET
Amount

VAT_NRCVR_A VAT Used in Payables/Assets ASSET_ACQ

MT_BSE Nonrecoverable integration. _DET
amount

VAT_RCVRY_A VAT Recovery Vat Recoverable in ASSET_ACQ Y

MT Amt Transaction Currency. _DET

VAT_RCVRY_A VAT recovery Used in Payables/Assets ASSET_ACQ

MT_BSE amount integration. _DET

MISC_AMT Misc Charge Miscellaneous Charges in ASSET_ACQ Y

Amount transaction Currency. _DET

584 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

MISC_AMT_BSE Base Misc. Used in Payables/Assets ASSET_ACQ Y

Amount integration. _DET

AM_AST_UD_CH User-defined ASSET

AR1 Asset character
field

AM_AST_UD_CH User-defined ASSET

AR2 Asset character
field

AM_AST_UD_D User-defined ASSET

ATE1 Asset date field

AM_AST_UD_N User-defined ASSET

UM1 Asset numeric
field

AM_AST_UD_N User-defined ASSET

UM2 Asset numeric
field

PROCESS_INSTA Process Instance Internal

NCE

MERCHANDISE_ Merchandise Merchandise Amount in ASSET_ACQ Y

AMT Amt Transaction Currency. _DET

SKU Stock Keeping Used to identify IT Software ASSET

Unit

UPC_ID Uniform Product Used to identify IT Software ASSET

Code ID

VIN VIN Vehicle Identification Number ASSET

ASSET_RESOUR Asset Resource Used by Maintenance ASSET

CE_SW Switch Management. Indicates if
Asset is "used as a tool".

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 585
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

ALLOW_OVERB Allow Used by Maintenance ASSET

OOK_SW Overbooking Management to check if an
asset can be double booked for
scheduling. MM passes this to
RM for Scheduling

CHARGE_BACK Charge Back Used by Maintenance ASSET

_SW Switch Management. Allow
chargebacks - this is one of the
default levels for chargebacks

SCHEDULABLE_ Schedulable Used by Maintenance ASSET

SW Switch Management. Asset to be used
in WO is able to be scheduled
for maintenance.

EPL_TMPL_ID Parts List Used by Maintenance ASSET

Template Management. Equipment and
Parts list.

REPAIRABLE_FL Repairable Flag Used by Maintenance ASSET

G Management. Asset is
repairable.

REPAIR_STATUS Repair Status Used by Maintenance ASSET

Management. Field values are:
None, Needs Repair, In Repair.

BUSINESS_UNIT Business Unit Used by Maintenance ASSET

_WO Management. The Business
Unit of the Work Order where
this asset could be used.

SHOP_ID Shop Used by Maintenance ASSET

Management. hop/Location
where the work order tasks are
to be done. The shop for which
this asset is used.

UNOWNED_FLG Non-Owned Used by Maintenance ASSET

Asset Management. Asset not owned
by the organization

586 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

WO_LOCATION_ Work Order Used by Maintenance ASSET

FLG Location Management. This field is used
to determine what Location
appears by default in the Work
Location field on the Work
Order Task. It contains three
values: 'Asset' provides the
Asset Location specified in the
Asset definition; 'Shop'
providesthe Shops Location,
and 'Other' leaves the Work
Location blank for user entry.

OFFLINE_FLG Asset Offline Used by Maintenance ASSET

Management. An indicator to
indicate whether it needs to be
taken offline for maintenance.

ASSET_CRITICA Asset Criticality Used by Maintenance ASSET

LITY Management. Indicator of how
critical the asset is to help
managers identify the priority
of maintenance.

CREW_ID Crew Used by Maintenance ASSET

Management to represent the
Crew definition associated
with the asset.

AVAIL_FOR_US Available For Used by Maintenance ASSET

E Use Management. Asset is
available to be used by a Work
Order request.

PROPERTY_ID Property I Used by Real Estate ASSET_PRO

Management. Identifier for an PERTY
asset property

PROPERTY_DES Property Used by Real Estate ASSET_PRO

CR Description Management. Description of PERTY
asset property

PROPERTY_NM Property Name Used by Real Estate ASSET_PRO

Management. Name of the PERTY
asset property.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 587
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

PROPERTY_CLA Property Class Used by Real Estate ASSET_PRO

SS Management. Indicator that the PERTY
property is a SITE,
BUILDING, FLOOR, AREA,
or SPACE.

PROPERTY_SUB Property Used by Real Estate ASSET_PRO

CLASS Subclass Management. Subcategory of PERTY
Property Class.

PARENT_PROPE Parent Property Used by Real Estate ASSET_PRO

RTY_ID ID Management. Parent Asset of PERTY
the property.

SITE_PROPERTY Site ID Used by Real Estate ASSET_PRO

_ID Management. Property ID of PERTY
the SITE for the property
hierarchy of the asset.

BLDG_PROPERT Building ID Used by Real Estate ASSET_PRO

Y_ID Management. Property ID of PERTY
the SITE for the property
hierarchy of the asset.

FLOOR_PROPER Floor ID Used by Real Estate ASSET_PRO

TY_ID Management. Property ID of PERTY
the BUILDING for the asset
property hierarchy.

AREA_PROPERT Area ID Used by Real Estate ASSET_PRO

Y_ID Management. Property ID of PERTY
the BUILDING for the asset
property hierarchy.

SPACE_PROPER Space ID Used by Real Estate ASSET_PRO

TY_ID Management. Property ID of PERTY
the AREA for the property
hierarchy of the asset.

PARCEL_NUMB Parcel Number Used by Real Estate ASSET_PRO

ER Management. Property ID of PERTY
the SPACE for the property
hierarchy of the asset.

588 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

LOT Lot Number Used by Real Estate ASSET_PRO

Management. Used to record PERTY
legal description from
surveyors when recorded in
Lots and Blocks.

BLOCK Block Number Used by Real Estate ASSET_PRO

Management. Used to record PERTY
legal description from
surveyors when recorded in
Lots and Blocks.

TOTAL_AREA Total Area Used by Real Estate ASSET_PRO

Management. Total PERTY
measurement of the asset in
square feet or square meters for
the asset.

SPACE_UOM Space Unit of Used by Real Estate ASSET_PRO

Measure Management. Used in PERTY
conjunction with Total Area.
Indicates square feet and
square meters.

CURRENT_OCC Current Used by Real Estate ASSET_PRO

UPANCY Occupancy Management. Number of PERTY
people currently occupying the
asset property.

MAX_OCCUPAN Maximum Used by Real Estate ASSET_PRO

CY Occupancy Management. Maximum PERTY
number of people who can be
assigned to the asset property.

OCCUPANCY_ST Occupancy Used by Real Estate ASSET_PRO

ATUS Status Management. Indicates PERTY
whether the asset is occupied
or unoccupied.

OWNERSHIP_ST Ownership Used by Real Estate ASSET_PRO

ATUS Status Management. Indicates PERTY
whether the asset is owned or
leased.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 589
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

LEGAL_DESCR Legal Used by Real Estate ASSET_PRO

Description Management. Legal PERTY
description of asset property
using metes and bounds.

IT_UD_CHAR1 IT User Defined ITAM user-defined fields ASSET

Char Field 1

IT_UD_CHAR2 IT User Defined ITAM user-defined fields ASSET

Char Field 2

IT_UD_DATE1 IT User Defined ITAM user-defined fields ASSET

Date Field

IN_SERVICE_DT In Service Date Used to determine if the asset ASSET

is still under warranty.

REGION_CD Region Code Used by Real Estate

Management for Space
Utilization metrics. Prompt
allows for values for RPT
Region Types.

CC_FLAG Component Internal

Changeout
Old/New

DESCR_LONG Description Long description for ASSET

informational purposes.

AREA_ID Area ID Detailed asset location ASSET,

information used to identify LOCATION
areas.

LINEAR_ASSET_ Linear Asset Identifies linear assets and ASSET

SW facilitates potential third-party
integrations.

NBR_OF_CPU Number of Used by ITAM. Identifies the ASSET

CPU's number of CPUs in servers and
desktop computers. A separate
software license is needed for
each CPU.

590 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

CAP_THRSHLD_ Capitalization Used by Asset Management to ASSET,

ID Threshold ID automatically capitalize assets PROFILE_TB
based upon user-defined L
capitalization thresholds.

IN_PHY_USE In Physical Use This flag is used by ITAM to ASSET

process nonfinancial IT assets
through the comparison
process between discovery and
asset repository. This
designation is available via the
Basic Add page and the Define
Asset Operational Info page.

CAPVAL_VALU Capitalization This value is used to validate

E Value whether the asset still meets
the conditions to remain in the
status at which it was
originally catalogued when it
was added. Adjustment to the
original cost can make an asset
fall into a different bracket
and, therefore, the asset needs
to be recategorized to a
different capitalization status.

VAT_SETID Value Added VAT SetID

Tax SetID

VAT_USE_ID Value Added VAT Use Type can be used to

Tax Use ID specify the ratio of taxable
activity to nontaxable activity.
The system uses the VAT Use
Type and the VAT
Apportionment to store the
temporary recoverable VAT at
purchase time.

BUSINESS_UNIT VAT business VAT business unit

_VAT unit

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 591
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

CHARTFIELD_P ChartField VAT mixed apportionment is a

R1_VAL Priority 1 Value mechanism that enables VAT
recoverability to be determined
based on either the VAT
apportionment control business
unit or one of the two priority
ChartFields that you specify on
the VAT Apportionment page
and to which a transaction is
posted. For each business unit,
Priority 1 or Priority 2
ChartField value, you enter the
percentage of activity that is
taxable or exempt.

CHARTFIELD_P ChartField VAT mixed apportionment is a

R2_VAL Priority 2 Value mechanism that enables
recoverability to be determined
based on either the VAT
apportionment control business
unit or one of the two priority
ChartFields you specify on the
VAT Apportionment page and
to which a transaction is
posted. For each business unit,
Priority 1 or Priority 2
ChartField value, you enter the
percentage of activity that is
taxable or exempt.

VAT_RECOVER VAT Coefficient This coefficient is used to

Y_PCT of calculate yearly adjustments or
Recoverability global adjustments for assets; it
is made up of the product of
reference coefficient of
constraint, coefficient of
taxation, and coefficient of
admission. Those reference
coefficients are the ones used
to calculate the recoverable
VAT amount at invoice time or
import time. They can be
modified over time based on
well-identified events
justifying reconsideration of
status.

592 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

VAT_CONSTRAI VAT Coefficient This coefficient is the first

NT_PCT of Constraint component of the
Recoverability formula made
of the product the Coefficient
of Constraint, Coefficient of
Taxation, and Coefficient of
Admission. This coefficient
measures the proportion of a
good or service use for purpose
of taxable operations.

VAT_TAXATION VAT Coefficient This coefficient is the second

_PCT of Taxation component of the
Recoverability formula made
of the product the Coefficient
of Constraint, Coefficient of
Taxation, and coefficient of
Admission. This coefficient
translates the fact that only
VAT putting a strain on a good
or service allows in turn to
determine the recoverable
VAT amount related to this
good or service.

VAT_ADMISSIO VAT Coefficient This coefficient is the last

N_ PCT of Admission component of the
Recoverability formula made
of the product the Coefficient
of Constraint, Coefficient of
Taxation, and coefficient of
Admission. This coefficient of
Admission takes into account
the existence of exclusions or
restrictions to the deductions of
VAT. Restrictions and
exclusions are set by tax
authorities.

TAX_CD_VAT VAT Code VAT Code

Loader Table INTFC_PHY_B

When used, INTFC_PHY_B fields are most commonly loaded at conversion. They are not currently
interfaced from Purchasing, Payables, or Projects, but they could be with some customization.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 593
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Note. This table does not need to be inserted for conversion. However, if you insert any values into it, the
ones marked Y are required.

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

INTFC_ID Interface ID Key to this table. An interface ID Internal use Y

is typically assigned to a group of
transactions with the same load
type.
Use a unique, previously unused
INTFC_ID for each set of
transactions with the same load
type.
When using a load type of CN1
and NEXT in the ASSET_ID
field, use a unique INTFC_ID for
each asset.
For FADs and Conversions, if
INTFC_ID is the same for
multiple lines for an asset,
increment the
INTFC_LINE_NUM for each
line.

INTFC_LINE_ Interface Line Key to this table. Interface Line Used Internally. Y
NUM Number Number is used as a key for
multiple lines for the same
Interface ID for transactions with
similar keys (ex., multiple
acquisition details, such as CAP).
For FADs and Conversions, if
INTFC_ID is the same for
multiple lines for an asset,
increment the
INTFC_LINE_NUM for each
line.

BUSINESS_U Business Unit Identifies the business unit of the ASSET_ATTRI Y

NIT transaction to be processed. This BUTE,
field is required. ASSET_COM
MENTS,
ASSET_LICEN
SE,
ASSET_WARR
ANTY

594 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

ASSET_ID Asset ID Identifies the asset ID of the ASSET_ATTRI Y

transaction to be processed. This BUTE,
field is required. If this field ASSET_COM
contains the value NEXT and the MENTS,
interface type is FAD, then ASSET_LICEN
Transaction Loader will assign the SE,
next asset ID for this business ASSET_WARR
unit. ANTY

INTFC_TYPE Interface Type, Identifies the type of this Internal use Y

also called Load transaction. Transaction Loader
Type will process this transaction based
on this field. Valid values are
listed in the translate table.

SYSTEM_SOU System Source The source system that created Internal use Y
RCE this transaction. Valid values are
listed in the translate table. This
field is used extensively by Asset
Management to drill back to
source system. You can add valid
values to the translate table for
your external systems. You can
run Transaction Loader
selectively for specific values of
system source.

MC_DEFN_ID Mass Change Used for internal processing. Do Internal use

ID not populate.

APPROVAL_S Auto Approval Identifies whether or not the Internal use Y

W Status transaction is approved.
Transaction Loader will only load
approved transactions. Valid
values are 'Y' for approved and 'N'
for not approved.

INTFC_STAT Interface Status Used for internal processing. Do Internal use

US not populate.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 595
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

LOAD_STATU Load Status Identifies the status of this Internal use Y enter NEW
S transaction. Valid values are
'NEW' (not processed), 'ERR' (an
error exists on this transaction and
it will not be processed), 'DON'
(the transaction w successfully
processed), 'CON' (the transaction
was consolidated into a different
transaction and it will not be
loaded), 'UNI' (the transaction
was unitized into a different
transaction and it will not be
loaded).

ATTRIBUTE_ Asset Attribute These fields relate to the ASSET_ATTRI

EFFDT Effective Date Asset_Attributes record. This BUTE
information is optional. If you do
not populate these fields, then a
row of asset attribute information
will not be created for the asset
(thus saving space). You can
populate the asset attributes for as
many (or as few) assets as you
like. If you do not plan to track
attributes (color, weight, height,
width, length, capacity, power
rating) for an asset, then do not
populate these fields for that asset.
The effective date of the attributes
of this asset. If the asset is being
added, this value should be the
same as the trans_dt.

ASSET_COLO Asset Color The color of the asset. ASSET_ATTRI

R BUTE

ASSET_WEIG Asset Weight The weight of the asset. ASSET_ATTRI

HT BUTE

WEIGHT_UM Asset Weight The unit of measure used for the ASSET_ATTRI
Unit of Measure asset weight. Should be a valid BUTE
unit of measure defined on the
units of measure table.

ASSET_HEIG Asset Height The height of the asset. ASSET_ATTRI

HT BUTE

596 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

HEIGHT_UM Asset Height The unit of measure used for the ASSET_ATTRI
Unit of Measure asset height. Should be a valid BUTE
unit of measure defined on the
units of measure table.

ASSET_WIDT Asset Width The width of the asset. ASSET_ATTRI

H BUTE

WIDTH_UM Asset Width The unit of measure used for the ASSET_ATTRI
Unit of Measure asset width. Should be a valid unit BUTE
of measure defined on the units of
measure table.

ASSET_LENG Asset Length The length of the asset. ASSET_ATTRI

TH BUTE

LENGTH_UM Asset Length The unit of measure used for the ASSET_ATTRI
Unit of Measure asset length. Should be a valid BUTE
unit of measure defined on the
units of measure table.

ASSET_CAPA Asset Capacity The capacity of the asset. ASSET_ATTRI

CITY BUTE

CAPACITY_U Asset Capacity The unit of measure used for the ASSET_ATTRI
M Unit of Measure asset capacity. Should be a valid BUTE
unit of measure defined on the
units of measure table.

POWER_RATI Asset Power The power rating of the asset. ASSET_ATTRI

NG Rating BUTE

POWER_RATI Asset Power The unit of measure used for the ASSET_ATTRI
NG_UM Rating Unit of asset power rating. Should be a BUTE
Measure valid unit of measure defined on
the units of measure table.

COMMENT_D Asset The date/time stamp of the ASSET_COM

TTM_STAMP Comments comments for this asset. This MENTS
Date/Time value is used as a key to the
Stamp Asset_Comments record.

NAME Name The name of the person who ASSET_COM

entered the comments. MENTS

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 597
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

COMMENTS5 Comments 50 The comments for the assets. This ASSET_COM

0 Characters field is long on the MENTS
Asset_Comments record, but it is
a 50-byte character field because
of database restrictions. Online,
you can enter up to 32K of
information into this field.

AGENCY_ID Agency ID These fields relate to the ASSET_LICEN

Asset_License record. This record SE
is used to track the license or
registration of an asset with a
given agency or vendor. Examples
are a vehicle registration with the
state or a software registration
with a vendor. This information is
optional. If you do not populate
these fields, then a row of asset
license information will not be
created for the asset (thus saving
space). You can populate asset
license information for as many
(or as few) assets as you like. If
you do not plan to track license
information for an asset, then do
not populate these fields for that
asset.
This field is the agency that the
asset is registered with and is
mutually exclusive of the asset
license vendor ID. This value
should be valid value on the
Agency_Tbl record.

LICENSE_VE Asset License The vendor to which the asset is ASSET_LICEN

NDOR_ID Vendor ID registered. This value is mutually SE
exclusive with the agency ID.
This value should appear in the
VNDR_FS record.

REGISTRATIO Registration The registration number for the ASSET_LICEN

N_NO Number asset. SE

INSPECTION_ Inspection Indicates if an inspection of the ASSET_LICEN

SW Required asset is required. Valid values are SE
'Y' or 'N'.

LIC_START_D License The effective date of the license ASSET_LICEN

T Effective Date or registration. SE

598 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

LIC_END_DT License The expiration date of the license ASSET_LICEN

Expiration Date or registration. SE

REGISTER_N Name The name of the person to whom ASSET_LICEN

AME the asset is registered. SE

COUNTRY Country The country in which the asset is ASSET_LICEN

registered. SE, COUNTRY

ADDRESS1 Address 1 The address line 1 under which ASSET_LICEN

the asset is registered. SE

ADDRESS2 Address 2 The address line 2 under which ASSET_LICEN

the asset is registered. SE

ADDRESS3 Address 3 The address line 3 under which ASSET_LICEN

the asset is registered. SE

ADDRESS4 Address 4 The address line 4 under which ASSET_LICEN

the asset is registered. SE

CITY City The city in which the asset is ASSET_LICEN

registered. SE

NUM1 Number 1 ASSET_LICEN

SE

NUM2 Number 2 ASSET_LICEN

SE

HOUSE_TYPE House Type The type of house, for example, ASSET_LICEN

houseboat or trailer. SE

ADDR_FIELD Address Field 1 An address field. ASSET_LICEN

1 SE

ADDR_FIELD Address Field 2 An address field. ASSET_LICEN

2 SE

ADDR_FIELD Address Field 3 An address field. ASSET_LICEN

3 SE

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 599
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

COUNTY County The county in which the asset is ASSET_LICEN

registered. SE

STATE State The state in which the asset is ASSET_LICEN

registered. SE

POSTAL Postal Code The postal code in which the asset ASSET_LICEN
is registered. SE

GEO_CODE Tax Vendor The tax vendor geographical code. ASSET_LICEN

Geographical SE
Code

IN_CITY_LIMI In City Limit Indicates if the vendor is within ASSET_LICEN

T city limit. SE

JURISDICTIO Jurisdiction Identifies the municipal authority ASSET_LICEN

N of which it is a part. SE
Can be used by property tax to
identify a taxing authority.

LICENSE_CO Asset License Comments about the license or ASSET_LICEN

MMENTS50 Comments 50 registration for the asset. SE
Characters

WARRANTY_ Warranty The following fields relate to the ASSET_WARR

EFFDT Effective Date Asset_Warranty record. This ANTY
information is optional. If you do
not populate these fields, then a
row of asset warranty information
will not be created for the asset
(thus saving space). You can
populate asset warranty
information for as many (or as
few) assets as you like. If you do
not plan to track warranty
information for an asset, then do
not populate these fields for that
asset.
This field represents the date the
warranty for this asset became
effective.

600 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Field Name Long Name Use and Processing Tables Required for
Considerations Updated Conversion

EFF_STATUS Status as of The status of the warranty as of ASSET_WARR

Effective Date the effective date. Valid values ANTY
are 'A' for active or 'I' for inactive.

WARRANTY_ Warranty The vendor ID that provided the ASSET_WARR

VENDOR_ ID Vendor ID warranty. This value should ANTY
appear in the VNDR.FS record.

WARRANTY_ Warranty The number of the warranty. ASSET_WARR

NUM Number ANTY

WARRANTY_ Warranty The duration of the warranty in ASSET_WARR

DURATION Duration months. ANTY
(Months)

COVERAGE50 Asset Warranty The comments on the coverage of ASSET_WARR

Coverage 50 the warranty. This field is a long ANTY
Characters field on the Asset_Warranty
record, but it is only 50 characters
here. Online, you can enter up to
32K of information into this field.

AM_AST_UD_ User Defined User-defined field. ASSET

CHAR1 Char Field 1

AM_AST_UD_ User Defined User-defined field. ASSET

CHAR2 Char Field 2

AM_AST_UD_ User Defined User-defined field. ASSET

DATE1 Date Field 1

AM_AST_UD_ User Defined User-defined field. ASSET

NUM1 Number Field 1

AM_AST_UD_ User Defined User-defined field. ASSET

NUM2 Number Field 2

PROCESS_INS Process Internal use.

TANCE Instance

When converting a blank character field (a character field with a null value), you should assign it a value of a
single space, regardless of the field length. For example, to convert a blank character field with a length of
five characters, you should give it a value of one space, not five spaces. This conversion is particularly
important for ChartFields.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 601
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

When converting character fields, do not add any trailing spaces to the field value. For example, the value in
Book should be CORP, notCORP .

When loading rows into any interface tables, the intfc_id, intfc_line_num, and dttm_stamp must be the same
across all used loader tables (that is, INTFC_FIN, INTFC_PHY_A).

Transaction Loader Inserts

Depending on what transaction type you are processing and which loader table it is reading, the Transaction
Loader inserts field values into various Asset Management tables and performs any additional processing
noted in the following table. It inserts all fields that the target table and the loader table have in common.

From INTFC_FIN
The following table describes the information inserted from the INTFC_FIN table:

Transaction Type (Load Type) Inserts into These Tables Additional Processing

FAD Book* Book Profile # Cost * Cost Profile #

Depreciation * Depreciation Profile # Open
Trans * Open Trans Profile #

ADD Book * Book Profile # Cost * Cost Profile

# Depreciation * Depreciation Profile #
Open Trans * Open Trans Profile #

CN1 Book * Book Profile # Cost * Cost Profile Process Conversion Open Trans
# Depreciation * Depreciation Profile # 1

CN2 Book * Book Profile # Cost * Cost Profile Process Conversion Open Trans
# Depreciation * Depreciation Profile # 1

CAP Book * Book Profile # Cost * Cost Profile

# Depreciation * Depreciation Profile #
Open Trans * Open Trans Profile #

CIC Book * Book Profile # Cost * Cost Profile Validate Distribution Templates
# Open Trans * Open Trans Profile #

AAD Cost * Cost Profile # Open Trans * Open

Trans Profile #

602 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Transaction Type (Load Type) Inserts into These Tables Additional Processing

IUI Book * Cost # Open Trans * Set Trans Type to TRF Set
Trans_In_Out to I Validate
Distribution Templates Process
IUI Asset ID

IUO Cost * Open Trans * Set Trans Type to TRF Set

Trans_In_Out to O Validate
Distribution Templates

TRF Cost (positive amount for transfer in) *

Cost (negative amount for transfer out) *
Open Trans *

ADJ Cost * Open Trans *

RCT Cost * Open Trans *

RET Cost * Retirement Open Trans * Set Asset Status to Disposed

PRT Cost * Retirement Open Trans *

REI Cost * Retirement Open Trans * Update Asset Status to In

Service

BKS Open Trans * Update Book Processing

BKD Delete Book

BSD Delete only BU/Book/Asset ID

combinations

OPT Open Trans *

ASD Deletes from all base tables Check DIST_LN

Delete Asset Processing

ADQ Cost * Cost Profile # Open Trans * Open

Trans Profile #

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 603
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Transaction Type (Load Type) Inserts into These Tables Additional Processing

ARA Book * Book Profile # Cost * Cost Profile

# Depreciation * Depreciation Profile #
Retirement * Retirement Profile #

LAD Book * Book Profile # Cost * Cost Profile

# Depreciation * Depreciation Profile #
Retirement * Retirement Profile # Open
Trans *

ADP Depreciation * Open Trans

* When Default Profile Switch = N

# When Default Profile Switch = Y and PHY_A.PROFILE_ID is valid in the profile detail table, the system
gets book, cost, depreciation, and open trans information from the profile detail table rather than INTFC_FIN.

From INTFC_PHY_A
The following table describes the information inserted from the INTFC_PHY_A table:

Transaction Type Inserts into These Tables Additional Processing

FAD Asset, Asset Acquisition Detail, Asset

Custodian, Asset Location

NAD Asset, Asset Acquisition Detail, Asset

Custodian, Asset Location

IUI Asset, Asset Acquisition Detail, Asset

Custodian, Asset Location

CN1 Asset, Asset Acquisition Detail, Asset

Custodian, Asset Location

AUP Update Asset

PHY Asset Acquisition Detail Asset Custodian

Asset Location

CAP Asset Acquisition Detail Capitalize Asset Acquisition

Detail

604 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Transaction Type Inserts into These Tables Additional Processing

ACQ Asset Acquisition Detail

ADQ Asset Acquisition Detail

CLC Asset Custodian Asset Location

LAD Asset, Asset Custodian, Asset Location

CIC Update Asset Acquisition Detail

= CIC

IHI Physical Inventory History

RAQ Asset Acquisition Detail Replace Acquisition Detail -

Used solely by AMPS1000 and
AMIF1000

ARA Asset Custodian, Asset Location, Physical

Inventory History, Parent Asset

From INTFC_PHY_B
The following table describes the information inserted from the INTFC_PHY_B table:

Transaction Type Inserts into These Tables Additional Processing

FAD Asset Attribute Asset Comments Asset

License Asset Warranty

NAD Asset Attribute Asset Comments Asset

License Asset Warranty

PHY Asset Attribute Asset Comments Asset

License Asset Warranty

CN1 Asset Attribute Asset Comments Asset

License Asset Warranty

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 605
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Transaction Type Inserts into These Tables Additional Processing

ARA Asset Attribute Asset Comments Asset

License Asset Warranty

LAD Asset Attribute Asset Comments Asset

License Asset Warranty

Interface Types (Load Types)

The following table defines Interface Types:

Interface Type Long Name Usage Tables Updated

AAD Additional Cost Add Rarely used. Adds cost Cost, Open Trans
information to an asset.
Mainly used for joint venture
and composite rollups.

ACQ Insert Acquisition Detail Inserts into Acquisition Acquisition Detail

Detail.

ADD Asset Add Asset add - Financial only. Book, Cost, Depr, Open
For details, see load type Trans
CN2.

ADJ Asset Cost Adjustment Adjusts the cost of an Cost, Open Trans
existing asset.

ADP Asset Depreciation Inserts depreciation Depreciation, Open Trans

information created by the
revaluation in mass
programs.

ADQ Adjust Cost and Adjusts the cost and Acquisition Detail, Cost,
Acquisition Detail acquisition details of an Open Trans
existing asset.

606 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Interface Type Long Name Usage Tables Updated

ARA Add Retired Asset Adds an asset that has been Book, Cost, Depr, Asset,
fully reserved and retired. and if applicable
Custodian, Asset
Location, Warranty,
Attribute, License,
Comments, and
Acquisition Detail

ASD Asset Deletion Deletes an existing asset. Asset, Acquisition Detail,

Only assets that have not Asset Fair Value,
been used to generate any Attribute, Comments,
journals will be deleted. Custodian, Location,
Maintenance, Warranty,
Book, Book Tax Credit,
Cost, Depr, Dist Line,
Open Trans, Retirement,
Lease, Lease Schedule, PI
Asset History,

AUP Asset Information Update Updates the asset table only. Asset, Component of
Rarely used, except in Asset History
physical inventory.

BKD Book Deletion Deletes a book for an asset or Book, Book Tax Credit,
business unit. For example, Depr, Dist Line,
you can use it to delete Retirement, Open Trans
dummy books used for
performing "what if"
analyses.

BKS Book Change Makes any change to an asset Book, Open Trans
book.

BSD Selective Book Delete Deletes a book from a range Book, Book Tax Credit,
of asset IDs. Similar to BKD. Depr, Dist Line,
Retirement, Open Trans

CAP Asset Capitalization Adds a line of acquisition Acquisition Detail, Book,

detail and capitalizes it. If the Cost, Open Trans
acquisition detail line is
originally uncapitalized, the
interface will insert book,
cost, and open trans as well
as acquisition detail. If it is
originally capitalized, the
book information will not be
inserted.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 607
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Interface Type Long Name Usage Tables Updated

CIC Capitalize into Composite Capitalizes composite assets. Acquisition Detail, Book,
Similar to CAP. Cost, Open Trans

CLC Custodian/Location Updates custodian/location Custodian, Location

Change information.

CN1 Conversion of First Book During conversion, converts Book, Cost, Depr, Open
the first asset book. Inserts Trans, Asset, Acquisition
into all asset tables, as well Detail, Location, PI Asset
as financial tables. History, Component of
Asset History, Parent
Asset, Attribute,
Comments, License,
Warranty

CN2 Conversion of Subsequent During conversion, converts Book, Cost, Depr,

Books any subsequent books. Component of Asset
Inserts only into financial History, Open Trans
tables.

FAD Financial and Physical Adds assets with both Book, Cost, Depr, Open
Add physical and financial Trans, Asset, Acquisition
information. This Interface Detail, Location, PI Asset
Type is used most commonly History, Component of
for adding assets. Asset History, Parent
Asset, Attribute,
Comments, License,
Warranty

IHI Physical Inventory History Inserts asset history. Used by PI Asset History
Insert the Physical Inventory SQR
(AMPI1000).

608 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Interface Type Long Name Usage Tables Updated

IUI InterUnit Transfer, In Side Provides the IN side of an Asset, Book, Cost, Asset
InterUnit Transfer. Valid Fair Value, Open Trans,
values for ACTIVITY_SW Component of Asset
are: History
1 Full Transfer 0 Active
ChartField combination –1
Reactivated ChartField
combination
For example, one ChartField
combination is fully
transferred out of a
department (ACTIVITY_SW
= 1), and an identical
ChartField combination is
transferred into the same
department (ACTIVITY_SW
= –1). The activity switch
values for the two
transactions then cancel each
other, resulting in an active
ChartField combination
(ACTIVITY_SW = 0).

IUO InterUnit Transfer, Out Used for the OUT side of an Cost, Open Trans
Side InterUnit Transfer. Valid
values for ACTIVITY_SW
are:
1 Full Transfer 0 Active
ChartField combination –1
Reactivated ChartField
combination
For example, one ChartField
combination is fully
transferred out of a
department (ACTIVITY_SW
= 1), and an identical
ChartField combination is
transferred into the same
department (ACTIVITY_SW
= -1). The activity switch
values for the two
transactions then cancel each
other, resulting in an active
ChartField combination
(ACTIVITY_SW = 0).

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 609
Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary Appendix A

Interface Type Long Name Usage Tables Updated

LAD Leased Asset Add Adds leased assets. Lease, Lease Schedule,
Book, Cost, Depr, Open
Trans, Asset, Acquisition
Detail, Asset Fair Value,
Location, PI Asset
History, Parent Asset,
Attribute, Comments,
License, Warranty

NAD Non-Financial Add Adds an asset with only Asset, Custodian,

physical information. Location, PI Asset
History, Component of
Asset History, Parent
Asset, Attribute,
Comments, License,
Warranty, Open Trans

OPT Open Transaction Creates open transactions for Open Trans

Generator a set of assets. Rarely used.

PHY Physical Asset Change Performs inserts to any Acquisition Detail,

physical asset tables other Custodian, Location,
than the Asset Table, for Attribute, Comments,
example, location, custodian, License, Warranty
or manufacturer.

PRT Partial Retirement Performs partial retirements. Cost, Retirement, Open

Trans, Asset

RAQ Replace Acquisition Replaces acquisition details Acquisition Detail

Detail using AMPS1000 and
AMIF1000.

RCT Asset Recategorization Performs recategorizations. Cost, Open Trans

REI Asset Reinstatement Performs reinstatements. Cost, Retirement, Open

Trans, Asset

RET Asset Retirement Performs full retirements. Cost, Retirement, Open

Trans, Asset

RNA Non-Financial Performs retirements of non- Asset, Asset Retirement

Retirements financial assets.

610 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix A Understanding the Loader Table Data Dictionary

Interface Type Long Name Usage Tables Updated

TRF IntraUnit Transfer Performs transfers within the Cost, Open Trans
same business unit. Valid
values for ACTIVITY_SW
are:
1 Full Transfer 0 Active
ChartField Combination –1
Reactivated ChartField
Combination
For example, one ChartField
combination is fully
transferred out of a
department (ACTIVITY_SW
= 1), and an identical
ChartField combination is
transferred into the same
department (ACTIVITY_SW
= –1). The activity switch
values for the two
transactions then cancel each
other, resulting in an active
ChartField combination
(ACTIVITY_SW = 0).

See Also

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Integrating PeopleSoft
Asset Management with Other Products," Previewing Data in the Loader Tables

PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Integrating PeopleSoft
Asset Management with Other Products," Running the Transaction Loader

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 611
 Appendix B

Understanding Depreciation Calculations

This appendix provides an overview of depreciation calculations and discusses how PeopleSoft Asset
Management calculates:

• The begin depreciation date.

• Remaining value and remaining life.

• Yearly depreciation.

• Period allocation.

• Prior period depreciation.

• Formula-based depreciation methods.

• Depreciation when salvage value exceeds net book value.

Understanding How PeopleSoft Asset Management Calculates

Depreciation
PeopleSoft Asset Management determines depreciation amounts using either tables or formulas. If you have a
large number of assets, you will probably want to use formula-based depreciation, because this is
considerably faster and uses less storage space. To help you more fully understand how PeopleSoft Asset
Management calculates depreciation, this appendix includes a discussion of how formulas are used.

When you add an asset to PeopleSoft Asset Management, you decide the cost basis that you want to
depreciate—you can include the basic cost of the asset as well as any freight and taxes that were paid. If you
do not want to include freight and tax charges in the depreciable cost basis, you can still track these charges in
the Acquisition Detail page.

If allowed by the depreciation method, the cost basis is reduced by either salvage value or tax credits.

Salvage Value
You can enter the salvage value as a percentage of the cost or the actual amount. Typically, you specify
salvage value when you add the asset in PeopleSoft Asset Management. If allowed, salvage value is deducted
from the cost basis for depreciation calculations. When the salvage value changes after depreciation begins,
PeopleSoft Asset Management automatically adjusts the cost basis and depreciation from that time forward to
reflect the change.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 613
Understanding Depreciation Calculations Appendix B

See Appendix B, "Understanding Depreciation Calculations," Calculating Depreciation When Salvage Value
Exceeds Net Book Value (NBV), page 647.

Tax Credits
Tax methods such as ACRS and MACRS determine which tax credits are available in PeopleSoft Asset
Management. When you specify a Qualified Investment Code, PeopleSoft Asset Management uses this code
to determine which tax credits apply to your assets. If you fail to specify a Qualified Investment Code for any
reason, PeopleSoft Asset Management deduces the applicable code from the tax method that you elect.

If you do not specify a tax system, PeopleSoft Asset Management considers the date that the assets were
placed in service to determine which method applies. Based on the tax method that you select and the
recovery life, PeopleSoft Asset Management derives the corresponding qualified investment code and the tax
credits that available under that code, and elects the applicable tax credits for you.

If a Basis Reduction Percentage applies, the depreciable basis of the asset is reduced. The calculation is based
on the Qualified Investment Code, the Tax Credit, and the Basis Reduction Percentage.

Calculating Tax Credits

PeopleSoft Asset Management uses the Qualified Investment Code, together with the Recovery Life and in-
service date, to determine the Qualified Investment Percentage—the rate that is applied to the book cost— to
determine the amount that qualifies for tax credits.

The Tax Credit Percentage is derived from the Tax Credit Type, Tax Credit Code, Recovery Life, and in-
service date.

The amount of the tax credit is based on the following calculations:

Book Cost x Qualified Investment Percentage = Amount qualifying for the tax credit

Amount qualifying x Tax Credit Percentage = Amount of tax credit

Cost Basis Reduction

After the amount of the tax credit is calculated, a corresponding reduction in the basis is calculated as
required:

Amount of tax credit x Basis Reduction Percentage = Amount the basis will be reduced

If you dispose of the asset before it has completely depreciated, PeopleSoft Asset Management calculates the
recapture of the credit and adds it to the depreciable cost basis.

Section 179 Expense

If you elect to expense all or a portion of the cost, you should select the Section 179 Expense Taken check
box on the Asset Book Definition - Tax page. You can expense assets up to an aggregate maximum of
200,000 USD per year, provided your company's gross income does not exceed the limitation that is specified
by Federal tax law. Investment credits are automatically calculated based on the criteria that you enter in the
Asset Book Definition - Tax Credit page.

614 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix B Understanding Depreciation Calculations

Listed Property Assets

If an asset is considered a listed property asset for tax purposes, then the allowable depreciable basis is
reduced by the percentage of business use. For example:

Business Use % = 75%

Cost = 10,000 USD

Depreciable basis = 7500 USD

Listed property is certain kinds of assets that are conducive to mixed business and personal use such as:

• Passenger automobiles under a certain weight.

• Any other property that is used for transportation such as trucks, buses, boats, airplanes, motorcycles, and
any other vehicles for transporting persons or goods.

• Any property of a type that is generally used for entertainment, recreation, or amusement such as
photographic, phonographic, communication, and video recording equipment.

• Any computer and related peripheral equipment unless it is used only at a regular business establishment
and owned or leased by the person operating the establishment.

• Any cellular telephone (or similar telecommunications equipment) placed in service or leased in a tax
year beginning after 1989.

The Depreciation Calculation Process

PeopleSoft Asset Management performs five basic steps to calculate depreciation for an asset. It calculates:

1. The asset's beginning depreciation date.

2. The asset's remaining life and remaining value.

3. The asset's yearly depreciation.

4. The asset's period depreciation allocation.

5. The asset's prior period depreciation.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 615
Understanding Depreciation Calculations Appendix B

How PeopleSoft Asset Management calculates depreciation

The following sections provide illustrative examples of how PeopleSoft Asset Management handles all of
these calculations in a variety of different scenarios.

Note. PeopleSoft Asset Management calculates depreciation yearly, not by month or by period. It then
allocates yearly depreciation among the year's periods, except when you select the Declining Balance
depreciation method or the Declining Balance method with a switch to the Straight Line method and the
monthly depreciation option is selected.

Calculating the Begin Depreciation Date

PeopleSoft Asset Management uses two asset attributes to begin calculating depreciation:

• In-service date.

• Convention.

616 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix B Understanding Depreciation Calculations

The combination of the in-service date and the prorate convention is the factor that actually determines when
depreciation begins.

Overriding the Begin Depreciation Field

When you use the Depreciate When in Service date option, PeopleSoft Asset Management allocates
depreciation based on the date that the asset was placed in service. This option is valid only in the year that
the asset is acquired.

Calculating Remaining Value

PeopleSoft Asset Management calculates remaining value and remaining life using five asset attributes:

• Begin Depr Date

• Transaction Date

• Life

• Cost

• Accumulated Depreciation

Calculations differ depending on which calculation type is used and the relationship between the beginning
depreciation date and the transaction date. The following examples show how the calculation is performed for
each method.

Remaining Value Calculation for Add Transactions

The following table shows data that is used in the calculation examples that follow it.

Attributes Data

Transaction Date 10/1/2006

Accounting Date 10/1/2006

In-Service Date 3/1/2006

Life 60 periods

Cost 6,000 USD

Accumulated Depreciation 500 USD

Calculation Type Remaining Value

Convention Half-Year

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 617
Understanding Depreciation Calculations Appendix B

Attributes Data

Method Straight-Line

Depreciate When In Service Switch N

Begin Depr Date 7/1/2006

Remaining Value 5,500 USD

Remaining Life 60 periods

Remaining Value

The following example illustrates remaining value:

Remaining Value = Cost - Accumulated Depreciation

6,000 USD cost - 500 USD accumulated depreciation = 5,500 remaining value

Life to Date Calculation for Add Transactions

The following table shows data that is used in the calculation example that follows it.

Attributes Data

Transaction Date 10/1/2006

Accounting Date 10/1/2006

In-Service Date 3/1/2006

Life 60 periods

Cost 6,000 USD

Accumulated Depreciation 500 USD

Calculation Type Life to Date

Convention Half-Year

Method Straight-Line

Depreciate When In Service Switch N

Begin Depr Date 7/1/2006

Remaining Value 6,000 USD

618 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix B Understanding Depreciation Calculations

Attributes Data

Remaining Life 60 periods

Remaining Value

The following example illustrates remaining value:

Remaining Value = Cost

6,000 USD cost

Calculating Yearly Depreciation

PeopleSoft Asset Management calculates yearly depreciation using two asset attributes:

• Begin Depr Date

• Depreciation Method

Other information that is used in this calculation includes the following information:

• Adj Trans Date

• Remaining Life

• Remaining Value

Calculations differ depending on which calculation type is used: Remaining Value or Life to Date. The
following examples show how this calculation is performed for each method. The base information is the
same in both cases.

Remaining Value Calculation for Add Transactions

The following table introduces the data used in the calculation example that follow it.

Attributes Data

Transaction Date 10/1/2006

Accounting Date 10/1/2006

In-Service Date 3/1/2006

Life 60 periods

Cost 6,000 USD

Accumulated Depreciation 500 USD

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 619
Understanding Depreciation Calculations Appendix B

Attributes Data

Calculation Type Remaining Value

Convention Half-Year

Method Straight-Line

Depreciate When In Service Switch N

Begin Depr Date 7/1/2006

Remaining Value 5,500 USD

Remaining Life 60 periods

Yearly Depreciation (First year) 550 USD

Yearly Depreciation for 2006

Here is yearly depreciation for 2006 using the Remaining Value calculation type:

Number of Periods in a Year = Year End - Begin Depr Date

6 = December 31, 2006 - July 1, 2006

Percentage Depreciation for Year = Number of Periods in a year / Remaining Life

10 percent = 6 / 60

Yearly Depreciation = Percentage depreciation for the year x Remaining value

550 USD = 10 percent x 5,500 USD

Life to Date Calculation for Add Transactions

The following table introduces the data that is used in the calculation example that follow it.

Attributes Data

Transaction Date 10/1/2006

Accounting Date 10/1/2006

In-Service Date 3/1/2006

Life 60 periods

Cost 6,000 USD

Accumulated Depreciation 500 USD

620 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix B Understanding Depreciation Calculations

Attributes Data

Calculation Type Life to Date

Convention Half-Year

Method Straight-Line

Depreciate When In Service Switch N

Begin Depr Date 7/1/2006

Remaining Value 6,000 USD

Remaining Life 60 periods

Yearly Depreciation (First year) 600.00 USD

Yearly Depreciation for 2006

Here is yearly depreciation for 2006 using the Life to Date calculation type:

Number of periods in a year = Year End - Begin Depr Date

6 = December 31, 2006 - July 1, 2006

Percentage depreciation for year = Number of periods in year / Remaining life

10 percent = 6 / 60

Yearly depreciation = Percentage depreciation for year x Remaining value

600 USD = 10 percent x 6,000 USD

Calculating Period Allocation

PeopleSoft Asset Management calculates period allocation using three asset attributes:

• In-Service Date

• Begin Depr Date

• Transaction Date

Other information that is used in this calculation includes the following, derived from previous calculations:

• Calculation Type

• Adjusted Transaction Date

• Yearly Depreciation

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 621
Understanding Depreciation Calculations Appendix B

• Number of Periods in Year

Life to Date calculations differ depending on whether the Depreciate When in Service option is set to N or Y.
The following examples illustrate how PeopleSoft Asset Management calculates period allocation using the
Remaining Value and Life to Date calculations. All examples use the same base information.

When a remaining balance exists due to rounding in the year, PeopleSoft Asset Management allocates that
amount to the last period of the fiscal year. For example, 2000 USD to be allocated over 12 periods, periods 1
through 11 will have 166.67 each and period 12 will have 166.63 USD (2000 USD - (166.67 x 11).

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Periods

166.6 166.67 166.6 166.6 166.6 166.6 166.6 166.6 166.6 166.67 166.6 166.6 Amount
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 3 s

Remaining Value Calculation for Add Transactions: Depreciate When In

Service Off
The following table shows data that is used in the calculation.

Attributes Data

Transaction Date 10/1/2006

Accounting Date 10/1/2006

In-Service Date 3/1/2006

Life 60 periods

Cost 6,000 USD

Accumulated Depreciation 500 USD

Calculation Type Remaining Value

Convention Half-Year

Method Straight-Line

Depreciate When In Service Switch N

Begin Depr Date 7/1/2006

Remaining Value 5,500 USD

Remaining Life 60 periods

Yearly Depreciation (First year) 550 USD

622 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix B Understanding Depreciation Calculations

Attributes Data

Period Allocation (First year) 91.66 USD

Period Depreciation Allocation

Here is the period depreciation allocation:

Period depreciation allocation = Yearly depreciation / Number of periods remaining in a year

550 USD yearly depreciation / 6 periods = 91.66 USD per period

Remaining Value Calculation for Add Transactions: Depreciate When In

Service On
The following table shows data that is used in the calculation example that follows it.

Attributes Data

Transaction Date 10/1/2006

Accounting Date 10/1/2006

In-Service Date 3/1/2006

Life 60 periods

Cost 6,000 USD

Accumulated Depreciation 500 USD

Calculation Type Remaining Value

Convention Half-Year

Method Straight-Line

Depreciate When In Service Switch Y

Begin Depr Date 7/1/2006

Remaining Value 5,500 USD

Remaining Life 60 periods

Yearly Depreciation (First year) 550 USD

Period Allocation (First year) 55 USD

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 623
Understanding Depreciation Calculations Appendix B

Period Depreciation Allocation

Here is the period depreciation allocation:

Period Depreciation Allocation = Yearly Depreciation / Periods from In-Service Date

Periods from In-Service Date = Year End - In-Service Date

550 USD Yearly Depreciation / 10 periods from In-Service Date = 55 USD per period

Life to Date Calculations for Add Transactions: Depreciate When in Service

Off
The following table shows data that is used in the calculation example that follows it.

Attributes Data

Transaction Date 5/1/2006

Accounting Date 5/1/2006

In-Service Date 3/1/2006

Life 60 periods

Cost 6,000 USD

Accumulated Depreciation 500 USD

Calculation Type Life to Date

Convention Half-Year

Method Straight-Line

Depreciate When In Service Switch N

Begin Depr Date 7/1/2006

Remaining Value 6,000 USD

Remaining Life 60 periods

Yearly Depreciation (First year) 600.00 USD

Period Allocation (First year) 100 USD

Period Depreciation Allocation

Here is the period depreciation allocation:

624 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix B Understanding Depreciation Calculations

Period Depreciation Allocation = Yearly Depreciation / Number of Periods in Year

600 USD Yearly Depreciation / 6 periods = 100 USD per period

Life to Date Calculation for Add Transactions: Calculate When in Service On

The following table shows data that is used in the calculation example that follows it.

Attributes Data

Transaction Date 3/1/2006

Accounting Date 3/1/2006

In-Service Date 3/1/2006

Life 60 periods

Cost 6,000 USD

Accumulated Depreciation 500 USD

Calculation Type Life to Date

Convention Half-Year

Method Straight-Line

Depreciate When In Service Switch Y

Begin Depr Date 7/1/2006

Remaining Value 6,000 USD

Remaining Life 60 periods

Yearly Depreciation (First year) 600.00 USD

Period Allocation (First year) 60 USD

Depreciation Results

The following table shows yearly depreciation by period for 2006.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Periods

60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 Amount

Remaining life is 60 periods; remaining value is 6,000 USD; yearly depreciation for 2006 is 600 USD.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 625
Understanding Depreciation Calculations Appendix B

Calculating Prior Period Depreciation

Prior period depreciation is generally calculated only for Life to Date calculations. In Remaining Value
calculations, prior period depreciation is calculated only if the accounting date occurs after transaction date.

Prior period depreciation is keyed by a derived beginning calculation date. For remaining value calculations
in which the accounting date occurs after the transaction date, the beginning calculation date equals the
transaction date. For life to date calculations, the beginning calculation date depends on a combination of the
following items:

• Transaction Date

• Begin Depr Date

Note. One overriding factor that is used to derive the beginning calculation date is that it can never occur
before the beginning depreciation date. If according to all calculations it should, it is automatically made to
equal the beginning depreciation date.

PeopleSoft Asset Management calculates prior period depreciation using the derived beginning calculation
date as well as the following items:

• Period Depreciation Allocation

• Accumulated Depreciation

The following examples illustrate how PeopleSoft Asset Management calculates prior period depreciation.

Case 1: Add Transactions

The following table shows data that is used in the calculation example that follows it.

Attributes Data

Transaction Date 10/1/2006

Accounting Date 10/1/2006

In-Service Date 3/1/2006

Life 60 periods

Cost 6,000 USD

Accumulated Depreciation

Calculation Type Life to Date

Convention Half-Year

626 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix B Understanding Depreciation Calculations

Attributes Data

Method Straight-Line

Depreciate When In Service Switch N

Begin Depr Date 7/1/2006

Begin Calc Date 7/1/2006

Remaining Value 6,000 USD

Remaining Life 60 periods

Yearly Depreciation (First year) 600.00 USD

Period Allocation (First year) 100 USD

Prior Period Depreciation 300 USD

Depreciation Results

The following table shows yearly depreciation by period for 2006. Prior period depreciation occurred in
periods 7 through 9.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Periods

100 100 100 Allowed

100 100 100 Taken

100 100 100 Difference

Prior Period Depreciation

Here is the prior period depreciation:

Difference Per Period = Period Depreciation Allocation (allowed) - Depreciation
Taken

Example Period 7: 100 USD - 0 = 100 USD

Begin Calc Date = Begin Depr Date

Periods from Begin Calc Date to Accounting Date = 7, 8, 9 = Periods within 7/1⇒
/2006 to 10/1/2006

Prior Period Depreciation = Sum of Difference Per Period for all periods within⇒
Begin Calc Date to Accounting Date

$300 = $100 + $100 + $100

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 627
Understanding Depreciation Calculations Appendix B

Case 2: Add Transactions

The following table shows data that is used in the calculation example that follows it.

Attributes Data

Transaction Date 10/1/2006

Accounting Date 10/1/2006

In-Service Date 3/1/2006

Life 60 periods

Cost 6,000 USD

Accumulated Depreciation 500 USD

Calculation Type Life to Date

Convention Half-Year

Method Straight-Line

Depreciate When In Service Switch N

Begin Depr Date 7/1/2006

Begin Calc Date 7/1/2006

Remaining Value 6,000 USD

Remaining Life 60 periods

Yearly Depreciation (First year) 600.00 USD

Period Allocation (First year) 100 USD

Prior Period Depreciation (200) USD

Depreciation Results

The following table shows yearly depreciation by period for 2006. Prior period depreciation occurred in
periods 7 through 9.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Periods

100 100 100 100 100 100 Allowed

628 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix B Understanding Depreciation Calculations

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Periods

500 100 100 100 Taken

(500) 100 100 100 Difference

Prior Period Depreciation

Here is the prior period depreciation:

Difference Per Period = Period Depreciation Allocation (allowed) - Depreciation⇒

Taken

Example Period 7: 100 USD - 0 = 100 USD

Begin Calc Date = Begin Depr Date

Periods from Begin Calc Date to Accounting Date =

7, 8, 9 = Periods within 7/1/2006 to 10/1/2006

Prior Period Depreciation = Sum of Difference Per Period for all periods within⇒
Begin Calc Date to Accounting Date - Accumulated Depreciation

(200) USD = (500)USD + 100 USD + 100 USD + 100 USD

Case 3: Add Transactions

The following table shows data that is used in the calculation example that follows.

Attributes Data

Transaction Date 10/1/2006

Accounting Date 10/1/2006

In-Service Date 3/1/2006

Life 60 periods

Cost 6,000 USD

Accumulated Depreciation

Calculation Type Life to Date

Convention Half-Year

Method Straight-Line

Depreciate When In Service Switch Y

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 629
Understanding Depreciation Calculations Appendix B

Attributes Data

Begin Depr Date 7/1/2006

Begin Calc Date 7/1/2006

Remaining Value 6,000 USD

Remaining Life 60 periods

Yearly Depreciation (First year) 600.00 USD

Period Allocation (First year) 60 USD

Prior Period Depreciation 420 USD

Depreciation Results

The following table shows yearly depreciation by period for 2006. Prior period depreciation occurred in
periods 3 through 9.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Periods

60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 Allowed

60 60 60 Taken

60 60 60 60 60 60 60 Difference

Prior Period Depreciation

Here is the prior period depreciation:

Difference Per Period = Period Depreciation Allocation (allowed) - Depreciation⇒

Taken

Example Period 7: 60 USD - 0 = 60 USD

Begin Calc Date = Begin Depr Date

Periods from In Service Date to Accounting Date =

7, 8, 9, 10= Periods within 3/1/2006 to 10/1/2006

Prior Period Depreciation = Sum of Difference Per Period for all periods within In
Service Date to Accounting Date

420 USD = 60 USD + 60 USD + 60 USD + 60 USD + 60 USD + 60 USD + 60 USD

Case 4: Add Transactions

The following table shows data that is used in the calculation example that follows it.

630 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix B Understanding Depreciation Calculations

Attributes Data

Transaction Date 10/1/2006

Accounting Date 10/1/2006

In-Service Date 3/1/2006

Life 60 periods

Cost 6,000 USD

Accumulated Depreciation 500 USD

Calculation Type Life to Date

Convention Half-Year

Method Straight-Line

Depreciate When In Service Switch Y

Begin Depr Date 7/1/2006

Begin Calc Date 7/1/2006

Remaining Value 6,000 USD

Remaining Life 60 periods

Yearly Depreciation (First year) 600.00 USD

Period Allocation (First year) 60 USD

Prior Period Depreciation (80) USD

Depreciation Results

The following table shows yearly depreciation by period for 2006. Prior period depreciation occurred in
periods 3 through 9.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Periods

60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 Allowed

500 60 60 60 Taken

60 60 60 (440) 60 60 60 Difference

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 631
Understanding Depreciation Calculations Appendix B

Prior Period Depreciation

Here is the prior period depreciation:

Difference Per Period = Period Depreciation Allocation (allowed) - Depreciation⇒

Taken

Example Period 7: 60 USD - 0 = 60 USD

Begin Calc Date = Begin Depr Date

Periods from In Service to Accounting Date =

3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 = Periods within 3/1/2006 to 10/1/2006

Prior Period Depreciation = Sum of Difference Per Period for all periods within In
Service Date to Accounting Date

(80) USD = 60 USD + 60 USD + 60 USD + (440) USD + 60 USD + 60 USD + 60 USD

Case 5: Add Transactions

The following table shows data that is used in the calculation example that follows it.

Attributes Data

Transaction Date 3/1/2006

Accounting Date 10/1/2006

In-Service Date 3/1/2006

Life 60 periods

Cost 6,000 USD

Accumulated Depreciation

Calculation Type Remaining Value

Convention Half-Year

Method Straight-Line

Depreciate When In Service Switch N

Begin Depr Date 7/1/2006

Begin Calc Date 7/1/2006

Remaining Value 6,000 USD

632 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix B Understanding Depreciation Calculations

Attributes Data

Remaining Life 60 periods

Yearly Depreciation (First year) 600.00 USD

Period Allocation (First year) 100 USD

Prior Period Depreciation 300 USD

Depreciation Results

The following table shows yearly depreciation by period for 2006. Prior period depreciation occurred in
periods 7 through 9.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Periods

100 100 100 100 100 100 Allowed

100 100 100 Taken

100 100 100 Difference

Prior Period Depreciation

Here is the prior period depreciation:

Difference Per Period = Period Depreciation Allocation (allowed) - Depreciation⇒

Taken

Example Period 7: 100 USD - 0 = 100 USD

Begin Calc Date = Begin Depr Date

Periods from Begin Calc Date to Accounting Date =

7, 8, 9 = Periods within 7/1/2006 to 10/1/2006

Prior Period Depreciation = Sum of Difference Per Period for all periods within⇒
Begin Calc Date to Accounting Date

300 USD = 100 USD + 100 USD + 100 USD

Formula-Based Depreciation Methods

PeopleSoft Asset Management is equipped to use the following different formula-based depreciation
methods:

• Straight Line

• (IND) Straight Line Percent

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 633
Understanding Depreciation Calculations Appendix B

• Declining Balance with a Switch to Straight Line

• Declining Balance with Depreciation Limit

• Declining Balance

• Flat Rate

• Sum of the Year's Digits

PeopleSoft Asset Management can calculate depreciation for each of the first six methods using either a
schedule or a formula. The formulas that it uses to calculate yearly depreciation for each of these methods are
explained in the following pages.

Straight Line
Yearly Straight Line depreciation is calculated using the following formula:

NBV x (Number of Periods to Depreciate / Remaining Life)

Straight Line Depreciation Example

The following table shows data that is used in the depreciation example that follows.

Attributes Data

Asset Cost 11,000.00 USD

Salvage Value 1,000.00 USD

Asset Basis 10,000.00 USD (Cost - Salvage Value)

Life 60 periods (5 years)

Begin Depr Dt. 07/01/2006

Depreciation Results

The following table shows yearly depreciation and the calculation that is used to produce the result.

Year Depreciation Calculation Depreciation Expense

2006 10,000 x (6/60) = 1000.00

2007 9000 x (12/54) = 2000.00

2008 7000 x (12/42) = 2000.00

2009 5000 x (12/30) = 2000.00

2010 3000 x (12/18) = 2000.00

634 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix B Understanding Depreciation Calculations

Year Depreciation Calculation Depreciation Expense

2011 1000 x (6/6) = 1000.00

(IND) Straight Line Percent

The Straight Line Percent method that is used in India differs from the Straight Line method. Depreciation is
calculated based on rates rather than useful life. In addition, the rates also consider the residual or salvage
value at the end of the asset useful life. In India the following assumptions are made:

• Assets are depreciated as of the in-service date.

• The minimum rates that are established by statute depreciate 95 percent of the asset cost over the asset
useful life.

• An entity is entitled to depreciate at a higher rate, but not lower.

When using Straight Line Percent as the method, you complete the Percent field with the depreciation rate.
The Useful Life field is unavailable. Other fields are ignored for this depreciation calculation. Although
residual value is included in the rate, you have to enter salvage value.

Salvage Value acts as a limit. When the NBV reaches this amount, it automatically allocates the rest of the
depreciable amount to the last period. Life in Years reflects both years and fractions, such as 8.4. Useful Life
and Life in Years are displayed after you save or refresh the page. AM_DEPR_CALC recalculates these
fields when it runs. Those assets that are coming from batch processes will calculate only Useful Life and
Life in Years when you run AM_DEPR_CALC.

The formula to calculate Useful Life is:

(Cost – Salvage Value) / (Cost x Depr Rate)

For example, an asset that is worth $1,000 and a salvage value of $50, with a 4.75% annual depreciation rate,
using the actual month convention, will have a useful life of 20 years or 240 periods. Sometimes useful life
may result in fractional periods.

Year NBV Begin Rate Depr NBV End

2001 1,000.00 0.0475 47.50 952.50

2002 952.50 0.0475 47.50 905.00

2003 905.00 0.0475 47.50 857.50

2004 857.50 0.0475 47.50 810.00

2005 810.00 0.0475 47.50 762.50

2006 762.50 0.0475 47.50 715.00

2007 715.00 0.0475 47.50 667.50

2008 667.50 0.0475 47.50 620.00

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 635
Understanding Depreciation Calculations Appendix B

Year NBV Begin Rate Depr NBV End

2009 620.00 0.0475 47.50 572.50

2010 572.50 0.0475 47.50 525.00

2011 525.00 0.0475 47.50 477.50

2012 477.50 0.0475 47.50 430.00

2013 430.00 0.0475 47.50 382.50

2014 382.50 0.0475 47.50 335.00

2015 335.00 0.0475 47.50 287.50

2016 287.50 0.0475 47.50 240.00

2017 240.00 0.0475 47.50 192.00

2018 192.00 0.0475 47.50 145.00

2019 145.00 0.0475 47.50 97.50

2020 97.50 0.0475 47.50 50.00

Total Depreciation 950.00

Remaining Value and Life to Date

Two different ways are available to calculate depreciation adjustments under Indian Straight Line Percent
Method:

• Remaining Value

• Life to Date

For instance, in the preceding example, suppose that in the sixth year, the rate must change to 5.28 percent
because the government adopts a new rate according to Schedule XIV. Using Remaining Value, the system
calculates the useful life. It takes into account the new rate on the original cost. It calculates depreciation
based on the NBV minus any residual value over the remaining new useful life, where remaining new useful
life means the new useful life minus periods that are already depreciated.

Revised Useful Life:

(Cost – Salvage Value) / (Cost x Depr Rate) Revised Useful Life: (1000 – 50) / (1000 x .0528) = 17.992424

Rounded up to 18 years or 216 months.

New Depreciation Amount:

(Net Book Value - Limiting Value) / (Revised useful life - Years Depreciated)

636 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix B Understanding Depreciation Calculations

New Depreciation Amount:

(762.5 – 50) / (18 – 5) = 54.8076

In the last period, the remaining value will be residual value.

The following table shows the depreciation with the adjustment in the sixth year.

Yearly Start Date Original Cost Schedule XIV Effective Net Book Value Number of Years
Rates Depreciation

01 JAN 2003 1000.00 0.0475 47.50 952.50 1

01 JAN 2004 952.50 0.0475 47.50 905.00 2

01 JAN 2005 905.00 0.0475 47.50 857.50 3

01 JAN 2006 857.50 0.0475 47.50 810.00 4

01 JAN 2007 810.00 0.0475 47.50 762.50 5

01 JAN 2008 762.50 0.0528 54.81 707.69 6

01 JAN 2009 707.69 0.0528 54.81 652.88 7

01 JAN 2010 652.88 0.0528 54.81 598.08 8

01 JAN 2011 598.08 0.0528 54.81 543.27 9

01 JAN 2012 543.27 0.0528 54.81 488.46 10

01 JAN 2013 488.46 0.0528 54.81 433.65 11

01 JAN 2014 433.65 0.0528 54.81 378.85 12

01 JAN 2015 378.85 0.0528 54.81 324.04 13

01 JAN 2016 324.04 0.0528 54.81 269.23 14

01 JAN 2017 269.23 0.0528 54.81 214.42 15

01 JAN 2018 214.42 0.0528 54.81 159.62 16

01 JAN 2019 159.62 0.0528 54.81 104.81 17

01 JAN 2020 104.82 0.0528 54.81 50.00 18

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 637
Understanding Depreciation Calculations Appendix B

In the case of Life to Date, the useful life is again recalculated. This method takes into account the new rate
on the original cost. Depreciation is based on what the system had calculated if the rate would have been the
new rate from the beginning. An adjustment to the prior depreciation amounts is required in this method to
reflect the change retroactively. It consists of summarizing all depreciation amounts until the change and
comparing with the amount that would have been obtained if the asset had always been calculated based on
the new rate.

Useful Life:

(Cost – Salvage Value) / (Cost x Depr Rate)

Useful Life:

(1000 – 50) / (1000 x .0528) = 17.992424

Rounded up to 18 years or 216 months.

The following table depicts the depreciation if the rate had always been 5.28 percent.

Yearly Start Original Cost Schedule XIV Effective Net Book Number Total
Date Rates Depreciation Value of Years Depreciation

01 JAN 2003 1000.00 0.0528 52.80 947.20 1

01 JAN 2004 947.20 0.0528 52.80 894.40 2

01 JAN 2005 894.40 0.0528 52.80 841.60 3

01 JAN 2006 841.60 0.0528 52.80 788.80 4

01 JAN 2007 788.80 0.0528 52.80 736.00 5 264.00

01 JAN 2008 736.00 0.0528 52.80 683.20 6

01 JAN 2009 683.20 0.0528 52.80 630.40 7

01 JAN 2010 630.40 0.0528 52.80 577.60 8

01 JAN 2011 577.60 0.0528 52.80 524.80 9

01 JAN 2012 524.80 0.0528 52.80 472.00 10

01 JAN 2013 472.00 0.0528 52.80 419.20 11

01 JAN 2014 419.20 0.0528 52.80 366.40 12

01 JAN 2015 366.40 0.0528 52.80 313.60 13

01 JAN 2016 313.60 0.0528 52.80 260.80 14

01 JAN 2017 260.80 0.0528 52.80 208.00 15

01 JAN 2018 208.00 0.0528 52.80 155.20 16

638 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix B Understanding Depreciation Calculations

Yearly Start Original Cost Schedule XIV Effective Net Book Number Total
Date Rates Depreciation Value of Years Depreciation

01 JAN 2019 155.20 0.0528 52.80 102.40 17

01 JAN 2020 102.40 0.0528 52.40 50.00 18

Compare the preceding table that shows what the amount would have been with a constant rate of 5.28
percent versus the following table that shows what the amounts are with a change and an adjustment in the
sixth year.

Yearly Start Original Cost Schedule XIV Effective Net Book Number Adjustment
Date Rates Depreciation Value of Years

01 JAN 2003 1000.00 0.0475 47.50 952.50 1

01 JAN 2004 952.50 0.0475 47.50 952.50 2

01 JAN 2005 905.00 0.0475 47.50 905.00 3

01 JAN 2006 857.50 0.0475 47.50 857.50 4

01 JAN 2007 810.00 0.0475 47.50 762.50 5 237.50

31 DEC 2007 26.50 736.00 264.00

01 JAN 2008 736.00 0.0528 52.77 683.23 6

01 JAN 2009 683.23 0.0528 52.77 630.46 7

01 JAN 2010 630.46 0.0528 52.77 577.69 8

01 JAN 2011 577.69 0.0528 52.77 524.92 9

01 JAN 2012 524.92 0.0528 52.77 472.15 10

01 JAN 2013 472.15 0.0528 52.77 419.38 11

01 JAN 2014 419.38 0.0528 52.77 366.62 12

01 JAN 2015 366.62 0.0528 52.77 313.85 13

01 JAN 2016 313.85 0.0528 52.77 261.08 14

01 JAN 2017 261.08 0.0528 52.77 208.31 15

01 JAN 2018 208.31 0.0528 52.77 155.54 16

01 JAN 2019 155.54 0.0528 52.77 102.77 17

01 JAN 2020 102.77 0.0528 52.77 50.00 18

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 639
Understanding Depreciation Calculations Appendix B

Adjustment PDP:

Total Depreciation at new rate – Total Depreciation at former rate

Adjustment PDP:

264 – 237.50 = 26.50 for the first 5 years.

New Depreciation Amount:

(Net Book Value – Adj PDP - Limiting Value) / (Revised useful life – Years Depreciated)

New Depreciation Amount:

(762.5 – 26.5 - 50) / (18 – 5) = 52.7692

Declining Balance with a Switch to Straight Line

Declining Balance with a Straight Line Switch performs two simultaneous equations to calculate yearly
depreciation. One equation calculates declining balance depreciation and the other calculates straight line
depreciation. PeopleSoft Asset Management then compares the two yearly depreciation amounts and applies
whichever is greater.

Note that in this type of calculation the asset's net book value is multiplied by the declining balance
percentage times the straight line depreciation percentage.

NBV x ((Number of Periods to Depreciate / Life) x DB%)

Declining Balance with a Switch to Straight Line Example

The following table shows data that is used in the depreciation example that follows it.

Attributes Data

Asset Cost 10,000.00 USD

Life 60 periods (5 years)

Begin Depr Dt. 07/01/2006

Declining Balance % 200%

Depreciation Results

The following table shows yearly depreciation and the calculation that is used to produce the result.

Year Depreciation Calculation Depreciation Expense

2006 10,000 x ((6/60) x (200/100)) = 2000.00

2007 8000 x ((12/60) x (200/100)) = 3200.00

640 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix B Understanding Depreciation Calculations

Year Depreciation Calculation Depreciation Expense

2008 4800 x ((12/60) x (200/100)) = 1920.00

2009 2880 x ((12/60) x (200/100)) = 1152.00

2010 x (SL) 1728 x (12/18) = 1152.00

2011 x (SL) 576 x (6/6) = 576.00

In this example, in 2010, the straight line depreciation is greater than the declining balance depreciation.
Therefore, switch to straight line depreciation. The declining balance calculation for 2010 is 1728 x ((12/60) x
(200/100)) = 691.20. In 2011, the straight line depreciation is equal to the declining balance depreciation.

Declining Balance with Depreciation Limit

This calculation type enables you to specify annual depreciation limits based on a percentage of an asset's
cost. This method supports asset management practices that are commonly used in some European countries.
In environments in which this is legally acceptable, the advantage to this method is that it provides greater
decreases in value in the first years of an asset's service. In some environments, a company may use this
depreciation method initially and then switch to straight-line when that method provides a greater write-off.

This method runs three calculations and performs comparisons between the results.

First, it calculates using the formula that is already documented for Declining Balance with a Switch to
Straight Line:

NBV x ( (Number of Periods to Depreciate/Life) x DB% )

(See DB column in the table provided with the following example.)

It then calculates using the specified limit percentage of original cost or bet book value:

NBV x Limit%

(See MAX column in the table provided with the following example.)

The results of these two calculations are compared and the system determines which amount is lesser. (See
Comparison 1 column in the table provided with following example.)

Finally, it calculates using the Straight Line formula:

NBV x (Number of Periods to Depreciate/Remaining Life)

(See SL column in the table provided with following example.)

Results of the Straight Line calculation are compared with the lesser amount from the first comparison.
(Column SL compared with column Comparison 1 in the following table. Comparison 2 column shows when
the Straight Line method produces the greater result.)

The greater amount between this final comparison is the annual depreciation amount. (See Depr column in
the table after the following table.)

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 641
Understanding Depreciation Calculations Appendix B

Declining Balance with Depreciation Limit Example

The following table shows data that is used in the depreciation example that follows it.

Attributes Data

Asset Cost 10,000.00 USD

Life 96 periods (8 years)

Begin Depr Dt. 01/01/2006

Declining Balance % 300%

Limit % 30%

Depreciation Results

The following table shows yearly depreciation and the calculation that is used to produce the result.

Year NBV DB Max Comparison 1 SL Comparison 2 Depr.

(Limit%)

Year 1 100000 37500 30000 30000 12500 30000

Year 2 70000 26250 21000 21000 10000 21000

Year 3 49000 18375 14700 14700 8167 14700

Year 4 34300 12862 10290 10290 6860 10290

Year 5 24010 9004 7203 7203 6003 7203

Year 6 16807 6303 5042 5042 5602 SW 5602

Year 7 11205 4201 3361 3361 5602 SW 5602

Year 8 5602 2101 1681 1681 5602 SW 5602

Declining Balance
For this type of calculation, the declining balance percentage represents a percentage of NBV.

NBV x DB%

When you are depreciating an asset with a declining balance method, the life of the asset is irrelevant. Note
that if you used this method alone, an asset would never be fully depreciated. To fully depreciate an asset
using the Declining Balance method, you must enter either a book low limit or an end depreciation date.
When an asset's NBV reaches its book low limit or end depreciation date, the remaining value is taken in
depreciation for that year.

642 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix B Understanding Depreciation Calculations

Declining Balance Example

The following table shows data that is used in the depreciation example that follows it.

Attributes Data

Asset Cost 10,000.00 USD

Salvage Value 1,000.00 USD (not used for calculating asset basis)

Asset Basis 10,000.00 USD

Life 60 periods (5 years)

Begin Depr Dt. 01/01/94

Declining Balance % 20%

Depreciation Results

The following table shows yearly depreciation and the calculation that is used to produce the result.

Year Depreciation Calculation Depreciation Expense

1994 10,000 x (20/100) = 2000.00

1995 8000 x (20/100) = 1600.00

1996 6400 x (20/100) = 1280.00

1997 5120 x (20/100) = 1024.00

1998 4096 x (20/100) = 819.20

1999 3276.80 x (20/100) = 655.54

2000 2621.21 x (20/100) = 524.24

Calculations continue in this manner until the book low limit or end depreciation date is reached. If no book
low limit or end depreciation date is specified, the asset never fully depreciates.

Flat Rate
The formula for calculating Flat Rate depreciation is simple.

BasisxFlat %

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 643
Understanding Depreciation Calculations Appendix B

Flat Rate with an Averaging Option

You can combine the Flat Rate depreciation method with either a monthly or yearly averaging option. These
options are typically used by utility companies to depreciate composite assets. When these options are used,
PeopleSoft Asset Management uses up to three separate formulas to calculate depreciation for adjustments—
one for calculating current period depreciation, one for calculating following period depreciation, and one for
calculating depreciation for all subsequent periods.

These formulas are used only for calculating additional depreciation resulting from adjustments to the average
balance. And these adjustments are applied only to the current year. For all subsequent years, as well as the
first time it is done, the system calculates depreciation by applying the flat rate percentage to the average
balance and allocating this amount among the periods.

Because of the averaging option, all adjustment transactions must take effect from the beginning of the year
to its end. Therefore, current period depreciation is calculated after each transaction on a year-to-date basis.

As adjustments are made, additional depreciation is posted for each period that is affected.

Note. Using the flat rate depreciation method causes any depreciation to be posted to the end of the calendar.
If this is not your intention, you must enter a low limit of .01 when you first select the depreciation method on
the Asset Book Definition page group for this asset. If you have not already done this, update the
Depreciation Method field on the General 2 page by selecting Flat Rate and entering .01 in the Low Limit
additional field that appears.

Monthly Averaging Option

Review the following examples of monthly averaging calculations resulting from a $2000 adjustment made in
period 3. The asset is depreciated at 12%.

((Adjustment Amount / 2) x Flat Rate %) x Period Allocation

Calculation for the current period (YTD):

((2,000 USD / 2) x 12%) x 3/12 = 30 USD

Current Period Depreciation + ((Adjustment Amount x Flat Rate %) x Period Allocation)

Calculation for the following period:

30 USD + ((2,000 USD x 12%) x 1/12) = 50 USD

(Adjustment Amount x Flat Rate %) x Period Allocation

Calculation for Subsequent Periods:

(2,000 USDx12%) x 1/12 = 20 USD

Note. The only exception to this rule occurs when the following period crosses into another fiscal year.
When this is the case, all periods but the current one are calculated using the full value of the transaction.
Current Period depreciation is not added to the following period depreciation.

644 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix B Understanding Depreciation Calculations

Yearly Averaging Option

When using the yearly averaging option, you'll want to estimate financial activity for the year. The original
estimate should be posted as an add transaction in the first period of the year and subsequently adjusted as the
actual figures become available.

Review the following example of the yearly averaging option using the same 2,000 USD adjustment in Period
3. The asset is depreciated at 12 percent.

(( Adjustment Amount / 2) x Flat Rate %) x Period Allocation

Calculation for the current period (YTD):

((2,000 USD / 2) x 12%) x 3/12 = 30 USD

((Adjustment Amount / 2) x Flat Rate %) x Period Allocation

Calculation for all subsequent periods:

((2,000 USD / 2) x 12%) x 1/12 = 10 USD

Sum of the Years' Digits

Yearly Sum of the Years' Digits depreciation is calculated using the following formula:

(( Remaining Years of Life / Sum of Years Remaining) x NBV) x % of Year to Depreciate

Sum of the Years Digits Example

The following table shows data that is used in the depreciation example that follows it.

Attributes Data

Asset Cost 3700.00

Salvage Value 100.00

Asset Basis 3600.00

Life 36 periods (3 years)

Begin Depr Dt. 07/01/2006

Depreciation Results

The following table shows yearly depreciation and the calculation that is used to produce the result.

Year Depreciation Calculation Depreciation Expense

2006 3600 x (3/(1+2+3)) x (6/12) = 900.00

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 645
Understanding Depreciation Calculations Appendix B

Year Depreciation Calculation Depreciation Expense

2007 2700 x (2.5/(1+2+3/2)) x (12/12) = 1500.00

2008 1200 x (1.5/(1+ 2/2)) x (12/12) = 900.00

2009 300 x (0.5/(1/2)) x (6/6) = 300.00

Calculation for the first year Sum of Years Remaining = 3/(1+2+3)

Units of Production

Units of production depreciation differs from other methods in that it does not depreciate an asset based on its
periods of life, but rather on its production detail. In this method, an asset is assumed to have a fixed lifetime
production capacity—a maximum number of units it can produce. Thus, a fixed amount of depreciation is
allotted to each unit of production. The net book value of the asset is then multiplied by the number of units
that are produced in a period over the remaining units to be produced to determine how much depreciation to
take for that period.

NBV x (Units Produced / Units Remaining)

Production detail for the asset is entered into the Units of Production table (Set Up Financials/Supply Chain,
Product Related, Asset Management, Depreciation, Units of Production). Each time new detail is added to
this table, open transactions are created for each asset that is associated with it. You should recalculate
depreciation each time you add to or change the detail in the Units of Production table.

Units of Production Example

The following table shows data that is used in the depreciation example that follows it.

Attributes Data

Asset Cost 10,000.00 USD

Total Estimated Production Units 40,000

Production Units for each month 10,000

Depreciation Results

The following table shows yearly and monthly depreciation and the calculation that is used to produce the
result.

Year, Month Depreciation Calculation Depreciation Expense

Year 1, Month 1 10,000 x (10,000/40,000) = 2500.00

Year 1, Month 2 7500 x (10,000/30,000) = 2500.00

Year 1, Month 3 5000 x (10,000/20,000) = 2500.00

646 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix B Understanding Depreciation Calculations

Year, Month Depreciation Calculation Depreciation Expense

Year 1, Month 4 2500 x (10,000/10,000) = 2500.00

Note. Units remaining are calculated by summing the production units for all remaining periods that are set
up on the Units of Production page (Set Up Financials/Supply Chain, Product Related, Asset Management,
Depreciation, Units of Production).

Calculating Depreciation When Salvage Value Exceeds Net Book

Value (NBV)
There are instances when the residual value (salvage value) of an asset may increase to an amount equal to or
greater than the asset's carrying amount (NBV.) If that situation arises, PeopleSoft provides the following
treatments for depreciation calculation, depending upon statutory requirements:

• Stop depreciation calculation when salvage value exceeds NBV.

• Allow negative depreciation when salvage value exceeds NBV.

Stop Depreciation When Salvage Value Exceeds NBV

In compliance with International Accounting Standards (IAS) and Generally Accepted Accounting Principles
(GAAP), PeopleSoft provides the option to stop the depreciation calculation in the event the salvage value of
an asset exceeds that of its NBV.

See PeopleSoft Enterprise Asset Lifecycle Management Fundamentals 9.1 PeopleBook, "Setting Up
Depreciation Processing," Enabling Options to Stop Negative Depreciation.

Stop Depreciation Example

The following table shows data that is used in the depreciation example that follows it:

Attributes Data

Transaction Date January 1, 2006

Accounting Date January 1, 2006

In Service Date January 1, 2006

Calculation Type Life to Date

Convention Actual Month

Method Straight Line

Asset Cost 75,000.00

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 647
Understanding Depreciation Calculations Appendix B

Attributes Data

Salvage Value (Increased from 0 to 50,000 on January 1, 2008) 50,000.00

Accumulated Depreciation (24 months in service) 30,000.00

Net Book Value at January 1, 2008 45,000.00

Asset Useful Life 60 months

Depreciation Result - Stop Depreciation

The following table shows the result of the depreciation calculation when the Stop Depr option is selected:

Year Depreciation Calculation Depreciation

Expense

January 1 through December 31, 2006 75,000 x (12/60 months) 15,000.00

January 1 through December 31, 2007 60,000 x (12/48 months) 15,000.00

January 1 through December 31, 2008 Depreciation stopped 0

January 1 through December 31, 2009 Depreciation stopped 0

January 1 through December 31, 2010 Depreciation stopped 0

Stop Depreciation Example with Additional Adjustment of Salvage Value

The following table shows data that is used in the depreciation example that follows it:

Attributes Data

Transaction Date January 1, 2006

Accounting Date January 1, 2006

In Service Date January 1, 2006

Calculation Type Life to Date

Convention Actual Month

Method Straight Line

Asset Cost 75,000.00

Salvage Value (Increased from 0 to 50,000 at January 1, 2008) 50,000.00

648 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix B Understanding Depreciation Calculations

Attributes Data

Accumulated Depreciation (24 months in service) 30,000.00

Net Book Value at January 1, 2008 45,000.00

New Salvage Value - (Reduced to zero at January 1, 2009) 0

Asset Useful Life 60 months

Depreciation Result - Stop Depreciation with Additional Adjustment of Salvage Value

The following table shows the result of the depreciation calculation when the Stop Depr option is selected and
there is an additional adjustment of salvage value:

Year Depreciation Calculation Depreciation

Expense

January 1 through December 31, 2006 75,000 x (12/60 months) 15,000.00

January 1 through December 31, 2007 60,000 x (12/48 months) 15,000.00

January 1 through December 31, 2008 Depreciation stopped 0

January 1 through December 31, 2009 (NBV - Salvage Value = 45,000) 22,500.00
(salvage value reduced to zero at January 1,
(45,000 - 0 = 45,000)
2009)
45,000 x (12/24 months)

January 1 through December 31, 2010 22,500 x (12/12 months) 22,500.00

Allow Negative Depreciation

The alternate approach to handling an asset when the NBV becomes less than the salvage value is to allow the
system to generate negative depreciation until the NBV equals the salvage value at the end of the asset's
useful life. To use this approach, simply do not select the Stop Depr when NBV < Salvage options.

Allow Negative Depreciation

The following table shows data that is used in the depreciation example that follows it:

Attributes Data

Transaction Date January 1, 2006

Accounting Date January 1, 2006

In Service Date January 1, 2006

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 649
Understanding Depreciation Calculations Appendix B

Attributes Data

Calculation Type Life to Date

Convention Actual Month

Method Straight Line

Asset Cost 75,000.00

Salvage Value (Increased from 0 to 50,000 at January 1, 2008) 50,000.00

Accumulated Depreciation (24 months in service) 30,000.00

Net Book Value at January 1, 2008 45,000.00

Asset Useful Life 60 months

Depreciation Result - Allow Negative Depreciation

The following table shows the result of the depreciation calculation when the Stop Depr option is not
selected:

Year Depreciation Calculation Depreciation

Expense

January 1 through December 31, 2006 75,000 x (12/60 months) 15,000.00

January 1 through December 31, 2007 60,000 x (12/48 months) 15,000.00

January 1 through December 31, 2008 (NBV - Salvage Value) x (12/36 months) - 1,666.67
(Salvage Value increase on January 1, 2008)
(45,000 - 50,000) x (12/36 months)

January 1 through December 31, 2009 (NBV - Salvage Value) x (12/24 months) - 1,666.67
(46,666.67 - 50,000) x (12/24 months)

January 1 through December 31, 2010 (NBV - Salvage Value) x (12/12 months) - 1,666.67
(48,333.33 - 50,000) x (12/12 months)

Allow Negative Depreciation with Additional Adjustment of Salvage Value

The following table shows data that is used in the depreciation example that follows it:

Attributes Data

Transaction Date January 1, 2006

Accounting Date January 1, 2006

650 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix B Understanding Depreciation Calculations

Attributes Data

In Service Date January 1, 2006

Calculation Type Life to Date

Convention Actual Month

Method Straight Line

Asset Cost 75,000.00

Salvage Value (Increased from 0 to 50,000 at January 1, 2008) 50,000.00

Accumulated Depreciation (24 months in service) 30,000.00

Net Book Value at January 1, 2008 45,000.00

New Salvage Value - (Reduced to zero at January 1, 2009) 0

Asset Useful Life 60 months

Depreciation Result - Allow Negative Depreciation with Additional Adjustment to Salvage

Value

The following table shows the result of the depreciation calculation when the Stop Depr option is not selected
and there is an additional adjustment to salvage value:

Year Depreciation Calculation Depreciation

Expense

January 1 through December 31, 2006 75,000 x (12/60 months) 15,000.00

January 1 through December 31, 2007 60,000 x (12/48 months) 15,000.00

January 1 through December 31, 2008 (NBV - Salvage Value) x (12/36 months) - 1,666.67
(Salvage value increase on January 1, 2008)
(45,000 - 50,000) x (12/36 months)

January 1 through December 31, 2009 (NBV - Salvage Value) x (12/24 months) 23,333.34
(Salvage value reduced to zero on January 1,
(46,666.67 - 0) x (12/24 months)
2009)

January 1 through December 31, 2010 (NBV - Salvage Value) x (12/12 months) 23,333.33
(23,333.33 - 0) x (12/12 months)

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 651
 Appendix C

PeopleSoft Asset Management Reports

This appendix provides an overview of PeopleSoft Asset Management reports, lists common elements, and
enables you to:

• View summary tables of all reports.

• View report details and tables accessed.

Note. For samples of these reports, see the Portable Document Format (PDF) fields that are published on CD-
ROM with your documentation.

See Also

Enterprise PeopleTools PeopleBook, "Process Scheduler"

PeopleSoft Asset Management Reports: A to Z

These tables list the PeopleSoft Asset Management reports, sorted alphanumerically by report ID within each
of the following report categories. If you need more information about a report, refer to the report details at
the end of this appendix.

This section discusses:

• Asset lists.

• Transaction reports.

• Capital acquisition planning reports.

• Depreciation reports.

• Impairment Reports

• Account activity reports.

• Accounting entry reports.

• Physical inventory reports.

• Lease reports.

• Retirement reports.

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 653
PeopleSoft Asset Management Reports Appendix C

• U.S. tax reports.

• Global reports.

Asset Set Up Lists

Report ID and Report Description Navigation Run Control Page

Name

AMBU1000 Lists all valid business units Set Up Financials/Supply RUN_AMBU1000

and asset books. (Crystal) Chain, Business Unit
Asset Management
Related, Reports, Asset
Units/Books
Management Units/Books

AMAE1000 Lists all accounting entry Set Up Financials/Supply RUN_AMAE1000

templates by category. Chain, Product Related,
List of Accounting Entry
(Crystal) Asset Management,
Templates
Reports, Accounting Entry
Templates

AMAE1100 Lists book code Set Up Financials/Supply RUN_AMAE1000

discrepancies where Chain, Product Related,
Book Code Discrepancy
accounting entry templates Asset Management,
Report
do not meet the book code Reports, Accounting Entry
validations for pairs Templates
distribution types. (SQR)

AMAS1100 Lists Asset Categories Set Up Financials/Supply RUN_AMAS1100

(Crystal). Chain, Product Related,
Asset Categories Report
Asset Management,
Reports, Asset Categories

Transaction Reports

Report ID and Report Description Navigation Run Control Page

Name

AMAS1600 Lists all of the warranties Asset Management, Service RUN_AMAS1600

that are in place for a and Maintenance, Reports,
List of Asset Warranties
specified business unit as of Warranties
a date that you select.
(Crystal)

AMAS1700 Lists asset licenses. Asset Management, Service RUN_AMAS1700

(Crystal) and Maintenance, Reports,
List of Asset Licenses
License Information

654 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix C PeopleSoft Asset Management Reports

Report ID and Report Description Navigation Run Control Page

Name

AMAS2000 Sorts cost activity by Asset Management, RUN_AMAS2000

ChartField, by Category, or Financial Reports, Cost and
Cost Activity
by Account (SQR). Use the Depreciation, Cost Activity
PeopleSoft Asset Report
Management report
formatting features to
include/exclude data and
append suffixes to identify
report types.

AMAS2100 Lists asset information and Asset Management, RUN_AMAS2100

also includes Cost, LTD and Financial Reports, Asset
Asset Acquisitions by
YTD Depreciation and Net Details, Acquisitions
ChartField
Book Value with
ChartField, Book and
Report totals. (SQR)

AMAS2110 Lists asset information and Asset Management, RUN_AMAS2100

also includes Cost, LTD and Financial Reports, Asset
Asset Acquisitions by In
YTD Depreciation and Net Details, Acquisitions
Service Date
Book Value with
ChartField, In-service
Period/Year, Book and
Report totals. (SQR)

AMAS2200 Lists information on assets Asset Management, RUN_AMAS2200

by location. (SQR) Financial Reports, Asset
Assets by Location
Details, By Location

AMAS2210 Lists assets by Asset ID. Asset Management, RUN_AMAS2200

(SQR) Financial Reports, Asset
Assets by Asset ID
Details, By Location

AMAS2300 Lists asset transfers Asset Management, RUN_AMAS2300

transactions ordered by Financial Reports, Cost and
Asset Transfers by
ChartField. (SQR) Depreciation, Asset
ChartField
Transfers

AMAS2400 Lists asset recategorizations Asset Management, RUN_AMAS2400

ordered by ChartField. Financial Reports, Cost and
Asset Reclassifications
(SQR) Depreciation, Asset
Reclassifications

AMAS2201 List assets designated as Asset Management, RUN_AMAS2201

hazardous, sorted by Financial Reports, Asset
Hazardous Assets by
location. (SQR) Details, Hazardous Assets
Location
by Location

AMCH1000 List asset component Asset Management, RUN_AMCH1000

hierarchy moves made Financial Reports, Asset
Asset Component Hierarchy
through the Manage Details, Asset Component
Move
Component Hierarchy Hierarchy Move
transaction (SQR)

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 655
PeopleSoft Asset Management Reports Appendix C

Capital Acquisition Planning Reports

Report ID and Report Description Navigation Run Control Page

Name

AMCP2000 Lists capital acquisition Asset Management, Asset RUN_AMCP2000

planning information. Transactions, Capital
Capital Acquisition Plans
(SQR) Acquisition Planning, Run
Report

AMCP2010 Lists capital acquisition Asset Management, Asset RUN_AMCP2000

planning by department. Transactions, Capital
Capital Acquisition Plans
(SQR) Acquisition Planning, Run
by Department
Report

AMCP2100 Lists capital acquisitions Asset Management, Asset RUN_AMCP2000

planning by asset ID. (SQR) Transactions, Capital
Capital Acquisition
Acquisition Planning, Run
Planning Assets
Report

Depreciation Reports

Report ID and Report Description Navigation Run Control Page

Name

AMDP2000 Sorts cost activity by Asset Management, RUN_AMDP2000

ChartField. (SQR), by Financial Reports, Cost and
Depreciation Activity
Category, or by Account. Depreciation, Depreciation
Use the PeopleSoft Asset Activity
Management report
formatting features to
include/exclude data and
append suffixes to identify
report types.

AMDP2021 Sorts depreciation activity Asset Management, RUN_AMDP2000

by alternate account. (SQR) Financial Reports,
Depreciation Activity by
Accounting Entries, Alt
Alternate Account
Account Activity Detail,
Depreciation Activity by
Alt Account

656 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix C PeopleSoft Asset Management Reports

Report ID and Report Description Navigation Run Control Page

Name

AMDP2100 Sorts cost activity by Asset Management, RUN_AMDP2100

ChartField, by Category, Financial Reports, Cost and
Net Book Value
Location, or by Account Depreciation, Asset Net
(SQR). Use the PeopleSoft Book Value
Asset Management report
formatting features to
include/exclude data and
append suffixes to identify
report types. This report
also provides options for
assets that have had their
depreciation stopped.

AMDP2121 Sorts asset net book value Asset Management, RUN_AMDP2100

information by alternate Financial Reports,
Asset Net Book Value by
account. (SQR) Accounting Entries, Alt
Alternate Account
Account Activity Detail,
Net Book by Alt Account

AMDP2150 Lists estimated depreciation Asset Management, RUN_AMDP2150_RQST

accumulation of the Financial Reports, Cost and
Group Member Estimated
member. (SQR) Depreciation, Group
NBV
Member Estimated NBV

AMDP2200 Sorts assets by period Asset Management, RUN_AMDP2200

depreciation at asset, Financial Reports, Cost and
Depreciation by Period
category, department, book, Depreciation, Depreciation
or project levels. (SQR) Use by Period
the PeopleSoft Asset
Management report
formatting features to
include/exclude data.

AMDP2300 Sorts assets by fiscal year Asset Management, RUN_AMDP2300

depreciation at asset, Financial Reports, Cost and
Depreciation by Fiscal Year
category, project, Depreciation, Depreciation
department, or book levels. by Fiscal Year
(SQR) Use the PeopleSoft
Asset Management report
formatting features to
include/exclude data.

AMGL1000 Reconciles AM to GL by Asset Management, RUN_RPT_TBLS_REPS

ChartField. (Crystal) Financial Reports, Cost and
Crystal - AM to GL
Depreciation, AM/GL and
Reconciliation by
NBV Reports
Department

AMGL1010 Reconciles AM to GL by Asset Management, RUN_RPT_TBLS_REPS

category. (Crystal) Financial Reports, Cost and
Crystal - AM to GL
Depreciation, AM/GL and
Reconciliation by Category
NBV Reports

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 657
PeopleSoft Asset Management Reports Appendix C

Report ID and Report Description Navigation Run Control Page

Name

AMNB1000 Sorts net book value by Asset Management, RUN_RPT_TBLS_REPS

ChartField. (Crystal) Financial Reports, Cost and
Crystal - Asset NBV by
Depreciation, AM/GL and
ChartField
NBV Reports

AMNB1010 Lists net book value related Asset Management, RUN_RPT_TBLS_REPS

amounts sorted by category. Financial Reports, Cost and
Crystal - Asset NBV by
(Crystal) Depreciation, AM/GL and
Category
NBV Reports

AMNB1030 Lists net book value related Asset Management, RUN_RPT_TBLS_REPS

amounts sorted by location. Financial Reports, Cost and
Crystal - Asset NBV by
(Crystal) Depreciation, AM/GL and
Location
NBV Reports

Impairment Reports

Report ID and Report Description Navigation Run Control Page

Name

AMIMP001 Lists impaired asset values Asset Management, AM_IMP_RPT_RUN_CTL

summarized by asset Financial Reports, Cost and
Impaired Asset Value
category. (Crystal) depreciation, Asset
Report by Category
Impairment, Impaired Asset
Value Report by Category

AMIMP002 Lists impaired asset values Asset Management, AM_IMP_RPT_RUN_CTL

summarized by asset CGU. Financial Reports, Cost and
Impaired Asset Value
(Crystal) depreciation, Asset
Report by CGU
Impairment, Impaired Asset
Value Report by CGU

Account Activity Reports

Report ID and Report Description Navigation Run Control Page

Name

AMAS2030 Lists cost and related Asset Management, RUN_AMAE2000

transaction amounts per Financial Reports,
Account Activity Summary
account with ChartFields, Accounting Entries,
- Cost
book, and report totals. Account Activity Summary
(SQR)

AMDP2030 Lists depreciation and Asset Management, RUN_AMAE2000

related transaction amounts Financial Reports,
Account Activity Summary
per account with Accounting Entries,
- Depreciation
ChartFields, book, and Account Activity Summary
report totals. (SQR)

658 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix C PeopleSoft Asset Management Reports

Report ID and Report Description Navigation Run Control Page

Name

AMDP2130 Lists cost balance, YTD, Asset Management, RUN_AMAE2000

LTD, depreciation and Financial Reports,
Account Activity Summary
NBV amount per account. Accounting Entries,
- Net Book Value
(SQR) Account Activity Summary

AMAS2031 Lists cost and related Asset Management, RUN_AMAE2001

transaction amounts per Financial Reports,
AltAccount Activity
account with ChartFields, Accounting Entries, Alt
Summary - Cost
book, and report totals. Accounting Entry Detail
(SQR)

AMAS2021 Sorts cost activity by Asset Management, RUN_AMAS2000

Alternate Account. (SQR) Financial Reports, Cost and
Cost Activity by Alt
Depreciation, Cost Activity
Account
Report

AMDP2031 Lists depreciation and Asset Management, RUN_AMAE2001

related transaction amounts Financial Reports,
AltAccount Activity
per account with Accounting Entries, Alt
Summary - Depreciation
ChartFields, book, and Accounting Entry Detail
report totals. (SQR)

AMDP2131 Lists cost, depreciation and Asset Management, RUN_AMAE2001

net book value amounts per Financial Reports,
AltAccount Activity
account with ChartFields, Accounting Entries, Alt
Summary - Net Book Value
book, and report totals. This Accounting Entry Detail
report is similar to the
Account Activity Summary
Report. (SQR)

Accounting Entry Reports

Report ID and Report Description Navigation Run Control Page

Name

AMAE2100 Lists accounting entry Asset Management, RUN_AMAE2100

details. (SQR) Financial Reports,
Accounting Entry Detail
Accounting Entries,
Account Entry

AMAE2101 Retrieves alternate account Asset Management, RUN_AMAE2101

entry information with Financial Reports,
Alternate Account Entry
ChartField, alternate Accounting Entries, Alt
Detail
account and report totals. Account Entry
(SQR)

AMAE2102 Retrieves accounting entry Asset Management, RUN_AMAE2102

information for assets that Financial Reports,
Retired as Expensed
are disposed as expensed. Accounting Entry
Accounting Entry
(SQR)

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 659
PeopleSoft Asset Management Reports Appendix C

Report ID and Report Description Navigation Run Control Page

Name

AMAE2110 Lists cost and related Asset Management, RUN_AMAE2000

transaction amounts per Financial Reports,
Accounting Entry Detail -
asset, with ChartFields, Accounting Entries,
Cost
book, and report totals. Account Activity Summary
(SQR)

AMAE2120 Lists depreciation and Asset Management, RUN_AMAE2000

related transaction amounts Financial Reports,
Accounting Entry Detail -
per asset, with ChartFields, Accounting Entries,
Depreciation
book, and report totals. Account Activity Summary
(SQR)

AMAE2130 Lists cost balance, YTD, Asset Management, RUN_AMAE2000

and LTD depreciation and Financial Reports,
Accounting Entry Detail -
NBV amounts per asset. Accounting Entries,
Net Book Value
(SQR) Account Activity Summary

AMAE2111 Gather alternate account Asset Management, RUN_AMAE2001

entry detail information. Financial Reports,
Alt Acct Entry Detail − All Lists cost beginning and Accounting Entries, Alt
ending balance with related Account Entry Detail
transaction amounts. (SQR)

AMAE2121 Gather alternate account Asset Management, RUN_AMAE2001

entry detail information. Financial Reports,
Alt Acct Entry Detail − Lists cost beginning and Accounting Entries, Alt
Depr ending balance with related Account Entry Detail
transaction amounts. (SQR)

AMAE2131 Lists Cost Balance, YTD, Asset Management, RUN_AMAE2001

and LTD Depreciation and Financial Reports,
Alt Acct Entry Detail − NBV amount per asset. Accounting Entries, Alt
NBV (SQR) Account Entry Detail

Physical Inventory Reports

Report ID and Report Description Navigation Run Control Page

Name

AMPI2000 Gathers PI extract data. Asset Management, RUN_AMPI2000

(SQR) Physical Inventory, Run
Physical Inventory Extract
Physical Inventory Reports

AMPI2100 Gathers PI scan data. (SQR) Asset Management, RUN_AMPI2000

Physical Inventory, Run
Physical Inventory Scan
Physical Inventory Reports
Data

660 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix C PeopleSoft Asset Management Reports

Report ID and Report Description Navigation Run Control Page

Name

AMPI2200 Gathers PI inventoried Asset Management, RUN_AMPI2000

results. (SQR) Physical Inventory, Run
Physical Inventory Results -
Physical Inventory Reports
INVENTORIED

AMPI2210 Gathers PI unders results. Asset Management, RUN_AMPI2000

(SQR) Physical Inventory, Run
Physical Inventory Results -
Physical Inventory Reports
UNDER

AMPI2220 Gathers PI overs results. Asset Management, RUN_AMPI2000

(SQR) Physical Inventory, Run
Physical Inventory Results -
Physical Inventory Reports
OVER

AMDE4001 Lists detailed information Asset Management, RUN_AMAS2200

about assets within Financial Reports, Asset
Inventory Report (Detail
inventory. (Crystal) Details, By Location,
Version)
Inventory Report (Detail
Version)

AMDE4002 Lists summarized Asset Management, RUN_AMAS2200

information about assets Financial Reports, Asset
Inventory Report (Short
within inventory. (Crystal) Details, By Location,
Version)
Inventory Report (Short
Version)

Lease Reports

Report ID and Report Description Navigation Run Control Page

Name

AMLE2000 Lists lease summary Asset Management, RUN_AMLE2000

information. (SQR) Financial Reports, Leased
Lease Summary
Assets, Summary or Detail
Information

AMLE2100 Lists lease detail Asset Management, RUN_AMLE2000

information. (SQR) Financial Reports, Leased
Lease Detail Information
Assets, Summary or Detail

AMLE2200 Lists lease detail Asset Management, RUN_AMLE2200

information. (SQR) Financial Reports, Leased
Lease Amortization
Assets, Summary or Detail
Schedule

AMLE2310 Lists all outstanding lease Asset Management, RUN_AMLE2300

commitments for five years Financial Reports, Leased
Lease Footnote Disclosure
and provides the monthly Assets, Footnote Disclosure
Summary
lease payment and yearly
totals. (SQR)

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 661
PeopleSoft Asset Management Reports Appendix C

Report ID and Report Description Navigation Run Control Page

Name

AMLE2300 Lists all outstanding lease Asset Management, RUN_AMLE2300

commitments for five years Financial Reports, Reports,
Lease Footnote Disclosure
and provides the monthly Leased Assets, Footnote
Detail
lease payment and yearly Disclosure
totals. (SQR)

AMLE2400 Lists all leases expiring in a Asset Management, RUN_AMLE2400

certain number of days from Financial Reports, Leased
Lease Expiration
a specified date, or leases Assets, Lease Expiration
expiring within a date range
that you select. (SQR)

AMAP1001 Compares information Asset Management, RUN_AMAPPYMNTREC

about the lease payments Financial Reports, Leased
AP/AM Lease Payment
from the Asset Management Assets, AP/AM Payment
Reconciliation Report
tables with the voucher Reconciliation
information that is
automatically generated and
stored in the Payables
tables.

Retirement Reports

Report ID and Report Description Navigation Run Control Page

Name

AMRT2000 Sorts retirement information Asset Management, RUN_AMRT2000

by ChartField. (SQR) Financial Reports,
Retirement by ChartField
Retirement, Retirement
Information Report

AMRT2010 Lists retirement information Asset Management, RUN_AMRT2000

with totals per in service Financial Reports,
Retirement by In Service
year/period. (SQR) Retirement, Retirement
Date
Information Report

AMRT2100 Lists retirement related Asset Management, RUN_AMRT2100

information. (SQR) Financial Reports,
Retirement Activity
Retirement, Retirement
Activity Report

AMBI1000 Create the Assets Pending Asset Management, RUN_AMBI1000

to Bill and Invoiced report. Financial Reports,
AM/Billing Transaction
Lists the status of the Retirement, AM/Billing
Status
transactions sent to Billing. Transaction Status

AMRET001 Lists all auto-retired assets. Asset Management, RUN_AMRET001

(SQR) Financial Reports,
Auto-Retired Assets
Retirement, Auto-Retired
Assets

662 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix C PeopleSoft Asset Management Reports

U.S. Tax Reports

Report ID and Report Description Navigation Run Control Page

Name

AMTX3000 Lists acquisition Asset Management, Taxes, RUN_AMTX3000

information for tax Reports, Gain/Loss Report
Tax Acquisitions
purposes. (SQR)

Note. This report can be run

in detail or summary mode.

AMTX3100 Lists adjustment Asset Management, Taxes, RUN_AMTX3000

information for tax Reports, Gain/Loss Report
Tax Adjustments
purposes. (SQR)

AMTX3200 Lists adjustment Asset Management, Taxes, RUN_AMTX3000

information for tax Reports, Gain/Loss Report
Tax Retirements
purposes. (SQR) This report
can be run in detail or
summary mode.

AMTX3210 Lists retirement capital Asset Management, Taxes, RUN_AMTX3000

gains information for tax Reports, Gain/Loss Report
Tax Retirement Capital
purposes. (SQR)
Gains

AMTX3220 Use this report to review Asset Management, Taxes, RUN_AMTX3000

LKE activity. (SQR). Reports, Gain/Loss Report
Like Kind Exchanges
Activity

AMTX3500 Gathers depreciation Asset Management, Taxes, RUN_AMTX3000

information for tax Reports, Gain/Loss Report
Tax Depreciation
purposes. (SQR)

AMTX3610 Similar to Tax Depreciation Asset Management, Taxes, RUN_AMTX3000

report, ordered by fiscal Reports, Gain/Loss Report
Tax Depreciation for
year/period or date range.
Current Year Assets
(SQR)

AMTX3620 Similar to Tax Depreciation Asset Management, Taxes, RUN_AMTX3000

report, ordered by fiscal Reports, Gain/Loss Report
Tax Depreciation for Prior
year/period or date range.
Year Assets
(SQR)

AMTX3630 Gathers depreciation Asset Management, Taxes, RUN_AMTX3000

information relevant to Reports, Gain/Loss Report
Tax Depreciation – Listed listed property. (SQR)
Property

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 663
PeopleSoft Asset Management Reports Appendix C

Report ID and Report Description Navigation Run Control Page

Name

AMTX3640 This report is used in Asset Management, Taxes, RUN_AMTX3000

conjunction with the bonus Reports, Gain/Loss Report
Generate Bonus
depreciation. Use to review
Depreciation Tax Reports
bonus depreciation amounts
for Non-Listed Property.

AMTX3650 This report is used in Asset Management, Taxes, RUN_AMTX3000

conjunction with the bonus Reports, Gain/Loss
Generate Bonus
depreciation. Use to review
Depreciation Tax Reports
bonus depreciation amounts
for Listed Property with
business use over 50%.

AMTX4000 Gathers alternative Asset Management, Taxes, RUN_AMTX4000

minimum tax information. Reports, Tax AMT/ACE
Alternative Minimum Tax
(SQR) USA
(AMT)
Note. This report can be run
in detail or summary mode.

AMTX4100 Lists adjusted current Asset Management, Taxes, RUN_AMTX4000

earnings information. Reports, Tax AMT/ACE
Adjusted Current Earnings
(SQR) USA
Worksheet (ACE)

AMTX4200 Run to comply with the US Asset Management, Taxes, RUN_AMTX4200

Tax 40% Rule. (SQR) Reports, 40% Rule Analysis
40% Rule Analysis Report
Note. If you add over 40%
of your assets in the 4th
quarter, you must update the
convention from mid-year
to mid-quarter under certain
US requirements.

This report can be run in

detail or summary mode.

AMTX4300 Gathers alternative Asset Management, Taxes, RUN_AMTX4000

minimum tax information Reports, Tax AMT/ACE
AMT Retirements
from retirements. (SQR) USA

AMTX4400 Gathers adjusted current Asset Management, Taxes, RUN_AMTX4000

earnings information from Reports, Tax AMT/ACE
ACE Retirements
retirements. (SQR) USA

664 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix C PeopleSoft Asset Management Reports

Global Reports

Report ID and Report Description Navigation Run Control Page

Name

AMTX10AU View the amount of Asset Management, Taxes, RUN_AMTX10AU

research and development Reports, RD Deductions
AUS RD Tax Deductions
concessions that can be AUS
claimed. (SQR)

AMTX20AU Lists total tax credits by Asset Management, Taxes, RUN_AMTX20AU

business unit. (SQR) Reports, Tax Credits AUS
Tax Credits by Category
(Australia)

AMRT10AU Lists retirement related Asset Management, RUN_AMRT10AU

information relevant to Financial Reports,
Retirement Activity (AUS)
Australian Retirements for a Retirement, AUS
business unit and book. Retirement Activity
(SQR)

AMRT20AU Lists assets that have been Asset Management, RUN_AMRT20AU

partially or fully retired in Financial Reports,
Retirement Detail by
the periods specified for Retirement, AUS
ChartField (Australia)
Australia sorted by Retirement Information
ChartField. (SQR)

AMTX10CA (CAN) Creates and prints Asset Management, RUN_AMTX10CA

columns of information Financial Reports,
CCA Year End Updates
required by Revenue Accounting Entries, CCA
CAN
Canada and CCA year end Year End CAN
results. (Crystal)

AMTX11CA (CAN) Creates and prints Asset Management, RUN_AMTX10CA

columns of information Financial Reports,
CCA Report
required by Revenue Accounting Entries, CCA
Canada and CCA year end Year End CAN
results. (Crystal)

AMTX30AU Monitors CCP adjustments Asset Management, Taxes, RUN_AMTX30AU

and the review process. Reports, Tax CCP AUS
Tax CCP − AUS (SQR)

AMFR2100 Lists retirement related Asset Management, RUN_AMDP2100

information relevant to Financial Reports,
French Retirement Activity
French Retirements. (SQR) Retirement, Retirement
Activity, French Retirement
Activity

AMFR2120 Reports French asset net Asset Management, RUN_AMDP2100

book value information. Financial Reports, Cost and
French Net Book Value
Depreciation, Asset Net
Account
Book Value, French Net
Book Value Account

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 665
PeopleSoft Asset Management Reports Appendix C

Report ID and Report Description Navigation Run Control Page

Name

AMFR2121 Similar to Asset Net Book Asset Management, RUN_AMDP2100

Value by Alternate Financial Reports,
French Net Book Value by
Account, listing French Accounting Entries, Alt
Alternate Account
depreciation related Account Activity Detail,
information. (SQR) French Net Book by Alt
Account

AM_FV_REPORT Facilitates in the required Asset Management, AM_FV_RUN_CTL

disclosures of detail and Financial Reports, Asset
Fair Value Report
summarized fair value Details, Fair Value Report
activity.

AMDE1000 (DEU) Shows the original Asset Management, RUN_AMDE1000

asset cost beginning in year Financial Reports, Asset
Asset History Sheet by
2 of the asset's life. Details, History, Asset
Category
(Crystal) History Sheet by Category

AMDE1001 (DEU) Shows the original Asset Management, RUN_AMDE1000

Asset Cost beginning in Financial Reports, Asset
Asset History Sheet by
year 2 of the asset's life. Details, History, Asset
Account
(Crystal) History Sheet by Account

AMDE1002 (DEU) Shows the original Asset Management, RUN_AMDE1000

Asset Cost beginning in Financial Reports, Asset
Asset History Sheet
year 2 of the asset's life. Details, History, Asset
Summary
(Crystal) History Sheet Summary

AMDE1101 (DEU) Lists chronological Asset Management, RUN_AMDE1000

history of asset Financial Reports, Asset
Depreciation History
depreciation, including any Details, History,
extraordinary depreciation. Depreciation History
(Crystal)

AMDE1102 (DEU) Lists chronological Asset Management, RUN_AMDE1000

detailed history of Financial Reports, Asset
Extraordinary Depreciation
extraordinary asset Details, History,
History
depreciation. (Crystal) Extraordinary Depreciation
History

AMDE5001 (DEU) Reconciles AP Asset Asset Management, RUN_AMDE5000

Vouchers with AM asset Financial Reports, Cost and
Reconciliation AP/AM
transaction information. Depreciation,
(Crystal) Reconciliation AP/AM

AMBT1000 (JPN) Gathers business tax Asset Management, Taxes, RUN_AMBT1000

information on a specific Reports, Business Tax
Business Tax
account and location. (SQR)

AMBT1010 (JPN) Gathers business tax Asset Management, Taxes, RUN_AMBT1000

information on a specific Reports, Business Tax
Business Tax by Alternate
alternate account and
Account
location. (SQR)

666 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix C PeopleSoft Asset Management Reports

Report ID and Report Description Navigation Run Control Page

Name

AMED1000 (JPN) Gathers business tax Asset Management, Taxes, RUN_AMED1000

information on assets that Reports, Extended
Extended Depreciation
have extended depreciation. Depreciation
(SQR)

AMAD1000 Obtains the advanced Asset Management, RUN_AMAD1000

depreciation amount for the Financial Reports, Cost and
Advanced Depreciation
specified asset ID range. Depreciation, Advanced
Amount
(Crystal) Depreciation

AMAD1010 Obtains reversal amounts Asset Management, RUN_AMAD1000

for the specified asset ID Financial Reports, Cost and
Advanced Depreciation
range. (Crystal) Depreciation, Advanced
Reverse Amount
Depreciation

AMIMP001 Review impairment asset Asset Management, RUN_AMIMP001

values by category. Financial Reports, Cost and
Imp Asset Value Report by
(Crystal). Depreciation, Asset
Category
Impairment, Imp Asset
Value Report by Category

AMIMP002 Review impairment asset Asset Management, RUN_AMIMP001

values by CGU. (Crystal). Financial Reports, Cost and
Imp Asset Value Report by
Depreciation, Asset
CGU
Impairment, Imp Asset
Value Report by Category

AMSP1000 Obtains reversal amounts Asset Management, RUN_AMSP1000

for the specified Asset ID Financial Reports,
Reserve Detail by Asset ID
range. (Crystal) Accounting Entries,
Reserve and Reverse
Amounts

AMSP1010 Lists reserve amounts and Asset Management, RUN_AMSP1000

details for fiscal years by Financial Reports,
Reserve Summary by
asset ID. (Crystal) Accounting Entries,
Category
Reserve and Reverse
Amounts

AMSP1020 Lists reverse amounts and Asset Management, RUN_AMSP1000

details for fiscal years by Financial Reports,
Reverse Detail by Asset ID
Asset ID. (Crystal) Accounting Entries,
Reserve and Reverse
Amounts

AMSP1030 Lists summarized reverse Asset Management, RUN_AMSP1000

information by category. Financial Reports,
Reverse Summary by
(Crystal) Accounting Entries,
Category
Reserve and Reverse
Amounts

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 667
PeopleSoft Asset Management Reports Appendix C

Report ID and Report Description Navigation Run Control Page

Name

EU_2054 (FRA) View information on Asset Management, EU_AM_RUNCNTRL

the asset, its cost and net Financial Reports,
2054ab Reports by Account
book value, information on Accounting Entries,
all transactions that Statutory Report 2054/2055
occurred in the specified
reporting year, including
depreciation and yearly
depreciation. (Crystal)

EU_2055A (FRA) View information on Asset Management, EU_AM_RUNCNTRL

the asset, its cost and net Financial Reports,
2055a Reports by Account
book value, information on Accounting Entries,
all transactions that Statutory Report 2054/2055
occurred in the specified
reporting year, including
depreciation and yearly
depreciation. (Crystal)

EU_2055B (FRA) View information on Asset Management, EU_AM_RUNCNTRL

the asset, its cost and net Financial Reports,
2055b Reports by Account
book value, information on Accounting Entries,
all transactions that Statutory Report 2054/2055
occurred in the specified
reporting year, including
depreciation and yearly
depreciation. (Crystal)

EU_205x1 (FRA) View information on Asset Management, EU_AM_RUNCNTRL

the asset, its cost and net Financial Reports,
2054ab Reports by Alt
book value, information on Accounting Entries,
Account
all transactions that Statutory Report 2054/2055
occurred in the specified
reporting year, including
depreciation and yearly
depreciation. (Crystal)

EU_205x2 (FRA) View information on Asset Management, EU_AM_RUNCNTRL

the asset, its cost and net Financial Reports,
2054a Reports by Alt
book value, information on Accounting Entries,
Account
all transactions that Statutory Report 2054/2055
occurred in the specified
reporting year, including
depreciation and yearly
depreciation. (Crystal)

EU_205x3 View information on the Asset Management, EU_AM_RUNCNTRL

asset, its cost and net book Financial Reports,
2054b Reports by Alt
value, information on all Accounting Entries,
Account
transactions that occurred in Statutory Report 2054/2055
the specified reporting year,
including depreciation and
yearly depreciation.
(Crystal)

668 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
Appendix C PeopleSoft Asset Management Reports

Report ID and Report Description Navigation Run Control Page

Name

AMLT1000 (JPN) Local tax report. Asset Management, Taxes, RUN_AMLT1000

(SQR) Reports, Local Tax Returns
Japanese Local Tax Roll

AMLT1100 (JPN) Local tax increase Asset Management, Taxes, RUN_AMLT1100

report. (SQR) Reports, Local Tax Returns
Japanese Local Tax
Increase All Asset List

AMLT1200 (JPN) Local tax decrease Asset Management, Taxes, RUN_AMLT1100

report. (SQR) Reports, Local Tax Returns
Japanese Local Tax
Decrease All Asset List

AMNT1000 (JPN) List depreciation Asset Management, Taxes, RUN_AMNT1000

calculation details to be Reports, National Tax
Japanese National Tax
reported to the Japanese
Tax Office. The report
includes all required
information for the National
Depreciable Asset Tax
Return called Beppyo
16(1),(2) in Japan. (SQR)

AMDP2500 (ITA) Run to comply with Asset Management, RUN_AMDP2500

Italian article 16, D.P.R. Financial Reports, Cost and
Fixed Assets Register
600/73. The fixed asset Depreciation, Assets
Report
book lists information Register (ITA)
relevant to fixed assets.
(SQR)

AMDP2510 (IND) Run to generate an Asset Management, RUN_AMDP2510

historical record of assets Financial Reports, Cost and
Assets Register INDIA
over the fiscal year period Depreciation, Assets
to comply with The Indian Register (IND)
Tax Depreciation Act
(Indian Income Tax Act
1961). Can generate by
business unit or
tax/reporting entity. (SQR).

AMTX2000 (IND) Calculate the annual Asset Management, Taxes, RUN_AMTX2000

tax depreciation balances Reports, Depreciation
Depreciation Balance IND
for India. (Crystal). Balance IND

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 669
 Index
acquisition costs 68
Numerics/Symbols Acquisition Details page 49
Add/Copy Asset Book page 17
(DEU) asset history sheet by account report 666 addition transactions 257
(DEU) asset history sheet reports 666 adjusted current earnings worksheet (ACE) report
(DEU) depreciation history report 666 664
(DEU) extraordinary depreciation history report adjustment transactions 257
666 advanced depreciation 512
(DEU) reconciliation AP/AM report 666 advanced depreciation reports 667
(FRA) Statutory French 2054ab Reports by Advanced Transaction Details page 377
Account 668 advance payments 155
(FRA) Statutory French 2054ab Reports by Alt Allocation Basis Definition component
Account 668 Allocations page 349, 350
(FRA) Statutory French 2054a Reports by Alt Definition page 349
Account 668 allocations 347
(FRA) Statutory French 2054b Reports by Alt depreciation expenses 347
Account 668 running the depreciation allocation process
(FRA) Statutory French 2055a Reports by 353
Account 668 setting up 348
(FRA) Statutory French 2055b Reports by specifying criteria 351
Account 668 Allocations page — Allocation Basis Definition
(ITA) fixed assets register report 669 349, 350
(JPN) business tax by alternate account report 666 allocation table 305
(JPN) business tax report 666 ALM
(JPN) extended depreciation report 667 overview 1
(JPN) Japanese Local Tax Decrease All Asset List altaccount activity summary reports 659
669 alternate account entry detail reports 659
(JPN) Japanese Local Tax Increase All Asset List alternative minimum tax (AMT) report 664
669 AM_DEPR_CALC
(JPN) Local Tax Return page 59 running 314
(JPN) local tax roll reports 669 AM/BI Interface page 378, 400
(JPN) national tax report 669 AM/Billing Transaction Status page 401
2054 2055 Reports page 487, 489 AM/Billing Transaction Status report 662
40% rule analysis report 664 AMDPARCH process 522
AM Specific Fields page - Asset Mass Change
Definition 423
AM Specific Fields page — Asset Mass Change
A Definition 282, 283, 426
AM to GL reconciliation by category report 657
account activity summary reports 658 AM to GL reconciliation by Department report
accounting entries 657
common field definitions 369 AMT retirements report 664
creating 355, 367 AMTX3210 report 99
reversing 356 AMUDDEPR.SQC program 337
sources in Asset Management 355 Annual Cost page - CAP Details 134
understanding 355 AP/AM Reconciliation Report 169
Accounting Entries component 22 Approve Asset Transfer page 468
Accounting Entry Approve Disposal page 415
set up 357 Approve Disposals page 19, 379
Accounting Entry Creation process 356 Approve Financial Information component 23
accounting entry detail reports 659 Approve Financial page 435
Accounting Entry Distribution process 410 Approve Lease Information component 23
Accounting Entry Generation process 354 Load Approval page 44
accounting entry templates 358 Load Preview page 44
accounting entry templates report 654 Approve Physical A or B page 438
accounting entry types 359 Approve Physical Information component 23
accounting periods Archive Cost/Depreciation page 20, 522
closing 373 archiving
viewing closed periods 367 inactive assets 522
accumulated depreciation 312 restoring data 525
ACE retirements report 664 understanding 521
acquisition codes 55 using mass change 526

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 671
Index

viewing results 523 Asset Operational Information

arrears payments 155 nonfinancial assets 120
Asset Acquisition Detail page 49, 68 Asset page - Asset Depreciation 321
asset acquisitions by ChartField report 655 Asset Parent page 115, 116
asset acquisitions by in service date report 655 asset profiles
Asset Addition page 212 composite assets 271
Asset Allocations page 351 setting up for group assets 252
Asset Archive process 522 Asset Property page 52
Asset Archive process (AMDPARCH) 522 Asset Property Tax page 23
asset blocks 496 Asset R&D Information page 49, 58
Asset Book History - Detail page 267 asset reclassifications report 655
Asset Book History - List page 267 Asset Restore process (AM_CD_RESTO 525
asset books assets
maintaining 89 copying 106
asset budgeting assets, adding 46
linking to capital acquisition plans 137 assets, auctioning 416
overview 133 assets, creating and maintaining 45
asset categories report 654 adding using Excel to Component Interface
Asset Checkout page 24 (ExcelToCI) utility 128
asset classes basic information 52
assigning 54, 104 changing depreciation rates 266
Asset Component Hierarchy Move report 109 changing group asset ID 257
asset component hierarchy page 109 defining parent-child relationships 114
Asset Component Hierarchy page 16, 108 defining status 55, 105
asset components entering capitalization information 70
work order options 66 entering location and custom attributes 73
Asset Cost Adjust/Transfers component insurance information 242
Cost Information page 179 manufacture, license, and custodian
Main Transaction page 176 information 75
Asset Cost IU Book Transfer page 175, 186 tracking costs 233
Asset Cost IU Transfer page 175 using Asset ExpressAdd 100
Asset Definitions using Basic Add 48
navigation 15 assets, depreciation 90, 96
Asset Depreciation component listed property assets 615
Asset page 321 salvage value 613
Depreciation page 321, 322 tax credits 614
Period Depreciation page 321, 323 assets, printing 127
asset details assets, processing
entering 62 group assets 249
Asset Details component 22 assets, recategorizing 183
Asset ExpressAdd 100 assets, reinstating 418
Asset Information page 115, 468 assets, retiring 375, 376
asset inspection group members 250
tracking 233 like-kind exchanges 389
Asset Inspection page 24 non-financial 417
Asset Insurance page 23, 243 putting up for auction 416
asset licenses report 654 traded-in assets 389
Asset Location Transfer page 175 using the disposal worksheet 412
asset maintenance assets, revaluing
scheduling and tracking 231 France 489
tracking financial information 233 net method 483
asset management units/books report 654 processing 483
Asset Mass Change Definition component setting up 475
AM Specific Fields page 282, 283, 423, 426 assets, searching 124
Criteria and Defaults page 282, 283, 423, 424 assets, transferring
Description page 282, 423 adjusting costs or quantity 181
Execution History page 282, 423 between business units 184
Generate SQL page 282, 283, 423, 427 books 186
Asset Meter Information component 24 children 189
asset meters cost adjustments and transfers 174
associating to assets 83 retroactive transfers 183
maintaining 82 within business units 182
Asset Meters page 83 assets, viewing
asset NBV by category report 658 book history 267
asset NBV by ChartField report 658 inventory data 291
asset NBV by location report 658 maintenance history 246
Asset NBV reports 345 assets by asset ID report 655
asset net book value by alternate account report 657 Assets by Location — Parameters page 49

672 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
 Index

assets by location report 655 retired assets 398

Asset Service/Repair Details component Book - Depreciation page 89, 90
Maintenance Details page 234 Book - Tax page 89, 97
Payment page 238 book code discrepancy report 654
Asset Service/Repair History component books
Maint History by Type page 247 defining 90, 96, 97, 252
Asset Set Up Lists 654 estimated net value calculation 264
Assets Register - IND page 497, 499 maintaining 89
Assets Register - ITA page 502 retiring 188
assets register INDIA reports 669 reviewing changes 267
asset supplemental data budgeting
entering 81 capital acquisition planning 133
Asset Supplemental Data page 81, 121 buildings
Asset Transfer Request page 468 depreciation 491
asset transfers by ChartField report 655 business processes 2
Asset Unit Aggregate RD - AUS page 476 business tax for France 98
Asset Unit Aggregate RD page 477 Business Tax Report page 487
asset warranties business units
entering 241 setting up for joint ventures 301, 303
Asset Warranties 246 By ChartField page — Retire/Reinstate Assets
Asset Warranties page 24 377, 393
asset warranties report 654
Asset Warranties report 246
Asset Warranty page 240
auctions 416 C
AUS RD Tax Deductions report 665
Australia CCP Report page 477, 481 Calculate Balances IND page 497
Australian reports 665 Calculate Inflation page 21
retirement activity report 665 Calculate Local Taxes component 23
retirement detail by ChartField report 665 Calculate Replacement Cost page 16
Australian Revaluation process 483 Canada support 484
Australia support CCA Reporting 485
asset revaluations 472, 483 overview 470
CCP 481 running CCA year end update process 486
CGT calculation 482 setting up CCA reporting 473
defining R&D asset eligibility 477 Canadian reports 665
defining R&D assets 477, 478 CAP See capital acquisition plans (CAP)
enabling R&D calculations 477 CAP Detail Long Description page 134
overview 470 CAP Details component
recording goods and services tax (GST) Annual Cost page 134
480, 481 Authorization page 135
setting up revaluations 475 Justification page 135
tax credit allowance 478 Capital Acquisition Planning
tracking changes in CCP 480 Capital Lease Payments page 138
Authorization page - CAP Details 135 Financial Assets page 138
auto-discovery tool 278 Non-Financial Assets page 138
Auto-Retired Assets page 378 Operating Lease Payments page 139
auto-retired assets report 662 Summary page 139
Auto-Retire Fully Depr Assets page 19 capital acquisition planning assets report 656
Auto-Retire Fully Depreciated Assets page Capital Acquisition Planning component
378, 411 CAP Detail Long Description page 134
auto approval 286 Details page 134, 135
Parameters page 139
capital acquisition plans (CAP)
B adjusting costs 137
assigning names and ChartFields 135
defining 134
bar charts 463 defining class 135
bar code scanning devices 277 developing 133
Basic Add 48, 117 leased assets 149
Basic Add - O&M 122 linking assets to 53, 104, 137
Basic Add page 16 reporting 139
Beginning of Year page 485 understanding 133
Bill Information page — Retire/Reinstate Assets viewing 137
378, 398 capital acquisition plans by department report 656
Billing capital acquisition plans report 656
processing reinstatements 418 capital cost allowance (CCA)
processing retired assets 398 calculating and reporting 485

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 673
Index

running year end update 486 component asset hierarchy

Capital Gain page — Retire/Reinstate Assets view 108
378, 398 composite assets See Also group assets
capital gains tax (CGT) adding 270, 271
calculating for Australia 482 adjusting cost or quantity 274
specifying assets 482 adjusting costs or quantity 273
capital investment projects capitalizing members 271, 273
defining for Australia 478 performing transactions 272, 273
capitalization information 70, 101 retiring 272, 273
Capitalization Limit Cd page 494 transferring and recategorizing 274
Capitalization Summary Report page 19 understanding 269
capitalization threshold 46 composite depreciation 513
Capitalization Threshold Validation page 19 Computer Aided Facility Mgmt component 23
capitalized assets Consolidation process
composite members 273 example of asset additions 259
creating composite assets 270 example of asset adjustments 262
understanding composite assets 269 summary levels 261
viewing costs 208 conversion
capitalize status date options 37
defining for composite member assets 271 deleting interim data 39
Capital Lease Payments page - Capital Acquisition depreciating converted assets 38
Planning 138 leased assets 43
capital leases 141, 143, 156 loading retired assets 40
Cash Generating Unit Definition page 215 overview 31
CCA See capital cost allowance (CCA) prerequisites 32
CCA report 665 reviewing retired asset data 41
CCA Year End Updates CAN report 665 running Transaction Edit 34
CCA Year End Updates page 485, 486 running Transaction Loader (AMIF1000) 33
CCA Yr End - Canada Rpt page 485 verifying 39
CCP viewing results of Transaction Edit 36
reporting 481 writing a custom SQR 33
tracking changes 480 conversion process
Centralized Inter/IntraUnit Processor 184 closing 38
CGT See capital gains tax (CGT) Copy Existing Asset page 16
CGU impairment batch process corporation section 291 99
running 222 Cost/Asset Information page 101, 116
CGU Impairment page 18, 216 Cost / Asset Information page 101
Change/Delete Pending Trans page 19 Cost/Depreciation Restore page 525
changes in creditable purpose See Also See CCP cost activity by alt account report 659
ChartField Format Template page 455 cost activity report 655
ChartField Search Criteria page 379 Cost Adjust/Transfer Asset component
Chart Image page — Generate AM Charts 463 Main Transaction page 274
Charting Financial Data 461 Cost Adjust/Transfer Asset page 18
Child Asset Retirement Options page 377 Cost and Depreciation 22
child assets Cost and Depreciation page 216, 458
copying 106 Cost and Depreciation Summary component 21
Child Assets page 116, 118, 176, 189, 321, 325 Cost and Depreciation Summary page 21
Child Assets page - Retire/Reinstate Assets 394 Cost History Detail page 210, 524
Cost History List page 209, 524
Child Assets page — Retire/Reinstate Assets 377 Cost Information page 175
Child Asset TRF/RCT Overrides page 176 Cost page - Lease Express Add 146, 156
Child Details page 190 Cost page - Update Lease Information 146
Child Inherits Parent's Life option 117 costs
classes adjusting and transferring assets 174
capital acquisition plans 135 adjusting composite assets 273
defining for assets 54, 104 consolidating for group assets 258
clearing reconciliation entering transfer information 179
capitalization threshold 373 leases 153
Clearing Reconciliation page 373 maintenance details 236
Close Accounting Period page 21 viewing archived data 524
Close Asset Period page 373 viewing history 208
closed accounting periods 373 cost summarization
Close Depreciation page 21 generating 210
collateral assets 514 Cost Summarization page 19
Comment page - User Defined Methods 335 coverage 242
Comments page 234
Coverage page — Maintenance Contracts 239, 240
common fields xxi
companion documentation xx Create (CAP) Plan page 18
Create Accounting Entries page 21, 371

674 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
 Index

Create Asset Copies page 106 Depreciation Activity page 327

Create Event page 416 depreciation activity report 656
Create Extract Rules page 24 depreciation allocation 348
Create New Group Rate page 266 Depreciation Allocation (AMALLOC) process
Create Parent - Child Assets page 115, 116 353
Create Parent page 17 Depreciation Balance - IND page 497
Create Schedules page 24, 282, 287 depreciation balance (IND) report 669
Criteria and Defaults page - Asset Mass Change depreciation begin date 616
Definition 423, 424 Depreciation by Activity report 327
Criteria and Defaults page — Asset Mass Change depreciation by fiscal year report 657
Definition 282, 283 Depreciation by Fiscal Year report 327
currency rounding depreciation by period report 657
options for Japan 515 Depreciation by Period report 327
Custodian/License page — Parent Child Basic Depreciation Calculation process 314, 615
Information 116 depreciation calculations
custodian information 75 formula-based methods 633
group assets 263
life to date calculation 618, 620
listed property assets 615
D NBV < Salvage 647
prior period 626
remaining value and life 617
Declining Balance with a Straight Line Switch
salvage value 613
depreciation 640
status 316
Declining Balance with Depreciation Limit 641
tax 420
Define Allocations for Asset page 349
tax credits 614
Define Asset Operational Information - Asset
understanding 613
Information page 122
yearly 619
O&M Basic Add 121
Depreciation Calculation Tax page 420
Define Asset Operational Information - Asset
depreciation close
Property page 121
understanding 367
Define Asset Operational Information -
Depreciation Close process 266, 354, 371
Customize Page Layout page 121
Depreciation component 23
Define Asset Operational Information page 16
depreciation expenses
Define Criteria page 25
allocation 347
Define Inventory Occurrence component
setting up allocations 348
Definition page 283
Depreciation Information page 101
Define Inventory Occurrence page 25
Depreciation Method Information page 89, 96
Define Tax/Depr Criteria page 17
depreciation methods 92
Definition page - Lease Express Add 146, 147
assigning user-defined methods 340
Definition page - Update Lease Information 146
declining balance 642
Definition page — Allocation Basis Definition declining balance switching to straight line
349 640
Definition page — Physical Inventory Control declining balance with depreciation limit 641
281, 283 flat rate 643
Definition page — User Defined Methods 335 geometric digressive 493
depreciation straight line 634
changing rates 266 sum of the years digits 645
converted assets 38 units of production 646
group assets 250 user-defined 329, 333, 337, 338
maintaining book information 90 depreciation methods (France)
retiring assets 411 derogatory method 487
retiring group assets 250 depreciation methods (Germany)
updating attributes 317 Staffel 491
viewing 320 user-defined Staffel 492
viewing by period 323 depreciation methods (India)
viewing child asset depreciation 325 straight line percent 635
viewing net book value and yearly depreciation methods (Japan)
depreciation 322 5 percent retirement 514
what if simulation modeling 341 composite depreciation 513
depreciation accounting entries declining balance 508
accumulated depreciation 312 Depreciation page - Asset Depreciation 321
adjusting for prior periods 312 Depreciation page — Asset Depreciation 322
creating 312 depreciation processing 313
creating for a period 371 creating pending transactions 319
leased assets 158 India 496
depreciation activity by alternate account report overview 310
656 storing entries by period 318

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 675
Index

Depreciation Process Log page 20 32

depreciation rate adding assets 128
useful life for Japan 507 example spreadsheet 130
depreciation reporting 326 template for Asset Management 128
loading report table 327 exchanging assets 389
US reports 310 Execution History page - Asset Mass Change
depreciation results Definition 423
loading into a spreadsheet 344 Execution History page — Asset Mass Change
Depreciation Terms page 495 Definition 282
depreciation variables 330 Expand Depreciation by Period page 319
Depr Reporting Table page 327 Express Add component
derogatory depreciation Cost/Asset Information page 101
creating accounting entries 488 creating group member assets 254
Description page - Asset Mass Change Definition defining parent-child assets 117
423 Express Add page 16
Description page — Asset Mass Change Definition extract and scan scope 280
282 extracting data
Detail page — Maintenance Contracts 239 creating an output file 292
Detail page — Review Book 524 physical inventory 290
Details page - Capital Acquisition Planning
134, 135
Details page — Inventory Results 290
disposal codes 381
F
disposal worksheet
Fair Value 206
retiring assets 412
fair value (FV) 150
Disposal Worksheet page 19, 378, 412
Fair Value page 18, 206
distribution types 359
Federal Energy Regulatory Commission (FERC)
associated with addition (ADD) transactions
codes for group assets 56, 249
359
codes to group assets 251
associated with adjustment (ADJ) transactions
FERC
360
See Federal Energy Regulatory Commission
associated with depreciation (DPR)
(FERC)
transactions 364
financial assets
associated with inflation (INF) transactions
composite assets 269
366
creating composite assets 270
associated with lease payment (LPY)
Financial Assets page - Capital Acquisition
transactions 365
Planning 138
associated with prior period depreciation
Financial Transactions page 433
(PDP) transactions 365
fixed asset register
associated with recategorize (RCT)
reporting for Italy 501
transactions 362
flat rate depreciation 643
associated with retire (RET) transactions 363
averaging option 644
associated with transfer (TRF) transactions
monthly averaging option 644
361
yearly averaging option 645
document sequencing
France support
entering 72
overview 470
drilldown functions
setting up 474
depreciation reporting table 458
French net book value account report 665
Duplicate Serials page 290
French net book value by alternate account report
Duplicate Tags page 289
666
French Net Book Value reports 488
French reports 665, 666
E French retirement activity report 665
French support 486
depreciating assets using the derogatory
Edit Transactions page 35 method 487
employee self-service 466, 467 reporting business tax 487
Enable Lease Payment Integration 162 revaluing assets 489
errors statutory reporting 489
assets retired 297
duplicate tags 297
interunit candidate 297
multiple ChartFields 297
physical inventory processing 297
G
EU_2054 and EU_2055 reports 489
General Information page 49, 52
Event page 233, 234
General Ledger
Excel to Component Interface (ExcelToCI) utility
updating for adjustments and transfers 211

676 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
 Index

general ledger journals defining 67

accounting entry templates 358
General Parent Info page — Parent-Child Basic
Information 116
Generate AM Charts 22
I
Generate AM Charts component
Chart Image page 463 impaired asset value report by category 658
Selection Criteria page 461 impaired asset value report by CGU 658
generate bonus depreciation tax reports 664 impairment asset value report by category 667
Generate SQL page - Asset Mass Change impairment asset value report by CGU (cash
Definition 423 generating unit) 667
Generate SQL page — Asset Mass Change Impairment Comments page 216
Definition 283, 427 impairment losses and reversals
Generate SQL page — Asset Mass Change reports 226
view online 226
Definition 282
impairment worksheet 213
Generate User Defined Methods page 338
working with 216
geometric digressive depreciation 493
Impairment Worksheet page 18, 215
German reports 665, 666
implementation 5
Germany support 489
Import Data via Spreadsheet component 23
creating a user defined Staffel depreciation
Indian reports 665, 669
method 492
India support 496
first day last period depreciation convention
asset depreciation 496
494
overview 471
geometric digressive depreciation 493
processing and reporting depreciation 497
half year prorate convention 493
setting up tax and depreciation 474
overview 470
straight line percent depreciation 635
processing low value assets 494
updating depreciation balance 498
setting up tax and depreciation 474
inquiries 458
special depreciation terms and methods 495
insurance
Staffel depreciation method 491
entering asset information 242
goods and services tax (GST)
entering policy ID 244
adding online 481
entering valuation types 245
recording 480
integration
goods and services tax (VAT) 480
overview diagram 3
Group Asset Consolidation page 258
interest and borrowing rates 150
Group Asset Consolidation process 257
interface types 606
Group Asset Depreciation - Consolidate 258
InterUnit Parent-Child Trans page 18
Group Asset Depreciation page 20, 264
Interunit Proceeds page 189
Group Asset depreciation process 263
InterUnit Proceeds page 176
Group Asset Depreciation process 266
interunit transfers 184
Group Asset Rate Change page 266
inventory See physical inventory
Group Asset Rate Change process 266
inventory report (detail version) 661
group assets
inventory report (short version) 661
249, See Also composite assets, joint ventures
Inventory Results component
consolidating 257, 258
Details page 290
depreciation 250, 263
Results page 290, 296
estimated net book value report 264
involuntary retirements 272
member transactions 256
Italian reports 665, 669
processing 266
Italy support 501
retiring 250
overview 471
setting up 251, 252, 253, 254
IT asset discovery tools 275
transferring members 257
grouping assets
defining parent-child relationships 114
Group Member Estimated NBV page 265
group member estimated NBV report 264, 657
J
Group Member Open Transaction Details page
258 Japanese reports 665, 669
Japan support 503
5 percent retirement method 514
advanced depreciation 512
H advanced depreciation reports 513
asset insurance 242
calculating theoretical NBV and assessment
half-year prorate
value 519
German convention 493
changing the local tax office and asset return
Hazardous Asset Codes page 67
type 519
hazardous assets
composite depreciation 513

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 677
Index

currency rounding options 515 clearing accounts 163

defining local tax returns 516 Lease Payment Integration with Payables 161
depreciation methods 506, 511 Lease Transactions page 432
entering consumption tax 520 License Address page 49
entering local tax return information 518 license information 75
identifying collateral assets 514 License Information − Parameters page 52
local tax reports 515 life to date calculation 618, 620, 624
overview 471 like-kind exchanges
running local tax reports 519 example 391
setting up tax and depreciation 475 processing 389
joint venture assets Like Kind Exchange page 377, 389
adding business units 306 listed property assets 615
changing ownership 304, 306 List page — Review Book 524
defining allocations 303 Load/Match/Reconcile PI Info page
loading transactions 307 25, 289, 292, 293
mass change templates 305
naming conventions 304 Load Approval page — Approve Lease Information
removing business units 306 44
setting up 303 Load Asset Net Book Value query 345
transaction processing 304 Load Budgeting Asset Catalog page 18
understanding 301 loader tables
Justification page - CAP Details 135 financial information table (INTFC_FIN) 531
physical A table (INTFC_PHY_A) 564
physical B table (INTFC_PHY_B) 593
understanding 531
L verifying mass change data 432
Load Interface component 22
label files 292 Load Preview page — Approve Lease Information
lease amortization schedule report 661 44
leased assets 141, 162, 163, 164, 165, 167, 169 Load Reporting Tables component 22
capital and operating leases 141, 143 Load Transactions component 22
conversion 43 Load Transactions into AM page 439
creating 146, 147 load types 272, 436, 606
creating expense schedules 159, 161 Local Tax Return page 49
declining balance depreciation method 508 Location/Comments/Attributes page 49, 73
defining payment schedules 144 Location page — Parent-Child Basic Information
entering fair value (FV) 150 116
entering lease information 149 low-value assets
entering lease term 150 processing for Germany 494
entering lease type 156
entering payments 152
entering payment type 155
entering residual values 151 M
overview 141
reporting 171 maintaining assets
retiring or reinstating 170 checking out 231
running expense schedule 161 Maintain Property Occupants page 16
step leases 142 maintain warranties 88
transferring 170 maintenance
verifying mass changes 432 entering payment information 238
Leased Assets component 22 event status 235
Lease Expense Schedule 161 viewing history 246
Lease Expense Schedule page 16 maintenance contracts
Lease Expense Schedule process 159 tracking 238
Lease Expiration page 171 Maintenance Contracts component
lease expiration report 662 Coverage page 239, 240
Lease Express Add component Detail page 239
Cost page 146, 156 Maintenance Contract Terms page 24
Definition page 146, 147 Maintenance Details page — Asset Service/Repair
Payment Schedule page 147, 158 Details 234
Step Lease Payment page 147, 157 Maint History by Type page — Asset
Lease Express Add page 16 Service/Repair History 247
Lease Footnote Disclosure page 172 Main Transaction page - Asset Cost
lease footnote disclosure reports 661 Adjust/Transfers 176
Lease Information page 172
lease information reports 661 Main Transaction page — Asset Cost
lease interface table 43 Adjust/Transfers 175
Lease Payment Integration manager self-service 466, 467

678 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
 Index

Manufacture/License/Custodian page 49, 75

manufacturer information 75 O
Mass Change
archiving and restoring data 526 Open Transaction Detail page 315
background processing 431 open transactions 356
depreciating assets 440 creating 319
executing 429 reviewing 315
physical inventory 280 searching for 315
populating Asset Management tables 438 Open Transactions - Create page 319
processing overview 422 Open Transactions page 20
U.S. tax 40 percent rule 422 Operating ChartFields 147
understanding 421 Operating Lease Chartfields page 170
using Process Scheduler 430 Operating Lease Payments page - Capital
verifying results 432 Acquisition Planning 139
Mass Change, approval operating leases 141, 143, 156
financial data 435 Operation/Maintenance page 49, 62
physical data 438
Other Options page — Retire/Reinstate Assets
Mass Change, composite assets
377, 392
capitalizing members 271
Ownership Details page 379
loading results 272
processing JPN composite retirement 514
retiring members 272
Mass Change, joint venture assets 304
adding business units 306
P
changing allocations 306
removing business units 306 Parameters page — Capital Acquisition Planning
templates 305 139
Mass Change definitions 422, 423, 424, 426, 427 parent-child assets
Mass Change templates 441 calculating net book value 320
meter reading creating 116, 117
history 87 defining 117
Meter Reading Details page 234 maintaining 118
meter reading history retiring 394
reviewing 87 transferring or recategorizing
meter readings 189, 190, 191, 192
entering 85 understanding relationships 114
prior readings 85 viewing 116, 120
mixed use assets 615 Parent-Child Basic Information component 118
My Assets page 467 Child Assets page 116, 118
My Department page 468 Custodian/License page 116
My Departments page 468 General Parent Info page 116
Location page 116
Parent-Child Basic Information page 17
Parent-Child IU Transfer page 192
N Parent and Child Assets page 116, 120
Parent Asset Adv Txn options page 176
navigation 15 partial transfers 182
Asset Definitions 15 payables
net book value interface to Asset Management 480
calculating 322 tracking goods and services tax (GST) 480
loading depreciation results 344 Payables
net book value report 657 interface to Asset Management 480
Net Book Value Table page 345 tracking goods and services tax (GST) 480
Non-Cap History Detail page 525 Payment page 234
Non-Cap History List page 524 Payment page — Asset Service/Repair Details
non-capitalized assets 238
viewing archived data 524 Payment Schedule page - Lease Express Add 158
Non-Financial Assets page - Capital Acquisition Payment Schedule page - Update Lease
Planning 138 Information 147
Non-Financial Retire page 417 Payment Schedule page — Lease Express Add
Non Cap History Detail page 210 147
Non Cap History List page 210 Payment Schedules page 144
non capitalization information 70 pending transactions
noncapitalized assets deleting or modifying 211
viewing costs 208 viewing details 212
nonfinancial assets Pending Transaction Update/Delete page 212
composite member assets 271 Pending Trans Update/Delete page 212
PeopleSoft Customer Connection web site 4

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 679
Index

PeopleSoft Enterprise Billing See Billing Processing page 20

PeopleSoft Enterprise General Ledger property assets
General Ledger entering 77
PeopleSoft Enterprise IT Asset Management property taxes
IT Asset Management recording 80
PeopleSoft Enterprise Maintenance Management Provide Reason for the Modification page 108
Maintenance Management
PeopleSoft Enterprise Payables Payables
PeopleSoft Enterprise Project Costing
Project Costing Q
PeopleSoft Enterprise Purchasing Purchasing
PeopleSoft Enterprise Real Estate Management queries
Real Estate Management archived data 523
PeopleSoft Enterprise Strategic Sourcing
Strategic Sourcing
period depreciation allocation calculations 621, 624
Period Depreciation page - Asset Depreciation 321 R
Period Depreciation page — Asset Depreciation
323 R&D See research and development (R&D)
physical inventory, processing rates 150
deleting extract files 298 RD Deductions — AUS page 476
deleting inventory results 298 Receive Conversion Data page 39
deleting reconciliation transactions 298 reconciliation 298
deleting scanned data 298 Record Property Taxes page 52, 80
errors 297 recovery information 98
flow diagram 276 reinstatements 418
generating reconciliation transactions 298 related documentation xx
generating results 295 Related Meter Readings page 234
identifying duplicate tags 293 remaining value and life calculations 617, 619
loading inventory data 293 replacement cost
Mass Change process 280 calculate 120
overview 275, 288 Report Field Format Template page 456
viewing extract data 291 reports 451, 653
viewing results 296 account activity 658
physical inventory, reporting 299 accounting entry 659
physical inventory, requirements bar charts 452
hardware 277 capital acquisition plans (CAP) 139, 656
programs for scanners 278 depreciation 656
software 278 generating 454
physical inventory, scheduling 287 global 665
physical inventory, setting up 275, 279 impairments 658
extract scope 282 lease 661
scope and control parameters 280 online 457
transactions 286 online inquiries 452
physical inventory, terminology 276 physical inventory 660
Physical Inventory/Mass Change page 24, 279 retirement 662
Physical Inventory Control component transactions 654
Definition page 281 U.S.A tax 663
Transaction Defaults page 282, 285 viewing financial charts 461
physical inventory extract report 660 Reports component 23, 24
Physical Inventory page 290, 298 research & development (R&D)
physical inventory results reports 661 enabling calculations 477
physical inventory scan data report 660 research and development (R&D)
Physical Inventory Setup page 280 defining asset profiles 477
Physical Transactions A and B pages 434 defining assets 58, 477, 478
using during conversion 36 reserve detail by Asset ID report 667
PI Match status 296 reserve summary by Category report 667
prerequisites 467 residual values 151
Preview AP/PO Information page 22 Restore Cost/Depreciation page 20
Printable view of Asset page 127 restoring archived data 525, 526
Print an Asset page 26 Results page — Inventory Results 290, 296
prior period depreciation 626 Retire/Reinstate Asset page 19
Proceeds and Removal Cost Allocation page 377 Retire/Reinstate Assets component
Proceeds and Removal Cost page 378 Bill Information page 378, 398
Process Allocation page 353 By Chartfield page 393
Process CSV Files page 25 By ChartField page 377
processing depreciation Capital Gain page 378, 398
errors 318

680 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
 Index

Child Assets page 377, 394 Review Receivers page 17

Other Options page 377, 392 Review Vouchers page 17
VAT page 378, 388, 401 rounding
Retire/Reinstate Non-Fin Asset page 19 VAT calculations 406
Retire Assets page 377, 379, 418, 419 rounding options
retired as expensed accounting entry report 659 Japan 515
Retirement 22 Run Depreciation Calculation page 314
retirement activity (Australia) report 665 Run Depreciation Close Process page 371
retirement activity report 662 Run Mass Change page 429, 431
retirement by ChartField report 662 Run Open Trans Tax page 420
retirement by in service date report 662 Run Physical Inventory Reports page 25, 299
retirement detail by ChartField (Australia) report Run Report page 18
665 Run Request page 25
retirements
automating 411
books 188
calculating gains or losses 392 S
calculating VAT 401
composite assets 272, 273 salvage value 613
during inventory 287 scanning devices
joint venture assets 304 loading asset data 292
leased assets 170 scan scope See extract and scan scope
loading retired assets during conversion 40 Search for an Asset page 26, 124
non-financial assets 417 search for assets 124
options 386 indexes and alternate search keys 125
overview 375 Section 179 Expense 614
parent-child assets 394 security
processing like-kind exchanges 389 reviewing after conversion 40
processing traded assets 389 self-service 466
reporting capital gains 419 Selection Criteria page — Generate AM Charts
selling assets by auction 416 461
using the disposal worksheet 412 self-service Web components 465, 467
viewing gains or losses 398 roles 466
retirement types 375 security 466
Retrieve Info from AP/PO page 22 setting up 467
retroactive changes Self Service Web Components
depreciation rates 266 self service application pages 465
Return Information page 516 Send to Budgeting page 18
Revaluation in Mass page 19, 204 serial numbers
revaluations 183 identifying duplicates 294
processing multiple assets 203 servicing
revaluation worksheet 194 scheduling and tracking 233
Revaluation Worksheet 194 viewing history 246
Revaluation Worksheet page 18, 194 servicing and repairs
Revalue AUS page 21 assets 233
reverse detail by Asset ID report 667 Set R&D Info page 478
reverse summary by Category report 667 Set up Lease Payment Integration 164
reversing accounting entries 356, 371 shared assets See joint venture assets
Review Asset Journals page 21 simulations
Review Book component depreciation 341
Detail page 524 SQR
List page 524 using for conversion 33
Review Book page 20 Staffel depreciation methods 491
Review Cost page 20 Statistics page 234, 236
Review Depreciation Info page 20 Step Lease Payment page - Lease Express Add
Review Expense Entries page 21 147, 157
Review Extracted Data page 25, 289, 291 Step Lease Payment page - Update Lease
Review Financial Entries page 21 Information 147
Review Inflation page 20 step leases 142
Reviewing and Approving Lease Payment Stop Depr 647
Information 165 straight line depreciation 634
Review Inventory History page 25, 299 straight line percent depreciation 635
Review Maintenance History page 24 Strategic Sourcing
Review Matching Results page 25 selling assets 416
Review Operating Leases page 21 Summary of Changes page 109
Review Parent-Child NBV page 18 Summary page - Capital Acquisition Planning 139
Review Parent-Child page 17 Summary page - User Defined Methods 334
Review Purchase Orders page 17

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 681
Index

entering cost information 179

T marking up or down 189
overview 174
tags partial transfers 182
identifying duplicates 293 retroactive 183
tax within business units 182
reporting for France 487
tax acquisitions report 663
tax adjustments report 663
Tax CCP − AUS report 665
U
tax credits 99
calculating 614 U.S.A support
using in depreciation calculations 614 tax 40 percent rule 422
tax credits (AUS) tax reports 663
capital investment projects 478 uncapitalized assets
entering in Asset ExpressAdd 479 composite member assets 271
entering in the Asset Book Definition 479 United States Financial Accounting Standards
specifying assets 479 Board (FASB) Statement 13 141
units of production 646
Tax Credits — AUS page 477 Update CCA component 23
tax credits by category (Australia) report 665 Update Lease Information component
Tax Depr Bal page 497, 498 Cost page 146
tax depreciation reports 663 Definition page 146
Tax Depreciation Request page 498 Payment Schedule page 147
taxes Step Lease Payment 147
defining for books 97 Update Lease Information page 16
entering online 72 Update Non-Capitalized Cost page 19, 208
Tax Information page 101 Upload Lease Payments 167
Tax page 49, 72 Useful Life/Rate page 507, 508
Tax Retirement Capital Gains Report 419 user-defined depreciation
tax retirements reports 663 assigning to assets 340
templates copying methods 338
defining report formats 455, 456 creating a depreciation method 333
Theoretical NBV and Assessment Value page 519 generating 338
Track Service and Repairs component SQC program 337
Comments page 234 understanding 329
Event page 233, 234 variables 330
Meter Reading Details page 234 User Defined Method Copy page 339
Payment page 234 User Defined Methods component
Related Meter Readings page 234 Comment page 335
Statistics page 234, 236 Definition page 335
Track Service and Repairs page 24 Summary page 334
Transaction Defaults page — Physical Inventory User Defined Variables page 332
Control 282, 285
Transaction Edit (AMIFEDIT) program 34
viewing results 36
Transaction Information page 212, 213 V
transaction loader
creating group assets 254 valuations
inserts from Financial Information table insurance information 245
(INTFC_FIN) 602 value added tax (VAT)
inserts from physical A table calculating for asset retirements 401
(INTFC_PHY_A) 604 defaults 404
inserts from physical B table defining for assets 72
(INTFC_PHY_B) 605 locations 403
inserts into Asset Management tables 602 physical nature 403
interface types 606 rounding rules 406
running during conversion 33, 37 variables
using with mass changes 438 creating 332
transaction types VAT See value added tax (VAT)
transfers 274
VAT page — Retire/Reinstate Assets 378, 388, 401
Transfer Operating Lease page 17
Verify Duplicate Serial ID page 25
transfers
Verify Duplicate Tags page 25, 293
between business units 184
Verify Scanned Data page 25
between group assets 257
View Parent Component page 20
child assets 189
voluntary retirements 272
composite assets 274
entering book information 186

682 Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved.
 Index

W
warranties
entering information 240
reporting on 246
What-If Scenarios page 20
What If Depreciation
performing 341
viewing results 343
What If Depreciation page 342
What If Depreciation Results page 343
workflow
approving disposals 415
physical inventory results 297

Y
yearly depreciation
calculating 619

Copyright © 1992, 2009, Oracle and/or its affiliates. All Rights Reserved. 683